initial commit of ebook 13528HEADmain

6 files changed, 29951 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..de20887
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+# Normalize line endings
+* text=auto eol=lf
+
+# Text files
+*.md text
+*.txt text
+*.json text
+*.xml text
+*.htm text
+*.html text
+*.svg text
+
+# Binary files (no diff)
+*.png binary
+*.jpg binary
+*.gif binary
+*.pdf binary
+*.zip binary
+*.bmp binary
+*.midi binary
+*.mp3 binary
diff --git a/13528-0.txt b/13528-0.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5b7255
--- /dev/null
+++ b/13528-0.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14745 @@
+*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 13528 ***
+
+Copyright (C) 1980, 2004 by Walter D. Petrovic.
+
+
+
+			   SCORCHED  EARTH
+		   A Future History of Planet Earth
+
+		      By:  WALTER  D.  PETROVIC
+
+		       walter.petrovic@3web.net
+
+		     (c)   Copyright  1980 + 2004
+
+		    Note from Author:  April 2004
+
+
+This was my first novel committed to paper during my initial year of
+college 1979-80.  I was studying Film Production with the goal to
+becoming a screenwiter/director.
+
+Life rarely allows most of us the opportunity to achieve our life-long
+goals but this did not stop me from pushing-on with my writing.  I
+recently realised that the real joy of writing was not in the money
+and fame that comes with publication but the thrill that comes with
+the appreciation of something that is a monumental undertaking - such
+as, that of writing a book.
+
+I do aspire to be published at some point, but for now I wish to have
+the world-at-large read my works and hopefully to enjoy them.
+
+I only request this one thing from the reader - please drop me an
+email to let me know that you have looked at my work and your honest
+(and critical) opinion of my material.
+
+Please enjoy, and I thank-you.
+
+Walter D. Petrovic
+
+
+
+THE  FORGOTTEN  HISTORY  OF  OUR  WORLD
+
+
+APOCALYPSE - THE BLUE INFINITE
+
+The idea simply was.  The single Spirit had begun what was to be the
+test for its being-its endurance and tolerances.  It was set into
+motion by great hands and the power of will, churning the infinite
+matter and energy and bringing into being the stunning light of a
+living state.  Matter collapsed into itself, separating from chaotic
+waters the vapours, the gases and ice-imploding into a bottomless
+abyss that collected everything into one single focus-and not
+excluding the pureness of the energy itself.
+
+Everything was brought together at one point and at one instant-fire
+and the waves, also.  Everything was made grand and rock hard, held
+together by their infinite natures and limits.
+
+The Universe simply was.  All its heavenly bodies were compelled to
+turn and to make their way into infinite end, while they grew in nature
+and in kind, making their firmament and their gleaming lights to be
+awakened at their first moment of life-their first day.  Time had
+begun, and with its cycles of night and day, seconds and light years,
+stellar light joined the spheres in moments so brief as to deny
+comprehension, in a time that spanned infinite dreams.
+
+Light was life.  With this life, the ages passed into a third order.
+As if a single day had passed twice from awakening, the heralding joys
+of this new-found life had permitted growth to those things named
+leaves and trees-the fruits by which the life to come would consume and
+hitherto live.
+
+Perpetuation . . . assurance by tiny seed that beat with life in a
+harmonious pulse, the genesis of a new life within the ground that
+would grow to feed the firmament with breath and thus tempting more
+life to be.
+
+The further ordered time had lapsed.  In passing as if five thousand,
+thousand years flashed by instantly.  In these times the Universe was
+seen as it reeled and smiled, content with the pleasures of being.
+Freedom had taken its accounting.  Life left the dark waters for the
+light of  land.  Propagating in their kind they were of dual sexes,
+soon to cover the expanse of their terran home.
+
+The Thought knew itself.  The Thought was life.  The Thought prompted
+into Its Being the struggle to survive in the harshness of its new
+awareness and substance.
+
+Flesh came from the earth.  Blood coalesced from the dew of morning
+and eyes that could see the new wonder were carved from the Sun's own
+rays.  Intelligence sprang from the swiftness of the clouds covered by
+the veins and hair, born from earthly grass and breathing with the
+life of the wind's own spirit.  Each substance could feel and find
+meaning for its life.  The flesh heard, the eyes saw and the souls
+could smell the life to its fullest beauty.  The veins of life knew
+the touch of life, and the currents of blood tasted life's
+sweetness. Bones claimed life's stature through endurance while new
+thoughts explored their cravings and their urges.  They knew their
+pleasures and their joys.
+
+Man was the life and death that followed.  The thoughts that served
+him well in understanding his infinite life had set him to prey upon
+his own kind and in falling from his cosmic grace, he found mortality
+through his love for woman.
+
+He cleaved only to her.  He obeyed and honoured only her.  He
+permitted his gift to fail him for a suggestion that there was more to
+life than the bliss of a simple and peaceful being.
+
+There was more than long life and contentment in a world of fruitful
+abundance, to use at their slightest whim.  Yet, all this was to pass
+away from sight when they allowed their manners to fail them.   Whims
+of habit overtook them and tore them from the eternity of the Universe
+and its Grand Thought.   The Grand Thought that no longer would care
+for them, but indeed set them onto a path of struggle for survival.
+
+Impatience reigned on a tiny speck of universal dust.  The Earth
+suffered from that day when curious questions began to jab at its
+Heart, and to tear into the very atoms that insured existence.   Life
+was aware of impending mortality and that life, which called itself
+Intelligent and Humanity, had turned its struggle to live into one of
+greed and self-fulfilment.
+
+Millennia passed, witnessing countless struggles between the
+intelligent human beings who warred over arid and barren parcels of
+land which could be traversed by foot in a fraction of a day.
+
+Love was locked out of the hearts of men, and hate was to ravage the
+civilized. Hate and greed tempted all whom were alive to hurt their
+own kind, and to hurt their stellar home, as well.  Through six
+thousand years, minds and souls searched for truth but turned their
+hearts away, from the few which had come to help them. They allowed
+their violations to stain and bloody their souls.  They carried on as
+if nothing could touch them in life, or in death.
+
+Mankind took command of everything and like maggots devouring rotting
+flesh, grew in knowledge and in material things until the very essence
+of life itself was at their command.
+
+It became an unsure and frightening time in the Earth's history.
+Mankind had now realised that the total destruction of everything that
+they knew, and craved for, could happen within minutes.  It was
+destruction that they, themselves, could cause through the slightest
+whim ruled by hate. Through pangs of anxiety, the Earth itself spewed
+forth fire from its bowels. The land shook and called its children,
+that circled close to her, to come and fall to her bosom and to cry
+with her.
+
+Even the Earth, the mother, waited anxiously for the Idea and the
+Essence to intervene.
+
+
+
+GINN-JULY 2011
+
+
+A MOVEMENT TO FINALITY
+
+The Twentieth Century was ravaged by bloody wars and more people lost
+their lives than in all the wars and all the murders that took place
+since the dawn of history, and the ancient account of the first murder.
+
+Paranoia reigned on the Earth.  Great multitudes scurried about in
+panic searching for shelter and trying to live without substance or
+material things.  Individuals watched the great Nations rise up against
+each other 3/4 pulling in all smaller nations to fight beside them,
+thus perpetuating the global conflict.  Twice were such great wars.
+Many smaller wars were the same, though thoughts in such conflicts were
+suppressed by being called  "police actions!"
+
+Tensions formed between all peoples.
+
+Politics, economics and retarded beliefs set the course for the world
+to crumble.
+
+Latent barbarism that peeked through the veneer of intelligence and
+civilisation was set to push the world to its final conflagration.
+Then, at the verge of bloodshed and misery, nature itself began its
+assault.  Dozens of man named Apollo Asteroids, which circles the
+Earth, had been moving closer and closer over the millennia, unseen by
+the naked eye.    Ignored by the stupid and the intelligent alike,
+these rocks fell to the Earth in great fury, blasting the entire
+surface of the great home.
+
+False prophets cried to the people to repent of their sins, for God had
+come.  They hid themselves in shelters and in mountains afraid of
+mortality, to be punished for being hypocrites while hoarding and
+hiding great wealth for use in later times.
+
+When all was done great cities were laid waste and disease moved across
+the land and seas to visit all people.  A billion individuals perished
+in the cosmic catastrophe.  A billion more dropped dead from the
+diseases that could no longer be controlled.
+
+When normality finally returned those who remained alive united to
+rebuild the planet. People of absolute opposing views on Politics,
+Religion and life in general, let their hate go from them and so began
+civilisation anew.  However, each of the sides still had their own
+future plans and desires.  Soon thereafter everything was rebuilt and
+they resumed in their previous and hateful ways.  The people, called
+Communists, still had cravings to rule the entire world.  Those, called
+peaceful and democratic, were not far from similar aspirations.  In
+utter stupidity, arms were again manufactured for defence.
+
+Trusting no one, the people called 'Americans' resumed in their secret
+building of great subterranean cities across the face of the North
+American Continent.  These were the cities that were conceived and
+under construction since the great destruction of two Japanese cities
+during the period called World War II.  Having been the wealthiest of
+the Earth's nations, the Americans continued with their early nuclear
+war survival plans, designated as "Proposition Blue".  It was this
+proposal that expedited the construction and populating of those cities
+named the Omega Sub-Ground Installations: (O.S.G.I's).
+
+Constructed near more populous areas and connected by underground
+pneumatic travel tubes, each city was designed to host some one
+thousand individuals made up of the chosen elite.  These were the
+scientists, artists and other members from the intellectual community.
+The 1950's through the 1980's saw the building and populating of seven
+O.S.G.I's at the following locations across North America:
+
+                OMEGA 1 - SOUTH:        Near Eldorado, Texas
+
+                OMEGA 2 - NORTH:        Near Burke, South Dakota
+
+                OMEGA 3 - WEST:         Near Pioche, Nevada
+
+                OMEGA 4 - EAST:         Near Toronto, (Canada)
+
+                OMEGA 5 - CENTRAL:      Near Manhattan, Kansas
+
+                OMEGA 6 - ATLANTIC:     Near Atlanta, Georgia
+
+                OMEGA 7 - PACIFIC:      Near Vancouver, (Canada)
+
+
+Greatly endangered in the asteroid disaster of the late Twentieth
+Century, most the cities still survived.  Only two cities were utterly
+destroyed:  OMEGA - 2 and 5.  These cities were amongst America's
+greatest achievements, next to their endeavours in space.  All the
+cities were under strict military control, watching the intellectuals
+and providing them with necessities, to keep them content.
+
+In the first years of the 1990's, however, many of the scientists in
+these cities were made aware that a nuclear war was inevitable.  Unable
+to control their own consciences and knowing that billions would die,
+so that they could live, they rose up against the military and passed
+out of these cities and into the public.    They published a document
+which they called their "Blue Prospectus".  This "Blue Prospectus"
+revealed their government's survival intentions.  With adverse feelings
+towards their respective government, the masses marched on their
+capital demanding equality to enter these, but nothing was
+accomplished.  The solar catastrophe had occurred and the reasons for
+their mass discontent were subsequently forgotten.
+
+By the end of the 1999, just over a full year following the asteroid
+destruction of the Earth's surface, mankind had managed to rebuild
+their cities and start life anew.  Enjoying totally new styles of
+living, no individual was really poor.  The technological advancements
+during that year of peace were astounding and the entire world now
+benefited from them.
+
+New sources of power were discovered following great tectonic upheavals
+caused by the impacting asteroids;  small, crystal-like minerals were
+pushed to the Earth's surface.  Their properties were pure and
+vigorous.  Their radiation became useful for everything imaginable.
+
+Remaining secret, those Americans that survived on the surface and
+those from the O.S.G.I's, converted their power sources to utilise the
+new crystals.  Entire cities were powered by two crystals, no larger
+than walnuts.
+
+Plans were formulated to build colonies in space, beginning with
+orbital stations and finally lunar and Martian colonies.  These
+colonies were to be powered by the new crystals and materials for
+building the colonies would come from the asteroid belt; the very
+origin of the Earth's cataclysm.
+
+Laser instruments, of innovative design and use, were built to take
+advantage of this new crystal power.  Many of these lasers were used
+for medicine, however, and only a few thousand weapons were developed,
+for the police.  The police rarely used them, having been given
+electrostatic guns that inhibited nerve synapses, and in that manner
+had several non-injured reprobates to their list of captured.  The
+laser weapons that were not used by the police were channelled into the
+O.S.G.I's, to be taken care of by the city administrators.
+
+During these years of revived human civilisation and technology, there
+came a movement of great intensity that called for the disarming and
+dismantling of all destructive weaponry around the world.
+
+The Communist nations were prepared to agree with America and its
+allied nations. Although there were internal conflicts within the
+Communist nations, leading to their eventual fall, the governments that
+emerged from the revolutions eventually fulfilled many promises and
+commitments to which they were previously committed.
+
+Both great nations dismantled their arsenals and the Americans remained
+quiet regarding their O.S.G.I's, never recalling those who were
+assigned to live within them.  Not many years following the fall of the
+Communist Nation, called The Soviet Union, another Communist nation
+called China, started to experience similar internal problems.  Young
+people and those wishing to have an easier life for themselves, rallied
+and called for their nation to be more democratic and capitalistic.  By
+the turn of  the Twenty-first Century new borders were drawn all about
+the planet.  New cooperations and friendships were formed, even between
+those people that were considered as past enemies.
+
+Religious societies began to gather strength about the planet, and new
+societies formed daily.  Their influence and power started to influence
+the politics of the nations where they formed and soon many of these
+people were in control of those nations.   Religious dogmatism had
+overtaken the sensibilities of most people that were alive.  The
+polarisation that had formed in religious belief was greater than any
+political ideology.  Fighting had ensued everywhere and lead to another
+great war.
+
+New weapons were produced utilising the new found crystal energy.
+These new weapons were used.
+
+Violence and war waged on.  In the final year, the religious societies
+openly confronted the politically controlled military, everywhere.
+Through subversion, propaganda and assassination, these societies
+panicked the world's population, further forcing the planet's people to
+take sides.
+
+Every group called themselves "The Saviours Of The Earth," believing
+that they were sent by God Himself, to turn the planet into a second
+Eden.
+
+Not a single soul was saved.
+
+Millions died, and many more perished in subsequent plagues and
+famines, which spread throughout the entire world.
+
+The surface of the planet was virtually destroyed.  Only those people
+that had some natural protection, and those who remained in the
+O.S.G.I's survived.
+
+For many centuries the survivors, underground, were put into cryogenic
+suspension to await the day they may walk and live upon a newly healed
+Earth.
+
+
+
+GINN-NOVEMBER 2027
+
+
+THE NEXT AGE:  THE PREDECESSORS
+
+A thick mist encircled the Earth for many years, slowly dissipating as
+it radiated out into space.  The greater portion of the world was
+devastated; a population of billions, reduced to several million
+score.  Once great cities were wiped clean from the face of the
+earth. Those that were spared stood like majestic mountains. With
+time, they also crumbled away, turning into gigantic mounds that were
+loosely held together by rusty girders, brittle concrete and broken
+glass.
+
+Bands of strange-looking humans roamed the face of the land foraging
+for the scarce and much-valued commodities of food and fresh water.
+
+In the years following the deluge, the surface dwelling survivors died
+out from exposure to radiation and to the adverse climactic conditions
+that were inherited from the global fall out.
+
+The progeny of the survivors became strange in appearance and behaviour
+until they all became new forms of humans, evolved from mutants, to
+small hybrid races which soon became as distinct and individual as
+those humans that lived in the late Twentieth Century.  The
+amalgamation of these races found that great tension had formed between
+them, due to their differences in appearances and forms of speech, and
+so they broke away from the main body of humanity and headed for their
+own select areas of the continent.
+
+Many of these new races of humans ventured forth and eventually
+established unique civilisations.  One race went to the extreme western
+part of the North continent.  Everywhere, they found small pockets of
+survivors and conquered them.  They looted their food stores and used
+those people as slaves;  so becoming a feared band of humans that
+resembled upright, and very dark featured, apes.  They called
+themselves the Teniqués.  Those in the east were afraid that the
+Teniqués would begin to move back their way but although they were
+warlike, they stayed put and were soon forgotten.
+
+Concentrated cells of normal humans were still alive.  They were the
+ones who lived in the mountainous regions of the continent and although
+most became larger in size than normal humans, they were the most in
+resemblance to the people living during the Twentieth Century.  They
+were hunters and gatherers, moving from valley to, in both the eastern
+and the western mountains.  These were amongst the first people to be
+conquered by the Teniqués, in their move westward.  In the east, there
+was also a race of perfectly normal looking humans called the Sëdash.
+They were a group of hermaphrodites that were compiled and exiled by
+the rest of human mutants, who disliked them, since they most closely
+resembled the previous normal humans. The hermaphrodites wandered for
+many years until a place to settle was found.  They began to build a
+culture that they based on total
+equality between individuals.
+
+Yet, the Sëdash soon became intolerant to any other forms of human.
+They developed a belief that they were divinely chosen to be "superior
+and perfect,"  and so they enslaved and mistreated those who happened
+to trespass on their city boundaries.  For mating, only the true
+hermaphrodites were allowed to propagate.  After several generations of
+regulated breeding, a pure-bred race of hermaphrodites was formed.
+
+There was another similar band of humans in the eastern part of the
+northern Continent.  They called themselves the Palatkans.  Their
+appearance was much like that of lepers.  They had segregated
+themselves from the main stream years before the great cataclysm.  They
+congregated in long strips of semi-fertile land on the floor of lengthy
+canyons.
+
+Following several generations of their offspring, they bore a race of
+ugly and canker-covered beings that developed a culture of cannibalism.
+
+They believed that all the other humans were left on Earth for them to
+sacrifice to their gods, then to feast.  They were aware of a life
+force that permeated everything and that was significantly concentrated
+within the flesh of humans.
+
+Many such bands of human beings were alive, over the entire face of the
+Earth.  Most of these peoples contained and confined themselves within
+special areas of land and rarely ventured out.
+
+
+Six centuries passed since the cataclysm.
+
+Lack of productivity and raw stock caused the remaining human people to
+further mutate into odd looking things.  Civilisation had also
+regressed into a primitive form.  Much of the Earth reverted into the
+appearance of the primitive and the primordial, awaiting the moment to
+be reborn.
+
+The Earth was not alone in its anxiety for rebirth.  There were nearly
+one quarter of a million true humans that waited, also, to be reborn
+craving to, once more, walk the mother Earth's surface, and to begin
+life anew.  In six hundred years of waiting, the population of the
+Omega SubGround Installations grew.  To extend the food and water
+rations, the major part of the personnel was placed in cryogenic
+suspension vaults upon attaining the age of thirty-five.
+
+Most, of age, personnel stayed to be suspended in animation but some
+were granted the permission to leave the cities and try to reestablish
+life wherever they could find hospitable environments.  Contact was not
+kept with those who had left. Only on hearsay did anyone know how these
+people fared.
+
+Many headed towards the eastern shoes where they successfully took up
+oceanic livelihoods, and so began the city, later to be called,
+Besten.  Others made their way to the mountains and met up with other
+bands of self-exiled people. They took to herding goats, and sheep;
+and whatever other animals that were left alive, they could catch to
+domesticate.
+
+The people took to catching and taming the Continent's greatest animal
+mutations: gigantic eagles that were as high as trees.  These people
+learned to fly them and use them as beasts of burden.  These agrarian
+peoples were called the Krolalins and the Virunese.
+
+The time had come, in the O.S.G.I's, where all those people in
+cryogenics were awakened. They organized into groups of thousands then
+left to set up individual and distinct villages, towns and cities.
+
+The Earth was becoming clean again.  Air and water sparkled with
+freshness and the entire world returned to green.
+
+The only people to stay in the O.S.G.I's were the scientists, carrying
+on with their work (in every field), as it was done in the Twentieth
+Century.  With those that left and built cities, these cities adapted
+to a simpler way of life and craved not to progress much in their
+technology.  They did not crave to progress very much in their
+technology.  They did not want the responsibilities that went with
+having technology.  They found that they were just as happy without it,
+and their attitudes were civilised enough to accept and give their
+blessings to those still utilising the ancient ways.  By 2500 C.E.,
+many of the O.S.G.I's were back to a comfortable size of around four
+hundred people.  Some O.S.G.I's lost people so readily and quickly,
+that a few had become abandoned and forgotten.
+
+All those who left the cities tried to track down some of their old
+comrades, heading in the direction of newly established settlements and
+subsequently joining with some of them.
+
+The surface cities began to grow and the O.S.G.I's were beginning to be
+emptied, with only a few hundred older people remaining in some of them.
+
+In those Omega cities, that were still densely populated, power
+struggles often took place. Some of these people who became the
+leaders, by force or otherwise, set up a form if thought that denied
+the life and events of the Twentieth Century.  Some even went as far as
+stating that the Twentieth Century never happened, and so proclaimed
+themselves as Kings, Queens and other types of monarchials because they
+were descended from the intellectuals who "made the world" what it was.
+ During this period, everyone that was a descendant of these people was
+given the title "BLUE" -- from the old Proposition Blue code since they
+were from the Great Line of Knowledge.
+
+There were men, in the BLUE, who disagreed with the idea that the
+Twentieth Century never happened, and long debates were engaged to
+discuss it.
+
+These debates and periodic skirmishes were the original cause for the
+initial emigration from the cities. Similar events sparked moves in
+each of the Omega S.G.I's.
+
+Reginald Jones was a BLUE who opposed the "never happened" dogma, and
+his life was, at several times, threatened.
+
+Reginald was suppressed from speaking in the city parliament and seeing
+that he lacked any other option, he removed himself from politics and
+searched for a wife.
+
+He wasn't successful, though, since his public image had made women
+avoid him, for fear of being ridiculed.  As it had happened, many
+centuries and aeons ago, a man had been denied comfort for-want-of a
+fundamental principle way of thought. Reginald became lonely.
+
+Then in 2542 C.E., Reginald found a baby boy abandoned in a genetics
+lab when he was going to work.  Announcements were made for the parents
+to take the boy back but soon it was found that the two teenagers
+responsible for the child had run away from the OMEGA 4 EAST City.
+
+They were never found and Reginald's need for companionship made him
+adopt the child and so he became responsible for him. He gave him the
+name of Hosea, who grew up to be a brilliant man and a great political
+leader in the OMEGA 4 EAST City.
+
+Hosea became the most powerful man in the city's parliament, keeping
+tensions at bay, but allowing the people to think freely.  He had
+allowed debates to continue, concerning the existence of the Twentieth
+Century and he had, himself, held to the belief that there was a
+civilisation that they had descended from.  He had computer disks and
+video tapes, books and photographs all showing the life as it was in
+the ancient past.  This was proof.  It was proof that could never be
+used but Hosea was the kind of man that was eager to see what
+conclusions would be brought by his colleagues by just using logical
+reasoning.
+
+A conclusion, of sorts, had been found.  It was a forced conclusion and
+had occurred at a time the people of the city were looking for some
+real direction.
+
+Hosea had been electrocuted at age of ninety-six, while he was trying
+to make improvements on solar-electric power sources.  He was well
+known for this pursuit within his city.
+
+Hosea's first son was named Cano and when he was young he exhibited a
+strange spiritual aura and it was an unanimous decision, by the city
+fathers, to have him trained at the Monastery of St. Tobias, outside
+the city.
+
+In 2580 C.E., at eighteen years of age, Cano completed his studies of
+religious history, and other related topics, at the monastery.  He
+became a spiritual healer and a leader, and he later changed his name
+to Canon Di'Vaticanus.
+
+He was a well-liked man, at first, who seemed stable and secure
+considering that his mother, Hosea's first wife Anna, deserted both of
+them when Cano was only twelve.
+
+She had travelled to BanGor where she had become the High Priestess of
+the Cults, since she was able to endure the rains, without allowing
+herself to fornicate.  All her daughter-descendants replaced her as the
+High Priestess.  Anna was an ecologist while at the OMEGA 4 East City
+and she had developed a counter-agent that let her and whomever else
+took the drug, capable of tolerating being caught in the rain without
+having instantly become sexually deranged.
+
+In 2600 C.E., Hosea married his fourth wife (having lost both his
+second and third to early death).  Her name was Ruth and she was
+regarded as the best in her field of Aging research.  In fact, in the
+same year of their marriage, Ruth had made a break-through by
+perfecting a drug that retarded the ageing process.
+
+The first human to test the drug was Hosea when he became mortally ill
+and with the taking of the drug he miraculously recovered.
+
+The drug was primarily kept for those in the Line of Knowledge but Ruth
+had sold some to other people in the city for certain favours and
+services.
+
+In 2601 C.E. Ruth bore Hosea's second son named Gavin.
+ During the same period when Ruth was giving birth, Canon spoke out
+against the age retardant drug calling it "evil", and in late of the
+same year, Canon disappeared with a stock supply of the developed drug.
+
+A few years later, Ruth was imprisoned by Hosea for infidelity and he
+took her formula away from her.  When Gavin turned sixteen, he left the
+OMEGA 4 EAST City and travelled to the southernmost part of the
+continent where three huge highlands surrounded a lush valley that was
+the city of Pomperaque, in Lower Phoride.  He made his home on the
+highest mountain and changed his name to the name of the mountain and
+became, for the city of Pomperaque, a great oracle.  A seer and a
+prophet whose visions always came to pass.  He never seemed to die or
+grow old; he never had a wife or children, abstaining from all sexual
+contact.  He kept himself pure in mind and body, while he prayed to the
+one great Living God, to which the majority of Twentieth Century man
+prayed.
+
+The years passed, then in 2630 C.E., Hosea married his fifth and final
+wife, Margaret, who in 2635 C.E., gave birth to twins, Richalé and
+Dioneza.
+
+The following year, Margaret died trying to give birth to a premature
+baby that also died, and two years after that, Hosea was killed in an
+electrical mishap.  During the subsequent years, the twins grew and
+each had entered their own peculiar studies.  Dioneza studied telepathy
+and when she turned fifteen she was asked to join the OMEGA operations
+Council as a reward for her progress, unsurpassed by anyone of her age.
+She, like Hosea, kept the title "BLUE" from her name.
+
+When Dioneza received her appointment to the council, the Canon
+Di'Vaticanus returned from his forty-nine year trek in the wilderness
+of the Northern Continent.
+
+He was eighty-eight years old but he only looked like he was
+approaching forty.  He met his pretty half-sister and immediately began
+having sexual designs on her, wanting to procreate with her and to have
+her carry out many of his strange requests.
+
+With her telepathic ability, she saw into his mind and knew exactly
+what kind of a man he was.  She saw in his mind the memories of the
+forty-nine years that he spent away from Omega 4 EAST city.  She had
+seen that he studied ancient prophesies and obtained his fulfilment
+from history but she also saw the destruction of his spirit with his
+fall into accepting all forms of depravity, especially those of a
+sexual nature.  She had seen his encounters with men, women, children,
+animals and all manner of mutated freaks -- all in his attempts to
+reach total spiritual awareness.  After Dioneza had asked a friend to
+be her protector, the Canon turned to hating her and cursed her with a
+violent death.  He had no problems finding other diversions. Young
+companions he desired came to do his bidding, and soon he had the young
+Janis Topler beside him, wherever he went.
+
+Janis soon became pregnant with his child and eventually gave birth to
+him in mid-2651 C.E.
+
+Soon, thereafter, Janis was banished from the city and Canon took the
+boy into his care, baptising him as Canis Topler.  In late of that year
+the Abbess Mariot, from the Abbey of Our Holy Virgins, brought to Omega
+4 EAST an eleven year old girl, with a story about finding her as a
+baby during a sojourn at a distant Hermitage.   It was a beautiful baby
+girl, wrapped in elegant and costly cloth, and resting within a cradle
+overlaid in gold.
+
+She had named the child, Sunshine, since there was the glow and light
+of life which shone from the child's face.  She now had brought the
+girl to the city to have the child tested.
+
+It was a brilliant child.  She could not speak, however, and this
+bothered the Abbess Mariot.   She also wanted an explanation for the
+child's speedy growth.  At eleven years of age, the child already had
+the appearance of a full grown woman.
+
+Canon lusted after her.
+
+Soon, Sunshine gave birth to the Canon's son.  He was called Daey and
+he proclaimed the boy as the long-awaited Saviour.  He pronounced that
+the new promised millennium had finally begun.  This was the new age of
+humanity; the year he called "ONE".
+
+Canon compiled a book of Laws that he had told everyone was given to
+him by the great God, Himself.  He called the book "The Canon's Laws",
+and announced that with his receipt of this book, that all which had
+occurred in the "pre-history", had never happened:
+
+         "The Past is nonexistent.  This is never to be questioned,
+          and no investigation is permitted to be conducted, in pursuit
+          of the question of history.  History begins with "ONE".
+          Only that which, henceforth, occurs from the year ONE will be
+          recognised as history.  Death, by torture, is the punishment
+          for this Law's transgression."     
+
+                                                        (CANON 3:18)
+
+
+This passage was of the first of Canon's Laws: These Laws, to be
+followed to the letter, were to be punishable upon the fear of the
+most imaginable painful torture.  No Law was more, important than that
+of the CANON.  All were the Prime Law, and all punishment was
+eventual, excruciating, death.  As the child, Daey, was reaching his
+first year of age, Canon sacrificed the most beautiful and the most
+precious of his possessions, in honour of the child's birth.  This
+most precious possession was the child's own mother, Sunshine.  In the
+weeks that followed, the child weakened and also died, and the death
+was kept from the people.  There was a great fear that the population
+may panic if they were to hear that their "Saviour" had died, while
+still in infancy.
+
+While Dioneza studied telepathy and tried to avoid Canon, her twin
+brother, Richalé, studied many subjects but he mainly concentrated on
+the forbidden topic: History.
+
+Richalé wanted to compile facts to prove, without doubt, Canon's claims
+to creating the Universe, the Earth, and all of existence.
+
+In 2660 C.E. Dioneza had found repulsion towards all men, and although
+she had yearned for children, she wanted no man to bed with her.
+
+Due to her status, in the city, she was given the permission to be
+artificially inseminated from her choice of genes, preserved from the
+time of Omega 4 - EAST's construction.   She had chosen a sample which
+was labelled as "David Sannstein: April 1995".   The city's parliament
+had overwhelmingly accepted her choice and granted her the permission
+that was necessary, for her to use the sample.   All the records that
+were kept in the gene bank were obviously ancient.   From what was
+understood contained within the ancient records, David Sannstein was an
+Engineer, some 650 years ago.  This was several hundred years before
+"ONE".
+
+Dioneza presented her brother with this fact but nothing ever came of
+this knowledge.
+
+Richalé married a girl that he had studied with, at the beginning of
+the same year that Dioneza was artificially inseminated.
+
+Months before Dioneza's birth to Dorin, Richalé and his lovely wife,
+Dianna, had quadruplets.
+
+Just after Dioneza bore Dorin, Richalé left the Omega 4 - EAST City,
+with Dianna and his children: Roman, Daphne, Tatum and Wind. They
+journeyed for the city of Besten, on the Eastern seaboard of the
+continent.  During this century few of the O.S.G.I's were still
+inhabited.  All but the Omega 4 - EAST city and the Omega 7 - PACIFIC
+city were abandoned and were utterly forgotten.
+
+In the East, Canon's personal religion had subdued the people's belief
+and knowledge, and everyone in the Omega 4 - EAST city began to think
+that their city was nothing more than a temple built to Canon.
+
+There were a few citizens that opposed Canon's Laws and some of these
+were publicly tortured to death, but some had escaped the wrath of, the
+now-hated, Canon.
+
+Many people, dissatisfied with Canon's rules fled the cities to settle
+in the small villages and towns that dotted the land.  Canon, however,
+sent emissaries to all of these surface towns and cities, and soon they
+began to rule over them.  Most of these places submitted to the ways
+that Canon had forced upon them.  Only Besten kept up with the
+rebellious stand against the Canon, but soon, only underground cells of
+rebels fought the new rule.
+
+Richalé's daughter Daphne became involved with the rebel leader
+Montgomery Bartlett and married him.  Later, the Bartlett line was to
+become the strongest in Besten.
+
+Dioneza had avoided execution by the Canon, her half-brother since she
+had the favour of the city parliament and since she had told Canon that
+if she dies, her protector would surely kill him.
+
+Canon did not have her killed, yet he had prevented her from ever
+speaking in public by having his men begin riots whenever she called a
+public audience.
+
+In 2676 C.E., her son Dorin, who was now fifteen years of age, had
+illicitly procreated with a thirteen year old called Bernice.  Soon
+after the birth of Martin, however, Dioneza had the two youngsters
+married and they had no more children.
+
+At seventeen years of age, Bernice was put into cryogenic suspension
+when it was discovered that she had developed a terminal blood disease.
+
+That same year, Martin, who was four years old, wad discovered to be a
+genius and Dioneza took to training him in the ways of biology and true
+history.  To Canon's disapproval, Martin began to delve into the study
+of the real past, utilizing Dioneza's computer library.
+
+In 2683 C.E., Dorin made a break-through in light energy emission and
+began to improve the old police stun weapons, enabling them to utilize
+a laser capability, as well.  This study also infuriated the Canon but
+he did nothing.
+
+Just after Dorin's break-through, Dioneza, who was now forty-eight, was
+raped and brutally murdered by Canon's bastard son, Canis Topler.
+
+When Martin was nineteen, in 2695 C.E., he became a top-ranking
+scientist in the areas of anthropology and archaeology, after
+graduating from Advanced Technical Training in the Sciences. Martin
+headed an archaeological expedition to Alugean and there uncovered a
+huge computer library complex.  He ordered his team to keep the find
+secret from anyone at the Omega 4 - EAST city, in the event Canon was
+to find out and have the library destroyed.
+
+Martin received the title of "Blue" after his name, because of his
+great intellect and he did not abstain from using it.
+
+Four years after his discovery, Canon disappeared and his Monks
+announced to everyone that they saw him turn into a being of light and
+that he ascended to heaven in a golden chariot.
+
+Canon Di'Vaticanus was declared a God and the monk that was his second,
+named himself the ArchBishop.  His name was Morgan.
+
+Morgan had the same powers as the Canon Di'Vaticanus and only answered
+to the Canon, for his decisions.
+
+
+Martin was married three times in his life, though he only had children
+with his second and third wives.
+
+With his second wife, Lilian, he had a son called Carter and with his
+third wife, Joan, had triplets: Liona, Aria and Thirst.
+
+In 2760 C.E., Carter went to Alugean, following his father's,
+directions and found the computer library.  He stayed there for several
+years and studied, alone.  Liona, Aria and Thirst left the Omega 4 -
+EAST city for BanGor when they were twenty-three, so that they could
+learn the ways of the world, but they never survived.  Only one of the
+three reached BanGor, having met up with a wandering tribe of Teniqués.
+ Only Liona, made pregnant by a Teniqués, arrived in BanGor and was
+granted an act of abortion by the High Priestess (the great, great
+granddaughter of Hosea Jones's first wife, Anna).
+
+In 2780 C.E., Carter left Alugean and wandered about the continent,
+going through Laurentine and then through BanGor in 2785 C.E., where he
+sojourned for a short time.  He represented himself to the High
+Priestess Lucaea (the third generation granddaughter of Anna), with
+whom he became close and eventually sexually coupled, unaware of their
+near relation by blood.
+
+In 2801 C.E., they produced Smith and before she exiled Carter from
+BanGor, she charmed from him a quantity of the youth drug  -- the
+formula which was passed down to him through his father.
+
+In his exile, Carter went to Virune where he later met and married his
+first wife, Dee'inth, who was seventeen.   Carter was seventy-four at
+his first marriage, but he only resembled a man of twenty-four, having
+taken the youth drug for so long and he manufactured more after Lucaea
+took his supply away.  There, he became a most important man,
+organising and turning the city into a powerful city state.
+
+Jessuum Benitar came down off the mountain and told Carter that they
+were related, that both came from the loins of Hosea Jones.  Jessuum
+told Carter that his real name was Gavin Jones, the son of Hosea; the
+fourth generation great-uncle to Carter.
+
+Jessuum told Carter that Lucaea was his relative, as well, and that
+Smith was a product of an incestuous coupling.
+
+When Carter heard this, he was determined to get Smith back.  In 2817
+C.E., Pomperaque split in two, and was engaged in a civil war.
+Dee'inth and Carter's son, Calvin, left for Virune.
+
+A few years later, Carter unified and strengthened Pomperaque, and then
+proceeded to invade BanGor.
+
+Carter executed the already dying Lucaea and Smith came along
+willingly, back to Pomperaque.
+
+Dee'inth and Calvin were sent for in 2822 C.E., but they refused to
+come.  Dee'inth had married again, to a man called Balfour (who had a
+grown son called Empal).
+
+Two years later, carter married his second wife Freida Dilaano, who had
+a daughter Miri.  Carter and Freida had no children, and after a year
+of marriage, Smith took her daughter Miri as his wife, and they went to
+the Virgin Mountains for their honeymoon.
+
+Several years of peace in Pomperaque went by and in 2900 C.E., Carter
+died.  Soon after Carter's death, Smith headed a campaign to unite
+Lower Phoride and in short of a decade, succeeded.
+
+In 3001 C.E., Smith and Miri went on a vacation to the Virgin
+Mountains, while she was pregnant with their first child.
+
+They were both fairly aged in years, although their physical and mental
+make-up was still fairly young due to the age retardant drug which was
+passed down to them.  Smith was one hundred ninety-eight and Miri was
+one hundred ninety-four, but both looked to be only in their
+mid-thirties.
+
+On their return, Miri had experienced the pains and when they rested,
+one afternoon, she gave birth to Smith's first son, Manguino.
+
+During the birth, Smith was walking about in the woods, following the
+distant crying sounds of a baby.  He soon found it.  It was a baby boy,
+swaddled in a sackcloth and left in the skull of a lion, by small
+stream.*
+
+
+  So it happened that Smith gave the child the name, Brook Scullion-Blue
+  (because of the circumstances surrounded the foundling).  *The baby
+  was left there by the great, great-grandson of Wind Jones (one of
+  Richal's daughters). Guiness, and his wife Joanne, while trying to
+  escape from a band of Plains slave traders, left their baby to Fate's
+  caring heart and Smith was led to it.
+
+                                     Testament of Ginn 10:17
+
+
+Miri accepted Smith's request to adopt it as their own, since it was
+similar in age to their own first born, Manguino.
+
+When Smith returned to Pomperaque, Jessuum Benitar once again came down
+from the mountain and revealed to Smith who the child really was.
+
+Since the foundling was from the same line as Smith, Smith regarded it
+as a son, as equal to that which had come from his own flesh.
+
+
+At his deathbed, Smith gave his blessings and the land to both of his
+sons to rule.
+
+A promise was made by both sons, to rule the land with a strong hand
+and a kind heart, and they received Smith's blessings of material and
+spiritual power.
+
+The birthright and the sceptre continued with the BLUE.
+
+
+                "... and it came to pass, that in a time,
+                one was chosen as the one favourite to live
+                with love, whilst the other died; and in the
+                eyes of God"   
+                                        PILLARS 93: A 11
+
+
+PART  I:        THE  SCORCHED  EARTH
+
+
+CHAPTER  ONE
+
+Another day ended.  Sol, once again, retired its eternal radiance from
+man, as it has in its never-ending cycles of dawns and dusks, witnessed
+by all the generations.  In its greatness, it survived all of Terra's
+hardships and afflictions and it was a living monument to forever.
+
+No one seemed to look to it for comfort any more.  The faces of women
+and children didn't reflect its brilliance, since no one had reverence
+for its good any more. It was a mindless disregard that was sustained
+and nurtured by the generations of man that survived.  For almost a
+millennia they forced themselves into ignorance and then blamed it on
+the chaotic destructions that scorched the earth and that burned the
+human spirit.  Nowhere, it seemed, was there anyone of power willing to
+point-out a way to betterment.
+
+Trust knew not any man who was strong enough to deny the utter
+discontent that trembled in the hearts of men without freedom.  To
+almost every man, innately loomed a feeling of utter hopelessness.
+
+
+In a dark room of the Blue Mountain, atop Bimini Hill, sat a
+middle-aged man of high station.  He was a man richly endowed with
+great wealth, majesty and power, and he held the people's respect.
+This man had taken pride in his accomplishments but he had become
+saddened by his inability to present himself to the citizens in the way
+that they revered him; as living strength.
+
+Brook had long since known the problems of the noble land in which he
+lived and reigned.  He pondered its past and its future while he
+aimlessly stared out of the window at the warming sunset.  In his mind
+flashed a memory of an old writing that expressed in an awesome detail
+the fear and the agony of oppression that the whole world must have
+felt in the final days, when the prophesied great abolition had come to
+pass.
+
+Entranced, his thoughts were prolonged as he sat and watched the sun
+disappear into the earth; its light casting a reddish hue over his
+light beard and reflected cooly from his vacant blue eyes.
+
+His mind embraced time.  It drifted along its tenses, all at once, as
+if they were all merged into one music; a music that played
+continually, along with the troubled voices that cried, only to him,
+for help.
+
+Caught up within his own thoughts, he payed little attention to the
+servant boy that set a drink on the table by his chair.
+
+Without a word the boy flamed the gas torches and the room no longer
+remained dark.  Quickly, he left the room.
+
+"The sun was resting," thought Brook, as he reached for the chalice of
+ale beside him.
+
+He took a drink and the ale soothed his soddy thirst, and his parched
+manner, much like the milk of a mother's milken breast soothes a
+distressed babe, thus letting it sleep.   But Brook could not sleep.
+
+Brook waited for the moon and he finally welcomed its cool radiance at
+midnight when he saw it rise over the junipers.  Its silvery light
+reflected its beauty off the scanty layers of the farming terraces.
+
+Brook's eyes were fixed on the view outside his window.  He tried to
+envision himself living a thousand years ago gazing out of the same
+window, marvelling at the sights that may have been there.  In his
+heart, he recited a badly remembered poem that was written just prior
+to the War of Wars:
+
+                A torn heart dying within the mind
+                A failure to the reckonings  --
+                Yesterdays, todays and tomorrows."
+
+He lifted the palms of his hands to his sweaty face desperately trying
+to keep from screaming out his tortured agonies.  He believed that he
+couldn't tell a soul about the truth concerning the past.  He knew that
+the Law was explicit:
+
+                "The Past is non-existent.  This is never to be
+                 questioned, and no investigation is permitted to
+                 be conducted, in pursuit of the question of history.
+                 History begins with "ONE".  Only that which,
+                 henceforth, occurs from the year ONE will be
+                 recognised as history.  Death, by torture, is
+                 the punishment for this Law's transgression."
+                                                        (CANON 3:18)
+
+
+He turned his eyes away from the window and rose out of his chair.  He
+slowly paced to a large cabinet beside the huge entrance doors.  From
+around his neck, he brought forth a key and placed it into the slot of
+the cabinet door then slowly opened it.  Inside this cabinet Brook
+kept, what he liked to call,  "his gadgets."  There were rows of
+buttons glowing like coloured embers. Brook applied pressure to several
+of the buttons.
+
+Quickly, long drapes on the far wall rolled away and revealed a blank,
+white, wall that soon began to produce pictures that moved like life
+itself.
+
+The images were of fire and of raging destruction.  There were scenes
+of huge cities that stood majestically on the horizon one moment, then
+falling into mountainous piles of rubble, the next.  More pictures
+showed fat people, conspiracies, death and misunderstandings.  Every
+kind of unimaginable horror played upon the wall.
+
+Brook sighed to himself, as he remembered the rest of the poem:
+
+                        "His music ends ...
+                         His silence devours his soul,
+                         Caging his ever-diminishing days
+                         In a way that any man could lose
+                         His assurance in himself,
+                         And 'why?' he is!"
+
+Then he slowly repeated to himself the words that were the Law:
+"The Past is non-existent", but he couldn't allow himself to believe
+this, especially with the truth revealing itself in front of him, at
+this moment.
+
+
+He felt a cold tightness within his chest when he let himself think
+about his ancestors and the way that they destroyed themselves.  Their
+greed for wealth and their crazed megalomania was the cause for the
+deaths of millions.  He saw these men die, in the pictures that
+played-out right before his eyes.  Once more he slowly breathed out the
+words:  "The past is non-existent."
+
+He cautiously looked around so that no one would hear him, if only by
+chance, as they passed in the hallway.
+
+He remained in private thought.
+
+He sat back down in his chair and closely watched the horrific and
+colourful images that danced on the wall.  "How can a truth be hidden
+for a thousand years?"  he wondered.  "For a thousand years no one has
+even imagined that the very fabric of life itself, had nearly become
+death for every living thing beneath the sun."  He looked at the fiery
+scourge projected onto the wall, then lowered his head and pondered
+heavily. How could he tell his people in Phoride, the truth about the
+past.  That the knowledge about it was subdued by fanatic religious
+rulers, in their attempt to subjugate total control over them.  Fear
+for the Divine Punishment made them surrender their faith and submit to
+the worship of a handful of man, as their gods.
+
+Brook had long been a powerful man.  He was one from the Great Line of
+Knowledge, yet he wasn't like most of those other men.  In his heart he
+heard the multitudes of voices that screamed and cried out their pleas
+to him, to reveal the truth and thus lift the burdens from their backs
+and let them live in peace.
+
+His soul embraced everything that he knew was right and to himself, he
+nodded an agreement.  The time had come to be strong again and to no
+longer sit idly by and watch evil, as it has its own way in his land.
+
+
+He moved back in his chair when he heard the sounds of the Monastic
+Guard, marching in the city square and the painful screams of men and
+women, that echoed between the buildings and out towards the hills.
+Brook knew that these people were being blasted by with the
+lightning-like bolts from the Guard's electrophoric weapons.
+
+His strong and gentle hands slowly rose to his face as he sank down
+into his chair.  He set his elbows on his knees and he cleaved to the
+thoughts within his mind, trying to force himself to remain in the
+deepest meditation.  He felt the hours pass, until dreams soon began to
+visit him, making him lose himself and his worries to the mask of the
+night.  With the coming of his last conscious breath before sleep, he
+recalled some of the words that his father said to him, upon his
+deathbed.
+
+"Brook, my son ... do not let the land become troubled. Don't be afraid
+to fight because the horrifying torments of war can become a tool that
+may prevent future afflictions."
+
+Brook was asleep and everything in the room was left unveiled for any
+eye to see.  Although the pictures on the wall had ceased, everything
+was left in open view.  Each thing presented a danger to Brook's rule
+and power.
+
+The cool breezed night soared into dawn's amber glory.  The sun slowly
+began to illuminate the room and a robed figure carefully crept in,
+much in the manner of a thief, yet it didn't take a thing.  It had
+moved softly and with purpose towards the white wall, where it drew the
+drapes shut.  Then it moved towards the cabinet where it closed its
+doors with a faint click, and again left the room in much the same
+manner as it had entered.
+
+The sky was cloudless and the sun warmed the land with its radiation.
+The sparrows outside the window chirped their hellos, while they basked
+in that life giving light, before they took to flight for the day.
+
+
+Boy, the servant, carefully walked into the room and looked about in
+wonder; this was his usual facial expression, before he drew on enough
+courage to wake his lord Brook.  He carefully delivered a pewter basin
+full of water, for his master's morning washing.
+
+He called to Brook several times in a meek tone but with no response.
+Moving closer, and touched his master's forearm, again calling Brook's
+name.  This time, however, the boy called in a much louder and
+demanding tone of voice.
+
+Brook quickly stirred from his deep sleep and for several moments just
+stared at the boy with an indifference that somehow seemed to be forced
+from himself.
+
+Brook cleared his throat and sat up in his chair.  He prepared himself
+to play the Lord once again, but on this day he had decided, that the
+long and horrible game would come to an end and that he would truly be
+master, as it was his right.
+
+He sat up in his chair and in his usual manner coughed a few times
+before he spoke.  Boy stepped back a bit when Brook coughed but he
+quickly returned to him, and slightly bowed his head to him.
+
+Brook coughed once again then took a deep breath as he looked about the
+room then back at the boy.
+
+"What is this call, Boy?" boomed Brook.
+
+"Pardon, Sir, but the lady had asked me to wake you." answered Boy.  "I
+have brought water to wash the sleep from your eyes."  He lifted the
+basin up to Brook where, after a moment he splashed the scented water
+up into his face then dried himself with the towel that hung over Boy's
+arm.  "Your wish -- my Lord!" uttered the boy, obediently leaving
+Brook's presence as the Lady entered the room.  She carried a large cup
+and as Boy passed her she smiled at him and told him that he could go
+into the garden until he was needed again.  He smiled in reply and
+thanked her, then hurried away.
+
+Lady Dearborne was in a happy mood.  She smiled warmly at her husband
+as she approached him with the cup full of broth.  She extended to him
+her fair hand and when in reach, he took it gently into his own and
+guided her to his side.  Her smile beamed as she bowed to him then sat
+down on the floor by his feet.   She gently placed her head against his
+knee after giving him his broth.  He drank it and sighed, and stroked
+her hand as she hummed a lovely tune for him.
+
+He looked at her, taking in all her beauty, regarding her many years of
+love and loyalty with much pride.  He believed that no man on Earth, in
+the past, present, or likely to in the future, felt as he does.
+
+Dearborne was a vibrant woman, twenty-nine years of age, with beauty
+unsurpassed by any other in Phoride and the surrounding kingdoms.  Her
+long brown hair ended in curly locks that fell in front of her and that
+decorated her creamy neck and shoulders, enhancing the fair, light
+smoothness of her bosom, which emerged from her low cut gown like the
+pinkish eggs of the great Kenttitian Eagle.  Her totality glistened
+like the polished marble god-statues from Laurentine.
+
+When she spoke, her voice was reminiscent of a loon gliding over still
+water, during an early morning mist.  Her words displayed generations
+of knowledge which she had taken to her heart and mind, over her
+seemingly few but happy years of life, with her Lord Brook.
+
+She ceased her humming as she ran her hand across her husband's calf.
+With affection, he returned the caresses to his love; his hand gently
+rubbing across her silky hair.
+
+She spoke without looking up at him or breaking the rhythm of her
+strokes.
+
+"You were not to bed, again, last night.  I was worried and came down
+here to call you.  You were asleep.  I didn't want to disturb you  --
+but it doesn't matter." she said, then she looked up at him and smiled.
+"I know that you were not keeping yourself apart from me."  Brook moved
+his hand to her glowing face, stroked it and smiled at her. He gave her
+a longing kiss.
+
+"I'm sorry, my sweet." he finally said as he helped her up off the
+floor and onto his lap.  He wrapped his arms around her waist and she
+put hers about his neck.  They kissed one another, and held it for the
+longest time.  "Did you close the drapes over the wall, and shut my
+cabinet door?" he asked her.
+
+"Yes!" she answered loyally and put her head on his shoulder.
+
+"You've done that so many times, and yet you have never asked me
+anything about their nature.  Somehow you seem to know they should not
+stay exposed, for the random eye to see!"
+
+"It's not my privilege to question what you do, or why you do it. My
+place is here, at your feet, my love!" she told him in a voice that
+assured him of her potent and loyal love.
+
+Brook kissed her hand.
+
+"No, my love! Your place is not at my feet, but at my side.  Even so,
+my place is your place.  It has always been and always will be.  I love
+you, Dearborne!"
+
+"And I love you, my dearest Brook!" she responded and his trembling
+heart was calmed by the tranquillizing inflections in her song-like
+voice.
+
+An hour passed by as they sat together.  Dearborne was on Brook's lap.
+Neither one said very much of anything to the other.  Only in touches,
+kisses and embraces, and the volumes of thought that passed between
+them, did they say anything.
+
+They kissed each other again and she turned her body to converse with
+him more directly.  She told him that the ArchBishop sent a messenger
+earlier in the morning before he was awake, with a request that she
+would try to get him to the Cathedral, to speak with him.
+
+"The ArchBishop," she told him,  "wonders why you haven't answered his
+calls to a conference, earlier.  It's been weeks since he asked you to
+the cathedral.  This morning he sent word, to me, to persuade you to
+see him."
+
+Brook instantly became disturbed and let her off his lap.  He stood up
+and slowly walked over to the window.  After a few moments of silence
+he turned to her and in a loud, angry, voice spoke his mind.
+
+"I do not entertain business with such a man.  I hold no men like him,
+in regard, as friends _ or anything else.   I shall not go to him, from
+my own will, and if he cannot move his bulbous body to come here, I
+will not exert myself for him."  Brook's voice echoed about the stone
+room, its bass quality full of contempt and hate.  Then he noticed that
+he had frightened her, because her face became drawn and startled.
+After a moment, she spoke in an uneasy manner.
+
+"My love, that ... that's not proper.  The ArchBishop cannot be treated
+like that ... He's the --"
+
+Brook quickly stepped towards her and put his hands on her upper arms,
+interrupting her train of thought.
+
+"-- He's the biggest hypocrite that has ever lived.  He's a
+megalomaniac who has always taken advantage of these people in Phoride.
+ Yet, I have stood by and watched it, and allowed it.  What's to become
+of it all?"
+
+He dropped his hands from her arms and embraced her.  Then, in a
+breathless whisper, while his eyes were closed, committed himself to
+subdue the powers that the ArchBishop thought he had under his
+command.Dearborne, worried and confused by her husband's quickly
+changing moods, held him closely to herself.
+
+"What is wrong, Brook?  I feel like something severe bothers you.  Tell
+me what trouble's
+you, my love."  she pleaded in a concerned voice but, for a while, he
+did not answer.  He stepped away from her and moved towards the window
+again, and said nothing.  Dearborne thought that Brook was going insane
+and she prayed to her fullest ability that she was wrong, and that she
+was just entertaining foolish and childish ideas.
+
+On the streets were the sounds of people; talking, laughing, buying and
+selling, and going about their daily routine; which, in more cases than
+not, was just trying to survive.  In the distance, from the direction
+of the Cathedral, came the horrific buzzing sounds of the Monastic
+Guard's electrophoric weapons.  The sound was like the drone of a
+million panicked mosquitos, swarming in a mass confusion.
+
+Brook's eyes filled with tears and Dearborne looked towards the window.
+ Silence took command of the room.  Dearborne slowly moved towards the
+window, touched Brook's forearm and looked at him with her big brown
+and compassionate eyes.  He placed his hands upon her, then they
+embraced until the nightmarish sounds of the ArchBishop's weapons died
+and the sounds of the children, playing in the streets, filled the air
+in its place, again.
+
+Dearborne knew that there was a change in Brook.  Never before has he
+cringed under the sounds of the ArchBishop's weapons, and the results
+of them thereof.  Soon, Dearborne cried, too.
+
+Brook eased his embrace on her.  He stroked her hair and kissed the
+tears from her eyes until she stopped crying.
+
+"It is time, my love."  Brook finally said in a low tone.  "It's time
+for me to tell you about all these things here, with me."  He motioned
+to her the whole room and what it contained: the shelves of books, the
+cabinet, the small statues, the white screen and the musical
+instruments beside it, in the corner.  "After all our years of
+marriage, I will tell you about these things that my father, Smith
+Blue, left for me to use, to keep my rule strong in Phoride."
+
+She dried her eyes with a handkerchief that she took from her sleeve.
+
+Brook guided her to every part of the room and explained to her the
+uses which every item had during the time of the Twentieth Century,
+over a millennia ago.  He explained to her that the statues were the
+likeness of the rulers during that time.  He told her about how these
+men's search for wealth and power plunged the whole world into a bloody
+conflict that escalated into a cataclysmic holocaust, that almost
+wiped-out every living creature from the face of the Earth.  He had let
+her know of how only a few handfuls of people survived and how they
+were able to rebuild the world and civilisation, to what it was now.
+
+He disclosed how these people took the best of both simple living and
+great technology, to make a better and more ordered life on Earth. And
+he recounted to her how he was descended from a line of knowledgeable
+men called "scientists", and how the idea of such men was lost over the
+passage of a thousand years, that eventually became thought of as a
+royalty.  The faction name, "THE BLUE" had become thought of as
+nobility and so was its adoption for a surname lineage, to which was
+now his.
+
+Dearborne asked questions about many things.  Things that even Brook
+had long ago asked himself, because he was never able to obtain the
+answers after his father died, and there was no one else to ask.
+
+All he could do was speculate and read some of the old texts, that
+explained some questions but never in enough detail to warrant full
+understanding and satisfaction to his churning curiosity.
+
+Dearborne now understood why Brook kept this room so private, allowing
+only the two people closest to him, in his life (she and Boy), to
+enter it.  She now knew why she thought it necessary, those many
+times, to close the cabinets, and drape-over the wall, when Brook fell
+asleep and left them in the open.  Brook was aware that all this
+knowledge would be misused if it were in the hands of someone like the
+ArchBishop and his puppet legions.
+
+Brook had mixed emotions about his life and his own power.  Although he
+and Dearborne had been married for thirteen years, this was the first
+time that he divulged so much dangerous knowledge to her.  In Phoride,
+as elsewhere in the world, the way of life has been one of mistrust and
+suspicion.  Yet, Brook knew that she would tell no one because there
+were many things that they shared and neither one has revealed them to
+anyone else.
+
+When Brook finished telling Dearborne most of the important details
+about the gadgetry, they stood at the window for a long time and just
+stared at the town, and its people.
+
+The Monastic Guards patrolled the streets while the people went about
+their day-to-day activity, buying and selling items that they took to
+the market.
+
+As far as the eye could see down the street people were busy making
+their livelihood.  They talked and laughed with one another and rarely,
+if ever, paid any mind to the black-clad, helmeted guards that policed
+the area.
+
+Children played in the streets.  Some of the daring one tried to
+actually annoy the guards who, like zombies, went on their way without
+showing the slightest hint of aggravation.  Afraid of being punished
+for their children's misdeeds, parents beat their children for everyone
+to witness.  They did not want the "Almighty's Angels" (as they guards
+were often called), to pour their wrath upon them.  They felt that
+their children's bloody noses and cut lips were enough to show their
+respect, and submission, to the rule of the Almighty.
+
+
+Brook put his arm over Dearborne's shoulder and stroked her hair.  He
+set her small and delicate hand into his other, and held it tightly.
+
+Turned towards her, he saw a few shiny tears slide down her rosy
+cheeks.  "They are the ones that I must now tell." he said, pointing
+out the window at the children.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWO
+
+The streets were alive with people vending their goods.
+
+The mid-morning was always the busiest time of the day in Pomperaque,
+and should it have been anything else?  Afterall, this city had been
+the capital of Phoride for some five hundred years. The routine had
+always been the same. At sunrise the people brought their goods out
+into the major streets, where they bought and sold amongst one
+another.  When noon-time came around they all gathered their things
+together and returned to their homes and rarely, if ever, emerged
+again until the evening when they made their way to the taverns and
+theatres.
+
+But even in the evening the city wasn't as alive as it was during
+mid-morning.  This was a time when people spoke to one another and
+laughed at little humours that they created and therefore strengthened
+the social bonds between themselves.  Men drank and talked at the
+cafes while their women stayed by the stands and kiosks, exchanging
+goods and talking also.
+
+
+Sometimes someone came along and bought something with gold bits, which
+was surprising and not very common, since the usual manner that the
+people carried on their business was in barter and in copper.  However,
+the attainment of gold was short-lived.
+
+Every day at noon, one of the ArchBishop's tax clerics went amongst
+those who received gold and exchanged it for copper bits. Usually, the
+exchange wasn't just or fair.  The town's people were most often given
+two bits of copper for every one bit of gold.  Rarely they received
+five bits to one of gold: that was a great achievement in everyone's
+eyes if someone were capable of bringing it about.  This was dangerous,
+however. If someone haggled for anything over five bits of copper to
+one of gold, they were threatened with Divine Punishment -- for their
+sin of greed -- unless they payed a fine, which always equalled the
+exact number of gold bits that the merchant possessed.  Thus was the
+usual mode of business and economics for Pomperaque, and the rest of
+Phoride. All this was the common practice of the surrounding provinces,
+and kingdoms; which the ArchBishop directly influenced.
+
+It was one such morning that Dearborne went out into the streets with
+Boy, to do her marketing.  It was the third day of the week and not the
+second day, which she usually took to do her marketing, and everyone
+was happy and pleased to see her because they all thought that
+something bad had happened to her.  The merchants weren't prepared for
+her absence on the second day and all of them questioned her for a
+reason why she missed her usual day.  She just smiled and told them
+that she wanted to be with her husband, and they sent their
+heat-warming greeting to him.
+
+For the thirteen years that she had been married to Lord Brook, she
+always marketed on the second and fifth days of the week.  The sudden
+change in her market day created a great stir in the hearts of the
+people. Now that they could see that she was well, they rejoiced and
+treated her with sweets and fruits, and gave her things to take to
+their Lord and sovereign, Brook Scullion Blue.
+
+Like every day, the streets were filled with people.  Their goods were
+spread about the ground on blankets, or on top of carts, or set on and
+around the kiosks in the city square.
+
+Dearborne and Boy made their way down the street towards the square,
+which was the liveliest part of town during any time of the day.  It
+was here where the best produce and meats were to be found during the
+morning market hours.  It was here that the highest quality foodstuffs
+were brought in from every part of Phoride and elsewhere.
+
+Also, in the city square, jewellery and fine garments were sold and
+there were amusements for the people.  There were games and
+story-tellers, and machines were there to thrill the children. All
+these amusements carried-on throughout the entire day and night.
+
+Boy carried a large basket and was slightly ahead of Dearborne.  They
+both walked slowly and looked around the different stands, at the
+various things of interest.
+
+Dearborne smiled her greetings at some council men that sat at tables
+outside the café.  Business carried on in its usual manner, the sounds
+of livelihood resounded throughout the streets and into the other
+regions of the city, out towards the Hill People, who were the free
+farmers of Phoride.  There was some kind of commotion down the street
+but it didn't appear to be any different than usual to Dearborne, and
+she paid little attention to anything but her own thoughts, anyway.
+
+She had never known about the holocaust that had occurred over a
+millennia ago.  She had known that something cataclysmic happened but
+no one could ever find out the whole story because it was a taboo
+topic, according to the written Laws of Canon; which denied any kind of
+knowledge about the past.
+
+She was confused by the Canon's Law, which said the past was a
+disillusionment.  Afterall, there were history books and subjects at
+the Blaisaman, right here in Pomperaque.  The Blaisaman had, at one
+time, been one of the largest learning institutions of its kind,
+anywhere on the Northern Continent.  This was the very place that
+Dearborne and many other "Prominents" completed their studies.  She
+remembered the extensive teachings of history and how it had
+influenced and changed life in Phoride.  Only now, four years after
+she had received her Darmaclust, she realised that even in the highest
+levels of study, no one knew, or at least there was no one who would
+disclose their knowledge, about the history prior to a thousand years
+ago.
+
+She never questioned why this was so at the time and apparently, no one
+else questioned it either.  She hadn't realised that there was no
+written or taught history, concerning that period before the officially
+declared beginning of the world.  The only stories that were told to
+the scholars, about the before-time, was that there was a fiery chaos
+in the cosmos, before the Almighty created the world and its first
+earthly family.  But anything that was taught to the student-scholars,
+even concerning this, was very limited.  Still, there were no
+questions.
+
+Dearborne couldn't believe that anyone, not even she, thought to pursue
+the topic any further than that which was told to them.
+
+She came out of her thoughts for a moment when she noticed that Boy had
+wandered-off somewhere and without her permission.
+
+She reconnoitred the square; the different stalls and the kiosks then
+saw him standing with some pretty town's-girl, of the same age.  Both
+watched some dark-skinned woman, with golden hair and sapphire-like
+eyes, levitate herself and many other weird things, including some of
+the audience, on the fringes of the stage.
+
+About to call on him, she heard some quick steps behind her and a
+familiar voice that calling her name.
+
+"Lady Dearborne!  Good morning, my sweet friend." said the voice.
+
+She turned quickly to the caller and smiled as he reached her, and
+kissed her hand.
+
+"Miel, my dear friend, how are you?" she asked him in a surprised and
+happy manner.
+
+"I am fine.  My wife is well, too!  She just birthed our twelfth child
+a son!" he beamed with pride.
+
+"My, my!  You do keep yourself active!"
+
+"Yes!  That is why I could not answer the invitation to your
+anniversary celebration."
+
+"You are coming, are you not?"
+
+"Oh, yes!  Of course, I'm coming.  I wouldn't miss it for anything."
+he assured her.
+
+"And Aria?
+
+"I don't know yet.  She doesn't recover from child baring as quickly as
+she had at one time.  Nevertheless, I will be there."
+
+"Well, thankyou ... Brook and I shall watch for you!"
+
+"Goodbyes till then!" he exalted, then after he kissed her hand again,
+he walked off in the direction of the café, and shouted greetings to
+some men sitting at the nearest table.
+
+Dearborne turned and called to Boy.  He glanced over his shoulder to
+see her waving him in with her hand.  He motioned to the girl to stay
+where she was and ran over to Dearborne.
+
+They strolled over to Empal; the biggest seller of fruits and
+vegetables, herbs and spices, known on the face of the continent, and
+perhaps in the whole world.
+
+He greeted her and Boy with the usual good-hearted smile, and warm
+hello.  Then as always, in his brawny Virunese accent he asked about
+Brook, his favourite Lord, while he slowly filled Dearborne's basket
+with the best of his produce.  In turn, Dearborne asked about his
+family -- his daughter in particular, and unobserved slipped several
+gold bits into his hand when they shook.
+
+Dearborne wasn't the only one of the nobility to do this.  Many others
+had done it, as well.  Not because of pity or any such sympathies but
+rather s a show of respect for his strength and his odd position in
+their society.
+
+Everyone in Phoride, except for the ArchBishop and his train of
+followers, admired his position against the ArchBishop when he was
+requested for Gaena, his daughter, to bare the child of "The
+Almighty".  He refused to allow his daughter's virginity to be taken
+by anyone other than a mountain tribesman and so immediately arranged
+a wedding to take place between her and her betrothed love, Tucker.
+Tucker was a Krolalin Mountain goat-herder.
+
+Although everyone overpaid Empal for his services, he was forced into
+near poverty when he dared to live in Pomperaque or anywhere else in
+Phoride, for any lengthy period of time.  This was caused by his
+obstinacy towards the ArchBishop.  In the beginning, after a few months
+of hardship he returned to Exendria, the capital of Virune.  He rebuilt
+his fortune, and later returned to Pomperaque.  Since then, he had kept
+to a cycle of return to Exendria.  Like a migratory bird, he headed
+North every summer then returned to Lower Phoride in the winter.
+
+Even though extensive and constant travel was difficult on most people,
+it didn't seem to affect Empal in a very harsh way.  In fact, he soon
+came to enjoy his cycled migration because he made a greater fortune
+selling his produce during his travel than he did selling in either
+Pomperaque or Exendria, combined.  Now, in his seventh cycle, he had
+accumulated more wealth than what the ArchBishop could dream of taking
+away from him; in fines, taxes, licenses or tariffs.  Brook had dared
+to veto the ArchBishop's plan for all merchants, farmers and artisans
+to pay a monthly tribute to the church, to encourage the building of
+roads, buildings and the like.
+
+Brook knew that no buildings would ever come out of the plan and that
+it was just another one of the ArchBishop's ploys to keep the people of
+Phoride poor and ignorant.  His veto helped all the working class
+people in the land and also greatly boosted the economic strength of
+Phoride.  He made it the wealthiest and most powerful land on the
+Northern Continent.  And all of this was begun by the will of a simple
+old man, who chanced his standing up to the ArchBishop's tyrannical
+order of life.
+
+Dearborne and Empal said their farewells and he asked her if she will
+be back on the fifth day, as usual, but she shrugged unknowingly and
+smiled a good-bye at him.
+
+Boy carried the basket for a while until Dearborne saw that he
+occasionally looked back to where the town's-girl stood, waiting for
+him to return to her.  Being a kindly woman, she took the basket from
+him and let him go to the girl, telling Boy that she would not need him
+for a while.
+
+She was pleased to see Boy and the innocense of childhood that he, and
+all those like him, possessed.  Their's was the future.  This, she
+understood through her husband's guidance.  She knew that it was the
+responsibility of the Elders to prepare a secure and stable life for
+their children.  It was this idea that caused Brook to become so
+sensitive to the uselessness of killing the transgressors of the Canon
+Laws:  those laws, more than half of which, were written only to
+benefit the Great Church of The Almighty.
+
+She was saddened when she realised that Boy, and all those of his age,
+might not have any kind of future at all.
+
+She continued to look at the boy.  Her mind remained deep in thought
+about him and his vague tomorrow.  She almost cried.
+
+
+"He's a hardy boy, Lady Scullion-Blue!"  A sudden, slow and taring
+voice, that sent a cold flush down her back and that raised the small
+hairs on the nape of her neck, came from behind.  She quickly turned,
+and when she saw that it was the Cardinal Allen, she curtsied to him
+and kissed his hand.
+
+"Is your household faring well, my child?  asked the Cardinal.
+
+"Yes, Cardinal Allen.  We are happy for our blessings." she moved away
+from him.
+
+"I am happy for you ... I am surprised to see you in the market today.
+It's not your usual day?" his voice sounded scheming and distrustful as
+he eyed her.  Dearborne felt uneasy, as if she were being prodded or
+groped by someone.  She felt as if swarms of army ants were crawling
+over her entire body, and were devouring her alive.  She didn't answer
+right away.  She quietly looked to see if Boy was still by the stage
+but he had moved with the girl to another one, where some magician made
+small animals and shapes transmute in their appearance.
+
+Dearborn turned back to the Cardinal and answered.
+
+"No, it's not my usual day for marketing.  I stayed home with Brook,
+yesterday!" she said.
+
+"No doubt talking about raising a family -- I wager?"
+
+"Yes!  That is so!  We feel that we are now prepared for children."
+
+"True, true! -- Just a few days ago I was speaking with some of the
+Brothers, at Halls, about you and Lord Brook.  We prayed that you may
+soon be blessed with many sons.  All of us look forward to your sons'
+future attendance at out vicarage."  Dearborne became somewhat
+disturbed and briefly lost her pleasant smile.  She answered him in a
+subdued, but still obviously denying tone of  voice.
+
+"Yes!  Definitely that!" she said then became silent, once again.
+
+
+Cardinal Allen slowly looked over Dearborne's whole body and sighed.
+He imagined the pleasures that he could experience if he were to bed
+with her; to meet her full mouth with his and to touch the full
+softness of her bosom.
+
+Dearborne moved her long hair allowing it to fall upon her breasts,
+covering herself from the Cardinal's intensive gaze.
+
+After a few moments of silence, Cardinal Allen glared into her eyes,
+and in a dishonestly gentle voice, asked her if she cared for
+refreshment.  She couldn't but answer him, and soon she tried to smile
+as she conceded.
+
+"Shall we sit, then?" asked the Cardinal and escorted her to a vacant
+table at the café, where several of the men sat about, eyeing them and
+mumbling with questioning discontent and accusation.  Soon, however,
+they returned to their talking and did not pay attention to the Lady,
+and the Cardinal, sitting nearby.  They resumed their previously gaiety
+and laughter, and heavy-handed talk.
+
+A large, blond tavern maid soon came to the table.  She toted a tray of
+dirty tankards.  With a big smile, she winked at Cardinal Allen then
+looked at Dearborne.  She chuckled a little when he smiled back at her.
+
+"How you, Cardin' -- What do?"  she asked.  Her eyes jutted back and
+forth between him and Dearborne.
+
+"A small rose wine, please." she finally said.
+
+The tavern maid grinned, then once again winked at Cardinal Allen. With
+a quick and brisk "it's good!", she left them.
+
+The strange commotion that boomed on the street most of the morning,
+had grown and spread right down to the café where they sat.  Cardinal
+Allen wasn't too disturbed by the loud shouting of some young man and
+the discontented, riotous mob that shouted back at him.  He was
+preoccupied with his interest in Dearborne.  They said very little at
+the table or at least, nothing that was of any great significance.
+Dearborne watched the crowd as they started to throw stones and ripe
+fruit at the you man, and Allen watched Dearborne's breasts rise and
+fall with her every breath.
+
+Once more, he continued his deceit and his lecherous manner.
+
+"Ah, yes!  Lord Brook is a very lucky man, to have wed such a woman as
+you!"
+
+Dearborne became even more upset and she began to fidget.  She looked
+around to see if anyone was listening; most were interested in the
+young man that was creating the disturbance, and Miel had long since
+left.
+
+"If I had not become a man of the Almighty, I could have wed such a
+precious fawn.  I, too, could have cleaved to a woman whose blood boils
+for only the one man that she loves."
+
+Dearborne was surprised by what the Cardinal had said to her.
+Uncomfortable, she tried to speak while she looked around to make
+certain that no one else heard him.
+
+"Cardinal Allen -- I pray, explain the meaning of that remark, or I
+will have to tell Brook!"
+
+"I beg your forgiveness, if I have offended, my Lady.  It is known
+throughout these lands, that women who drink of the rose, are warm and
+passionate to those men that they love."
+
+He looked at her and smiled, his one gold tooth reflecting the sunlight.
+
+No one else, in the café, heard their exchange.  Their attentions were
+rivetted on the disturbance that rumbled a little ways down the street.
+
+The tavern maid brought the drinks, served them, and winked at Cardinal
+Allen before she left.  "Enjoy, Cardin'!" she said, then went to serve
+someone else.
+
+"I'm sorry, Cardinal!  I misunderstood the intent behind your words."
+
+
+Cardinal Allen bowed his head and smiled at her a forgiving little
+smile.  In his norm, he turned his own decadence around and once more
+had come clean.
+
+"The mistake was unintentional, my child.  Let us pray that this does
+not happen again." he clasped his hands and lowered his head.
+
+Dearborne bowed her head, as well, and sighed.
+
+The Cardinal, however, did not pray.  He looked up at her and only
+thought about how wonderful she was, and the joys and the pleasures
+that Lord Scullion must feel when he takes her.  He thought about the
+intense heat that he felt, just sitting near her; watching her smooth
+glow and the inviting look in her eyes, as if saying  "I will take you,
+my Lord Cardinal."   But soon his thoughts brought him back to his
+place, as it was, at Halls.  There was the devotion that he had to
+show, and the tributes that he had to give, to the other brothers
+there, and also the obligation that he had to The Almighty, Himself.
+He sighed and said "amen" and Dearborne echoed him.
+
+"I must leave you, now, Cardinal." she continued with a silent
+hesitation.  "Thank-you for the refreshment, and of course the
+compliment."  She saw him, still over by the magician and the girl.
+She called to him and before he came he kissed the girl and waved to
+her even though she stood right beside her.  She giggled and Boy ran to
+Dearborne when she called to him again.
+
+"Here I come, Lady!" he shouted as he ran to her.  Along the way he
+stumbled and dirtied himself, but he sprang up quickly and continued.
+
+Cardinal Allen took her hand.  She spun around in surprise and faced
+him.  She glared at him as his voice, heavy and wet, filtered into her
+mind.
+
+"Before you go, my Lady, please do not forget to request a visit with
+Lord Scullion.  The ArchBishop does very much wish to see him."  She
+pulled her hand out of his, in a slow and obviously repulsed manner.
+She than walked away.  Boy ran after her and she handed him the basket
+of fruit and vegetables.
+
+As they headed in the direction that they had come from, the commotion
+that was down the street was now before them.  They tried to make their
+way to the main boulevard but when they made it, Dearborne stopped to
+see what the problem was.
+
+People pushed and shoved one another and screamed obscenities at a man,
+about Dearborne's age, who jumped up on the magician's stage, knocking
+the magician to the ground.  Throughout the clamour and confusion, the
+man yelled at the people, but no one listened.  He finally had to hit a
+few individuals, sending them careening to the ground, in order that he
+could stay on the stage.
+
+"Listen!" he yelled.  "Listen -- Hear Me!"  Now, on stage, the noise of
+the crowd heightened.  Every single person screamed at him.  Most
+screamed insults and profanity while others screamed at him calling him
+a blasphemer and a heretic.  Some men tried to pull him off the stage
+but he kicked and swung his fists, and made a mark on their faces.
+
+The man lifted a tattered book into the air to show the people, and
+yelled in desperation at the people to listen to what he had to say.
+
+"Listen, people of Phoride!  Hear the truths that have been!  Listen so
+that you too may know!"  he screamed.
+
+The anger of the people was coming to a boil and some men shouted as
+loud as they could at him.
+
+"What truths?  Words that we don't understand?" hollered one, in anger,
+back at him.
+
+"Blasphemies and heresies to destroy our faith in The Almighty!"
+shouted another.
+
+"We don't listen to lies! -- Remove him!"
+
+"These are not lies. These are truths, of the great things that had
+once been and can be, again!" pleaded the man from the stage. The
+murmur of the riotous mob grew; people yelled to others to take him
+away and kill him, and to close their eyes to his devilish words.
+
+"Hear me, friends!  Hear the words of the "old ones" from that age that
+had vanished! -- Hear of those who have been in shelter, and who waited
+to be born again.  All of you are the witnesses to them, to reason and
+to understand them, again!" said the man on the stage as he waved his
+book in the air, over his head.
+
+Dearborne and Boy moved into the shadows of the adjacent street.  She
+was curious to hear what the man had to say.
+
+Cardinal Allen still stood by the café table and watched some woman
+grab at the leg-bindings of the man's sandal.  Allen waited.  The woman
+screamed.
+
+"This demon tempts us!  Call the Almighty's Angels to destroy him!" and
+Allen pulled from his habit a small flat, triangular device and passed
+his forefinger over its surface.  Instantly, bells echoed throughout
+the street and the roar of the mob died down as they moved back, away
+from the stage.
+
+Two tall male figures, dressed totally in black, with dark helmets and
+shiny metals adorning them, entered the square in haste, beside the
+café.  Cardinal Allen pointed a bony finger at the man on stage and the
+two monastic guards stepped up to the stage and drew their weapons on
+him.
+
+The man on stage was certain that they would fire upon him.  He knew
+that he couldn't allow his book to be taken from him, for then no one
+would ever see it.  He quickly took a glass ball from his hip sack and
+threw it down at the guards.  A twangy sound echoed though the air and
+the man fell from the stage, to the ground.  The glass ball that he
+had thrown down poured-out a grey green smoke, giving him the chance
+to drag himself into one of the nearby alleys.
+
+The monastic guards stopped in their tracks.  Their guns were still
+pointed up towards the stage but they did not fire any more.
+
+The mob, aimless and panicked, ran into one another and screamed in
+horror that they were blind.  Others fell to the ground and crawled
+off, crying and praying to the Almighty to deliver them from the evil
+that had befallen them.
+
+Cardinal Allen ran off in the direction of Halls, still rubbing his
+forefinger over the surface of the device.  The roar of the mob
+subsided, giving way to the eerie sounds of the bells that echoed
+through every part of Pomperaque.  As Allen approached Halls, he fell
+over his habit, dragging behind him, and in final desperation, made it
+through the gateway and collapsed by the fountain in the courtyard.
+
+Amidst the confusion in the city square was the man's body.  It dragged
+itself into a doorway, his hand cupped over the open fist-sized wound
+in his side.  The intolerable pain made him sway out of the doorway and
+onto the cobble-stone street.  He dropped his book as he tried to stand
+up, and vomited into the gutter before he passed out.
+
+Some figures quickly rushed towards him.  One of them grabbed the book
+and concealed it with their clothes, as they took him under the arms
+and quickly spirited him away.
+
+
+Overlooking pomperaque stood Mount Benitar the rock of wisdom.  There
+sat a man of wisdom, who watched everything that occurred in that great
+city.
+
+The man of the mountain was not pleased with what he witnessed taking
+place over the centuries.  Alone, he contemplated his descent into the
+valley.
+
+
+CHAPTER  THREE
+
+Some birds chirped outside, perched on the branches of the giant
+junipers, hidden by the shadows of the leaves, hiding from the heat of
+the afternoon sun.
+
+A breeze gently sighed through the window, the lace coverings flapped
+about their hangings, animating them into a lively dance and scattering
+the shy sunlight that intermittently peaked into the room.
+
+The room was large and fragrant with exotic incenses.  The blue and
+white of the polished Lazurite walls pleased the eye, as did the
+intricately carved sandalwood furniture and bed frame. All of this
+added a most natural aura to the naked smoothness of the marble and the
+stone, utilized throughout the building.
+
+In the white, fur-lined bed lay a man.  His upper torso was propped up
+by blue satin pillows, stuffed with fluffy swans down.  The pillows
+showed the unmistakable signs of dampness, from his sweat.  He lay
+still, tiny beads of sweat streaming from his brow.  His nostrils
+flared with each painful breath that he took.  A blanket was drawn up
+to his waist.  His arms rested on the blanket's end and to his side.
+His chest was circumscribed by clean bandages that held a herbal
+poultice against the wound in his side -- an attempt to relieve his
+pain.
+
+The sounds of people outside returned to normal.  Business carried on
+in its usual way and the people carried on in their usual disarray.
+
+Outside the room, in the hallway, was heard the whispering voices of a
+man and a woman.  The woman was describing an incident that had
+occurred within the city square, that had injured their guest.
+
+Within the room, the man on the bed stirred and woke up.  He tried to
+sit up quickly but let out a deep, painful groan as he again lay back.
+His pain subdued him in silence.  The voices outside the door hushed
+for a moment and the man's voice was heard again.  It speculated that
+the injured man, in bed, may have regained consciousness.
+
+The man in bed touched the bandages and grimaced in pain.  He was
+motionless in the bed and looked about the room.  The exquisite,
+luxurious beauty of the walls and patterned ceiling, with the many
+crystals hanging from it suggested  "home".  He looked towards the
+window, just in time to see a tiny swallow turn and fly from the ledge,
+and a red-breasted Bourbon, was balancing on a branch and singing its
+aria to him.
+
+The latch on the door clicked as it was opened.  The man in bed, lifted
+his head for a moment and watched three people approach him; the
+smaller one carrying a tray of food and drink.
+
+For a long time, silent looks were exchanged between them all.
+
+The cautious servant placed the tray over the man's lap and helped him
+to sit up.  He placed another cushion at his back.
+
+The man looked at the food and at the others, until finally, the host
+smiled and took a bite from the food and sipped the drink.
+
+"Eat, my friend!  You will not heal quickly if you do not eat."  he
+said, then stepped away from him.
+
+The man in bed devoured the food as if he has never before eaten.  The
+host and his wife glanced at each other as they watched him.
+
+After a minute, the injured man suddenly stopped and looked at the
+others who stared at him while he at.  There was thick quiet until the
+injured man spoke, with a serious mistrust, in the tone of his voice.
+        "Where is my book?" he asked.
+
+The host smiled at him and looked over to his wife.  "Your encyclopedia
+is safe, my friend."  answered the host, as he slowly neared the bed.
+
+The servant helped him sit up more comfortably in the bed when he
+showed too much pain, trying to so do by himself.
+
+Suspicion burned in the injured man's flaring eyes.  He questioned his
+host further.
+
+"Who are you to know of such books?"
+
+"I am the sovereign of Phoride -- I am called Brook Scullion.  This is
+my wife, Dearborne and our ... servant, Boy!"  said the host, the Lord
+Brook.  He continued.  "We know of that book, and about much more!"
+
+There was quiet again for a few moments as their injured guest drank,
+his thoughts and fears sculpted across his wide hirsute face.          "No!"
+said Brook.  "It happens that we have common interests and like goals.
+You, however, have a strange courage, trying to speak out your
+knowledge.  This is dangerous! -- No, my friend, if I were to kill you,
+it would be like preventing a cure for a rampant plague!"
+
+
+Dearborne neared the bed and looked at him while she explained to him,
+how he came to be there, in the room.
+
+"I was in the market today.  When I was leaving I saw you, shouting and
+waving a book over your head, but no one listened.  I did not leave,
+for the sake of curiosity, then after you were hurt, Boy and I brought
+you back here."  when Dearborne finished, a small, thankful smile
+drifted across his face, then finally grew into a sincere completion
+when Boy added his thoughts.  "You're heavy!" she said, rubbing his
+arms.
+
+Brook stood right up against the bed and checked the bandages.  He
+sighed and shook his head in disbelief.
+
+"You are a very fortunate man.   Never before have I seen anyone
+survive a blast from those --- "
+
+" -- Electrophoric guns!"   interrupted the man.
+
+"Yes!  You know much of the last millennia!" he smiled.
+
+"I do, sir!  So do others from where I come.  I am Lloyd Bartlet, and I
+am from Besten."
+
+Brook turned to Dearborne.  They looked at one another, their
+expressions bordering on apprehension, puzzlement and a somewhat odd
+pleasure.
+
+"Besten?!"  Brook ejaculated with surprise.
+
+Lloyd nodded his head and with a smile, he detailed.
+
+"Besten, the  'Hopeless City',  as the ArchBishop calls it.  We have no
+tyrant rulers there and no monastic institutions, and because of this
+we are called  'evil',  by him.   Well ..."  he shrugged at his
+thought.
+
+"Why are you here, if Besten is so free?" asked Dearborne, confused and
+now becoming interested about his motives.
+
+Lloyd took another drink from the goblet on his lap tray while Lord and
+Lady Scullion waited, in anticipation, for him to explain why he had
+come to Phoride.
+
+Boy stood by.  He watched and listened.  His face showed its usual
+bewilderment.  He handed Lloyd a large napkin and Lloyd wiped his
+mouth.  After the wiping he sighed and finally explained his presence
+here in their land.
+
+"My people (my father, Harvard Bartlet, especially), had sent me to try
+to alter the ArchBishop's trade embargo on Besten.  I suppose that I
+went about it the wrong way by trying to talk to the people first!"
+
+Brook put his hand on Lloyd's shoulder and assured him that he made no
+mistake.  Dearborne agreed with her husband's opinion and she released
+her suspicions.
+
+"It wouldn't have made much of a difference.  Actually, avoiding the
+talk, directly with the ArchBishop probably saved your life and I
+believe that you may be fortunate enough to have created a question in
+some of the citizen's minds.  Your injury, I suppose, may be considered
+a payment for giving men new ideas!"
+
+"I think it to be a little too expensive!" added Lloyd, with humour,
+laughing at his own pains and inequities while he touched his bandaged
+chest.
+
+They continued their palaver throughout the afternoon and into the
+early evening.  They learned many intricacies about one another; about
+their individual lifestyles and their social ideologies.
+
+They discussed the progress that had occurred through the many
+generations that grew and nurtured along with it the disease of
+corruption and immorality;  the same diseases that were present in all
+civilised peoples.  These powerful progression had meant the inevitable
+downfall of all the great Empires which once reigned on the Earth.
+From the first humans that walked upright, to the last of the brave
+that went into space, in the late Twentieth Century, it had been the
+same until the fall of man, in his greatest conflagration.  Brook and
+Lloyd exchanged little bits of knowledge about the Twentieth Century
+and the three great wars that were fought.  There were endless columns
+of living flesh, where people were herded like animals by other people,
+and transported to large camps. While there, many who were not
+fortunate enough to die, were made use of in the endless experiments of
+new drugs, surgical techniques and endless studies of the individual's
+body tolerances to torture.
+
+The atrocities, that every war carried with it, seemed to grow and
+spread.  They were pandemic.  Yet, these atrocities were allowed to
+continue, where social morals degenerated further with every proceeding
+conflict and the outrageous brutality that was let to worsen, by the
+lack of authoritative controls on those madmen.  They spoke of the
+GREAT NATION's  'Proposition Blue'; devised in the last half of the
+Twentieth Century, to preserve human life, in the event that global
+annihilation would become reality.  Learned men and women were chosen
+and assembled, and were taken to subterranean cities.  There, they were
+to carry-on with their work and with their lives, in the perfect safety
+of their restraint.
+
+In the years that proceeded, and no major wars were fought, the young
+chosen became old and were replaced by newly chosen young
+intellectuals.  They too, continued in the sealed cities.
+
+Lloyd reached for his book and opened at a particular spot.  He had
+read aloud to Brook; Dearborne and Boy listening:
+
+        "Two generations of the Proposition Blue personnel lived-out 
+         their lives, underground.  In the Omega 1-SGI, restless
+         dissention had spread when the time of the last global war
+         had finally come to pass.  When the news of war spread
+         through the ranks of The Blue, many scientists forcibly left
+         their protective cities and went out into the world to let
+         the common people know of some meagre ways to protect
+         themselves during the inevitable nuclear strikes and the
+         subsequent fallout.
+
+         Some scientists published papers, that they called "The Blue
+         Prospectus".  It told the world about their government's
+         secret cities and it made demands for regular people to be
+         admitted into them, also.  The people then rebelled, all of
+         them wanting in.  In the Far and MiddleEast, the Red Forces
+         fought.  They had left death and destruction in the wake of 
+         their advancement towards (what was then) the world's
+         greatest, and most Holy of cities.
+
+         The masses were terrified.
+
+         At home, people fought amongst one another, crying at the
+         terrible lies that the men in power told to them.  They
+         desperately tried to understand why some of them were not
+         allowed into the "Proposition Blue" standards. The final
+         chance to allow one young worker from each of the State's
+         counties, an admission into one of the seven Omega SubGround
+         Installations.
+
+                                          FLIGHT FOR SALVATION
+                                          GINN -- 2030
+
+
+At dusk, as the twilight colours gave way to darkness and the pulsing
+stars, Brook and his guest had sup and continued with their exchange.
+Dearborne and Boy attentively sat by one another for many of those
+passing hours.  They said very little but listened a great deal.
+
+Lloyd told Brook of a great vault that was uncovered in the centre of
+Besten by historian scholars, many years ago.  The vault contained a
+great number of books, journals and visual ribbons which showed the
+dire panic of the masses when the first bombs began to fall upon their
+cities.
+
+Pictures showed masses in exodus to the mountains just before the
+escalation.  Those people who left early, during the desperately
+unsuccessful peace negotiations, had made it to the safety of the
+mountains, where they hopefully found some degree of protection from
+the deadly fallout.  Those who waited and moved too late, perished in
+the desolation that came to pass. And the world cried, for the final
+prophesy was not fulfilled.  The Son of Man had failed to return and
+put a stop to the killing, the persecution and the corruption.  Some
+people died from their lack of Faith, while other stayed with the hope
+that His return was still to come upon them, a little while later.
+
+Their talk lead them into their own historic backgrounds, to the sum of
+knowledge which was allowed by the original Canon Di'Vaticanus, in the
+middle of the Twenty Seventh Century.  He declared that this two score
+and eleventh year (2651 C.E.), was the beginning of the long-promised
+millennium, as heralded by the ancient prophets.  His declaration was
+made after an eleven-year-old girl gave birth to a son.  The
+eleven-year-old was a foundling in an abbess hermitage, left there by
+someone who could not care for her.
+
+"She was found, wrapped in richly garb and placed in a golden cradle.
+As the girl grew she became beautiful, like the sun.  She shone with
+inner light.  Her hair was white -- shiny like snow and iridescent like
+the moon.  Her olive-skin flesh colouring contrasted her naturally
+reddened mouth and she possessed dark, almost black, almond-shaped
+eyes. Her beauty was near Holy and many men felt a jealousy within
+themselves when they just looked upon her.  Then, at eleven, she was in
+size and stature, and appearance, to that of a full-grown woman; she
+birthed a son.  This son, the Canon had proclaimed as a "Saviour" and
+sought to conduct a sacrifice in honour of the child, but he told the
+world that nothing was precious enough for this.  It was soon
+determined, however, that there was one thing of great value, in all
+the land; the boy's own young and beautiful mother.  In the shortness
+of time, and as if for the redemption for her death, the boy became
+weak and also died.  The child's milk of life was taken from him and
+nothing else would sustain him.
+
+The child's death was hidden from the ignorant masses and all the
+people believed in a falsity for nearly a half millennia."  Lloyd
+recounted the story about the foundling that came to be called Sunshine
+by the old Abbess Mariot, in the common year of 2640.  This was the
+same little girl that resulted the subsequent formation of the
+spiritualism that has been followed for the last four hundred years.
+
+As the twilight evening gave way to the dark of night, Brook told
+Lloyd about his own lineage, following it as far back as he was able
+to, and confessed to him the peculiar ancestry that he had with the
+Canon Blue.  He explained that his father's line originated with the
+woman Dioneza, the half-sister of the Canon. In 2660 C.E., she had
+agreed to be artificially inseminated with Twentieth Century seamen
+from a physicist, who was called David Sannstein.  He confessed to
+Lloyd that this wasn't really his own line and that he didn't know
+from where his line actually stemmed.  Brook admitted, truthfully,
+that he was a foundling.
+
+He spoke about that one day, long ago, when Smith Blue and his wife
+Miri were returning to Phoride, from the Virgin Mountains.  Miri was
+heavy with child and in that mid-summer's afternoon in 3001 C.E., she
+gave birth to a son and called his name, Manguino.  In a thankful rest,
+while his wife nursed the newborn, Smith Blue walked in the woods,
+following a babbling stream and a strange distant sound which was like
+the crying of a babe.  And in his curious search, he came upon a
+hollow, where there was a child, wrapped in a sackcloth and left within
+a lion's skull.  Smith gave the baby to his wife; seeing the baby
+abandoned and crying from hunger.  And upon seeing the unfortunate
+child, Miri brought it near to her milk-laden breast and let it suckle
+beside her own son.  Having hearts of gold, they accepted the babe to
+their bosom as their own, and Smith called his name, Brook Scullion;
+after the fashion that he had been found -- by a stream, lying in a
+lion's skull.
+
+As midnight approached, they talked of their governments.  Lloyd
+proudly explained to Brook, Dearborn and the quiet Boy, about the
+Democratic system of government that his people accepted from the
+ancient Twentieth Century.  In Besten, the people found it the most
+suitable form of rule for a civilized people.  And even though, in the
+beginning there was corruption and immorality, their land had
+eventually overcome it all and soon gleaned a people of extreme honesty
+and cooperation.  It had made Besten a very powerful, and important,
+centre on the northeast coast of the continent.
+
+Lloyd became depressed when he thought about the Phoridenes closing
+their minds to the knowledge that he tried to give to them, and he
+experienced repeated visions of the monastic guard's electrophoric guns
+wallop him over and over again with their charges.
+
+"My people hoped, that if the Phoridenes were to know the truth about
+the past, they would rally to oppose the ArchBishop.  Maybe then, he
+would resume trade with Besten and the other territories so affected."
+
+Brook thought that Lloyd's people had a logical plan but he also saw
+they were too innocent of the facts about the man in the great Halls
+Cathedral.
+
+"The hopes of your people are too great!"  Brook prepared an
+explanation that shattered any hopes that Lloyd may have had for the
+success of his mission to Phoride.    "These people of Phoride ... they
+are ardent followers of that weasel at Halls.  They follow him as if he
+is a god.  It has been that same way, since the time of Canon.  This
+following has been an deviation, in this land; this worship of him as
+some Almighty, who is nothing more than a man -- a madman!"
+
+Dearborne now broke her long silence and also commented about the
+people.
+
+"They are all children, in mind, and follow the ArchBishop as if he is
+their father.  To keep this maniacal worship, he has banned citizens
+from acquiring knowledge; limiting their scholastic learning to the
+monasteries and to the Blaisaman, and limiting only this to his own
+supporters' children.  These places and their people are controlled by
+him.  He prefers to keep the people as ignorant as he can, for his own
+ease to rule them."  her voice quivered from her constricted soul.
+
+Then, to Lloyd's amazement, Boy joined the conversation.  His
+bewildered expression left him, as his hopeless and saddened voice
+carried right into the hearts and minds of the adults, in the room with
+him.
+
+Brook turned to Dearborne, surprised.  His eyes questioned her for a
+reason for Boy's interjection.  "Everyone does what they are told or
+they are made to suffer!" said Boy.  He rose to his feet, looked at
+Brook and Dearborne and walked about the room.  He continued to speak
+his mind while the others quietly listened.  "Not long ago, the
+servant-girl of one of the Cardinals -- she was just older than me --
+refused to bare the Cardinal's holy child.  With that refusal came her
+death, because the Cardinal declared that she will, therefore, never
+have children ... and in the view of all the people at Halls, and the
+Phoridene Council, the Cardinal had his vicars cut open the girl and
+all she had inside was pulled out and thrown to the floor.  She did
+not die right away.  The Cardinal wanted her last sight to be the
+death of her entire family."  Dearborne turned away from what Boy had
+described.  The horrible sight of the execution had returned to her.
+She and Brook were required to attend the execution -- as was their
+slave, Boy.
+
+Brook went to her and embraced her.  As he consoled her, Boy continued,
+his eyes on the brink of bursting into tears.
+
+"Then, they said that she was a demon and impure, and displayed her
+naked at Halls, for all of Phoride to gawk at."
+
+Boy stopped and lowered his head but his expression showing a
+determined refusal to cry.
+
+Lloyd was horrified by Boy's story and under his breath he could just
+sigh,  "Barbaric!"
+
+Brook and Dearborne held each other, tears slowly dribbling down their
+cheeks as Boy went to them for comfort, as well.  To Lloyd's surprise,
+he watched them embrace the child.
+
+"But why? -- "  Lloyd pleaded.  "Why, my Lord, would such an atrocity
+be done to so young a girl?  What was there to be gained by such
+barbarity?"  he wiped his eyes as he thought of his little sister,
+still in Besten, and imagined that this could also become of her, if
+they lived in Phoride.
+
+"Lloyd, my friend ... the ArchBishop has made some strange laws, that
+I could not veto.  One such law was that the refusal to bare a child
+by a monastic was a sin, punishable by death.  Nothing could be done
+and fear prevented me from asserting what powers I do have over him,
+at Halls.  More of Phoride follows his words and requests than they
+follow mine.  My power is possessed just out of respect for my Blue
+heritage.  He, with whom I had ruled, died early in our lives.  Our
+co-sovereignty, that we promised to Smith Blue, died as well.  It was
+I who united Upper and Lower Phoride but that Almighty ass of
+hypocrisy and immorality, took hold of my people's hearts."
+
+Brook became very angry and felt so vulnerable and alone.  He stood up
+and moved away from Dearborne and Boy.
+
+"He banned all forms of learning, unless all the teaching was conducted
+by his monks, in the monastery.  I tried to oppose him with all my
+power on that resolution.  All I accomplished was the formation of our
+small Blaisaman.  The masses listened to him when he told them _ "The
+Devil is in Knowledge, unless that Knowledge was conveyed by a
+righteous man of the Almighty" ... but as you see Lloyd, we know the
+real devil."
+
+Lloyd came to realize Brook's thoughts and confirmed them with a nod.
+He could see that Brook had some real influence in the local government
+but no real power.
+
+For the first time since the afternoon, there was a still quiet in the
+room.  A morose presence hung in the air and it felt cold and ugly.
+
+Outside, the people began to yell and scream in ecstasy as the warm
+drizzles finally began to pour on them.  Their moderate prolificacy
+grew stronger with the coming of the rain; where the men chased their
+wives and daughters, their mistresses and their whores, out into the
+streets.  In their uncontrolled lust, they rolled around in the mud,
+like swine, and fornicated with anyone or anything nearby.  It mattered
+very little to them whether it was man, woman, child or animal.  That
+rain was the ill-begotten legacy of the Twentieth Century war.  The
+rain fell only once or twice a year in Lower Phoride.  It was the same
+rain that caused the beautiful vegetation to grow into its remarkable
+splendour.  Throughout the year, the green would survive by the
+watering from the artesian seas beneath the ground, until the next rain
+came.  Some citizens eagerly waited for the rain to come, on that one
+day or night, where they believed that the evil within them would be
+fully satisfied and would leave them if they allowed themselves to be
+fully indulged in whatever manner of perversion happened upon them,
+during that season.
+
+There were those who were afraid.  Mothers, who didn't want to see
+their innocent ravaged, hid in their homes until the rains passed, and
+after the rain, those who hid came out into the streets.  They wouldn't
+be afraid of the pools and puddles because the rain lost its strange
+properties shortly after touching the ground.
+
+When the rains eventually ended the hiding people would emerge to see
+their naked friends and relatives in their frenetic prurience.  They
+would walk amongst them, covering their mouths and noses from the stink
+of the forced orgasms produced by their uncontrolled reaction to being
+caught in the rains.    They would gather-up the injured and cart-away,
+to the incinerators, those that had died from their over-exertions.
+The legacy of the rain was a strange one caused by the chemical
+intermixing of, the now weakened, radiation and the bacterial layers
+that encircled the world high in the atmosphere, released by that
+unspeakable war so many years in antiquity.
+
+
+Several hours passed in conversation within Lloyd's room.
+
+Dearborne cradled Boy, now asleep.
+
+Brook and Lloyd devoured the contents of the book Lloyd had brought,
+and Brook reciprocated by showing Lloyd some of the materials and
+relics that he had in his possession.
+
+The rain, stopping not long before, had resumed.  This time it was
+coming down harder, stealing the attention of the two new friends, as
+they read.
+
+Dearborne, quietly sitting and relaxed, was jolted by a flash of
+lightning and a loud bang of thunder that quickly reported itself.
+
+Boy awoke, startled.  He looked at his surrounding then jumped from
+Dearborne's lap and ran towards the window.   He pulled a large panel
+of wood over the open window to prevent the rain from entering the
+room.  But the rain fell of him.
+
+At once, Brook commanded him to lock himself in his chamber and slide
+the key out beneath the door.  The boy quickly ran from the room, in
+haste to follow what Brook had instructed.
+
+Lloyd, Brook and Dearborne were silent in their concern.
+
+They exchanged several glances of worry about Boy.
+
+"These rains are an evil necromancy over this entire continent.  We
+also experience the rains, in Besten; although, my people do not go
+into it willingly.  We have set aside gardens, throughout the entire
+city, for those to go, if caught in the rain.   We are compassionate
+towards the cruelty of the madness."
+
+Dearborne looked worried.  She touched Brook's hand and questioned him
+about her fears for Boy.  "Will he be alight?" she asked, as he face
+lost its flushed highlights.
+
+
+A pounding sound was heard down in the distant hallway.  It was coming
+from Boy's room.
+
+"He made it to his chamber in time.  Now he tries to come out.  He will
+have to struggle with the rain's curse until it wears off. It is good
+that Boy is young and he was not fully soaked.  Fortunately, the
+recovery should not take long."
+
+Dearborne worried for Boy, since he had never-before been touched by
+the rain and, as far as she knew, he was far too young to have
+experienced any of extreme, or absurd, sexual drives.
+
+The rain caused his body's glands to react by generating vast hormone
+secretions, and he convulsed in an insatiable erotic lust, while he
+poured out on the floor, by the door, by his own hand.
+
+To calm Dearborne and suppress her worry for the boy, Lloyd and Brook
+continued to talk.  Brook told his guest that he recently taught his
+wife all that he knew about the Twentieth Century, revealing to her the
+secrets from that now forgotten time.
+
+"Have you taught anyone, other than Lady Dearborne, about the past?"
+inquired Lloyd.
+
+"Not as of yet, Lloyd!  But I am prepared to teach the boy, for I
+believe that he is ready to understand."  Brook answered.  "We have no
+children of our own and though it would be wonderful, without is truly
+best.  Our lives are too short and petty in the existence of this world
+of miseries.  Dearborne is also spared a terrible fate by the monastics
+who are not permitted their lustful intercourse without the potential
+of a birth."
+
+Lloyd did not believe in Brook's notion of life being so miserable.  He
+tried to give him a small dose of Bestenese faith.
+
+"That is the very same way that the Old Ones had spoken in Besten, but
+they found that our lives could be as long as we wished.  And our lives
+could be worth while, too!  This may even be our religion.  If not, is
+at least the attitude that we possess!
+
+
+Lloyd closed his eyes and yawned.  The talk that they have had, since
+that afternoon, was tiring even though it was fulfilling.  Now he was
+weary.  A need for rest could be seen in Brook's face, as-well-as in
+Dearborne.  They glanced at one another with tear-soft eyes that craved
+sleep.
+
+Dearborne checked Lloyd's bandages before they prepared to leave him.
+
+"You will be fine.  You are fortunate to survive those evil
+electrophorics.  Maybe the true God is watching over you!" she said as
+she took Brook under the arm.
+
+"Rest ... tomorrow we will talk some more."  Brook commanded.
+"Tomorrow, if you can move around, I will show you more things that you
+may not have seen before."
+
+"Thanks to you, both _ my friends."  exclaimed Lloyd.
+
+Lloyd fell to sleep once he lay back, and his saviours left the room.
+
+
+CHAPTER  FOUR
+
+The rain fell throughout the night and into the early morning hours.
+Just before dawn, the rain had stopped and the sky filled with rainbows
+as the sun rose over Carter Pass (named after Brook's grandfather, who
+made Pomperaque a powerful city-state, nearly two centuries earlier).
+
+On the streets were the people who hid from the rains, in the dry
+sanctuaries of their homes.  They came out and gathered up their
+friends and relatives, that laid about in the streets half or entirely
+naked.
+
+Some were still in the dreadful perverted poses brought upon them, by
+the rain.
+
+The gatherers wore masks while they tried to separate those individuals
+still connected in their copulation.  They wore the masks to keep the
+abominable stench of the human and animal excretions, from reaching
+them.
+
+The heat of the morning sun made the horrid reek worsened to an
+overwhelming degree.
+
+Medical men and women walked about and offered aid to those injured in
+the deranged mass orgy.  Most were young girls and boys, killed by the
+frenetic desires of those who found it more to their pleasure to
+fornicate with the bodies of the dead; after having experienced the
+added excitement of killing them; with their fists or anything that
+they could find, to use as weapons.
+
+There were men and boys, dead or dying from excruciating pain, after
+having their genitalia bitten off by some nymphomaniac harlots and
+other erotopathic bitches -- some of who also died, choking while
+trying to swallow their prizes.
+
+In the final reports given to Brook at noon, eighty-eight citizens were
+dead.  Forty-three were women (ranging in age from fifteen to forty),
+twelve were men (mostly around fifty years of age), and the rest were
+children (boys and girls, six to fourteen).
+
+Brook was saddened and alarmed, for this rate of mortality was the
+highest seen in Phoride for almost three hundred years.  He still
+waited for word to come to him, from Upper Phoride and he didn't want
+to think of the numbers there.
+
+The reports of those injured critically and seriously were also high.
+Their numbers reached close to two hundred; again, mostly comprised of
+children.  Many boys developed venereal chancres and scores of young
+girls would now, never be able to bare children.
+
+Even those who were slightly injured had reddened mouths, anus and
+genitals covered with runny infections.  The more painful pustules
+erupted with yellowish-brown, jelly-like fluids that seeped from them,
+resembling the softened putrefaction of carrion.  The most frightening,
+and eerie, result of the rain was the affects that it had on the human
+spirit.  After the rain, there was always a deathly hush over the
+entire city.  Only the gag-like breathing of those hundreds recovering
+from their scourged vainery, could be heard.  This lasted for several
+days and sometimes continued for weeks.
+
+
+There were no regular markets and no trade occurred.  At night, the
+quiet was gravely frightening and it gave the entire land the
+atmosphere of a necropolis.  The buildings were the tombs and the
+people inside were the living dead.
+
+No one ate for days.  Most could not eat from the stink of the
+ejaculations and blood that still covered the streets.  The sight of it
+all caused nausea on its own accord.  Those who were injured didn't eat
+either for they knew that the good food would quicken the runs of pus,
+as the poisons were forced out of them, and their pain would become
+even more unbearable.
+
+The clean-up of the dead and injured was hurried on this day because
+soon after the sun rose, the heat of the day was intense and by noon,
+the carcasses of the animals that had died from the rain, began to rot.
+By now, the sane, unscathed citizens began to remove the corpses from
+the streets and cart them off to the incinerators for burning.
+
+Many vicars, cardinals, novices and other coenobites helped those on
+the streets.  They administered first-aid and prayed for their souls'
+salvation.  But they were the last to appear on the streets that
+morning, after they cleaned-up their own mess at Halls.  Within the
+Quadrangle of the Cathedral, all the members were locked-in during the
+rain, with dozens of whores and other town's wenches, that were
+promised good food and a place to stay for one month, in return for
+their services when the eagerly awaited rain finally arrived.
+
+These merry women adored the great Halls Cathedral.  It was the most
+enormous structure in all of Phoride and the other lands on the
+continent.  The structure reached for the sky.  Its lean, slender
+appearance was capped by a crystal and gold ornate dome, with a spire.
+Buttresses flew out, all about from the slender central pillar; where
+at its base, tall and wide copper doors majestically opened and closed
+as people walked in and out of the main chapel.
+
+
+Extended behind the pillar and into an oval shaped building was the
+area of the monastery, serving as the dormitories, rectories, scholarly
+libraries and private rooms for the monks.  This residential building
+also housed the ArchBishop's office, wherein he conducted all his
+business of decision.  Although this was one day of heavy mourning and
+discontent, there were plans at hand, and there were thoughts to be
+exchanged.  All this was owed to the ArchBishop's ill-at-ease feeling,
+that was brought on by Lord Brook's refusal to meet with him for such a
+long time.  The ArchBishop was always in his office, seated in his
+leather chair, rumpled in holy softness, and able to turn in full
+circles on its rounded legs.  The ArchBishop was the same age as Brook
+but his hair was darker and the lines on his face were less defined.
+They framed his jutting, hairy brows and silvery-grey eyes, with a
+sculptured precision.
+
+His physique reminded one of a defeated athlete.  His paunchy flab
+lolled about his waist like Saturn's rings, and the texture of his skin
+lacked softness, appearing course and strangely tight.
+
+His clothing shimmered in rich extravagance as he sat in his chair
+dressed in his ethereal garb made of the finest white satin.  His black
+surplice, thrown over it, opened on the front and revealed his bulging
+gut as he sat.  On his head rested the constant sign of authority, his
+tall white and gold mitre, studded about with rare jewels, gifted to
+him by the Heads of other lands.  Across the desk from him sat the
+Cardinal Allen.  Unlike the great ArchBishop, he was more modestly
+clothed in the handmade magenta habit, that all the other Cardinals and
+monks wore within the monastery walls.
+
+The ArchBishop in his chair, listened to the choral chants coming from
+the chapel.  The melodic resonance was made by the dozens of novices
+and vicars as they sang their praise to the great forces of the
+Almighty.  They gave their thanks for their lives, their homes, their
+food and the virgins sent to them, for the pleasures of administrating
+their blessings to them.
+
+
+During the 'Praise to the Almighty' hymn, the ArchBishop, with his
+greatly inflated ego, listened in quiet and not tolerating
+interruptions.  Afterall, their praise was being made to him alone, and
+he felt obliged to listen to them.
+
+The chants echoed throughout Halls and its Quadrangle.  Soon, all the
+senior monks joined in the melodic praise from wherever they were;
+whether in their gardens, in their stalls or strolling along the
+colonnade beneath the dormitory buildings.  After a few minutes the
+whole area around Canon's Butte, where the Halls Cathedral stood, was
+filled with this song.  This was the only sound heard, making its way
+through to the rest of Pomperaque, as it struggled out of its misery.
+
+The office seemed to have an identity all of its own.  On the walls
+hung the likeness of the Archbishop and the ancient Canon
+Di'Vaticanus.  On the number of shelves about the room were placed
+rare and antiquated texts that dealt with their faith, and there were
+equally-rare statues of long-dead saints; those whose names were all,
+but few, forgotten.
+
+As the 'Praise to the Almighty' ended and another hymn began the
+ArchBishop sat up in his chair and resumed the talk that he was earlier
+engaged in, with Cardinal Allen.
+
+"I am pleased that you had found an opportune time to speak with her."
+he said in his roguish, powerful voice.
+
+"Her thoughts seemed preoccupied, when I first spoke to her.  I
+finally asked her to arrange the visit with Brook and Your Holiness,
+but that disturbance had occurred in the square and I do not know if
+she remembered to tell her Lord Brook.  We should have had a reply by
+now!"  Cardinal Allen relayed to the ArchBishop his brief encounter
+with the lovely Dearborne.  He also admitted to him, the desires that
+he felt for her, during it all.
+
+The ArchBishop smiled, his evil, butterflied lips turned up on each end
+while the rest of his mouth stayed unchanged.  His eyes sparkled with
+intrigue and cynicism, and with the knowledge of predictability.
+
+"Our Lord Scullion never replies.  I really don't expect him to -- now,
+more than usual, and we would waste our time to go to him.  We would be
+told by his wretched servants that 'He is not in, call again!'.  Then
+I, like a fool, would wait for another time.  Now, more than ever, we
+must strive for an alliance between us.  His power is a great danger to
+mine and he knows it deep inside his heart.  His is a presence to be
+feared in Phoride!"
+
+Cardinal Allen seemed confused by the change of the ArchBishop's usual
+attitude towards Brook Scullion.  He couldn't see the true feelings in
+his Master's eyes and he didn't know whether he was frightened or just
+being careful about the great sovereign of Phoride.
+
+Allen stood up and went to the window that was behind him, across the
+room.  He looked out to see a number of the monks' service-wenches.
+They all lounged naked by the courtyard fountain, recuperating from
+their follies in the rain the previous evening.  Beside them were a
+number of young novices and some messeigneurs.  He looked over to a
+picture of the ArchBishop and sighed in a breathless manner, until he
+finally looked straight ahead again and nodded to himself in approval
+of his proposed thought.  He turned to the ArchBishop.  When their eyes
+met, he knew that maybe Allen had designed a cunning solution.
+
+However! ...
+
+"Why don't we just dispose of our Lord Scullion?  Then we will have no
+threat and you will be the supreme One, in Phoride!"  he shouted to his
+Holiness.
+
+"But, my loyal Allen, I already am the most supreme.  Why do you think
+that he hasn't told the Phoridenes about the ancient people?  He has
+the proof, just as we do; and because the citizens regard him as highly
+as they worship me, care must be taken to keep him alive.  Our
+advantage lies in my hope that he does not know the extent of his
+power."
+
+"That is odd, your Holiness!  If he indeed has the power, the ability,
+to destroy your authority, then we do not fare well.  You remember the
+other rebellions against you, you Holiness?  He, too, can destroy our
+position of power.  He can be just like Martin of Ohigh, Hudson of
+Netheda, or maybe even like Harvard Bartlet of Besten.  And don't
+forget the single disobedience by those people, like that Virunese pig,
+Empal.  Our unity has become weak and their's has grown!"  Cardinal
+Allen worked himself into a frenzy.
+
+The ArchBishop, with a cool attitude towards the talk of his imminent
+downfall, calmed his loyal servant and set him straight as to the
+workings of Brook's mind, and the probability that nothing at all would
+happen.
+
+He lifted his hands and gestured for Allen to stop.  He smiled and
+swayed his chair to and fro while he spoke.  Cardinal Allen slinked
+back towards the desk.  Apparently, his nervousness was greater than
+the Almighty's himself.
+
+"You worry too much.  I still have Phoride under control, my
+favoured-one.  I have the advantage over our Lord Scullion.  As I said,
+I don't suppose that he knows the full extent of his power and the
+people are also unsure.  Confusion! ... Confusion, Brother Allen, is
+our ally. If he tries anything against us, we shall call him a
+blasphemer, and he does not want this."  he smiled at his own
+deductions, but Allen did not appear to be very pleased.
+
+"Scullion has ruled Phoride for as long as you.  Do you really believe
+that this man, who has ruled for nearly thirty years would cower at a
+charge of blasphemy?"
+
+The ArchBishop laughed as he arranged his surplice, folded beneath his
+gut.
+
+
+"Yes, I do believe it, most favoured.  He thinks that the people follow
+only me.  I proved this to him when I passed the Canon Education Law.
+He will be controlled ... in time."  He leaned back in the chair, a dry
+squeak cut the choral hymn in the background and nurtured the evil
+mechanism within the room.
+
+The singing in the background moved further into the distance as the
+monks shifted to a different section of the building. They chanted the
+appropriate hymns in each of the spiritual rooms.
+
+Allen spoke of Dearborne once again.  He seemed to be angry and oddly
+annoyed about her apparent inability to produce Brook's offspring over
+the past twenty years.  They were the only couple in the land to be
+together for such a long time without begetting children.  Everyone
+questioned that but the answers were always the same.  They weren't
+ready, and are young enough to wait some while longer.  Allen made his
+fun of the man, Brook.
+
+"What of his wife, Holiness?  What of her chastity for these past
+years?  What a coward he is, to be wed to one so fair, as she.  Twelve
+years of marriage and no children, and you do not allow Our right, to
+have her bare one of Our Holy children."
+
+"Hush!  You will have the chance, my most loyal friend.  But we must be
+vigilant for the appropriate opportunity."
+
+Allen smiled at the ArchBishop's approval and with eager ears waited to
+know when.
+
+"You are right about the length of their marriage, with no children.
+Soon they have celebrations of their joining.  We shall attend. You may
+have her obey your whims, at that time, but not before and not after.
+The time will make itself available to you, then!"  finished the
+ArchBishop.
+
+"May humbled thanks, Most High and Wise." said Allen as he quickly
+trotted to his master, the ArchBishop and kissed his hand.
+
+
+"Enough, Allen!  You tire me!  Go and make the necessary preparations
+and give it your fullest attention."
+
+"Yes, Your Holiness!" and after his bow, he left the Almighty to his
+own thoughts, as he listened to the chanting choir, again drawing near
+as they made their way to the upper spirals of the tower.
+
+He relaxed in his chair and patted his belly.  He stretched and sighed,
+as he leafed through some papers and tabloids.
+
+Soon, he delved into deep contemplation about Brook and himself, and
+their respective positions in the land.  Through his mind ran a
+whirlwind of thought that concerned the so-believed misfortune in
+Brook's power.  He felt uneasy over the total disunity that could
+occur, if the mobs of Phoride rose up against him.  It could happen if
+the past were revealed, as truth, in place of the Canon's
+'disillusionment'  commandment.  What if they accepted it?  He wondered.
+
+He remembered that he attained his rule of churchly affairs after the
+death of his father.  He remembered that he had to discharge the
+promise made to his father, after he died, and so changed Phoride and
+all the adjacent lands, to meet his own needs.  His need was to receive
+the fullest devotion and love from every individual in Halls, and the
+realm, and to bask in their worship of him, as their god.
+
+He slowly got up and walked about the room.  He took off his surplice
+and hung it in a chiffonnier then, before he closed it, he drew from a
+small compartment a large napkin, scented with the essence of Nethedan
+lilacs.  He touched it to his nose.
+
+The choir echoed in the background.  The heavenly hymn that they were
+singing was 'God's Tribute to Canon',  the first over-praised god of
+the continent.
+
+
+Listening to the choir, the ArchBishop's spirits were lifted, as if he
+were the Canon and the praise was to him.  Although he had been
+considered as a god in Phoride, for nearly two score years, he was
+still envious of his great-grand-ancestor; for what he had accomplished
+had set the method for those gods after him, to follow.
+
+He smiled heartily as he thought to himself, about the total
+unadulterated domination of whatever he chose to control, and whenever
+he chose to control it.   And once, he spoke aloud to himself.
+"Phoride and its all, are mine!"  He clasped his hands as he walked
+about the room and to the window.  He looked out at the naked women
+lying by the fountain.  Around them were young monks rubbing
+palm-butter on the ladies' bodies, to prevent the sun from burning
+their overused flesh.
+
+
+
+The hours flew by in their relentless journey to forever.  Already they
+had passed into the afternoon.  The ArchBishop still looked down at the
+fountain, where some more regenerated, sweat-greased ladies and some
+horny vicars were at it again.  He was slightly angered when he saw
+their folly.  He knew that he would have to take disciplinary actions
+on them.  He had told them, many times before, not to play with their
+guests in open view.  But this thought, however, didn't deter him from
+looking at the shapely objects below.
+
+Soon, there was a rap at the door and it slowly opened.  The ArchBishop
+turned to see who it was.  It was the Cardinal Levy; a large brawny
+Nasin man, similar in age to the ArchBishop, but balding.  His face
+always seemed blue from the perpetual shadow of hair, that grew with
+phenomenal quickness.
+
+
+In front of him stood a pretty young girl about fifteen years old.  Her
+large, frightened eyes flitted from side to side.  Her heart pounded
+within her chest.  Her delicate but firm breasts rose and fell with
+each breath that she took, and the fair skin on her arms and legs were
+dotted with goose-bumps.  She had a sense of alarm and apprehension
+within herself, as she stood in that office.  She had never before seen
+the ArchBishop, and only one hour ago, she was summoned to appear
+before him.
+
+What had she done?  What sin had she committed?
+
+She felt like crying but she couldn't.  She was terrified at the
+questions that ran through her imaginative mind.  She feared punishment
+for whatever she had done, and she dearly wished that she knew what
+that may be.
+
+"Will there be anything else, Holiness?"  asked the Nasino.
+
+"Yes.  Bring food and drink within the hour!"
+
+"Yes, Holiness."  said Cardinal Levy, then left them both in his office.
+
+The ArchBishop stayed silent as he looked-over the beautiful young
+woman.  He stepped closer to her, but she inched backward and up
+against the door.  She held the veil that she wore over her head and
+shoulders, tightly in her hands.
+
+He stopped his advance towards her, to let himself take-in the full
+extent of her pure, young beauty;  the tresses of gold that hid beneath
+the veil, the soft roundness of her form and the delicate prettiness of
+her bare feet and shapely legs.
+
+Her large, sky-blue eyes, reflected the objects in the room and shone
+like sapphires when they caught the sunlight that beamed in, from the
+outside.
+
+The choir still chanted in the Cathedral.  The voices of all those men
+rose into the groins of the chapel within, and then echoed out towards
+the town.
+
+The ArchBishop grinned at the girl and asked her name but she did not
+answer.  Her fright robbed her of her speech and after he asked her
+twice, in a soft and kindly manner, he at last boomed harshly.
+
+"What is your name, my child?"  he ordered and moved closer to her.  
+
+She showed nervousness when pinned up against the door with nowhere
+else to move.  She began to speak, her melodic voice trembled and
+stuttered.
+
+"My name is Mercedes, Holiness! -- Please, please do not hurt me!  I
+don't know what sins I have committed but please, I repent them!"
+
+He smiled again and put his hands on her shoulders.  He assured her
+that he would not hurt her.  However, he soon began to fondle her,
+rubbing her shoulders and neck with his fore-fingers.  She said
+nothing.  She stood still as if frozen, her heart jumping inside her
+while the choir crescendoed into the finale of their 'Hymn To The
+Virgins!'  He reckoned her, his sparkling evil eyes sized-to-mind and
+personal passions, her plump and full mouth that glistened with the
+juices of youth.
+
+"Sh-h-h-h!"  he commanded her in mock gentleness.  "You are not here to
+be punished, my darling child.  You are here to be blessed."
+
+By the gentle, fatherly sound of his voice, he quelled the fright from
+her, and from her confused, unsure expression, emerged a trifle, but
+still apparently trusting smile.
+
+"Bless me, Holiness?  I do not understand.  Why bless me?  I am no
+one!"  she told him in a half-happy, half-honoured tone.
+
+He smiled at her as he affectionately took her dainty chin into his
+hand and told her the reason for her being brought to him.
+
+"But you are someone, darling Mercedes.  You have been chosen on this
+day, from all the fair maidens of this land, to mother my Holy Child."
+
+She felt cold again and went aback.  His hand dropped away from her
+chin as he slid the veil off her head.  She slowly shook her head and
+touched her uncovered, golden-fleeced hair, unable to believe that her
+god would ravish her.  And she tried in every way, to prevent what she
+feared would happen and she pleaded with him.
+
+"My god, I cannot!  I am promised to another, and to him I am to give
+my chastity.  Forgive me, Most High Lord.  The honour is great but I
+cannot accept."  she looked down to her feet and waited to be
+dismissed.  She had thought that her appeal to him about her betrothal,
+would touch him, but instead he was angered by her disobedience to his
+charge.
+
+"You can't refuse, my child!  To refuse suggests that you are possessed
+by a demon of vast impurity!"  his voice echoed throughout her mind.
+She was frightened again and did, so desperately want to leave but she
+had to listen.
+
+"To refuse is to pronounce death upon yourself, and you do not want to
+die ... DO YOU, my darling Mercedes?"
+
+Her mind spun with twisted visions.  Jugglers played with her eyes to
+amuse those watching.  Acrobats flew over her netted bowels and
+wrestlers squeezed the living soul from her heart.
+
+In a desperate craze, she fell to her knees and grabbed his sweaty
+hands and kissed them with terrorized respect.  She grovelled at his
+feet and further pleaded with him, to choose another, more worthy than
+her.
+
+"Oh, please, Holiness -- don't do this to me!  Let me give my chastity
+to my promised, Hartford.  Then you may come in, onto me!"
+
+The ArchBishop's indifference to her pleading grew, as did his anger.
+He had wanted her for days, ever since his searchers showed him a
+likeness of her, swimming alone in the crater lake.  She would be his
+best, he thought.  Of all the others, she is the most beautiful and
+would bring to him the highest fulfilment and the heartiest offspring.
+
+"You cannot bargain away from a privilege!"  he told her.  "This is a
+favour done for you.  All the world will look to you in praise and will
+worship you.  You will be proud when you hear the people shout their
+homage to you ... 'Paise Mercedes, Mother of Grace!'.  Don't you want
+this?"
+
+She continued to beg her position but he paid no attention.  She
+repeated, over and over, "please don't do this to me!",  while
+embracing him, still down on her knees.  She cried and tried to regain
+her breath but her spirit weakened and totally fell to the surrender of
+his ultimate dominance over her.
+
+"I Am the Almighty.  You must obey me!"  he barked at her, as he leered
+down fixed upon her eyes.
+
+Mercedes cried hysterically.  She allowed her body drop all the way to
+the floor.  She turned limp and helpless like a weak little kitten with
+no hopes of survival.
+
+The ArchBishop bent down to her and took her face into his hand.  He
+wiped her tears with his scented napkin.  He gently seized her by the
+shoulders and slowly lifted her, and the choir in the background grew
+stronger in volume.  He embraced her and his hands groped for the
+lacings that kept her clothing closed around her.  Then for a final
+time he rumbled at her, eagerly trying to make her realize that what he
+was about to do to her, was a blessing and not a violation of her body,
+as some were sure to regard it.
+
+
+"You will thank me one day, my lovely child.  You will bare my son or
+daughter -- the child of god -- and the world will pay fealty to you,
+and you will be happy."  and, as he finished his self-forgiving
+reasoning to her, he ran his hands over her breasts and down to the
+smooth roundness of her hips.  He kissed her mouth and brought his
+hands to her shoulders where he moved his fingers beneath the material
+of her garb and disrobed her.  Her dress fell, in around her feet,
+revealing her silky smooth whiteness.
+
+She still cried but her hysteria left her, just as did her spirit and
+her self-value, turning her into a submissive bag of flesh that rattled
+with blood and bones.
+
+Like a child's rag doll, she gave pleasure to her master while he toyed
+with her until, at long last, he lifted his white satin frock.
+
+The choirs' hymn-sing rose to a grandiose peak that resonated
+throughout the length of Halls, then stopped.
+
+On the other side of the monastery were the libraries and the
+private-roms for learning.  Daily, in those rooms, novices and the
+youngest vicars learned their history of the Canon and all that was
+necessary to be known, as men of the Almighty.
+
+Cardinals were usually the most learned of the monks, given to train
+the younger and inexperienced in the ways of life, love, worship and
+rule over the peasantry.
+
+While the ArchBishop made his studies in his office, so did the novices
+and grade vicars.  They learned the proper methods for the torture of
+rebels and the demonically possessed.  They learned that which assured
+the longest, most painful and lasting punishments that insured against
+quick death.
+
+Then there were those who taught proper methods of seducing and
+satisfying women.  The Cardinal Allen was one such instructor, in this
+what he called 'an art'.
+
+In a dark room filled with books and artifacts, the Cardinal Allen was
+having  and instruction session with one of the young vicars named
+Tohm, and a slanted-eyed wench, from Lÿnondan, called Ssidel.
+
+On a large rumpled couch lay Ssidel, with Tohm, clumsily balancing
+himself overtop of her as he took is instructions in making Allen's
+pronounced 'art'.  Ssidel lay there.  She didn't make a sound or move a
+muscle.  She seemed dulled to what was happening and poor Tohm was once
+again becoming frustrated at his failure to please her.  He felt
+ashamed at his adolescent inabilities, since this was his third time at
+his class and the third at his failure.
+
+Tohm begged Cardinal Allen, with all his heart, to tell him what he was
+doing wrong and requested him to demonstrate that was in which he does
+it, and how he manages it so well.
+
+Allen showed him, over and over again, until the Rogjan chanted from
+the chapel spire, calling the monks to their evening prayers to the
+Almighty;  to ask him for his blessings on their food, and on their
+other necessities.
+
+
+CHAPTER  FIVE
+
+The days passed.
+
+The streets of Pomperaque were silent for most part and only now the
+people were slowly recovering from the ordeal that was brought on them
+by the rain.
+
+Lloyd, too, was recovering for several days, ever since Dearborne and
+Boy dragged him home.  Now he strolled from room to room and through
+the hallways, stretching his stiffened legs and getting to know his new
+surroundings.
+
+He wore an ivory-coloured frock and a black puma-fur vest, over which a
+long, dark-blue cape hung down, to keep him warm.  The day was oddly
+cool and cloudy and some feared that the rains would fall again.
+Others, however, knew that this wouldn't happen. The rains hardly ever
+fell again after a few days of warmth and clear skies that followed the
+first and usually last rain.
+
+Lloyd stopped at the end of the hallway, and looked out the window at
+the panoramic view of the city of Pomperaque.  Everything was dry,
+including the distant farm terraces.
+
+
+One would never believe that rain fell in the city because the rich
+land soaked up the water and dispersed the rain's potency into the
+vegetation, which already seemed to be a meter taller than what it was
+a few days before.
+
+People were in the streets.  They worked in groups of five or ten,
+called Keys.  They were pulling up unwanted weeds and grasses from the
+hard ground and from around the buildings.  Although the rain had
+blessed the crops and forests, with quick growth, it also cursed the
+city-people with the task of removing the unwanted, thick undergrowth
+from the streets. That job sometimes took them several days to
+complete.  They threw the extracted vegetation into carts and hauled
+them over to the organic recycling factories, outside the city.
+
+He looked straight ahead and saw the great Halls Cathedral, standing
+tall and solitary atop the butte, on the other side of the valley.
+That lovely valley had many stone and mud buildings, in rows on the
+different levels of ground that at one time served as agricultural
+land.  Right in between him and Halls was the town square where just a
+few days ago, he nearly joined his ancestors. Now, for the first time,
+he saw the enormous distance to which Dearborne and Boy had to drag
+him; secreting him, to the Blue Mansion. The feat induced a respect in
+him, for his frail-looking hostess.  That lady that had as much
+courage, as she had beauty.
+
+Down the hallway, from where he came, he heard a noise and turned
+around to see what it was.  One of the chambermaids went into the room,
+that was his to recuperate in, to clean it and change the bedding.
+
+Coming from behind her, towards Lloyd, was Boy.  His walk had just a
+suggestion of purpose as he neared the man that he and Dearborne had
+rescued from death.
+
+"Good morning, sir!"  said Boy, while still quite far from him.
+
+
+Lloyd smiled and returned the salutation, allowing Boy to give him the
+message that he obviously carried with him.
+
+"My Lord requested me to take you to his private room, sir!"
+
+"Right away?"  asked Lloyd.
+
+"Yes, sir.  If it pleases you?"  continued Boy.  "Very well, my lad,
+lead the way!"  Lloyd accepted and Boy guided him around the hallways
+and down some stairs, to Brook's private room.  His viewing den.
+
+Lloyd was astonished to see the polished walls covered with rare
+paintings and tapestries, and rows of statues dotted each side of the
+hall, separated by varying spaces.
+
+Some of the paintings were very old indeed and Lloyd didn't even try to
+imagine the dates of their making, but some he did recognize
+immediately, as late Twentieth Century, organic-colour pictographs.
+
+He had only seen one other such painting, and that was in the ancient
+great vault library, unearthed in Besten. He was impressed by the
+wealth of the prehistoric items that Brook chose to display, without
+fear of exchanging words with the great feign master of the butte.
+
+Lloyd was greatly confused about Brook's fear of the ArchBishop.  If he
+really was afraid.
+
+He thought to ask his host about the thoughts that he possessed about
+it all.
+
+Soon, Boy stopped walking and motioned with his hand towards two
+gigantic doors of oak and iron.  He pounded three times on it before he
+opened it and allowed Lloyd to enter.
+
+When Lloyd walked into the room, Boy closed the door and left for
+Dearborne's parlour.  Lloyd hadn't the chance to thank him but he could
+see that, to Boy, it didn't make much of a difference.
+
+
+Brook was sitting in his high-backed chair, in the middle of the room.
+His back was to the door and this seemed to be quite odd, to Lloyd,
+when he thought that a man who was afraid of someone, would not sit in
+such a way, as to lend an advantage to his opponent.
+
+He stood at the door and looked about the room, at the far curtained
+wall, the huge cabinet, the statues and several musical instruments in
+the far corner.
+
+"Come in and make yourself comfortable."  said Brook.
+
+"Thank-you, my Lord!"  he answered, and from beside the doors, with his
+stronger hand, pulled a tall wooden stool to the Lord's chair.
+
+Brook looked at him with a smile and welcoming face and Lloyd pointed
+to the musical instruments and smiled.
+
+"You play music?"
+
+"No!"  answered Brook and continued.  "No!  They were my brother's.  He
+played, and beautifully.  It was like the great God had entered his
+hands and his voice filled the walls of this place as if it were made
+up of the voices of a hundred seraphims.  When he departed, these
+stayed as a reminder to us all of Manguino's goodness."  Lloyd couldn't
+decide the meaning behind those feelings expressed by Brook.  His words
+impressed with thoughts of sorrow, respect and praise, and yet his tone
+was utterly opposite to them, and seemed as if it were being subdued by
+him.
+
+There was no mention yet, why Brook called him to his side and he
+didn't think that it was to talk about the memory of his brother.  Then
+he remembered that Brook offered to show him some materials of
+knowledge from the Twentieth Century and about the past millennia, when
+he recovered.
+
+He looked at the shelves of books adjacent to the cabinet and along the
+wall to the left of the entrance.  However, all the books on the
+shelves were of this age; by poets and literary artists like Maxxwel,
+Bothelli, Croii, Lapinz and Argynossti.  There were no encyclopedias or
+such books from antiquity and Lloyd grew alarmed and wary.
+
+"You were going to show me some things that you have about the ancient
+land?"  asked Lloyd.
+
+Brook smiled and winked at him.
+
+"My, you are eager, aren't you?"
+
+Lloyd remained quiet and Brook started to show him the promised
+antiquities.
+
+"Look around you, Lloyd.  The knowledge within these pages will never
+again be conceived by man's mind, and they will be forgotten, if
+suppression is continued by that almighty megalomaniac."
+
+"But, my Lord, all these writers are from our own time."  stated
+Brook's guest.
+
+Brooked grinned, touched his shoulder and pointed to one of the books
+on the shelf behind him.
+
+"Look inside that book!"
+
+Lloyd looked at the shelf and grabbed for the book.  He glanced at
+Brook to make certain that he took the correct one and Brook nodded,
+still smiling.  With his eyes, he motioned for Lloyd to look inside.
+
+Lloyd eyed the title and his face showed frustration, as his voice rose
+in annoyance.
+
+"You joke, my Lord!  This is poetry.  'Djenaud Smarte" ... it's not
+even very good poetry!"
+
+"Look inside."  Brook ordered once more.  "I never imagined you to get
+annoyed so easily ... maybe you are afraid -- or untrusting?"
+
+
+Brook's words seemed to cut deeply into Lloyd's conscience.  For a
+brief moment he had forgotten that he was saved from sure death by
+those of this household.
+
+He quietly opened the book and thumbed through a few pages.  His eyes
+finally flamed as he read the actual title page:  "ELEMENTS OF
+DEMOCRACY".
+
+Lloyd looked up at Brook in silent apology.
+
+"All these books are like this one!"  Lloyd stated with certainty, but
+lost his countenance when Brook confessed to him.
+
+"No.  Unfortunately, there are just a handful scattered throughout the
+others here.  But I do have one book that surpasses them all.  That
+one, the one I have hidden, is my prize.  However, there are other
+things that I want to show you first!"  and he rose from his chair and
+moved to the cabinets.  When he reached them, he turned and showed his
+key to Lloyd before he unlocked and opened the doors.
+
+"Yes, my friend ... I have much to show you.  And I suppose that this
+one would be the best to show to you first."  The doors of the cabinet
+flew open.  Lloyd's eyes fixed themselves into a stare on the rows of
+buttons and meters, marked with numbers and letters -- some with
+familiar and other with unfamiliar symbols.
+
+In the centre of the unit's structure hung a flat, dark-glassed panel,
+and when Brook pushed some buttons, writing began to appear across it.
+
+                'ARCHIVAL TAPE #371.4931-T
+                ... entry - October 13, 1982.
+                -- Planets line up in even axis, on one side of the sun.
+                -- Earth experiences catastrophic gravity changes,
+                   resulting in quakes and unusual tidal activity.
+                -- Parts of many continents are submerged following
+                   sudden ocean rise.
+
+        _ * for further information, select video record m-oo10-1982."
+
+
+Brook offered Lloyd to  push the buttons in the select numbers on the
+rectangular board and then waited for results, but nothing happened.
+Brook then turned him around to the wall opposite them, that was draped
+with a large dark curtain.
+
+"The curtain will move to reveal pictures that move."  explained Brook.
+
+Lloyd watched the wall and the drapes covering it, pull back, into the
+corners.  On the wall, he saw the large white screen and moving
+pictures that he recognized as ancient video tape.
+
+From the cabinet came a man's voice and pictures on the wall, matched
+what the voice was describing.
+
+                'Shuttles were sent into deep space to record the
+                 phenomenon of the planets, in our solar system,
+                 aligning on the same side of our sun.
+                 The world watched as the planets drew closer in
+                 their conjunction and in their gravitational
+                 resistances, every one of the planets experienced
+                 their own fatalities.'
+
+In the utmost quiet did Brook and Lloyd stand there listening to the
+tinny voice.
+
+                'Mercury began to rotate in quick revolutions and
+                 Venus experienced a contrary orbit, and fire
+                 storms engulfed its surface.   On Earth, ocean 
+                 levels rose and fell drastically with every passing
+                 hour, and the land was disrupted by quakes and great
+                 upheavals as the planet changed in its polarity.
+                 Soon thereafter, the surface was pounded by
+                 thousands of small but devastating asteroids.'
+
+
+The men couldn't believe the sights that were being presented to them,
+and they couldn't decide what was more terrifying -- the descriptions
+or the actual pictures of the cataclysm.
+
+                'Volcanic eruptions broke the surface of Mars.
+                 Jupiter's red spot increased in size until it
+                 covered the planet's entire centre.  Saturn
+                 increased in its tilt towards the sun.  Uranus
+                 wobbled like a balloon in a breeze and Neptune
+                 captured Pluto and its moon Charon, claiming them
+                 as its own.'
+
+"This is truly remarkable!"  said Lloyd, his expression was bewildered
+like Boy's usually was.  He smiled at Brook, and Brook tipped his head
+towards the screen, telling Lloyd with his actions to keep watching.
+He did.
+
+The strange voice undulated from the cabinet, as more moving images
+were vomited onto the screen.  The voice made a commentary on the
+Earth's people joining together, to dig themselves out of the solar
+cataclysm of 1982.  Then the screen went blank and immediately a drone
+came from the cabinet, and more writing was printing out onto the
+black-glassed panel.
+
+                'ARCHIVAL TAPE #371.5039-D
+
+                ... June 5, 1986
+                -- As it has been feared for three decades, the final
+                   conflict has happened.
+                -- Following their defeat from the Chinese, in May,
+                   the Soviets flowed south into the Middle-East, and
+                   laid seige to Jerusalem, after a great battle on
+                   the plains of Megiddo.  As it was Biblically
+                   prophesied, Armageddon had come to pass.
+
+        -- * for more information, select video record OA-06-1986.'
+
+
+Brook punched up more video playback and taped images continued.  The
+pictures showed people in massive exodus, heading for the highest
+mountains that the could reach.  They tried to find some kind of
+shelter from the radiation fallout because, the two great nations:
+China and the United States of America, foolishly agreed to the use of
+limited nuclear warfare.
+
+Then, on the screen, there were cities falling into piles of rubble,
+after they were hit by missiles.
+
+
+People were in confusion over the horrible death. The excited
+commentator explained the state of tension in the world and made the
+situation sound hopeless.  His message was, that the end had come.
+
+The screen went blank and silence hung over the room, giving a cold and
+eerie feeling to both men.
+
+"Every time, it is the same for me!"  Brook admitted.  "My heart is
+torn apart at the pains that I see."
+
+Lloyd's in awe expression had left him.  He too felt as Brook did, full
+of sorrow and anger.
+
+"If only there was some way to change what had happened."  he remarked,
+and slowly shifted back to Brook.
+
+"They were supposed to be civilized.  They could have prevented that
+war but instead they chose to rid their problems by trying total
+genocide.  They accumulated great knowledge and possessed god-like
+powers through their machines.  But they used the earth as their toy,
+until, like
+infants, they broke it."
+
+Lloyd sat down, removed and folded his cape over the back of Brook's
+chair.  Silence held both men as they collected their thoughts, forcing
+into their own hearts a coldness of indifference to what they observed.
+
+Lloyd shattered the annoying silence between them as he stood up and
+went to Brook, by his cabinets.
+
+"What do you call this machine, my Lord?"
+
+"I do not know the actual name, but I call it my gadget.  My father
+gave this one to me and told me of a hollow mountain, where there is
+one that is much greater.    Unfortunately,   the ArchBishop has one,
+too."
+
+Lloyd, calmer now, watched the projected images of the destruction and
+misery with Brook.  He revealed that they also have gadgets like this
+one, in Besten.  It was yet another artifact unearthed from the vault
+library, there.
+
+"The ancient peoples called them computers, I believe.  Knowledge could
+be given to it and later, one could retrieve it again, if needed.  The
+Prominants of Besten had only just begun to understand their workings
+and uses, when the ArchBishop banned trade with us.  So we had to
+divert our attentions to becoming self-sufficient."
+
+Lloyd pushed some buttons on the flat key pad and the black-glass panel
+displayed some more words.  The white screen again showed the rapid
+images.  The growth of human life and their transportation, throughout
+the suppressed history of their people (up to the Twentieth Century).
+All this flashed by in a matter of minutes.
+
+Lloyd and Brook resumed their conference while they watched the screen.
+
+"Maybe he heard about the excavation and what was found.  Maybe this
+frightened him."  Brook considered.
+
+"If so, then why did he impose the embargo on us?  Surely he'd know
+that would only infuriate us; and if we did have something to hurt his
+power with, do you suppose that we'd hesitate to use it?"
+
+Brook shrugged unknowingly and smiled as he delivered a quick-witted
+answer.
+
+"I didn't say that he was a smart man!"  he said, then they both
+laughed.
+
+Soon, the note of conversation once again became serious.
+
+"Why hasn't he tried to destroy your computer?"  asked Lloyd.
+
+
+"He knows that I won't use it!"
+
+Lloyd was confused by Brook's reply, and Brook explained to Lloyd his
+reason for not using the computer against the ArchBishop.
+
+"My people would not be able to understand this machine.  So, if I were
+to use it against the ArchBishop, he would surely turn around and call
+me an evil sorcerer, out to befuddle and possess the citizens' minds
+and souls."
+
+"But the people,"  Lloyd interrupted,  "They know you well and they
+look up to you.  Certainly they would like to see the Almighty thrown
+down from his authority?"
+
+Brook shook his head and paced around.
+
+"I have no guarantees about this and I don't want to engage in a civil
+war, even if indeed there are enough to back me.  I do know in fact,
+that at least, half of Phoride will back me!"  he explained, then Lloyd
+added.
+
+"I am surprised that he hasn't tried to destroy it.  If you were to get
+half of Phoride to join with you, I am certain that Besten, Virune, and
+even some of the Krolalin and Ohigh, would unite against that tyrant!"
+
+What Lloyd said was true. Many of the territories would, without
+question, join with Brook.  However, Brook explained to Lloyd that, if
+he did allow the other regions to join him, they too could eventually
+become a threat to his rule.  Lloyd tried to quell Brook's fears.  He
+promised him that the Bestenese do respect his powers and his
+abilities, and that they all would, with all their hearts and souls,
+fight to help him keep his rule.  "I play weak to buy me time.  To
+think."  Brook confided.  "I don't doubt that I could destroy him but
+it would be at the expense of too many lives.  I united Upper and Lower
+Phoride some twenty years ago.  Then, there were many that died.  Now,
+I can't see them divided, and I will not be the instrument to cause it."
+
+"I understand!"  is all that Lloyd said, breathing out a wet sigh.
+
+Brook weighed all his reasons for not rising up.  He expressed that, if
+he did indeed decide to go against that pig at Halls, that  evil man
+would have received prior knowledge of it.
+
+"I found ears in the walls and I removed them all.  Since then, I have
+stayed inside and made certain that there were no more intrusions or
+listenings.  Some of his robed geese came here once, and they did try
+to ruin my gadgets, but they couldn't open or break into the cabinet.
+It is made of three strong metals and is overlaid with oak, inside and
+out."
+
+Lloyd began to understand Brook's position.  He is a very powerful man,
+successfully intimidated by petty fears.  Fears as trifle as being
+called a blasphemer or sorcerer but most of all, the fear that the
+unity of Phoride would fall because of him.
+
+Their attention was focused on the screen, at the images of flying
+machines.  Great metal monstrosities that shrieked when they flew, and
+that were able to carry countless numbers of people to amy place in the
+whole world.
+
+"They were remarkable, weren't they?"  Lloyd admired them, proud to be
+descended from those who built them.
+
+"I would think that we are the most remarkable."  Brook's noting
+puzzled Lloyd for a moment.  "Afterall, we have survived our
+forefathers' murder of each other!"
+
+Lloyd smiled, realising that his Lord and master made a good point.
+
+"Yes,  I suppose that I've never thought of us in quite that way!"
+
+The morning passed quickly while they spoke.
+
+Brook showed Lloyd more taped recordings left for those people who may
+have possibly succeeded the holocaust and deluge.  One of those
+successors was Carter Blue.  He found the machine in Angaent, on his
+way to Pomperaque, and used it to make the city a powerful state, in
+itself, and so becoming its ruler and leaving it all to his own
+offspring.
+
+Brook showed to Lloyd the dozens or so books from the Twentieth
+Century, that dealt in a wide range of topics.  Some of the books that
+Brook possessed included those on Architecture, History, Mathematics,
+Art and also Theology.
+
+Lloyd was impressed by the preserved quality and the information
+contained within them.  In just a few books, Brook had a good example
+of what the ancient people were like, but what Lloyd waited for, with
+such eager but patient anticipation, was the book that his Lord had
+been so mysterious about.
+
+"I'm still amazed,"  Lloyd began,  "to see someone with the power to
+save the world from a madman, lack the will-power to accomplish it."
+
+Brook felt ashamed of his inability to show the definite power that he
+possessed.  But to keep peace and unity in Phoride, he had no choice
+but to sacrifice his presence to that of the Almighty ArchBishop.
+
+He tried to explain that to his guest, but he did not want to make
+himself look like a coward.  He only wanted to show his caution.
+
+"I stayed within the walls of this house.  I watched for intruders who
+would hardly hesitate to hide little listening devices for that great
+weasel.  After he realized the motive behind my seclusion, he stopped
+his spying.  Later, he used my own vigilance to make me seem like a
+recluse.  But now, my friend, I can once again walk the streets of
+Pomperaque because you are here to hold my place."
+
+Lloyd, loyally bowed his head in trust-worthy acceptance, and
+apologised for his unjust implication that Brook was a coward.  Brook
+forgave him for speaking so because he knew that, in his heart, Lloyd
+didn't really mean it.
+
+"Providence had thrust us together.  You and I, Lloyd, will work
+side-by-side, to return to this land its forgotten freedom and
+greatness.  We shall teach others all that we know.  This is the only
+way to change the ArchBishop's hold on my people."
+
+Lloyd agreed.
+
+His anticipation also grew to see the great book that Brook promised to
+show him.
+
+Brook made his way to a shelf near the white screen.  From one of these
+shelves he removed some books, slid a panel away and pulled out a
+large, dark book.
+
+"If ever I am defeated or destroyed, you must care for this place and
+this book."  Brook instructed.
+
+With a silent breath, Brook made a confession to Lloyd, along with a
+request for a service that would take him a life-time.
+
+"I must ask a favour of you, my friend.  If I am not granted the
+opportunity and time to instruct Boy in what I know about the previous
+millennia, you must take over for me, and you both must leave this
+place." Brook sounded very peculiar.  Lloyd wondered about that; his
+mind engaged in waves of thought, while he tried to explain to himself,
+the reason for Brook's request.
+
+"I do not fully understand, my Lord.  You want us to instruct your
+servant.  Why?"  Lloyd asked, confused by Brook's behaviour.
+
+"Yes.  We must teach all those like him and especially him because,
+Lloyd,  Boy is my son!  He will succeed me when I am gone.  Which, I
+pray, will not be too soon."
+
+There it was.  The one great secret about his life, that he had finally
+confessed, and to this man, who was still nothing more than a wounded
+guest in him home.
+
+Lloyd was muted.  He had wondered for several days about the boy.  He
+noticed how the boy was allowed to speak his piece, during his first
+night with them, but he never guessed that this was the reason for it.
+He waited to hear more.
+
+"My Dearborne tried to keep this truth from me, for all these years.
+The boy knows, too.  His grandfather taught him well, how to behave
+before me.  But I still found out!"
+
+Lloyd eagerly listened, for a while, forgetting about the great book
+that he was holding in his hands.
+
+"He arrived here by caravan when he was nine, as a servant for
+Dearborne -- a gift from her father, Loebh of Hennai.  However, I did
+wonder when she was more than just pleased to see him, and then without
+question accepted him.  I wed her in Hennai during a trade conference
+and the I came back here to Pomperaque to prepare for her to join me.
+But it was almost a year before she came here, and I didn't find out
+until just last year, that she gave birth to my son but didn't bring
+him."  Brook observed Lloyd fondling the large book that he gave to
+him, earlier.  Lloyd was deeply enthraled by the story and he wanted to
+hear more.  For a moment he forgot about the book.
+
+"Why didn't she bring him, or at least tell you about his existence?"
+
+"My problem with the ArchBishop had existed long before I married her.
+This was the reason that I went to Hennai.  I wanted to unite the
+smaller and independent states with Phoride but, in most part, I failed
+because of that almighty swine.  Wile there, I met Loebh and his lovely
+daughter.  When we met, our love was obvious to us, like an exploding
+star, and we married immediately.   She was only sixteen and I was
+thirty-five but her father openly welcomed my offer of marriage.  She
+did not object and we were wed.  I revealed to her that we couldn't
+have children right away.  I suppose that she was afraid to tell me,
+later."
+
+"How did you find out?"  Lloyd inquired with a sly tone.
+
+"Loebh sent word to me last year.  I don't know why he did it, but I am
+grateful."
+
+Lloyd smiled and shook his head in a manner which suggested disbelief.
+He got up from his chair and went over to the window.  He peered out
+and sucked in a few deep breaths of air then turned to Brook and
+laughed.
+
+"You know, I came to Pomperaque for one reason; to alter the
+ArchBishop's mind to the trade embargo on Besten.  Now, all this.  It's
+amazing!"
+
+Brook also laughed at Lloyd's humorous view of the way that his
+original mission had changed.  His presence had brought Brook his
+freedom from staying in the Blue Mansion.  All this happened after his
+struggle, while he tried to tell the people of Phoride about the
+ancients from which they were all descended.
+
+Lloyd had become the catalyst for Brook's resurgence of strength.  His
+presence had that special chemistry that worked Brook's will into its
+new power, and both men new for sure, that Brook would no longer remain
+in his dormant retreat.
+
+Lloyd finally began to examine the book, feeling the quality of its
+cover and the raised gold lettered title.  In breathless stupefaction,
+he commenced to read it aloud.
+
+"THE HISTORY OF NORTH AMERICA -- TO 1986 C.E.!"
+
+"Yes. This book is the proof of the ancients, of our land, and of that
+great civilization before our own millennium."  Brook admitted to
+Lloyd.  He pointed at the book that Lloyd was now leafing through, and
+then moved to his high-backed chair and sat down.   "That book can make
+those who are learned, at the Blaisaman, join my ways again.
+Eventually they will all teach for me, from that
+
+book.  That, can destroy the ArchBishop, but first I must find some who
+will follow it!"  Lloyd smiled in awe, marvelling at what he read, and
+almost, as if in love with the book, he sighed a spiritual praise.
+
+"My God!"  he breathed.  "This looks like it's complete, right up to
+the end of it all."  He stopped for a moment to collect his wonderment,
+staying with the aghast manner that he began with.  "This is greater
+than anything that I have ever seen.  It's greater than anything that I
+know of in besten.  With this book, my Lord, we possess the means by
+which to unite the whole world!"  Lloyd intermittently lingered on a
+page, reading it aloud, then followed with the usual spellbound glance
+at Brook.  Each time he reaffirmed that they were within reach of
+destroying the almighty, the ArchBishop.
+
+Soon Brook became annoyed and in a comparable tone of voice, ordered
+Lloyd never again to call that maniac at Halls, the Almighty.  Lloyd
+didn't anger.  He just apologized to Brook and promised never again to
+do it.
+
+"We can bring this whole continent together, under a friendly
+democracy.  The Virgin Mountains people of Dantoga, the Virunese, the
+Elkinii plains people -- all would join you.  Somehow, I feel that even
+the Teniqués homosimians from the west, the Palatkan lepers, and maybe
+even the dual-sexed S_dash would join with you!"  Lloyd's excitement
+filled the room, and as Brook listened to his dream, his heart also
+pumped the blood of freedom and unity, through his veins.  He felt
+alive, once more.
+
+"Everything can be, as it was for our ancient fathers.  But we must not
+rush into this quick change.  We must court the people and slowly
+introduce the concept to them.  I don't want to destroy whatever unity
+we may already have.  We must do it with logic, and I believe that
+changing the ArchBishop's embargo with your land may be the safest
+place to begin!"
+
+"I agree!"  said Lloyd.  "Phoride doesn't receive any of our goods
+either, due to his insane monopoly."
+
+Lloyd moved over to his master and friend, from the window and sat on
+the stool beside his chair, while he still leafed through the great
+book.
+
+"I should not have allowed his embargo against Besten.  It was wrong
+and I am sorry.  I wasn't in the position to alter what was to be!"
+declared Brook, breathing deeply as he looked to the window at the
+Blue, cloudless, afternoon sky.  The skies were clear and the fear of
+another rain had passed.
+
+Lloyd understood Brook, now.  With this understanding he told Brook not
+to fret and that he was thankful that Besten was an ocean port, and
+that they had an abundance of fish and other goods coming into the
+city, by that means.
+
+"My Lord, we must fight for what we believe in.  I realize that there
+have been many wars that the earth has seen.  You, yourself, had once
+forcibly united Phoride and made their lives happier than what they
+knew."  His understanding was saturated with talk of war.  Brook looked
+right into his guest's eyes and shook his head.  He did not want war.
+
+"War shall always be, my Lord!"   Lloyd was insistent.
+
+"Maybe, but there can be revolutionary changes without battle.  My
+father had once told me, that diplomacy was always better-sought and
+best fought.  Only if diplomacy fails, is war necessary!"  Brook
+explained his view to Lloyd, who was in agreement but again illustrated
+the futility of talk.  "Always, my Lord, there is diplomacy that may
+prevent war, but always there are many who don't care to listen,
+because it may be hurtful to their own interests!  To them, wealth and
+gain is put high above love and life!"
+
+Slowly, the difference in their views pulled them apart, and a trivial
+argument began between them.  Brook became emotional, and rose from his
+chair.  He turned to Lloyd and loudly, took the dominance of his room,
+which lasted only a moment until Lloyd interrupted him.
+
+"War doesn't solve a thing, no matter how it is fought.  The taring up
+of the ground, the ripping apart of the young mens' bodies, the death
+... death ... DEATH!"  Brook built up to a frenzy giving his views.
+Lloyd refused them.
+
+"The realization of wastage is understood, but as our fathers tell us;
+here, in this book, 'no cost is too extreme when trying to attain
+freedom!',  and I do believe that to be so!"
+
+Silence.
+
+Both stared at one another with heated, flaring eyes.  Their faces were
+contorted in strain and sweat leaked in huge droplets from their brows.
+ Then Brook sighed and put his hand on Lloyd's shoulder.  He spoke
+calmly.
+
+"Young men should not be made to fight and die for the discontent and
+hate of the old men in power; who create a war, in the name of God,
+Love or Freedom.  It's all an excuse to them.  Can't you see that?
+
+Lloyd didn't answer.
+
+"Most of the ancient wars were fought because of the dislikes between
+the men in power.  Many of the wars, in our times, were the same.
+Countless numbers of young men died without knowing what they were
+fighting for.  What is worse, Lloyd, is that the common folk had
+suffered the most, and they weren't even supposed to be involved!  Do
+you understand?"
+
+Lloyd was still silent, his mouth agape and mute or reply to the truths
+that Brook was preaching.  He nodded and bowed his head, as he
+surrendered his view, with a final thought.
+
+"War is necessary, sometimes!"  was all that Lloyd said.
+
+"True, my friend!  The souls of mankind burn on this hellish ball, this
+scorched Earth of ours.  Some day we will be able to extinguish those
+who cause the fatal spark.  Until then, I will not let my hatred of the
+ArchBishop, to become one of those sparks."
+
+Throughout the afternoon, Lloyd and Brook continued to talk.  Their
+emotions toned down somewhat, to a level of trust and friendship, and
+mutual exchange of knowledge.
+
+Brook freely gave his knowledge to Lloyd without the demand of payment
+and Lloyd accepted it, promising that he would in turn, give it to
+Brook's son, and continued to instruct him until the sum of both their
+knowledge or until one of them was expended.
+
+Brook taught Lloyd to use the computer and showed him the locations of
+the seven Omega Sub Ground Installations, strewn about the continent.
+These were the same installations that were abandoned several centuries
+ago, after civilization was reestablished on the land.  Brook showed
+Lloyd the location of the great library vault that was still hidden
+near one of those installations.  It was the same gigantic vault that
+was closed down just prior to the great holocaust.  It was a vault
+carved deep into a mountain of solid granite, southeast of the Omega 4
+- East SGI, at the head of the Krolalin range, to the north.  The
+mountain was known to them as, Alugean.
+
+"There's enough food there for one man to live on for half a century.
+If ever something happens to me, Lloyd, take the boy there.  Go there
+and learn as much as you can, and then teach the Bestenese people, and
+try to teach mine.  If nothing happens to me, I will send both of you
+there, anyway, and you will learn."  Brook ended his instructions and
+Lloyd promised him, that when fit to travel, he would leave with Boy
+and not return until Boy willed it.
+
+
+The day seemed short to those in the Blue Mansion.  After the Lord, his
+Lady and their honoured guest had supped, they all retired to a
+parlour-like room.  That room was Dearborne's equivalent to Brook's
+viewing-den.
+
+She reclined in a large comfortable chair, soft and padded in cushioned
+splendour while she rolled some yarn into a large ball, and hummed to
+herself a mellow little tune.
+
+Brook stood in the corner of the room by a small cabinet.  He poured
+wine into some glasses and motioned to hand the glasses to Dearborne
+and Lloyd, who sat on a sofa near her at the window.  Lloyd looked out
+the window at the setting sun.  He watched and listened to the people
+coming out of their homes and heading for their evening fun-spots.
+They had weathered the fretting indulgences brought to them by the rain
+and they now behaved no differently than they had for months before the
+rain.
+
+Brook, with a silent tip of his head to the beloved wife, handed her a
+glass of her once-favoured wine.  She graciously accepted it from him
+and stared at the glass.  Her face exposed an expression of anxiety and
+fear, afraid to drink, as if the glass of that delicate beverage had
+been laced with some kind of poison.  He gave to Lloyd a glass also,
+breaking his concentrations of watching the columns of people below, as
+they headed for the centre of Pomperaque, to their taverns and
+theatres.  The Lord lifted his glass and saluted those close to him,
+within the room, with a toast to freedom and unity.  They echoed him.
+
+Lloyd kept his stare on the street, and Brook was curious as to what
+interested his guest so much.  He looked at Lloyd several times, and
+every time he just stared out into the street.  He seemed somewhat
+intoxicated, although he only sipped once, at his wine.
+
+Brook understood that Lloyd was only longing for his home in Besten.
+He knew that the thoughts of his homeland and his near death, in
+Pomperaque, had chilled his mind and made him dopey.
+
+Lord Brook emptied his glass of wine and sighed, the sound of it
+resonated throughout the room.  He spoke, imitating a burly Bestenese
+accent that grabbed the attention of both his lovely wife and Lloyd.
+
+"Ah! -- 'What sweet sustenance we have in our thirst, for the smooth
+wisp of truth found in a rose'!"  said Brook, as he quoted one of
+Besten's most renown poets.  Lloyd glanced away from the window and
+smile at Brook.  Their rapport showed in their eyes and they didn't
+need to speak.  Brook looked at Dearborne and saw that she didn't react
+to his poetry recital.  Instead, she began to develop mannerisms of
+someone who is disgusted.  He thought that she just didn't approve of
+his jest.  Lloyd noticed a strangeness in her, too, but he thought that
+it wasn't his place to say anything.
+
+"At least you don't quote that Djenaud Smarte, my Lord.  You have
+taste!"  Lloyd made ready to make some fun, if the Lord cared to jest,
+himself  -- and he did.
+
+"Yes.  Moreye was a great poet.  I remember that he once jested about
+Smarte.  He said, 'Smarte could only write if intoxicated by the aroma
+of a peasant's chicken-house, and that's why he lived in one'!"  Brook
+was amused as was Lloyd.  He sat up better as not to spill his drink
+while he laughed.  He soon added to Brook's jest by conveying to him a
+game that he learned in Besten, while he was still young.
+
+"We once played games in Besten.  Some Elders told us that these games
+were very old but our own familiarities could be used to make them
+humorous, to us.  My father, Harvard, taught me this one and I found it
+funny.  The game goes like this. Someone appears at your door and
+knocks.   The one inside asks, 'who is there?', the outsider answers
+with something and the insider asks again, the outsider's name and
+'who?'   Then one outside answers in a humorous manner."
+
+To Brook, the explanation of the game, was funny enough for him,
+because Lloyd began to take on a nature of a lad, Boy's age.  Finally,
+after Lloyd explained to Brook the game, he demonstrated it to him.  He
+told Brook what to say as the insider and the joke commenced.  Lloyd
+rapped on the wood of the chair's arm-rest, that represented the door.
+He then pointed to Brook.
+
+"Who is there?"  asked Brook.
+
+"Djenaud Smarte!"  Lloyd replied.
+
+"Djenaud Smarte, who?"  asked Brook again, after being cued, once more.
+
+"Djenaud as smart as I am!"  said Lloyd and he laughed.
+
+They found this cute little game somewhat interesting and continued to
+play it for a while until they ran out of names that could be made fun.
+
+Brook soon became restless, when he saw that Dearborne wasn't reacting
+to their humour, without even the slightest grin.
+
+Lloyd resumed his stare out the window.  His spirited smile vanished
+from his face as quickly as the wine vanished from his glass, that he
+still held in his hand.
+
+Out on the streets were groups of children walking together.  Some
+chewed on the intoxicating seeds of the Orumen flower.  Lloyd shook his
+head in disenchantment just as Brook also looked out the window and saw
+the same.
+
+"Sweet children playing in the streets, grow up to become hated by
+their own kind.  And soon they grow to hate themselves!"  said Brook,
+as he turned to Lloyd and Dearborne, then further, "Is that not so?"
+the room was silent.
+
+
+After a quarter-hour, while she slowly and perfectly wound her yarn
+into a tight ball, Dearborne finally broke the silence.
+
+"You cannot blame the children, my husband! They are all good.  Only
+circumstances change them.  The times devour their innocent little
+souls and burn into their hearts the hatred that grows as they do!"
+
+Brook walked about the room and motioned to Lloyd, with his glass if he
+would like some more wine, and he accepted.  He took Lloyd's glass and
+poured himself and his guest some more wine.  He glanced at Dearborne's
+glass, but she hadn't yet taken a single swallow from it.
+
+"I don't blame them, my love.  The devil -- the evil -- is in all of
+them.  They discover it during their transitions.  Some of these
+mischievous children discover their good and their evil, and some find
+it to their advantage, that evil is of more benefit to them.  So turns
+the world."  Brook exclaimed to his wife and gulped his wine.  He
+studied her for a few moments, in puzzlement, and wondered why she
+hadn't touched her wine.  Then, as if his thoughts touched hers, she
+stopped rolling her yarn and put the glass to her precious lips and
+like a little bird, took a sip.  However, Brook saw that she was not
+enjoying it and he worried that something was wrong, but he didn't pry
+her with questions.  He felt that she would eventually come to him
+herself, when she found the time to be right for her.
+
+Lloyd, on the couch, still peered out the window at the street.  He
+kept an open ear to the exchange between his host and hostess, and he
+slowly drank his wine.  In the distance he noticed some of the farmers
+irrigating their farm terraces with water, mechanically drawn from the
+Artesian reservoirs beneath the city.
+
+Throughout the evening, from the time the sun had begun to drowse until
+it finally bedded-down for the night, Brook paced about the room.   He
+was deeply into his thoughts, and he occasionally surveyed his beloved
+wife, Dearborne, and also his guest Lloyd.  Lloyd maintained his stare
+out the window during this lulling tide of time.  Mesmerized by the
+beauty of this land, he still longed to see Besten again.  Brook
+empathized with Lloyd's sentiment and left him to it until he felt that
+Lloyd's thoughts, were causing him to brood and Brook did not want to
+see people, brooding in the house.  He recognized that Dearborne was on
+the verge of breaking under the strain of trying to prevent her own,
+and he did not want to see Lloyd in a moody state.
+
+He finally sat at the end of the couch that Lloyd was on, choosing the
+end closer to his wife.  He stared at Dearborne, then at his other
+side, at Lloyd.  His voice attained the quality of a seer.  "The days
+pass too quickly, for one to hold-onto the precious moments in life,
+however trifle and few!"  he stated with the strength of compassion,
+understanding and love, and in his ultimate wisdom, he imparted to
+those close to him a morbid idea.  "We must all one day die -- and may
+it be in peace, and with God!"  When he finished, he saw a shiny tear
+trickle down Dearborne's flushed cheek.
+
+She sipped at her wine once more, put it on the table in front of her
+and pushed it away.
+
+Brooks and Lloyd watched as she set the drink down, and for a while,
+the only sounds that were heard in the parlour were that of breathing
+and the rustling of their clothes.  He observed her and he loathed to
+see the torment that churned within her beautiful eyes.  He finally
+found it within himself, to question her behaviour.
+
+"Something troubles you, my Love? Don't you like the drink?"  he asked,
+with worry.
+
+Lloyd reckoned the Lady and her glass, drawing a feeble connection
+between them, that he thought was the reason behind her moody behaviour.
+
+"Why don't you drink your wine, my Lady?  I know of no woman in the
+land that dislikes rose-wine.  Some may drink it more than others, but
+all like it!"  Lloyd requested, seeing in her eyes that his observation
+his its mark.
+
+She stared at her glass, her eyes burned with contempt therein, and she
+shrugged in utter abomination,  as she, in a nauseated tone, answered
+her guest.
+
+"I am quickly acquiring a distaste for it."    she said, then carried
+on, as she met Lloyd's eyes,  "I am acquiring a distaste for the rest
+of Phoride!"
+
+Brook raised an eyebrow in surprise when he heard his lovely Dearborne
+speak so.  He leaned forward and put his gentle hand, lovingly on her
+forearm until she set her own hand overtop of it and leered into his
+eyes.
+
+"What is wrong, my love?  charged Brook, growing hot with worry.  Their
+eyes became one entity, emanating from both their minds and so joining.
+
+Lloyd got to his feet.  Still at the window, he aimlessly gaped out
+through its portal and added to the earlier tracings of thought
+regarding his intuitive lore.  And, as if in riddle, he recited to
+Dearborne, who understood his conjecture.
+
+"There may be certain disillusions that are regarded as factual, by
+some people?"  he said, and she agreed.
+
+Dearborne put her ball of yarn to one side and issued from her chair.
+She peered at her Brook, for a long time, apprehensive at whether or
+not to tell him the heavy burden that she carried within herself.  She
+still clutched his hand.  He felt her tremble like a cold little
+kitten, and his eyes pleased to her, to reveal her thoughts to him and
+gain strength from his willingness to be receptive.  She told him
+everything.
+
+"It is something that happened the day that I brought Lloyd to this
+house!"  and she told him everything about Cardinal Allen's advances on
+her.  Brook's forehead wrinkled as he listened, his brow rose, and
+sweat flowed from it.  His lips pursed in anger, and she saw anger
+emanating from his eyes, along with the storms of worry there, also.
+Lloyd was poised, still listening to her.  "He later assured me that
+this was not so and I apologized.  I don't know why!"  her voice
+quivered as she began to cry.  "I don't know why?"
+
+She carried on, repeating that she didn't know why she had apologized.
+Her words became snarled under her gasps of breath.  Lloyd stepped
+towards her, to give assistance and Brook embraced her tightly trying
+to impart to her his stalwart volition.
+
+"That Devil's dog has soiled your spirit!  He shall pay.  He shall
+never corrupt again!"  promised Brook.
+
+"He did nothing to me," Dearborne admits.  "It's only what he had said
+to me when I was drinking my rose wine ... how a woman is hot-blooded
+towards her lover if she drinks from the rose." she continued to cry
+while she held on to Brook as if he was a cliff and beneath her was a
+bottomless void.  "Now I cannot enjoy wine, and my mind is frightened
+of him!"
+
+Lloyd was quiet.  He watched Brook's attempts to sedate his Lady.
+Through Lady Dearborne's words and actions, Lloyd now grasped the full
+meaning of the struggle and pains in the hearts of those who saved his
+life.
+
+"I understand, now, my Lord!"  Lloyd ejaculated in prehension.  "The
+perversities from mind, to body, to earth.  The almi ... the evil
+ArchBishop's salvation of the world is DAMNATION!"
+
+"Now you know why I need you to help me, in my cause.  Even after I am
+gone!  You know why you must ... teach ... all that we know -- "  Brook
+appealed knowing the assured outcome to his requests.
+
+
+"Yes!"  was all that Lloyd answered with.  It was enough and clear,
+and proved his loyal promise to one man's vision of freedom and unity.
+
+"You will be alright, my love!"  Brook promised Dearborne.  "Telling me
+frees you from your trials.  Rest easy now!  Lloyd will stay with you.
+I must go and sort this incident in my mind.  I must prepare myself to
+confront that miscreant at Halls."  he touched Lloyd's arm and without
+words asked him to keep Dearborne company while he retired to his
+thoughts. Lloyd complied.
+
+Brook kissed Dearborne and with his hand, gently wiped some of the
+tears from her face, then without further delay, left the room for his
+den.
+
+Shortly after Brook left their presence, Lloyd and Dearborne quietly
+sat on the couch and when she finally stopped crying, she thanked Lloyd
+for being so good in staying with her.  Lloyd promised that he was
+pleased to serve her and that he could never fully repay her entire
+household for their help in rescuing him from his near fatality in the
+square.
+
+She was quiet for the longest time.  Lloyd remained beside her, also
+quiet.  His manners dictated to him to be polite and not question her
+thoughts, but after some time of quiet meditation, she requested of
+Lloyd to be a judge on her actions in telling Brook about what had
+happened between her and the Cardinal Allen.
+
+He thought for a few moments and told her not to fret because she did,
+indeed, do what was necessary.  He told her that her husband had the
+right to know about some perverse chancre of a man, who had practised
+his lechery on her.
+
+"I am glad that I told him this!" she admitted.  She felt much better
+and less guilty from fear that she was an inspiring factor; that she
+was the cause for the lecher to come forth to her as if she were a
+harlot.  She continued.  "I don't know that I should've told him now.
+Maybe earlier would've been better.  I was frightened.  I did not want
+to see him confront the ArchBishop out of rage, for my sake.  I did not
+want to leave this house for that reason!"
+
+Lloyd touched her reassuringly and in a soft but powerful voice, lifted
+this new burden from her mind.  He soothed her fear of Brook's
+confrontation with the ArchBishop.
+
+"Don't worry, Lady!  He will be careful with that vermin.  He has
+motivation, now, to release Besten from the economic blockade, and he
+has his personal grievances to settle.  The ArchBishop will not know
+how to cope!"
+
+"My husband is brave, Master Bartlet.  Because of you ... because of
+myself and because of all those like our Boy, I see him in the throws
+of changing this entire land."
+
+More silence crept into the room.  Dearborne was turned towards Lloyd,
+her face filled with an enigma that wanted to break free from her.  He
+knew that in her heart, she had something else that was very, very
+important for him to know.  In recent days that passed, he had seen it
+in her face.  Now, however, it was most prevalent and in their
+intimate, profound faith, in one another's trust, she finally gave him
+her private testimony.
+
+"I must tell you something, Lloyd."
+
+"Your servant, my Lady."
+
+"I see our lives closing-in on us, in this place.  You, my loyal
+confident, must carry on for Brook, for us, if something evil occurs!"
+she made a familiar request to him.
+
+"I understand, my Lady!"  he replied.
+
+"I wish that you really do."  she stopped for a second to collect her
+thoughts and courage.  "I pray that you keep what I now have to tall
+you, private and between us!"  she said.  Lloyd waited in anticipation,
+guessing at what she was going to tell him.  "Our servant, Boy, is
+Brook's and mine, natural son."  she finished and observed a trifle
+grin spread over Lloyd's face.  Somehow, he had anticipated correctly,
+and he felt himself to be the most privileged of men, to have such high
+trust and confidence bestowed on him.  A fortunate man, who not more
+than a week ago was dragged into their house, a near-dead stranger.  He
+nodded his head to her, and took her hands into his own.
+
+"Yes!  I was curious about the similarity in his appearance to him and
+Brook!  I wondered at the worry that you both expressed in him, the
+evening of the rain, and also the privileges that you both indulge him
+with."
+
+Lloyd, however, did not tell her that he already knew that which she
+had told him.   As before, he found that it was not his place to inform
+on that which should be done by someone closer.
+
+"You will stay here, won't you?"
+
+"I will, for as long as I am permitted, my Lady.  I do owe my life!"
+
+She thanked the eternal God that they were blessed with this man's
+presence in their home, and then commenced to tell him more about Boy
+and the fact that Brook didn't know that Boy was his son.
+
+"He was born Boyce Loebh Scullion-Blue, in my father's land of
+Hennai."  she revealed to Lloyd, and he listened with interest to, the
+already familiar parable.
+
+
+CHAPTER  SIX
+
+The mask of darkened night had passed-over and covered the face of the
+land until, the rising sun, brought into play the motions of the
+morning life.  People's voice covered the singing poetry of the sparrow
+and the cooing of the falcon-cranes, that glided on high, with the gods.
+
+As the night progressed, Brook sat in his viewing room and pondered the
+problems that he knew were destroying the unity of his beloved land.
+This pretty land that had once surged with the majesty and splendour,
+created by his father, descended from The Blue.
+
+When the day broke, Brook emerged from his diversion of thought.  His
+mind and soul were determined to make strong his rightful rule in the
+land.
+
+With Lloyd at his house, knowing Dearborne was safe, he made his way to
+Canon's Butte to the Halls Cathedral, and the ArchBishop.
+
+The streets were crowded with people that morning, for the Week of
+Jubilee began on that day.
+
+Slowly, he trod on the walkways by the emporiums and through the
+square, where he gave his  'good days!', to Empal and other loyal
+friends who stepped aside, and let him pass without a struggle.
+
+He spoke to his subjects during his walk, and offered some bits of
+confidence to them and received some in return.  Strength returned to
+him and his apprehensions about his meeting with the ArchBishop
+decreased in severity.  With his faith in good and his will prepared to
+conquer evil, through a show of strength, he replaced his insecurity.
+
+But evil played the game well and the roles of strength were weighed in
+a balance by patience and peace.  Both were prodded and teased by
+temptation and mistrust, and attempted to tip the scales in favour of
+the incubation.
+
+Brook stood in the confines of the cleric's office and looked out the
+window at the water fountain below, where the vicars and novices pruned
+the grass and floral scape, and had some fun.  They bathed their white
+skins on this day, allowed for this Week of Jubilee to be without their
+habits when within the walled grounds of the Cathedral.  Their abundant
+loin-clothes flapped about in the slight breeze that blew off the ocean
+nearby.  So close, in fact, that one would be able to see it from the
+windows of Halls' southern most parts.
+
+Brook waited a long time.  He was apprehensive about seeing the
+ArchBishop.  After all the times that Brook denied his own conference
+to him, he was now himself being refused the immediate audience that he
+demanded.
+
+Brook became nerved and enraged but he knew that he'd dare not leave
+now, for it would show defeat on his foe's ground and on his foe's
+terms.  He knew, that to choose the humility of his waiting for a
+subordinate, would moreso be forgotten than if he were to retreat from
+the stand-off with the ArchBishop, and his weapon of time and patience.
+
+He brewed hateful thoughts within him mind.  He cursed and prayed for
+God's vengeance to be his, upon the entrance of his adversary.  He was
+aware of the ignoble egotism in the ArchBishop, with his delusions of
+holiness and the calling of himself:  "The Almighty".  But Brook knew
+what excrement this holy man really was and the utter evil that he
+possessed, inherited directly from the ancient Canon Di'Vaticanus.
+
+He waited and then waited some more, nearly reaching a point which
+lacked a noble virtue.  Brook waited until the ArchBishop bounded in
+through his iron-twined door, as if he were a majesty himself.
+
+They stood far apart and silent.  The entire length of the room loomed
+in silent space between them while they just glared at one another.
+
+Finally, the ArchBishop's ill-meaning smile skirted his face as he sat
+down behind his desk.  He never took his eyes off his Lord and master
+Scullion, until he was first to speak.  Brook waited for the most
+heartless sign of homage, if he was to receive one at all.  He never.
+
+"How are you, my ... brother?"  mumbled the ArchBishop.  His voice
+carried overtones of mockery, intended to disturb.
+
+Brook moved to the man's desk, his eyes fixed on his brow and the evil
+smile, which looked as if painted onto his face, until he, too, finally
+reverberated.
+
+"You tread on soft ground, brother!  Your delusions of grandeur have
+carried your mind off into another space."
+
+"I don't understand?"  the ArchBishop's smile left his face momentarily.
+
+Brook laid his palms on the surface of the grand cleric's desk top and
+mocked him in turn.        "What?" Brook laughed.  "The Almighty not
+understand something?  Come now brother ... I was made to wait here too
+long, and for you!"  He lifted his hands from the desk and made his way
+back towards the window.  "Maybe I should have you tried.  Made an
+example of; should I not, my dearest brother?"  He reached the window
+and looked out of it to the fountain below.  The same time, he slightly
+grinned, knowing the effects that he caused to come over the
+ArchBishop's mind.  No sooner did Brook finish speaking, did the cleric
+challenge him.
+
+"Make yourself clear, Brook.  State your business and take your
+leave!"  blurted the man in the holy garb.
+
+Brook's grin left him as he swung around and poked his hand into the
+air, in the direction of the religious leader, and stared right into
+his now pale eyes.
+
+"You are but a mere man -- and not even so -- and you can bleed!"  He
+ceased for a moment and saw a spark of fear flame over the ArchBishop's
+face as he twitched in his chair.
+
+"Yes, my brother ... You can bleed.  Wouldn't a real god be immune to
+bodily injury?  A real god would not sit on his ... broad alter and
+live off his people, growing fat from their love and their worship and
+yet give them nothing in return.  Not only that ... you had sent for me
+-- so, unless you inform me as to what you want ... you may take your
+leave!"
+
+"Good speech.  State your -- "
+
+" -- Your tongue will be silenced either by my command or by my hand,
+Manguino!  I shall give you leave, if I care to, and for good."
+Brook's words, the strength of their usage, greatly startled the great
+ArchBishop who sat back in his chair and blinked aimlessly as the
+sovereign continued, after some silence.  "Word has reached me, that
+you are starving several of the united districts, in the north, with an
+embargo on their trade!  As of this moment that will cease and with
+that, extra trade will commence between Phoride and Besten.  It has
+been long enough, that you have had your petty vengeance on them."
+
+"You agreed on that embargo!"  Manguino advanced.
+
+"Yes.  Now I change my mind.  Your 'will' be ... none!"
+
+Brook turned his head and focused his eyes upon Manguino.
+
+Silence clutched the room again.  Brook stood majestic and powerful in
+the presence of his brother.  The evil high priest, Manguino, was now
+totally disturbed by Brook's show of strength and power.
+
+"It would not have made a difference!"  Manguino said as he pushed
+himself from his chair and moved over to where his brother stood.
+
+"I will make the difference now!  As of this moment." Brook shouted at
+him.  "You ... you may only follow.  You will not be permitted to
+exercise your power unwisely."
+
+The sovereign's judgement had been made and the idea frightened
+Manguino and choked the room with a silence that removed hope of the
+existence of any breath.
+
+Manguino turned back to his desk.  The silence created a term of
+indecision in him that he had not experienced since before Smith Blue
+died.
+
+As if against his will, Manguino found himself leafing through some
+papers on the corner of his desk, desperately trying to formulate a
+plan in his mind to rebuke Brook.  Instead, however, he found himself
+writing and signing a retraction to the trade embargo.  He stretched
+out his hand, holding the document in offering, to Brook.
+
+"How do you mean this return of trade to take place?  By the week,
+month or year?"  asked Manguino, his tone sounding significantly
+defeated.
+
+
+"By month.  I suppose that this would be reasonable!"  An expression of
+shock came over the ArchBishop.  He whined like a child, then took
+control of himself and finally showed his anger.
+
+"Reasonable?  Treating them like our masters and that, you say, is
+reasonable?"  he stopped for a moment and wondered if Brook was indeed
+sane, then laughed a little in a half-hearted manner.
+
+Brook proceeded.
+
+"Yes, I believe that a monthly caravan should suffice.  They would
+prove more profitable to us as our friends than as our enemies."
+
+"Why don't we send them goods every day?  mocked Manguino.
+
+"Careful, Manguino!  You tempt the wrong feelings in my heart.  Anyway,
+if Phoride could survive the strain, I would consider daily caravans.
+And now onto another annoyance."  He looked at Manguino with
+contemptible eyes, intended as prejudgment on his brother.  "I shall
+not tolerate any further words between the Cardinal Allen and my wife.
+If I learn that he speaks with her, or another other woman of my
+household, just once more, I will have him arrested and whipped until
+death."   he turned to Manguino and sneered a grin suggesting a
+pleasurable thought.  "I might even do it myself!"
+
+"I don't know what you are talking about!"  defended Manguino,
+seemingly innocent of the fact that the Cardinal Allen tried to force
+his will on the Lord's spouse.
+
+"Oh?"  is the only response Brook made, then added,  "Well, make
+certain you do not continue with this ignorance, within your own ranks.
+You would not appreciate the subsequent consequences!"  Manguino
+lowered his head and looked to the floor, but in realization of his
+defeated mannerisms he quickly straightened and eyed Brook as he moved
+towards the door of the office.  He opened it and before making his
+exit, he quickly turned to give him one last icy glare.
+
+
+"You will never again keep me waiting."  commanded the sovereign and
+Manguino tipped his head with unwanted compliance, realizing this
+meeting was a bounty in favour of his rival brother, Brook.
+
+Manguino, the grand.  The great ArchBishop of all Phoride and the
+continent, slowly dragged himself back to his desk and sat in his
+chair.  Back in it all the way, he breathed heavily a few times and
+contemplated the last few minutes that had elapsed and Brook's conquest
+of wills.  'What to do?',  was the only question that paraded about
+Manguino's mind.  Finally, the answer came to him.  He would have his
+revenge in a short fortnight, during the celebrations to commemorate
+the wedding between Brook and his beloved Dearborne. Cardinal Allen
+will have his pleasure on that night and so would the ArchBishop
+entertain his satisfaction.  He will have the triumph over his noble
+brother, in the midst of the highest citizens of Pomperaque.  He would
+ruin his brother forever.  He smiled to himself and mumbled under his
+breath, and the gleam of a maybe victory flashed across his eyes.
+
+"Yes, that would be perfect."  he said and repeated it, then with this
+he proceeded to scribble on some clean paper, a request for
+accompaniment to some select cardinals, for that evening of
+merry-making.
+
+As the great keeper of Halls set his plans of abasement to honour his
+brother, another man was alive as a loyal servant, keeping true his
+word to his master.
+
+Sitting in Brook's chair, in the viewing den, Lloyd leafed through the
+large book.  The night before, he sat up to all hours and listened to
+the Lady Dearborne as she conveyed to him the circumstances surrounding
+her husband's apparent meekness, and their son, Boyce.  While he read
+the great book he remembered what Brook had told him about his noble
+heritage, and the emergence of the elite group of people, that followed
+the global devastation long ago.
+
+
+Lloyd observed the details of the colourful pictures that showed the
+way of life in the age before the time of chaos.  He read the ancient
+lines which spoke of the great rulers of that time.  Those men that
+tried to prevent war at any cost, and others who wanted it, at any cost.
+
+His eyes loomed across the words spoken by the great presidential
+leader of this ancient land.  His thoughts that were spoken the very
+day that his life was taken from him by an assassin, hired by some
+warmonger.
+
+                "We're called a civilized people.
+                 Let us behave as civilized people.
+                 Do not let war shatter our tiny planet
+                 for the benefit of just a few, who would
+                 profit from it -- become rich and powerful
+                 from the death of those weaker than themselves.
+                 Let us seek a world unity -- a brotherhood of love
+                 -- before it is too late ... before we give our
+                 all, for nothing!"
+
+
+Lloyd sighed.  The power and spirit behind those words still rang true,
+even to this day.  Where every land was under its own governing
+directions, ruled by no central idea or council and indeed, being
+nothing more than a communal feudalism.
+
+He continued to turn the pages of the great book, THE HISTORY OF NORTH
+AMERICA, and stared in amazement at its details, almost right up to the
+very day of the holocaust.  That detail was mainly in the last few
+pages which appeared to have been put into the book, at a much later
+time.  He saw that someone did not want a noble life, a great
+civilization, to die and be forgotten forever.  How, to him, the book
+began to take-on an almost holy aura that drew him deeper and deeper
+into the words' strength, until a tear issued from his eye and slowly
+meandered down his fleshy cheek.
+
+He wiped the tear from his cheek, in one motion of the back of his
+hand.  Boyce rumbled into the den carrying a tray of food and drink,
+and quietly set it on the table by Lloyd.
+
+"I have brought you food, my Lord!"  informed the boy.
+
+Lloyd looked up from the book and smiled as he thanked the boy and
+requested him to join in the eating.  Hesitant, the boy suspiciously
+looked at Lloyd with questions in his eyes. He nodded and smiled, then
+boy finally moved to the corner and brought back a stool, and so sat by
+him.
+
+Lloyd motioned to Boyce to take some food and not knowing what else to
+do in this circumstance, he took a piece of the roasted fowl and smiled
+before he bit into it.
+
+"Thank-you, my Lord!"  the boy exclaimed.
+
+"You are welcome."  returned Lloyd, and continued.  "Say, Boy.  You
+will call me Lloyd ... I have had enough people call me sir and Lord!"
+
+"Thank-you ... Lloyd!"  Boyce responded, startled by the show if
+friendship offered to him by the injured man that he helped to carry
+back to the Blue Mansion.
+
+They ate the dinner.
+
+They didn't say much to one another while they ate.  Lloyd resumed his
+reading of the great book and the boy looked-on at Lloyd's changing
+expression, his eyes almost bursting into a fall of tears, throughout
+it all.
+
+Lloyd looked up from the book, at times, and caught the boy's eyes
+locked onto him as he read.  "My Lord Brook promised to teach me to
+read that,"  Boyce stated, "but he has not found the time!"  He looked
+hollow for a moment and a feeling of loneliness seemed to hover over
+him until Lloyd, with a compassionate voice, grabbed the boy's craving
+for some adult rapport.
+
+"Brook had asked me to teach you.  Would you like that?"
+
+"Yes."  Boyce's answer was short and direct, and full of obvious
+excitement.  He continued to eat.
+
+"I spoke to Lady Dearborne yesterday."
+
+"She's a very nice lady!"  added Boyce.  He looked up at Lloyd and
+smiled, and Lloyd just laughed.
+
+"That she is, Boyce, and you are very fortunate that she and Brook are
+your parents."
+
+Boyce was astonished. He stopped eating, looked at the meat that he was
+holding then slowly dropped it back onto the tray.  He stood up and
+aimlessly started to walk a few steps away from Lloyd.
+
+Through the hush of the room could be heard the sounds of life
+echoing-in from off the streets.  There were short playful screams of
+the little girls being teased by the boys.  Boyce faced Lloyd.  After
+eyeing him for a time, he finally spoke.
+
+"She told you? -- Why?"  he said, as if in order.
+
+Lloyd nodded.
+
+"Will you tell my father?"
+
+Lloyd's face showed apprehension, and he answered the boy.
+
+"No, I won't.  But I have a strong feeling that he may already know."
+he ceased for a moment and grinned a little.  "Afterall, you do look
+more like him with each passing day."
+
+
+Once again there was a short silence between them but it was broken up
+by some sighs and a welcomed laugh from Boyce.
+
+"Yes, that is true.  Perhaps that is why he asked you to teach me?"
+
+"I cannot begin to know what goes on in someone's mind, but that just
+may be, my young friend."
+
+With their confirming smile and nod, they acknowledged their new
+friendship.
+
+There was a powerful understanding which formed between them.  The
+presence of it could be felt within the room and it was then that Lloyd
+made a suggestion.
+
+"Shall we start the lessons?"
+
+Excited, Boyce nodded that he would like that.
+
+"Can you read?"
+
+Boyce shrugged with an embarrassed grin.
+
+"I know the old alphabet ... my grandfather taught me, but I can't
+understand very much.
+
+Lloyd showed his understanding with a nod, and begged Boyce to sit
+again on the stool, and when he did, Lloyd handed him the book.
+
+"I will do what I can to teach you, young Lord."  Lloyd promised then
+allowed Boyce to leaf through the pages to familiarize himself with the
+contents.  He turned to a large and colourful map and began to read
+slowly:
+
+                "The North American continent stretches between two
+                 oceans and from the northern icecaps to the southern 
+                 tropics.  Its land varies from mountains and prairies,
+                 to dense marches and arid deserts.  The people of
+                 North America are united under a political ideology
+                 known as DEMOCRACY, which prime advantage
+                 lies in the FREEDOMS given to each individual citizen."
+
+
+Boyce finished his time consuming and irregular method of reading and
+smiled as he looked up at Lloyd.  He waited for a response.
+
+"You did well, Boyce!"
+
+"Tell me, Lloyd ... are we Americans?"
+
+Lloyd quietly pondered the question for a moment then eased back in his
+chair and tried to answer his anxious pupil.
+
+"In some ways, yes! Every one of us cherish freedom and would like to
+be proud of our land, rather than collect into small individual
+districts and territories which are hostile to one another!  Lloyd
+finished, feeling that he had adequately answered the boy's question.
+He waited for another question, which came quickly.
+
+"I can't understand, how such a strong land could be destroyed?"
+
+"Every living man wanted power.  There was tension and there were wars
+and the people lost faith in those who governed them.  Then came the
+final war.  Those who were greedy and survived and those who were of
+great intellect, took command of the land.  Both called themselves
+Kings, Queens and Lords.  Both, to some extent, ruled with fear.  We
+still have this, but there are some men that are sore from this dark
+heritage.  Men like my father and your father."
+
+"And I, also!"  stated Boyce, his face lighting up with the spark of
+freedom that touched his spirit.
+
+"We all learn, my friend,"  said Lloyd.  "you now learn about a once
+hectic life and subdued value.  We now have only these memories and
+there are some men that would even deny us this."
+
+Boyce shook his head, understanding what Lloyd meant and then followed
+the motion of his hand that instructed him to continue reading. This
+time he read the leaflets, added by some obscure person:
+
+                '... in the final decades of the Twentieth Century, there
+                  came to power, in their world, men of questionable sanity.
+                  These men called themselves THE SAVIOURS OF EARTH,
+                  believing  that they were sent by God to make Earth
+                  into a second  Eden.  Yet, not a
+                  single soul was saved.  Millions died,  and many
+                  others had perished in the subsequent plagues that
+                  spread throughout
+                  the entire planet, after the scourging  battles.  The
+                  only way for great nations to survive, was to wage  war.
+                  The final years saw the greatest of all wars, fought
+                  in the ancient Holy Land called, the Middle-East.
+                  It was God's will, at the beginning, that the war of
+                  the end would be fought at that sacred place.
+                  Armageddon heralded the end of mankind.
+
+                                            GIN  --  AUGUST 27, 1986'
+
+The Seer watched the life there, with a teased curiosity, and he
+foresaw a postponement to his visit;  so stayed upon the mountain.
+
+What he was seeing, was of deep interest to him.
+
+
+CHAPTER  SEVEN
+
+During this dark night, the city of Pomperaque was by no means quiet.
+Everyone in the city was in a jovial mood, celebrating this day, their
+great sovereign's anniversary of marriage.
+
+All the people rejoiced.  They gave their tribute and praise to their
+Lord Brook Scullion-Blue and his wife, Dearborne, for their fifteen
+years of being together.
+
+Music blared from the hills to the buttes, and far off over the sea to
+the islands and down, deep into the distant valleys.
+
+The people sang and danced around, and they ate and drank everything in
+sight.  Everyone made friendly times, and they made gentle love
+throughout this commemorative evening.
+
+In the city tonight, everyone was enjoying their life.  Almost
+everyone, anyway.
+
+Manguino was ill-at-ease over the love shown to Brook by his people,
+and there was another that could not climb out of the abyssal pit of
+her despair.
+
+Mercedes could not find merriment within herself.
+
+The beauty of this child was withered away from her, since that
+fortnight ago, when Manguino blessed her with his favour.
+
+She suffered greatly from her tortured soul and impregnated body.  She
+had spent the most part of this evening alone in the gardens, in the
+back of the Blue Mansion.  Although she was escorted to the Lord's
+house by her betrothed Hartford, she had left him for the comfort of
+the sedating gardens.
+
+Alone, she strolled the cobble pathways between the rows of hedge.  She
+paced over the tiny wooden bridges that spanned the midget streams
+meandering about the entire estate.
+
+The party was picking up inside the mansion and there were a few
+betting with each other on whether, or not, the ArchBishop would
+attend.  However, they soon forgot their bets as they became more
+intoxicated.
+
+Hartford was searching the mansion for his darling Mercedes, unaware
+that she was troubled.  He thought that she was just playing with him,
+teasing him to find her.
+
+This wasn't the case, though.  She was outside, under the stars,
+thinking and praying to God for strength.
+
+Mercedes was no longer walking.  She had sat down on a wide marble
+bench outside the glass flower house.
+
+Here, with the moonlight beaming through the leaves of the trees over
+head, her face was modelled by the shadows thereof, and there
+occasionally glistened shiny tears that slid across her face like
+meteorites that flashed by in a starless midnight sky.  She mourned for
+her loss.
+
+From a hanging terrace above her head, loomed a figure of a man,
+keeping himself in the
+phantom shadows, so that he could not be seen and still be able to
+watch whatever activity would be below.
+
+He observed the fair young woman below, and wondered who she was.
+
+Lloyd watched her ever since she first entered the garden and since the
+first moment, he heard her sobbing and crying, and rubbing her eyes.
+
+He wondered how such a pretty thing could be so miserable, and he felt
+ultimately inadequate by not being able to lend her assistance, or at
+least, his shoulder for her to cry on.  He didn't know who this young
+woman was but he felt as close to her as he's ever felt to anyone.
+Somehow he empathized with her even though he didn't know what her
+troubles were.
+
+He felt miserable now.
+
+Several times he wanted to call out to her but he knew that if his
+presence was discovered there, by some coenobite, it would mean the end
+of his life, and it would mean great trouble to his host for harbouring
+a sinner.
+
+He thought to climb down the tree, by the terrace, and then approach
+her with his help, but his physical condition still prevented him from
+such over-exertions.
+
+So he just stood there on the terrace, blending into the shadows, as if
+he was one himself, and continued to watch the lovely woman below as
+she sat all alone with the melancholy hugging her moonlit face.
+
+Lloyd took a drink from his glass that he was holding.  When it caught
+the light of the moon, it twinkled like a diamond set by an open fire.
+Mercedes didn't notice the moon reflecting off Lloyd's glass while she
+sat on the marble slab.
+
+The night was beginning to take on a chill.  Mercedes' short bursts of
+breath were illuminated by the moonlight.  The breaths quickly passed
+in and out of her, in strangled gasps.
+
+She whimpered, cutting the delicate music emanating from the house and
+cutting a notch into Lloyd's already pained heart.
+
+Lloyd was over-head and yet he wasn't there, and he watched the
+beautiful young woman destroy her own spirit.
+
+He wished that he knew her thoughts and yet he couldn't imagine what
+they could be.  Little did he know the pain that her heart and soul
+were struggling to overcome.  Little was he aware of the agonies that
+gnawed away at her, from inside -- put there by the great god of the
+land, the ArchBishop.
+
+Mercedes could hardly tolerate it any longer.  She could feel the
+absolute Evil, drawing strength right from her spirit.  The Evil grew
+stronger as it fed off the will residing in her emotions, and so killed
+them.
+
+The Evil killed all the love within her, including the love towards her
+beloved and promised husband, Hartford.
+
+She believed that she could not go to him soiled, even if so turned
+that way by the Almighty ArchBishop.
+
+Her virginity, raped from her by a god, destroyed her fragile spirit
+and maimed her belief in the True God.  Yet, with this belief of her's
+weakened, she still tried to pray.
+
+A tiny voice issued from her.
+
+Lloyd's ears perked and his heart beat stronger.  He could hardly hear
+her but her voice was like a nightingale, and he forgot the pains from
+his own wounds as he concentrated to hear her over the music coming
+from the inside the mansion.
+
+It was a prayer from her heart.
+
+
+Lloyd felt uneasy as he listened and he could smell the stench of Evil
+lingering in the night air.
+
+While Mercedes prayed, she heard the ArchBishop's course voice
+repeating through her mind, saying to her that he will bless her.  She
+knew that she was stained with the kiss of Evil and she prayed to the
+True Living God, to forgive her.
+
+Captured in the slashes of lunar light that filtered through the leaves
+of the trees above Mercedes, Lloyd thought that he saw a momentary
+glint of metal.
+
+Her voice became louder, struggling in hiccoughed gasps.
+
+"Oh help me, God!  Do not turn your eyes away from me, for I must
+destroy the demon that was milked into me; and yes, myself, for letting
+it be within me!"
+
+She lifted her clenched hands into the air and Lloyd finally saw what
+she was holding.  A shaft of light broke the tranquil conformity of
+darkness and he knew that it could be nothing else but a dagger.
+
+He stepped into the moonlight and looked don as he heard her hurl out
+some more desperate words.
+
+"Oh God, do not anger at the taking of my own life.  Forgive me, Lord,
+and accept my spirit!"  she announced.
+
+She plunged the dagger deep into her own chest and pulled it down
+through to her belly.  Her twinging body dropped to the ground.  While
+in weak convulsions she thrust the dagger to its limit, then lay
+motionless.  Lloyd dropped his glass, its breaking sounding like a the
+chorus of mourning angels, and he looked upon the scene, in horror and
+breathed out a word as his eyes were enveloped in tears.
+
+"NO!"  was all that he said, and he sank down to his knees and clasped
+his hands.
+
+Her light and silky gown was dyed in the warm scarlet of her own blood
+flowing, steadily, from her heart.
+
+Lloyd prayed.  He could do nothing to save her.  By the time that he
+realized her intentions, it was too late.  On the terrace tiles, he
+prostrated himself to the great, true and living God.  He prayed for
+forgiveness, for not helping her, and then prayed to God to accept the
+girl's spirit and forgive her for her act.
+
+Inside the mansion, many guests waited for their sovereign to make the
+first toast of the evening, while Lloyd made his own salute to the
+girl, whose name he did not know, that he watched die this night.
+
+Lloyd was the first one to mourn for her, and in some strange way, he
+believed that God mourned for her after him.
+
+The ballroom was full of people that were having a good time. They were
+all laughing and dancing, and making conversation with one another
+while standing near the many tables full of food and wine.
+
+Boy was running around, letting guests into the house and serving
+others with refreshments.
+
+Hartford still searched aimlessly for Mercedes, and he constantly asked
+Boy if he knew where she was.
+
+Boy finally became annoyed and told him to stop asking because he never
+saw her, but he did promise to tell Hartford when he did.
+
+After that, Boy went and served two of Brook's most loyal friends with
+some stronger spirits.
+
+
+Miel and Cassta were already quite drunk but they didn't like to admit
+to such a thing.  Only if they ever reached the point of utter
+unconsciousness did they admit to being 'somewhat intoxicated.'  Now,
+however, they were fine.  They were in a happy state and so they made
+jokes to each other.
+
+"I do so wish that Brook had more of these gatherings."  said Miel.
+"This is quite a party, Cassta!"
+
+Cassta laughed while trying to swallow his drink, so letting some spill
+onto his shirt front.
+
+"Yes.  It's almost as interesting as those parties that I host!"  he
+said in return.
+
+Miel had a comical expression aimed at him, resembling 'shame on
+Cassta', but he couldn't hold it very long because Cassta crossed his
+eyes at him.
+
+"You credit yourself too highly, Cassta!  One would begin to think that
+you are the Almighty, himself!"  A few people, standing nearby, were
+amused by what they heard. A couple of others, however, were offended
+to hear the Almighty's name used in vain.  These high-nosed people
+hated their comrades' drunkenness, but when they tried to sit, in
+chairs that weren't there, they realized that, on such a gay evening as
+this, no one could restrain themselves from drinking, at least a little
+bit.
+
+"He hasn't shown up yet, Miel.  So, you suppose that he'll come
+tonight?"  Cassta asked about the ArchBishop.
+
+"Maybe he will after Brook's toast."  replied Miel.  "But if he
+doesn't, you will owe me three gold bits!"
+
+Cassta laughed a little and touched the side of his nose with the back
+of his hand.
+
+"He will be here, Miel.  I heard rumours that he will make a speech
+suggesting Brook and wife's propagation!"
+
+
+"Ah -- Brook will never stand for that!"  said Miel.  "They are better
+off without children, anyway!  Children are nothing more than a
+novelty!"  he laughed and Cassta joined in.
+
+"Novelty?!"  Cassta exclaimed.  "Is that why you have twelve
+'novelties' of your own?"
+
+Their laughs were the loudest in the area.  They rocked back and forth
+almost falling over themselves.
+
+Miel spoke in reply to Cassta's marking question.
+
+"My WIFE has no self control over herself!"  he said.
+
+While they laughed there was a sudden spontaneity of cheering and
+clapping as Brook ascended a flight of stairs with his beautiful
+Dearborne, and followed by Boy, carrying a tray with two golden goblets.
+
+Brook stopped and turned towards his citizens and they all bowed and
+curtsied to him in respect.  He tipped his head to them in acceptance
+of their fealty to him.
+
+He lifted his palms to them and the room murmured into a hush.
+
+"On this night of my love, I want to propose a toast!"  Brook said to
+them.
+
+They all bowed to him and spoke together.
+
+"With pleasure, Lord!"  they all said, then quietly waited for him to
+begin.
+
+"Tonight we are all equal.  We are human beings; and with this all, I
+toast to each of you, the wish of a long life, liberty and happiness!"
+He toasted his guests in a manner that wholly reflected his nobility
+and the audience hailed him.
+
+"To you, Lord Scullion-Blue!"  they extolled and lifted their glasses
+to him before they drank.  As they all drank their toast, a loud voice
+called to them from the entrance.
+
+"ALL KNEEL!"
+
+Everyone turned and saw that it was a cardinal, heralding the
+ArchBishop's entrance.
+
+The room was gripped in a breathless silence.  The ArchBishop had
+indeed come to this formality, clothed in a splendour never before seen.
+
+The majority of the guests did kneel to him.  Only Brook, Empal, Cassta
+and Miel (with their families), abstained from the kneeling to the
+Almighty.
+
+Manguino was not pleased when he saw this, and he became extremely
+angered when Brook spoke to the people, so putting him in a lowly
+position.
+
+"Friends! _ Tonight rejoice for us!"  said Brook pointing to Dearborne
+and himself.  "There is no need to kneel before anyone on this happy
+evening! -- Is this not so ArchBishop?"
+
+Brook itched Manguino's patience and with a slight grin waited for
+Manguino to respond.  He looked around the room at the people and heard
+Miel and Cassta laughing.  This made him red-in-the-face but eventually
+he looked up to Brook then raised his hand, signalling to the people to
+rise.
+
+Miel and Cassta were amused and shared some of their views of the
+ArchBishop with Empal and Tucker, when they joined the two men.
+
+The Archbishop continued to look at Brook for several moments, while
+Brook and Dearborn joined their citizens in their mingling on the floor.
+
+Music started up again and so did Hartford's search for Mercedes.  He
+was now becoming exceedingly worried.
+
+They had made plans to address Brook and Dearborne, after the toast,
+and ask them to attend their wedding as honoured guests.  Now, however,
+Hartford couldn't ask Brook with Mercedes' delicate presence there to
+ensure a favourable acceptance.
+
+
+He searched some more.
+
+Boy had disappeared for a few moments.  He went out into the garden for
+some fresh air.  Hartford would soon find out where Mercedes was all
+evening.
+
+Nobody paid much attention to Boy when he came back from the outside,
+carrying an odd expression of horror and bewilderment.
+
+Miel and Cassta spoke in loud voices, not caring who heard them speak.
+Miel was paying Cassta his betted three gold bits; wagered on the
+ArchBishop's attendance.
+
+"Our Almighty looks disturbed, Cassta!"
+
+"Yes -- He looks as though his holy sceptre has been plucked!"
+ribbed Cassta and so received a laugh from Miel, Empal and Tucker.
+
+"Or else, his is in a place, other than his hand!"  added Empal.
+
+While they laughed to almost exhaustion, a couple women approached them
+and they paired.  Now that the wives were back the two men quickly
+lapsed into civility.  Gaena put her arms around Tucker's arm and Aria
+faced Miel with a light-hearted disapproval showing in her eligant face.
+
+"Aren't we merry, tonight?"  remarked Aria pushing some hair from
+Mile's eyes.
+
+"Ah, my darling wife.  Cassta and I made a god-like humour!"  he said
+then glanced over at Cassta.  Both began to laugh again and especially
+loudly when they looked around and caught Manguino's glare as he
+listened.
+
+"Are you two children drunk again?" Aria asked with a smile.
+
+Cassta and Miel looked at one another and both pointed at one another
+as they answered.
+
+"He's drunk ... I'm not!"
+
+They carried on some more then Cassta put his arms around Miel and
+Aria, mostly to keep himself from falling down, and looking at the
+others there, he slurred a question.
+
+"Tell me, friends! -- Have you ever heard the story about the wandering
+Vicar?"
+
+While he told his friends the humorous story, Manguino separated with
+his small envoy made up of Cardinals Allen and Levy, and the Vicar,
+Tohm.
+
+There was an aura of treachery and deceit about them as they distanced
+themselves from the rest of the guests.  Manguino turned to the
+Cardinal Allen, who seemed very excited.  Like a child, he pranced
+around the ArchBishop since their arrival, waiting for the ArchBishop
+to give his acceptance to him concerning his honour-paying to the
+lovely Dearborne.
+
+"I don't care what you do, Allen!"  the ArchBishop began.  "I do not
+care!  However, if you are discovered, I will not do a thing to help
+you.  I will not know what you are doing, and I will denounce you as a
+demon, if I am thought to be involved!"
+
+There was a momentary silence between them while Allen made account of
+all that Manguino said.
+
+"I understand, Your Grace, but do not worry.  I shall move like a snake
+and strike just as silently."  promised Allen.
+
+"You behave more like an unsatisfied rabbit, my friend.  Be careful,
+and find your own way back to Halls."  Manguino gave Allen his final
+instructions just as he saw Dearborne make her way to the Mansion's
+upper levels, to where the bed chambers were.
+
+"Thank-you, Most High!"  hailed Allen, then slowly made his way to the
+stairs and the upper floor.
+
+Brook stood by the banquet table having a drink and chewing on some
+fruit that his dear friend Empal had brought, for the festivities.
+
+
+Many of the guests went to him to pay their personal respects and
+congratulations, on his fifteen years of marriage to Dearborne.
+
+Soon, he stood alone for a while and looked about the entire hall and
+saw that the people were enjoying themselves, and he smiled in his
+heart seeing Boy running about serving the people with drink.
+
+He'll be a great leader one day, thought Brook.  All great leaders must
+serve their people and therefore keep them content and happy.  He
+continued to watch the boy for a while them made a silent wish aimed at
+Boy.  Take those troubles, my son, and learn how not to inflict them on
+your subjects.
+
+From across the room, Miel and Cassta were looking at Brook.  They saw
+the man's face expressing deep thought and they assumed that he had his
+mind on Dearborne.
+
+"He has a dainty flag to decorate his royal mast, doesn't he?" Cassta
+commented.
+
+"Yes, but this flag he runs up at night instead of the morning."  Miel
+responded.
+
+They both sighed as they went over to the banquet table to get some
+more to drink.
+
+Music was playing loudly and the people danced, waltzing in circles and
+walking about in promenade.
+
+Hartford went up to almost everybody on the floor searching for his
+beloved Mercedes, but everybody shook their heads in their regret for
+not seeing her.
+
+Boy was walking towards Brook as did Hartford.  He asked the Lord Brook
+the same question as he had been asking everyone, this evening.
+
+"Excuse me, my Lord.  I wonder if you have seen my Mercedes?"
+
+"Yes."  said Brook.  "She's a lovely girl, and you both look very good
+together."
+
+"I am sorry, Lord -- I meant, that I have lost her at the party
+tonight.  Do you know where she is?"  Hartford asked again.
+
+"No, I don't, Hartford.  Have you looked in the parlour and checked the
+water-closet?"  Brook suggested.
+
+"She's not there!"
+
+Boy came up to both men.  He didn't say a thing but Brook knew that
+something was wrong.
+
+They exchanged glances at one another and briefly Hartford became pale,
+then forced a smile.
+
+"You've found her?"  he asked.
+
+Boy looked over at Brook then back at Hartford, and nodded.
+
+"She ... she is in the garden."  the boy said, swallowing each word.
+"She is dead, Hartford!"
+
+Hartford lost all colour in his face and his pupils dilated to
+pin-prick size, then he ran outside to the garden.
+
+"Oh God, NO!"  Hartford had finally found his lovely betrothed, dead.
+He embraced her limp body gently into his arms and took the dagger out
+of her body, hearing it scrape against her exposed ribs.  He set the
+dagger to the side and kissed her cheek and he wept.  Then, as if her
+own body cried for Hartford's pains, a tear crept forth from her eye,
+mixing with his own tears and flowing towards the arm-length gash in
+her chest.
+
+Hartford moaned and rocked back and forth; for with her death came the
+death of his world.
+
+Brook was disturbed and directed Boy to prepare a chamber upstairs for
+Hartford and Mercedes.
+
+Boy went forth and paid no attention to Lloyd standing up on the
+balcony, looking at the crowd.  In his eyes were tears and he too was
+pale from his witness.  In his mind swirled whirlwind thoughts of the
+demonic masturbation that came out of Halls and touched every living
+thing with its Evil impurity.
+
+He could not keep all that he saw, from his mind.
+
+All laughed and were enjoying themselves, while outside was an
+innocense was forced into the obscurity of loss.  What had happened to
+his own love, in Besten, those few short years ago, had been replayed
+before him, this night.  It was a terrible loss brought on by someone's
+whims of power and glory.
+
+He heard Boy's voice telling Dearborne about the problem that happened
+and that Brook ordered a chamber be prepared.  Dearborne was heard
+making her excuses to a couple women that she was talking to in her own
+bed chamber and went into another room with Boy.
+
+When out in the hall, Lloyd bowed his head solemnly to the lady and she
+returned with a nod.  From his expression, the Lady Dearborne was sure
+that he knew something about the problem that Boy mentioned.
+
+She finally found out what the problem was when she was preparing the
+one room with Boy.  She was saddened by what Boy told her he had found
+in the garden and she imagined how Hartford felt.  Yet, Dearborne
+herself could not cry for Mercedes. In her lifetime she had seen too
+many deaths, most of which were associated with Halls, in one way or
+another.  This must be another death caused by someone at Halls, she
+believed.
+
+Downstairs, Hartford carried Mercedes into the ballroom and Brook
+immediately threw his cape around her.  He didn't want anyone to know
+about her death this evening and so tried to hide the wounds.
+
+
+Hartford's eyes were glazed-over and Brook knew that Hartford wasn't
+aware of his surroundings any more, so Brook guided him up the stairs
+and to the room.
+
+Brook gave his leave to his guests and bade them to continue with their
+merriment, and most of them did.
+
+Miel and Cassta felt uneasy.  Although they were in a twilight
+drunkenness, they knew that something was wrong.
+
+Manguino made his way over to the stairs, smiled to himself and shook
+his head in a slight displeasure.  He knelt down and with his finger
+dabbed a little red circle of blood that he was certain was the girl's.
+
+"Oh, you naive girl."  he said to himself.
+
+Cassta noticed Manguino's actions and pointed them out to Miel.  It
+didn't take much effort to figure out that the great ArchBishop was
+associated with the trouble that they saw.
+
+They decided that they would check on their Lord a little later, to see
+if they could help with anything.
+
+The discontented guests soon began to feel uneasy and many of them left
+the mansion, until there were just a few Prominants left there,
+finishing off the rest of the food and drink from the tables as if they
+were beggars at a God-sent feast.
+
+The music began to die down and soon the great ArchBishop also left
+with Cardinal Levy and the Vicar Tohm, knowing that he didn't have to
+add his own planned attack on Brook.
+
+Upstairs, Hartford had gently set Mercedes down on the bed and stared
+at her.  Brook, Dearborne and Boy looked on as Hartford continued to
+weep, in convulsive sobs.
+
+"She is dead!  She has taken her own life, but why?"  Hartford was
+asking while Lloyd stood outside the chamber door listening.
+
+Unseen, Lloyd crept into the room and sat in the window behind the
+curtains.
+
+Hartford continued his lament for Mercedes.
+
+"Why?"  he asked.  "Did I displease her?  Did she not love me any more?
+-- Oh, God!  I cannot understand!?"
+
+Brook put his hand on Hartford's shoulder hoping to console him to some
+degree.
+
+"Listen to me, Hartford!  Her death is not your fault."  said Brook.
+"I am told that her love for you was greater than anything in the whole
+world.  Something else made her ... Hartford believed Brook, and so did
+Lloyd as he watched the moon rise from behind Canon's Butte,
+silhouetting the Halls Cathedral as if it an ancient mausoleum.
+
+Cassta and Miel entered the chamber silently.  The misfortune of the
+past few minutes had a sobering effect on them and they were silent, no
+longer laughing and no longer making fun of trifles for their
+amusements.
+
+Hartford's mumbling scared everyone in the room and the two men didn't
+know how to react.  They just stood there quietly, their mouths agape
+and their expressions showing a dumbfoundedness.
+
+"My only love.  She's gone and I cannot breathe!"  Hartford gurgled
+with irrationality. Mercedes' death finally began to work on his head.
+"My wife to be, will not be, she isn't -- is she?  There is nothing.  I
+am nothing.  Is all nothing?"
+
+Dearborne looked at Brook with frightful worry and she took his arm.
+
+"He's delirious!"  she said.  Brook saw Miel and Cassta enter the room
+earlier and now motioned to them to approach.  Without hesitation, they
+drew near.
+
+"My friends, take Hartford down to the parlour and let him rest!"
+Brook requested and his two most loyal subjects obeyed him.
+
+They took Hartford, one under each arm, and carried him down to the
+parlour, Boy leading the way.
+
+It was obvious that Hartford wasn't aware of what was happening to
+him.  His face was pallid and his eyes were glazed-over.  He was no
+longer existing on a mutual level with anyone in this world.  Within
+his grief-afflicted mind and mutilated soul, he searched for that
+which he had lost.
+
+Brook and Dearborne were alone for a moment, so to speak, since they
+were not aware of Lloyd's presence, while he quietly sat in the window.
+
+"It is so quiet, Brook. The guests have gone!"
+
+"Yes." confirmed Brook.  "The flavour of this celebration had become
+very bitter!"
+
+How true, thought Lloyd as he looked at Halls in the distance, knowing
+from experience that the cause of this night's misfortune, originated
+there.
+
+"I'm sorry for tonight, my love!"  said Brook.
+
+Dearborne's moistt eyes calmed his heaving spirit.  She did not blame
+him for this evening's tragedy and she knew that his apology was really
+intended as pity for the loss of such a precious and innocent soul as
+Mercedes was.
+
+With this, Brook turned and went out of the room.
+
+Lloyd's heart ached with the burden of his witness.  He saw Mercedes,
+inside his mind, thrusting the dagger into her heart, over and over
+again, and the visions of this mingled with his memory of witnessing
+his own betrothed Charnan, at her death.  This evening devastated him.
+Mercedes reminded him so much of his beloved Charnan.  She had the same
+golden hair and smooth, fair skin.  Her beauty was only surpassed by
+her innocense.
+
+
+Lloyd's mind travelled while comparing the two women and his two most
+painful experiences.
+
+Through a small tare in the curtain, Lloyd saw Dearborne lift her head
+from a prayer that she had made for the body and spirit of the departed
+Mercedes.
+
+She was starting to turn and leave when she sat heavily into a chair by
+the bed and started to cry.
+
+Lloyd was ready to reveal himself to her, to talk and console her, but
+he couldn't show to her his own weakness.  He cried, too.
+
+Brook was down in the parlour with Miel, Cassta and Hartford.  The
+three men stood apart from Hartford.  He was put on the couch, reclined
+and withdrawn, and he appeared to be as inanimate as the furniture.
+
+Hartford, the young man with so many years ahead of him, was no longer
+alive, in the normal sense of the word.  He did breath and occasionally
+twitched, and tears periodically migrated in a clean path down his
+face.  Yet, this unfortunate young man lacked the spirit of life found
+residing in every human.
+
+The men held back their tears, looking-on at Hartford with pity and
+remorse.
+
+"At this time we cannot lose our wits,"  Brook told Miel and Cassta.
+"for there are only two people in all of Phoride that could be
+responsible for this."  he glared at the men with cold, angry eyes.
+"They shall pay for it!"
+
+The other two men tried to swallow the lumps that blocked their throats
+and when Cassta spoke, his voice burbled.
+
+"I must prevent my beloved ..."  he cleared his throat and continued.
+
+"I must keep her from taking her own life.  She is dainty and
+beautiful.  We are pledged to marry."
+
+"We must protect our women from our own clergy  -- that's shameful!"
+Miel added.
+
+"I will not let my Ledo die like Mercedes, and God knows how many
+others.  I will honourably join her tomorrow!"
+
+"You are correct, Cassta.  Something must be done to suppress
+Manguino's evil ways."  said Brook.
+
+Miel added his own thoughts and sentiments about the ArchBishop's
+immoral methodology.
+
+"He has gone too far, this time.  Unlike the other suicides, this one
+wasn't isolated.  This time, a girl's death affected several scores of
+people."
+
+Cassta clutched Brook's upper arm.
+
+"Lord, would you oversee my wedding tomorrow?"  Cassta asked him and he
+nodded, accepting.
+
+Brook turned on to his concern for Hartford.  He moved to Hartford and
+covered him with a long cloak that was over one of the chairs.
+
+"I think that we should leave him to rest now!"  Brook suggested and
+Miel questioned in worry.
+
+"Should someone stay with him, Brook?"
+
+Cassta volunteered to watch Hartford, wanting to help in whatever means
+he could but Brook was aware that there was nothing that any one of
+them could do for him.  He appreciated his two friends' concern for the
+remnant that Hartford had become, but he didn't want them to stay
+needlessly, and having the situation under control, he excused them.
+
+
+"Miel, your wife probably waits for you.  You should go."
+
+"Yes, my Lord!" nodded Miel.  "You will call me if I am needed?"  Miel
+asked and Brook affirmed.
+
+"You too should leave, my friend."  Brook said to Cassta.  "I realize
+that it is late, but I suggest that you go speak to Ledo.  Give to her
+father my responsibility."
+
+"I will leave you, then.  Thank-you, Brook!"
+
+Both men left as Boy walked into the parlour.
+
+"Lord?"  he hailed Brook.  "The guests and musicians are gone now!"
+
+"Alright, Boy.  I will be in my den, for a time.  Keep watch on
+Hartford and call me if anything changes!."  Boy sat in a chair
+opposite Hartford and he didn't take his eyes from him.
+
+Dearborne was still in the same bed chamber with Mercedes' body.
+
+Lloyd still hadn't calmed enough to talk to her.  He continued to sit
+in the window and listened to her lovely voice singing a sad little
+tune.
+
+Lloyd wasn't the only one listening to her sing.  Outside the door
+lurked the Cardinal Allen.
+
+He had seen Brook repair to his den and Allen knew that he would not
+re-emerge for some time.  He thought that he had enough time available
+to himself to receive his total fulfilment from Dearborne.
+
+He listened to her sing as he moved closer to the door and finally he
+entered the room in silence.
+
+        "The days pass by... Our lives are brief... To death we all 
+         do cry,
+         We live in grief... Through all the days -- "
+
+Dearborne sang but her words were shattered by the splintered voice of
+the Cardinal Allen, finishing-off the verse.
+
+        "For we all know... We'll one day die!"
+
+Startled, Dearborne swung around and stood facing him.
+
+Lloyd was startled also and he peered through the tare in the curtain
+again.  There stood the man who almost had him executed a fortnight
+passed; the same man that had made the fair Dearborne to feel dirty.
+
+"Why haven't you left yet?"  she demanded of him, and he just smiled.
+
+"It's a pity, is not -- I mean, the girl's death."  he began.  "You
+know, fair Dearborne, the ArchBishop has very good eyes for beauty but
+he does not understand the mind of women.  He pushed too much.  He
+should influence, not frighten."  he kept smiling as he moved a step
+closer to her.  "He has only one child to my thirteen, and that child
+is a cripple, in its mind."
+
+Dearborne had finally taken hold of herself and spoke out at Allen.
+"Get out, you wretched weasel!"  she shouted but this inspired Allen to
+move closer yet.
+
+"You will be wholly happy to mother my fourteenth."
+
+"I should say not."
+
+"Oh, my dear, you will submit!"  Allen's voice sounded of excited
+promise.  "Since you have neglected to bare children to your line with
+Brook, I (or any other of the Almighty), has the right to have you bare
+a child from him.  This right I claim and demand from you, and by the
+law, even you cannot refuse."  he took another stride to Dearborne and
+behind her she took hold of an empty vase.
+
+"I am above the law, now leave or I shall call my husband!"  she was
+terrified.
+
+"Really?  When Brook goes into his room, he can hear no one.  So he
+finds out about this 3/4denial will be made, and without proof, you
+will not be believed."  He made a final advance on her and took her
+into his arms.
+
+She struggled them slammed him in the face with the vase.  Yet, nothing
+happened.  What's more, it seemed to have inspired him all the more.
+
+He reached out for the part in her blouse, tore it then began to knead
+her exposed breasts.
+
+Lloyd flew from the window when he saw that the vase did Allen no harm,
+and now forcibly threw him off from Dearborne.  He stood in front of
+her and watched Allen pick himself up off the floor, several yards away.
+
+The expression on Allen's face was dismay and fear.  For a moment he
+thought that Brook had returned, but now he saw who it was.
+
+"It's you.  How can this be?"  demanded Allen.
+
+Lloyd gave him a heated glare.  "My maker didn't want me, at that
+moment.  And if you do not leave, he may want you, now!"
+
+"Move away."  commanded Allen.  "This is not your affair!"
+
+"And it shall not be yours!"
+
+At this, the Cardinal Allen rushed Lloyd.  Lloyd with all his force
+summoned, fisted Allen in the forehead.  The crazed Allen still
+attacked as if he didn't feel any ill effects from being solidly
+squared in the head.  On his second rush, he caught Lloyd in the ribs
+with his head.  
+
+Lloyd lurched forward, in pain, as he got Allen in the throat when he
+wrapped his arms about his neck.  He spun around and heaved towards
+the floor, unto his knees.  Allen didn't move any more, his neck
+snapping into a splintered mush.
+
+Lloyd slowly rose, holding his injured side, and he walked away from
+the body without hardly a care for what he had done.  "Are you injured,
+my Lady?"  he asked, while he took off his vest and gave it to her to
+cover herself.
+
+"Yes!  You helped me just in time, thank-you!"
+
+"I should have been there sooner.  I was sitting in the window since
+the girl's body was brought in here.  I'm sorry but I just couldn't
+move sooner to help you!
+
+Dearborne looked away from him.  She focused upon Allen's lifeless body
+with a feeling of absolute relief.
+
+Lloyd spoke some more, trying to give explanation for his lateness.
+
+"I had seen her take her own life, my Lady!"  he pointed to Mercedes'
+body and tried to keep his tears from her.  She listened and slowly
+returned to looking at Lloyd.
+
+"She was sitting on the bench, beneath my terrace.  The moon was out
+and when I finally realised what she had in her hands, she had killed
+herself.  I couldn't save her."
+
+Dearborne put her head against his arm revealing to him that she
+understood how he felt, but she didn't really until he told her that
+story about his own love, Charnan, who died the same way.
+
+In the morning, Brook was told about what had happened and he some
+Totemen from the Phoridene Council, take the Cardinal Allen's body back
+to Halls.  With the body, Brook included a letter to Manguino demanding
+that he keeps the death issue in its place and not to make any trouble
+by it.  He reminded Manguino of the promise that he made to him
+concerning Allen.
+
+Brook had admitted himself to be Allen's executioner.
+
+In the Blue Mansion, Lloyd and Boy were told to prepare for their
+journey to the north.
+
+Brook felt that there was no time to lose.  He had a feeling of
+impending doom, and not only that, he wanted to be safe.
+
+
+On Mount Benitar, the wise man also knew that something would happen.
+He saw all the signs.   Soon, he thought -- soon it would be time for
+him to go down to Pomperaque, again.
+
+
+CHAPTER  EIGHT
+
+The events that had occurred over the passed few days affected almost
+everyone in Pomperaque and other parts of Phoride.
+
+In Gothal, the Holy City, the nuns at the Abbey of Our Holy Saint
+Mariot, performed a funeral service for Mercedes and most everyone from
+Pomperaque, and Gothal itself, turned out to pay their respects.
+
+The day before the funeral, Cassta and Ledo were married in Gothal by
+the Abbey Mother and Brook presided over it.  The ceremony was
+performed in secret, in the name of the True Living God, and just a
+small number of friends attended.  Miel was there with Aria. Empal was
+there with his family, and the greatest of Pomperaque's Prominants,
+Brook and Dearborne, were there.
+
+Everyone was happy at the wedding and somber at the funeral, as it was
+normal to be.
+
+There was anger in the eyes of some of the coenobites when they found
+out that Ledo had married Cassta.  They could now do nothing to her.
+She was indeed above their rights of having her bare a Holy Child.
+Cassta saved his darling Ledo, just in time.
+
+To most, however, the saving of a life or a soul meant little when
+compared to the loss of one such innocence as Mercedes.  All that there
+was to benefit from salvation was the relief that it brought to the
+saved, and those close to them.  Relief, by itself, had no real value.
+
+Good and Evil each made their own laments.
+
+While mourners and wailers cried for the death of an innocent young
+woman, so did the monks at Halls, cry and mourn for the brutal death of
+their best and most respected Cardinal Allen.
+
+As it was; a customary show of respect to a dearly-departed coenobite,
+a pure woman was chosen to be entombed with the body.  This chosen
+woman willingly accepted requests made to her to share her eternity
+with the dead cleric, and carried with her the love and honour of each
+individual member at Halls.  The love and respect was given to her,
+through physical sex, by each monk, before she was taken to the tomb
+with the deceased brother.  While the corpse lay in state, there was a
+room set aside, adjacent the big hall in the chapel. The chosen women
+lay unclad in soft beds and each was fornicated with by each individual
+at Halls; from the lowest novice to the ArchBishop himself.
+
+Prior to the monks looking upon the body of their dead brother, they
+entered the room and gave their all to the woman.  During the
+copulation, the men repeatedly chanted:  "Take this to our friend; a
+sign that we love him!"
+
+At the end of the day, when all the men had gone through with their
+ritual respect, they took the limp, unconscious woman and set her on
+top of Allen's dead body.  Both were then carried to the grotto, in the
+cliffs at the ocean's edge, and were sealed inside, forever.  From the
+moment of the bodies' entombment,  all those that were in Halls
+Cathedral abstained from any and all normal human functioning for three
+days.  During this three day period -- a further show of respect for
+their dead -- no one ate or had sexual intercourse and during this time
+they kept themselves from sleep, and prayed for the Cardinal's soul.
+
+From the Cathedral spires the Rogjans called out to the countryside
+some cantorial chants, announcing and honouring, and strangely, even
+canonizing the Cardinal Allen.
+
+On the evening of the third day, all those residing at Halls made
+preparations for a day of feasting, and at sunrise the feeding began.
+To enjoy this day to the fullest, the coenobites brought to Halls a
+caravan of women from Iÿnondan and they caught up from their three day
+celibacy.
+
+Everyone was fulfilled, promising their living spirits to Allen's
+resurrection as they reflected on his well-rounded life.
+
+After their observations of praise, Manguino and Tohm repaired to the
+office to speak of their friend.  Of all the brothers at Halls, they
+two knew him best and regarded him most highly.
+
+"How he will be missed by all!"  Tohm told Manguino.  "Most everything
+that I know, he showed me.
+
+"Even the few, and greatest, amongst us falter.  He made a mistake and
+so paid for it."  Manguino explained to Tohm that Allen's obsession to
+inseminate Dearborne overtook him.  The manner of his death, however,
+greatly puzzled him.
+
+"I would like to know how such a dainty woman as she could break the
+neck of a man as physically powerful as Allen?"  questioned Manguino.
+"I don't believe that Brook had killed him."
+
+
+"That is something we all ask, Your Grace.  We must bring them both to
+justice, regardless of guilt!"  Tohm was speaking like his teacher.  He
+didn't care, now.  He just wanted Allen's death avenged.
+
+"I agree, but it's said that Allen was caught forcing her and Brook
+himself admitted to the killing our friend.  Yet, I know that he's
+lying."
+
+"Would you like to know my thoughts?"  Tohm asked Manguino.  "I believe
+it was that northern man, that had disappeared, who was the man that
+killed Allen.  What perfect place to hide from us -- at the Blue
+Mansion!"
+
+The Archbishop's eyes glared for a moment but refused this idea.  He
+speculated that the dissident was long gone from Pomperaque by that
+time.
+
+Tohm, however, carried on until he began to convince Manguino of his
+idea.
+
+"We must bring the Lady Dearborne to trial then, if only trying her on
+the basis of her refusal, as your subject, to bare his Holy Child.  We
+can try Brook on harbouring a dissident and charge him with heresy."
+
+It didn't matter to Tohm about the deaths of more people.  As far as he
+was concerned the whole of Phoride could be sacrificed to avenge
+Allen's murder.
+
+Manguino wanted no more bloodshed.  He couldn't trust Brook either, and
+he had to decide.  Brook's show of power, as of late, had made him seem
+greater and more beloved, by the people.  Then there was the letter
+that he sent with Allen's body.
+
+                        Manguino
+
+                        My promise fulfilled, Brother.
+                        Recompense shall not be tolerated.
+                        Let it pass for the good of your
+                        own condition!
+
+                                       Sovereign Lord B. S-B.
+
+He, as ArchBishop, wanted to fold, and pass on this retaliation, yet,
+just couldn't convince Tohm of that desire.
+
+His views to go ahead, seemed more sound and he was urged by Tohm, like
+he was urged by Allen so many times before.
+
+"She is Lady Dearborne Scullion, Tohm; Brook's wife -- you do
+understand?  You did hear me tell Allen that night, I am not
+responsible for him -- even though I did wish him success."
+
+Tohm's impatience poured out of his soul.  He sighed heavily cutting
+into Manguino's line of thought, and in leathery breaths, filled the
+office with his hostility.
+
+"We cannot hold back, Your Grace.  We must act, now!  We must take this
+scourge of the earth, this Brook Scullion, by total surprise.  We have
+to make the Phoridenes to believe that Brook and his wife are Evil, and
+that they should be punished under the Canon Laws, for their crimes."
+
+Manguino nervously paced around as he listened to Tohm's inspiring
+confidence and need for justice.  This was building excitement within
+his heart.
+
+"He is not a clean man, my great one.  Let us storm his house and find
+the proofs of his blasphemies and sacrilegious practices.  Let them
+receive their judgement from you!"
+
+The ArchBishop shook with excitement.  His whole body trembled, the
+layers of fat migrating all over.
+
+
+He sat at his desk and glared with passion right into Tohm's eyes.
+
+"Yes, yes! We could do it, no matter how great our Lord Brook is.  We
+must plan, Tohm.  We have much work to do!"
+
+The ArchBishop was finally sparked.  He absorbed Tohm's passion and
+ferocity, and what's more, he no longer feared his brother.
+
+Tohm continued.
+
+"Our Almighty can be swayed to see his practicality.  It is grand to
+have a god in your confidence."  Tohm sank to his knees and prostrated
+himself before Manguino.  "Let us go, my Almighty!  Let them feel your
+wrath!"
+
+Manguino stood up from his chair and with fire burning in his eyes, he
+slammed his fists on his desk.
+
+"Yes -- they shall feel my wrath!"
+
+He turned.  Facing Tohm, Manguino then lifted the front of his robes.
+
+Tohm looked up at Manguino and smiled then his head disappeared under
+Manguino's robes.
+
+
+CHAPTER  NINE
+
+Over a week had passed since the feast-day at Halls, and once more the
+city of Pomperaque seemed to have returned to normal.  There was,
+however, a feeling of apprehension that loomed over the city, though,
+but no one really gave it much thought.
+
+Pomperaque was relatively quiet.  The markets and bazaars weren't as
+lively and there seemed to be some kind of event, at Halls.
+
+As far as most people were concerned, there wasn't anything obviously
+wrong.
+
+No one noticed the reek of conspiracy rising from the depths of hell to
+fill the masses with a weakness that soon took them over.
+
+The nature of the day sapped the power of spirit from everyone, and
+they all were vulnerable and passive like sheep.
+
+Brook and those in his household had behaved oddly this day.
+They were loose with their thoughts and spoke out without cares or
+fears for anything or anyone.  Their hearts felt light and Brook had
+felt at ease and he believed that since Manguino had not avenged
+Allen's death by now, he had indeed followed Brook's order to 'let it
+pass'.
+
+All day Brook was in his viewing den with his wife, Lloyd and Boy,
+going over a map of the Northern Continent, showing his guest and Boy
+the route that they would take to the great library at Alugean, near
+the port of Angaent.
+
+They were close to each other -- now more than ever -- because Brook
+had revealed to Boy and Dearborne that he had known for a long time,
+that Boy was really his son.  He had made Dearborne and Boy very happy,
+and they felt relieved that Brook had accepted it, in secret, for so
+many years.
+
+In the den, Dearborne stood apart from the man.  She stood at the
+cabinets and pushed buttons on Brook's panel, when he gave her the
+word; and then the men stood at the screen tracing out the route on
+different maps.  Each map was a more detailed version of the sections
+showing that way to the mountain.
+
+Brook had made plans with Empal to fly Lloyd and Boy to Virune, on his
+Kenttitian Eagle, during some night when they wouldn't be seen.  That
+night was soon approaching them and they still had some things to learn.
+
+Nearing the late afternoon, Brook showed to his son and to Lloyd a
+passage-way that ran underground in two directions, built by Carter
+Blue as a precaution against a personal attack.  These passage-ways
+were still in good condition, leading north to the Joenine Forest and
+just south to the inlet which leads to the ocean.
+
+Both routes were safe and quick, but Lloyd and Boyce  would take the
+northern route to a clearing where Empal would be waiting with his
+eagle.
+
+
+The passage-way ran under the Blue Mansion from Brook's den and the
+viewing wall was the hidden door that gave access to them.
+
+Brook demonstrated to them the working of the door and showed to them
+the bracing that they would use to buttress the door; in the case of a
+sudden attack and an insured escape would be necessary.  Lloyd shrugged
+off these things feeling them to unnecessary to his knowledge, but Boy
+absorbed every word that Brook said, as if those very words were his
+life-giving air.
+
+Brook finalized what he thought to be the most important things for him
+to convey.
+
+"Boyce ... my son.  Learn whatever you can at the Alugean Library.
+Know the truths about the past then return to Phoride.  You will
+inherit this land from me, and you will become a great man."  Boyce
+listened with intensity to his father because he knew that he was
+communing with a great mind.  Boyce nodded to him with silent promise.
+
+"Rule with kindness and love, but don't allow men of evil, men like
+your uncle, the ArchBishop, to tread over you and grind you into the
+earth."  Brook breathed for a moment then briefly looked away from
+Boyce.  "I have been too kind and have allowed too much to pass into
+being.  Now, it's difficult to fight the evil."
+
+"I promise you, that I will follow your words, father!"  promised
+Boyce, and Lloyd gave his word to Brook, as well.
+
+"I shall watch over him, Lord.  I will guide him to do what is right in
+accordance to the oldest book's ten laws, and my people shall help us!"
+
+Brook forced a grin and slowly nodded.
+
+"Good!"
+
+He motioned to Dearborne and told her to activate, on the panel, the
+playback for pictures of Alugean.
+
+"I must make certain that you know the entrance to the inside of the
+mountain.  Watch and remember, since this will be the final time I will
+show you."
+
+The pictures flashed on the screen, showing recognizable landmarks that
+are in the vicinity of the entrance and finally there came the picture
+of the entrance itself.  It wasn't very large and was almost hidden,
+and there was one small panel such as that which Brook's gadgets have,
+and from that panel, entry would be gained into the library.
+
+"Remember,"  Brook told Lloyd and Boyce.  "the numbers that must be
+pressed are these:  Seven, Two, One, Nine -- count to five and then
+press One, again -- the vault door will open.  Inside there is enough
+food and water, that you will not have to worry about running out for
+your duration of stay.  There are enough supplies there for both of you
+to live on for twenty years, and more."
+
+"We will stay there fifty, if need be!"  Boyce promised.
+
+"You will try to unite the lands in the north, with Besten?"
+
+Lloyd nodded affirmatively, answering Brook's question.
+
+"They will all help me, I trust, when the time comes.  They understand
+my intentions."
+
+Far in the distance there was a riotous sound.  It came from the street
+and Dearborne rushed to the window and peered out to see what was the
+cause of it.
+
+"Brook!"  she suddenly screamed out Brook's name, but could hardly say
+anything else.  Brook went quickly to the window, and Boyce and Lloyd
+went with him.
+
+When they saw what was making its way down the street, all that was
+heard was a deathly silence in the room, being filled in its place by
+the sounds of impending violence.
+
+"My God!"  Brook said, his voice shattering with devastating uneasiness
+and fear.
+
+
+Boyce looked, too.  His heart jumped within his body as he looked at
+the frightful expression on the adults' faces.
+
+They all watched the ArchBishop and a dozen monastic guards and clergy
+march up towards the mansion and disappear as they reached the main
+door beneath them.
+
+"I can't believe that Manguino is here."   Brook started.  "Yet... I am
+not surprised.  I understand my dear brother."
+
+Dearborne took Brook's arm.
+
+"What will we do, Brook?"  she pleaded with him.
+
+He looked at her and the other two men.
+
+"Lloyd and Boyce must leave right now, and you must leave with them."
+Brook said to Dearborne and made his way to the viewing wall.  He
+tugged at one of the drape-cords and the wall swung open to a space
+that was just large enough for the book case where he removed the big
+book from its hiding place.  He beckoned Lloyd and the others.  Lloyd
+and Boyce quickly went to him but Dearborne moved from the window to
+the room doors and locked them.
+
+Pounding sounds could be heard echoing throughout the mansion, followed
+by the blaring twangs of the electrophoric guns.
+
+Three successive bangs were heard as the wood and stone main doors
+cracked and buckled under the strain.
+
+"They're inside."  Brook said, with acceptance.  "Dearborne, come!"
+
+He handed the book to Lloyd and looked between him and Boyce.
+
+"Care for this book, and use it to teach those in your land.  They will
+not doubt its truth."
+
+"I will."  vowed Lloyd.
+
+
+"May God watch over you!"  Brook blessed his son and Lloyd then
+stretched his hand to Dearborne to approach him and take it.  She did.
+
+"I will miss you, my love."  he said to her and kissed her.
+
+"I will not leave you, Brook.  Boyce must survive for us and there is
+Lloyd to watch over him.  We ... we are no longer important."  She
+embraced Brook and met Lloyd's eyes when doing so.  She slowly lowered
+her eyelids as to say to him that she is staying.  He pursed his lips
+and nodded to her.
+
+Brook, still embracing Dearborne turned to Lloyd and gave him a
+desperate and hopeless little grin.
+
+"You two will leave now.  My Dearborne will stay by my side.  Go now,
+the devil will arrive soon."
+
+Just as Brook finished his thoughts to Lloyd, there was a tinny and
+hoarse voice come from behind the door.
+
+"Break it in!" it commanded.  It was Manguino.
+
+"Quickly, leave!"  Brook said to Lloyd, leaving Dearborne and pushing
+Lloyd and Boyce through the ajar passage door.
+
+"Father ... !"  Boyce began but Brook stopped him.
+
+"You must go, my son.  There's nothing that you can do!"
+
+They stared at one another, and without further words, with an
+understood good-bye, they finally left.
+
+Brook patted Lloyd on the back and instructed him to blockade the
+passage door with the buttress. He did so.
+
+There was a blasting twang and the door splintered apart.
+
+Brook quickly turned towards his gadgets and frantically started to
+press buttons, turn knobs and adjust levers.
+
+The ArchBishop entered with his men and Brook took Dearborne behind him.
+
+Three of Manguino's Angels grabbed Brook's arms and they put one of the
+shiny metal armaments under his chin, and another clasped Dearborne
+around her entire body pinning her arms to her sides so she wouldn't
+move them.
+
+Manguino grinned at Brook and gave Dearborne a quick look-over.
+
+"Hello, Brother!"  he said.
+
+"You bastard!" Brook spitted-out at him, in return.
+
+"In error as always, Brook.  I am the true son!"
+
+Manguino motioned his hand to the vicar Tohm and Tohm thrust his fist
+into Brook's stomach.
+
+Brook struggled for a moment until Tohm proceeded to bravely punch him,
+all-the-while the Angels holding him.  Brook then slumped over in
+unconsciousness.  Dearborne had turned her head away, through it all
+and then saw that he was limp on the floor.
+
+" _ And you my darling sister!"  Manguino said as he neared her.  "The
+small, barren field will finally be ploughed and seeded."
+
+The ArchBishop ripped her blouse from her body, her breasts were
+exposed to the air, and each man standing there saw their rosy purity.
+
+She began to scream out and she tried to wrench herself free from the
+guards who hugged her arms to her sides.
+
+Manguino grabbed each breast with his hands, clutching them until she
+hollered and cried in the utmost pain.  She kicked out but she couldn't
+hit anyone and Manguino let go of her.  From her pale nipples issued
+whitish droplets, mingled with blood, which slowly ran down her ribs.
+
+Manguino ordered two of his Angels to force her to the floor, and they
+each held her legs down while the first Angel continued to hug her arms
+to her sides.
+
+The great ArchBishop smiled at her.
+
+You may even like it, Lady Scullion!"
+
+He got on his knees then bent over.  He licked the white and bloodied
+droplets from each of her breasts and smiled at her when he finished.
+
+He pulled the dress from around her hips, taring her undergarments, all
+in one quick motion.
+
+"Very pretty!"  he said to her, and she heaved with her body to get
+loose but to no avail.
+
+"Ah, spirited!"  was the last thing that he said to her as he lifted
+his habit and moved closer.
+
+Brook opened his yes and tried to get up to help his beloved wife, but
+Tohm kicked his head back to the floor and Brook saw Manguino invade
+Dearborne in the moments before his lost consciousness.
+
+During the ArchBishop's blessing, Brook's gadgets whirred and clicked,
+but little regard was payed to the commotion.
+
+Dearborne trembled under her humiliation and was spared the finish when
+she, also, lost consciousness.
+
+Self-satisfied and drenched with sweat,and stained with his own orgasm,
+ Manguino looked up and smiled.  Only then did he realise that the
+great mechanical thing in front of him was aflame and smoking.  He
+shook his head when he finally noticed.
+
+"You have been an annoyance, my dearest brother!"
+
+
+On the mount, the Seer cried.
+
+There was nothing that he could do to prevent what was to be, but now
+it was his time to descend to Pomperaque. He stood on the highest
+overhanging cliff, spread his arms to the mild evening sky and threw
+himself off.
+
+"With the i-cam-raff I come -- by the will of God!"
+
+As he fell towards the city, he transformed into a beautiful and large
+swallow, and gently glided down to Pomperaque's towns-square.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TEN
+
+On the following day, word had gone to all the citizens of Phoride,
+calling them to the town's square to observe the execution of a high
+official, set for sundown.  The high official's name was not given.
+
+Most of the men and their male children had obeyed, what was a command
+to attend.  Knowing well, who the unnamed official was to be executed,
+all but a few of the Prominants had left their wives at home.
+
+That was a direct symbol of their disobedience towards the ArchBishop.
+
+Manguino had not regarded the petition sent to him asking for a pardon,
+for Brook, based on the Canon's Law and its declared punishment.
+
+No one believed the allegations towards Brook and his wife, but they
+could do nothing to help him. There were many monastic guards watching
+the whole city and they had made it very difficult for any large groups
+of men to meet and talk.
+
+
+At sundown, large numbers gathered in the square and waited.
+
+They all looked at the two spreader-arches set on a platform, about a
+meter high, to one side of a large podium and the entire square took on
+the appearance of a theatre stage.
+
+There was an uneasy silence there.  With all the men and boys crowded
+together, the silence had an almost unnatural aura to it.  Nothing was
+said.
+
+Soon, several messeigneurs and cardinals came out of nowhere with the
+ArchBishop.  Three walked on each side of him, as if guarding him from
+approach, and each man carried a club with spikes protruding from them,
+and Manguino carried a scroll of parchment enveloped by a black lash.
+
+Everyone in the crowd watched as the ArchBishop approached the podium
+and the others swung their clubs from side to side.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce watched the event also.  They hid themselves in the
+shadows of an alley and were able to see the entire square without
+revealing their presence.
+
+Manguino was apparelled in a festive garb as were his men, and when
+they reached the podium, they helped him up the steps to it.
+
+He grinned and spoke.
+
+"People of Phoride! -- We are all gathered together this day to rid the
+earth of two blasphemers who think themselves above the law."  he
+shrieked to them.
+
+Boyce was becoming anxious.  He wanted to leave but he knew that he
+couldn't.  What's more, Lloyd forced him to stay.  He knew that it was
+cruel to make a child witness his parents' execution but Lloyd hoped
+that Boyce would understand why Brook allowed it all to happen.
+
+"He's the one that should be killed."  Boyce said to Lloyd, trying to
+keep his tears from showing.  They listened to Manguino carry on.
+
+
+"The Almighty cannot allow any insubordination towards himself and the
+institution that he created for you all.  These two will be made an
+example of.  You all will see to what an end disobedience results!"
+
+He slid the black lash off from the scroll and unfurled it.
+
+"Bring the demons!"  ordered Manguino.
+
+Several of his men walked over to the platform and slid a door open and
+dragged Brook and Dearborne from it, and pulled them to the foot of the
+podium.  When before Manguino they forced Brook and Dearborne to their
+knees but they stood up immediately.  They would not kneel and after
+several times of their being forced to kneel, and their rejection to
+comply, they were permitted to stand.
+
+Manguino glared at them and gave them an Evil little grin.  He
+proceeded to read the scroll to the public.
+
+"The former-ruling Lord of Phoride, Brook Scullion-Blue, and his wife,
+the Lady Dearborne Scullion-Blue, have been found guilty of possession
+of ancient, sacrilegious manuscripts, and of pictures of Hell."  he
+paused for a moment then proceeded.  "In refusing blessing from men of
+the Almighty, and the performing of sorcery, leading to the subsequent
+death of the High-Cardinal Allen -- they are now charged with
+practising their subversions against the Canon Laws and the citizenry
+of Phoride."
+
+The people were quiet and most had tears in their eyes, and they all
+knew that everything that was said about their Lord Sovereign was not
+true.  Yet, they could do nothing for the square was too well-guarded.
+
+Brook gave a longing look to Dearborne.  Both knew what was upon them
+and they both
+
+knew that they could not change what was happening to them.
+
+They felt dead, already.  They were both beaten very badly.  They were
+scarred and bruised and Dearborne's body was violated by each and every
+coenobite, hurting her to the point where she could hardly walk, or
+even stand.
+
+Their faces were pale and drawn with blackish-blue rings circling their
+protruding eyes.  Both were dressed in torn and dirty course-woven
+sackcloth.
+
+Both were made to smell bad, having excrement, from Halls, thrown over
+them and large insects,  and vermin of every kind, crawled all over
+them.
+
+But now, after nearly twenty-four hours of severe torture, they could
+no longer scream out in horror of their state of being.
+
+"They pleaded innocent to all their charges.  In lack of their
+confession to these charges, they are found to be guilty and I now
+pronounce my sentence upon them!"  Manguino tried to keep from smiling
+to himself, his ego inflated with pride at the idea of judging his
+respected brother.
+
+Miel and Cassta were in the crowd.  They looked-on and tried to see
+some way to help them but there was absolutely no way to do so.  Too
+many guards were positioned in all the key places and no one could
+enter or leave the square now.
+
+"May God help them!"  Cassta exclaimed and Miel pulled on his shirt to
+quiet him.
+
+"Before I pronounce sentence, you may speak!"  Manguino told Brook.
+
+Brook looked up at him with huge blood-shot eyes, then turned to the
+people.  He lifted his bound hands into the air as a gesture of plea.
+
+"I do not accept the kneeling of one man to another, since no man is so
+deserving."  he cried out to the people, and circling above the square
+was a large swallow that was loudly singing.  He
+
+kneeled before Dearborne as he still spoke to the people in his loudest
+possible voice.  "But I do kneel before this dear woman because her
+love had made her brave and she accepted my woes onto herself."  he
+cried out and there was a gasp from those in the audience.
+
+He stood again and took a few steps forward.
+
+"Stay true, my friends of Phoride.  I now die but my lineage is not
+following me in death."
+
+There was a murmur in the audience and Manguino became nervous and
+started to look worried.
+
+The swallow that circled overhead was now on the ground behind the
+people; and Boyce watched with Lloyd, as it turned into a man, dressed
+in robes of chamois material.  They watched him move into the crowd.
+
+"Yes, my brother, Manguino.  If you truly were a god, you would know
+that there is, indeed, a progeny between my wife and I.  We have kept
+him from all the eyes of Pomperaque and he will soon avenge our death!
+You, Manguino -- you have committed the crime!"
+
+"Enough!"  Manguino screamed out an order, aimed at Brook.
+
+"Burn in Hell, Devil incarnate!"  Manguino began to enter into a fit
+when he heard this from Brook.  The people were also disturbed by it.
+
+Most of the people that were in the crowd didn't know what this Devil
+was, but those that did know explained that it was the name of a
+legendary Being who was the ultimate Evil, and was actually Evil itself.
+
+Manguino was shocked to realise that so many knew of Devil.  That was
+forbidden knowledge and it wasn't taught at the Blaisaman.  'How?', he
+wondered?
+
+He motioned with his hand at Brook and several of the guards grabbed
+him and Dearborne
+
+and spread both out, on the spreader-arches, making the wrists-bonds
+tight to the point of drawing blood from them.
+
+Boyce began to tear, as Lloyd held to his arms.
+
+"Even now your father is instilling doubt in the Phoridene's minds
+about the ArchBishop!  Your uncle will be obsessed with fright for a
+long time!"
+
+Suddenly from behind Lloyd came a hand and a hiss of air.  He turned
+around quickly, ready to defend his and Boyce's life, if need be, and
+saw that it was Empal.
+
+"It's dangerous to stay here any longer, my friends!"  Empal said to
+them.
+
+"A moment!" demanded Boyce and Lloyd nodded in agreement.
+
+"Alright, but if I could find you here, anyone can!"
+
+They understood but they, nevertheless, stayed longer.
+
+Although the Angels were brutal with Brook he continued to yell to the
+crowd.
+
+"Look at your Almighty now, my people.  See him squirm in his
+discomfort.  See that he is only a man, and nothing more.  Do not
+submit to his will.  Unite against him or he will destroy you!"  Brook
+struggled as he yelled, shaking the entire arch to which he was tied.
+
+"Enough!" screamed Manguino, hoarsely.  "You have said enough ... and
+that is enough from you!"  his incoherency weakened his control.
+
+He raised his hands to them and the Angels ripped the stinking
+sackcloth from their victims' bodies and began to bludgeon them.
+
+The mob's voices died down and all were dumbfounded, as they beheld the
+torture.
+
+"Prepare execution!"  cried Manguino.  "For their transgressions of
+Canon Laws, I now pronounce the only sentence possible on these two --
+DEATH TO THESE SINNERS!"  he yelled.
+
+
+The crowd was mute.  They watched Brook's and Dearborne's naked bodies
+writhe and convulse in pain as they bled from huge wounds made on their
+bodies by the Angels' studded gauntlets and the messeigneur's spiked
+clubs.
+
+There were a few women within the audience who fainted from what they
+saw and many had slowly begun to walk away.  They refused to watch
+their best and most beloved leader slain by someone whom they didn't
+understand, or like very much.
+
+"Remember this day, people of Phoride."  Brook forced himself to say as
+he began to lose his breath, then with his last ounce of strength he
+blessed them all.  "May the True Living God have mercy on you all!"
+
+He stopped struggling from his stretched out bondage and watched
+Manguino raise his hand, then drop it.
+
+The Angels had raised their electrophoric weapons and when Manguino
+dropped his hand, an eternal twang echoed throughout the land.  Brook's
+and Dearborne's bodies trembled and shook violently then, in a short
+order, just hung there swinging back and forth.
+
+"Quickly, now.  We must leave!"  urged Empal and they finally made
+their way across town, heading north to the Joenine Forest where Empal
+had left his Kenttitian Eagle.
+
+Manguino stayed at the podium for a while and gloated over the dead
+bodies of his rival brother and his lovely wife.  With him were several
+of the guards and messeigneurs, waiting to escort him back to the
+cathedral.
+
+Soon, a large figure approached him and began to speak to him.
+
+"I had foreseen this event!"  said the man.
+
+Manguino looked over at the man and he became pale, as if he just died.
+
+
+"Jessuum Benitar!" exclaimed Manguino.  "Why are you here, I haven't
+seen you since ... since Smith's death."
+
+"My mourning for your father is over.  I now mourn for Brook."
+Manguino climbed down from the podium and cautiously and shyly
+approached him.  Jessuum continued.  "What had occurred here today, my
+little man, will never be forgotten.  You have done something that will
+never leave you, and I see the eventuality and inevitability of
+vengeance."
+
+The ArchBishop began to fall over his words but then slowly said what
+was on his mind.
+
+"Then tell me, Seer, you are prophetic -- who and where is Brook's
+offspring?"  Manguino waited eagerly for Jessuum's reply.
+
+"I cannot tell you directly and you know this.  All I can do is dream
+and you must decide what it means to you."  he said.
+
+"Tell me, then!"  he demanded from Jessuum and he tipped his head
+showing that would consent to an answer.  He began to chant.
+
+                "There is a man on a trek to a place
+                 Where the sky is touched by
+                 A legendary grace.
+                 There the little one learns to face
+                 His long road back, uniting the world
+                 In its promised Peace!"
+
+
+Jessuum broke from his stare and slowly turned, and looked back at the
+Almighty ArchBishop.
+
+"That's all for now, I must depart!"  he told Manguino then began to
+walk away.
+
+"Wait!"  squealed the ArchBishop.  "Why do you leave?"
+
+"Patience is a quality that you are not endowed with.  How unfortunate!
+ I will be near, when I am needed!"
+
+Jessuum walked away from the ArchBishop headed for no place in
+particular.
+
+
+MIDDLE:  THE  PROMISE,  FULFILLED
+
+CHAPTER ELEVEN
+
+The deaths of Brook and Dearborne had not meant the death of the
+world, or even that of Pomperaque.  Life endured as it was seemingly
+meant to, and the evil that lived in their time had carried on, as
+well.
+
+There came a frightening peace in Pomperaque, as there was a
+frightening quite, since no forms of dissention or negative thought was
+permitted under Manguino's own amendments to the Canon's Laws.
+
+Public gatherings of men (as were private meetings), were not wholly
+forbidden, but the numbers of men that gathered was limited to no more
+than four at a time -- unless there was a city conference called for
+meeting, in the town's square, by the ArchBishop's own request.
+
+Even the Phoridene Council was forbidden to convene without the
+presence of the ArchBishop Manguino, or a tribunal of Cardinals
+representing him.
+
+The brisk activities of livelihood that had once occupied most of the
+morning hours began to fade away and break down in pattern and even
+the children that once played in the streets around their parents'
+stalls and kiosks, no longer did so in their usual fervour.
+
+Very few people carried smiles as they once did, in the days prior to
+their best and most beloved sovereign's execution.
+
+The smiles that the people kept from their faces had equalled that hate
+and distrust that they carried in their hearts for their great
+Almighty, ArchBishop Manguino.
+
+There was a very odd change in the lifestyles and habits of the people,
+not only in the city of Pomperaque but throughout the entire great
+states of Phoride, as well.  The entire population had become somewhat
+indolent, apparently not caring for what happened to them from day to
+day.  The whole city of Pomperaque walked about the streets in a glazed
+daze, with blank faces and empty hearts as if they were in a purgatory
+of sorts.
+
+Whatever there was to Pomperaque's night life, was now gone and
+forgotten and even the rains that were once eagerly awaited throughout
+the year, were left to come when they came, and the people kept
+themselves from partaking of it when it happened.  Even harlots and
+satyrs, of which were once many in the city, had let their passions
+leave them.
+
+With all those immoralities that had carried on during Brook's rule,
+those acts of perversion and indecencies that he tried so hard to curb
+his people from delving into, were now halted by themselves as if in
+honour for the deaths of their two great and courageous martyrs.
+
+Manguino did not understand what was happening to the people of Phoride.
+
+"They're allowed to do what they please, to whom and with whom they
+please, and even how they please, and yet why don't they do anything
+but walk around as if they are all without spirit?"
+
+Manguino asked that question of each coenobite at Halls, from the
+Cardinals that ranked just
+
+beneath him, to the novices and children training in the monastery.  No
+answer was given to him and no speculations were entered into.
+
+In the first several years following Brook and Dearborne's execution,
+many of the city's Prominants and even some of the peasantry, secretly
+sent their female children to some of the larger cities to the north,
+away from the watchful, lusty eyes of their god.
+
+As if in desperation to produce his own line of gods, his own
+offspring, Manguino had brought to him young girls and women to play
+favourites to him, and to bare his holy children.
+
+He had proclaimed though a decree that when upon entering the age of
+ten, all virgin girls, to the age of twenty-one, would be brought to
+Halls to be trained by his followers in the ways of life.
+
+While as the first years passed, the females between these ages that
+were brought to Halls, had been personally attended to by Manguino.
+
+His lust for the flesh of young women soon became weak and his acts
+were only made on the women purely to satisfy his desire of producing
+from them his offspring.  Yet, with the dozens of women that he had
+made pregnant not one of the children were free from some kind of
+degenerate deformities -- much like that of his first offspring, now in
+his twenties.
+
+Through the first days and weeks of birth many of the children died on
+their own, and some of the women, seeing the monstrosities that they
+bore from the ArchBishop, had been shocked into eerie cataleptic states
+of being.
+
+Manguino could not accept the horrible children coming from him and he
+cried to his physicians to cure him from what he believed was certainly
+a curse put on him by Brook; but when they could find nothing at fault
+with either him or the women that he had copulated with, he had the
+remainder of his children, with the women that bore them, burned alive
+at the city's incinerators.
+
+
+However, Manguino's mind strained even at this subtle act, for not a
+scream nor even a gag was heard to exude from any one of those that
+were slaughtered.
+
+Manguino turned to being ill and he spent the major part of the next
+several years in a state of listlessness.
+
+He had sent some of his Cardinals to various parts of the continent to
+find and bring back for him beautiful and strong females, no matter
+from what race they were taken.  Manguino had believed that there had
+to be at least one female, amongst the human-like species inhabiting
+the northern continent, capable of producing normal and strong children.
+
+He had placed in charge of this mission his regular hunter in these
+sorts of endeavours; the Nasino, Cardinal Levy.  In his silent Nasino
+manner he compiled a force of coenobites to do their god's bidding and
+they spread over the continent collecting females and teaching
+Manguino's ways, as well.
+
+By the end of the following year, hundreds of human-like females and
+true human women were herded like cattle to Halls Cathedral, by only
+half the force sent out to collect them.
+
+Some of the women were bought by these coenobites but most were
+snatched from wherever they could be found.  Those not suiting the
+ArchBishop's specification were made to indulge those who had found
+them, then they were discarded or disposed of, depending on what degree
+of pleasure the hunters had experienced with them.
+
+Within the first weeks, nearly seven score females were brought back to
+Halls and the ArchbIshop immediately began administering his blessings
+to those who were most to his liking.  To his amazement, some became
+pregnant, came to full term and gave birth within several weeks while
+other appeared to have a infinite gestation, until they also gave
+birth.  Finally, all those that the
+
+ArchBishop bedded had given birth, with the same horrid results -- and
+the same end became of them.
+
+When Manguino desired to turn again to young girls from the city, there
+were very few to be taken.  The choice were married-off by their
+kinsmen early in their lives and only the homely and very ugly
+remained.  Those were the ones that were not wanted by any man; some
+not even during the season of the rain.
+
+Manguino, feeling that he knew the nature of the imaginary curse that
+he thought was put on him by Brook, took those ugly girls and women and
+set himself ready to have them give themselves to him.
+
+One day, there came to the ArchBishop the most unsightly of these
+wretched-looking women.  She was squat and balding.  Her body was
+covered with thick black hair, similar to the hair of the Teniqués.
+She had yellow irises and a runny pustulated mouth, and thick stringy
+mucus constantly flowed from her huge nostrils.
+
+Her laugh ran course through men's ears and the town thought of this
+woman as a witch because of her formidable looks.
+
+There wasn't a single piece of skin on her body that was clear from
+open sores, and yet she was of the prize of looks from the ugliest of
+women in Phoride.
+
+However, this woman (if one chose to call such a hideous rind, by that
+word), had one quality that most all of the others that the ArchBishop
+bedded had lacked.  She was clever.  She made herself seem worldly to
+Manguino, the man whom she had secretly loved for so many years.
+
+When Eckma was summoned to Manguino he could hardly look at her without
+wincing and she didn't hesitate preparing herself to have her hour of
+delight with him.
+
+
+She took off her rags and stood before him squeezing parts of her body
+attempting to excite him and growing in excitement herself.
+
+Manguino was surprised that she was so eager and willing to let him in
+and he thought, that maybe a woman's willingness was the key to
+ensuring him healthy offspring.  He readied himself to invade her body,
+for the little that he thought it worthy.  Then, Eckma refused to let
+him come in onto her and he could not understand this.
+
+Now, as it was that Eckma was very clever, she tried not to anger her
+beloved Manguino and she sat him down on the bed near her and caressed
+some of his parts while she explained why she refused him so suddenly.
+
+"I have been a virgin all my twenty-eight years, my dearest
+ArchBishop."  she said to Manguino.  "I had always wanted children but
+what I wanted more was ... you!"
+
+Manguino looked at her and felt a disgust that he could not shrug, but
+her gentle caresses, which made him grow with excited impatience
+soothed him, as well.
+
+"What do you mean by that?"  he demanded and as she smiled a creamy
+rheum flowed from her nostrils to the corners of her mouth.
+
+"I had loved you since I was a little girl, and I wished and prayed
+that some day I would have the pleasure, and the honour, of being
+blessed by you.  But I believed that was all just a foolish dream."
+she said and she smiled again, with a clear tear issuing from her eyes.
+ "I had also dreamed of being wed to you, my true love."  she added.
+
+He grew to completion and she continued to caress him and he felt a
+powerful but uncomfortable urge to invade her.  He was becoming sure
+that the woman's willingness was the key
+to his product of normal progeny, but when he pushed her down on the
+bed, and was just on the
+
+verge of having her, she pushed him off from herself.
+
+"Steady woman, you can't refuse me!"  blurted Manguino as he dripped
+onto the covers by her hand.
+
+"I do not refuse you, me hoped-for love, but welcome your all into me
+-- with an open heart -- but I would hope to suggest to you one thought
+I had dreamed an age ago!"  she said.
+
+"What thought, woman?"  he demanded of her, becoming frustrated and
+quickly becoming limp.
+
+"The dream had shown me that you could not have the offspring of your
+heart's desire;  and then there was me, with you as the objective of
+love, to my own heart's desire, calling me to your bed.  But, in my
+dream I saw that you had wed me.  With the union between us and my own
+desires towards you, we produced many children of godly quality!"  she
+looked up at him as he turned away from her to wipe himself, and she
+cried.
+
+"What now, Eckma?" asked Manguino in a voice oddly resembling a distant
+compassion, as never before heard coming from his lips.
+
+"I know that a marriage with you could never be.  Forgive me for even
+thinking such a thing."  she said and looked at him, right into his
+eyes.  "You may do with me to your pleasure."
+
+Manguino stood there for a moment and looked at her lying on the bed,
+her eyes closed and her large legs lying slightly apart.
+
+He thought, what an odd feeling it was to have a living human woman
+love him so.  He imagined what a love from a beauty would be like and
+he envied his now dead brother, because of his wife, and he envied all
+the wedded couples in the whole world.
+
+He had never given consideration to such a union, but he thought, maybe
+it is time?  Maybe
+
+that is what was necessary, for him, to have proper children?
+
+Manguino went over to his chamber doors and pulled a small rod out of
+the wall, summoning a servant to attend to him, and then he went over
+to Eckma and took her naked cankerous body into his arms and kissed her
+mouth, smearing some of her pus onto his own lips.
+
+"You will be my wife, Eckma and I will love you, and make love to you,
+with more intense passion than I have ever, with anyone."
+
+Soon, an attendant knocked on the door and Manguino ordered him to
+enter.  When the servant saw his god lying by that unearthly ugliness
+and passionately caressing her, he very nearly fell faint but he looked
+to the floor and waited to be ordered.
+
+"Seek Cardinals Levy, Tohm and Jordas and bid them prepare the chapel
+for my wedding, and have the Rogjans announce this from the city
+spires!"
+
+The servant couldn't say a thing.  He just nodded then backed out
+through the doors, closing them after him.
+
+Immediately, he ran to the dispensary and vomited violently into a duct
+there, and Polis, the physician, gave to him a drink of medicine that
+stopped the lad's affliction.  He explained to Polis about Manguino's
+strange taste, and his even stranger request, then he went off and
+rounded up the three Cardinals; conveying the message and telling them
+who the bride was to be.
+
+"The Almighty had made his choice.  Let us abide with his requests!"
+suggested Cardinal Tohm, and they went to prepare for the ceremony.
+
+Throughout the afternoon and evening the Rogjans sang out the news to
+Pomperaque, and for the first time in years, since the executions of
+Brook and Dearborne, did the people laugh and rejoice for their
+Almighty ArchBishop -- and his misfortune.
+
+
+Manguino was pleased and happy to see his beloved people having a good
+time and enjoying themselves, even though he had no idea that the
+celebrants were really mocking him.
+
+At the wedding, a few of the Cardinals and others that were there could
+look upon the bride as she and Manguino emerged from their wed-eve
+initiation chamber.
+
+Cardinal Tohm was the ArchBishop's second during the ceremony, and
+Cardinal Jordas had performed the ceremony of unity.  The ceremony was
+the Bonds, performed to consecrate the union of two in marriage.  The
+couple was fused together as one entity for all of eternity, by promise
+of eternal love and full allowance to life together, regardless of
+hardships that may possibly happen between them.
+
+Now Eckma knew she was safe from death, no matter if she had children,
+and regardless of their appearance.
+
+The bond between them; the cutting of wrists and the joining of them
+through the drinking of each other's blood, assured the cunning female
+that her life was her's and that she was Manguino's, forever.
+
+At the completion of the wedding ceremony, this one where the bride and
+groom were married in their naked flesh, the men of  Halls were to pay
+their tribute and honour to the bride by the kissing of her genitalia.
+
+Although Polis gave all those attending a potion of medicine to keep
+their stomachs calm, most of the Cardinals still felt gravely ill
+whilst in Eckma's presence.
+
+All the novices, vicars and Cardinals that passed by the wedded couple
+bowed down, on bent knee, before their new god's consort.  All kissed
+the sagging brownish flesh that dangled from between Eckma's legs, in
+a single and complete sweeping motion.  And even in this brevity, a
+vast portion of them quickly ran out of the wedding hall to take full
+account of their week's food intake.  Only Cardinal Tohm summoned
+enough nerve and will to take Eckma about her hips in a sustained
+embraced. He kissed the lips of her genitalia until a small split
+formed in one of her many scabs, letting a thin brownish fluid dampen
+his mouth, chin and eventually to soak his beard.  Some of the
+stinking pus found its way into his mouth and Tohm, obviously and
+ceremoniously, swallowed it in full.
+
+"You truly were trained well by Cardinal Allen, my dear Tohm!"
+Manguino whispered to him, then kissed him on the mouth.
+
+The wedded couple were carried to their marriage bed, prepared with
+sweet smelling linen and the entire room was decorated with many
+pleasant flowers.
+
+When they were left alone, Eckma produced a good sized vile from her
+vagina and she held it up for Manguino to see.
+
+"What is that, my darling?"  asked Manguino.
+
+"It is a small bottle of rain water."  she answered.  "If captured in
+glass, the water of the rain retains its potency."
+
+"Why do we need that?  Put it away!"  he ordered but she refused.
+
+"Your promise of intense love to me must be aided by this, my love.  I
+know I am ugly and this will help the both of us, immeasurably."  she
+said.
+
+Manguino finally nodded, and after entering her body, she opened the
+vial and poured the contents over both their genitals.
+
+Very little was seen of the newly wedded couple over the next couple of
+weeks.  They stayed in their wedding chamber and consummated their
+promise.
+
+
+The people of Pomperaque returned to their blank and lifeless style of
+living, knowing well that their ArchBishop Manguino had indeed found
+his true love.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWELVE
+
+The years passed after the fateful executions in Pomperaque.
+
+The years also passed for Boyce and Lloyd, studying the ancient ways in
+the Alugean library.
+
+Since Besten was close by, Lloyd had at intervals gone there to see his
+family and obtain some news of events in the city of Pomperaque.
+
+The first years were depressing for the young Boyce, trying to grow up
+without his real father and terribly missing the kindness, and love,
+from his beautiful mother, and at times, turning frustrated in not
+having others of his age to play with, and little girls to pretend
+being in love with.
+
+Then it happened, that after several years of stay at Alugean, Boyce
+grew to manhood, possessing a quick mind and agile body, trained to
+full perfection by the guidance of his mentor and friend, Lloyd
+Bartlett.
+
+When Boyce was nearing his eighteenth year and he knew his studies of
+the past, as-well-as
+
+remembering his promise to Brook, and his manly body could hold up
+against the sharpest blows delivered by Lloyd, Lloyd took him to his
+father in Besten to meet his father and mother, Harvard and Rae
+Bartlett.
+
+Harvard was pleased, beyond words, to meet Brook Scullion-Blue's only
+son and he treated him in the manner much befitting a King.
+
+Several months after their acquaintance, Boyce trusted Harvard enough
+to tell him that the ArchBishop was really his uncle; Brook's brother.
+This news, however, didn't disturb Harvard Bartlett because he divulged
+to Boyce, his own knowledge about his own ancestral relationship to the
+ArchBishop and indeed to Boyce himself.
+
+"We are much like cousins far removed, yet not removed so far as to
+keep me content."  Harvard told Boyce.  "I am the fifth generation
+descendant of Daphne Jones, daughter of Richalé, son of Hosea Jones.  I
+am from a line of the male twin.  Your family of Carter, is on the
+other hand, from the line of the daughter twin, Dioneza.  We are
+related, so as to say, in common knowledge and theory about our
+ancestral line."  Harvard took a large rolled piece of animal skin and
+spread it out before Boyce to let him see a genealogy of their common
+family roots.
+
+"I see the broken line of my father.  He is not a true Blue
+descendant."  said Boyce but not without pride.
+
+"Yes, we know that he was a foundling and we also know who his real
+parents are."  Harvard told Boyce.
+
+Boyce was amazed and he smiled, eagerly waiting to hear more.
+
+"My son conveyed to me a story told to him about your father, and in
+fact it was told to him by your father.  He said, that your father was
+found by a stream swaddled and left in a skull of a lion."
+
+"Yes, that is so, my Lord Bartlett!"  Boyce fervently confirmed.
+
+"From the line of Wind Jones, daughter of Richalé, son of Hosea Jones;
+we have her forth generation great grandson, Guiness with his wife
+Joanna, pursued by Elkinii plains slave-traders.  Having given birth to
+a son, they continued to run through the Virgin Mountains trying to
+escape the slaver.  Knowing that they would be caught, they wrapped the
+child in the sackcloth of Joanna's apron and hid him by a river in a
+lion's skull, where Smith soon found it while his own wife was in heavy
+labour baring a child.  Beside their own son Manguino, the adopted
+Brook (giving him such a name as he was found), was raised by them as
+their own."  Harvard finished the account, according to his knowledge
+of it and eyed Boyce for a moment, admiring how the young man was
+absorbing everything that was being said to him.
+
+"Is that why my father was not evil?"  asked Boyce.
+
+"Many of us believe so."  confirmed Harvard then continued. "The evil
+seed befell your uncle, the ArchBishop Manguino through his
+grandfather Father's incest with Lucaea.  As you had studied alone in
+Alugean so did Carter study, and then he left the great library to
+learn from the world.  He reached the land of BanGor, to the east,
+that was and in ruled by a cult of high-priestesses that are directly
+descended from Anna, the first wife of Hosea Jones (yet not from
+Hosea's own loins).  Carter had fallen into relations with the great
+granddaughter of Anna and their product was Smith, your father's
+father.  Anna's evil seed was passed through Smith to Manguino.  As
+Anna and Hosea's first son Cano turned evil, into being the Canon
+Di'Vaticanus, so did Manguino become the ArchBishop!"
+
+The fascinating story made Boyce wonder if the old times with Hosea
+Jones were any different than the times now, since he knew more about
+the Twentieth Century history than he knew about his own.  But now
+from what Harvard had told him, he better knew who he was and declared
+that he was ready to prepare for his return to Pomperaque.
+
+Within the next several years, from 3055 C.E. to the end of 3058 C.E.,
+the entire northern continent joined under an idea of unity and love.
+Under the leadership and guidance of Harvard Bartlett, Lloyd and Boyce
+became figure-heads of the community.  They increased the prosperity in
+the land two-fold over a period of three short years and they built up
+a fighting army as powerful as any that had ever fought on the earth.
+
+Soon, the northern nations and dominions were uniting into one power
+that came to be called the Northern United Alignment.  It was a union
+of free states consisting of Besten, Virune, Krolalin and several
+smaller city states (Netheda, Ohigh and Elkinii), and from these united
+areas came an army of one million strong, on land, one hundred thousand
+strong, on sea and seven thousand strong, in the air.  Each of the
+major united nations controlled their own special force of power.
+Virune, under the leadership of Empal, trained and took command of the
+air using the giant eagles that they had learned to domesticate.
+Krolalin trained their land army to use whatever weapons were available
+to their utmost potential, as well as developing a land cavalry that
+was twenty thousand strong.   And there was Besten, a sea-faring people
+who adapted easily to naval warfare with a force numbering one hundred
+thousand men.
+
+Bestenese scientists were let into Alugean to search the library
+contents for plans on which to build weapons, like those used by the
+ArchBishop's monastic guards.  With much difficulty and lack of proper
+equipment and resources, the developments were made but they never
+seemed to progress very quickly.
+
+
+For the generals and leaders, suits of rubber, leather and gold
+plating served as armour protection against electrophoric and laser
+shock.  Although not superior in strength to hold up against constant
+jolting, they at least served the person to live while in their
+retreat, if hit.
+
+Monastic spy activity in the north warned the ArchBishop Manguino that
+an army was being formed that could potentially be used gainst him.  It
+was an accurate speculation seeing that the spies didn't really know
+what was being planned or even who was doing the planning.
+
+On the first word of such a mounting of forces and arms, Manguino
+demanded that an army be compiled for him and every eligible male from
+fifteen to fifty was ordered into training, for war, while the women
+between twenty and thirty were formed into separate fighting forces.
+Even the ladies from the Prominants took over working then men's jobs,
+since they were the only ones to be permitted to stay at home.
+
+After two years of nothing happening in the manner of war, threats or
+anything else of great aggressive significance, those of the Prominent
+class were allowed back to their social life-styles while the rest were
+coerced into staying in the forces.
+
+Those Prominants who were sympathetic to Manguino's rule, for whatever
+self-centred reason, stayed on as his generals.  They were even so
+powerful as to order all those at Halls, to do their bidding;  all
+those at Halls except for Manguino.
+
+With the final preparations taking place with the Northern United
+Alignment, ambassadors were sent to the hostile states and lands
+between Besten and Phoride, and there asked them to follow them to
+freely pass through without harassment or troubles.
+
+Agreements were signed with all these states including the ones that
+were thought to be the most difficult; Palatka, Sedar, Nolunge and
+Flinnd.
+
+
+The time was at hand when the two men would leave on their long journey
+back to Pomperaque.  Although the signed agreement of passage was to
+make the route shorter for the two men, the distance was still great
+and would require many days of travel.
+
+
+CHAPTER  THIRTEEN
+
+In Pomperaque, several years had passed since Manguino's marriage to
+Eckma and although they had indeed produced children of normal looks
+and awareness, they never lived passed a couple of months.
+
+Since the marriage, Manguino hardly ever involved his mind with the
+affairs of Halls, or of Phoride.
+
+During the rains, very large glass tubs of water were collected then
+taken to Manguino's bed chamber and poured into a huge glass pool, and
+there the ArchBishop indulged in violent sex relations with Eckma, to
+the point of drawing blood from one another.
+
+In the few years after their marriage, the physician Polis had
+discovered that Manguino suffered from a venereal cancer and there was
+a fear of death, but Manguino told Polis to search for the answer in
+Brook's machines.
+
+"My cure lies somewhere within those gadgets, Polis!  If you value your
+own life, find it!"
+
+Manguino threatened him.
+
+Polis spent entire days going through the mechanism in his search for
+the answer and then he found something.  It was a formula to retard
+aging.  He wondered if it would cure his master and thus took it to him.
+
+Lacking trust, Manguino ordered the injection to be given to Polis
+first and then to Eckma.
+
+The aged Polis's hair took on its once younger hue of auburn and Eckma
+lost her open sores and rheumatic nose, as well as gaining hair on her
+head while losing it on her body.
+
+Seeing that Eckma now looked like a normal, yet still fat woman, and
+even somewhat appealing, he had several shots given to him every day
+until Polis devised a capsulate form of taking the drug.
+
+With the new found youth and beauty, in himself and Eckma, Manguino
+indulged in the pleasures of the flesh with his wife, which now was
+indeed much more pleasurable for him.
+
+Eckma became pregnant again, and Manguino was certain that his child
+would be the ultimate, due to the drug that both of them were taking.
+
+Minding the rule of the state and church, was the Cardinal Allen's
+eldest son.  He, too, was now a Cardinal.  His name was Orren and he
+was  the child born to Allen, and some forgotten mother, around 3034
+C.E.
+
+Now he was twenty-five and he managed the kingdom for Manguino, while
+Manguino indulged in his debauchery with Eckma, and also with others of
+both sexes.
+
+Orren took over for the deceased Cardinal Tohm who had gone to visit
+the barbaric Palatkans, the lepers, to entice them to join Phoride as
+an advance army in case there was an attack from the north.  With
+their agreement to do so, they ate him, so bonding the contract with
+Pomperaque.
+
+As in many times before, in periods of crisis and great tension,
+Jessuum Benitar appeared in Pomperaque to give its ruler a word of
+foreseen troubles.
+
+Jessuum had not approved of the ArchBishop, of what he was, or what he
+had become, but it was his duty to give warning to those rulers of
+Phoride, whether they were good or evil, and all prophecies were given
+in dream parables and these frustrated Manguino.
+
+In the eighth month of Eckma's pregnancy, she and Manguino still
+carried on in the glass pool of rain water and since the great
+ArchBishop wanted to converse and play at the same time, he summoned
+Jessuum to his chamber.
+
+Jessuum stood majestically over the pool of water, keeping his chamois
+robes from being fouled by the water, while watching the crazed
+ArchBishop fornicating with his now better than homely wife.
+
+The sight was the most disgusting abomination to this ancient and noble
+man, who could see into the future.
+
+"I must leave soon, Manguino.  I must go from this place -- so would
+you please consent to take it out and speak with me?"  asked Jessuum.
+
+"I will finish soon my trusted Seer.  Have food and drink, and I will
+be with you soon."  answered Manguino paying little attention to where
+Jessuum was.
+
+"I have not eaten for a fortnight and I will not eat, nor drink, till I
+leave here.  I cannot foul my body or my spirit by the uncleanness
+of this place.  I shall wait for you in the chapel for one hour -- but
+no more!  It will be your own choice whether or not you hear what will
+be."  said Jessuum then turned and was gone.
+
+
+Uneasy, the water no longer had an affect on Manguino and so he climbed
+out of the pool and put on a surplice and headed down to the chapel,
+leaving a trail of water behind him while Eckma circled the pool and
+drank some of the scum from the surface of the water.
+
+When Manguino reached the chapel, there was a line of monks parading
+through the halls and chanting a hymn exhorting the spirits of the
+passed dead monastic men.
+
+He came upon Jessuum Benitar looking straight into a small group of
+young boys who were sternly placed on their knees for prayers,
+undoubtedly as a disciplinary action by some higher cleric teacher.
+
+"What have you to say to me, Seer?"  demanded Manguino.
+
+"Don't speak to me in such a tone, Manguino.  In a spit you could be no
+more and there is no one who would grieve."  Jessuum responded.  "You
+have been given, and you have taken, many wonderful things that you
+have never given thanks for, to the one true, Living God."
+
+"If you were not the Seer for me, for my father and his father, I would
+not permit you to speak so in my cathedral."  stated Manguino in an
+angered voice and Jessuum grinned.
+
+"Do you feel better, now that you have made a threat -- so petty, as
+it was?"  Jessuum put Manguino in his place and gave him the feeling
+of being a child.  "I do not like you, Manguino and I do not approve
+of that for which you stand.  I despise your crude manners and even
+cruder methods."  Jessuum backed away from the stench of the
+ArchBishop's body; the stench that was caused by the over-use of the
+same filthy rain water.  Jessuum resumed.  "Should the people of this
+great land lose their fear of you, my son, no one would be here when
+you needed them, to fight for your precious stick of flesh.  Not a
+single citizen would kneel to kiss your fruit for the redemption of
+their sins."
+
+
+"What have you to say for our tomorrow, Seer?  You tire me with this
+worthless palaver about my indulgence."  ordered Manguino, scratching
+at his manhood.
+
+"Very well, impatient god of these ignorant people.  This is the final
+time that you shall hear words from my dreams, given to you.  Hear this
+and hear it only once, and remember!  Commit it to paper if you will
+but remember it.  Tell the court of the Prominants, if you will, but
+never ask it to be repeated to you, for on that day when that request
+is done, so should it be the end of your rule in Pomperaque."
+Jessuum's eyes glowed with the fire of wisdom and the light of
+knowledge.  His brow poured forth an anxious sweat while Manguino stood
+by smiling with less than no faith in what he was told -- even if he
+cared to think of the meaning behind it.
+
+                "Four great elements, ride on high
+                 Come from the greatest fears inside.
+                 All suspicions end with feast
+                 Of gilded skins and threaded beads.
+                 Foul water there is all to drink
+                 And wine does burn with chocking stink,
+                 Of dying corpses bleeding free
+                 And refuge cut off, from the sea.
+                 And where to run with hearts that tare
+                 Leave not your sight, from the air.
+                 Black feathers from his shoulders peer
+                 As promised by that Holy Seer,
+                 Shall come and take his place that day
+                 And rule the city where he once did play.
+                 The great one falls in the bloodied sand
+                 And is soon forgotten in the land.
+                 The bones of his body are never found
+                 But his breathing body yet is sound."
+
+
+Manguino stared at Jessuum for a moment then sneered.
+
+"What do I make of that?  It was quick and as senseless as all your
+other dreamy riddles.  How could my fore-fathers trust you?"
+
+"Do you remember those words, Manguino?"  Jessuum asked him.
+
+"Yes, but what should I care?"  Manguino asked.
+
+"Then ... repeat it to me -- once ... if you can!"  demanded the great
+Seer and Manguino did indeed repeat every word to no great avail of
+knowing their meaning.
+
+"You play alone, now, Manguino!"  said Jessuum and he bound out of the
+chapel.
+
+Manguino ran after him to question him on the meaning but Jessuum
+Benitar was gone.
+
+Manguino, in a maniacal craze ran about the teaching rooms and ordered
+the scribe-vicars to make copies of the words, and he recited the
+puzzling riddle until he found every word copied onto paper, then he
+returned to his bed chamber and saw Polis give to Eckma a capsule of
+the age retardant drug, and she drank it down with the water from the
+pool in which she was still wading.
+
+
+BIPARTITE: JOURNEY BACK TO POMPERAQUE
+
+CHAPTER  FOURTEEN
+
+3058 C.E. commenced with the onset of those in Besten who were in the
+final throws of preparation for the invasion of Pomperaque.
+
+Throughout the year, while the plans for invasion were being finalized,
+Harvard Bartlett ordered the armies into a building programme, to make
+Besten and the other major cities in the alignment larger and more
+beautiful than imaginable.
+
+The men in the armies welcomed the building programme that Harvard had
+engaged them to do.  They didn't want to feel the anxiety and the
+excitement of war until the war itself was fought.  So the men, as they
+created great architectural masterpieces, left their worries of death
+while they welded their concentrations on this new work.
+
+In the days, weeks and months that passed, Besten and many other cities
+grew to a majesty, remembered only from the clouded, nightmarish dreams
+of the late Twentieth Century.
+
+The northern cities became the jewels of the continent, and from all
+around the continent, every type of human went to them to purpose trade
+and alliance, and many treaties were entered into and signed by the
+respective parties involved.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce discussed, with Harvard, the proposed routes that they
+had some choice on which to use, on their way back to Phoride and
+Pomperaque.
+
+Boyce was eager to return and take what was his, and Lloyd also felt
+that now would be the best time since the ArchBishop had also begun a
+great building programme in Pomperaque, soon after Besten commenced
+with their's.
+
+In Pomperaque, Manguino's spies described to him that Harvard
+Bartlett's army was being used to build up the cities, and that they
+grew at a surprising rate.
+
+On the advice from his wife Eckma and several of the noble Cardinals,
+Manguino thought that the idea of an army building force was brilliant,
+and he thought that Besten had engaged itself in such a programme only
+to rise above Pomperaque, as an economic power.
+
+He set Phoride's entire army to work in building the city into one
+great mass of moving machinery and light.
+
+Using the knowledge available in the gadgets that had once belonged to
+Brook, towering buildings were built and were powered by currents of
+energy -- electricity.
+
+Light illuminated the evenings in the city of Pomperaque from tall
+glass posts that were filled with conductive gases that glowed when
+energy was passed through them, and the citizens travelled around in
+little propelled carts with wheels that were set upon endless tubes of
+steel that also utilized the same electrical forces.
+
+The city's incinerators were converted to produce the power since the
+furnaces constantly
+
+burned some kind of waste material throughout the entire day and night,
+and huge storage batteries, such as those in the Blue Mansion, were
+built to preserve energy for emergency use.
+
+Pomperaque grew into a grandeur never before seen by those living
+there, and it hardly took a year to complete.
+
+The sudden boost in the lifestyles of those in Phoride made many of
+Phoride's citizens, from the peasantry to the elite Prominants feel
+alive again, and many returned to praising Manguino.
+
+Manguino was proud of his own brilliance and praised himself.
+
+He had taken notice of the words spoken to him by the Seer, Jessuum
+Benitar, and his spies' news about the north compiling an army was all
+he needed to order the male citizens into a compulsory army of his own.
+
+Throughout the first years of the arms build-up all the women, even
+those wives of the Prominent elite, had to do the work of their
+husbands, as-well-as their own domestic chores while their husbands
+trained to fight a war which gave no indications would ever be fought.
+
+Now, however, the new city of Pomperaque stood as a monument of
+strength, and with this, Manguino released the Prominent men from their
+service duties and most of them returned home to their wives and
+families.  Only a few of the Prominents, who had personal gains from
+staying in the service, remained as the generals.
+
+There was an odd contentment in Pomperaque and the people had a
+tolerant and even kindly regard for their Almighty ArchBishop, and they
+thanked him for improving their lives, unaware that the improvements
+were all made for his own benefit, and not really intended for them.
+
+The entire Northern United Alignment heard of the progress that
+Manguino forced in Phoride and they also heard about the common
+people's change of heart towards him.  Now they all favoured him.
+
+Harvard, thought, felt confident that the Alignments' forces could
+annihilate the Phoridene armies, and before his son and Boyce left
+Besten for Phoride, he wished them God's speed and safety.
+
+"We will send Empal with word of mobilization." Lloyd said to Harvard.
+"It is a long way back to Pomperaque but we should save several days in
+travel, taking this shorter route."  He pointed-out the route on a
+small map while they made their final plans.  His finger etched the
+line through Krolalin's Dark Forest and other possibly hostile lands.
+
+"Take care in those places."  Harvard cautioned.  "Though these nations
+are small and have agreed to let you pass, we cannot trust them with
+their promises.  Remember, some are friends of the ArchBishop.  In
+consideration of this, you will first go to Alugean and get proper
+weapons to carry on your trip."
+
+Boyce and Lloyd both agreed to Harvard's request and they left on their
+long journey, on foot.
+
+It was unanimously decided that the men's journey would be taken this
+way in order to confuse the attention of any spies that were watching.
+Machine travel, and even travel by horse, would have directed attention
+upon them.
+
+A small performing caravan was sent south, as were tinkers of every
+kind, and all knew their purpose for going to Pomperaque.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce made their way slightly to the south-west towards
+Alugean where they were to check the production of weapons and receive
+some for their personal use during the trip.
+
+When the height of people leaving Besten was reached the two men left
+the city for their day's jaunt to the vault library in the Alugean
+Mountain.  To break the stress of their exertions, they spoke of many
+things during their first day of travel.  The talks were mostly
+centred on what they thought Pomperaque would look like after all the
+changes.  Another topic that lasted them was their views on Manguino's
+illogical assumption that Brook had cursed him and that it was the
+cause for his women baring him monstrosities.  They spoke of Eckma and
+her, one day, turning into an almost appealing woman and Boyce
+speculated that the ArchBishop had found in Brook's gadgets the
+formula to the age stunning drug -- originally designed by the fourth
+wife of Hosea Jones, called Ruth.
+
+While the day waned and Alugean grew larger, and closer, Boyce and
+Lloyd shared a worry that they both had about the invasion that they
+had planned.
+
+It came to Boyce's mind early in the day that, when the war was under
+way, many innocent women and children would probably be caught up in it
+and would die.
+
+Lloyd understood Boyce's feelings but knew that nothing could be done
+about it; but Boyce really knew that Lloyd wanted to taste vengeance
+through the death of one particular woman.
+
+Lloyd considered Eckma an evil woman.  A woman of tasteless love that
+sank into deeper evil through her marriage and violent consummation.
+He knew that the loss of those many ugly and pretty children, at their
+birth, drew no tears from her.
+
+Lloyd wanted to see her die, with her child and with Manguino, and yet,
+he did not want to kill them himself, although the temptations was
+great for him to do so.
+
+His reasoning for this judgement of her was simple and Boyce accepted
+it.
+
+"This past time that she gave birth, Boyce, she gave birth to twins.
+One was the beautiful son child that both she and the ArchBishop
+desired.  The other twin, whatever sex it was, was drowned in a pool
+of water by its mother, because it was hideous looking."  Lloyd
+explained to Boyce.  "She held that child's head under water, watching
+it writhe and convulse, and she enjoyed watching it die, since she had
+never before killed something that was alive."  Boyce was quiet and he
+just listened.  "What's more, my friend, the water was rain water.
+Can you imagine?"
+
+They turned onto a short path that lead to the hidden entrance doors
+and Lloyd punched-in the numbers as taught to them by Brook, a decade
+earlier.
+
+"I remember the rain that touched me.  It wasn't much but it made my
+sanity depart from me.  I can imagine how it must've been for the
+child, drowned in such fluid."
+
+Lloyd also remembered that night when his injured form was given
+comfort.  It was the night when Boyce first proved his courage by
+isolating himself in his room after the rain fell on him.
+
+The doors of the entrance slid open and they walked down a lengthy
+hallway that was dark, but also oddly shiny, until they came into an
+enormous cavern that hosted a number of gigantic machines of knowledge,
+and around them were a number of Bestenese scientists learning how to
+operate them.
+
+They made their way to the other side of the busy cavern to a flight of
+stairs and descended them until they came out to a large area that at
+one time had stored food and other supplies.  Now it was converted to
+the production of weapons, and all the other contents that were once
+within were taken down to another storage level.
+
+They sat down their gear then headed to where the labs were and walked
+into one.  The endless number of workers, that worked on weaponry in
+front of them, paid little mind to the two men.
+
+Inside the lab doors the two men stopped, looked at a red light and
+became encircled by a smoky mist that smelled like flatulence.
+
+They held their breaths until the smoky mist subsided and a green light
+came on, and with it the door before them slowly swung ajar.  The full
+smelling smoke had actually made their bodies and clothing free of
+bacteria, since what they were now entering was a very clean area.
+
+Just as they pushed the door all the way then closed it after they were
+in, one of the supervising technicians, in charge of small side-arms
+production, approached and welcomed them.
+
+"My Lords Bartlett and Scullion-Blue, welcome!"  said the tall dark man
+in the white plastic oversuit.  "You are here just in time.  We have
+two little gems to give you!"
+
+He offered them the direction of the test lab and they went to it.
+
+"It seems that my father has sent to you some more men, Burman?"  Lloyd
+questioned Burman, in passing.
+
+"Yes, Lloyd.  They have been invaluable.  Already we have attained a
+forty percent increase in our production levels and only three percent
+of that is rejected as battle perfect."  Burman sounded proud and Boyce
+was pleased.
+
+Boyce remembered the day that he and Lloyd first set foot inside
+Alugean.  It was a huge lifeless place full of silence, machinery and
+cratesful of supplies.
+
+They went into the test lab and watched a half dozen men and women
+trying out the strength of the small, hand-sized weapons.
+
+Twenty meters from them were sheets of different materials, that came
+down automatically after the weapons were tested out on each piece of
+the materials.
+
+Materials of plastic, glass, wood, splintered and burned up after a
+single blast of the small guns that had both laser and electrophoric
+capabilities built into them.
+
+
+The power of the small weapons evenly cut into the strongest metal
+slabs that they had on which to test these devices.
+
+Burman was pleased to flaunt the devices that he helped to construct
+and both Lloyd and Boyce were impressed.
+
+Lloyd looked at the weapons and tested the weight in his own hand.  He
+fired a shot of the electrophora at one of the foot thick pieces of the
+wood and it splintered into a countless number of pieces.
+
+"I'm glad that the ones I was hit with, when you found me, were not
+like this one."  Lloyd commented to Boyce with a slight grin.
+
+Boyce studied the weapon for a moment switching it from the
+electrophoric to laser, and back again until he was satisfied with its
+performance.
+
+"These guns, Burman -- they use the same source of power for both
+elements?"  Boyce questioned Burman.
+
+Burman looked confused for a moment and questioned Lloyd with his eyes
+and Lloyd knew what it was that had confused Burman.
+
+"Gun, is an ancient term for such a weapon of aggression."
+
+Burman then remembered that word 'gun' and he answered Boyce letting
+him know that its power source was indeed common for both settings.
+
+Boyce was satisfied with the answer, and so was Lloyd, since he had
+thought of asking a similar question.  Now both of them knew that, once
+the source of power was used up, that was the end of that energy cell.
+
+They each took a belt case and a spare cell, as their armament for the
+trip.
+
+
+They did ask Burman to show them some of the larger-gauged weapons that
+were to be used in the invasion and these had a strength five times
+that of the small hand guns.
+
+Everything seemed to be going well with the production and already the
+weapons were being sent all through the Northern United Alignment, to
+the armies that would get two more weeks, so it was hoped,  of training
+with them until the invasion.
+
+Impressed and fully satisfied with what they saw, they made their way
+back to the upper levels of the mountain.
+
+"We have prepared your quarters for tonight."  said Burman.  "You will
+find food and baths, and if you wish, women can be sent to you at the
+completion of their shift?"
+
+"No, the food and baths will suffice!"  Boyce told Burman.  "We depart
+early and we should rest -- unless you would prefer some company
+tonight, Lloyd?"
+
+Lloyd smiled at them both.
+
+"Maybe, but they'd probably tire me too much and that would make the
+trip harder on both of us!"
+
+"We'll find out if that means 'yes', later!"  Boyce joked with Burman,
+and all three of them laughed.
+
+"Good sleeping then, my friends!"  hailed their host then left them go
+to their chambers.
+
+They thanked him and entered.
+
+They both bathed before eating and Boyce put on some sweet sounding
+music from a time long before the Twentieth Century, and they lay down
+on their respective couches and listened.
+
+"Of all that we found in this place,"  Boyce began,  "the music archive
+must've been our greatest discovery."
+
+"True!"  was all that Lloyd said and they fell asleep.
+
+
+CHAPTER  FIFTEEN
+
+The next day came early.  The two men woke up in the hour before dawn
+and after having their fill of good food for breakfast, they readied
+themselves for their long trip to Pomperaque.
+
+They made up a list for the rations supervisor to fill for them before
+they were to leave Alugean.  The list was common to them both and they
+were comprised of field hiking packs full of dried meats, fruits and
+vegetables, two four-litre water sacks and two electric lights.
+
+When Lloyd and Boyce finished giving Burman and the library steward the
+final details of how and when they would be notified about their own
+advance on Pomperaque, they left the city, hailed with luck from each
+worker within.
+
+It was an unusually hot day and it wasn't yet nine o'clock in the
+morning.
+
+Not far from Alugean, they took their first break by a stream and
+sucked back a few healthy gulps of water from their sacks.
+
+There wasn't a cloud in the sky and the air felt thick to breathe as
+they slowly advanced south.
+
+They took to walking in the shade of the trees that were all around
+them on their path, and only after Boyce noticed a dragonfly fanning
+itself on a boulder, were both of the men aware that there was a
+strange lack of insect life.
+
+The men didn't speak.  Boyce just pointed to the big beautifully
+coloured insect and Lloyd knew what was on his mind.
+
+It seemed, to the men, that they were stopping every few minutes to
+drink their water but they did indeed walk a long distance, losing
+sight of Alugean several hours into the afternoon.
+
+All the vegetation around them was dry and brittle, especially that
+which was under foot.  The trees and shrubs, however, were still green
+and were waxy looking, and sap ran sown the bark of some of those trees.
+
+Their feet burned and it wasn't until the late afternoon that they
+finally came across a stream that was to give them some relief.
+
+They stayed at the little river for an hour, partaking of its fresh and
+crystal qualities, and Lloyd caught, with his bare hands, a couple of
+good-sized fish for their supper.
+
+They built a fire and a shading lean-to by the water's edge and there
+roasted the fish, then ate them.
+
+When they finished they speculated on the distance that they had
+travelled and they looked at their maps, putting them fifty-five
+kilometres from the library at Alugean.  This surprised both of them
+and Boyce joked, remarking that the entire walk must've been down hill.
+
+They knew that they had several hours of sunlight available to them,
+but both agreed that the time would be better spent in search of a
+proper shelter, where they could sleep that evening.
+
+
+They doused the fire and scattered the materials of the lean-to,
+limiting the evidence that someone was there, in the chance that
+someone was following them.
+
+Although no one followed, their caution spurred them into a steady pace
+that allowed them to gain a good distance with each passing hour.
+
+It wasn't until dusk that Lloyd caught sight of a large hole in a
+hillside, which was overgrown with trees and other vegetation.
+
+Since the sun was sinking quickly, Boyce agreed to Lloyd's decision to
+check it out as a possible shelter for the evening.
+
+It indeed was a cave and it was incredibly large, and the floor of the
+cave was relatively smooth, as far down as they could see.
+
+Their curiosity was sparked by the looks of the cave opening, and they
+couldn't see any ledges or nooks until they went further into the cave.
+ Then before them they saw a huge hole, that stretched into darkness.
+Normality, Boyce threw a rock into the hole but it was never heard
+hitting the bottom.
+
+There was light in the cave since the entrance faced towards the west
+and the setting sun.  They each took out their electric lights anyway,
+but the beams of light could not illuminate the other side, if there
+was another side.
+
+To their right was a large road, seemingly joined to the smooth surface
+that ran through the entrance, so they began to walk on it.
+
+"I wonder where this leads?"  Boyce thought to ask, not expecting to be
+answered and especially with Lloyd's remark.
+
+"Hell, maybe?"  he replied.
+
+This annoyed Boyce, but more from not really having a concept of what
+hell was supposed to be.  He could not imagine that which had been
+described in legend since the dawn of man _ both times.
+
+He sometimes shone the light onto the wall to their right and Lloyd
+shone his straight ahead so that they wouldn't fall into nothingness if
+the road was to suddenly end.
+
+"Maybe we should head to the entrance, Lloyd.  We have been here for
+some time."
+
+"I thought I saw my light reflecting off something just ahead.  We'll
+head back after we check that."
+
+Boyce nodded to resuming and as they neared that which was returning
+Lloyd's light, Boyce shone his on the wall again and lit a large black,
+cube that didn't look like it was made of stone.
+
+"What is that?"
+
+Lloyd stopped and looked at it, then went over to it.  He touched it
+and set his fingers into a groove that he found on the side.
+
+"I don't know, but -- "  he pulled on the groove and half the cube,
+which was hinged, flew open.  "It seems to be opening!"
+
+There was a row of six small levers and beneath those was one large
+dusty one.  Lloyd tried to move it but it didn't budge.
+
+He sighed then dropped his pack to his feet and drew from it a small
+axe, gave the lever a good slam them tried it and he pushed it right
+around until it stopped.
+
+There was a sudden rush of air followed by a screaming whirling sound,
+and the entire place became lit with dim yellowish light.
+
+They turned to face the direction of the light and were totally
+flabbergasted by what they saw.
+
+In the utmost of awe, both stood with their mouths agape and were
+silent as their eyes combed the entirety of the huge pit that extended
+far below them, with the road on which they stood, spiralling in a
+terraced fashion down to the very bottom.
+
+Throughout the immense hole, there were huge machines; dormant and
+silent.  Only God knew for how many years this place had been abandoned.
+
+Lloyd saw that which had reflected his light earlier.  It was a huge
+yellow hauling machine, several dozen meters away from them and covered
+with faded writing.  It had many large, black wheels and a gigantic
+load bin, still filled to the limit with whole rocks, many of them
+larger than either of the two men.
+
+"This is a mine!"  Lloyd began to explain to this companion.  "It's
+odd, though, that this place would be mined like this?"
+
+"Why do you say that?"  Boyce was puzzled.
+
+"This style is called an open-pit mine, yet it's in this small
+mountain.  That is why I think it's odd.  Shafts are usually dug for
+mining in mountains or for something that is found very deep!"  Lloyd
+pointed to the floor of the pit, maybe a kilometre below them.
+
+"I would like to go down there, but we don't have the time.  Let's get
+back."  Boyce suggested.
+
+The shrieking whirl suddenly stopped and there was no more drafty air
+flowing about them and the lights went out.
+
+"I suppose that we'll have to go back now?"  Lloyd chaffed, picking up
+his pack.
+
+They lay back on the flat, even floor of the cave, using their water
+sacks as pillows.
+
+Bluish starlight filtered into the cave and it was barely enough to let
+them see one another.
+
+They stared up into the dark of the ceiling and thought about what they
+had just found.
+
+"What a strange and fantastic place!"  said Boyce.
+
+"Have you noticed that this entire road, that runs to the floor of this
+mine, has been carved right out of the rock?"  Lloyd was formulating a
+theory about the odd method of building such a place.
+
+Boyce remained quiet, knowing Lloyd well-enough by now, to let him
+continue with his thoughts.
+
+"They must've used lasers, like ours!"  he continued.  "How else could
+they make it's surface so flat and even all the way down?"
+
+"I was thinking, Lloyd ... wouldn't this great hole make an interesting
+city -- like the Alugean library?"
+
+They both were quiet for a moment, reflecting on Boyce's idea, until
+Lloyd resumed.
+
+"I'd wager that both places were made by the same people!"
+
+The silence that came next lasted until morning when Boyce and Lloyd
+were snatched from their dream states by the shrill cawing of some crow
+on a boulder outside the mouth of the cave.
+
+Bleary-eyed, the men got to their feet and stretched until they were
+fully awake, but still relaxed.
+
+"What a noise to wake up to!"  Lloyd complained.
+
+"Oh, leave it be.  It's not hurting anything!"  Boyce gurgled.
+"Besides, at least we can get an early start today."
+
+They left the cave and sat on the big rock that the crow had vacated.
+They took some food out of their packs and filled their bowels with the
+fuel for a rest.
+
+Their curiosity and sense of awe had made them go back into the mine.
+They were in there
+
+only briefly while they took some notes and made some calculations
+approximating the overall dimensions of the mine.
+
+They marked the location of this sight on their maps and then proceeded
+on their journey back to Pomperaque.
+
+Not very far from the mine there was a wide, rapid-moving river that
+they had to cross before they continued their trek overland to the Dark
+Forest which spanned most of the northern part of the Virgin Mountains.
+ It was a part of the land where no one lived since it was too hostile
+for any groups of people to settle.  Only hunters and criminals roamed
+those desolate areas.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce tried not to think of what lay ahead.  They were given
+the choice of what routes to take and they chose the shortest and most
+perilous way.
+
+They were beginning to see more wild life now, some larger than they
+had ever seen before.
+
+They knew that they were nearing the Dark Forest because of these
+signs. The forest was home of every kind of titan-like animal, many of
+which were devilishly ferocious.
+
+They came over a rise and there they rested because, across the small
+aspen rose an escarpment a few hundred meters in height.  To keep on
+schedule, they had to scale the escarpment walls by evening.
+
+Overhead, a black bird was circling, quickly nearing the ground with
+each successive round, until it finally came to rest in the top of a
+tree between them and the cliffs of the escarpment.
+
+It cried out in dry sounding quavers and flapped its wings in a
+silly-looking manner before it dropped itself off the tree and flew
+over to the cliffs.
+
+"Funny!"  voiced Boyce.
+
+"What?!"  Lloyd asked him, thinking that maybe he did something worthy
+of being made fun.
+
+
+"That's the second raven they we've seen today, and I wasn't aware that
+they were indigenous to this area."
+
+Lloyd didn't even notice the bird until Boyce pointed-out its presence
+to him.
+
+"Maybe it's lost?"
+
+Boyce shrugged at Lloyd's suggestion.  He watched the bird fly over the
+scarp ahead and he sighed with envy.
+
+"Too bad we don't have wings to fly over that thing!"  Boyce said about
+the escarpment.  "I don't feel up to the climb."
+
+"I can do without it, also, but we can't go around it; that would take
+too long."
+
+Boyce looked at Lloyd with a perplexed expression.
+
+"Why did I agree on taking this route, anyway?"
+
+Lloyd grinned and closed his pack while he spoke.
+
+"It's shorter, for one thing."  Boyce began.  "I wonder, at times, if
+we will make it there, by taking this way?!"
+
+He drank some water then slung the sack around his neck and shoulders,
+and Lloyd did the same with his pack.
+
+They both got on their feet and looked at the escarpment then started
+in its direction, pacing themselves steadily and surely until they were
+quickly on the other side of the aspen, and were standing at the base
+of the escarpment's towering cliffs.
+
+"Looks high!"  Boyce's brief comment drew a look from Lloyd until he
+finished his thought.  "But -- we can't turn back now!"
+
+He laughed for a moment then looked up.
+
+"You know, if someone told me, back when I was a boy, that I would be
+climbing an impossible rock when I was twenty-one, I would have laughed
+in their face."  Boyce continued to laugh, watching for Lloyd's
+reaction.
+
+"At least you're young, my friend.  I'm nearly twice your age, so this
+trip is that much harder for me!"
+
+"Strange,"  Boyce began.  "this thing, Fate!  It made us friends
+through your hardship, kept us as friend through my own, and now we're
+going to a place where we will engage in battle... and maybe die,
+together."
+
+Lloyd gave him a strange look of disgust and shook his head.
+
+"If I didn't know you better, I'd swear that you were still reading
+Djenaud Smarte."  he said to Boyce.
+
+"Knock, knock ..."  Boyce smiled and then gave Lloyd a pat on the back.
+ "Who'll go first?"
+
+"I will have to go first.  I've done more climbing."  answered Lloyd.
+"Watch where I put my hands and feet and climb up the same way."
+
+Boyce nodded in silence and Lloyd gave him a concerned looks as if to
+calm him.
+
+They began to climb the escarpment which was almost a straight vertical
+rise of brittle rock.  Several times Lloyd lost his footing on the
+rocks that flaked off with every inch that they climbed.
+
+They had set for themselves two goals, the first being a wide lege
+about half-way up, and the second was the flat summit itself, where
+they were to sleep when the evening came.
+
+By late afternoon, after a slow and painful climb that almost claimed
+them both, they reached the ledge and took off their packs.
+
+Boyce looked down over the edge and he felt a chill go through him.
+
+"If I wasn't so tired, "  he said.  "I think that I'd get sick."
+
+Out of breath, Lloyd laughed and looked down himself.
+
+"You never ... you never get used to it, Boyce."  He lay flat on his
+back and saw how far they still had to go.  "We can't rest here for too
+much longer or we'll lose the strength to finish the rest of the way!"
+
+He lifted his arm towards the summit and let it drop down again.
+
+"I would rather have gone by caravan."  Boyce sighed.
+
+Exhausted, Lloyd grinned and slowly rose to his feet.  He helped Boyce
+up onto his and they put their packs back on and started up the
+cliff-face, gain.
+
+As it was Lloyd's experience in climbing a few times before, the
+second-half of the climb was a little easier for him.
+
+Boyce had also found the next part easier to scale, losing his hold
+only briefly, near the top.
+
+The skies were beginning to take on a purple-orange colour as the sun
+fell behind the clouds far on the western horizon.
+
+Summoning the rest of their strength they finally reached the flat
+summit.
+
+It wasn't until an hour passed, and the sunlight was gone, but for the
+dimness left over, that the two men stood on their feet and cleared an
+area on which to sleep.
+
+The skies were turning to black velvet, with the diamond stars covering
+every space and some galaxies were seen lingering far behind some
+brighter stars.  Directly overhead, a galaxy of fingernail size seemed
+to slowly pass over as they both lay back and watched it.
+
+Meteorites streaked across the sky ever-so-often and Boyce told Lloyd
+that they were angels racing one another through the heavens.
+
+It was a clear and beautifully warm night, and a splendidly colourful
+borealis shined in the north-western sky.
+
+Neither one knew when they fell asleep, and neither one woke up until
+noon the next day, barely noticing that they were being baked by the
+sun.
+
+Every bone in their bodies cracked and there wasn't one muscle excluded
+from feeling the brunt of their climb.
+
+Nothing much was said between them while they ate.  When they were
+through, however, Boyce praised God, and turned to Lloyd.
+
+"I just thought of something."  he said and Lloyd waited, interest
+shining from his eyes.  "We could have cut holes into the rock face
+with our lasers!  The climb wouldn't have taken us half the time!"
+
+"I considered that before we started to climb."  Lloyd admitted to
+Boyce.
+
+"Why didn't we, then?"
+
+"It would have been too simple and you would not have valued the skill
+of the climb if we made it without the hardship and sweat.  Climbing
+this escarpment is much the same as striving for a goal in life -- you
+do understand what I am trying to say?"  Lloyd finished.
+
+"Yes, Lloyd, I do!  You are teaching me things that you haven't
+promised my father you would teach to me.  Nevertheless, I am grateful."
+
+The two men spent the day on the escarpment looking at the land that
+stretched for miles on each side of the precipice, but their main
+interest was in the land that was set directly ahead.
+
+The Krolalin Mountain Range was before them, with the chain of desolate
+old mountains at the head of the Virgin Mountains.
+
+They sat on the southern part of the escarpment and stared at the
+awesome sight.  It was a mammoth forest canopied by clouds.
+
+There was the river before them, flowing through a channel that it dug
+out of solid rock over its many years of erosion.  Its banks sloped up
+from there, on each side, with short underbrush on this side of the
+river and the forbidding Dark Forest, on the other side.
+
+Lloyd had Boyce hand him a pack and from it he took a dark cylindrical
+case that he opened.  He pulled out from it an instrument of glass and
+light metal.
+
+He pulled the instrument apart and put it up to his eye, pointing it in
+the direction of the river.
+
+Boyce quietly watched him for a while.
+
+"Is that one of those distance aids for the eyes?"  he queried.
+
+Lloyd smiled taking the thing away from his eye and showing it to him.
+
+"It's called a telescope.  To see further an clearer you pull it out,
+like this."  he showed him and Boyce knew right away what it could be
+used for.  "It is compressed for easier packing and travel.  A very
+handy toy, I might say!"
+
+He handed the telescope to Boyce and told him to look at the river near
+the huge rock and tree, an he did.  He saw a cable there, stretched
+across the river from one rock to another on the other side.
+
+"That's what we're crossing on."  said Lloyd.
+
+Boyce gave him an odd look as if asking him, 'why?'.
+
+"We can't swim through that tempest.  The current would rip us to
+shreds and we couldn't control a float on her either."  he said.  "That
+wire cable is all we have."
+
+"Who put it there?"
+
+"I don't know, really.  All I know is that when I was maybe nine or
+ten, some hunters came to my father with new of its existence.  We came
+with a couple of Virunese to see it and it didn't look in very good
+shape."  Lloyd took a breath that shuddered slightly.  "I had to carry
+a thick rope to the other side and back in order to strengthen it until
+some others were sent to replace it with a new cable."
+
+"Why did you have to carry the rope?"  asked Boyce.
+
+"I was the smallest and therefore the lightest, but I could feel the
+thing under my weight the further I went."  Lloyd smiled reassuringly
+and took a gulp of water.  "I've been over it a dozen times since then."
+
+Boyce continued to look through the telescope at the other side.
+
+The Dark Forest didn't look any more welcoming closer up and Boyce
+wasn't looking forward to going through it.
+
+The Dark Forest was densely overgrown with titanic sized trees, the
+diameters of which ranged from one to ten meters in thickness.  They
+were extremely tall, too.  So tall in fact that most of the forest
+ceiling was constantly hidden in the clouds, which never seemed to
+dissipate.
+
+No one knew the actual height of the trees in the Dark Forest because
+of the clouds.  Over the years, folk lore and tales had formed about
+their origin and formation.  Mythical civilisations of evil gremlins
+were said to have built a city up in the trees and kept it shrouded
+from human eyes by the soupy canopy of clouds.  The same lore explained
+why the entire forest teamed with hostile life; that which was the
+gremlin king's way of venting his anger on the world and on mankind.
+
+"We'll stay here today and sleep.  Tomorrow, when fresh and strong,
+we'll go down there and carry ourselves across to the other side."
+
+Boyce bore a pensive smile to what Lloyd had said.
+
+"Lloyd?"  he began.  "Exactly how will we get down from here?  Will we
+have to climb?"
+
+Lloyd grinned at Boyce.
+
+"It's easier climbing down!"  he answered and watched Boyce's facial
+colour draw away.  "Really! -- We will climb down part of the way."
+
+He got on his belly and leaned over to the edge of the cliff and
+motioned to Boyce to do the same, and he did.  He pointed to a large
+ledge that was about the width of a forearm, which continued on to a
+piece of this big rock where there was a gentler slope and a path down
+to the base.
+
+Boyce shrugged and smacked his lips as he looked beyond the path and
+straight down to the base of the escarpment, strewn with rock and
+dotted with dry bush.
+
+"That's still a climb!"  he said.
+
+"I would guess twenty meters!  I like to think of it as a morning
+exercise."
+
+They rested on the summit through the rest of the day and talked about
+their past decade together, as friends, and they discussed the great
+city of Pomperaque and what it would be like when they finally reached
+it.
+
+Their second night came to them on the scarp, hardly different in its
+beauty than the night before.  The only noticeable change was that of
+the full moon, which was big and bright.
+
+Each man was silent and rolled about in his own thoughts.
+
+Boyce laboured with the vision of Brook and Dearborne's executions,
+being played repeatedly in his mind while his uncle, Manguino, watched
+with murder-hungry eyes.
+
+He wiped the tears from his eyes and took the telescope that was
+beside Lloyd and put it up to his eye.  He aimed the instrument at the
+moon and was amazed at the details that he saw on its surface.
+
+Lloyd had his eyes rivetted on the moon, as well.  His mind played with
+him, showing him the memories of Mercedes' suicide mingled with that of
+his own beloved Charnan's death.  His tears never formed, though.  With
+his, at one time's ease to mourn, all he had now was the respectful
+love and praise for her.
+
+He never married since his betrothal to her, and rarely did he ever
+have relations with women.  The only woman since Charnan, who
+interested Lloyd in the slightest, was his father's maid-servant,
+Torella.
+
+She drew and teased his desires from him, until with her scalding
+passion gave her body to him, before she left the Bartlett household
+with a wandering artisan.
+
+He never found out whether it was Torella's desire to leave or his
+father's desire to expel her; so to keep him from fraternising with the
+lower-classed help.
+
+Lloyd's second love was removed from him and since that time he had
+never again engaged himself with thoughts of love and passion.
+
+He was deeply depressed and Boyce's voice was the welcomed hammer that
+shattered his flagonful of thoughts.
+
+"Have you ever wondered about the moon's perfection, Lloyd?"  asked
+Boyce and Lloyd responded with a questioning mumble.  "There are large
+holes on the moon and mountains, larger than any in Krolalin."
+
+Lloyd turned on his side, faced Boyce and reached for the eye-glass.
+He looked at the moon and agreed with what Boyce had said.
+
+Boyce continued.  "It's strange how it looks so warm and beautiful by
+our own eyes, then so
+
+cold and empty with the telescope.  The stars, also!  They just hang
+there, each a sun like our own!"  he finished and they both sighed.
+
+"It's truly beautiful!"  Lloyd added.
+
+"Remember our studies, Lloyd?  Wouldn't it be some life to sail between
+those worlds?"
+
+Lloyd expelled some air and he sounded in agreement.
+
+Soon, the men fell asleep and travelled the uncertain routes between
+the stars in search of those precious things that they had lost in
+their youth.
+
+Those harmonious dreams were fleeting, yet blessed moments of comfort
+given them by the love of God.
+
+
+CHAPTER  SIXTEEN
+
+Morning saw the men eat little and collect their possessions, in their
+preparation to make their descent to the floor of the other side.
+
+Carefully, they hung off the edge and made their way, a hair and
+a-breath-at-a-time, until they reached the narrow ledge.
+
+Reaching the ledge didn't take the two men very long and they sat on
+it, with their legs dangling over its edge while they ate their
+breakfast.
+
+The rest of the way would be quicker and easier because, to their left
+the ledge soon became a wider path that gradually made its way down,
+coming out at the river, very near to where the cable was anchored.
+
+While they ate they watched a Kenttitian Eagle fly over them with a
+rider.  It was heading south over the Dark Forest and they thought that
+it was Empal on his way back to Pomperaque.
+
+"Do you think it's him?"  Boyce posted.
+
+"If it is, he'll be in Pomperaque by sun down."  Lloyd replied.
+
+They didn't eat too much food for breakfast, conserving it for when
+they needed it most, after walking for several hours without a rest.
+
+They packed up their stuff and made their way slowly until the ledge
+became the path and there they quickened their pace, finding that they
+soon came down to the river, whose noisy roar grew stronger the nearer
+that they came to it.
+
+They sat down their packs and tested out the cable.
+
+Although it looked rusty and brittle, it still had seemed to support
+the weight of both of them.  That was near the anchoring and Lloyd
+wondered how the middle and other side would hold out.
+
+The river was indeed fast, pulling air over its surface as it flowed
+along, making the banks seem somewhat windy to the two men.  The air
+passing over made the huge cable buzz as it vibrated, sounding like
+some of the sustained orations chanted by the monks at Halls.
+
+They sat on a couple of rocks by the water and observed the river and
+cable for a few minutes, trying to draw the courage to start across.
+
+Suddenly, both men were thrown off the rocks that they sat on but they
+didn't know by what.
+
+They gave one another a couple of curious and worried glances and Boyce
+hollered.
+
+"Was it an earthquake?"  he yelled.
+
+Lloyd shrugged and they watched the rocks slowly rolling away and then
+digging themselves into the mud at the water's edge.
+
+Lloyd moved over to Boyce and told him in aloud voice, trying to
+overcome the roar of the river, that the rocks on which they sat on
+must have been living rock.
+
+Neither man had ever seen one of those strange mutations until now.
+
+They had always thought that the stories about the strange rocks were
+nothing but stories, but they really were able to buck a man from off
+their backs.
+
+They became calm now, and they knew that once they crossed to the other
+side, they would have to become more careful.
+
+These rocks that they had encountered were passive, but on the other
+side of the river the beast were all but shyly submissive.  In fact,
+they would attack their own shadows without the slightest forewarning
+that they would do so.
+
+The day before, Lloyd and Boyce discussed the possible perils that they
+would encounter, not knowing for certain since very few men had ever
+successfully passed through the Dark Forest.
+
+Now, however, no more discussions could keep them from trying to cross
+the river, and they knew it.
+
+"We can't sit around here forever."  yelled Boyce.  "We have to cross,
+so I'll go first!"
+
+He put his pack on and tied it to himself and Lloyd grabbed his arm as
+he moved towards the cable.
+
+"Why do you want to go first?"  he asked him.
+
+Boyce just smiles at him.
+
+"I'm lighter than you are.  Besides, you went first on the climb."
+
+Boyce turned to the escarpment and pointed at it.
+
+Lloyd put his other hand on Boyce's shoulder and nodded his head to
+him, approving the decision that the young man had made.
+
+Lloyd tied his own pack to himself and they went over to the cable
+where it was anchored to a huge boulder.
+
+Boyce reached up and pulled on the cable a few times.
+
+"Be careful!"  Lloyd hollered to him and slapped him on the back.
+
+He eased himself along.  First sliding one hand out then his other
+until his hands were together.  He kept to this method but half-way
+across he began to tire and he hung there motionless for a moment.
+
+The cable didn't vibrate with that odd tone any more, and Lloyd became
+worried for Boyce.  Within his heart he egged him on and he prayed that
+God would grant him strength to make it the rest of the way.
+
+He was relieved to see Boyce continue to pull himself along and after a
+short while made it across.
+
+Lloyd watched Boyce drop to the ground and not move for what seemed
+like several minutes, until he sat up and took the pack off.
+
+He waved to Lloyd from across the river and Lloyd waved back.
+
+He watched the cable vibrating, more now than before with the buzzing
+evening-out into a low tone.  He stepped up on the anchoring rock and
+looked at the wedge that held the cable in the rock, and it was moving
+about a little.
+
+He waved over to Boyce and pointed to the anchoring and Boyce went to
+the anchoring on his side, looked at it and pulled at it.  He then
+waved to Lloyd to make his way across.
+
+Lloyd was unsure of the crossing.  The anchoring on this side seemed
+very weak but he had no choice but to go over.
+
+Once he grabbed the cable it lost its bass-tone hum.  He didn't ease
+himself along, however,
+
+seeing the wedge showing itself more and more.
+
+He began to wish that they had a rope that Boyce would've strung across
+to strengthen it for his crossing.
+
+He threw one hand and grabbed the cable, then followed by throwing out
+his other hand far in front of the first while he tried to keep his
+body straight.
+
+He kept his legs firm and straight, though, and the cable moved very
+little, yet on the last dozen meters he felt the cable give way.
+
+A booming twang was heard accompanied by a whistle.  He held on to the
+cable and for an instant saw the other end recoiling towards him while
+he was pulled closer towards Boyce's side of the river.
+
+Unable to hang on Lloyd fell and Boyce hid behind a big rock trying to
+keep the snapped end of the cable from cutting him in half with its
+whip-like action.
+
+The end finally fell into the water and Lloyd had made it to the bank
+of the river having fallen only a couple of meters from the shore.
+
+Boyce came out from behind the rock and helped Lloyd onto the rocks
+nearby.
+
+"Are you hurt?"  shouted Boyce.
+
+Lloyd breathed heavily and shook his head.  The only thing that was at
+fault with him was his torn clothing and scraped hands.
+
+They spent the evening at the river's edge, trading off on staying
+awake throughout the night, guarding from attacks from animals, but the
+night was calm.
+
+The only hostilities that the two men experienced through the night
+were the horrific sounds of wild animals fighting somewhere deep in
+the forest.  The noises were so great that they, at times, drowned out
+the roar of the river.  To their relief, however, not an animal was
+seen.
+
+
+CHAPTER SEVENTEEN
+
+Morning took a long time, so it seems, coming to the two men.
+
+They were both awake by the time the sun rose and by the rime that it
+was fully light, they had finished eating and made their way into the
+forest.
+
+It was a perfectly clear day out by the river, but the odd clouds that
+towered over the forest were still there and they were maybe even
+thicker than the day before.
+
+At any rate, the inside of the forest had a night look to it.
+
+The trek through the forest was the part of the journey that the two
+men wanted most to do without.  They were afraid of the forest because
+they knew very little about it.
+
+The veil of mystery and the stories of horror and evil, surrounding the
+place, didn't make their nerves any calmer.
+
+Not much time went by since they had entered the forest.  All was quiet
+inside and they
+
+began to feel easier until they came across a gigantic, ox-sized
+carcass of a rabbit that was being devoured by huge larvae as large as
+big rats.
+
+They didn't know the nature of the larvae, whether or not they attacked
+their prey or just fed-off of dead animal bodies, so they both took
+their weapons and carried them as they continued.
+
+Soon after, the men heard a strange grating sound overhead that got
+louder and louder.  As the sound became louder, so it changed, sounding
+like the beating hooves of stampeding horses and finally like a droning
+whistle.
+
+"Maybe it's the gremlins!"  Boyce joked.
+
+Suddenly, before them was a small swarm of hornets, larger than
+anything that they had ever seen, flying straight for them.
+
+Lloyd shouted to Boyce to dive to the ground and he immediately did it,
+always trusting that Lloyd had a good reason for telling him to do such
+a thing.
+
+When Boyce threw himself to the ground Lloyd pointed his weapon at the
+swarm and shot into it.  The laser setting managed to hit and kill only
+one hornet which was the size of a human head.
+
+He quickly put his weapon on the electrophoric setting.  By then Boyce
+had already set his weapon and shot into the swarm that moved towards
+Lloyd.
+
+A bunch fell to the ground dead, and after Lloyd killed some more, the
+few that were left took off for the clouded tree tops.
+
+They both got up and looked at a couple of the hornets twinging on the
+ground as they died.
+
+They bent down and prodded one with a stick and saw that it had a
+stinger that was about five inches in length.  Its mandible was large
+and sharp, too.  It looked as if it was able to snap a hand off at the
+wrist. They looked around to see if there would be another attack.
+
+They continued to walk, hoping that the direction was still south,
+since the only way that they could assume that they were heading south
+was by taking a straight line right through the forest, ever so often
+looking back from whence they came, in order to make sure of their
+direction.
+
+They made steady and rhythmic their jaunt through the thick underbrush,
+keeping their eyes open for anything and everything that could possibly
+be harmful to them.
+
+They kept walking, not stopping for a rest or a drink.  They didn't
+speak or look at one another, either, although each knew exactly where
+the other one was at all times.
+
+The forest seemed to be slightly brighter the further they went into it
+but this boon to them soon passed, also.
+
+It soon became very dark again and they knew that it was time to find a
+place of shelter where to sleep.
+
+They were fortunate to find a resting place not too much further into
+the woods.  It was an outcropping of rock that was fairly high and
+there was a recess in the rock, some ways up.  Over the recess there
+was an over-hanging piece of rock, which would be a nice guard against
+the condensing moisture that was beginning to fall now.
+
+Boyce set his weapon on laser and blasted holes into the rock, to make
+the climb up to the recess easier for them.
+
+The recess was large enough for only one person so when they climbed up
+to it they carved out a much larger hole.  It was smooth and warm in
+the shelter that they made.  The cutting edge of the lasers warmed the
+surrounding rock while they melted a strong smooth surface on the
+ceiling and walls.
+
+It was another night spent in trading watch by each man, keeping guard
+from the ferocious animals that stalked their prey at night.
+
+They were high enough up the rock, though, to be safe from most
+animals, so they hoped.  They remembered the size of the rabbit and the
+hornets, and they couldn't really presume safety even that far up.
+
+What made the watch worse for the two men was the utter lack of light
+that prevented them from seeing anything, including their own hands in
+front of their faces.
+
+They used their electric lights only when they heard noises that were
+nearby, but they never saw anything.
+
+Throughout the entire first day in the forest, Lloyd and Boyce barely
+said anything to each other, or even stopped anywhere to eat or to
+drink.  The evening was quiet, too; the only things said between them
+happened when they relieved one another from their watch periods.
+
+
+CHAPTER  EIGHTEEN
+
+The forest began to take on a lightness and Boyce knew that it had to
+be morning.  He had stayed on his watch longer, letting Lloyd sleep
+because he knew that Lloyd needed more rest, being thirty-nine years
+old.  Boyce didn't mind sacrificing his sleep to let him rest longer.
+God knew how much Lloyd had sacrificed in his own life to fulfil his
+promise to Brook and Dearborne.
+
+When Lloyd woke up he asked Boyce why he didn't wake him for his second
+watch period.  Boyce answered that he had just lost track of time.
+
+Lloyd knew that Boyce didn't tell him the truth, but the topic wasn't
+pursued any further because he was grateful for the few extra hours of
+rest.
+
+They finally spoke for a while as they ate their first meal in the
+forest.
+
+"I don't like this place!"  admitted Boyce.
+
+"We'll have to tolerate it.  We still have a day's walk ahead of us."
+Lloyd said to him and took a bite of meat, then continued.  " -- If
+we're lucky!"
+
+The woods were noisy, continuing from the night, but the men now felt
+safer because they could, at least, see much of what was around them.
+
+Growls were heard all about them, and birds screamed and fluttered
+around.  One huge bird flew past their line of sight, soaring silently,
+then with a loud screech, quickly rose into the clouded tree tops.
+
+"What a damned place this is!"  Boyce stressed.  "It is so ungodly."
+
+"It may be but it's the legacy given to the world by the ancient men!"
+
+Their attention was diverted when they heard a gagging roar and grunt.
+With it there was a loud shriek, like a scream, and they looked at each
+other with puzzled and surprised eyes.
+
+"That did not sound like a scream that a bird would make!"  Boyce
+suggested as he got on his knees, drawing his weapon and trying to
+follow the unusual sound.
+
+It came again and was getting nearer and more frequent.
+
+The, there it was.  To their utter dismay, there was a woman running
+out of the thicket of brush some twenty meters away.
+
+She constantly turned to look behind her.  The bushes waved and buckled
+as if a herd of elephants were breaking through in the same direction
+that the woman was running.
+
+Lloyd hollered out to her, calling her to run towards the cliff where
+they sat, and then they saw what was running after her.  It was a wild
+pig the size of a horse.
+
+It advanced more quickly on the woman, now that she was in the open.
+
+"Drop to the ground!"  Boyce yelled at her several times until she
+finally did it.
+
+Before the pig came upon her in its rampant and hostile charge, Boyce
+fired a laser at it split the pig's skull in two.
+
+Lloyd quickly climbed down from the ledge and ran to her, picked her up
+and ran towards the cliff just as the pig fell from its momentum.
+
+He guided her into the notches in the cliff face and push her up along
+the way.  At the ledge Boyce took hold of  her arms and pulled her up.
+She looked at his face for a moment then lost consciousness.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce were ready to leave before this strange woman happened
+along.  Now they felt a duty to stay with her until she came to.
+
+They wrapped her in Lloyd's blanket after touching her skin and finding
+that it was ice-cold.
+
+Lloyd looked at the woman and made a comment to Boyce about her beauty
+and strangely frail-looking quality.
+
+She wasn't very tall yet her build was slim and firm.  Her hair was
+very long and dark, shaded with copper highlights and her shut eyes
+were oblong and appeared to be larger and slightly slanting.
+
+Her whole face had a serious beauty about it, the patches of dirt, here
+and there, made little difference to its overall appeal.
+
+Lloyd was taken with her.  He didn't know whether it was because of her
+beauty or because she was in the middle of this most naturally hostile
+place on the northern continent.  Nevertheless, he found it very hard
+not to look at her.
+
+Boyce had found her extremely attractive, also, but the idea of this
+woman's presence in the forest made him wonder about her.
+
+"She is beautiful!"  Lloyd began.  "I wonder who she is; how she came
+to be here?"
+
+"I question her being here, at all.  She's a day's journey from both
+the river and the end of this forest.  How has she survived here?"
+
+Boyce was becoming nervous about her and he disliked her due to his
+mistrust.
+
+"How she had come into the forest, is another point."  Lloyd added to
+Boyce's train of thought.  "We shall find out, but until then let's
+enjoy her beautiful company."
+
+He leaned against the ledge wall and kept his eyes on her until he
+poured some of the water from his sack, into his warm hand and ran it
+across her face.
+
+She stirred and opened her big green eyes.  She looked at Lloyd leaning
+over her and Boyce staring at her with frozen eyes.
+
+She looked about at the recess in which they all were in, and she took
+an excited deep breath and then shivered.
+
+She seemed frightened.  Lloyd took her tiny trembling hand into his own
+and spoke to her.
+
+"We're friends."  he said then helped her sit up and look at the wild
+pig, that didn't move any more.  "See -- it's dead!"
+
+Lloyd pointed to the animal then handed to her his water sack, and she
+nearly drowned from her incredibly quick drinking.
+
+She gagged and coughed and Lloyd pushed her forward and rubbed the
+centre of her back.
+
+The woman soon caught her breath and quietly looked at her two gallant
+saviours.
+
+"My name is Lloyd Bartlett and this is Boyce Loebh ..." something kept
+him from finishing the whole name and Boyce was relieved.  "... we are
+making our way to the south."
+
+"We are in a hurry to get to our destination, so we took this route.
+It is shorter by several days."
+
+By the manner of Boyce's speech,  Lloyd knew that Boyce didn't want any
+details of their journey to be revealed.
+
+"You almost had yourself stomped into the ground by that animal.  What
+are you doing in these woods?"
+
+The woman looked to the dead animal and at Boyce.  When she spoke, she
+turned to Lloyd.
+
+"I was running."  she said, and the two men eagerly listened.  "My
+father is an over-lord.  He wanted to force me into a marriage with a
+Teniqués.  I refused and he had me whipped and branded."  she pulled
+the single support strap from her shoulder and exposed the breast of
+the same side, that looked scarred, with the symbol of a trident burned
+on it.
+
+Lloyd lifted the shoulder support back onto her shoulder covering her
+up.
+
+They stared into each other's eyes and Lloyd felt warm from the glow
+emanating from her.
+
+She took the blanket from around her, dropping it to around her hips
+where it no longer covered her.
+
+She only wore the single piece of clothing, made of a dark, thin and
+short fragment of material.
+
+She was barely covered but for her torso, and she didn't wear anything
+as undergarments.
+
+She put her hand on the upper, inside part of her thigh and when she
+brought it away there was blood on her fingers.
+
+Boyce just sat back and watched the strange unfolding of her story and
+actions, all of which were aimed right at Lloyd.
+
+"Are you hurt?"  Lloyd asked with much concern.
+
+"I have a small gash in my leg!  It must've happened when I was being
+chased by that!"  she pointed at the dead pig.
+
+"Here, let me take a look!"  Lloyd offered to assist, genuinely feeling
+concerned for her.
+
+He took some water on a strip of cloth that he had in his pack and
+wiped the wound clean, then wrapped the wound with the same cloth.
+
+Although Lloyd was an honourable man, gallantly aiding a distressed
+female, he could not keep himself from glancing at her naked
+extremities.
+
+"Does it hurt very much ..."  he stopped and with his eyes conveyed a
+question of need to know her name.
+
+"My name is Grenadine."  she said and Lloyd echoed with a smile.
+
+Boyce was annoyed by what he saw.  Everything was kindness and
+appreciation between them, but he felt that something was at fault.
+
+"I'm alright."  she said and she made a little smile that poked a hole
+into Lloyd's heart.
+
+"Can you walk, Grenadine?  We wish to resume our journey soon and we
+don't want to leave you behind."  Lloyd asked her.
+
+Grenadine nodded to him and they packed up the two packs and climbed
+down.
+
+Lloyd gave Grenadine his blanket and she wrapped it around her body
+into a kind of dress that looked like it was made for her.
+
+No seam showed and no string or thread was used to keep it together.
+
+Boyce walked behind Lloyd and Grenadine, keeping all his attention
+focused on the woods and making certain that they continued to walk in
+a generally southern direction.
+
+Above them the tree tops were still hidden and sounds like mute
+whistling came from there.
+
+Boyce began to believe in the gremlin lore and the evil that was
+supposed to be associated with it.
+
+If it wasn't for the woman travelling with them, Boyce believed that
+they would have been out of the forest by this time.
+
+Grenadine limped very little but she held on to Lloyd's right arm at
+all times.
+
+Boyce didn't like that.  He saw that Lloyd would have a very slow
+response in drawing his weapon if it became necessary.
+
+They kept walking and never stopped for a rest.
+
+Grenadine didn't ask for any rest and Boyce had thought that, for a
+woman, that was peculiar.
+
+With every hour that passed, and they made it further through the
+forest, Boyce trusted that woman less and less.  He couldn't tell this
+to Lloyd, however.  His preoccupation with Grenadine would have made
+him unreasonable towards Boyce's views about her, so Boyce kept his
+thoughts to himself and kept his wits about himself.
+
+Lloyd and Grenadine talked to one another throughout the entire
+distance travelled since they left the rocky ledge where they slept
+last night.
+
+Lloyd had forgotten an agreement that they made way back in Besten when
+they chose this route.  It was Lloyd's suggestion, too.
+
+"We should keep as quiet as possible when going through the Dark
+Forest.  We won't draw as many wild animals to the sounds we make."
+
+Boyce remembered those words each and every time that Grenadine's
+bird-like laugh reverberated through the trees.
+
+There was huge crashing sound that came from their left side, and it
+wasn't far from them.
+
+They stopped in their tracks and silently waited.
+
+Lloyd had briefly lost his interest in Grenadine and he looked at
+Boyce's angered contours, yet he didn't understand them.
+
+They stood still for several minutes, looking about.
+
+Lloyd made Grenadine squat down and he readied his gun for defence.
+
+He and Boyce looked around their immediate proximity but saw nothing.
+They became edgy.
+
+Lloyd looked at Grenadine's calmness and helped her up from the ground.
+ He was proud that she could keep her courage when their's was waning.
+
+Boyce watched both of them with amazement as they sluggishly milled
+their way in their intended direction.
+
+He followed once again being the eyes for the entire party.
+
+Time passed and the forest grew dark for the second time.  Night was
+again, at hand.  Boyce was not at all pleased.
+
+"Lloyd!" Boyce cried out.  "We should seek a shelter!"
+
+Lloyd nodded to him and they reconnoitred the entire area around them,
+in search of some place.
+
+The only shelter available, with any degree of safety offered to them
+was a gigantic bird's nest.
+
+"Should we try it?"  Boyce asked with his answer already suggested in
+his tone.
+
+"We couldn't find better in this light!"
+
+With Lloyd's answer, they took out their lasers and sliced several
+dozen rungs into the tree leading up to the branch with the nest.
+
+"Well?"  Boyce thrust his hand up at the tree.  "Tonight we'll be
+sleeping with the gremlins."
+
+Grenadine gave Boyce a strange glare of disapproval and Lloyd smiled
+because he thought it looked amusing.
+
+"We go up in a moment!"  said Lloyd then went a few meters from the
+tree to urinate.
+
+Boyce came up beside him and did the same, taking his first opportunity
+to speak to Lloyd about the girl, since they took her along.
+
+"Your mind hasn't been on the journey."  he told Lloyd.  "This place is
+dangerous and you've fully dropped your guard."
+
+Lloyd didn't say a word while Boyce spoke.
+
+They both finished urinating and Lloyd began to turn but Boyce stopped
+him.
+
+"Haven't you given any thought on how or why she came to be in this
+forest?"
+
+Lloyd was still quiet in such a way as to seem like he was ignoring
+Boyce.
+
+"You don't believe that story that she gave us, do you?"  Boyce
+demanded and answer.
+
+Look, Boyce!  She's a very nice and beautiful woman.  We can't leave
+her here to die!"
+
+"Yes, Lloyd, but don't you see? -- She shows no apprehension about
+being in this place!"  He stopped his monotonous whisper and pointed to
+her.  "Look at her Lloyd, does she look frightened to you?"
+
+Lloyd glanced over at the woman but he couldn't see what Boyce was
+talking about.
+
+All he could see was Grenadine leaning against a tree with her arms
+crossed and her eyes staring straight ahead.
+
+Lloyd walked away from Boyce and soon was helping her climb up the
+rungs towards the branch where the nest was resting.
+
+Boyce watched them climb.  He was disturbed when Lloyd never came back
+down to get his pack.
+
+Boyce put both packs on, one around each shoulder and he slowly made
+his way up the tree and then swung his legs astride the branch when he
+reached it.
+
+Lloyd and Grenadine were already reclined in the nest when Boyce took
+the packs and set them inside the nest with them.
+
+From his pack Boyce took out his cape and electric light.  With a
+little food and his water sack, he made his way to the butt of the
+branch and sat against the trunk of the tree.
+
+With the final particles of light scattering through the forest, Boyce
+scanned the area to make certain that no animals were in the vicinity.
+He looked up into the clouded tree tops and wondered about the lore of
+the gremlin kingdom and whether or not it was true.
+
+It was dark now; pitch and silent but for occasional sounds of
+night-birds whistling through the trees and, at times the sounds of
+rocks being overturned by large and hungry animals looking for grubs.
+
+Many hours had passed since Boyce took the first watch.
+
+He was finished slowly eating his food and keeping awake because he
+didn't dare risk leaving them defenceless.
+
+Hours later, Boyce crawled along the branch to the nest, having his
+light on it so that he wouldn't fall from it.
+
+At the nest, he was ready to call Lloyd to his turn at watch, and he
+came upon them when they were at the height of love making.  Grenadine
+was  obviously the aggressive one.
+
+He turned off the light and crawled back to the tree trunk, and leaned
+up against it, throwing his legs around the branch to keep himself
+stable.
+
+Something, he thought, was happening to his friend.  Lloyd was
+behaving oddly and not like himself, and what's worse, Boyce didn't
+know how he could help Lloyd.
+
+
+CHAPTER  NINETEEN
+
+Lloyd stood up in the nest, stretched and tucked his tunic back into
+his pants.  He looked over at Boyce wrapped tightly in his dark cape,
+staring right back at him with withdrawn eyes.  His face was pale and
+his lips were dry and slightly cracked from the trifle breeze that
+filtered through the forest during the night.
+
+Lloyd tipped his head to Boyce and Grenadine peaked over the rim of the
+nest and look at him, as well.
+
+Lloyd and Grenadine shared some of his rations and Boyce began to
+straighten up from his uncomfortable night of sleeplessness.  His legs
+dangled off the branch while he sprinkled water on his hand then patted
+it over his face.
+
+Breathing coarsely and heavily, Boyce looked over at Lloyd and
+Grenadine setting their clothing in order, and he looked way when he
+saw Lloyd kiss Grenadine's hand.
+
+Boyce lifted his pack around his shoulders and then threw his cape
+about himself and climbed down the tree.
+
+It was an eerie peacefulness on the ground and he felt very ill-at-ease
+all by himself.  He took his laser from his belt case and seared some
+marks on a few dozen trees, heading in a straight line, south from the
+tree in which they spent the entire night.
+
+Lloyd watched Boyce walk in the direction of the blazed trees and he
+knew that Boyce was going ahead, alone.  He climbed down from the tree
+with his pack and Grenadine, on his back.  Her beautiful legs and
+delicate arms tightly clutched him about his body, and she sensually
+rubbed her lips on the back of his neck.
+
+They followed the trail that was hastily marked by Boyce, who was far
+ahead by the time that they started.
+
+For their own protection and welfare, Boyce knew that they had to hurry
+out of the forest.  This place was taking its toll on the both of them;
+Boyce with his potent strength and Lloyd with his immobility of
+character.  He was certain that their safety was only assured by the
+speed of which they could make it to the other side of the forest.  A
+third night would surely taken them, thought Boyce.
+
+Many hours were spent in Boyce's struggle to make the other side.  His
+weapon was drawn at all times and in his speed he shot several large
+animals, regardless if they motioned to attack him, or not.  He
+couldn't chance any friendly influences in this forest.  He could not
+trust this place of legend and mystery while he worried for his friend,
+helper and teacher, Lloyd Bartlett, to make it to the other side.
+
+On the other side was an immense canyon, stretching to each side of
+him, as far as the eye could see.
+
+There, far to one side, was a swinging cable bridge connecting the two
+sides of the canyon; they were certainly a kilometre apart.
+
+He waited at the place that he came out of the forest, for about an
+hour.  Then, as if beckoned back into the forest, he followed his
+markings back towards Lloyd and Grenadine.
+
+One half hour into the forest, Boyce saw Lloyd and Grenadine leaning
+against a large boulder, embraced and oblivious.
+
+Grenadine was in front of Lloyd and she was kissing him while,
+unnoticed, a large pack of dogs came out of the shadows of the trees
+and made their way towards them.
+
+Lloyd didn't see the dogs and he didn't even hear some of them snarling
+as they neared.
+
+Boyce saw the dogs quickly move upon them, and he saw that Lloyd didn't
+have his laser out of its case.  There was no time to warn them.
+
+He rushed down on one knee and set his gun on the electrophoric
+setting.  He fired into the middle of the pack of dogs.  Several fell,
+kicking as they died.  A few others howled into a whimper and scurried
+away. A few of them turned and advanced upon Boyce.
+
+Lloyd looked up and saw the dogs run towards Boyce.  In a sleepy daze
+he drew his laser and pointed it at the dogs.  Just as he was firing
+Grenadine grabbed his arm and pointed it towards the ground, allowing
+the laser to gouge a large hole into the earth.
+
+Unsure of what had actually happened Lloyd slowly focused his eyes upon
+Grenadine.  As he stared at her he was transfixed upon her green eyes
+which began to change to a shiny rust colour as she slowly began to
+back away from him.
+
+Once more he fired several rounds at the dogs, vaporising one that
+committed to a jump upon Boyce, giving the young man the chance to duck
+and roll away.
+
+As Boyce rolled he came to rest upon one knee.  He raised his laser,
+bracing his wrist with the other hand.  The power cell within the laser
+was dead and one dog was too near to him for either he or Lloyd to kill
+it from the positions they were both were situated.
+
+Boyce, fearful of this circumstance, still remained calm.  His eyes
+scanned the ground about him.  Quickly he had noticed a large tree
+branch resting inches from his left hand.  Without much plan or thought
+Boyce scooped the tree branch with his left hand sending it in flight
+towards his right hand.  As surely as rises the sun the branch found
+its mark. He wielded the stick high over his head as he sprang to his
+feet.  He stood with his feet placed far enough apart for a sure-footed
+balance and allowed the stick to come crashing down upon one of the
+dog's as it hurled itself towards him.  A thundering crack echoed about
+the forest as Boyce found the mark of the dog's back, crushing it into
+a bloody pulp.
+
+Lloyd, now achieving a sense of sobriety, shot at a few more of the
+dogs and failed to notice Grenadine moving away from him.  She picked
+up a jagged rock and flung it towards Lloyd's head.
+
+Without surprise at what he saw, Boyce quickly sprang off of his feet
+and lunged towards Lloyd.  But the rock found its mark hitting him
+behind the left cheek before Boyce knocked him to the ground.
+
+Boyce reached him as he had sunk to his knees and toppled to one side.
+But Lloyd did not lose consciousness.  Boyce lifted him onto his lap
+and Lloyd's head shifted over, his eyes seeking the beautiful waif,
+Grenadine.
+
+Their eyes caught each other; Lloyd's displayed his broken heart and
+Grenadine's showing a satisfied mania.
+
+Before them both, Grenadine broke into a shrieking laugh and fell down
+upon her hands and knees.  In their amazement and horror, she began to
+transform into a large black wild bitch.
+
+She growled at them, foam frothing and flying out of her mouth.  Sharp
+and moonlight white fangs glistened, only out-shined by the ruby red
+glint of her eyes.  She sprang directly at Boyce catching him in the
+chest.
+
+Boyce tried to fend her off by flailing his arms, but he was weakened
+by the shock to his body, knocking the air from him.
+
+With glaring, burning eyes and the flash of the lightning white teeth,
+she howled then violently thrust at Boyce's throat.  Boyce grabbed her
+head inside his bent elbow and attempted to turn her over.  When he
+finally got her beneath him, he tried to clamp her snout shut with his
+left hand.  In a frenzy but yet in control Boyce made a search of the
+ground for Lloyd's laser, which had dropped when he was hit by the
+rock, but he wasn't able to find it.
+
+Boyce suddenly let go of Grenadine's snout, rolling quickly away from
+her then in a blink of an eye moving into a standing position and
+defenceless.
+
+Grenadine got onto her feet as well and growled as they both stood
+there staring and circling one another.
+
+Once more she leaped in Boyce's direction but this time the loud twang
+of an electrophore resonated about the woods.  Lloyd had fired at
+Grenadine.
+
+Lloyd crawled over to Boyce.  He was lying on the ground with
+Grenadine's lifeless but, again, human body draped over him.  He rolled
+her off from him and put his hand on her chest. In an instant he
+reached over for Boyce and did the same, then sighed with relief when
+he found him still breathing.
+
+"Boyce ... you're alright!"  was all he said.
+
+Boyce silently nodded and spent the next few moments trying to catch
+his breath, and Lloyd kept a watchful eye for any more dogs.
+
+Boyce sat up and they just looked at one another.  Nothing was said.
+Nothing had to be said.  Both knew exactly what had happened and what
+was, was.  Lloyd understood what was on Boyce's mind.  He knew that
+Boyce could see the potential danger over the last few days, but had
+nevertheless, allowed it to manifest.  He, himself, should have
+realised the danger especially with her unafraid attitude, at the tree,
+the last evening.
+
+Lloyd pointed his laser at her body.  He severed her head then shot a
+large hole into her chest where he dug out her heart with his bare
+hands.
+
+Boyce made it to his feet and staggered about the area until he found
+the laser that he dropped early into the struggle.  He finally found it
+near the body of the dog that he killed with the tree branch.
+
+He tucked the gun into his belt case and surveyed the woods.
+
+Several dogs were still pacing to and fro watching Lloyd mutilate
+Grenadine's body.  They watched as he dug out her heart and stuff it
+into her dead mouth.  They quickly ran off into the woods when he threw
+her head at them.
+
+"Let's get out of here."
+
+No sooner did Boyce suggest their departure that they began to run
+through the forest, following the markings he had made earlier.
+
+At the end of the forest they were still running.  Boyce lead the way
+to bridge and entered a few steps into it.
+
+"Is it safe, I wonder?"
+
+
+"It has to be safer than what we had just left!"  Lloyd admitted,
+pointing in the direction from which they came.
+
+It was at this point that the yelping and growling sounds of many dogs
+began to echo from the forest not very far away.
+
+They looked at one another and shrugged in unison as they began to run
+across the bridge.  They laughed as they ran especially when the bridge
+began to swing wildly with every step they took and they prayed to the
+one true living God to strengthen the bridge until they made it across
+the canyon.  The other side of the canyon seemed to move farther and
+farther away and the chasm below them became bottomless to their minds.
+
+They pushed on.
+
+Lloyd looked back to see the distance that they had made to this point
+and there, also making their way across the bridge, was a pack of
+blood-hungry dogs.
+
+"This is very disconcerting!"  Boyce commented.
+
+"Hold on, Boyce!"  Lloyd ordered then stomped his foot on the part of
+the bridge directly behind them and the shock wave travelled back
+towards the dogs upsetting the lead dogs balance and footing, forcing
+them off the bridge and into the chasm.  A couple others dropped when
+Lloyd shot at them, but this seemed to egg-on the other dogs even more.
+
+In seconds the shock wave returned to their side of the bridge making
+both of them nearly lose their footing.
+
+In short order the two men regained their footing and their balance but
+only to see the relentless dogs steadily, and quickly coming nearer.
+
+"We'll have to do this the hard way!"  said Lloyd then motioned to
+Boyce to follow what he does.
+
+They wrapped their arms about the tension cables that held the bridge
+up and they wrapped their legs about the support ropes which held the
+partly rotten wood that was the bridge.  Lloyd then drew his gun and
+shot into the middle of the bridge just ahead of where the dogs were
+now encroaching.
+
+The bridge split.  Wood splinters flew everywhere.  The dogs tumbled
+hundreds of meters to there deaths on the chasm floor.
+
+Grabbing for the tension cable with his gun hand, Lloyd had released
+his gun as the bridge head they were hanging on to recoiled towards the
+opposite cliff wall of the canyon.
+
+Both hit the wall hard, their eyes closed as if that would cushion the
+pain of impact in some way.
+
+When the bridge moved no more, they opened their eyes and checked to
+see if the other was still there.  Their eyes met and with a reassuring
+nod they looked up and slowly started to climb.
+
+Although the distance they were climbing was not far the tangled mess
+of the bridge was difficult to negotiate and both were near to
+exhaustion from their battle, and their run.
+
+Lloyd's cheek was bleeding but his hands each stretched and searched
+for the next rung and his feet each found its mark, though it was all
+through a virtual unconsciousness.  What kept him going was his memory
+of the promise he made to Brook and Dearborne; it was the promise he
+had, once again, rememebred.  It pushed him onward to his success and
+he continued to climb as he felt a self-embarrassment for their
+predicament.  He had allowed the memory of his promise to escape his
+mind when he was with Grenadine and now he was sorry.
+
+Lloyd had made it to the top and Boyce pulled him up to the edge and
+dragged him over some flat rocks.  There they both lay for rest,
+staring at the immense evil forest from which they came, looming on
+the other side of the canyon.
+
+"Let's not do this again!" Boyce pleaded, with a grin.
+
+Both passed out.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWENTY
+
+The sun slowly ascended in the east, appearing to rise from the distant
+end of the canyon, giving light to the rocky gap, through to its other
+far end.
+
+Boyce opened his eyes to see some birds flying overhead.   He quickly
+sat up but after he saw they had made it across the bridge he felt more
+relaxed.  He stared back, at the immensity of the Dark Forest and its
+perpetually clouded tree tops.
+
+Now he wondered, more than when they were inside the forest, if the
+mythical lore about the gremlin city, in the cloudy tree tops, was true.
+
+Lloyd now sat up, as well, and with hazy eyes looked towards the
+forest, too.
+
+He glanced to Boyce who wasn't looking at him at the time, very much
+intent in his study of the canyon.
+
+"That place will get a man -- one way or another!"  Lloyd said waiting
+for a response from Boyce.   "Boyce ... I can't begin to say how sorry
+-- "
+
+" -- Let it be, Lloyd!"  Boyce cut into his apology, but not in a
+manner suggesting disrespect.  "You weren't yourself and nor was I.  I
+suppose the forest reached the both of us."
+
+Lloyd nodded and sighed as he stared towards yesterday's events.
+
+"It was an awesome teacher, my friend."  Boyce began.  "It taught us
+what we feared the most.  It taught you the pain of loneliness and duty
+and it taught me that fighting, and killing, is unavoidable."
+
+Lloyd placed his hand firmly on Boyce's shoulder, offering a silent
+thanks for his understanding and forgiveness.
+
+"I know the need that you had for the company of someone like
+Grenadine.  I suppose the forest knew that and used it against you.
+Yet, it didn't have the power to turn us against one another!"
+
+Lloyd felt ashamed of his behaviour of the last few days but he did
+believe that Boyce was genuinely sympathetic about it all.  He also
+knew that Boyce was right about the Forest using fear against its
+trespassers.
+
+Boyce finally looked away from the Forest and riveted his eyes on Lloyd.
+
+"Your father told me about Charnan."  he admitted to Lloyd.  "I can't
+tell you how very sorry I felt about that.  That's the only reason that
+I am able to understand."
+
+Lloyd's eyes glided down to his hands.  "I began to fall in love with
+her."  he confessed, remembering how soft and smooth Grenadine's skin
+was to his caresses.
+
+" She was very beautiful ... too bad she was a gremlin."
+
+"She was a lycanthrope."  Lloyd corrected.  "In ancient times they
+called her kind, werewolves!"
+
+"Whatever she was, Lloyd, I will never dismiss myths or legends after
+this trip."
+
+Far across the canyon the winds carried the howling cries of the dogs
+that never made it to the bridge, in pursuit of the two men.
+
+Through the telescope Boyce peered at the other side of the canyon at a
+scant few dogs that paraded back and forth, and then throwing
+themselves off of the cliff to join their dead comrades below.  He
+passed the glass to Lloyd.
+
+"The parts couldn't survive without the rest of the body."
+
+Boyce listened and nodded at Lloyd's insight.  It was personal to his
+friend, but Boyce understood the consequences of the dogs'suicide.
+
+"Instead of living with the loss, knowing they would bare great
+loneliness, they decided to die rather than carry on by themselves."
+
+Several hours after the sun rose high in the sky, the two continued
+south on their journey back to Pomperaque.
+
+The next five days were relaxing and uneventful, in comparison to their
+trek through the forest.  Many animals were seen along this path but
+none seemed hostile -- to the men's relief.
+
+They only had the one weapon left between them.  Physically, they were
+becoming weaker with each meter that they travelled, but regardless of
+their discomfort, they relentlessly carried-on.
+
+On their eleventh day of travel they came across a God-sent farming
+community where they replenished their food and water supplies.
+
+There they spent the evening listening to tales of a once great nation
+before the great scourge of man.  They already knew all the truth, but
+they didn't anticipate the stories events, and they both kept their
+knowledge to themselves.
+
+They knew that Manguino's spies and his influence were already reaching
+into the hearts of little towns, such as this one.
+
+A small skirmish broke-out in the town that night.  It was all about
+the tales of the old ways, but Lloyd and Boyce laughed at the fisticuff
+like it was part of the story being told, and later graciously accepted
+an offer by an older man to spent the evening on his farm.
+
+"The loft in my stable is dry and very warm."  promised the old man.
+
+Refreshed, with a new supply of food and water, they continued south
+until two days later they saw the Sedarin capital on the horizon of the
+Sedarin Plateau.
+
+They spent the evening on a small mesa several kilometres from Sedara
+and the next morning they made their way into the heart of the city.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWENTY-ONE
+
+Entering the city, Lloyd refreshed for Boyce the details and customs
+that were peculiar to the Sedash.
+
+"They're hermaphrodites, but some exhibit qualities that are more
+inclined to one, or other, sex to which we are accustomed."
+
+"How can you tell which is which?"
+
+"You will be able to tell."  Lloyd grinned.  "They wear obvious
+clothing, and the two distinct types do carry themselves in a
+noticeable manner.  Plus their title will be the give-away.  Those
+hailed as 'Mas', in their name are the more masculine type.  Those that
+are the more feminine are addressed as 'Dam'."
+
+Lloyd recounted the basic formalities of custom for Boyce and explained
+that these people were not known to be very hostile. Yet, just as they
+neared the city centre they were surrounded by a dozen of the city's
+Eminent - the palatial security force.
+
+"You are not of our people!"  accused one of the guards, pressing the
+tip of their lance up against Lloyd's throat.  The others did the same
+to Boyce.
+
+Surprised by this, the two men stared at the main guard, and expressed
+their displeasure at the aggressive halt of their path to the palace.
+
+Lloyd took the point of the lance into one of his hands and
+nonchalantly moved it away from his throat, then cleared it before he
+spoke.
+
+"We are from Besten.  We have permission to pass through your beautiful
+city!"  he said.
+
+"We know nothing of such a thing!" yelled the main guard, then
+ordered.  "Follow!"
+
+"They are 'Mas'?"  Boyce guessed.
+
+"Yes!"  confirmed Lloyd, as the guards took their supplies from them.
+
+"No speaking till you are given permission!"  ordered the guard.
+
+The two men began to follow the lead guard but were stopped momentarily
+by another one who ripped the belt case from around Boyce's waist.
+
+They were escorted to the palace of the Sedash ruler, Mas-Trephor.
+
+Under a strict watch, they were forced to sit for several hours. That
+was to be their wait for an audience with the great ruler of Sedara.
+
+During the lengthy wait to see Trephor, there was a Dam that brought to
+them some food and drink.  The guards refused to let her through at
+first, but then as if they had no choice, allowed her entry to see the
+two men.  She served each one individually but said nothing to them.
+
+The men glanced at one another when she handed them some goblets of
+drink.
+
+"Don't drink it, yet!" Lloyd whispered.
+
+He took Boyce's goblet and took a sip from it, then soon after took a
+gulp from his own.
+
+"Can't be too cautious!" Boyce whispered back at him and the Dam
+hermaphrodite smiled.
+
+"I assure you both that the drinks and the food are quite safe.  If you
+do not believe me let me drink."
+
+Lloyd examined his server.  From the slight form he guessed sixteen
+years of age, and from the look of those bright green eyes, he soon
+nodded to Boyce that he could drink.
+
+"I am Dam Lehnar. I am the Dam offspring of Mas-Trephor."
+
+She bowed her head to the men and Lloyd introduced himself and his
+friend.  He told her that they hailed from Besten, but didn't burden
+her with much more.
+
+The response excited her because she had heard many interesting stories
+about that fantastic city and it was always her wish to one day attend
+the Blaisaman there.
+
+"My apologies for your detention.  I will go now to Trephor and ask
+that your petition be expedited."
+
+"It would be our greatest appreciation if you did so, Dam-Lehnar."
+Boyce kindly smiled at her.
+
+She smiled back at him then turned and hurried down the long hallway
+adjacent to the room in which they were being kept. In a very short
+order a page entered the room and summoned the two men to appear before
+Mas Trephor.
+
+Lloyd was beginning to realise why these people were behaving unlike
+the reports of their non-hostile ways.  They had arrived in Sedara at
+the time of the month when the major part of the population was in
+their phase of inconceivability; as relative to their menstrual cycles.
+
+It was during this week-long period of time that was usually set aside
+for public exhibitions.  Prisoners and slaves were violently beaten
+and raped, and even killed during those festival days.  These
+violations became
+
+a part of the Sedash culture, where they tried to display their
+superiority over the one-sexed humans.
+
+Trephor, as the ruler, usually molested the first prisoner of his
+choice, so opening the week-long celebrations.
+
+Throughout the regular times of the month, violations took place
+regardless, since the Sedash had found great pleasure and entertainment
+in the inflicting of discomfort on their subordinates.  The reports of
+their non-hostile ways were less than accurate.
+
+Gallant gentlemen as they were, self-taught in the presentation to
+those who are royal, they both went down upon one knee as they bowed to
+Mas Trephor.
+
+"Stand!"  Trephor's voice cut like a blunt knife through old leather,
+and although it had an underlying female quality, its hoarseness made
+both Lloyd and Boyce assume that the voice was practised into being
+more masculine over the years.
+
+They rose and faced Trephor, still remaining quiet.
+
+"You are handsome men.  We welcome you to our court of Sedara.  We ask
+you stay and rest with us before you continue on your journey."
+Trephor stopped for a moment then leaned forward on one elbow, letting
+a portion of his wrinkled breast show through the lynx wrap that he
+wore.  "Where are you two lovely men going?"
+
+"Gothal, your majesty!  We are scholars from the Blaisaman at Besten,
+called to Gothal to teach the children there -- in the ways of alchemy
+and medicine."  said Lloyd.
+
+Boyce stood there quietly not reacting to anything that Lloyd said.
+
+Lloyd continued.  "And may I, also, modestly add that we are quite
+proficient in the arts and in literature."
+
+Dam Lehnar was seated to the left of Trephor, at all times, and she
+stared at Lloyd with a
+
+warm and affectionate eye.  She was displaying attraction to him since
+the first time that she saw him.  Now, with her believing that he was a
+scholar for the Bestenese Blaisaman, she was sure that she loved him.
+
+"We were to be allowed safe passage through your lovely city, Mas
+Trephor.  There is an agreement between our two nations."  Lloyd
+continued.
+
+"Yes, friends.  There was an agreement but we were not told who was to
+pass through here, or where they were going.  You may rest here for a
+day or two, if you care to, and you will be escorted to our southern
+perimeter."  Trephor was being quite congenial.  "Until then, anything
+that you desire you may receive at your request!"
+
+Boyce bowed his head slightly to Trephor never removing his eyes from
+the leader's face as he thanked him.
+
+Lloyd bowed also and Trephor gave them a dismissing nod.
+
+"Escort our friends to the state-room!"  he commanded to the guard.
+
+When they exited the royal hall, Trephor called to another guard and
+whispered to him.
+
+"Do not let them out of the state-room.  I want them here for the
+festival the day after tomorrow!"
+
+Dam Lehnar's comely face lost its radiant gleam when she realised that
+her father was truncating the agreement signed with Besten.
+
+"They are beautiful and smart men.  The prime specimens of their kind,
+perfect for opening this month's celebration."
+
+Lehnar was panicky and afraid for Lloyd and his companion.  She knew
+that at the celebration they would be tortured and most probably killed.
+
+"Trephor?"  Lehnar pleaded with her father.  "Do not hurt these two
+men."
+
+"I cannot permit them to live, Lehnar.  They are dangerous and they are
+men.  They lie like demons and would sooner cut out your heart than to
+give you a nice greeting."
+
+"But one pleases me, father."  said Lehnar.
+
+"Which, my dearest -- the young king or his faithful teacher?"
+
+"Young king?" Lehnar was astonished by what she heard.
+
+"Yes, Lehnar. That young man is a king.  He is called Boyce Loebh.  He
+carries himself like a powerful leader, and that older one -- he is a
+brilliant man, but not a scholar.  The Bartletts are leaders in Besten
+-- not students of knowledge."  he told her.
+
+"Bartlett pleases me, my dear parent.  Will you spare him for me?"
+
+"I will give him to you my sweet daughter.  My designs are for the
+young king -- that one possessed this remarkable weapon!"
+
+Trephor took from his lynx wrap a small device.  It was Boyce's laser
+gun.  He turned to Lehnar and showed it to her.
+
+"Scholars do not carry such things on lengthy journeys.  They just use
+their minds to defend themselves."
+
+He lifted the gun towards the door, at the other end of the royal hall
+and fired a burst of the electrophore.  The stone doors blew off their
+hinges and crumbled into dust.
+
+"Yes, indeed.  I do so want that young Loebh!"
+
+"And, Bartlett?"  pleaded Lehnar.
+
+"He is yours. Do with him, as you will!"
+
+The men had bedded early, after taken into the state-room by the guards.
+
+Aside the fact that the men had fallen asleep early, they didn't wake
+up until noon.
+
+Now, during their first day of stay in Sedara, Boyce and Lloyd weren't
+aware that they were being held captive.   They slept much of the
+morning away and relaxed most of the afternoon and evening.  they
+didn't care to leave their chamber and when they requested something to
+be given to them, their request were carried out without a word.
+
+The following day found the men waking early and by noon they were
+beginning to feel restless.
+
+They tried to leave their state-room but the guards just asked them if
+they could bring something to them.  But what the men wanted was to
+just go outside and walk the city.  It didn't take long for them to
+realise what was happening to them.
+
+"It seems like Mas Trephor intends to keep us here.!"  Lloyd had said
+to one of the guards, but received no reply.
+
+It was to their fortunate circumstance that Dam Lehnar had come along
+and caught what Lloyd had said.
+
+"My dear Mr. bartlett, you are not being confined."  she said to him,
+in a soft tone of voice suggesting sincerity.  "Here, walk with me and
+I will show you our gracious city."
+
+"Thank-you, Dam Lehnar!"  Lloyd accepted her invitation but before he
+left he moved close to Boyce and whispered to him that the Sedash knew
+who they were.
+
+Boyce responded with a nod and motioned for him to go with Lehnar.
+
+Throughout the day and evening, Dam Lehnar escorted Lloyd to various
+parts of interest in the city.  Many of the sights that she showed him
+dated back to the time of the first colony of hermaphrodites that
+established a settlement on the Sedarin Plateau.
+
+In the late evening Lehnar took Lloyd to the theatre and they watched a
+very graphic account of the Sedash becoming a great and powerful people
+in their region.  There was much violence and bloodshed.
+
+Lehnar sat very close to Lloyd during the evening.  He noticed it
+immediately and prayed that another situation would not develop with
+her as it did with Grenadine.  He also did not feel sexually inclined
+towards Lehnar, even though she was predominantly feminine and was
+generally speaking, pleasant to the eye.
+
+Shortly after midnight Lehnar took Lloyd back to the palace. They
+continued to stroll through the gardens where she was showing Lloyd the
+various statues that dotted the path.  All were of hermaphrodites in
+erotic poses.  She was hoping that he would become interested in her by
+what he saw.  The opposite was true.
+
+"I must thank you for your kindness, Lehnar.  Boyce and I appreciate
+the gracious hospitality that you and your father have extended to us
+during our stay."  Lloyd was starting to become diplomatic.  He wanted
+the stroll to end soon because he was afraid that Lehnar would begin to
+expect something from him that he was incapable of giving to her.   "If
+you ever come to Besten, it is my hope that you will enjoy yourself as
+much as I have!"
+
+He thanked her and she began to melt for him.  The tone of his voice,
+expressing his gratitude and trust, made her want him all the more.
+She had also become very sad, knowing what Trephor had planned for the
+both of them.
+
+"I feel that I love you, Lloyd!" she announced to him.
+
+He tried to keep any emotion from showing.  He tried not to give her
+any impression of his feelings in regards to her declaration.
+
+"I am very flattered, Dam." he finally replied.
+
+She looked at him as they walked back towards the garden entrance to
+the palace, and before entering she took his hand.  She kissed him on
+the cheek then asked him a question that made him feel very uneasy.
+
+"Would you mind it very much if you were to live in my city?"
+
+Lloyd wasn't at all perplexed by her question.  It was a clear
+invitation and it clearly displayed her intentions towards him.
+
+He slowly turned away from her resuming his way to the state-room.
+
+"Besten is my home."  he answered her.  "My family and friends are
+there.  You do understand?"
+
+"Yes.  I understand.  It seems that you pure humans will never accept
+our kind!"  she said.
+
+"Please, Lehnar ... don't speak that way.  Man is strange in his ways.
+I suppose that is why the world is, as it is.  We all have our own
+peculiarities and these are what set all people apart.  With some this
+creates love.  With other people, only hate."
+
+She took all her view of him as he spoke and she wished that he was a
+Sedash, like herself.
+
+"I don't hate the Sedash, and I do like you."  he resumed.  "But
+because of our physical differences I would have difficulties in giving
+you the love that you seek."
+
+She let her head tip forward, her chin resting on her chest.  She
+understood exactly what Lloyd meant.
+
+"You are attractive, Lehnar.  You will find someone else.  That person
+will be much better suited for you than I could ever be."
+
+She glanced at the state-room door as they finally reached it.
+
+"Tell me, Mr. Bartlett ... is that young man a good king?
+
+Lloyd didn't respond.  His eyes were enough to question her about how
+she knew who they were.
+
+"My father knew the both of you from the very start.  The young one
+carried himself with great nobility, and you always look to him for
+approval."  she continued to reveal to him her knowledge of them.
+
+Lloyd quietly laughed as he answered her.  "Do you really believe that
+if my friend were a King that we would surely travel the trade route by
+caravan, rather than travel by foot?"
+
+"My father taught me, methods can often be misleading."  she said.
+"Then there is that strange and powerful weapon that your friend
+carried.  It is not the compliment of an intellectual."
+
+Lloyd took Lehnar's chin in his hand and gazed deeply into her eyes.
+
+"You certainly are an inquisitive one!"  he said to her, trying to
+sound praising.  "We will talk more of this tomorrow.  I will then
+explain to you who we are.  Now it is late and we both better get some
+rest."
+
+She smiled with acceptance and Lloyd kissed the back of her hand.
+
+She left him as he entered the state-room and realised for the first
+time since he was standing with Lehnar that there were no guards.  He
+momentarily became concerned for Boyce's safety.  He looked about the
+dark room until he saw him reclined upon one of the divans.
+
+Boyce was still in the state-room.  It was obvious that he had been
+there all this time without being bothered, but it mildly confused
+Lloyd that Boyce didn't notice that he was left unguarded.
+
+He quietly shut the door to the room and began to remove his tunic.  It
+was then that he noticed, under the crack of the door, light and the
+movement of feet.
+
+One shadow crossed the light, but only one.
+
+He bent down and looked along the floor under the crack of the door and
+saw the callused feet of one guard on each side of the door.
+
+Lloyd now knew for certain that they were no longer as safe as he hoped
+they were.
+
+He quietly went over to Boyce and touched him on the shoulder.
+
+Boyce got up quickly and before he had a chance to say anything, Lloyd
+hushed him.
+
+"We're in danger, Boyce."  he whispered.
+
+"I know!" Boyce replied then closed his eyes in sleep again.
+
+Lloyd was surprised by the answer but he remained quiet.
+
+Boyce was capable in observing dangerous situations.  Afterall, he
+noticed the problem with Grenadine so Lloyd now trusted him all the
+more.
+
+"We have been watched every moment since we arrived here.  There are a
+few guards below our window and tonight, at the theatre I overheard
+some of the Sedash speak of their festival."  Boyce's keen senses
+picked up much as Lloyd discovered in his whisper.
+
+"We have at least two guards at the door!"  Lloyd informed him and then
+told him about Lehnar's mention of their suspicions about Boyce being
+king.
+
+"They have rescinded the contract!"  Boyce stated and Lloyd nodded
+affirmatively.
+
+"What now, Boyce?"
+
+Boyce eased back and looked at the shadows dancing on the ceiling.
+
+"Festival begins tomorrow night."  Boyce started.  "That gives us
+several hours to sleep.  This is my suggestion, for now."
+
+"Sleep?" echoed Lloyd, questioning.
+
+"If we're to run tomorrow, we don't want to run tired."  said Boyce.
+"You taught me that!"
+
+He smiled at Lloyd and wished him an easy and fulfilled sleep, and both
+quickly nodded off.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWENTY-TWO
+
+It wasn't until mid-morning when Lloyd and Boyce finally awoke.
+
+Boyce stretched and went to the window, catching sight of several
+guards marching back and forth, occasionally looking up at their window.
+
+Boyce smiled at Lloyd and pointed down to the ground.
+
+He went back to the table and sat down.
+
+"Well, Lloyd!  What should we eat?"
+
+Lloyd smiled at the ease by which Boyce took the situation and he
+leaned over the table to him.
+
+"You're calm enough to eat?" he asked.
+
+"We need strength for later.  So, while we still have this mock service
+from these people, we should accept it in our own mock way.
+
+Lloyd grinned from ear to tear then went to the door and opened it.  He
+thrust his head into the hallway and told the astonished guards to
+bring some food and drink to the room.
+
+It would be very difficult to leave the room this day.  They had to
+wait until dark before they could try anything but dark was many hours
+away.
+
+Dam Lehnar came around in the afternoon dressed in a snug, short white
+dress with open shoulders, and she sat about with the two men for
+several hours listening to Lloyd making up more details about who they
+were and where they were going.
+
+Finally, Lloyd took her hand and told her that all that they had told
+her was nothing but lies.  He told her that they were sorry for lying
+to her but it was a matter of their safety and need to stay alive.
+
+Then came a want for a favour.
+
+"You told me the other night that you loved me?  If you do, let us go.
+Help my friend and me to escape the festival opening tonight."  he
+asked her.
+
+"How do I help?  My father has me watched, too!"
+
+"Try to get our supplies to us and before the guards come, to take us
+to the stages, divert their attention and we will try to make out way
+out of the city."
+
+"I may be able to get most of your things." she promised them. "I can't
+recover your weapon, however.  My father carries it with him."
+
+"We don't care for the weapon as much as we care to take our leave from
+the city."  said Boyce.
+
+There was silence in the room for a moment and Lehnar soon stood up.
+
+"I promise you both that I'll see what I can do!"
+
+With this Lehnar left the state-room and the two men sat back and
+waited.
+
+Sunset was just a couple of hours away and Lehnar had been gone since
+the thick of the afternoon.
+
+They were worried that she either couldn't get their supply packs or
+she went against them by telling her father about their plans.
+
+Regardless of their anxieties, however, they waited for her to come
+back to them.
+
+As the sky began to darken and the hours quickly gained speed, and
+Boyce and Lloyd became more restless and nervous.   However, their long
+agitated wait was rewarded, for Lehnar had finally come back to their
+room with just one of their packs.  The pack was Lloyd's and much of
+what was inside was still there.  Only the telescope and its case was
+gone but the change of clothing and the maps were still inside.
+
+Lloyd kissed Lehnar and thanked her.
+
+Boyce had also kissed her hand.
+
+"Thank you so very much, Dam Lehnar!"  gleamed Lloyd.
+
+"There are no guards at your door.  I told them that I will watch you
+both and that you would still think that they were outside the door."
+she said to them.  "Leave the palace through the garbage chutes and
+make your way in the shadows of the fire alley."
+
+"Thank-you for your help, Lehnar."  Boyce said graciously and she
+smiled.
+
+"That alley will take you to the southern plateau and don't stop until
+you have reached the Divider's Ridge.  My people still stop their
+pursuit there, if they will follow you at all."
+
+"You are as helpful as you are beautiful, Dam Lehnar!"  Lloyd
+complimented her.
+
+"Take care, my friends!"  she said, and the men made their way out of
+the room and down the
+
+hallway to a closet door, and they found that they inside of the closet
+had no floor.
+
+Lehnar came out of the room and after Boyce, and Lloyd, jumped into the
+hole, she closed the door behind them then went to her own room.
+
+They hit bottom in a pile of rotting fish.
+
+"This stinks!" Boyce acknowledged.
+
+They looked around themselves trying no to breathe as they saw the
+mouldy pieces of bread and meat and other food-stuffs that have been
+down there for a good lengthy time, which only God could know for
+certain.
+
+They exited the garbage stores and found themselves in a narrow passage
+with an open ceiling.
+
+This must be the fire alley that Lehnar spoke of, they thought, and
+bent down low, they slowly but steadily made their way down.
+
+A quarter-hour later they were at the end of the alley, and to each
+side of them they saw the walls of the city extending in a forbidding
+manner.
+
+It was very dark now and only the stars were giving the men enough
+light to run by.
+
+The plateau spanned kilometres before them, and in the distance they
+saw the small rise that Lehnar called the Diviner's Ridge.
+
+They ran and kept running.  Silently they covered countless meters of
+ground with each breath that they took.
+
+They had to make it quickly to the ridge but they also had to watch the
+ground for holes and crevices.  If one, or both, were to fall into one
+of them, they would surely be caught and returned to Sedara.
+
+Behind them they now heard a great commotion and the city of Sedara
+became lit up like a sun.
+
+Trephor was looking for them and they knew it.  They were both tired,
+almost to the point of expiration but they wouldn't stop, lest they be
+caught.
+
+It was very dark, and although the stars shone enough light to guide
+them to their destination, they couldn't tell very well if they were
+being chased by Trephor's army.
+
+Sedara, behind them, emitted substantial light to produce silhouettes
+of anyone following them, but because of the size of the outer walls of
+the city, the two men couldn't see their pursuers until they were
+almost upon them.
+
+Their hearts beat heavily within their bodies.
+
+The pounding was hard and they soon wondered if their hearts were
+moving around in their bodies.  First their chests throbbed, then the
+sensations moved to their stomachs and legs, then into their necks and
+head.
+
+Over and over they were becoming weary and they felt like only the
+beating of their hearts had been pumping their legs the few extra
+kilometres to the rise.
+
+Boyce looked back and then saw that they truly were being pursued.
+
+With heavy breaths that wheezed and gagged he told Lloyd that they were
+being chased, but Lloyd kept his head about his and was steadfast.
+
+"Just a little further, my friend!" he urged.
+
+"I'm with you!" Boyce assured him, in three short gasps.
+
+With strength summoned from the deepest recesses of their souls, they
+began to run faster and steadier, and the ridge that was once distant
+began to move closer and closer with each
+
+successive stride that they took.
+
+Behind them, the light of Sedara shrank and the stars revealed a small
+cloud moving in the same direction as the men.
+
+The cloud was Trephor's army.  Some were on horse-back but the major
+part of it was made up of infantry, running as the men ran.
+
+The faster that Boyce and Lloyd had run, the lesser ahead they thought
+that they were going.
+
+Lloyd turned his head for an instant and saw the small hermaphrodite
+army, in hot pursuit, gaining ground with every second that expired.
+
+In his heart Boyce prayed that they could make the crest of the ridge
+before they passed-out, and there it was.  The ridge.
+
+"Oh God, lend us strength!"  he gulped to himself.
+
+The sounds of horses and feet grew louder and louder.  The
+hermaphrodites were nearly upon them.  Abruptly the men lost the sounds
+of the army as they lost their footing and they plunged into a drop in
+the ground, then lost consciousness.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWENTY-THREE
+
+When they came to the sun was already high in the sky.
+
+On his back, Lloyd looked up at the sheer face of a cliff some dozen
+meters in height and the way that he now felt, he knew that the climb
+up would be difficult.
+
+Boyce was lying on his stomach and he was regaining consciousness,
+too.  He soon tried to push himself up off the ground and this he
+tried a few times.
+
+Lloyd heard him finally stagger to his knees and he called to him.
+
+"Boyce!"  he said.  "Are you hurt?"
+
+"No -- just a little sore!"  he replied.
+
+"Look at that!"  Lloyd pointed to the cliff and upwards.
+
+Boyce looked at it then he said the same thing pointing in the opposite
+direction.
+
+Lloyd looked and there he saw rolling mountains and shrubs and deep
+gullies of rock.  What he saw was the tail end of the great Krolalin
+Mountain Range that swung down from the north to the south-west.
+
+They made it over the Divider's Ridge, and the Sedash troops did not
+pursue them.
+
+Still feeling somewhat exhausted, Lloyd and Boyce didn't eat anything
+when they awoke.  They saw that it was late in the morning and they
+still had a long way to go before reaching Pomperaque.
+
+They kept their pace steady as they headed south, keeping to the ridges
+along the route which they were taking so as not be vulnerable to
+possible ambushes if trapped in one of the dry river beds.
+
+The sun was beating down on them and they found the heat very intense
+and uncomfortable; yet, between the Dark Forest and Sedara, it was a
+welcomed blessing of peace to them.
+
+They gained a good distance as they walked and observed the nature
+around them; amazed at God's handiwork.
+
+Boyce saw a black bird flapping from tree to tree. He wondered if it
+was a crow, having seen a couple other crows throughout the journey,
+and when he heard its mocking caw, he knew it to be so.
+
+"Lloyd?"  Boyce began. "Do crows travel in groups, pairs or singularly?"
+
+It was an odd question, thought Lloyd, but he did see the crow and he
+knew that so did his friend.
+
+"I really don't know!"  he admitted.
+
+"Do you think it could be the same crow from the mine?"
+
+Lloyd shrugged, not caring one way or the other.
+
+The day slowly passed by while they hiked through the countryside, and
+night was only a few hours away.
+
+Boyce had told Lloyd that it was to their benefit to stop this day's
+travel early and rest longer for tomorrow's walk.
+
+On his advise, they stopped beside a trickling brook and built a small
+shelter and a fire, and had their first meal of the day.
+
+They were both tired but they knew that they could not rest until
+they've reached Pomperaque, and indeed until Boyce regained his
+rightful position in Phoride.
+
+They slept under the breezy, starry sky and were blessed with peaceful
+dreams that put them both apart from hate and struggle.
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY-FOUR
+
+For the next two days the men took to walking quickly and for long
+periods of time, without any rest.
+
+They would wake, have some food then head south to Phoride, and they
+wouldn't stop walking until it was almost pitch dark night.
+
+They only had one pack between them and they took turns carrying it.
+Every several hours that elapsed, one would hand the pack to the other
+while they walked.
+
+They were making good time and were covering long distances with each
+day that they walked.
+
+They never stopped to eat food, they ate while they walked until they
+reached the Serpent Strip; the land of the leper race.
+
+In the three days that Boyce and Lloyd travelled from Sedara, they
+covered over one hundred eighty kilometres (a remarkabl sixty
+kilometres per day, of walking).
+
+The men cast their eyes on the city of Palatka, sitting in the distance
+on the floor of the Serpent Strip.
+
+It wasn't an impressive city, made up of squat clay buildings that were
+cube-shaped. Yet, there was something about the whole place that made
+Lloyd and Boyce feel very ill-at-ease.
+
+Boyce thought that they felt that way because of the hermaphrodites'
+renegging on their agreement passage, signed with Besten.  He was
+afraid that the Palatkans would be the same way.
+
+Lloyd was more optimistic about this leg of their journey.  He told
+Boyce that he shouldn't jump to any conclusions about trusting the
+Palatkans.  Nevertheless, Boyce was hoping to convince Lloyd to circle
+around the Palatkan territory.  He argued that going around the Serpent
+Strip would only take an extra day's journey, but he believed it would
+be peaceful, as-well-as uneventful.   His other argument was the notion
+that they could replenish their supplies with wild fruit and they could
+kill game for food, along the way.
+
+Lloyd finally agreed to Boyce's prodding suggestions and seeing that
+his judgement for such things, throughout the course of this trek, was
+indeed good.
+
+Off to one side of the rock mound on which they stood they found an old
+lion's den.  There they secreted their pack and they went to sleep.
+
+The trip would be more or less uphill for a while since the Krolalin
+Range split into two parts; a smaller chain running all the way south
+to Pomperaque and its three rises of land surrounding it: Bimini Hill,
+Canon's Butte and Mount Benitar.
+
+They knew that they were close to their destination, now just a week's
+journey away.
+
+They weren't going to take the chance that the Palatkans would turn on
+them, as well.
+
+Tomorrow they would circle the strip, endeavouring to avoid further
+injuries and wear to their bodies.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWENTY-FIVE
+
+It was in the morning during the men's second wave of sleep that was
+coming over them in the before-dawn hours, that a cawing shriek was
+heard coming from overhead.
+
+The sun wasn't out yet, although it wasn't totally dark.
+
+The men had, at least one hour of sleep left to them before they were
+to wake and make their way around the strip.  At first they tried to
+ignore that squawking but it soon became so frantic and intense that
+they could no longer bare it.
+
+Boyce's slight affection for the single crow he had seen flying around,
+during their journey, was quickly waning and he quickly sat up to see
+where it was and shoo it away.
+
+He opened his eyes and saw six male figures standing around the opening
+of the den.
+
+"Lloyd, we're surrounded!"  Boyce screamed out to him and Lloyd quickly
+sprang to his feet when he saw them.
+
+"Lloyd!"  Boyce called out and Lloyd answered him quickly.  Boyce
+continued.  "This is getting ridiculous!"
+
+"I would say so!"  replied Lloyd.  "We should've thought twice before
+charging our friends, here!"
+
+The men took their capture in stride with the rest of their delays, and
+Boyce laughed.
+
+"Under the circumstances I couldn't see being cordially invited."
+
+One of the hunters poked Boyce in the ribs with the end of his club and
+Lloyd watched.
+
+"I guess that means silence?"  Boyce jested.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce were quiet while the leper hunters took them into the
+heart of Palatka.
+
+Hung in discomfort, they heard the sounds of life get louder until they
+saw buildings and people pass them on each side while they were carried
+deeper into the heart of the city.
+
+The haul into the city finally ended and they were dropped to the hard
+ground, and plumes of dust lolled about their heads.
+
+When the dust settled from in front of their faces they saw a pair of
+scabby and puffy, sandled feet before them.
+
+Each man slowly leaned backwards as far as they could and looked up at
+the tall body of a heavy set man, dressed in plain-looking robes and he
+was fanning himself from the heat.
+
+"Release them!"  said the leper and several of the hunters cut the
+ropes and the two captives got up from the ground beating themselves
+clean from the dust in their clothing.
+
+"Thank-you!"  said Boyce.
+
+"Yes!"  echoed Lloyd.
+
+They looked at one another for a long time, then the Palatkans that had
+them released spoke.
+
+"I am Urre, ruler of this race!"  he said then proceeded.  "I will ask
+you why you attacked my men?"
+
+Lloyd and Boyce glanced over at each other and Boyce spoke.
+
+"We seek forgiveness for that aggression!"  he said and the Palatkan
+ruler waited.  "We slept on the hill and when we woke we saw your men.
+Unaccustomed to seeing Palatkans, we undertook to defend ourselves.  We
+are sorry!"
+
+Boyce finished and Lloyd felt ill because of Boyce's statement about
+the Palatkan's appearance.
+
+Urre had an insulted expression and from behind him came a sedate and
+shy voice.  It was a man's voice yet it was very gentle.
+
+"Are you the travellers from Besten?"  asked the man.
+
+"Yes!" answered Lloyd.  "I am Lloyd Bartlett and this is my friend and
+apprentice, Boyce Loebh."
+
+"They are the ones we have agreement, to let pass through Palatka!"
+said the man.
+
+"Hold your tongue, Munsen!"  ordered Urre.  "They had broken their
+agreement with their attack upon our people."
+
+Boyce and Lloyd looked at one another, realising that they were in a
+predicament.
+
+"Take them to their cells." ordered Urre.
+
+Several Palatkans grabbed Boyce and Lloyd, and dragged them off to one
+side of the city, to the cliffs of the canyon where huge dungeon-like
+cells were made for Palatkan prisoners.
+
+They were cold and dingy rock cubes, barren of anything on which to
+rest on and to keep warm with.
+
+The cells smelled musty and there were unrecognizable things written
+on the walls and ceiling, and some were even seen on the floor when
+the layers of dust were kicked up by the men's pacing.
+
+"You should never have said that we weren't used to Palatkan
+appearance!"  Lloyd scolded Boyce then sighed.
+
+"I was being honest with them!"
+
+Lloyd put his hand on Boyce's shoulder and tried to console him, from
+his error.
+
+"It's alright, Boyce.  Maybe we can talk to Urre and see if we can
+apologise properly."  He moved away and looked out of the hole in the
+rock door.  "Until then, we should make the best of this place."
+
+"It is so cool in here but outside the heat is blistering!"
+
+"Wait until his evening.  It'll be worse in here."
+
+Lloyd came away from the door and leaned up against one of the walls
+and huddled himself into a ball.
+
+"Better get some sleep now because it will be too damned cold to sleep
+later tonight!"  Lloyd instructed Boyce and he went down on the floor
+and tried to sleep.
+
+It was difficult but they finally managed to fall asleep and after
+sunset, Munsen came to them with offers of warm blankets and a hot
+broth of cooked fowl.
+
+He called to them several times and Boyce finally got up and went to
+the rock door.
+
+Lloyd also had gotten up and went to the door.
+
+"I am Munsen, the high-priest of Life."  he said to them.  "I was told
+that you will be in our rituals of Life and Energy, after-tomorrow."
+Munsen told them.
+
+"I will make a tough meal, my friend!"  Lloyd promised to him.
+
+"You know of our ways, then?"  Munsen urged for clarification.
+
+"Yes, we do!"  Boyce said. "Would there be any way for us to appeal to
+Urre, to honour the passage agreement?"
+
+Munsen looked down and shook his head.
+
+"I am afraid that our Lord Urre had never intended to allow you
+passage."
+
+Lloyd and Boyce glanced at one another and Lloyd sighed.
+
+"You were right, Boyce!"
+
+"I had brought for you blankets and hot broth to drink.  Your cells
+will be unbearably cold by dark, and these should help!"
+
+He pushed the blankets through the hole, followed by the large amphora
+of broth.
+
+"I am truly sorry that it's not very much, but it is all that I could
+get for you!"
+
+"At least we'll be more comfortable before we die!"  Lloyd commented in
+a sarcastic tone of voice.
+
+"Please don't!"  pleaded Munsen.
+
+"I am sorry!"  Lloyd was apologetic, realising that this man was really
+and sincerely trying to be kind.
+
+"Listen!"  he told them.  "Long before we had your Bestenese Emissary
+come to have us sign the agreement of safe passage, I had a
+dream-vision about it and about you."
+
+Boyce and Lloyd eagerly listened to the man.
+
+"I saw that Urre would not honour the agreement.  Now, I set in motion
+a plan to throw him down from power if you did come and if you were
+captured.  You came and you were captured."
+
+"What is your plan, Munsen?"  requested Boyce.
+
+"I have many friends that are, at this very time, arming themselves
+for our attack tomorrow.  If we succeed in destroying Urre's rule, you
+will be given supplies and be allowed to go freely, and in peace."
+
+"What if the overthrow fails?"  Lloyd had wondered listening to Munsen
+speak.
+
+"I have other friends that will risk their lives to free you, if the
+rebellion fails."
+
+"Why?"  Boyce was confused momentarily and he needed to be given a
+reason why someone, who they didn't know, would die for their release.
+
+"I had seen the doom and destruction of Palatka with your deaths, and
+so if you had but a hair harmed on your heads.  Palatka must have peace
+with you, Boyce Loebh; yet, I don't exactly understand why?"
+
+Munsen's reply fit into the men's understanding.
+
+Somehow Munsen knew these prisoner's importance and he knew that their
+harm would mean the extinction of his civilization.
+
+"We engage our uprising tomorrow.  When you hear commotion and
+thunderous booming, keep low to the floor.  We have found a way to make
+a burning substance that is explosive.  It can shatter rock and kill."
+
+"Please take care and may the true living God bless your victory."
+
+"If we believed in Him, I would hope that it would be so!"  Munsen said
+and before he left he told them that he would try to see them once more
+before the battle, and then he left them.
+
+"He has a leader's compassion!"  Boyce stated.
+
+They wrapped themselves up in the blankets given to them and they drank
+the broth.
+
+They fell sleep and the blankets helped to keep some of the chill from
+them and they managed to get some sleep, though uncomfortable as it
+was.
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY-SIX
+
+A beam of dusty light shone into the oubliette of the murky rock vault
+in which the men were being kept as prisoners for tomorrow's ritual of
+Life and Energy.  Some of the sun's rays moved across Lloyd's face and
+he turned his head away before he opened his eyes.
+
+He gave a deep and hollow sigh that gurgled from the catarrh that
+settled in his chest, from the night spent on a cold and damp floor.
+
+He opened his eyes and watched the sunshine glisten off the frosty rime
+that painted the walls and ceiling of the cell.
+
+He gave Boyce a few pats on the back and he soon woke up in a similar
+condition.
+
+"Do I look as bad as I feel?" he asked Lloyd.
+
+"I could ask you the same!" he replied.
+
+Lloyd slowly got to his feet, not a single part of his body escaping
+the rheumatic cracks that such adverse sleeping conditions bring upon
+one.
+
+Soon, Boyce attempted to stand up, too and his condition was not much
+different that Lloyd's.
+
+He let out an exasperated gasp as he stood up, half hunched-over.
+
+"Oh!" he moaned.  "You would think that Palatkans would want to eat
+healthy people!"
+
+"I could use another ewer of that hot fowl-broth, that Munsen brought
+for us last night."  Lloyd mentioned as if hoping that someone would
+hand him some through the hole in the cell door.
+
+"My sentiments ..."  echoed Boyce.
+
+Both of them simultaneously began to bend and move their arms
+frantically, and then their legs.  They didn't miss a part of their
+body that ached.  They had to exercise themselves or else the arthritic
+pains would never leave them.
+
+Later, each of them took turns basking their chests in the rays of
+sunlight that penetrated into the cell and soon they were both able to
+breath freer, and more easily.
+
+"I'd rather be eaten than spend another night in here!"  Boyce offered
+the statement as something easy to think about, but it turned to annoy
+Lloyd's own thoughts and fears about it all; he had taught Boyce about
+the fact that the Palatkans cut up and ate their victims alive.
+
+He still kept that fact to himself, needing Boyce's strength of
+ignorance to keep himself from going mad.
+
+The sun was higher in the sky and they waited for someone to come and
+bring them food, assuming that prisoners were also allowed to eat.
+
+Then their relief finally came.
+
+A hooded Palatkan priest walked up to the vault door and gave each of
+the men a small pail of broth and a long stick of bread.
+
+"Munsen conveys his best wishes and a hardy appetite."  said the hooded
+man then he came
+
+closer to the hole and whispered to them.  "We shall let you go free
+very soon, friends.  Do not worry!"
+
+The message was brief and strong, and with the wholesome food given
+them, they believed that they soon would go free.
+
+The silence was disquieting in the city and Boyce and Lloyd both knew
+that it was now or never, that the uprising would be put into action.
+
+They waited eagerly and they could see that the day was slowly losing
+time, the sun already disappearing overhead from their view.
+
+Then it happened.  Near the centre of the city, a plume of hot red fire
+and smoke of purple, black and blue, rose in force up into the sky,
+with the roar of a hundred thousand thunders.
+
+Screams soon followed the sounds of buildings crumbling and the men
+watched the citizens of Palatka running about aimlessly, caught up in
+the uprising between Urre's army an the high-priest's advocates and
+friends.
+
+On the flat top of one of the cubed clay buildings stood Munsen and he
+hollered into the midst of the city towards Urre's palace.
+
+"Give us honesty, purity and freedom! Give us your life and we shall
+spare your families!"
+
+He lifted a cylindrical package into the air and put an ember to it,
+then threw it.
+
+Momentarily, a great whoosh was heard and dust and rock spewed all
+about the area and towards the cells, to where Lloyd and Boyce watched.
+
+They dove to the floor and covered their heads, but in short order
+looked up at one another.
+
+"That's why he told us to keep down!"  yelled Boyce.
+
+"I presume so!"  Lloyd returned.
+
+They looked to the cell door and saw a hair-line crack running down the
+centre of it.  Boyce touched the crack then pointed to it after he
+nudged Lloyd with his elbow.  Lloyd followed to where Boyce pointed and
+nodded his head.
+
+"We'll be free ... "  Lloyd began. "providing we have a couple more
+blasts like that one, but let's get our backsides to that wall and keep
+close to the floor!"
+
+"As Munsen said!"  Boyce grinned as he pointed out the obvious.  "If we
+had our electrophore-lasers, we'd be out of here a long time ago!"
+
+Lloyd lost the last few words that Boyce said.  Outside their cell was
+another blast.  This one was louder, and this time they heard the door
+start to give-way.
+
+Lloyd crawled towards the wall and stood up, edging close to the window
+to look out.  From his vantage he could see scores of Urre's archers
+shooting at their enemy, just below the palace battlements.
+
+Screams, explosions and sounds of stampeding people and animals
+continued through the afternoon and evening, and finally, very late
+into the night, the panic seemed to subside then totally fade away.
+
+The only sounds left were that of burning buildings and cracking rock,
+and the sounds of the Palatkan multitudes crying and moaning.
+
+The battle was over and the men wished to hear news of Munsen and
+whether his uprising was a success.  They were up on their feet and
+both peered out of their cell window. They watched the city burning and
+the people's attempts to bring their small holocaust under control.
+
+It didn't happen right away, but following a quarter hour watching the
+scene, both had realised that there was no sound except for the
+physical movement of the citizens.  No one cheered.
+
+There was no one making speeches or announcement.  There was no one
+about shouting direction for the people to mount their rescue of the
+city, from fire.
+
+The fires were the priority, and the bandaging of the seriously hurt in
+the fighting.
+
+The sky was illuminated by the blaze of the fires. When the night gave
+way to the sun's morning rays, there was hardly notice that a new and
+majestic day had begun.
+
+For many hours, Lloyd and Boyce kicked at the hair-line crack in the
+cell door but couldn't smash it in two.  They couldn't get free and in
+the quickly approaching daylight they knew that there was no hope.
+
+Soon after the sun rose in the distant end of the Serpent Strip, and
+the two men were morosely seated on the dusty cell floor, the door fell
+open and there before them stood three Palatkans.
+
+The two young women each had a horse by its' reigns, in one hand, and a
+large travel pack slung around their arms.
+
+The same young man, who had brought for them the previous morning,
+stood before them now with a golden goblet of wine in each hand.
+
+He handed a goblet to each man and they held them for a moment,
+silently waiting for something to be said.
+
+At the edge of a burned out clay building, a crow was picking at a
+piece of garment showing under a pile of large rocks.
+
+It didn't caw of flap its wings nervously, but Boyce had seen it just
+the same, and he pointed to it, never saying a word.
+
+In the eye of the young leper man, a tear was forming until it was
+finally born onto his cheek
+
+and trickled into the dry crusts of his face.  He kneeled before the
+two men.
+
+"That was our friend and leader, Munsen.  His own sacrifice assured,
+for us, the death of Urre."  he told them and they listened, very
+saddened.
+
+"What is your name, my friend?"  Boyce asked him.
+
+"I am called, Virgil!"  he answered.
+
+"Rise up, Virgil, and rule this place with peace and compassion.  See
+life and all its energies for what they really are.  Make your own
+power and forces of life, through love, compassion and trust ... and
+never again will you need to eat human flesh in hopes of attaining it
+all."
+
+Virgil rose to his feet and looked at the two men, in such a way as one
+master would look with respect to another.
+
+"We drink to Munsen and his vision of peace."  hailed Boyce and he
+lifted the goblet to his lips to drink.
+
+Lloyd touched his forearm but Boyce shook his head slightly, then
+nodded at Lloyd, to drink as well.  Lloyd complied with his request.
+
+"With the trust I show to you, in drinking this, which may otherwise
+have been poison, so it shall be a reminder of the trust that you will
+seek and find."
+
+"With all the power given me through my promise to Munsen, I now let
+you and your friend go freely and in peace, through Palatka."
+
+They bowed to one another and Virgil helped the men put the travel
+packs about their shoulders and then up onto the horses.
+
+They pointed in a southern direction to a pass that lead up through the
+cliffs of the canyon but before they urged the horses on their way,
+Boyce turned to Virgil.
+
+"The Palatkans truly are a beautiful people.  May you multiply and
+become a truly great nation."
+
+Boyce blessed his new and goodly friend then motioned to Lloyd to ride,
+and they kicked their heels into the horses and galloped towards the
+pass in the cliffs.
+
+Behind them, Virgil and the two young women watched them ride away, and
+the crow that had picked at the rocks, lofted into the bluish skyway
+and soon disappeared.
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY-SEVEN
+
+They rode the horses hard and steady, each day and in their five days
+of travel they managed to cover over seven hundred kilometres.
+
+The last five days, since they left Palatka were the safest and easiest
+five days of travel since the day they had left Besten.
+
+The horses were strong and they made good time. The few rests that they
+had along the way were enough rest for the horses, too.
+
+Boyce was pleased that Pomperaque was soon within his grasp and Lloyd
+was pleased that Manguino would soon feel his death, like the common
+man that he is.
+
+Ahead of them stretched the lush and friendly Joenine Forest.
+
+Each man could still remember the glen from which Empal helped them
+escape to Virune, then on to Besten.
+
+The beauty of Upper Phoride was just as Boyce had remembered it.
+
+"I know my way from here!"  he said to Lloyd as they slowly rode
+through the forest.  "Shall we go to the entrance of the Blue Mansion's
+underground passage?"
+
+"No!" Lloyd answered quickly.  "It would not be safe and it may draw
+unnecessary attention to us."
+
+"You are right."  Boyce agreed.  "We'll stop at Gothal for a while.  I
+must see if the Abbey Mother from the Abbey of Our Holy Saint Mariot,
+is still alive."
+
+"Is it wise to do so?"  Lloyd questioned.  "I mean, she may now be a
+spy for Manguino."
+
+"Lloyd, she believes in the same God as we do.  She always has and she
+dislikes Manguino.
+
+Lloyd sighed and soberly warned Boyce.  "You'd better be right, Boyce.
+We've come too far to be stopped now."
+
+They rode some more and near the late afternoon of their fifth day out
+from Palatka, the two men spotted Gothal and its main, and most
+majestic monastery, the Abbey of Our Holy Saint Mariot.
+
+It rose out of the ground like a living being.  A refuge across the
+crystal River Clains, that crossed their path before them.
+
+"There must have been rains here, recently."  noted Lloyd.  "The river
+has swelled some and is moving faster!"
+
+"It's so lovely this way."  was all that Boyce care to respond.
+
+"That it is!"
+
+They rode towards the river and slowly proceeded to cross it.
+
+They were on the other side of the river and there they briefly stopped
+to take-in the beauty of their surroundings.
+
+Suddenly, the horses beneath them were frightened and they bucked,
+without warning, and several men came out of nowhere, and proceeded to
+beat on Lloyd and Boyce.
+
+In a nearby tree, was a crow, as dark as midnight, and it squawked and
+cawed when the men got to the other side of the river, and it watched
+the other men attack.
+
+In frenzied excitement it eyed the struggle that took place at the
+river's edge, and its shrieks were echoing throughout the entire forest.
+
+Caught unawares, and while weakened by their journey, the ambushers
+knocked both men unconscious and took all of their possessions,
+including their two horses, and their clothes.  The left them both
+naked, lying unconscious and bleeding, half in the water and half on
+the river's bank.
+
+The crow left the tree and went to where the two men were sprawled.
+It crowed and flapped its wings around Boyce's head, and began to tug
+at his hair with its shiny beak.  Some bloodied hair hung from the
+crow's beak, but there was no movement from Boyce.
+
+They lay in the water for some time until several women came walking
+along the river from Pomperaque, leading a cow.
+
+The women were members of the Abbey.  Three were abbey sisters, the
+full nuns, and with them walked two novices.
+
+They were discussing the good fortune of their being gifted a cow by
+the Prominent, Miel, in the market that very morning.  Then they heard
+the frantic crowing and one of the novices looked for the origin of the
+noise and saw Lloyd and Boyce, motionless at the river's edge.
+
+She ran to the bodies and turned one over onto its back. Her eyes
+opened wide and she could not believe the beauty of this young, but
+badly injured man.  She checked his body for broken bones and severe
+cuts.  She did the same with the other body, taking the same care
+inspecting it until the other novice and the three nuns came to help
+her.
+
+She returned to the gentle handsome man, the younger of the two.  She
+put her ear against his
+muscular chest and sighed with relief when she heard his heart beating.
+
+"This one is still alive!"  she said as if relieved.
+
+"This one, as well!"  the others confirmed about Lloyd.
+
+The pretty novice ripped her plain white dress and wet it in the river
+then wiped the young man's cuts and bruises.
+
+He stirred but never came to.
+
+The other novice ripped her dress, too, and rendered care to the other
+man.  The third nun looked around, keeping a vigil in the event that
+those that did this to these two men might return and inflict further
+harm upon all of them.  She held onto the rope that was tied around the
+cow's neck.
+
+"We have to take these men back to the Abbey, my children!"  the first
+nun told them.
+
+The other non-avowed, with her big beautiful eyes, questioned the
+safety of doing such a thing but the nuns accepted taking the men back
+to Gothal.
+
+The crow was still hopping around Boyce's body but the young novice
+didn't chase it away.  She helped the other four women lift the men
+onto the cow and they took them back to the Abbey, inside of Gothal.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWENTY-EIGHT
+
+One day passed by and the men were still in an unconscious state, just
+as they were in part of the following day.
+
+Since the late afternoon, when the five women found the men, the novice
+first to be at their care, stayed and watched over them -- especially
+Boyce.
+
+She counted away the hours while they just lay there, pale and unaware
+of existence.
+
+It wasn't until the middle of the afternoon of this second day that
+Boyce stirred and the young novice was there. She wet a clean cloth and
+wiped the sweat from his head and face, and watched him slowly open his
+eyes.  As she went to wipe his face once more, he took her hand into
+his own and felt its delicate softness.
+
+"Can you hear me?"  she asked him in a whisper.
+
+"Yes!" said Boyce and he tried to get up but the couldn't.
+
+"You will be alright soon, but now just relax."
+
+He looked around the room, which he was in, and on a window ledge he
+saw the crow that he had been seeing since they left Besten.
+
+He couldn't take his eyes off the novice and he touched her face once
+more.
+
+"I am real!"  she told him.  "My name is Lilith."
+
+"You are very beautiful, Lilith!"
+
+She smiled at him.
+
+She was happy that he liked her appearance because, since that day when
+she found him and his friend, by the river, she was in love with him.
+
+"My friend?"  he asked her.
+
+"He is fine.  Some sisters are looking after him!"  she told him and he
+smiled, taking her hand.
+
+"This is the abbey, then?"
+
+"Yes!"  she answered.
+
+He held her hand and lapsed back into a deep sleep after sighing with a
+relieving breath.
+
+"What are you called?" she asked him but he didn't reply.
+
+She kissed his hand that clutched her's.  She kissed him on the
+forehead, too, and stayed with him for another night.
+
+Lilith was slumped on the floor beside the bed.  She was asleep but she
+was still holding on to Boyce's hand.
+
+Boyce stirred and opened his eyes.
+
+He was sore all over and his head throbbed.  He touched the small gash
+on the side of his head, with his free hand, then he became aware of
+the hand that he was holding.  He looked down to where the pretty
+novice was, her face resting on the bed, like a sleeping angel waiting
+for a waking kiss.
+
+He stroked her hair and her cheek until she, also, finally woke up and
+accepted his gentle caresses.
+
+"How do you feel today?" she asked him, getting up off the floor and
+sitting at his side, on the bed.
+
+"I can imagine how Grenadine feels!"  he muttered.
+
+"What?" she asked him but he never answered.
+
+"You are Lilith?"  he checked and she nodded.  "I am Boyce!"
+
+She smiled at him.
+
+"Boyce!"  she repeated.  "That's a beautiful name!"
+
+"In comparison to yours, Lilith, mine is but a name like barren dirt."
+
+"I am flattered!"  she thanked him with shyness.
+
+"I, also!  To wake to a beauty such as yourself is indeed a blessing
+from God."
+
+"You have been unconscious for a couple of days now.  Do you remember
+what happened?"
+
+He looked around the room and saw a crow perched on the window sill
+outside.
+
+"It was strange, but we crossed over the River Clains and I heard that
+crow making a racket."  he told her and pointed at the crow. "Suddenly,
+several men came out of nowhere and the next thing I know I'm gazing
+into your lovely eyes!"
+
+She took his hands and pressed them into her own.
+
+"You'll be fine, in a day or so.  Then you'll be well enough to get out
+of this bed and walk about."
+
+A knock came at the door then it opened.
+
+One of the sisters that helped to find the men brought into the room a
+fairly large tray full of food, and she helped Boyce to sit up for
+eating before she exited the room.
+
+Lilith sat closer to Boyce and gently began to feed him.
+
+"Are you hungry, Boyce?" Lilith inquired.
+
+"Yes, I am!"
+
+Boyce enjoyed the attention being paid only to him by this wonderfully
+beautiful girl, and as the day carried on and his feeding was done, she
+sat by his side and spoke with him about all manners of things.
+
+In the late afternoon, when Boyce was telling Lilith about his life in
+Besten, the door of the chamber slowly opened and Lloyd walked in.
+
+Boyce saw him and forced himself to sit up.  He smiled.  He was happy
+to see Lloyd and, at that moment, was also happy to realize that his
+trust in the women at the abbey was warranted.
+
+Lloyd had his left arm in a sling and his open tunic revealed a
+bandaged chest.
+
+"Did you hurt yourself, my friend?"  Boyce asked him, sarcastically.
+
+Lloyd smiled and he soon saw that Boyce had no bandages around him.
+
+"How are you faring?"  Lloyd asked him, looking at Lilith.
+
+Boyce took Lilith's hand into his and smiled at her as he answered
+Lloyd.
+
+"I am fine, but I was told I should rest for a day or so!"
+
+"I was told the same!"  admitted Lloyd.  "But I am older and must keep
+moving lest I become immobile."
+
+"Next time, we'll fly!"  Boyce joked with his friend and they both
+laughed.
+
+A nun marched into the room and put her hands on Lloyd's shoulders and
+turned him around to face the door.
+
+"Out of bed, again!  I did ask you nicely to stay in bed and rest.
+Didn't I?  Now come with me!"
+
+She nagged at Lloyd for leaving his room, obviously not being the first
+time he did so and both Boyce and Lilith laughed as they watched her
+parade him out the door.
+
+"You have a strong friend in ... Lloyd, is it?"  she said, making
+certain that she remembered Lloyd's name correctly.
+
+"During times like these, one must be strong."  he told her, putting
+his hand around her waist.  "He is my right arm, and I am his!"
+
+The crow was still outside the window but it was now no longer quiet.
+It squawked and pecked at the glass of the window pane and they stopped
+speaking and looked at the bird.
+
+They were annoyed at being disturbed in such a manner but Lilith didn't
+show her aggravation.
+
+"Your pet seems disturbed about something!"  Lilith said to him.
+
+"It's not my pet!"
+
+Lilith became puzzled and told him that she and the other four women
+found it hopping around on the ground and on his back when they found
+them.  They presumed that the crow was a pet and let it come to the
+abbey with them.
+
+"Let it in!"  Boyce told her and she slowly went over to the window and
+opened it, pushing the swinging pane enough to let the crow hop in.
+
+It stretched its wings and cawed then flew right to Boyce and hopped
+around on his lap.
+
+"It's a very strange bird, I think.  I haven't seen many crows, only a
+few during my childhood, then I see this one throughout my entire trip
+from Besten."  He told Lilith, about his odd feelings towards the bird
+and the sudden affinity that seems to have formed between them.
+
+"Lilith, will you push that small table over here?" he requested to her
+and she didn't hesitate to do his bidding.
+
+When she brought the small table to the side of the bed, he took the
+crow on his wrist and set it down on the table.
+
+They talked and watched the bird make a joking spectacle of itself and
+this continued through to the evening when Lilith collected some of the
+dirty compresses that she used on Boyce when he was unconscious.
+
+"I must leave now, Boyce.  The Mother Abbes had given me chores to do
+when you are well enough to be let alone."
+
+Boyce lost the smile that he had on his face.  He rolled his eyes and
+gasped while he stretched out his hand to her.
+
+"But, I'm not well, Lilith!"  he cried to her, hoarsely, and she
+laughed at his sweet attempt to keep her near to him.
+
+"You are a very silly man."  she told him then went over to him and
+kissed him on the forehead.  "You're sweet, too!"
+
+"Will I see you later?"  Boyce asked her in a solemn voice and he took
+her hand.
+
+Smiled and nodded.
+
+"You will be on your feet tomorrow and we can walk in the garden."  she
+promised and he kissed her hand while he gazed right into her
+beautifully large brown eyes."
+
+"Sleep easy and may your dreams be sweet!"  she said.
+
+"They will be sweet ... I will dream of you!"
+
+Her heart was beating heavily and her quick breaths passed through her
+like burning spears when she made her way out of the room.
+
+She felt uplifted, as if she was no longer of mortal body but of
+spirit.  She knew that Boyce was beginning to feel for her; it was the
+same as she felt for him, at the river, and saw his face.
+
+Inside the room, Boyce continued to stare at the doors through which
+Lilith exited and the crow beside him bounced up and down, flapping its
+wings and crowing in its unusual 'zoar-caw, zoar-caw'  manner.
+
+"She's a gem, crow!"  Boyce spoke aloud and the crow continued its
+usual, strange squawk.  "I am pleased to see that you agree with me."
+
+He let the crow sit on his arm and he looked at it for a silent moment
+before it continued to caw.
+
+"You are a strange bird, crow, and you sound strange, too.  Shall I
+keep you as my friend?"  he spoke to the bird as if he believed it
+could understand him, and the crow cawed back to him as it balanced
+itself on his arm.  "Alright."  Boyce continued.  "You are now my new
+companion and my friend.  Now, what shall you be called?"
+
+He looked at the bird, in an odd way as if wanting the bird to tell him
+its name, but the bird just crowed at him: 'zoar-caw, zoar-caw'!
+
+"Very well, crow.  I will call you Zoro!  Do you like that?"
+
+The crow stopped cawing and bounced up and down on his arm.
+
+"Now sleep, bird.  We have a great day before us!"
+
+He set Zoro on the table and he slowly sank down into the bed and fell
+asleep.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWENTY-NINE
+
+When daybreak came, Boyce didn't hesitate waking and getting out of his
+bed.  He made his painful way to the window and looked out onto the
+majesty of Gothal.  Below him many nuns were already awake and working
+on the vegetable gardens, and fruit groves. Over to one side was the
+flower and tree garden and there was a group of nuns maintaining its
+beauty through their trimmings and cultivating.
+
+Lilith walked into the room and Boyce slowly turned around to greet her.
+
+Zoro only looked at her when she came in.  He was very quiet and
+squawked only once when he sensed someone at the door, but otherwise,
+he didn't make a ruckus.
+
+She wheeled a small cart into the room, laden with a variety of foods
+for Boyce to dine on.
+
+"Will you eat with me?" he invited her in.
+
+"Yes, thank-you!"
+
+They spent a long time eating breakfast then, when they were finished,
+Lilith had Boyce get
+
+back on the bed and she looked him over once more to make certain that
+nothing was at fault with him.
+
+"I'm just a little sore now, that's all.  I can walk!"  he informed her.
+
+She helped him put some clothing on himself and she showed him around
+the abbey; through the school and chapel and through the library.
+There they heard Lloyd having an aggravated discussion with a nun,
+about the poet, Djenaud Smarte.  This made Boyce laugh because he knew
+that Lloyd didn't think very highly of that particular poet.
+
+Lilith knew that the opposite was true of Sister Rhonta and she could
+hardly keep from laughing, herself.
+
+"Listen to them!"  exclaimed Boyce.
+
+"Does Lloyd dislike Smarte as much as Sister Rhonta admires him?"
+Lilith asked him.
+
+"It certainly sounds like it!"  he said then listened some more to the
+highly vocal discussion between his friend and the sister.
+
+Soon, however, Lilith lead by the hand, to the garden and there they
+walked about for several hours and told one another some other about
+themselves then they sat on a marble bench in a cosy gazebo.
+
+Boyce had fallen into a mutual love with Lilith and each of them were
+aware of it.  Now, however, was the first time that they had voiced
+their feelings and no one else was anywhere in the garden to disturb
+them, accept for Zoro, quietly watching them from a tree top.
+
+"I love you, Boyce!"  Lilith revealed to him and he gently embraced her.
+
+"I love you!"  he also admitted, and they embraced each other's wanton
+bodies and kissed each other's lonely lips for the first time.
+
+Their time together was brief and yet their love for one another bonded
+them together so strongly that their spirits became fused as one.
+
+Boyce felt dishonest in keeping most of the truths about himself, from
+her, and he now decided to tell her every detail and account of his
+life, and why he came to Phoride.
+
+Lilith also told Boyce more about herself revealing to her love that
+she was the daughter of the Laurentine Consul, Debran.  To keep her
+innocent and safe of monastic validations, he left her at the abbey
+before going on to Pomperaque.
+
+Boyce learned that this young man was more than just a beautiful, dark
+hair and dark-eyed novice, waiting to turn seventeen so that she may
+take her vows and become a full fledged nun of the abbey.
+
+That was a wish of her father, Debran.  The only way to save her from
+the lustful designs of some carnal coenobite at Halls, was to have her
+become a simple and uninteresting sister.
+
+
+CHAPTER  THIRTY
+
+A week passed by and although Boyce and Lloyd had recuperated they
+didn't make plans to leave Gothal and its peaceful atmosphere.
+However, near the end of the second week, both Boyce and Lloyd were
+visited in their dreams, by the spirits of Brook Scullion-Blue and
+Dearborne.
+
+To Lloyd, Brook's vision reminded Lloyd of his promise and his destiny
+to help Boyce attain his rightful place as the Lord Sovereign of
+Phoride.
+
+Boyce's vision urged Boyce to leave Gothal and take Pomperaque and the
+rest of Phoride, away from Manguino.  To that vision urged by Brook,
+Dearborne urged Boyce to hold Lilith close to his heart and to take her
+as his wife; his Lady of the Blue.
+
+Boyce conveyed his dreams to his beloved Lilith and he asked her to be
+his wife.
+
+With all he heart and spirit, she promised herself to Boyce, as his
+wife.
+
+In the days following the proposal, Boyce and Lloyd made plans to enter
+Pomperaque and how they would begin their recruitment of the common
+people to Boyce's side.
+
+The plans were finalised and two days before they left Gothal, the
+Mother Abbess married Boyce and Lilith, in a private ceremony performed
+at the tomb of Brook and Dearborne.
+
+With all their love shared between each other in their consummation of
+marriage, Boyce promised to return for her when his duty was
+accomplished and his invasion of Phoride was successful.
+
+He did not want to leave her and her heart couldn't let him go but
+Lloyd promised Lilith that he would watch out for Boyce and she somehow
+knew that Boyce would be safe.
+
+Lloyd found it difficult to leave Sister Rhonta.  Their utter
+differences of opinion towards Djenaud Smarte brought them close
+together to a point that resembled love for one another.
+
+Although such things weren't permitted of the full ranking nuns, Rhonta
+gave Lloyd a kiss before the two left for the gates of Pomperaque, not
+very far away.
+
+They were given their old clothes and some dirty travel packs full of
+clean clothing, food and two sacks full of copper and gold coins.
+
+They looked like they travelled for years from some unknown place on
+the world, to Pomperaque.
+
+On the morning of their fortnight's stay at the Abbey of Our Holy Saint
+Mariot, the men left the abbey for their short walk to Pomperaque.
+
+The five women who brought them into Gothal also watched them leave and
+the Abbess Mother, Mariot, blessed them in their promised mission and
+its hoped-for success.
+
+
+PART  II:  THE BIRTHRIGHT AND THE SCEPTRE
+
+
+CHAPTER  THIRTY-ONE
+
+Patches of wispy-like clouds passed over the moon, in the humid night
+sky.
+
+Pomperaque was unusually quiet this night and the star-gazing Cardinal
+Orren had noticed it.  He also felt ill-at-ease, this night.
+
+With pale blue eyes he looked at the moon for most of the evening and
+after midnight he saw an odd sight in the northern skies.  It was a
+vision that he did not want to accept.  At first he thought that his
+tired eyes were causing the vision but the corresponding feelings that
+he had when he saw the strange sight, made him take notice, and he
+reported it to the ArchBishop.
+
+Orren was one of the most trusted Cardinals in Manguino's legion of
+coenobites.  He had all the qualities of his late father, Cardinal
+Allen, and this was fitting, as he was the great sainted cardinal's
+eldest of thirteen sons.
+
+Cardinal Orren had gained the favour of the ArchBishop, not only
+because of his decent from Allen, but he had saved Manguino's life
+when some oppressed peasant attempted to kill him several years ago.
+
+For his reward, Orren was given the command of Phoride's armies and he
+became somewhat of an administrator, in place of Manguino.
+
+He resembled his father, Cardinal Allen, so closely that many were led
+to believe that when Allen died, his soul entered into the body of his
+first-born son, Orren.  With this belief came Orren's high honours and
+unquestioned obedience from those around him.  He was conscientious and
+he improved on Manguino's spy network, spanning the continent.  He
+wanted to know anything and everything about the other states and
+kingdoms, realising that Manguino's concentration on producing progeny
+with Eckma left his rule and life vulnerable to hostility.
+
+Now, Orren had never before played on his intuitive impressions
+concerning threats against the cleric rule, but this night had actually
+frightened him.
+
+It was late when he went to call on the ArchBishop Manguino, finding
+him in his usual circumstance with Eckma -- even that late at night --
+and being accustomed to it all, Orren didn't hesitate to reveal his
+vision to him.
+
+He pounded on Manguino's chamber doors until he was told to enter and
+while he watched his master, and Eckma, in the glass pool, he paced
+around them recounting the details of his vision.
+
+"I had been startled this evening by a sight in the sky, my Almighty!"
+Orren told him.
+
+"What kind of sight?" asked Manguino while he sucked on Eckma's neck.
+
+"I was watching the moon and from behind a cloud, I saw the Mons!"
+Orren revealed.
+
+"Now how is it, Orren, that you hadn't seen the Mons when there was a
+personal threat upon me?"  queried the ArchBishop.
+
+"Mons is an omen of threat to all -- not just to one.  It's an omen of
+war.  What's more, a great
+
+war.  I was not the only man to see the Mons.  Several others have seen
+them, too.  Peasants and Prominants, and some of our own Monks saw
+them."  Orren told Manguino.
+
+Manguino took Eckma's breast from his mouth and he looked at Orren with
+annoyed eyes.
+
+"Do the Mons tell of what kind of danger may befall us?"  Manguino
+demanded.  "If so tell me.  If not, find out!"
+
+Orren took all his strength to keep from showing anger against
+Manguino, then he spoke calmly.
+
+"The Mons are a portent of doom and destruction, my ArchBishop.  The
+visions came to us to warn us and to have us prepare for surprised
+aggression."
+
+Manguino listened to Orren but didn't feel threatened by what Orren
+thought he had seen.
+
+Manguino was certain that nothing would happen to his rule.  Jessuum
+Benitar promised him before giving him the puzzling prophesy:
+
+                "Tell those of your court, the Prominants, if you will,
+                 but never is it to be repeated to you, for on
+                 that day when that request is done, so should it 
+                 be the end of your rule in Pomperaque."
+
+
+Manguino remembered and he told Orren about it, but Orren didn't
+believe in Jessuum Benitar's words.
+
+"As long as I do not hear the prophets' words again, all will be well,
+and since I will not ask it to be read to me, I shall be safe."
+promised Manguino.
+
+"Do you believe in a prophesy that may have no merit and dispel that
+which your most
+
+trusted servant, and others, have seen?"  Orren was angered and spoke
+in a booming voice.
+
+Manguino bobbed in the water and Orren just stood there.  Both were
+quiet until Manguino came out of the water and wrapped a robe about
+himself.
+
+"How did you see the Mons?  Single, coupled, regimented?"  Manguino
+requested to him to tell more of his vision.
+
+"There were four separate apparitions, great one.  Each was a knight of
+his own colour -- black, red, white and ashen.  Each rode on a horse of
+their same colour.  They came from behind thin clouds, and made their
+way towards the city and its heart.  Yet, as they reached the roof tops
+of the city, they vanished."
+
+The account assured Manguino that nothing was amiss.  He knew, as well
+as anyone, that doom only came if the Mons were seen to ride through
+the main streets of the doomed city.
+
+He told Orren not to worry about the Mons, ensuring him that everything
+would be fine.
+
+"We are safe, as long as we don't become stupid, Orren."  Manguino
+calmed down.
+
+"Could I be granted the privilege to study that prophesy that Jessuum
+gave to you?  he made a small plea to Manguino and was to do so under
+the condition that he doesn't read the prophesy aloud!
+
+Orren also asked Manguino for his permission to mobilize the Phoridene
+Army, as a precaution, but this he wasn't given to do because of
+Manguino's belief that they were under no threat of overthrow.
+
+Orren left Manguino to continue his obligation with Eckma, and he was
+more disillusioned now, with Manguino's attitude, than what he was when
+he saw the Mons.
+
+He never went to sleep that night.  He had all his Generals meet with
+him in his own chamber, and with them, he decided to have the armies in
+battle-ready status, as a precaution.
+
+Orren had never proceeded against Manguino's orders and better
+judgement, but this time it was unanimously agreed between his men
+that, to be safe, they should pay heed to the Angels of Mons.
+
+
+The next morning was beautifully sunny and warm.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce had walked for about two hours, from Gothal, before
+reaching the northern gates of Pomperaque.  Pomperaque was truly
+different than they remembered it to be when they left it, some eleven
+years ago.  There were hardly any horses and carts in the city.  Most
+of the transportation was made up of large cumbersome cars, with
+wheels, that ran along metal tracks.
+
+The city was highly mechanized and all the machines were powered on
+electrical energy, and there were few things in the city that were
+old.  Everything was newly built and only a few years old.
+
+Some of the few older buildings in the city were the Halls Cathedral
+and the rundown, and abandoned Blue Mansion.  Also, the town square was
+just a renovated version of the old square and the men walked through
+it remembering the way it used to be.
+
+At the very spot where Brook and Dearborne were executed there was a
+marker made of precious metals and it was put there by the citizens of
+Pomperaque who never wanted to forget the two greatest people that had
+ever lived as Phoride's elite.
+
+It wasn't a large marker.  Manguino had forbidden that.  He also forbad
+the writing of specific sentiment, or the placing of names.  All the
+marker said:  "May they be forgiven in the next life."
+
+Zoro bobbed up and down while sitting on Boyce's shoulder and it cawed
+in a frantic manner.  Due to its behaviour, then men moved away from
+the monument and off to one side of the town
+
+square where there were many vendors busily selling items such as food
+and clothing, jewellery and home-stuffs.
+
+The men slowly walked from kiosk to kiosk and they checked some of the
+goods being sold until they finally came upon the kiosk where Empal had
+his goods displayed.
+
+The market brought back memories for Boyce; remembering the fun that he
+used to have when he was out with Dearborne.
+
+Empal's kiosk was in the same place as it had always been.  This
+brought for Boyce some degree of security and stability, and it also
+helped his confidence to go ahead with the plans that have been made
+for his retake of Phoride.
+
+Empal had seen the two men and was now finally relieved from the worry
+that he had for them throughout the passed month, since they left
+Besten.
+
+He knew that they were supposed to have arrived in Pomperaque long ago,
+having taken the shorter route, but he knew that there had to be some
+good reason and he was certain that they would be told to him.
+
+He saw the strange crow perched upon Boyce's shoulder and he saw how
+dirty and ripped their clothing was.  Other than their wandering
+appearance and their stale smell, Empal thought to himself the
+traveller's prayer of thanks, to God.
+
+They came up to Empal's stall and they stayed around there for a while
+choosing fruits that were the ripest and biggest for their price.
+
+"You have good fruit here, old man!"  said Lloyd, as he picked up an
+apple and bit into it.
+
+"Would you trade or pay money, for that?" asked Empal as he pointed at
+the apple.
+
+Zoro jumped down onto the stall, from Boyce's shoulder, and started to
+pick at some grapes
+
+and corn.  Empal waved it away and he looked somewhat annoyed.
+
+"We'll have that, which my bird began to eat, and a kilo of apples, and
+two pomegranates!"  said Boyce.
+
+"I don't wish to sound less than trusting, sirs, but I would care to
+see my payment first."  Empal stated while he looked at them with
+wariness.
+
+A huge monastic guard came to Empal's kiosk and glared at the two men,
+and Empal.  He saw the strange crow, now back on Boyce's shoulder and
+squawking at him.
+
+In a booming, but tinny sounding voice, the guard spoke to the
+strangers and Empal.
+
+"Do these men give you trouble, Virunese?"  he asked Empal.
+
+"No!"  he answered.  "I just wanted payment for my goods before I give
+it to them!"
+
+The guard looked to Lloyd, who took another bite from the apple that he
+had in his hand.
+
+"Pay the man, vagabonds!"  ordered the guard as he put his right hand
+on the case of his electrophore.
+
+He watched the younger of the two men throw a gold bit to Empal and
+Empal put on a half-happy, half-surprised expression, while he filled a
+small basket for them.
+
+The guard turned to Empal after he saw the gold coin thrown to him.
+
+"It would be wise not to judge strangers on their appearance, vendor.
+You never know what wealth you may accumulate from them!"
+
+The guard started to walk away and Boyce laughed a little to Lloyd and
+Empal, then the guard turned around once more and showed Empal a small
+triangular device, slowly rubbing his finger over it.
+
+"Don't forget to pay the tax cleric when he comes around."
+
+
+The guard continued to walk away from the stall and Empal filled the
+basket with the rest of the fruit that the two men ordered.
+
+Boyce cautiously winked at Empal and spoke to him in a taunting voice.
+
+"Old man ..."  he said.  "Where can my friend and I get lodging and a
+bath?"
+
+Empal stopped for a moment and looked around, then he pointed across
+the square to a small side-street.
+
+"Down that way is a tavern called The Lion's Skull Inn.  The owner
+should be able to put you up there for a few days.  Just tell them that
+Empal sent you."
+
+"We are greatly obliged ... Empal!"  exclaimed Boyce and he took the
+basket of fruit and they made their way around the square to the small
+street where the tavern was located.
+
+Boyce had thought it to be an odd sight, seeing some of the old
+familiar people, who were now older, still working their same kiosks,
+and some of the stage shows that he remembered were still exhibited for
+the people, but now just a little different and less spectacular.  Of
+course, he thought that they lacked spectacle value since he was now
+older.
+
+He turned around for a moment and looked towards Empal, standing with a
+tall Cardinal beside him.  The Cardinal was collecting the church's
+share of the tax.
+
+They made their way slowly to the tavern and when they got to it, they
+walked in and headed for the flat-table and he ordered a mug of cider.
+
+When the tender brought to him the cider, Lloyd stopped him and asked
+him for lodging.
+
+"Tender!  We are strangers in this city and we would care to stay here
+in the inn.  Empal, the vendor, said that you may be able to have us?"
+
+The tender was going to tell them that there weren't any rooms
+available, but Lloyd's mention
+
+of Empal's name, and the leer that Lloyd gave to him, made him
+reconsider.
+
+"I do have one room that you can both use.  I'll take you to it when
+you are finished here!"  he told them.
+
+Lloyd downed the cider immediately and the tender shrugged then showed
+them to their room.
+
+"My name is Cavander!"  said the tender as they walked up the stairs to
+a room at the end of the top hallway.  "If you want privacy, this is
+one of my best rooms."
+
+He lead them down the hallway then motioned for them to stop while he
+went into a large room, which was obviously his own, and brought out a
+large bundle of bedding.
+
+Once inside their own room, Cavander closed the door and looked at them.
+
+"I know who you are, and why you are here!"
+
+He kneeled to them and kissed Boyce's hand.
+
+"I'm your servant!"  said Cavander.
+
+"To your feet Cavander."  ordered Boyce and helped him to his feet.  "I
+will not be like Manguino to have men, who are in most cases better
+than he, to kneel before him."
+
+"I hope that we can trust you, and count on you for support!"  said
+Lloyd.
+
+"Whatever you ask of me I shall do, even if it means to lose my life
+for you!"  promised Cavander.
+
+"The main thing I ask of you, Cavander, is that you do not treat us as
+our status.  This I ask of you even so to the point of treating us as
+lesser than peasants."
+
+"It is important that you do this!"  added Lloyd.
+
+"I will do your bidding!" nodded Cavander, then he took the bundle of
+bedding and from
+
+inside it brought out a small cask and a smaller square box.
+
+He opened both containers and the two men saw their contents.  The cask
+was full of gold bits and the smaller square box had two
+electrophoric-laser guns, like those which they had lost.
+
+"You will need this while in Pomperaque, masters!"  Cavander echoed to
+them what Empal had told him they were to be used for.
+
+He was ready to leave their room after he made the beds for them, and
+he was about to open the door, he looked straight into Boyce's eyes.
+
+"We all loved your father and mother, my Lord!"  he said.
+
+Boyce nodded to him.
+
+"Yes, I know, Cavander!"
+
+Cavander sighed then left the room and the two men decided to sleep
+through part of the afternoon.
+
+
+By the time that dusk came around, Boyce and Lloyd were awake and they
+had a nice bath down the hall.  They dressed in clean clothes then went
+down to the tavern and had something to eat and drink.
+
+When they were dressing they discussed with each other their needs to
+start recruiting people and their only conclusions were to either risk
+being given away by some satisfied follower of the ArchBishop, or to be
+killed by some desperate sorts who would take them for spies or just as
+troublemakers.
+
+Their final decision was to start with the lower classed folk of
+Pomperaque; those who
+
+usually had to steal in order to survive.  These were the oppressed.
+
+Moreso than going down to the tavern to eat and drink, the two men went
+down to the tavern to flaunt their moneys and so to entice some
+criminal types to come and rob them.
+
+They weren't going to walk the streets of Pomperaque this night.
+Instead, as soon as they ate, and listened to some of the common folks'
+songs about the history of Phoride and its heros, they returned to
+their room and waited for their, hoped-for, late-night visitor.
+
+The moon had already traversed most of the night sky and morning wasn't
+too long from coming.
+
+It wasn't until about two hours before dawn that the men heard the
+sounds of uninvited guests entering their room.
+
+Boyce quietly took to the door while Lloyd slowly crept to the window
+and they both waited for the predicted rush that the visitors would
+make into the room.
+
+Then it happened.  Both door and window flew open and the expected men
+rushed into the room and dove onto the beds jabbing into them with
+knives.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce allowed the men to stab the beds for a while until they
+realized that there wasn't anyone in the beds.
+
+Now, Lloyd switched on their portable electric light and illuminated
+the bed and two scruffy-looking young men.
+
+"Trying to rob someone is one thing, killing is quite another!"  Boyce
+said to them and suddenly the two men rushed Boyce, thinking that only
+one of them was in the room and when they came very near, Lloyd
+punched the men and took their knives from them when they were on the
+floor.
+
+They rushed both men this time but Boyce and Lloyd's training to fight
+hand-to-hand, helped them to quickly subdue the two robbers.
+
+The four men just looked at one another while Boyce had them seated in
+a corner,  Lloyd covering both of them with what the men knew was an
+electrophore, of sorts.
+
+"Are you two the ArchBishop's spies?"  one of the criminals asked Boyce.
+
+"No, we're not!"  answered Boyce, then he took a small sack of gold and
+poured it out on the nearest bed.  "We are grateful that you accepted
+our invitation to join us here!"  he added to them.
+
+The two criminals looked at one another and they both knew that they
+were tricked into coming.
+
+"It seems to us both that you dislike the ArchBishop Manguino!"  Lloyd
+said to the two men.
+
+"We are not the only ones that feel his tyranny!  There are many, but
+only a few of us try to do anything about it, in whatever way that we
+can!"  the larger of the two criminals said in a voice that started to
+get louder.
+
+"Now there's no need to scream, my friend.  We are not unlike
+yourself."  Lloyd said to him and then he put away his gun.
+
+"We would like to hire your services and buy your loyalty!"  proposed
+Boyce.
+
+"Loyalty cannot be bought, but what do you offer?"  asked the larger of
+the two criminals.
+
+"We offer to you this gold,"  Boyce pointed to the gold on the bed.
+"and we offer to you honourable positions in the new government.  If
+you accept you must follow both of us blindly or else you will be
+killed.  If you do no accept we shall hand you over to the monastic
+guards and have you charged for whatever crimes you have committed, or
+even those you haven't committed."
+
+"You give us a hard choice."  said the smaller man.
+
+There was a brief quiet in the room while they all exchanged looks.
+
+"Hard choices ..."  Lloyd began.  "are often-times the choices most
+worth making!"
+
+The bigger criminal stood up and folded his arms upon his chest.
+
+"It seems we are inclined to accept your offer ... Masters!"  he said.
+
+"Very wise!"  Lloyd responded.
+
+" -- And in this new wisdom, you will be our compatriots and will not
+address us as master."  Boyce expressed his intent of partnership.  "I
+am called Boyce Loebh, and this is Lloyd Bartlett."
+
+"I am Mingo, and this is my brother, Bix."  said the larger man,
+pointing to the smaller man.
+
+"Mingo ... Bix;  a new era has dawned in Phoride with your
+acceptance to serve this man."  Lloyd said to them, regarding Boyce.
+"In the shortness of time you will be told all about this young man and
+our plans to depose the ArchBishop."
+
+Bix got up off the floor being helped by his bother.  They both turned
+slightly, and faced Boyce.
+
+"On this new day you have become honourable warriors -- the lieutenants
+of the only son of Brook and Dearborne Scullion-Blue -- heir to Phoride
+and the protector of the Northern United Alignment.  This is Boyce
+Loebh Scullion-Blue."  Lloyd finished.
+
+Mingo and Bix gawked at Boyce then kneeled as they whispered his name
+in surprise.  They new his great and respected name.
+
+"Do not kneel, my new friends!  We are all equal in the eyes of God.
+In battle, don't fight for me, but fight for the freedom of Phoride and
+for your families -- as I will fight for the same.  And from this time
+forward call me only by the name,  Boyce."
+
+"We pledge our lives to you, Boyce!"  Mingo and Bix hailed Boyce as
+they slowly stood up.
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY-TWO
+
+Pomperaque woke up and Mingo had left Boyce and Lloyd's room, with
+Bix.  They had denied themselves the gold offered by Boyce and they
+set out to meet many others like themselves, to encourage them to join
+Boyce's cause.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce caught themselves a few hours of sleep between the time
+that Mingo and Bix left, and Empal came to their room.
+
+Empal had come to the room in order to receive his instructions from
+Boyce concerning the finalization of the invasion plans. He had also
+come to tall Boyce about the blue Mansion, since he wanted to know if
+it was possible for him to purchase it.
+
+Empal came to their room that day carrying a large basket of fresh
+fruit, as if he was delivering the fruit to a buyer, and he woke them
+from their sleep.
+
+When Lloyd let Empal into the room, he embraced both Lloyd and Boyce
+and welcomed them properly back into Boyce's city.
+
+When the formalities of welcome were observed, the two men sat with
+Empal and ate the fruit that he had brought along with him, while Boyce
+listened to Empal's detailed first report that was assigned to him
+before they left Besten.
+
+"The Blue Mansion has been sacked by Manguino's vermin before your
+parents' bodies were even laid to rest."  Empal told Boyce.  "The great
+building has been left unattended and abandoned since the time of their
+death, and although it had been put on the market, there has been no
+one interested in buying it."
+
+The needed information that Empal was reviewing for Boyce, was
+depressing but Boyce was satisfied to hear that the Blue Mansion could
+still be his home.
+
+He was strangely happy in realising that his old home was still his and
+available to him, but even though he legally held it as his own, to
+keep Halls from knowing who he was, he would have to buy it.
+
+Empal was glad that he had finished giving his report.  Now he could
+have his two friends recount their journey to him and possibly explain
+to him the reason for the tardiness of their journey from besten.
+
+Boyce and Lloyd didn't leave out a single detail about their trip.
+Unusual as it was, Lloyd told of their meeting of Grenadine and his
+reactions to her.  He told the story with such honesty that there was
+almost a feeling of melancholy in the room when he finally came to
+telling Empal about her death.
+
+Empal could see, in Lloyd's face, that the woman called Grenadine had
+really left her mark on Lloyd's heart and he sympathised with him.
+
+On the other extreme of Empal's sympathy for Lloyd, so was Empal's
+ultimate delight in
+
+hearing the news of Boyce's marriage and to such a girl like Lilith;
+daughter of a Laurentine Consul.
+
+Empal had envied them, listening to their adventures and their
+victories over danger and evil.
+
+He had mentioned to them that he wished that he was young, like them,
+so that he could've made the journey with them.
+
+"We would have cherished your company!"  was the statement that Boyce
+made to Empal's wish, and it was enough to make Empal feel the
+importance that he held with both Besten and Virune.
+
+"What of the Nolunge and Flinnd?"  asked  Empal.  "Did those two
+peoples let you pass through their lands or did they go back on their
+word, also?"
+
+Empal questioned with curiosity, since they told him that Sedara and
+Palatka both rescinded their signed agreement of passage with the
+Northern United Alignment.
+
+"Everything was smooth with those two nations.  They are learned and
+cultured peoples and they honoured the treaty."  said Lloyd.
+
+"Yes!"  Boyce added.  "And I would like to send to them a token of
+appreciation after Pomperaque becomes rightfully mine!
+
+It neared noon when Lloyd and Boyce decided to mill around the town and
+finally go to Halls for a look around the lands-office.
+
+Empal left them and returned to his stall where he opened it to public,
+later than usual.  Oddly enough, no one had really noticed his late
+opening since it was an off-day for market and there weren't as many
+people buying goods in the towns square.
+
+When Boyce decided to go to Halls, he and Lloyd split up.  They did
+this for two reasons, namely; to keep anyone from possibly recognizing
+Lloyd, and have one supporter free to come to the aid of the other if
+there arose a situation where one might be imprisoned.
+
+Lloyd had a task to do, which was to save time for him and Boyce, from
+having them to do it together.  This task was the locating of Miel and
+Cassta -- two of Brook Scullion-Blue's most trustworthy and loyal
+friends.
+
+Boyce had hoped to seek out these men and persuade them, and their
+families, to follow him into forming a new rule that would prevent a
+monastic institution from governing the land.
+
+Lloyd's job was just to find these men's residences and make a brief
+observation of whether, or not, the men and their families could still
+be loyal to a Blue rule.
+
+Boyce, with Zoro on his shoulder, slowly made his way up Canon's Butte
+with his travel pack containing a small cask of gold bits.  When he
+reached the top he looked at the enormity of the Halls Cathedral, which
+touched the blue sky above him.
+
+The front gates were open and there were hordes of people walking
+about, doing business.
+
+At the gate sat a notary vicar and he had all those who entered the
+cathedral state their name and reason for going in.
+
+Boyce went in and the vicar stopped him and asked him to return.  Boyce
+did as he was asked; the vicar wanted Boyce to sign in the visit logs.
+
+"What is your name?"  asked the vicar while he stared at the crow on
+Boyce's shoulder.
+
+"I am Boyce Loebh!"  he answered promptly.
+
+"What is your business here?"
+
+Boyce smiled and looked around when Zoro cawed a few times.
+
+"I am here to see the estates Cardinal.  I would like to buy some
+property on which to live."
+
+The vicar looked at Boyce suspiciously then proceeded with the
+questioning.
+
+"You don't have a request for an audience with our estates Cardinal.
+If you care to wait, he may be free to see you!"
+
+"I will wait!"  Boyce exclaimed, then he went over to a tree where a
+long rock post had fallen-over, and he sat on it.
+
+The notary vicar rang a small hand bell and a young novice ran to the
+desk where the notary sat.  He was given a slip of paper and some
+instructions.  He ran off into the Cathedral's quadrangle and not too
+long after that, ran back with a slip of paper that he handed to the
+notary.
+
+The notary vicar looked over at Boyce and Boyce noticed it.  He got up
+the fallen post and walked over to the notary.
+
+"It will be a while but the estates Cardinal will see you."  the notary
+vicar told Boyce.
+
+Boyce leaned over to him then pointed over to the post where he was
+sitting before.
+
+"Tell me when he'll see me.  I'll be over there!"  he said then slowly
+made his way to the rock post and then reclined on it.  Zoro stood
+watch on his chest.
+
+The wait wasn't very lengthy and soon one of the novices came over to
+him and woke him up.
+
+"It's your turn!"  the novice informed him, and taking his pack with
+him, Boyce entered the Cathedral grounds, following the novice and
+ending up at the door of the lands-office.
+
+The boy left him there and knocked on the door before entering, not
+caring to wait for permission to do so.
+
+The office was strange-looking for a lands-office.  It had two floors
+and was full of books on both floors.
+
+In the middle of the office was a rather large table where the estates
+cardinal was sitting with
+
+his nose in a large book in which he was writing something.
+
+He finally looked up from his book after Boyce sat down in a chair
+opposite him and Zoro jumped down on the table in front of him.
+
+Overhead, standing against a railing, on the second floor, Cardinal
+Orren looked down at the strange young man and his even stranger pet.
+He wanted to hear what this wandering fool wanted in his office.
+
+"You are Boyce Loebh?" the estates Cardinal asked him.
+
+"Yes!"
+
+"How can we be made of service, Mister Loebh?"  the Cardinal asked him.
+
+"I am looking to buy some property with a habitable building on it.
+What I am seeking, is something that is quite large."
+
+The Cardinal looked at him for a moment then stood up and went to a
+flat shelf and brought back a large portfolio of sketches.
+
+"I have here some twenty sketches of sturdy buildings on good property.
+ Of course, most are probably out of your wealth capability."
+
+"I would like to see whatever you have available regardless of the
+cost!"
+
+"Very well!"  submitted the cardinal and he handed Boyce the archaic
+looking portfolio.
+
+Orren, from above had grown a little more suspicious and mistrusting of
+Boyce.  What's more, Orren detested Zoro's presence.
+
+Boyce was dressed in clean clothing and he didn't smell as bad as when
+he first stepped into Pomperaque with Lloyd.  He really loved his
+loyal women in Gothal for giving their dirty clothing back to them.
+It was that necessary little detail which helped to cause confusion in
+many people's eyes.
+
+For sure Orren didn't understand how a rogue like Boyce could be so
+unaffected when he was told that he would most likely not be able to
+afford that which he sought.
+
+Boyce went over every drawn likeness of the houses that were available,
+seeming quite uninterested in any one of them, including the Blue
+Mansion, which has had passed over.
+
+"They are all well and nice, Cardinal, but I am searching for a large
+place with atmosphere.  I, and my friend, are artisans and scholars,
+and we were hoping to use such a building, in-part, to expand your own
+Blaisaman;  where we could teach the arts and other human studies."
+
+The Cardinal sat down, at his side of the table, and questioned him
+further about his proposed academy.
+
+"Do you have a license to teach in Pomperaque?"
+
+"Not as of yet.  I was planning to come tomorrow to inquire about a
+license."  answered Boyce with an odd confidence that, in a way,
+inspired the Cardinal.
+
+This same confidence inspired Orren in another ways -- it made him
+angry.
+
+Orren had read the prophesy given to Manguino by Jessuum Benitar and
+somehow he felt that maybe this man, below him, had something in common
+with it.
+
+"I am planning on bringing to Pomperaque many diverse people from all
+over the continent."  Boyce let the Cardinal know.  "I am personally
+fond of philosopy and I would like, at the very least, half of the
+building to be devoted to that topic."
+
+"Very well, Mister Loebh!  I can only suggest one place that could be
+large enough to house such an academy.  But I must inform you, that if
+you want it, you must also buy the all the land on which it stands!"
+
+If there is plenty of land, reasonably priced, I would be happy to take
+it.  We need the land to display works done by our students of
+sculpture."  said Boyce.  "Can I see a sketch of this land and house?"
+
+The Cardinal laughed a little and Zoro cawed, and bobbed up and down.
+
+"You have seen the drawing already!"  the Cardinal informed him, and he
+took it out from the portfolio and handed it to him.
+
+"I passed this by because it doesn't seem large -- in the drawing, I
+mean!"
+
+"Come with me and I will show you the real size, Mister Loebh!"
+
+The estates Cardinal stood up and so did Boyce.  He led Boyce up a
+spiral staircase to the second floor and Zoro flew to the top railing
+beside Orren.
+
+Zoro was spooked by Orren and he quickly flew to a window on one end of
+the floor.
+
+Soon Boyce and the estates Cardinal arrived at the same window and the
+cardinal asked Boyce to look to the far side of the valley.
+
+"The rise, over there, Mister Loebh, is called Bimini Hill.  The entire
+mount and the Mansion which stands on it was once the estate of several
+sovereigns of Pomperaque and Phoride."  the cardinal said to him.
+
+Boyce looked out the window, mainly to play along with the Cardinal but
+also it was the first time that he saw the majesty of the Blue Mansion
+in this vantage point.
+
+"Oh, yes.  I saw that place coming into the city, but I didn't realise
+that it was the same land as on the sketch.  You are right.  I probably
+couldn't afford to but that."  Boyce stopped for a moment to look out
+the window the continued with a simple curiosity.  "How much is the
+lands-office asking for it?"
+
+"Seven hundred gold bits."  replied the Cardinal.
+
+"That is a great deal!"  exclaimed Boyce.
+
+"Seven hundred gold bits is for the Mansion and the land on which it
+stands!"
+
+There was quiet again, except for Zoro's occasional 'zoar-caw'
+squawking, and then he flew out of the window, towards town.
+
+Cardinal Orren peaked through a shelf of books that touched the
+ceiling, and he saw Boyce quickly turn to the estates Cardinal and nod
+his head to him.
+
+"I think that I will buy it then!"  he ejaculated.
+
+"Good!"  said the Cardinal.  "Let us go down to my table and write up
+the papers!"
+
+He took Boyce back down to his table, and while making their way down
+the stairs the Cardinal asked Boyce in what manner he would be able to
+pay.
+
+They stopped on the spiral staircase and Boyce took the cask of gold
+from his pack and opened it for the Cardinal.  The cardinal was amazed
+and pleased.
+
+Above them both, Orren looked at the gold with surprise and contempt.
+He felt certain that the crow man was not to be trusted.
+
+When the papers were drawn up and Boyce counted out seven hundred gold
+bits to the Cardinal, he left Halls Cathedral and headed for the Blue
+Mansion, with his key.
+
+Before he made his way up the path to the Mansion, he first stopped at
+the inn and had a drink while he waited for Lloyd.
+
+Lloyd soon came into the tavern and sat down with Boyce, at a table.
+
+"Did you buy it?"  he asked him.
+
+"It was easier than I thought it would be!"  he said, showing him the
+key.
+
+Lloyd smiled at Boyce.
+
+"I found our friends' homes and I overheard the younger man, Cassta I
+believe it was -- saying to someone that he was getting tired of this
+life in Pomperaque and he was planning on moving to the Elkinnii Plains
+and live there!"
+
+"Good!"  sighed Boyce.  "We still may be able to get the numbers that
+we need within the city."
+
+"I had seen Mingo, earlier, and he told me that he had convinced a
+dozen of his peasant friends and relatives to join us.  They are out,
+this very moment, looking for more of the oppressed to come in with us."
+
+Boyce smiled with delight.  He was happy because he had the Blue
+Mansion back and now the throng of peasant farmers that are willing to
+risk their lives for Boyce, son of Brook Scullion-Blue.
+
+"If we can get Cassta and Miel to our side, they may just be able to
+get for us the Prominants that we need to join us."
+
+Boyce had much hope and belief in his father's friends.
+
+He would truly feel the power of a ruler, if those men served him as
+they served his father, he thought.
+
+Cavander approached the two men and asked them if they wanted anything
+more to drink, or if maybe they were hungry.
+
+"No!"  said Lloyd.
+
+"You can help us, however, if you have some time and friends who would
+like some work for a few hours!" inquired Boyce.
+
+"What do you want done?" he sarcastically asked.
+
+Cavander was playing in the way that he was asked to act before Boyce,
+treating them as lesser humans.
+
+"Now, Inn Keep.  There's no need to bite off our heads!"  Boyce
+commented.  "All I want is some help to move into my new house."
+
+"And what new house may that be, may I ask?"
+
+Lloyd was having a good time listening to the performing that Boyce and
+Cavander were doing and a few times he could hardly keep from laughing
+a little.
+
+"It is the house on Bimini Hill!" he exclaimed with a proud smile.
+
+Cavander was delighted beyond words when he heard that the heir to
+Phoride had successfully reacquired his own estate.
+
+"How do you come by purchasing that?"  asked Cavander in an extremely
+agitating voice that was really beginning to bother Boyce.
+
+"I had gold -- so either say that you will give me help, in my moving
+into the house, or take your leave from me!"
+
+Cavander smiled but only a trifle.  He knew that he had actually
+annoyed the son of Brook Scullion and he also knew that he could not
+give him an apology while in public.  He had, therefore, kept the
+taxing down, from that point onwards, and agreed to have a few men help
+him whenever he needed them.
+
+Boyce and Lloyd made their way up to the Blue Mansion, after Cavander
+had agreed to give them help.
+
+It wasn't a long way to walk to get to the Mansion's door, but the once
+gradual path leading
+
+up to the top of the hill was now rugged and grown over with
+vegetation.  The entire property was like this, from lack of use.
+
+For a decade, since the executions, no one had been known to go up to
+the Mansion.  Even coenobites had, for some reason stayed away from it.
+ But it didn't matter now, because it was all Boyce's again.
+
+They had finally made their way to where it all first happened.
+
+Boyce's heart beat faster and faster, the nearer that he came to the
+door.
+
+"Here it is, Lloyd!"
+
+Lloyd saw Boyce's excitement as he put the key into the lock and turned
+it.  He also felt a certain presence looming over the entire hill, as
+soon as they set foot upon it.
+
+For Lloyd, this place had a different meaning then it had for Boyce.
+For him it meant the extension of his life which may have been cut
+short before he even had a chance to realize what life was.  It meant
+the love and the admiration that he had for Brook and Dearborne, and
+this place was a reminder of evil's earthly triumph over good, through
+death.
+
+"Would you have ever believed that I'd be back here?"  a tear issued
+from Boyce's eye as he spoke and Lloyd cleared his throat, trying to
+keep from Boyce his own feelings about it all.
+
+"It was predestined, Boyce!"  he said then touched Boyce's shoulder to
+urge him to open the door and enter the house.
+
+Boyce hesitated for a moment longer then smiled a little, and with a
+sigh he opened the door.
+
+There was a sudden but slight whoosh at the door, as air rushed into
+the vacuum of the house.
+
+It was dark and quite cool inside the house, in comparison to the
+intense heat outside, on this
+particular day.  There was also a foul smell within which would have
+been more suitable for a
+
+slaughterhouse.  It was sour-like odour mixed with the linger type of
+stink of boiled chicken feathers.
+
+They walked into the huge entrance hall and looked around the bare grey
+walls, and at the cracked ceiling covered with cobwebs.
+
+"No wonder no one had come here since it was closed up!"  said Boyce,
+his voice echoing far into the distant rooms, along with the clip-clop
+that their boots made on the solid wood floor.
+
+"With enough helpers it won't take us long to make it liveable, Boyce."
+
+Boyce nodded as he heard Lloyd's sentence carry throughout the
+mansion's vast number of rooms.
+
+They walked further through the mansion going from the kitchen, to the
+ballroom, Dearborne's old parlour and to Brook's private den.
+
+Every room, every corner of the great house was the same.  The house
+was empty and stripped of anything of value, and of anything without
+value.
+
+Blue-green lazurite no longer adorned the walls.  There were no more
+crystals hanging from the ceilings, no more carpets were on the floor
+and there were no sculptures left in the hallways.
+
+Only years of dust could be seen inside with the shells of hundreds of
+dead insects and arachnids strewn all over the place.
+
+The windows of the mansion were still intact but they were so yellow
+and dirty that barely enough light penetrated into the interior, let
+alone having anything seen through them.
+
+Lloyd took a knife from his belt and began to scrape some of the years
+from off the panes of glass in Brook's viewing den.
+
+Shrieks echoed throughout the massive structure, as the dirt gave
+resistance to the knife grinding into the glass, but soon the windows
+of the den were cleared of dirt and the light of the afternoon sun
+shone through the cloud of dust suspended before the window.
+
+Boyce jabbed Lloyd's knife into the seams and catches of the window and
+then pried it open with a creak that seemed to force itself into their
+very hearts.
+
+They just stood there and looked at the once beautiful room that was
+nothing more than a void now.  Absolutely nothing was left in the house
+after the monastic sacked it.
+
+"Manguino is truly a mad dog warranted of dying!"  said Lloyd.
+
+"This was such a beautiful place, once!"  was Boyce's only response.
+
+Suddenly their came a loud shriek at the window and it made both men
+jump back in fright.
+
+"Zoar-caw!"
+
+Both men sighed when they saw that it was only Zoro perched at the
+window.
+
+"It's only Zoro!"  said Boyce.  "I wondered where he's been all
+afternoon!"
+
+While Lloyd and his friend looked over the house and decided what they
+needed to clean up and move in, Cardinal Orren was making his own
+assessments.  His assessment, however, was not of buildings, but of the
+two strangers that came to Pomperaque, from the north.
+
+"I had finally received a report from some of our spies in Besten, and
+I found out that these two men had left Besten a little under a month
+ago."  Orren said to the ArchBishop.
+
+The ArchBishop sat in his chair, at his desk, in his office as he was
+asked to by Orren for the meeting with him today.  Orren wanted the
+meeting this way because he was tired and somewhat repulsed, by seeing
+Manguino and Eckma fornicating, almost every time that he spoke to
+him.  Now Orren knew that he had Manguino's attention, and he listened
+to Orren.
+
+"Since they've left Besten they walked south west then disappeared
+until they were seen passing through Flinnd on horseback.  Now they
+had entered Pomperaque, apparently to stay!"  continued Orren while he
+tried to find fault with the two strangers from Besten.
+
+"Fine, Orren.  I agree that we should not trust these men but I can't
+understand why we have to be this fearful of them.  How can two men
+pose us a threat?"
+
+In his typical way Manguino had once again failed to see a potential
+danger.
+
+As in any nation, the greatest threat, almost always, seems to be from
+strangers.  Since they were not known ... so Orren also believed.
+
+These two strangers were not known.  Except for their names; Boyce
+Loebh and Lloyd, and also the fact that each man carries with him a
+substantial wealth, without the slightest fear of being robbed, no one
+really knows who they were.
+
+Then there was the crow that was the younger man's pet.  It was a
+strange pet that, to Orren, seemed to be as great a threat to Phoride,
+as the two men were.
+
+Yet, for all their feelings, neither man could quite understand why
+they felt uneasy with these two men's presence.  They gave no
+indication of being treasonous and they had even taken up a peaceful
+residency within the city.
+
+They heard the story of their wanting to set up an academy of arts and
+philosophy, to be run as a part of the Phoridene Blaisaman;  but the
+fact that the Blue Mansion was bought, had both monastic men worried.
+
+Orren had been studying Jessuum Benitar's prophesy, made for Manguino,
+but it was odd and open to innumerable interpretations.
+
+Manguino himself had been wrong many times about the prophesy, seeing
+the doom of Halls, and the rest of Pomperaque, through natural
+elemental causes:  fire, water, earth and air.  Yet, with the several
+natural disasters that befell Pomperaque since the executions of Brook
+and
+
+Dearborne; the earthquakes tidal waves, the three-day hail storm and
+the great fire of four years ago  -- that almost burned half of Phoride
+-- before the rebuilding, the great city had always seemed to survive.
+
+Cardinal Orren refused to believe in whatever the Benitar prophesy had
+to say.  Like his father, years ago, he only believed and trusted in
+what he could see, feel, hear and smell, and touch.  Anything that was
+beyond those senses were just illusions.
+
+Orren had seen the Angels of Mons several nights ago, and he knew that
+they meant an impending doom, but he believed that the doom would not
+be that great since the Mons did not ride through the main streets of
+Pomperaque.
+
+Since time immemorial; from the first time that vision had foretold
+doom, in the years before the nonexistent holocaust which ravaged the
+world, the mons had been an accurate omen that warned those who saw
+them, of incalculable disaster.
+
+"I am apt to disregard Jessuum Benitar's prophecy, Almighty.  It is
+difficult to understand and can be made to mean anything, but the Mons
+that I had seen,  came in the night prior to the men entering the
+city."  he said.
+
+Manguino laughed a little when Orren said that to him.
+
+"You are just like Allen was.  You only believe in what you see and
+nothing more.  Now, tell me ... how many strangers came into Pomperaque
+-- or to Phoride, for that matter -- on the same day as these two
+Bestenese came?"  Manguino asked him.
+
+"There were many, your grace, but these men have something about them,
+something that I just can't explain!"
+
+Manguino laughed and told Orren not to worry because nothing would
+happen unless he
+
+asked for the prophesy to be read to him.
+
+To make Orren feel better and calmer, Manguino offered to him a
+suggestion that he find himself some virgin and have his tensions
+relaxed through her.
+
+"You'll feel much better!"  he told Orren.
+
+Orren left him, angry and unsure of his own suspicions.
+
+He went back to his chamber and tried to study the prophesy some more,
+trying to use his logic this time.
+
+Manguino also went back to his own chamber and jumped into the pool of
+rain water which Eckma was already wading in, and drinking the scum off
+the surface before he entertained his pleasure.
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY-THREE
+
+With Cavander's help, along with some of his friends that were enlisted
+to the cause, the Blue Mansion began to take shape as the smooth clean
+structure that it once had been.  Having the clean-up and all the
+detailed restoration take place over several shifts, the great estate
+began to resemble its old grandeur, with every hour that passed by.
+
+Hundreds of litres of blue-green metallic paint was mixed and the walls
+inside the house were painted, and the local craftsmen -- those masters
+working with rock, metal, glass and wood, designed and reconstructed
+duplicates of everything that was once inside the house.  All the
+duplicates were made from the memories, of that house, that Boyce and
+Lloyd carried with them over the last decade.
+
+Boyce ran about the entire estate with Zoro perched on his shoulder and
+he supervised the workers with every detail that they were doing.  He
+wanted everything just as perfect as he could have it.
+
+Lloyd ran around and did the same, but this all was really Boyce's
+dream and destiny needing fulfilment.  All he was there for was to
+ensure Boyce's succession.
+
+Dearborne's old parlour began to look more and more like it did on the
+day before the execution, and Brook's den had been reconstructed nearly
+to the last detail, the only item excluded from it all, being the
+computer that Brook had called his  'gadget'!
+
+The land and its gardens were weeded and replanted with plants, and
+flowers, from all over Phoride.
+
+The change that took place on Bimini Hill was so great and quick that
+the citizens of Pomperaque began to notice a strange presence emanate
+from it.  Such a presence was unknown since the time that the Blue line
+had ruled from there, and now it was back.
+
+During the night time, working only by the light from the stars and
+moon, and by the pole lights of the city, the outer walls of the Blue
+Mansion were painted with the purest white paint that could be mixed,
+and the following night they were polished until the whole building
+gleamed.
+
+Many days had gone by but the building was finally ready to move the
+rest of the necessities into it.  Most of the furniture, and other such
+things, were especially build within the house or garden, for the man
+for whom it was being made.
+
+Boyce and Lloyd were pleased beyond their knowledge of words, to
+express how they felt.  They knew that what had once been the home of a
+good, kind and strong man, was once again going to be the home of a man
+that would be as well-loved.
+
+All those that put in their time and love for Boyce, knowing who he
+was, were pleased in their accomplishments and they gave praise to him
+in a grand ball that was given for him, and for Lloyd, when everything
+was finally completed.
+
+Many people from all walks of Phoridene society were invited to the
+mansion for the ball.
+
+Curious to see who these men were, many of those citizens that were
+invited had eagerly accepted to attend the ball at the new Blue Mansion.
+
+Most of the guests were surprised upon entrance to the great building.
+Memories were rekindled and many citizens had tears in their eyes and
+lumps in their throats. It was remarkable that no one commented on the
+Mansion's old sameness during any part of the ball.  Not a single guest
+questioned Boyce, or Lloyd, about how they made everything in the house
+to be as it was years ago.  They just took it in stride and tried to
+have a good time; and for the first time, in a very long while, the
+Phoridenes did enjoy themselves.
+
+Amongst the guests invited to the ball were Miel and Cassta, with their
+families, and several higher coenobites from Halls.  They were Manguino
+and his wife, Orren, Polis and Cardinal Levy.
+
+Miel and Cassta came to the ball for much the same reason that everyone
+else did, curiosity.  When they came in, it was as if they walked
+through some door that threw them back into time, to the night when the
+Mansion saw its last festive night, the evening of Brook and
+Dearborne's fifteenth anniversary of marriage.
+
+When they saw Boyce he looked familiar to them but while at the ball
+they didn't discuss it.  Only once that night when they came to meet
+the two men, Boyce had mentioned that he would like to speak privately
+to them the next day and they had agreed.
+
+The arrangements had been made so quickly that their entire intercourse
+seemed to take place in the span of time it took the men to shake hands.
+
+That was Boyce's only contact with the two men, all evening, and later
+Empal mentioned to both men that it would be to their benefit to listen
+to and to respect the young man called Boyce
+
+Loebh, and that made both men wonder since they knew that Empal
+wouldn't say such a thing to them unless it was serious.
+
+Manguino and Orren had walked through the Mansion and finally Manguino
+ended up at the room which was once Brook's private viewing den.  That
+was the room Brook and Dearborne had been taken from before they were
+executed.
+
+Manguino felt discomfited standing there and Orren couldn't help but
+notice it.  Everything in the house was just as it was before it was
+ravaged by him and his men, thought Manguino.  He was petrified to open
+the door and looked inside but Orren had never seen the original room
+and what it contained, so he bound into the room and looked around at
+the rock walls, drapes, shelves of books and the large wooden cabinet.
+
+The room was beautiful; decorated with small statues and paintings, and
+although it wasn't an identical duplicate of Brook's den, it closely
+enough resembled it to warp Manguino's mind back to when he had the
+cabinet opened to his view and saw Brook's computer.
+
+The ArchBishop had finally summoned ample courage in order to enter the
+room and he let out an exasperated breath which sounded like he was in
+pain, when he saw the room.  He quickly stepped over to the book
+shelves and read the names and titles on the books:  Lapinz,
+Argynossti, Smarte.  All were identical to those books that Brook kept
+there.
+
+"This is some room!"  said Orren and oddly glanced over at Manguino.
+"What's wrong?"  he asked the ArchBishop.
+
+"This room is hardly different than Brook Scullion-Blue's was, so long
+ago.  How did these men know what was within?  How did they know what
+was in every room, within this house?"
+
+Manguino trembled as he spoke then he looked at the far curtained wall
+and went over to it.
+
+He violently pulled the curtains away from the wall exposing a dingy
+grey.
+
+"Why did you do that, your Grace?" asked Orren.
+
+"This wall was supposed to be white in the centre.  If it was, I don't
+know what I would've thought!"  he answered.
+
+He looked at the large wooden cabinet near the entrance and went to
+it.  He tried to open it but it was locked.  He shook his head towards
+Orren then punched at the cabinet doors.
+
+"Just like Brook's, always locked until the day that I finally knew for
+sure what was inside!"
+
+Manguino was feeling ill and angry, and most of all frightened.
+
+"You were right to suspect these men, Orren!"  he told the cardinal.
+
+There was a sudden angry and loud voice blaring from the entrance to
+the room.
+
+"What are you doing in here?"  It was Boyce and he majestically trooped
+into the room and glared at the ArchBishop.  "I don't mind if the
+guests roam around the house, but I do mind if the guests try to
+destroy the things that are within the rooms!"
+
+"We are not destroying anything, my young friend!"  Manguino assured
+him while he was leaning against the cabinet.
+
+Boyce looked around the room and saw the undraped wall.
+
+"Why is that curtain pulled away?"  he demanded.
+
+"Why isn't that wall white?"  asked Manguino.
+
+"White?"  questioned Boyce.  "Was it white, originally?"
+
+Manguino nodded his head.
+
+"I wish that I would have known this, earlier.  I want this place to be
+as authentic as possible to its original interior!"
+
+Orren and Manguino looked at one another with puzzled eyes and Boyce
+continued.
+
+"I had found out the history of this place from a few of the towns'
+people and I had decided to talk to a few of the people who have been
+within this house when it was lived in by the ruling Lord.  I had every
+detail of their memories reconstructed.  My academy will have the
+atmosphere it needs, to inspire our artisans and great thinkers."
+
+"What's in here?"  Manguino demanded of him, touching the cabinet with
+a few pats of his hand.
+
+"Nothing is in there!"  replied Boyce.
+
+"Open it for me!"  Manguino threw another order at Boyce.
+
+"I don't believe that I am obliged to do so without being given a
+reason for my opening it!"  Boyce denied obedience to them, knowing
+exactly who both of these men were.
+
+"If you are to live in Pomperaque,"  said Orren.  "you must learn to
+obey the ArchBishop.  He wants you to open that cabinet and you will
+open it!"
+
+Boyce put on a bewildered expression then sighed, nodding his head as
+he went to the cabinet.
+
+He took a key from around his neck and put it in the slot of the
+cabinet door.  His actions with the key, and the manner in which he
+used it to open the doors, disturbed Manguino but he made himself think
+that Boyce was told about the way that Brook handled the cabinet key.
+
+Boyce slowly opened the cabinet to reveal the empty interior.
+
+"There!"  Boyce exclaimed.  "I had told you that there was nothing
+inside!"
+
+The ArchBishop Manguino breathed more easily when he saw that the
+cabinet was truly empty as this stranger called Boyce, had truthfully
+told him.
+
+"I would think that you would like to mingle more with the common
+folk."  said Boyce.  "I had heard some rumours that you, ArchBishop,
+don't present yourself to the people as much as you should!"
+
+Orren didn't like what Boyce had said and he was ready to say something
+to him until Manguino stopped him by raising his hand.
+
+Manguino made for the door and Orren followed him.  It was obvious that
+the Almighty wanted peace, for now, and Orren held to his respect of it.
+
+However, before the two men totally exited the room, Manguino turned
+around and saw Boyce closing the cabinet doors.  He smiled at Boyce and
+asked him a question while Zoro flew into the room and to his shoulder.
+
+"Tell me, Boyce Loebh ... do you know what was inside the cabinet?"  he
+asked him.
+
+Boyce shrugged and a squawk came from Zoro.
+
+"No, I don't!"  he answered.  "Apparently no one knows.  It ruins the
+authenticity -- I feel.  Besides that ..."   Boyce smiled back at him.
+"... it must have been something that really annoyed you."
+
+He stared right into Manguino's eyes than asked him if he would tell
+him the contents of the cabinet, but Manguino just continued to smile
+and left the room without telling him.
+
+Boyce let Zoro onto his left forearm and stroked him while the bird
+balanced itself.
+
+"That, Zoro, is a man that ancients called  'an ass-hole'!"  he said to
+the crow.
+
+Zoro cawed, as if answering, and Boyce left the room with him, too.
+
+Downstairs, the party was coming to an end and Lloyd was saying
+good-bye to everyone, and he reminded Mingo and Bix to bring their
+friends over to the Mansion tomorrow for their first class.
+
+Late into the night everyone was finally gone and the two men felt
+extremely good in having their confusion tactics work on those who were
+unfriendly present here on this night.
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY-FOUR
+
+The following morning the men went to market and sew Empal.  They
+bought from him some of his special fruit from the lands to the west,
+called Ïÿnondan, and they asked his opinion of last evening's gala.
+
+Empal was pleased for its success and he told them that many others
+thought so, as well.  He also told them that Miel and Cassta were
+expecting them in Gothal for a luncheon.
+
+Boyce was ultimately pleased because he had a chance to see his wife
+and Lloyd was also glad for being able to see Sister Rhonta, to argue
+some more Smarte with her.
+
+The two men went to the town stable and borrowed a couple of horses and
+rode into Gothal, as soon as they finished their talk with Empal.
+
+Gothal was close, just a few kilometres from Pomperaque's northern
+gates but Boyce pushed the horses hard to reach Gothal as quickly as
+possible, Zoro riding all the way on his shoulder.
+
+He went to the Abbey of Our Holy Saint Mariot, where Lilith was staying
+and found her in her job today, tilling and trimming the flower and
+tree garden.
+
+She was grimy from the dirt and heat but the sister in charge of
+today's work let her off her job, under the circumstances, and Lilith
+had a very quick bath before going to her husband, waiting for her in
+her bed.
+
+Rhonta was happy to see Lloyd but all they did was talk while she was
+in a room repairing some clothing.
+
+She was a full nun, as she was when she cared for Lloyd until he
+recuperated.  For the innocent kiss that she gave to Lloyd when he and
+Boyce left Gothal, for Pomperaque, she was highly reprimanded and she
+was made to work in the abbey kitchens until just recently.
+
+Lloyd was disappointed, and she was probably more disappointed than he
+was, but they were both mature enough to understand the circumstances
+in which they both lived, so both made the most of their time by
+talking.
+
+At noon, Boyce left Lilith's bedroom and went to the Abbess's private
+dining room where Miel and Cassta were both waiting for him.
+
+Lloyd wasn't there and Lilith stayed in bed, waiting for Boyce to
+return while she pictured in her mind the account that Boyce gave to
+her about his reintroduction to Pomperaque.
+
+He walked into the dining room with Zoro and the Abbess Mariot (as all
+abbesses were called Mariot, since the first one that found the child
+called Sunshine, so long ago), was serving the table where the men sat.
+
+She curtsied to Boyce and left the room as both Miel and Cassta took to
+their feet and watched him approach them.
+
+They both came from behind the table and they embraced Boyce with tears
+streaming from their eyes.
+
+"Empal had told us who you are, Boyce Loebh Scullion-Blue!"  said Miel
+between sniffles.
+
+"We didn't know that our great friends had any children, Master
+Scullion!  Where did you stay as a child?  How is it that your father
+didn't tell us?" Cassta asked desperately.
+
+"I remember both of you so well, Cassta and Miel.  My father only had
+two friends that he trusted with his life!"  said Boyce.
+
+"How do you remember us, Boyce?  We had never seen you before this
+day!"  Miel's tears subsided allowing wonder to dry them.
+
+"I was hidden before everyone's very eyes and there wasn't a soul in
+all of Phoride that knew.  Only Empal was told and that was just before
+my parent's death."  said Boyce and he then proceeded.  "I was Boy, my
+parent's servant!"
+
+Astounded, the men kissed Boyce's right hand and they didn't even pay
+attention to Zoro cawing at them.
+
+"How it is to me, now, to realise that a great ruler truly served his
+people!"  Cassta praised Boyce.
+
+"I had once served, both of you, with things of substance and now it is
+time for both of you to serve me."  Boyce's voice sounded demanding.
+
+"Yes!"  the men echoed one another.
+
+"We kneel, humbly, before you Lord Scullion-Blue."  promised him as he
+and Cassta went on their knees.
+
+Boyce put his hands on each man's shoulders and told them to rise.  He
+let them know that
+
+they had no obligation to kneel before any man, even if that man was
+their leader.
+
+"From this time on, neither you, nor any of those who you persuade to
+join me -- to help me reclaim Phoride in the name of my father -- shall
+kneel before me.  Only God, who speaks to men's hearts deserves to be
+knelt before.  I am not God.  I am just a man and because I am just a
+man, I need loyal friends to help me regain my birthright an share my
+sceptre with me, in this land."
+
+"Only a truly God-sent leader would speak that way.  We will die for
+you, Boyce!"  Miel vowed and Cassta nodded to Miel's offer.
+
+"You did not die to protect my parents,  old friends!"  Boyce sounded
+stern, his voice mirroring the guilt felt by both for their passiveness
+when action was the necessity.  And Boyce continued,  "But I will die
+for you, if it be so ordained."
+
+Both of the men's heads sank down upon their chests in a visible shame,
+and both had weepy eyes.
+
+Boyce motioned for them to return to the table.  They sat down and ate
+the banquet that was prepared for them by the abbey sisters and they
+discussed the plans that Boyce and Lloyd had agreed to with the
+Northern United Alignment, concerning the invasion of Phoride.
+
+Boyce told the men that it will be their job to find loyal and
+trustworthy Prominants that would join his side in order to abolish the
+canon rule forever and return him as their heir apparent to the Blue
+descent.
+
+Everything was agreed upon.  Plans were set and fealty was paid through
+vows and oaths, and when the meal was finished, the men returned to
+Pomperaque.
+
+Boyce returned to his Lilith's bedroom and made love with her once more
+before the invasion was to come over this troubled land, and so
+separate them for a while longer.
+
+Zoro squawked, having been left out in the garden by Boyce before he
+went to Lilith.
+
+Zoro flew back to Pomperaque and circled it until Boyce and Lloyd left
+the abbey for their second time.
+
+Risking another reprimand, Sister Rhonta kissed Lloyd good-bye when
+Lilith did the same to Boyce.
+
+When the men returned to Pomperaque they rode right for Empal's stall.
+
+Zoro had already soared down onto Boyce's shoulder when they road
+through the town's gates, and to Empal's kiosk, Boyce let Empal know
+that the invasion could commence.
+
+Empal knew the rest.  He had made his plans with the alignment, too.
+
+This was the day that Empal would fly back to Virune and Besten, on his
+Kenttitian Eagle, and tell his people and Harvard Bartlett that it was
+time to mobilize the armies for their advance on Phoride.
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY-FIVE
+
+The days and nights passed by with an odd swiftness that has never
+before been seen or felt.
+
+Boyce and Lloyd didn't appear to do much else than run the learning
+sessions in the Blue Mansion, catering to whomever, and from whatever,
+class they were from.
+
+One cardinal attended the first two days of the academy's opening and
+he reported to the ArchBishop Manguino that everything was being
+handled straight as in the Blaisaman and that political ideologies were
+discussed as philosophical arguments rather than as private opinions.
+
+Everything in the academy was normal and there were no conspiracies or
+treasonous talk being made within the mansion and so the cardinal
+stopped attending the classes there.
+
+The second day after the cardinal stopped coming to the classes Boyce
+and Lloyd finally began to teach all those enlisted to their cause,
+about the Twentieth Century civilisation.
+
+The great book that Brook had given to his son and Lloyd, was passed
+around to each person that knew how to read the written English, which
+had survived to some extent, since that fallen age.
+
+Those capable of reading the book, read it aloud to those who could
+not, and all those who had been made familiar with the ancient book,
+gawked at the wondrous pictured in the book.  The pictures were of
+strange machines that could fly and ships that travelled space, and
+there were pictures of giant buildings that touched the skies.  They
+were great hollow mountains made by man, out of glass and steel and
+rock.
+
+The most loyal and m of the more intelligent students were taught how
+to battle, hand-to-hand, with someone.  They watched the hours of
+demonstrations presented by Lloyd and Boyce.
+
+However, due to the lack of time available to them to train, all that
+they could do was watch Lloyd and Boyce's movements, then later teach
+other; again, by demonstration and example.
+
+Several months of military training were condensed into a week of
+intense study and what's more, Halls never knew what was happening.
+
+Throughout the two men's instruction, Zoro was present, relentlessly
+perched; either on a piece of furniture on upon Boyce's shoulder.
+
+To many of those loyal citizens there to learn Boyce's knowledge, Zoro
+became a symbol of freedom from the evil monastic rule.
+
+Boyce, with his interesting pet, had become quite popular in
+Pomperaque, the word passing throughout the entire land of Phoride in a
+manner that resembled that of legend.
+
+Orren was certain that the two men from Besten presented a clear and
+present threat to the ArchBishop and his established rule on this
+continent.  He couldn't allow his feelings to go without notice and he
+discussed the prophesy, given to Manguino by the Seer, Jessuum Benitar,
+with other cardinals who specialised in the interpretation of scripture
+and prediction.
+
+All of them agreed that the Seer's words were indeed strange and non of
+them could agree on
+
+their exact meaning, so the Cardinal Orren took to examining the
+recorded text by himself.
+
+With every subsequent reading of the words, Orren became more
+frustrated and less did he succeed in his understanding of any of it.
+
+He hoped that he would soon free whatever hidden meaning was held
+within the vision that Jessuum conveyed to Manguino when he began to
+degenerate his power and standing, for the sake of copulating with
+Eckma.
+
+Pure thought and logic slowed Orren's perspective for the explanation
+of the prophetic forecast.
+
+It happened one night that something that resembled an answer came to
+Orren, and it was a strange coincidence that Manguino had glimmers of
+thought that were similar.
+
+In their like dreams, certain lines in the prophesy seemed to repeat
+themselves and both Manguino and Orren began to realise their meanings.
+
+The lines that held the most clarity for them were:  'Four great
+elements, ride on high'  and  'Black feathers from his shoulders jut'.
+These lines reflected the omen and possibly even the new strangers.
+However, there was no proof that they were upon the correct
+considerations.
+
+The next day that ArchBishop and Cardinal Orren confided to one another
+about their dreams and about the interpretations that came to them
+thereof.
+
+Manguino told Orren that he heard the prophet's chant repeating itself
+through his mind and peaking in clarity and volume at certain lines.
+
+Orren had said the same thing to the ArchBishop and they discussed
+their dreams, and what they thought their dreams meant, over the span
+of several hours since they woke.
+
+Both men were eager to strip clean the text of the prophesy in order
+to reveal, to themselves, the long awaited answer.
+
+"I understand the Mons, Your Grace!"  Orren blurted out to the
+ArchBishop.  "It was the night before the two strange Bestenese entered
+Pomperaque.  I saw the Mons."
+
+Orren paced about the ArchBishop's office, and Manguino sat at his desk
+in his respective garb, listening to the great Cardinal Orren.
+
+He walked back to the desk, from the window, lifted his palms before
+him as if weighing the air that he passed through.
+
+"The Mons were four, each on a horse, and each rider was clad in armour
+and was the same colour as the horses.  They were in the sky.  So I
+believe now that our Seer's predictions may be true.  The Mons are
+these four elements that ride on high."
+
+Manguino sighed and rocked back and forth in his chair.  He was pleased
+to have made some head-way in answering the puzzling prophesy.  Yet,
+somehow he felt that there wasn't enough proof to be able to point to
+Boyce and Lloyd and say that they were involved.
+
+" 'Black feathers from his shoulders jut' ..."  said the ArchBishop.  "
+... is strangely similar to that Boyce Loebh and his dirty crow.  There
+is one point, however, that has me question if that is so."
+
+He stood up and moved around to the front of the desk and sat on it.
+He motioned with his hands as he spoke to Orren, giving him his
+explanation and other questions concerning it.
+
+"That odd crow rides on Boyce Loebh's shoulder, it doesn't just from
+it.  Shoulders are mentioned instead on of shoulder -- this may be
+misleading!  It may be making us seek the reality of the forecast by
+invoking within us our own dislikes for these men."  he said to Orren.
+
+Orren nodded and then shrugged while the chair on which he sat gently
+swivelled to and fro.  He looked right into the ArchBishop's eyes as he
+thought that the ArchBishop may actually be right.
+
+"I understand your thoughts.  We don't want to make it a habit of
+unjustly accusing those people that we do not trust only in order to
+quell our own fright.  Both of these Bestenese are popular with the
+people as being great teachers.  My men have reported to me no
+treasonous news about them."
+
+Orren raised himself from the chair and went over to the chiffonnier
+behind Manguino and poured himself some wine.
+
+"The Mons just rode across the Phoridene sky.  They never rode in the
+streets.  Whatever happens will be minor."  he said to Manguino before
+he gulped the glass of wine into his gut.
+
+"We should keep our wits about us and look for some strangers with
+black feathers either growing out of their shoulders or adorning their
+apparel."
+
+"I will get some of my men to watch out for that happenstance."  Orren
+promised his master.  "I will also put the Phoridene army on
+battle-alert.  I feel that to be the prudent action."
+
+"We should wait, at least for a few more days and I don't believe that
+the army will really be needed."
+
+Orren became tense and he Questioned the ArchBishop's reasoning for not
+letting him ready for defence.  Afterall, Orren was in charge of the
+army.
+
+"We don't need tension between ourselves, Your Holiness!"  Orren
+finally said.  "We have to be ready for anything.  The people of this
+city, and outlying towns and villages, have been behaving very
+strangely in recent times.  They don't seem to be expressing their
+dislike for their living conditions and over-taxing.  They wane in
+their fear of you.  Something is very wrong."
+
+"You are surely like your father, Allen, was.  You worry too much,
+Cardinal.  We should not worry about anything.  We are strong and no
+sane person would try anything against us.  I am god of Phoride, and
+of this hemisphere.  Gods cannot be harmed."
+
+The ArchBishop has always been thought of as a god, and has been made
+to be worshipped as much but he had never before shown that he believed
+it, too.
+
+Orren left his presence and called a necessary meeting with the higher
+cardinals and convinced them to back his giving his army a full alert
+status.
+
+Later, Manguino called on Orren to bring the two strangers to his
+office for questioning.  He was seemingly having second thoughts about
+his own suspicions but, being a god, he didn't admit to it.
+
+That afternoon Boyce and Lloyd came to Halls to see the ArchBishop.
+Boyce had Zoro on his shoulder and it was making a great deal of noise,
+listening to it echo throughout the cathedral and looking as if it was
+enjoying itself.
+
+Lloyd felt uneasy because this would be the first time that the members
+of Halls could see his face clearly and he prayed that no one would
+recognize him, from that day in the square, a decade ago.
+
+They entered the ArchBishop's office with a majesty and saw Manguino
+sitting at his desk with Orren in a chair off to his right side.
+
+"We are pleased to have this visit, my friends!"  said Manguino and he
+smiled.  "We would like to congratulate both of you on your successful
+start with your school.  I may be interested to attend some of your
+lectures one day soon, but before I do, I would like to know something
+about your backgrounds."
+
+Boyce and Lloyd looked at one another and Zoro jumped off of Boyce's
+shoulder and glided to the window.  Boyce and Lloyd waited for a moment
+and Lloyd knew that he had to speak since he was the older of the two.
+
+"We are honoured to appear before you!"  said Lloyd and he moved closer
+to the front of the desk.  "Thank-you for your notice and maybe with
+your satisfaction we may be able to join our academy with the
+Blaisaman?"
+
+"Anything is possible!"  exclaimed Orren in a snide voice.
+
+The men didn't understand the tone coming from Orren but they took it
+in stride.  They didn't want anything to anger them this afternoon
+since they were supposed to be intellectuals, not barbarians.
+
+Both knew that it would be difficult to keep their anger subdued but it
+was necessary for the success of their years of planning for the
+take-over of Phoride.
+
+"I would like to know of your educational background!"  Manguino said
+and motioned to both of them to sit down and they did.
+
+"We had many years of study at the Blaisaman in besten and we have
+travelled and studied, in many other places before deciding to come
+here."
+
+Boyce spoke slowly and steadily to the ArchBishop and Orren, trying to
+ensure that each word sank into their minds.
+
+"How long did you travel and how did you come to be in our city?  You
+have not been seen travelling along the known caravan routes and this
+makes us curious."
+
+Orren was the type of man that dove right for the heart of whatever he
+wanted to know.  He could not engage in side-stepping discussions
+because they became dull and took too long to reach the information
+that was desired.
+
+"We have been travelling, fairly extensively for almost ten years now.
+We have been to nearly every part of this continent, always taking
+routes that were not extensively used."  said Lloyd.
+
+"Just as our trip from Besten to your city."  said Boyce.  "We
+travelled as directly south as we could, going through the Dark Forest,
+Sedara and Palatka.  In fact, we were just leaving Palatka when Urre's
+government was toppled!"
+
+Lloyd wasn't pleased with Boyce telling these two evil clerics about
+their taking the passage through the Dark Forest.  He saw the two men's
+expressions when Boyce told them that.
+
+"How very interesting that you survived passing that inhospitable
+forest."  jeered Orren.
+
+"Yes, it was interesting,"  began Boyce.  "but it wasn't as dangerous
+as our avoiding of the Elkinni slavers."
+
+Lloyd felt better now, and more at ease.  Boyce was adding some fantasy
+to the truths that he had told them earlier.  He was satisfied that
+Boyce was handling the situation and so he relaxed more.
+
+There was a shaky silence that rippled through the mood in the room.
+
+All four men had experienced it, and when it came about, Zoro became
+spooked and flew out the window and back to the Blue Mansion.
+
+As it flew back to the Mansion, Empal was coming down, on the
+Kenttitian Eagle, to the clearing in the Joenine Forest.
+
+Zoro swooped up into the air and after displaying some silly-looking
+acrobatics, he soared down to the roof tops of the mansion.
+
+Only Orren saw Zoro fly out.  Boyce an Lloyd were both too busy keeping
+their thoughts in
+
+line while in their hosts' presences, but this effort of their's
+appeared to be to no useful avail.
+
+Orren had come right out to them and told them both about his idea
+behind a prophesy that they had been given.
+
+Manguino sat back and studied the men's expressions but didn't see too
+much that was odd or revealing.
+
+"I must tell you both that we do not like your presence in Phoride.  We
+do not trust you, but in so long as you keep to what you have been
+doing you will be tolerated."
+
+Boyce felt like laughing and he had to ask the cardinal exactly what he
+meant.
+
+"I meant to say, "  Orren replied.  "that you will continue to teach in
+accordance to those rules and methods, as are followed by other
+learning institutions, within our domain.  No personal thoughts or
+opinions concerning the certain 'questionable' topics, will be allowed."
+
+"You two are doing fine as academicians but we do not want to find that
+treason is being discussed at the mansion."  added Manguino.
+
+Boyce and Lloyd said nothing, they just bowed their heads in
+submission, necessary as a sign of protocol.
+
+They stood up and bowed to the ArchBishop and waited for their
+dismissal from his office. Following a few moments of intense glaring
+between themselves, Manguino gave them leave and they left.
+
+Orren walked around to the front of the desk and made his way to the
+window and looked down to the interior of the quadrangles where many
+novices reclined, near the fountain.
+
+"Can you believe their supposed travels?"  Orren asked but more as a
+statement.
+
+"You never know with the human animal, my loyal friend.  Men have lied
+since their
+
+dawning.  There is no such thing as truth, only variations of an
+accepted lie!"  commented Manguino.
+
+"We should have asked how they survived their passage through the Dark
+Forest."  said Orren, then he gave a little laugh.  "Maybe the gremlins
+helped them through."
+
+Whatever the case may be, Orren, I am not certain that they should be
+totally mistrusted.  They do not appear to have a threatening quality
+about them."
+
+"I still believe that we should keep them both under surveillance for a
+while."
+
+"Alright.  Do that, for your own benefit and arrange for me a social
+evening.  I want to celebrate my safety."
+
+Orren wanted to disapprove his request but he knew that Manguino would
+only get someone else to do it for him.
+
+He agreed and left the ArchBishop's presence, to carry though with the
+order.
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY-SIX
+
+When Boyce and Lloyd returned home, Zoro flew down to his master's
+shoulder from the mansion's roof top.
+
+"Zoro!  There you are!"  said Boyce.  He had wondered what had become
+of him, at the cathedral.
+
+They went into the house and soon found Empal waiting for both of them
+in the room that was Brook's viewing den.
+
+He had come in through the underground passage from the Joenine Forest.
+
+"Empal, our dear friend!"  said Boyce, and he and Lloyd shook hands
+with him.
+
+"I'm surprised that the passages, beneath this place are still in very
+good shape."  he said.
+
+"Have you told the alignment to mobilize for its advance on Phoride?"
+asked Lloyd.
+
+"That was why you sent me back there, and I have done your bidding."
+
+"Very good, General!"  praised Boyce.
+
+"I had also brought some things for you.  A gift from Lloyd's father,
+Harvard."  he told them and Lloyd wondered what his father could
+possibly send to him and Boyce from Besten.
+
+Empal opened the passage door and went in, soon coming back into the
+room with two large and heavy looking sacks.
+
+"This is yours, Boyce!"  Empal said handing him one of the large sacks.
+
+Lloyd took the other one when handed to him, and when they opened up
+the sacks, what they found was the beautiful sight of armour.
+
+The armour was of gilded gold, bolted onto sweaters made of woven lead
+and steel, fitting perfectly over the wearer's form, as it was the
+nature for such armour to behave.
+
+Electrophore-laser rifles were in each sack with two energy cells for
+each weapon, and to supplement fighting, arm-length tempered sabres
+were given to them, as well.
+
+Both men received helmets characteristic of their own personalities.
+
+Lloyd had received a helmet made of silver, symbolising steadfast
+loyalty and promise to serve.  it had a low fall to the back and the
+front, covering the forehead was square and moulded into the figure of
+a computer.
+
+Three great spikes jutted along the centre crest of the helmet from the
+frontal section to the hinges of the fall.
+
+Boyce's helmet was also very impressive.  It was perfectly rounded and
+was made of thick gold.  The round front section, that covered half of
+his forehead, had a horizontal, oblong inset of the bluest sapphires
+that could be found and on the top back of his helmet was a cluster of
+three long plumes, of straight blue horse-tail hair.
+
+Each single knot of hair was of a slightly different shade and hue of
+blue, and when the light hit the clusters, they all shimmered like a
+clear waterfall.
+
+"Your father has exquisite taste!"  Boyce said to Lloyd.
+
+Lloyd nodded and Empal continued to help the men to remove a large box
+from each bag, and the men opened them.  Within each box was a shiny
+cross bow.
+
+"These are beautiful!"  sighed Lloyd.
+
+"I wonder if we'll use them?"  asked Boyce.
+
+"Where will you keep these things?"  inquired Empal and Boyce smiled at
+him, raising his finger to the air.
+
+He took from around his neck a key and put it into the slot of the
+cabinet doors and opened them.
+
+The cabinet was empty but Boyce pushed a part of the back panel and the
+inside compartment swung around to reveal the men's maps and hand guns.
+
+Everything was hung on certain hooks and the entire case was beautiful.
+
+Before Boyce was to close the cabinet, Empal took out of Boyce's sack
+one more piece of armour.  It was a body harness with shoulder
+protectors made of gold and long strips of black onyx, resembling
+feathers.
+
+Boyce and Lloyd laughed a little when they saw the beautiful Virunese
+air command epaulette.
+
+Empal wondered why they were laughing at the gift that he had included
+for Boyce.  He was somewhat irritated and insulted by it until he was
+told the reason.
+
+"Black feathers jutting, Lloyd."  Boyce grinned while he spoke.
+
+"I thought of Zoro when I first heard them say it!"  admitted Lloyd.
+
+"I believe that they did, too, but it didn't fit their interpretation.
+That's why they called us to talk to them."  said Boyce.
+
+He put the epaulette-body brace into the cabinet and swung the interior
+around to the empty false front, and he closed the cabinets.
+
+"Later this evening Tucker and his cousin Tellis are flying in two
+eagles for you."  said Empal.  "He will bring them to the back of the
+mansion, on the base of the hill.  No one will see them there or think
+of checking there."
+
+Empal conveyed to them the expectant time of arriving invasion force,
+letting them know that most of the main fighting force would be in
+Phoride within a week, with the second wave being a day behind.
+
+Zoro cawed.  He enjoyed looking at the shiny metals of the armour but
+the discussion that took place afterwards was making him restless.
+
+When Boyce asked Empal to stay for supper, Zoro flew out the den's
+window and flew around Pomperaque for a while until he disappeared.
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY-SEVEN
+
+There was a great dinner party at Halls the next evening.
+
+Orren was against the idea of having it but the ArchBishop apparently
+was very warm for his idea.
+
+It has reached the point for Manguino that his whole days spent with
+Eckma in the act of fornication was beginning to tire him.  He wanted
+an interesting diversion in order to get his life to seem fulfilling
+and exciting once again.
+
+Orren didn't participate.  He went up to the cathedral's spire early
+and watched the sky for hours.
+
+At the height of the gala this evening the urge returned to Manguino
+and he left his higher cardinals to entertain the guests while he took
+Eckma back to their chamber.
+
+When they entered the chamber, disrobed and were just to get into their
+pool, Manguino looked to the window and saw Jessuum Benitar standing
+there.
+
+"Jessuum!"  exclaimed Manguino, walking towards him, still naked.
+
+This was quite disturbing for the prophet but he said nothing about it.
+
+"I thought that I'd never see you again!"  Manguino said to him.
+
+Jessuum looked about the chamber and saw Eckma staring right into his
+face while she stroked the nipple of her left breast.
+
+He looked away from her and turned slightly away from her direction
+while he spoke to the ArchBishop.
+
+"I come to ask if you remember the prophesy that I gave to you, once
+upon a time?"  he asked Manguino.
+
+"Yes, and don't repeat it to me!"  Manguino replied in a hostile voice,
+then continued.  "But, you can tell me something, Seer.  Are the two
+men from Besten, Boyce Loebh and that Lloyd friend of his, part of that
+prophesy?"
+
+"I am not here to inform one someone, or to falsely accuse another."
+answered Jessuum.  "I am here to tell you that you will soon answer for
+your life and for all those things which you have done throughout it.
+Be warned and prepare yourself!"
+
+Manguino began to stomp in anger and he boiled with a fit of temper,
+brought on by Jessuum's strange way of frightening -- by not saying
+very much.
+
+He turned back to Jessuum but Jessuum was gone.  This made the
+ArchBishop even more angry.
+
+"Where'd he go?"  he hollered.
+
+"Out the window!"  Eckma said in an apathetic tone.
+
+Manguino looked about the window and saw nothing but a little bird
+circling around the windows below him.
+
+"That strange man will be the end of me!"  Manguino said, then he
+sprinted back to the pool, jumped in and had his usual violent sex with
+Eckma.
+
+Up in the spire of the cathedral, Orren was staring at the moon and at
+the rest of the sky; and not long after midnight he once again saw the
+Angels of Mons coming towards Pomperaque, from the northern sky.
+
+They were the same four Mons that he saw before but this time they all
+separated and descended upon the streets of the city.
+
+However, the Mons did not ride the streets.  They did, in fact, ride a
+meter above them.
+
+Cardinal Orren was nervous and frightened beyond his reasoning and he
+couldn't sleep.   He spent the remainder of the night in his bed
+chamber reading the scripted words of Jessuum Benitar, to see what more
+he could recover from its cryptic verses.
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY-EIGHT
+
+The week was nearing its end and the invasion force, including the
+intended second wave support, would soon be pouring into the northern
+perimeters of Upper Phoride.
+
+Boyce and his right arm, Lloyd, ran around the mansion and parts of
+Pomperaque wishing all those who were voluntarily enlisted to their
+cause, the greatest of luck and they let them know that the forces
+would be along.
+
+Everyone knew that they would be the advance lines that were to try and
+take Pomperaque, and the rest of Phoride, from within.
+
+They had all noticed a sudden concentration of monastic police, walking
+the streets and securing certain important streets and buildings.
+
+Mingo and bix were worried that those at Halls knew something but Lloyd
+had explained to them the prophesy that the Seer from Mount Benitar had
+given to the ArchBishop and they were becoming lunatics because of it.
+
+"Just relax, men.  They will wait until they see more signs in the sky,
+like there were last night.  They will interpret those as bad omens.
+They expect a takeover that is more supernatural than a take-over made
+by the discontented people of this city."
+
+Lloyd somehow made sense to them and they became calm again and they
+were sent to round up all those who offered their support to Boyce and
+they took them to the underground passage running beneath the Blue
+Mansion.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce had gone to the other side of Bimini Hill, at its base,
+where Tellis was keeping the two eagles calm and happy.
+
+"Beautiful, are they not?"  asked Tellis and the two men nodded with
+admiration and helped to feed the majestic birds.
+
+"I am amazed that men could domestic them!"  Lloyd said in a soft
+exclamation.
+
+"They are fit for kings to fly!"  Tellis looked at Boyce when he said
+that and Boyce was pleased by it.
+
+They made their war up the hill when they were finished with Tellis and
+they didn't go into the mansion right away.
+
+They were silent for the most part, while climbing, but when they came
+to the back of the mansion, where the beautiful garden was, they sat
+down on a warm marble bench and reflected on the past for a while.
+
+"We have gone through much in our lives."  Boyce said as he sighed.
+"Now, the hour approaches.  I hope that I will take Phoride as mine --
+as we had promised my father."
+
+"Those were great years."  agreed Lloyd.  "We learned much, and have
+seen more than the most men see in ten lifetimes."
+
+"That is so, my friend.  What's more, we could never have done it
+without you and your family.  I needed your guidance and you obliged by
+giving me the fullest possible education that you could."
+
+"I had learned just as much through your help, Boyce."  said Lloyd,
+with a degree of modesty that made what Boyce had said before, less
+than fantastic.
+
+As the two men talked so did Orren, at Halls.  He had a private council
+with the high cardinals and he arranged with all of them to bring into
+Pomperaque, the entire monastic army.
+
+It wasn't unusual that all the high cardinals would give their consent
+to Orren's requests.  They, too, had seen the strange signs in the
+skies and each one of them had their own ideas concerning the meaning
+to the Seer's prophesy.
+
+When Manguino found out about the armies being put on a battle alert
+status he was enraged.  He didn't want to have a battle because he
+believed that the city had nothing to fear.  Only he, he thought, had a
+threat on his life and rule.
+
+Jessuum Benitar had told him that he would answer for his actions and
+that he should prepare himself, but in that, there was no indication of
+war.  He had imagined that the ancient Christ would judge him.  That
+was odd since he had kept that ancient religion from the people, as did
+the Canon Di'Vaticanus, from so long ago.
+
+The ArchBishop didn't know what to do and no one could give him advice
+that sounded sane.  His prophet didn't come to him any more and he knew
+that it was his own fault for being lewd towards the only one who could
+possibly help him.
+
+He should've controlled Phoride and his life differently, he now began
+to think.  He thought that he could have had the same power, as he now
+has, if he had half as many people executed and had partaken less in
+his debauchery with whatever women he could invade, under the excuse
+of wanting progeny.  Maybe he cursed himself, and it wasn't Brook's
+curse that produced horrid creatures and idiots as his children.
+
+He wondered if he could save himself if he got to his knees and prayed
+for his forgiveness from the True Living God, which he still didn't
+love or believe in.
+
+He promised to kill no more or crave to look upon or participate in
+sexual obscenities with women and, like a few untold times, with men
+and animals.
+
+He didn't know how to react to Orren himself.  Orren had been rash and
+quick i having all his men take their respective positions in the city,
+but Manguino couldn't tell him why he should not have done it.
+
+Boyce and Lloyd saw the interesting manoeuvres of the Cardinal Orren's
+army, all stationed facing outward from the city, waiting for an attack
+from outside.
+
+There was news from Orren's spies in the north.  The messages stated
+that the Bestenese army had disappeared.
+
+Orren waited for an invasion.
+
+All the activity amused Boyce and Lloyd.  They predicted that the
+monastic army would be called to defense ready alert when the
+ArchBishop's spies informed Halls about the move south by the Northern
+United Alignment forces.  The surprise attack from within the city
+would take Orren's army, totally by surprise.
+
+
+In the evening the ArchBishop called Orren to the office and Orren
+became impatient during their talk.
+
+Orren wanted to go to the spire and watch the skies again, but Manguino
+wanted to talk about himself and his thoughts about the prophesy.
+He came to the office with the prophesy rolled up in a sheet of
+off-white paper.  He had read the words some more this afternoon and
+became angered at the great ArchBishop's naivete of it.
+
+He stormed into the office and just stared at Manguino.
+
+"With the drug that Polis had developed from the old formula,"  said
+Manguino while staring out of the window,  "I thought that I would live
+forever."
+
+He looked at Orren for a moment and thought about the remarkable
+resemblance he had to his father, the late Cardinal Allen.
+
+"I do so love power.  Anything that I wanted I would get, no matter
+what it was!"  he said to Orren, then looked out of the window again.
+
+Orren came closer to him.
+
+"So are the benefits of having no one above you to be afraid of, Your
+Grace."  he told Manguino.
+
+He laughed and with wet eyes he continued to speak in a soft voice
+while he rubbed his groin.
+
+"Power is beautiful.  If I demanded to someone to kiss my scrotum, it
+would be done.  If I commanded someone to rub my refuse over
+themselves, or even to eat my refuse, it would be done."
+
+Manguino's tone of speaking was soft and had a pleasurable quality
+about it, as if the imagery that he was conveying to Orren was
+pleasing to himself.
+
+Orren felt disgusted but tried not to let it show, and he began to
+speak of something other than the fantasies that go with power.
+
+"You do not have to worry about being overrun, Holiness!"  he told
+Manguino.  "My army is out there ready to die for you, if necessary."
+
+"That would be a beautiful sight to see, I think.  I will bless each
+one in paradise when they die."  he muttered.
+
+"My men also fight for the survival of our ways, in Phoride."  Orren
+reminded the ArchBishop that there was more than just he, as a reason
+to fight in Pomperaque.
+
+"There has been a great error on your part, so I believe!"  Orren said.
+
+"I cannot make errors!"  the ArchBishop rebuked him.  "Watch your
+words, Orren.  No matter if you are my most favoured cardinal I will
+have you killed if you continue."
+
+"Have me killed, then!  If you can find someone who will do it!"  Orren
+threatened back to his master.
+
+Manguino was angry, and like a child, he turned his face back to the
+window and pouted as he stared out.
+
+"I have found that the prophesy is clear, and yet we all have sought
+interpretations."  he explained.  "Yours is an error of trust.  You
+have disregarded the two Bestenese and their crow, and you have
+disregarded my vision of the mons, as being omens of our destruction.
+I am prepared for anything, even if you are not!"  he blurted at
+Manguino.
+
+"Prepared!"  Manguino screamed.  "Prepare yourself! -- that's what
+Jessuum Benitar said before my ejaculation!"
+
+"You are behaving as if you are mad, Manguino!"  Orren pointed at him
+as he drew nearer.  "It's not becoming of someone of your greatness."
+
+"Yes, I see that -- and I also see that you are not kind towards me
+while I am troubled about what is being done to me!"
+
+Orren shook the written prophesy in his hand and he returned to a
+steadier and more controlled way of speaking to his master.
+
+"We can only see that which is written but after it happens."    Orren
+sounded as if he understood the prophesy and he wanted to reveal his
+knowledge to Manguino.  "I have read about my vision of the Mons, that
+bird on the stranger's shoulder, your trust of the two men and your
+feast afterwards -- "
+
+" -- What are you talking about?"  Manguino interrupted him.
+
+"I am talking about the prophesy, Your Grace.  It is clearly states and
+no interpretation is needed."
+
+There was a convulsive silence in the room.  It lasted only for a blink
+of an eye, but seemed like an eternity.
+
+"Let me see that, Orren!"  he demanded.
+
+Orren unravelled the document and read aloud from it:
+
+                 "Four elements, ride on high
+                  Come from the greatest fears inside.
+                  All suspicions end with feast
+                  Of gilded skins and threaded beads -- "
+
+
+Manguino began to stomp his feet as he screamed at the top of his
+voice, that carried through every part of Halls, for Orren to stop.
+
+"Stop.  Don't read it!  Don't read it!"
+
+He rushed to him but tripped on the robe that he was wearing over his
+naked body, and Orren skipped to another familiar part of the
+transcript.
+
+                "Black feathers from his shoulders jut
+                 As promised in the Holy verbal blab
+                 Shall come and take his place that day
+                 And rule the city where he once did play."
+
+Manguino raved, screaming to Orren to stop reading the words out loud
+to him.
+
+"Stop it, you fool!  You don't know what you're doing!"
+
+Suddenly there was a silent spell, after Manguino went down on his
+knees and pounded the floor with his fists.
+
+Far in the distance the cawing of Boyce's crow, Zoro, was heard as it
+circled around the city in a frenzy.
+
+Orren helped Manguino to his feet and they went over to the window.
+
+The moon was out and it was full, its light filling in the shadows of
+the buildings made by the city pole lights.
+
+As they watched, red streaks began to etch themselves across the
+surface of the moon.  It looked as if it was bleeding and very soon the
+entire surface was red.
+
+Manguino and Orren both felt ice-cold as they watched the four Angels
+of Mons appear before the moon and ride towards the city.
+
+The sky around the Mons flashed with lightning that was absent of
+thunder, and overhead they saw a great comet slowly pass into the
+horizon.
+
+They fell aback as if hit by a huge boulder.
+
+"What happened?"  cried Manguino as he held on to Orren's arm.
+
+Orren pushed him away and as he got to his feet he felt the floor
+tremble beneath him.
+
+"It was an earthquake, or maybe it wasn't -- I don't know!"  said
+Orren, a little bit irritated by Manguino's effeminate actions.
+
+They thrust their heads out the window and watched the Mons slowly walk
+their horses through the streets.  The horses' clip-clop echoed
+throughout the city, replacing the thunder when the lightning flashed.
+
+Halls shook, but the rest of the city appeared to be calm and oblivious
+to the signs.
+
+"You are truly stupid for reading the manuscript to me.  I have told
+you many times, never read it to me.  I made that a law.  You have
+brought doom to Phoride."
+
+Cardinal Orren listened to the ArchBishop and when he was finished,
+turned to him.
+
+"How you have ruled Phoride for such a time is beyond me, Manguino, but
+if you will, I will take responsibility for whatever befalls this great
+land."  he promised Manguino, then added.  "You go back and practice
+your bestial arts with Eckma, and with whomever else strikes your
+fancy.  I have served you for a long time, and I will continue to serve
+you until one of us dies!"
+
+He huffed towards the office doors before he exited the room and he
+stopped.
+
+"Jessuum should've warned me about you!"  Manguino hollered at Orren.
+
+"You can go fornicate with Jessuum, as well.  He may just give you the
+pleasure that you have been searching for."
+
+Orren slammed the door of the office and Manguino turned his head and
+looked out of the window.
+
+Zoro was flying around squawking his head off while the stars, in the
+dawn sky, began to fade away.
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY-NINE
+
+Something strange had taken place over the last couple of weeks in
+Pomperaque and the rest of Phoride, as well.  Under normal
+circumstances, something like this happening would have been welcomed
+by those at Halls, especially if they were the monastic guards -- the
+police force.
+
+Cardinal Hint, who headed the guards, had made a report to Cardinal
+Orren, that there has been a steady decrease in crime within Phoride
+over the last few weeks.  He added a footnote to that by telling Orren
+that many of the known criminals had disappeared, not to be found
+anywhere in Phoride.
+
+Orren had revealed this observation to Manguino when he went to his
+office to tell him that he should start arming himself.
+
+Manguino listened to Orren, even though Orren was beginning to get on
+his nerves, and he agreed to prepare himself.
+
+"I wouldn't have to do this if you didn't bring on this craziness!"
+the Archbishop said to
+
+Orren, making certain that Orren knew that he would never be forgiven
+for his act of disobedience towards him.
+
+"I had considered these criminals some time ago, when the renovations
+of the Blue Mansion were taking place, and those men used them.  It
+strikes me as odd that these criminals have begun to vanish.  There
+must be a reason for it!"
+
+Orren paced around the office then sat down in the large chair in front
+of the ArchBishop's desk, as he spoke.  He watched the ArchBishop's
+face.  It was a as stern and rugged as he once knew it to be and Orren
+believed that Manguino had accepted what was happening to Phoride and
+himself.
+
+"It's my opinion that we need a show of merciless strength, here in
+Phoride, in order to avert internal rebellion."  Manguino finally said
+to Orren while he stood before him.
+
+Orren looked up at him from the chair and had an expression of deep
+thought.
+
+"How do you suggest we do this, Holiness?"  Orren inquired.  He was
+calm and she still respected Manguino, even though the problem between
+them was severe a few nights ago.
+
+"Those criminals that have not disappeared;  Cardinal Hint's men will
+round them up and take them to the square for execution."  he answered
+Orren.
+
+Orren's expression still showed deep thought and he took a deep breath
+and sighed.
+
+"Do you think that executing those criminals is a good idea?"
+
+"I have had enough people executed to be sure that I am doing rightly
+with this decision."  answered Manguino.  "It's too late, anyway, to
+turn compassionate!"
+
+Orren thought so, too, and he made a little jerky nod and rose to his
+feet.
+
+"I want you to do it, immediately, Cardinal Orren!"
+
+"I had presumed as much, Almighty One!"
+
+Orren exited the office, heading for his own command office near the
+defence room.
+
+He dressed in his command uniform and headed for the defence room where
+some high cardinals and officers waited for him.
+
+His uniform was impressive and frightening.  His helmet was high and
+sickle shaped, that went from the front to the back.  On the crest of
+the helmet, below the sickle, was a small ridge that looked like the
+knots of a rope.  Sticking out from these knots were many barb-like
+pins, about finger length.  It looked menacing when it was on his head
+and especially when he wore his chromium armour with it.
+
+He stepped into the defence room and stood at the front of the room
+beside a large table.
+
+"We have been instructed to take and execute what criminals we can find
+and use this act as a show of our strength.  The Almighty feels that by
+doing this, it will deter any possible rebellion from within the city."
+
+Cardinal Orren stood there, resembling a majestic statue of a demigod,
+waiting for the men that he spoke to, to ask him questions.  To his
+surprise, the men in the room accepted the ArchBishop's suggestion and
+so were not opposed to the performance of the order.
+
+"Seeing that there are no questions or statements to be made, we should
+go ahead with the order, immediately."
+
+Orren left the room and went up to the cathedral's spire and gazed over
+the entire city of Pomperaque, as-well-as some of the surrounding
+countryside.  The beauty of the panorama before him faded within his
+heart.  What he observed was no longer that to which he had become
+accustomed.  Everything looked dark and ominous even with the sun
+shining brightly overhead.
+
+Scores of criminals were rounded-up and chained.  They were herded,
+like cattle to a slaughterhouse, to the town's square.  Many of them
+guessed what was going to happen but they couldn't believe it, and
+yet, there was a remarkable absence of fear within them.
+
+The citizens of Pomperaque were already beginning to gather in the
+square.  They, too, displayed no great fear.  This disturbed Orren to
+his very core.  He was certain the people would be touched by the
+event.  There have been countless executions in Phoride, ordered by the
+ArchBishop, but always there was some semblance of trial.  This time
+all the deaths were to be summary but there was no outcry.
+
+The criminals knew that something unpleasant was about to happen.  They
+realised, immediately, there was no trial.  Nevertheless they remained
+calm and oddly curious to what was about to happen to them.  Not one of
+the criminals -- man or woman -- struggled against the monastic guards
+who were fastening their arms and legs to the shock wall.
+
+Word had finally reached the Blue Mansion and the hundreds of men
+within its underground passages.  Everyone had a friend or relative
+that was about to be killed.  Many felt they could no longer wait with
+their new leaders, to prevent the carnage.
+
+Soon, five of them made their way out through the shorter passage, to
+the south east, to where the sea coves on Canon's Butte hides the exit.
+
+Mingo, Bix and three other men circled around the butte and through the
+back streets on their way to the square.  They merged with the crowd
+forming there then remained in their one place, watching everything
+that was transpiring and waiting for Orren to arrive.
+
+Orren was riding slowly from Halls and could be seen approaching, like
+a demon on a cloud,
+
+his armour glinting ominously with every fall of his horse's hooves.
+
+Boyce was told by Cavander that Mingo, Bix and several others had gone
+to the square.
+
+"They were afraid for their people, my Lord.  They couldn't wait for
+you!"
+
+For a moment, Boyce was angered.  Lloyd, as well, especially when they
+found out that those men had taken with them the new electrophore-laser
+weapons, issued to them.
+
+"I suppose this changes our plans somewhat!"  Lloyd stated.
+
+"It does but we'll have to go with it, now."  Boyce replied as they
+made their way to the viewing den.  "I sent Cavander to keep them from
+using their weapons too soon, in case something goes wrong and helps
+Orren's army to prepare itself for our attack.  I just pray that he
+gets to them quickly."
+
+"That was a wise precaution!"  Lloyd praised Boyce's tactical handling
+of this little inconvenience.
+
+They entered the viewing den and Boyce opened the cabinet and its
+secret space, revealing their treasure of armour and weapons.
+
+They donned their armour and set their weapons in their respective
+holsters.  Their laser rifles were strapped onto their right legs, the
+hand guns on their right hip belts and their sabres were hanging on
+their left side.   They were ready for battle and they quickly made
+their way down tot he rear base of Bimini Hill where Tellis was keeping
+watch on the eagles.
+
+Tellis was not surprised with their requests for him to prepare the
+birds for immediate flight.  He didn't ask any questions or said a
+word.  He did what he was told and he waited for further orders.
+
+The saddle harnesses were quickly but effectively put on the eagles
+and Boyce ordered Tellis to go to the passages and order all those
+inside to attack the army and the guards near the centre of the city.
+
+Tellis ran up the hill and into the mansion.
+
+Orren had arrived at the square and he quietly looked at the people
+while Cardinal Hint and his police, the monastic Guards, were grouping
+the prisoners into fours and lining up two on each side of the shock
+wall.
+
+Motorized freight cars moved near to the square and slaves were brought
+also, to heave the carcasses of the prisoners into the cars for
+shipment to the city incinerators.
+
+Orren straightened up and motioned to the executioners and several
+dozen criminals were killed, each group of four being brutally forced
+in front of the wall, and attached to it, after seeing their friends
+killed.  Yet, even with this, the people in the square did not respond
+with fear.
+
+Orren motioned again and the executioners stopped.  He turned tot he
+people and hollered to them.
+
+"It was a divine order ... every criminal should be executed.  It's an
+example of what will happen to anyone that is disloyal or rebellious to
+the ArchBishop's ways."  he said to them.
+
+Mingo and Bix had tears in their eyes and the three other men moved to
+the back of Orren without being seen.
+
+"Conspiracy and treason will be dealt with harshly, in the same manner
+as you all witness here, today.  There will be no trials and even those
+who are only suspected of wrong doings towards Halls, will be executed."
+
+Rising up behind the Blue Mansion were the two men on their eagles,
+riding on the base of the eagles' necks.  They circled overhead,
+surprisingly unnoticed by those below them, and they were soon joined
+by Zoro, circling with them.  Boyce was pleased to have Zoro near him,
+as luck.
+
+Orren ordered more criminals to be killed and a dozen more men fell
+and were thrown into the freight cars as if they were piles of
+excrement being shovelled into a pit.
+
+There was aloud cry that came from the midst of the crowd and everyone
+turned to it.
+
+"DEATH TO ALL AT HALLS - DAMN THE ARCHBISHOP!!"
+
+The cry was coming from Mingo and he began to fire his
+electrophore-laser towards Orren.
+
+Orren was hit a few times but wasn't hurt, the chromium armour
+protecting him from the blasts.  He was astonished to see that this
+man, who he recognized as the thief, Mingo, possessed that kind of
+weapon.
+
+Soon, several more blasts were heard and Mingo fell dead, along with
+his brother.  The others charged Orren, creaming death-cries, but Orren
+swung his horse around and brandished his sword at them, cutting them
+down, too.
+
+"Get their weapons!"  Orren ordered the nearest guard and the guard
+fetched them, but when he reached the dead men, there were no weapons
+at any one of the five bodies.
+
+"Everyone here will die if those weapons are not recovered!"  he
+threatened.
+
+Above him was heard a ridiculous cawing and Orren looked up to see
+Boyce and Lloyd, in battle dress, gliding down towards him, with that
+wretched crow beside them.
+
+Lloyd screamed down to him.  "Will you die as easily by my hand, as did
+your father?"
+
+Orren's eyes studied the two men's battle garb and he saw Boyce's
+feather-like, black onyx epaulettes.  His attention, however, quickly
+focused upon Lloyd.  An instant hatred overtook him at Lloyd's
+admission of killing the Cardinal Allen, his father.
+
+"You will die, whoever you are and whatever devil had sent you here!"
+
+"It is obvious that you are a progeny of a whore and a mad dog,
+Orren!"  Lloyd screamed down at him.  "Get on your knees before the
+son of Brook Scullion-Blue."  Lloyd yelled to him and pointed at
+Boyce.
+
+A buzz rang through the crowd but it sounded both panicked and somewhat
+pleased.  This caught Orren's attention, immediately.
+
+"I kneel to no man!"  maintained the Cardinal.
+
+"You do when you kiss the ArchBishop's anus!"  Lloyd taunted Orren and
+Zoro cawed in a frenzy.
+
+"You will die, scum!"  declared the Cardinal.
+
+"We will see, little man -- and my name is Lloyd Bartlett!"
+
+When he heard the name, Orren knew that this was the son of Harvard
+Bartlett, and he was indeed the one that killed his father.
+
+Lloyd brought forth the rifle from his leg holster and shot at the
+Cardinal, toppling his horse out from under him and sending him into a
+pile of corpses heaped beside the shock wall.
+
+Orren got to his feet and ordered the guards to shoot them down but,
+Boyce took his eagle and flew to the east, over the butte.
+
+It was a godsend to Boyce that the armies of the alignment had reached
+the Joenine Forest.
+
+The commotion had drawn curious eyes from those religious citizens of
+Gothal.  Lilith had a perfect view of the assembling army and she
+finally caught sight of who she knew to be her beloved husband, with
+Zoro still by his side.
+
+Boyce landed and arranged for a short aerial battle to divert the
+monastic force's attention from the army that would charge into the
+city by surprise.
+
+There was only some dozen eagles for this stage of the attack.  The
+scores of eagles that were to fight were scheduled as the second wave
+that were to arrive tomorrow, but at least the cavalry was only an
+hour away.
+
+Boyce hoped that Halls wouldn't know what hit them even considering the
+strange forewarning that they had for the invasion.
+
+While Boyce was quickly taking charge of the operations from the
+Joenine Forest, Lloyd had flown across the open ocean to find the
+Bestenese navy.  Before long he found them.  The fleet was amassing
+several kilometres to the south east of the Phoridene cost.
+
+He landed on the flag ship and let the fleet commander know that they
+could make their way to Phoride, for a landing and their attack.
+
+He soon made his way back to Pomperaque.
+
+By this time, one of the high cardinals suggested to the ArchBishop
+that Lloyd had not flown out to sea for no reason and that there was
+probably an armada out there, somewhere.
+
+With this suggestion, Orren was ordered t secure the coastline and he
+had one man placed every twenty meters on the southern shore.
+
+If any kind of attack was to come from the sea, these soldiers would
+sink the modes of transportation, while still in the deep, annihilating
+the enemy.
+
+Boyce was flying back towards the city as the sun began to make its way
+towards the far horizon.
+
+Lloyd flew back to Halls and fought, from the air, with a few of the
+monastic guards that were there, keeping the ArchBishop safe.
+
+Manguino was watching the entire show but he felt no real emotion for
+either side.
+
+Cardinal Orren had come back to Halls after the two men flew off.  He
+watched the battle
+
+with Manguino and he was frustrated and furious.
+
+"Look at those stupid fools!"  he said to Manguino about his own
+guards.  "They don't know what to do but die like rats in a burning
+pit."
+
+"I do not worry.  We will be victorious here, as always!"  said
+Manguino, actually believing it.  "I will give each of my men some of
+my godly power and I will fight through them!"
+
+"You do that -- but meanwhile I have to find some way to destroy their
+birds.  Now their cavalry has come in.  We have to regroup without
+their aerial observation of it."  huffed the cardinal.
+
+"Why don't we just shoot the birds?  That shouldn't be too difficult!"
+Manguino suggested.
+
+"Our weapons don't have the range to shoot the birds that high up!"
+
+He sat down for a moment and removed his great helmet and ran his
+fingers though his sweaty hair.
+
+Manguino went to his desk and opened a side of it revealing a hidden
+recess.  He took off a couple support bolts, a huge cross bow, similar
+to those that Boyce and Lloyd possessed.
+
+He took it to the window and aimed at Lloyd's eagle as he soared by,
+and he shot the longest and thickest arrow, right at the bird.
+
+The arrow pierced its way right though the bird and it convulsed in
+mid-air, and began to fall.
+
+Lloyd was caught by surprise for a moment but he glided the bird to the
+road leading up to Halls.
+
+He jumped off the great bird before the bird buried itself into the
+soft earth at the road side and he ran for cover as the guards, station
+above upon the quadrangle wall, shot down at him.
+
+Boyce swooped down from above and wiped out the men from the wall and
+Zoro cawed in victory, directed at Lloyd.
+
+He and Boyce waved back to one another and Lloyd ran to the centre of
+town, followed by Boyce, above him.  By this time the great mass of the
+people that congregated down in the square were embroiled in the
+battle.  Few were fighting on the side of Halls and the square was
+quickly secured.
+
+Orren sent several of Hint's men, mounted on horses, to pursue Boyce.
+Each of them carried a cross bow and they road headlong towards the
+town, after Boyce.
+
+The entire city was nightmarish in appearance.  Like an abstract
+picture, a foggy dream, it was dark out but parts of the horizon was
+purple and orange colour, and it looked like it was aflame with yellow
+and blood red.
+
+The entire sky was filled with birds, most of them white in colour and
+they shimmered when their flapping wings caught the remaining twilight
+and hurled it back towards Phoride, and Pomperaque.
+
+Boyce flew by a tall building and set down on the flat roof of another
+nearby.  He looked over the ghastly empty city and announced his mind
+to it.
+
+"PHORIDENES!  Come out and fight for peace!  Come out and fight for the
+memory of your beloved Brook Scullion-Blue!  Come out and fight, for me
+-- his son!"
+
+He took off from the roof top and quickly rose and swung around the
+tall building again.
+
+Lloyd watched him from an alley near the square and he also saw the
+horsemen with the cross bows.
+
+They dismounted and took a circular position, facing outward and
+upward.  They raised their cross bows into the air and waited for Boyce
+to get closer.
+
+Lloyd took aim with his electrophore and shot them but before they
+fell dead, two of the men let go with their arrows and their arrows
+found their mark.
+
+Boyce's eagle writhed in pain and heaved in the air and Boyce could not
+control it.  The bird collided with the tall building nearby and threw
+Boyce over the rock railing of the building's main balcony.
+
+Lloyd watched it all and soon became extremely worried when Boyce
+didn't show himself, and there was the Cardinal Orren riding to the
+square with five other men, their own electrophores blazing their trail.
+
+
+CHAPTER FORTY
+
+Lloyd was extremely concerned for his friend so he sprinted over to the
+building, to help him.
+
+It was almost totally dark when he reached the building.
+
+Lloyd saw that Orren and the five other horsemen weren't far off, and
+as a matter of fact, were so near that s he climbed up the stairs
+inside the building, he could hear Orren's order to his men, to bring
+him the head of the enemy leader.
+
+Lloyd couldn't let this happen.
+
+He finally made it to the balcony and he peered through the gaps in the
+rock railing as the horsemen dismounted and headed towards the
+entrance, below.
+
+Lloyd couldn't bring Boyce to consciousness.  Boyce had been hurt and
+Lloyd knew that  he was passed out because of the pain.
+
+Boyce's entire left shoulder was bleeding through his armour.
+
+Lloyd had to get Boyce back to the mansion and have him bandaged up
+there.  First, however, he had to make the squad below him less of a
+threat.  He drew his gun, leaned over the railing and started to fire
+down on them.  He managed to kill two of the men but the rest
+retreated with Orren, out of range from Lloyd's weapon.
+
+When they became calmed and after they regrouped, they charged the
+building but then quickly turned and retreated back to Halls.
+
+Lloyd was astounded then he looked up into the dark northern skies
+towards the strange thunderous clapping and searing whistling.  He saw
+a great squadron of Kenttitian Eagles being led by Empal.
+
+The eagles circled the city over the square.
+
+The men controlling them weren't aware of Boyce and Lloyd below them,
+but they did see Orren's squad (or what was left of it), quickly
+withdrawing to the relative safety of Halls.
+
+Some of them attacked Halls and others continued to circle.
+
+This gave Lloyd the perfect opportunity to take his best friend back to
+the Blue Mansion.
+
+Boyce had luckily regained consciousness and got to his feet with
+Lloyd's help.
+
+"I saw you crash into this building."  Lloyd told him, then gently
+touched his shoulder.  "Does it hurt very much?"
+
+Boyce painfully looked into Lloyd's eyes and smiled.
+
+"Just when I laugh ..."  he said, then continued.  " ... what do you
+think?"
+
+They smiled at one another and Lloyd helped Boyce to slowly descend
+the stairs, while he watched out for the enemy.
+
+For further protection he had Boyce keep his helmet on and his gun out.
+
+The thrill of the fight and the accident was still with both men and
+Boyce didn't really feel the pain in his shoulder because of it.
+
+He was sluggish in his movement but he didn't have to be totally held
+up by Lloyd.  All he needed was to be steadied by his friend while they
+rumbled up the road, back towards the Blue Mansion.
+
+They were just about to reach the door of the mansion when there was a
+sudden escalation of fighting centred around Canon's Butte, but slowly
+spreading to the mansion's side of the city.
+
+The Virunese were firing electrophora and lasers down at the monastic
+army that had a regiment of archers that were quickly grouped by Orren
+for the fight against the eagle power.
+
+There was a huge, hot orange colour rising from behind Halls and the
+butte.
+
+Lloyd felt devastated because he knew that the colours could only mean
+the unsuccessful landing of the Bestenese navy.
+
+The great glow of the sky suggested to him that most of the navy was
+burning.
+
+Bursts of laser shot over Halls from the other side.  At least some of
+the force had landed and was engaged in a battle and Lloyd did so wish,
+with all his heart, that his friends from besten would be triumphant.
+
+He helped Boyce into a large room that faced Halls.  The room was being
+used as a hospital, to help those who were severely wounded.
+
+Boyce was cared for by Cavander and it was good news for both him and
+Lloyd.
+
+Boyce wasn't very badly hurt, only having cut up his shoulder like a
+deep scrape.
+
+Cavander told him that he would have to take it easy for a few hours.
+
+Lloyd agreed with Cavander that Boyce should get some sleep, promising
+Boyce that he could handle the situation out there.  Boyce was sure of
+that and subsequently submitted to their request for his rest.
+
+The fighting that was at the butte and the square had now spread to the
+mansion itself.  Several companies of men were inside the mansion, kept
+there on the off chance that the mansion would be subjected to a siege
+and they all readied themselves when they saw that the monastic army
+was steadily moving closer to the building.
+
+The Virunese, on their eagles, were dropping out of the skies, being
+shot down by both electrophoric charges and arrows.
+
+The fighting continued unbroken and soon those within the mansion were
+trying to keep the ArchBishop's armies from getting within reach of the
+doors and windows.
+
+The outside of the building was pitted with holes and cracks, as well
+as burns, caused by the bolts of electrophora and laser heat, from the
+enemy.
+
+From all those men shot down from the sky, Orren had commanded that
+their weapons be taken and used on them.  Soon the two armies were
+closer to equal in their advantage over each other, but Orren's men
+fought harder as if the devil was in each of them.
+
+Boyce slept as he was asked to and he didn't seem aware of the trouble
+that was breaking all around him.
+
+Lloyd had gone through the wall in the viewing den, taking the short
+underground passage to the cove exit, on the shore behind the butte.
+
+He took off his helmet as he looked across the glassy ocean and saw
+that a few ships retreating from battle, while most of them burned on
+the rocks which rose out of the water.
+
+The bodies of dead Bestenese were everywhere, with only a few of the
+bodies being those of the monastic armies.
+
+He noticed that the powerful weapons, made for Boyce's cause, were
+nowhere to be seen, and he had no doubt that the enemy was now using
+them.
+
+He looked up at the evil shape of Halls, reaching to the pitch black
+sky above him.
+
+Monastics were no longer keeping an eye on the shore line.  They
+believed that the Bestenese would never come back to shore for more of
+the same defeat that they had already suffered.
+
+Lloyd was having doubts about seeing those who retreated, coming back
+for another go at out-flanking the ArchBishop.  He didn't blame them,
+though.
+
+He put his helmet back on his head and slowly walked to the base of the
+butte and started to climb the rocks.
+
+The take over of Pomperaque, which both Boyce and Lloyd wanted to
+accomplish with the minimum of blood shed had become a blood bath.
+
+Unknown to Orren's army, half of the Krolalin cavalry was held back
+from the initial battle.  Now, however, under Tucker's capable
+leadership, the cavalry charged through Pomperaque from the north and
+began to annihilate the army that had the Blue Mansion under attack.
+
+Orren retreated, with a few other high cardinals, back to the Halls
+Cathedral.  They were soon followed by monastic lieutenants leading
+their own battalions back to the relative safety of Halls' quadrangle.
+
+The men, fighting from the inside of the Blue Mansion, were relieved to
+see the cavalry because the energy charges that they did have in
+reserve, for their weapons, were all drained of their power during the
+battle around the mansion.
+
+The cavalry spared a few dozen charges for the men within and a small
+celebration was started to express their pleasure at still being
+alive.  Everyone took the opportunity to eat something while the
+retreat armies stayed away planning their next attack phase.
+
+Lloyd had found his way into the Halls Cathedral and trying to keep
+himself from being see, he searched as many rooms as he could, looking
+for manguino or someone that was closest to him.
+
+Tucker had made a decision to attack the Halls Cathedral with the help
+of Empal and what was left of the Virunese air support.
+
+Word was sent to the Bestenese commander of the retreating naval fleet,
+which was comprised of only five ships (from an original compliment of
+fifty), and he agreed to give his landing another try, but farther up
+the shore.
+
+The attack was swift and they caught Halls by surprise.
+
+Tucker's cavalry hit them straight on while Empal's air force struck
+them from above, and the navy hit them from behind after the cliffs on
+the butte's north eastern side.
+
+The battle escalated into a full conflict, and soon, both sides no
+longer had any power left in their energy cells.  This didn't stop the
+battle however.  In fact it spurred the fighting into more of a
+hand-to-hand mode, with swords and supportive cross bows.
+
+As the fighting continued and turned more bloody, the moon began to
+rise over the Joenine Forest, adding a silvery-blue light to the arena
+of fighting, and giving the entire city the look of a necropolis, with
+bands of demons fighting over its control.
+
+Boyce was looking out the window of the hospital room and was wondering
+how Lloyd was doing in battle.
+
+Lloyd was wondering if Boyce was awake and fighting, but soon, this
+wondering left him when he found the largest and most luxurious looking
+bed chamber of those that he'd looked into.
+
+He silently crept into the room, making certain that he wasn't seen,
+and he slowly walked while he cautiously drew his sabre.  He looked
+ominous in his armour and parts of it did scrape and screech with
+every step that he made.
+
+"Come in!"  said a ratty feminine voice.
+
+Eckma was in the chamber with her and Manguino's only living child.
+
+The child was less than a year old and there was nothing physically
+wrong with it, and it acted normally but to Lloyd the child seemed to
+have a presence of evil emanating from it.
+
+It wasn't a weak presence of evil, either.  It was much like the light
+of a candle in a dark void, even seen for miles.
+
+He followed the voice until he passed through some heavy blood-red
+drapes and saw Eckma lying naked on a huge round shaped bed, with the
+child beside her.
+
+Cardinal Polis, the physician, hadn't given her a capsule of the age
+retardant drug, because of his prior commitment to the war.  Now, sores
+were returning to many parts of her body and she picked at them.
+
+Lloyd felt nauseous looking at her doing it and he didn't particularly
+get very excited when she took to stroking the fleshy layers of her
+vagina with her forefinger.
+
+"The stories about you are true ... you are foul looking!"  he said to
+her.
+
+She sat up quickly with anger on her face, only to recline again, with
+a smile.
+
+"Come to my bed, dear warrior.  Let me touch you!"  she called him to
+her and almost unnoticeably spread her legs a little wider.
+
+"Cover yourself, bitch.  Man was not meant to fornicate with animals!"
+
+She still smiled.  She was apparently moved by him.
+
+Besides Manguino, Lloyd is the only other man that she has felt like
+taking into herself.
+
+His toughness and gruff manner towards her made her quiver all over
+with anticipation.
+
+"You can hit me, if you so wish.  You can rape me.  I will not make a
+sound even if you decide to bludgeon me!"  she told him.
+
+"You wretched evil hag.  You sexless bacterial malignancy!   One such
+as you cannot be allowed to live!"
+
+Lloyd grabbed the baby by its leg and cut the baby in half, in front of
+Eckma's eyes.  After he did that, he cut the halves in half and did so
+again.
+
+Eckma was terrified of him now and as he went for her, with his sabre,
+she let out a curdling scream that carried above the battle noise and
+throughout all of Halls.
+
+Eckma became hysterical until Lloyd silenced her similarly to ridding
+the earth of her evil child.
+
+Manguino was watching the battle from his office window and Orren
+called the battle tactics from a balcony, halfway up the side of the
+cathedral.
+
+Both men heard the horrific scream and both of them left their
+positions and quickly went towards Manguino's bed chamber.
+
+Lloyd had entirely hacked up the bodies of Eckma and the child until
+all that was left of them was bloody flesh, severed bones, and pieces
+of internal organs strewn all over the bed.
+
+Manguino and Orren met one another in the long hallway that led to the
+main chamber and they didn't say anything to one another.  They just
+continued on their way until they reached the ArchBishop's room.
+
+They bowled through the door and pushed their way through the curtains
+to where the bed was.
+
+Lloyd, in his beautiful armour turned around when he heard the noise
+and he saw the cardinal dressed in his battle garb and Manguino in his
+robes.
+
+Manguino didn't seem to be overly disturbed seeing that his wife and
+child were mutilated.
+
+"Thank-you!"  Manguino said to Lloyd.  "I was getting tired of her,
+anyway!"
+
+"May the true living God forgive me for murder but evil must be
+destroyed.  In my life I served my God and I served my earthly king and
+friend, Boyce Loebh Scullion-Blue.  In death I shall only serve my
+God!"  stated Lloyd.
+
+"If you will!"  replied Manguino to Lloyd's statement, the looked at
+Orren and pointed his finger at Lloyd.
+
+Orren raised his cross bow at Lloyd.
+
+"The murder of my father, the Cardinal Allen, is avenged."  he said
+then he shot Lloyd.
+
+Lloyd didn't fall though.  He stood straight and firm; his blood
+gushing from where the arrow penetrated his armour, right through to
+his back, and he even spoke.
+
+"Your father's death was its own revenge!"  Lloyd said to Orren, with
+blood spattering from out of his mouth.  "You will not live Orren."
+Lloyd fell to one knee and Orren shot him a second time, nearer the
+heart, but lloyd continued before he fell forward.  "You won't lice in
+the next life!"
+
+While Lloyd lay dead on the floor, in a pool of scarlet that spread
+about him, Orren put another arrow into his cross bow and shot the body
+once more time.
+
+When he did that a surprising shriek was heard and Zoro flew around the
+room three times.
+
+Orren ran after it brandishing his sword, trying to hit it in mid air,
+but Zoro flew out of the window and towards the Mansion.
+
+There was a very long pole that kept a canopy of lace up over the round
+bed, and Orren
+
+pulled it down.  He cut off Lloyd's head, after taking the gallant
+helmet off of the corpse and he shoved the head onto one end of the
+pole.
+
+Orren and a party of men then made their way slowly from Halls to the
+Blue Mansion, carrying the pole with Lloyd's head mounted on it.
+
+The fighting had subsided, and the electric twang of the electrophore
+weapons was no longer heard.  Only far in the background there could be
+heard the tinny sound of hand-to-hand sword fighting.
+
+At the base of the cobbled walkway, leading up to the mansion, some
+twenty meters from the main door, Orren and his men planted the headed
+pole and left it there.
+
+
+CHAPTER FORTY-ONE
+
+The first rays of sunlight illuminated the wisps and billows of smoke
+that rose from the damaged city.  With every passing minute the sun
+rose higher into the morning sky, lighting the pole that was standing
+at the head of the cobble walkway.  Soon, there was enough light to
+reveal the head that was on top of the pole, bringing out of the
+mansion several dozen men including Boyce, carrying his cross bow in
+his left hand.  His left shoulder was in great pain but he was forcing
+himself to make use of it.
+
+He walked out tall and straight, and from somewhere above, Zoro flapped
+his way down onto Boyce's other shoulder.  It made no sound as the men
+slowly walked towards the pole, with Lloyd's head mounted atop it.
+
+There was an odd, colourful aura around the head, probably caused by
+the play of the sun's light, but Boyce believed, with his whole heart,
+that it was God's presence blessing his dead friend.
+
+The sounds of battle started up again in the distance.  Electrophora
+blared and thunderous sounds followed.
+
+Looking in the direction of the battle's origin, which was north, Boyce
+and his men saw laser light being shot into the air, and they knew that
+it could only mean one thing -- the second invasion wave had arrived in
+Pomperaque, as planned.
+
+Boyce fell to his knees and wailed, mourning his fallen friend and
+teacher, while he still held onto his cross bow.
+
+His cries rose above the thunderous clamour of combat that was drawing
+nearer to the city.
+
+The young sovereign finally rose to his feet again and looked at Halls
+with an ultimate contempt that he summoned from his soul.
+
+His eyes had tears in them, and they were red and painful looking.  He
+spat on the ground and took his sabre from its casement and lifted it
+to the air.
+
+Boyce took a few steps passed the head of his dead friend, and in a
+voice that carried through the entire city, he yelled at those in Halls.
+
+"Dirt of the world! -- Fornicators of men and animals! -- Oppressive
+son-of-whores and satyrs! -- Welcomers of saturnine thought! -- You
+foul children of Satan!"  Boyce cussed at them.  "Maybe you all die in
+the most prolonged and torturous pain!"
+
+The fighting stopped as the battalions came upon the centre of the city
+and heard Boyce's booming anger shake all that was around.
+
+Zoro quietly left Boyce's shoulder and then disappeared, unnoticed.
+
+"Prepare yourself for damnation, Manguino.  You will die, Orren!"
+
+Boyce's hollering sounded like a promise, more than it did threatening,
+and he slid his sabre back into its scabbard.
+
+He began to walk towards Halls with the men that came out of the
+mansion with him.
+
+Those coenobites at Halls were all lined up on the wall of the
+quadrangle looking towards Boyce, when he yelled.
+
+Cardinal Orren stood in plain sight and watched Boyce slowly approach
+with his men.
+
+Manguino had listened to Boyce, also, from his office window and he was
+discomfited by it.  He waited for Orren to return to his office.  He
+needed advice on what to do with himself because he could not easily
+think on his own.
+
+Orren waited for Boyce to reach the wall where he stood and he had
+ordered his guards not to fire at him.  He stood on the wall dressed in
+his chromium armour and impressive helmet and he stared at Boyce as he
+stood at the base of the wall in his own majestic armour and helmet.
+
+This was the first time that Orren actually had a good look at this
+man's battle garb.  This time he was certain that he saw on his
+shoulders the black wing-like epaulettes bringing to mind the  'black
+feathers'  line, in Jessuum's prophesy.
+
+"We had known from the beginning,"  said Orren.  "that you were not to
+be trusted!"
+
+He looked at Boyce while he spoke and Boyce had a strange smirk on his
+face when he responded.
+
+"It only means your own downfall, and don't stay under the
+misconception that you will live to see the end of this day!"
+
+Orren laughed at Boyce, pointing at him, at the same instant.
+
+"Your threats will lead you to the same end as your Bestenese friend!"
+said the cardinal.  "It is to our utmost disappointment that the
+ArchBishop didn't let us destroy you when we first suspected you!"
+
+Boyce shook his head in defiance.
+
+"My uncle Manguino has never been very intelligent, and you can cease
+that elitist way of talking because it doesn't become you!"
+
+There was silence for a moment while they exchanged hate-filled glares.
+
+Boyce took a deep breath and called Manguino out to fight.
+
+"Manguino!"  he called then waited.  "Uncle! -- Come and we will settle
+this war's outcome between ourselves!"
+
+There was no answer and Boyce looked at Orren, laughing menacingly at
+him.
+
+"He will not answer you!"  Orren told Boyce.  "He will not fight
+either, and why should he?  He has hundreds of us to fight you for him!"
+
+"Then let me fight each of you until only he remains!"  Boyce said
+provokingly.
+
+Orren shook his head at Boyce and tisked at him.
+
+"Don't you know about the laws of nature, son of Brook?"  he tauntingly
+asked him.  "The strong survive while the weak die!"
+
+" -- And my God's universal law says that  'good shall destroy evil'
+-- so shall I destroy you, and all those who follow you!"
+
+There was silence again, for a brief moment until Boyce yelled to
+Manguino again.
+
+"My uncle, ArchBishop!  Coward of the world and Evil incarnate.
+Come and do battle with me, alone!"
+
+Once more there was no answer from within the cathedral.  This time
+Orren was bothered by it.  The people could not be allowed to see the
+ArchBishop as a coward.  He looked down at Boyce then mentioned to some
+of his high cardinals to come nearer.
+
+Boyce raised his cross bow at Orren, and Orren's men did the same
+directed back at him.
+
+"I will see him, Boyce.  We will speak again within the hour!"
+
+Orren and two of his high cardinals left the wall and Boyce waited for
+Orren to return.
+
+Before Orren went into the cathedral he told his high cardinals to
+watch Boyce from another vantage point in insure that he doesn't attack.
+
+"If he attacks, destroy him!"
+
+The order was plain and simple, but Boyce didn't attack.  Even when his
+men suggested to him that they charge all of them with surprise.
+
+Boyce didn't want to.  He knew that something grave would occur if he
+did something.  Anyway, he had come too far to let stupidity ruin all
+the sacrifices that he and his dead friend had made, in order to regain
+the Blue sovereignty.
+
+Orren entered the ArchBishop's office and saw him standing at the
+window dressed in a purple robe with a scarlet surplice thrown over it.
+
+He didn't say anything for the first while but he eventually glanced
+over at Orren then looked out the window again.
+
+"I wonder what it would be like, to be killed by a relative?"  Manguino
+asked but not looking for any answer.
+
+Nevertheless, Orren moved closer to him and asked a question in the
+same manner.  "How did it feel to kill a relative?"
+
+Manguino grinned and slightly turned to the cardinal.
+
+"I've wondered that for ten years!"  he said to him and he snickered
+under his breath.
+
+Cardinal Orren went over to the window and faced Manguino peering
+through the window.
+
+"You don't want to fight him?"  Orren stated to him.
+
+Manguino just looked at him and whimpered.
+
+"Where can I go, or what's more, when and how?"
+
+Orren thought for a moment then sighed.
+
+"The old place ... the citadel at Tannisea, but you will have to go
+alone and around the southern coast."
+
+"The route to Tannisea is long and dangerous, Orren.  Especially is the
+southern coastal loop is taken."
+
+Orren touched Manguino's shoulder.
+
+"It's either that or you have to fight Boyce!"
+
+"That's quite a choice!"  said Manguino.
+
+"I will take your place while you get along to Tannisea."  said Orren.
+"I'll send you word when to return.  That son of Brook Scullion-Blue
+cannot win."
+
+Manguino took a deep breath and looked out the window again when he
+heard Boyce's voice calling him out to fight.
+
+"Your time is running out, Manguino.  Come fight me or Halls will
+crumble, never to rise again!"
+
+Orren looked out of the window, too.
+
+"I told him, an hour."  said Orren.  "I think that he is trying to
+frighten you!"
+
+"He's his father, all over again."  Manguino stated to Orren then
+leaned his head against the wall by the window.
+
+"Prepare yourself to leave.  When I fight him, all will watch and you
+will be able to get away."
+
+It was strange that Orren was seemingly guiding the ArchBishop's life.
+After all the years that Manguino, as ArchBishop, was the undisputed
+ruler of Phoride, he had fallen to a level of mind that very closely
+resembled that of an idiot.
+
+Orren has really been the one man, who had been controlling Phoride
+since Manguino's marriage and unending fornication with Eckma.
+
+Orren didn't care on way or the other about his idea that the
+ArchBishop's unending years of debauchery and perversion had effected
+his mind.  Whether or not that was true was beside the point, right now.
+
+This god's survival was at stake.  He couldn't let someone like Boyce
+show that he was nothing more than a physical and mental weakling.
+
+Orren helped Manguino pack a survival travel bag and saw him off at his
+personal tunnel that exited, at an isolated cove, on the southern most
+part of Pomperaque.
+
+With good-byes that were neither sad nor elated, the Cardinal Orren
+closed off the passage and went back to the courtyard, in front of the
+chapel.  He was dressed in his same battle armour and before leaving
+the safety of Halls' enclosed quadrangle he instructed his high
+cardinals to destroy Boyce and his men, if he is beaten.  He also told
+them to destroy the entire city of Pomperaque is he doesn't survive the
+combat with Boyce.
+
+Boyce had given Tucker and Empal similar instructions, as well, but
+Boyce's instructions didn't call for the total destruction of his city,
+if he lost against Orren.  His instructions only called for the
+destruction of the Halls Cathedral.
+
+"Let not one stone remain standing on this butte!"  he told them and
+waited until his rival came to him.
+
+He finally heard the heavy gates of the wall clang and screech open.
+
+He watched the huge doors swing inward and soon after they stopped
+moving, he saw his personal rival come out ti fight him.
+
+There was a great disappointment and feeling of being cheated in
+Boyce's heart when he saw that the man he was about to fight was the
+Cardinal Orren instead of the ArchBishop Manguino.
+
+"What's this, Orren?  I had called on Manguino to fight with me." Boyce
+said in anger.
+
+Orren drew nearer, his chromium armour reflecting the morning sun.
+
+He was carrying a cross bow in his left hand and he looked as if he was
+equally matched, weapon-wise, with Boyce.
+
+Many of those watching Orren slowly walking up to Boyce were frightened
+that Boyce would not survive.
+
+Orren looked ominous and indestructible and even though Boyce looked
+like a formidable opponent, his friends were not certain that he would
+be victorious.
+
+"I want Manguino here before me, immediately!"  Boyce demanded and then
+took a few steps towards him.
+
+"As far as you should be concerned, I am the ArchBishop!"  Cardinal
+Orren told him calmly.
+
+Boyce slowly came closer to Orren and he prodded him with his cross
+bow, and with a strangely provoking little smile on his face.
+
+"Am I to take Manguino's cowardice as the surrender of Halls and
+Pomperaque, to me?"
+
+Orren was somewhat disturbed by what Boyce said to him and he pushed
+Boyce's bow away from himself.
+
+"You are out of your mind."  said Orren.  "Halls will never surrender
+to you, or to anyone else.  So long as I live, so long as anyone within
+those walls lives, Halls will not surrender!"
+
+Boyce glared right into Orren's eyes and spoke to him as if he was a
+little boy.
+
+Orren was annoyed by it all but it helped to build his hostility
+towards his young opponent.
+
+"I like watching grown men like you and Manguino throwing little
+tantrums of temper.  What is interesting is that these tantrums affect
+the entire state; where, to relieve your own tension, you have innocent
+men, women and children murdered."
+
+Boyce stopped for a moment, watching Orren's reaction to what he had
+said and saw that he was irritating him.
+
+"You and my uncle put my mansion under siege and yet we left Halls
+alone.  We could've destroyed Halls before this war even began!"
+
+Orren interrupted Boyce's momentum by showing his hostile nature.
+
+"You did have Halls under siege!"  hollered Orren.  "That friend of
+your, that Bestenese, Bartlett ... he had come into Halls and had
+brutally murdered the ArchBishop's wife and son.  That is why I must
+kill you.  I have to avenge their deaths for him as I have avenged the
+death of my father, Cardinal Allen, by killing his murderer!"
+
+He pointed down the road towards the Blue Mansion and the pole with
+Lloyd's head on it.
+
+"You prepare yourself to die, then!"  announced Boyce.  "I have to
+avenge deaths, as well.  I must avenge the deaths of Brook and
+Dearborne and my friend, Lloyd!"
+
+He threw his cross bow to the ground and drew his sabre from its
+scabbard.
+
+"Senseless bloodshed is not the way to fight a war, Cardinal Orren.
+Battle, like this, can be the only way!"
+
+They circled around one another, their eyes locked together in an icy
+stare.
+
+"I take a different view, young Scullion-Blue!"  blurted Orren.
+
+"I know -- so much is the shame!"  replied Boyce just as Orren swung
+his sword down at him.
+
+Boyce caught the attack with his sabre and he spun around deflecting
+Orren's sword out and away from him.
+
+Orren momentarily lost his balance but regained it in time to defend
+himself against Boyce's attack.  They moved around a large area while
+they brandished their blades at one another.
+
+Boyce's men watched-on in worry and with heated excitement, many of
+them twitching and grinding their teeth with each whiz and clang of the
+blades.
+
+The coenobite army watched-on also but they didn't display concern for
+Orren.  Each man's face was expressionless, and they made no movements
+throughout the fight.
+
+"You fight well!"  Orren complimented Boyce.
+
+"Thank-you ..."  Boyce grunted.  " ... and you fight, like a pregnant
+old woman!"
+
+He hurled his sabre horizontally at Orren, but Orren came down on it
+sending the end to the ground and slashed-out at Boyce.
+
+Boyce lurched back in pain.  The armour plating on his chest had a
+large gash in it and blood was spurting out from the cut.
+
+"You will soon die, Boyce.  Be still and I will end it painlessly!'
+Orren offered to him.
+
+They stood there gasping for air, hunched over a little as they just
+stared at one another.
+
+"So long as I have breath, I shall fight you!"  Boyce promised to his
+opponent.
+
+"Suitable!"  Orren agreed.
+
+Orren stepped closer and lunged at Boyce.
+
+Boyce shrank backwards, out of the way and managed to land a blow over
+Orren's back, with his damaged sabre, but all that happened was that
+the blow dented and cracked the armour.  The force of the blow,
+however, was enough to send Orren toppling over.  He landed face down
+and Boyce went over to him.
+
+He stood over Orren for a moment then helped him t his feet only to be
+pushed away by him.
+
+"You are a stupid young man."  Orren commented.  "I would never have
+helped you!"
+
+Boyce, holding his side with one hand, smiled and staggered backwards a
+few steps.  "Yes, I know!"  he added.
+
+Boyce now attacked, brandishing his sabre over and over, rotating it
+fervently and not giving Orren the chance to make a good swing back at
+him.
+
+Orren fell back to the ground several times, and Boyce chopped at him,
+then stepped back.  The rhythm of his movements were monotonous and
+anticipatory, making Orren to constantly step backwards.  It was all
+Orren could do to defend himself.
+
+Then, Boyce stopped and squatted, and glared at him.
+
+Orren slowly made it to his feet, the armour from his own left arm
+totally ripped off of him and the bloody flesh just hanging off of the
+bone.
+
+With great pain Orren forced a smile at Boyce clutching his profusely
+bleeding abdomen.
+
+"You are getting better!"  Orren said to Boyce.  "But why didn't you
+finish me off?"
+
+Boyce smiled.  "I am having too much fun ... besides -- I am giving you
+the chance to live and to surrender!"
+
+Orren shook his head and Boyce knew that he could not reach a
+compromise with Orren.  Now, he had to try his hardest against this man.
+
+Orren felt the same way.  He now realised that Boyce was trained very
+well for this kind of fighting.  It was then that Orren's mind was
+illuminated to all that has occurred up to this moment.  He understood
+the prophesy and he could see the truth behind his killing Lloyd.  Yet,
+he also understood that there was now no turner back or reconciling.
+
+"Be on your guard!"  Orren warned with a hint of affection and
+admiration in his voice.
+
+"And you!"  echoed Boyce.
+
+Orren lunged at Boyce but quickly withdrew as Boyce pitched forward at
+him.
+
+The move momentarily confused Boyce and catching him unaware for an
+instant, but he quickly fell to the ground and rolled forward a few
+times to escape the deadly reel that Orren had followed him with.
+
+Dust flew up from the ground as Orren gouged the earth with his sword,
+again missing Boyce.
+
+Boyce came to his feet slowly and was smiling, and Orren nodded
+complimentarily to him for anticipating his tactic.
+
+They continued to fight and the time passed.  Soon it was an hour
+passed since they had started to fight.
+
+They hadn't said very much after the first hairy tactic that Orren had
+tried on Boyce.  The rest of the time was spent in offensives and
+countering, each man trying to out-think and out-skill the other.
+
+Boyce would wave his sabre at Orren only to change his direction at the
+last second, while aiming at a totally different part of Orren's body.
+
+Orren soon caught on to it and he played the game according to Boyce's
+rules, but both men
+
+were exhausted and weak from a loss of blood.
+
+Boyce's men were extremely worried about him and throughout the hour of
+combat they winced and cringed with each grind on the bashing blades.
+
+Each of the men had scored blows against the other, but none of them
+were of sufficient force to do much else than dent their armour.
+
+Just as those warriors, that were watching, thought that their leader's
+fight neared an end, and an end for Boyce especially, Boyce pushed on
+and disarmed Orren.
+
+He stood there feeling stark naked and he waited for Boyce to run him
+through.  Instead, Boyce slackened his sabre off to one side.
+
+Breathing heavily, Boyce lifted his sabre to Orren and asked him if he
+wanted to continue with bare hands.
+
+"You are mad!" Orren answered him then got to his feet.
+
+Orren was first to charge head-long into Boyce's stomach, the top part
+of his helmet gouging into Boyce's wound.
+
+Boyce grabbed Orren's helmet and twisted it until Orren sank to his
+knees and pulled himself away.  The helmet came off and Boyce threw it
+off to one side.  Boyce then took his own helmet and threw it beside
+Orren's.
+
+Orren looked up at Boyce who was now bowed-over, and while breathing
+heavily he held on to his injury.
+
+"Maybe we should stop now and pick up where we left off, tomorrow!"
+Orren joked.
+
+Boyce shook his head.  "So long as we breath, we fight.  We agreed,
+Orren!"
+
+Boyce ducked as Orren came upon him, and he was sent flying over
+Boyce's back.
+
+Boyce caught Orren's injured arm and pulled on the flesh that hung from
+it.  Orren screamed in his utter agony, rolling on the ground with his
+gauntlet clutching his totally damaged arm.
+
+Boyce was in great pain, too, but he stood on his feet and approached
+Orren, still on the ground.
+
+He was entirely covered in a coat of dust and his face and hair was
+caked with dirt and partially drying, clotted blood.
+
+He was coughing mouthfuls of dust that he had sucked up in his painful
+gasps while rolling around on the ground, and Boyce threw the handful
+of flesh to the ground beside their helmets.
+
+Boyce looked down at Orren, now breathing steadier with cleaner
+mouthfuls of air.
+
+Their eyes welded their gazes together and boyce felt sorry for his
+adversary.  He saw that Orren could not speak from the pain, but he saw
+in his eyes the unmistakeable plea for mercy -- the mercy of being
+totally released from the pain and agony wrought by an injured body,
+and mutilated confidence.
+
+Boyce knelt down and took Orren about the head, embracing him.
+
+"Somehow you seemed to be more different than any of the others at
+Halls!"  he said to Orren.
+
+Boyce then quickly stood up while still holding Orren's head tightly in
+his arms.  He made a very quick jerking motion and spun around
+simultaneously.  By the time Boyce was fully on his feet Orren's neck
+was snapped.
+
+The act was painless and quick, and merciful,  and Orren did not
+struggle while it happened.
+
+Boyce gently lowered Orren's limp body to the ground by his feet.  He
+bowed his head to look at his dead opponent and he preyed to the true
+Living God to forgive both him and Orren for their transgressions in
+life.  He then looked up at their two helmets and at the three birds
+that picked at the flesh that he threw to the ground beside them.
+
+Suddenly, Boyce heard a muffled whistling sound and a cold stabbing
+pain penetrated him from the back.
+
+The high cardinals were carrying through with Orren's final wish, to
+destroy the city and all those who lived therein.
+
+One of the archers shot Boyce through the back with an arrow, from a
+cross bow.
+
+Tucker led a charge of the cathedral forcing the guards to withdraw
+into the chapel itself.
+
+Empal ran to Boyce's limp body and pulled the arrow out, breaking off
+the point.
+
+Cavander soon came along after seeing, from the blue Mansion, that the
+fight between his master and the Cardinal Orren was over.
+
+He helped Empal take Boyce back to the blue Mansion, leaving behind the
+two warriors' battle helmets and swords, and the three birds that
+picked at the flesh that was once part of the living Orren's arm.
+
+
+EPILOGUE:   THE  REVELATION
+
+Lilith had been summoned immediately on that day when Boyce was
+severely injured.  Without hesitation she came to the Blue Mansion with
+Sister Rhonta and together they patched Boyce's critically wounded body.
+
+For a fortnight Lilith stayed by her beloved husband's bedside caring
+for him and praying to the great and true Living God to spare his life.
+
+Rhonta had spent her time also praying, but her prayers weren't all
+taken up with requests for Boyce's recovery.  Her prayers begged for
+forgiveness, for feeling close to a man such as Lloyd, and for feeling
+a deep personal loss with his death.
+
+She prayed for guidance and strength to forget him and soon she only
+prayed for Boyce to heal and be as he was when he was at Gothal.
+
+All of Pomperaque prayed, as did Gothal and the Northern United
+Alignment.
+
+Even Jessuum Benitar, atop his great mountain, kept himself from food
+and sleep for the fortnight, while he prayed to God that Boyce would
+recover from the wicked hardship that he had
+
+experienced since his birth.
+
+Then, one morning, Jessuum saw a great white dove glowing brightly as
+it emerged from the sun, and the beautiful bird was being ridden by a
+small boy.
+
+The little boy on the dove circled Pomperaque three times and an array
+of trumpets were heard echoing throughout the land.
+
+Jessuum sighed with relief and threw himself off of the mountain and
+turned himself into a dove.  He circled the great dove, with the boy on
+its back, and he heard the boy call to him.
+
+"Henceforth, all will be well!"
+
+The dove then soared back to the direction of the sun and disappeared.
+
+That same morning Boyce rose out of bed and woke his loving wife, who
+was asleep at his feet.  They embraced and kissed one another, and
+Boyce wiped the tears of love from Lilith's eyes with his kisses.
+
+When they settled into each other's arms, and all was truly well, word
+was sent out of the Blue Mansion to the rest of the northern continent
+announcing that the sovereign of the entire northern continent was
+alive.
+
+Gifts of homage and loyal praise were sent from all parts of the
+continent to the Blue Mansion.
+
+Pomperaque was not the same as it was during the time of Brook, or of
+the ArchBishop Manguino.  As was instructed, Halls was totally
+destroyed.  Not a rock was left standing on Canon's Butte.
+
+The rise that had been known for centuries as the Canon's Butte, looked
+more like a small, round mountain.
+
+An edict was made to all the citizens of the northern alignment, that
+from the day of Halls' destruction, no more building would ever be
+allowed to take place on the rise of land that now was called, 'Lloyd's
+Hill'.
+
+With the help of his wife Lilith and his trusted friends Empal, Tucker,
+Harvard Bartlett and Cavander, Boyce began a program of building and
+social reforms for the entire continent.
+
+Knowledge was made free to everyone who was interested in learning the
+truths about their past and many citizens did partake of this freedom.
+
+The poor peasant class was taken care of an they all became a new class
+respected farmers that now loved and enjoyed producing food to feed the
+multitude.
+
+Many of the unreasonable taxes were abolished and the citizens were
+permitted to give Boyce's new government whatever they felt they could
+spare for the governing welfare of the entire land.  The people, having
+the freedom of paying taxes, had allowed the land to grow quickly
+through their generous contributions to the government.
+
+The entire continent was transformed into a grandeur that was never
+before heard of, in the history of mankind.
+
+News of this remarkable civilization spread throughout the world, and
+many before unknown nations, sent ambassadors to Pomperaque to
+negotiate a union with them.
+
+Knowledge had made quantum leaps and bounds, and ideas and technologies
+that were once lost were rediscovered and improved upon by a new
+generation of scientists.
+
+That knowledge that was once use for evil and sinful purposes, was put
+to use with only good intents.
+
+The most part of planet Earth had become one of universal love and
+trust.  There was no prejudice between the diverse types of people
+that were the descendants of the survivors of the great world
+holocaust, and all places became lands of having, rather than
+have-nots.  The world economics was engaged to follow an ancient
+scriptural term that suggested that it was better to give, than to
+receive, and the people's prolific giving spread material possessions,
+as well as necessities, to every single individual.  Every living
+person had that which was needed to survive by being given gifts of
+it.
+
+Gifting became proper and there soon came to be a life that became
+happy and alive, rather than miserable and morbid.
+
+One could not tell the difference between the wealthy and the poor
+since everyone lived modestly, but well.
+
+Even Boyce Loebh Scullion-Blue, living in the Blue Mansion lived
+modestly, not selfishly keeping the mansion only to himself, but having
+citizens stay with him for some specified lengths of time, if they so
+wished.
+
+All was peace.  All was love and evil only had control of those few who
+did not accept the new ways.
+
+Truly, a new age of understanding and cooperation had come to man by
+man, and their love for the one victor over damnation.
+
+Jessuum Benitar watched the growth of the world and was pleased and
+excited with the abundance of life and treasure of love an trust.
+
+He went down to Pomperaque because it was his time to speak with Boyce.
+
+He went into the Blue Mansion and found Boyce and his beloved wife
+Lilith, in the viewing den; watching images on the wall, of the ways
+life once was like in the world.
+
+They sat and talked for hours and Jessuum gave to Boyce an account of
+the thousand years that had passed by since man's greatest madness.  He
+told Boyce about his roots and confided to him his own true name and
+relationship to him.
+
+"I was born Gavin Jones, the son of Hosea Jones and his fourth wife,
+Ruth."  he told Boyce.  "You come from the line of Hosea Jones and his
+fifth wife, Margaret, and their daughter Dioneza (twin sister of her
+brother Richalé)."
+
+He described to Boyce his intricate line of descent that reached right
+back into the Twentieth Century through Dioneza's artificial
+insemination with sperm saved from that age.
+
+Boyce was impressed with his seventh generation great uncle Gavin,
+called Jessuum.
+
+Jessuum explained to Boyce that he had been alive since Hosea's time
+and had never aged _ a gift given to him by God, at his birth.
+
+Hours after the story of their relationship, Jessuum finally told him
+that he was here to tell him of something that would make the earth the
+envy of all worlds.
+
+"You have done well, my son!"  Jessuum told him.  "You are good and
+have fought, not for your own gains, but for the gains of the entire
+world."
+
+Boyce listened with anticipation and Lilith was amazed, as if she was
+living through a dream.
+
+"The scriptures have promised that the Son of the true Living God would
+one day return to establish His kingdom of love and happiness.  I am
+here to tell you that the day of His coming is at hand."
+
+Jessuum stopped for a moment and saw Boyce smile a little and give
+Lilith a loving glance.
+
+"What will you do on that day, Boyce?"  Jessuum asked him.
+
+"I am not a god and could never be one.  I would gladly step down from
+my rule to submit to
+
+a way of life as promised through Him.  I will patiently await Him, and
+try to rule my people as best as I an able until that day when He comes
+-- then I will rest."  promised Boyce.
+
+Jessuum shook hands with Boyce and bowed to him.
+
+"You are surely a king among living men and may God bless you with the
+strength to deny evil, a single breath!"
+
+Jessuum walked over to the window and transformed himself into a large
+crow.  Glancing back at Boyce he squawked a few times.
+
+"Zoar-caw,  Zoar-caw!"  his crowing echoed about the room, then he jump
+from the window, to fly back to his mountain.
+
+Boyce had thought that Zoro had been lost, too.  Yet, he was neither
+with him nor gone far from him.  Jessuum's concern had guided him
+through the most demanding times of his life and now he left him to
+rule with Lilith, until the Son of Man returned.
+
+
+Jessuum looked down on Pomperaque, and the world, with tear-filled eyes
+of happiness and contented fulfilment.
+
+"His truly will be a wiser rule!"  Jessuum said to himself then he
+turned into a great bird of light, ascended into the sky and
+disappeared.
+
+
+THE END
+
+
+SCORCHED  EARTH
+
+A Novel
+Written By:  Walter  D.  Petrovic
+(c) Copyright  January 1980 + April 2004
+Committed to MSWord 6,  April 1998
+Approximately  111,591  Words
+WALTER D. PETROVIC
+walter.petovic@3web.net
+
+*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 13528 ***
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6c72794
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This book, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b0b7cc9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+[Project Gutenberg](https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for eBook [#$ebook_number](https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/$ebook_number)
diff --git a/old/13528.txt b/old/13528.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3819a15
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13528.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15173 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, Scorched Earth, by Walter D. Petrovic
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+** This is a COPYRIGHTED Project Gutenberg eBook, Details Below **
+**     Please follow the copyright guidelines in this file.     **
+
+
+
+
+Title: Scorched Earth
+
+Author: Walter D. Petrovic
+
+Release Date: September 26, 2004  [eBook #13528]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII)
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SCORCHED EARTH***
+
+
+Copyright (C) 1980, 2004 by Walter D. Petrovic.
+
+
+
+			   SCORCHED  EARTH
+		   A Future History of Planet Earth
+
+		      By:  WALTER  D.  PETROVIC
+
+		       walter.petrovic@3web.net
+
+		     (c)   Copyright  1980 + 2004
+
+		    Note from Author:  April 2004
+
+
+This was my first novel committed to paper during my initial year of
+college 1979-80.  I was studying Film Production with the goal to
+becoming a screenwiter/director.
+
+Life rarely allows most of us the opportunity to achieve our life-long
+goals but this did not stop me from pushing-on with my writing.  I
+recently realised that the real joy of writing was not in the money
+and fame that comes with publication but the thrill that comes with
+the appreciation of something that is a monumental undertaking - such
+as, that of writing a book.
+
+I do aspire to be published at some point, but for now I wish to have
+the world-at-large read my works and hopefully to enjoy them.
+
+I only request this one thing from the reader - please drop me an
+email to let me know that you have looked at my work and your honest
+(and critical) opinion of my material.
+
+Please enjoy, and I thank-you.
+
+Walter D. Petrovic
+
+
+
+THE  FORGOTTEN  HISTORY  OF  OUR  WORLD
+
+
+APOCALYPSE - THE BLUE INFINITE
+
+The idea simply was.  The single Spirit had begun what was to be the
+test for its being-its endurance and tolerances.  It was set into
+motion by great hands and the power of will, churning the infinite
+matter and energy and bringing into being the stunning light of a
+living state.  Matter collapsed into itself, separating from chaotic
+waters the vapours, the gases and ice-imploding into a bottomless
+abyss that collected everything into one single focus-and not
+excluding the pureness of the energy itself.
+
+Everything was brought together at one point and at one instant-fire
+and the waves, also.  Everything was made grand and rock hard, held
+together by their infinite natures and limits.
+
+The Universe simply was.  All its heavenly bodies were compelled to
+turn and to make their way into infinite end, while they grew in nature
+and in kind, making their firmament and their gleaming lights to be
+awakened at their first moment of life-their first day.  Time had
+begun, and with its cycles of night and day, seconds and light years,
+stellar light joined the spheres in moments so brief as to deny
+comprehension, in a time that spanned infinite dreams.
+
+Light was life.  With this life, the ages passed into a third order.
+As if a single day had passed twice from awakening, the heralding joys
+of this new-found life had permitted growth to those things named
+leaves and trees-the fruits by which the life to come would consume and
+hitherto live.
+
+Perpetuation . . . assurance by tiny seed that beat with life in a
+harmonious pulse, the genesis of a new life within the ground that
+would grow to feed the firmament with breath and thus tempting more
+life to be.
+
+The further ordered time had lapsed.  In passing as if five thousand,
+thousand years flashed by instantly.  In these times the Universe was
+seen as it reeled and smiled, content with the pleasures of being.
+Freedom had taken its accounting.  Life left the dark waters for the
+light of  land.  Propagating in their kind they were of dual sexes,
+soon to cover the expanse of their terran home.
+
+The Thought knew itself.  The Thought was life.  The Thought prompted
+into Its Being the struggle to survive in the harshness of its new
+awareness and substance.
+
+Flesh came from the earth.  Blood coalesced from the dew of morning
+and eyes that could see the new wonder were carved from the Sun's own
+rays.  Intelligence sprang from the swiftness of the clouds covered by
+the veins and hair, born from earthly grass and breathing with the
+life of the wind's own spirit.  Each substance could feel and find
+meaning for its life.  The flesh heard, the eyes saw and the souls
+could smell the life to its fullest beauty.  The veins of life knew
+the touch of life, and the currents of blood tasted life's
+sweetness. Bones claimed life's stature through endurance while new
+thoughts explored their cravings and their urges.  They knew their
+pleasures and their joys.
+
+Man was the life and death that followed.  The thoughts that served
+him well in understanding his infinite life had set him to prey upon
+his own kind and in falling from his cosmic grace, he found mortality
+through his love for woman.
+
+He cleaved only to her.  He obeyed and honoured only her.  He
+permitted his gift to fail him for a suggestion that there was more to
+life than the bliss of a simple and peaceful being.
+
+There was more than long life and contentment in a world of fruitful
+abundance, to use at their slightest whim.  Yet, all this was to pass
+away from sight when they allowed their manners to fail them.   Whims
+of habit overtook them and tore them from the eternity of the Universe
+and its Grand Thought.   The Grand Thought that no longer would care
+for them, but indeed set them onto a path of struggle for survival.
+
+Impatience reigned on a tiny speck of universal dust.  The Earth
+suffered from that day when curious questions began to jab at its
+Heart, and to tear into the very atoms that insured existence.   Life
+was aware of impending mortality and that life, which called itself
+Intelligent and Humanity, had turned its struggle to live into one of
+greed and self-fulfilment.
+
+Millennia passed, witnessing countless struggles between the
+intelligent human beings who warred over arid and barren parcels of
+land which could be traversed by foot in a fraction of a day.
+
+Love was locked out of the hearts of men, and hate was to ravage the
+civilized. Hate and greed tempted all whom were alive to hurt their
+own kind, and to hurt their stellar home, as well.  Through six
+thousand years, minds and souls searched for truth but turned their
+hearts away, from the few which had come to help them. They allowed
+their violations to stain and bloody their souls.  They carried on as
+if nothing could touch them in life, or in death.
+
+Mankind took command of everything and like maggots devouring rotting
+flesh, grew in knowledge and in material things until the very essence
+of life itself was at their command.
+
+It became an unsure and frightening time in the Earth's history.
+Mankind had now realised that the total destruction of everything that
+they knew, and craved for, could happen within minutes.  It was
+destruction that they, themselves, could cause through the slightest
+whim ruled by hate. Through pangs of anxiety, the Earth itself spewed
+forth fire from its bowels. The land shook and called its children,
+that circled close to her, to come and fall to her bosom and to cry
+with her.
+
+Even the Earth, the mother, waited anxiously for the Idea and the
+Essence to intervene.
+
+
+
+GINN-JULY 2011
+
+
+A MOVEMENT TO FINALITY
+
+The Twentieth Century was ravaged by bloody wars and more people lost
+their lives than in all the wars and all the murders that took place
+since the dawn of history, and the ancient account of the first murder.
+
+Paranoia reigned on the Earth.  Great multitudes scurried about in
+panic searching for shelter and trying to live without substance or
+material things.  Individuals watched the great Nations rise up against
+each other 3/4 pulling in all smaller nations to fight beside them,
+thus perpetuating the global conflict.  Twice were such great wars.
+Many smaller wars were the same, though thoughts in such conflicts were
+suppressed by being called  "police actions!"
+
+Tensions formed between all peoples.
+
+Politics, economics and retarded beliefs set the course for the world
+to crumble.
+
+Latent barbarism that peeked through the veneer of intelligence and
+civilisation was set to push the world to its final conflagration.
+Then, at the verge of bloodshed and misery, nature itself began its
+assault.  Dozens of man named Apollo Asteroids, which circles the
+Earth, had been moving closer and closer over the millennia, unseen by
+the naked eye.    Ignored by the stupid and the intelligent alike,
+these rocks fell to the Earth in great fury, blasting the entire
+surface of the great home.
+
+False prophets cried to the people to repent of their sins, for God had
+come.  They hid themselves in shelters and in mountains afraid of
+mortality, to be punished for being hypocrites while hoarding and
+hiding great wealth for use in later times.
+
+When all was done great cities were laid waste and disease moved across
+the land and seas to visit all people.  A billion individuals perished
+in the cosmic catastrophe.  A billion more dropped dead from the
+diseases that could no longer be controlled.
+
+When normality finally returned those who remained alive united to
+rebuild the planet. People of absolute opposing views on Politics,
+Religion and life in general, let their hate go from them and so began
+civilisation anew.  However, each of the sides still had their own
+future plans and desires.  Soon thereafter everything was rebuilt and
+they resumed in their previous and hateful ways.  The people, called
+Communists, still had cravings to rule the entire world.  Those, called
+peaceful and democratic, were not far from similar aspirations.  In
+utter stupidity, arms were again manufactured for defence.
+
+Trusting no one, the people called 'Americans' resumed in their secret
+building of great subterranean cities across the face of the North
+American Continent.  These were the cities that were conceived and
+under construction since the great destruction of two Japanese cities
+during the period called World War II.  Having been the wealthiest of
+the Earth's nations, the Americans continued with their early nuclear
+war survival plans, designated as "Proposition Blue".  It was this
+proposal that expedited the construction and populating of those cities
+named the Omega Sub-Ground Installations: (O.S.G.I's).
+
+Constructed near more populous areas and connected by underground
+pneumatic travel tubes, each city was designed to host some one
+thousand individuals made up of the chosen elite.  These were the
+scientists, artists and other members from the intellectual community.
+The 1950's through the 1980's saw the building and populating of seven
+O.S.G.I's at the following locations across North America:
+
+                OMEGA 1 - SOUTH:        Near Eldorado, Texas
+
+                OMEGA 2 - NORTH:        Near Burke, South Dakota
+
+                OMEGA 3 - WEST:         Near Pioche, Nevada
+
+                OMEGA 4 - EAST:         Near Toronto, (Canada)
+
+                OMEGA 5 - CENTRAL:      Near Manhattan, Kansas
+
+                OMEGA 6 - ATLANTIC:     Near Atlanta, Georgia
+
+                OMEGA 7 - PACIFIC:      Near Vancouver, (Canada)
+
+
+Greatly endangered in the asteroid disaster of the late Twentieth
+Century, most the cities still survived.  Only two cities were utterly
+destroyed:  OMEGA - 2 and 5.  These cities were amongst America's
+greatest achievements, next to their endeavours in space.  All the
+cities were under strict military control, watching the intellectuals
+and providing them with necessities, to keep them content.
+
+In the first years of the 1990's, however, many of the scientists in
+these cities were made aware that a nuclear war was inevitable.  Unable
+to control their own consciences and knowing that billions would die,
+so that they could live, they rose up against the military and passed
+out of these cities and into the public.    They published a document
+which they called their "Blue Prospectus".  This "Blue Prospectus"
+revealed their government's survival intentions.  With adverse feelings
+towards their respective government, the masses marched on their
+capital demanding equality to enter these, but nothing was
+accomplished.  The solar catastrophe had occurred and the reasons for
+their mass discontent were subsequently forgotten.
+
+By the end of the 1999, just over a full year following the asteroid
+destruction of the Earth's surface, mankind had managed to rebuild
+their cities and start life anew.  Enjoying totally new styles of
+living, no individual was really poor.  The technological advancements
+during that year of peace were astounding and the entire world now
+benefited from them.
+
+New sources of power were discovered following great tectonic upheavals
+caused by the impacting asteroids;  small, crystal-like minerals were
+pushed to the Earth's surface.  Their properties were pure and
+vigorous.  Their radiation became useful for everything imaginable.
+
+Remaining secret, those Americans that survived on the surface and
+those from the O.S.G.I's, converted their power sources to utilise the
+new crystals.  Entire cities were powered by two crystals, no larger
+than walnuts.
+
+Plans were formulated to build colonies in space, beginning with
+orbital stations and finally lunar and Martian colonies.  These
+colonies were to be powered by the new crystals and materials for
+building the colonies would come from the asteroid belt; the very
+origin of the Earth's cataclysm.
+
+Laser instruments, of innovative design and use, were built to take
+advantage of this new crystal power.  Many of these lasers were used
+for medicine, however, and only a few thousand weapons were developed,
+for the police.  The police rarely used them, having been given
+electrostatic guns that inhibited nerve synapses, and in that manner
+had several non-injured reprobates to their list of captured.  The
+laser weapons that were not used by the police were channelled into the
+O.S.G.I's, to be taken care of by the city administrators.
+
+During these years of revived human civilisation and technology, there
+came a movement of great intensity that called for the disarming and
+dismantling of all destructive weaponry around the world.
+
+The Communist nations were prepared to agree with America and its
+allied nations. Although there were internal conflicts within the
+Communist nations, leading to their eventual fall, the governments that
+emerged from the revolutions eventually fulfilled many promises and
+commitments to which they were previously committed.
+
+Both great nations dismantled their arsenals and the Americans remained
+quiet regarding their O.S.G.I's, never recalling those who were
+assigned to live within them.  Not many years following the fall of the
+Communist Nation, called The Soviet Union, another Communist nation
+called China, started to experience similar internal problems.  Young
+people and those wishing to have an easier life for themselves, rallied
+and called for their nation to be more democratic and capitalistic.  By
+the turn of  the Twenty-first Century new borders were drawn all about
+the planet.  New cooperations and friendships were formed, even between
+those people that were considered as past enemies.
+
+Religious societies began to gather strength about the planet, and new
+societies formed daily.  Their influence and power started to influence
+the politics of the nations where they formed and soon many of these
+people were in control of those nations.   Religious dogmatism had
+overtaken the sensibilities of most people that were alive.  The
+polarisation that had formed in religious belief was greater than any
+political ideology.  Fighting had ensued everywhere and lead to another
+great war.
+
+New weapons were produced utilising the new found crystal energy.
+These new weapons were used.
+
+Violence and war waged on.  In the final year, the religious societies
+openly confronted the politically controlled military, everywhere.
+Through subversion, propaganda and assassination, these societies
+panicked the world's population, further forcing the planet's people to
+take sides.
+
+Every group called themselves "The Saviours Of The Earth," believing
+that they were sent by God Himself, to turn the planet into a second
+Eden.
+
+Not a single soul was saved.
+
+Millions died, and many more perished in subsequent plagues and
+famines, which spread throughout the entire world.
+
+The surface of the planet was virtually destroyed.  Only those people
+that had some natural protection, and those who remained in the
+O.S.G.I's survived.
+
+For many centuries the survivors, underground, were put into cryogenic
+suspension to await the day they may walk and live upon a newly healed
+Earth.
+
+
+
+GINN-NOVEMBER 2027
+
+
+THE NEXT AGE:  THE PREDECESSORS
+
+A thick mist encircled the Earth for many years, slowly dissipating as
+it radiated out into space.  The greater portion of the world was
+devastated; a population of billions, reduced to several million
+score.  Once great cities were wiped clean from the face of the
+earth. Those that were spared stood like majestic mountains. With
+time, they also crumbled away, turning into gigantic mounds that were
+loosely held together by rusty girders, brittle concrete and broken
+glass.
+
+Bands of strange-looking humans roamed the face of the land foraging
+for the scarce and much-valued commodities of food and fresh water.
+
+In the years following the deluge, the surface dwelling survivors died
+out from exposure to radiation and to the adverse climactic conditions
+that were inherited from the global fall out.
+
+The progeny of the survivors became strange in appearance and behaviour
+until they all became new forms of humans, evolved from mutants, to
+small hybrid races which soon became as distinct and individual as
+those humans that lived in the late Twentieth Century.  The
+amalgamation of these races found that great tension had formed between
+them, due to their differences in appearances and forms of speech, and
+so they broke away from the main body of humanity and headed for their
+own select areas of the continent.
+
+Many of these new races of humans ventured forth and eventually
+established unique civilisations.  One race went to the extreme western
+part of the North continent.  Everywhere, they found small pockets of
+survivors and conquered them.  They looted their food stores and used
+those people as slaves;  so becoming a feared band of humans that
+resembled upright, and very dark featured, apes.  They called
+themselves the Teniqu�s.  Those in the east were afraid that the
+Teniqu�s would begin to move back their way but although they were
+warlike, they stayed put and were soon forgotten.
+
+Concentrated cells of normal humans were still alive.  They were the
+ones who lived in the mountainous regions of the continent and although
+most became larger in size than normal humans, they were the most in
+resemblance to the people living during the Twentieth Century.  They
+were hunters and gatherers, moving from valley to, in both the eastern
+and the western mountains.  These were amongst the first people to be
+conquered by the Teniqu�s, in their move westward.  In the east, there
+was also a race of perfectly normal looking humans called the S�dash.
+They were a group of hermaphrodites that were compiled and exiled by
+the rest of human mutants, who disliked them, since they most closely
+resembled the previous normal humans. The hermaphrodites wandered for
+many years until a place to settle was found.  They began to build a
+culture that they based on total
+equality between individuals.
+
+Yet, the S�dash soon became intolerant to any other forms of human.
+They developed a belief that they were divinely chosen to be "superior
+and perfect,"  and so they enslaved and mistreated those who happened
+to trespass on their city boundaries.  For mating, only the true
+hermaphrodites were allowed to propagate.  After several generations of
+regulated breeding, a pure-bred race of hermaphrodites was formed.
+
+There was another similar band of humans in the eastern part of the
+northern Continent.  They called themselves the Palatkans.  Their
+appearance was much like that of lepers.  They had segregated
+themselves from the main stream years before the great cataclysm.  They
+congregated in long strips of semi-fertile land on the floor of lengthy
+canyons.
+
+Following several generations of their offspring, they bore a race of
+ugly and canker-covered beings that developed a culture of cannibalism.
+
+They believed that all the other humans were left on Earth for them to
+sacrifice to their gods, then to feast.  They were aware of a life
+force that permeated everything and that was significantly concentrated
+within the flesh of humans.
+
+Many such bands of human beings were alive, over the entire face of the
+Earth.  Most of these peoples contained and confined themselves within
+special areas of land and rarely ventured out.
+
+
+Six centuries passed since the cataclysm.
+
+Lack of productivity and raw stock caused the remaining human people to
+further mutate into odd looking things.  Civilisation had also
+regressed into a primitive form.  Much of the Earth reverted into the
+appearance of the primitive and the primordial, awaiting the moment to
+be reborn.
+
+The Earth was not alone in its anxiety for rebirth.  There were nearly
+one quarter of a million true humans that waited, also, to be reborn
+craving to, once more, walk the mother Earth's surface, and to begin
+life anew.  In six hundred years of waiting, the population of the
+Omega SubGround Installations grew.  To extend the food and water
+rations, the major part of the personnel was placed in cryogenic
+suspension vaults upon attaining the age of thirty-five.
+
+Most, of age, personnel stayed to be suspended in animation but some
+were granted the permission to leave the cities and try to reestablish
+life wherever they could find hospitable environments.  Contact was not
+kept with those who had left. Only on hearsay did anyone know how these
+people fared.
+
+Many headed towards the eastern shoes where they successfully took up
+oceanic livelihoods, and so began the city, later to be called,
+Besten.  Others made their way to the mountains and met up with other
+bands of self-exiled people. They took to herding goats, and sheep;
+and whatever other animals that were left alive, they could catch to
+domesticate.
+
+The people took to catching and taming the Continent's greatest animal
+mutations: gigantic eagles that were as high as trees.  These people
+learned to fly them and use them as beasts of burden.  These agrarian
+peoples were called the Krolalins and the Virunese.
+
+The time had come, in the O.S.G.I's, where all those people in
+cryogenics were awakened. They organized into groups of thousands then
+left to set up individual and distinct villages, towns and cities.
+
+The Earth was becoming clean again.  Air and water sparkled with
+freshness and the entire world returned to green.
+
+The only people to stay in the O.S.G.I's were the scientists, carrying
+on with their work (in every field), as it was done in the Twentieth
+Century.  With those that left and built cities, these cities adapted
+to a simpler way of life and craved not to progress much in their
+technology.  They did not crave to progress very much in their
+technology.  They did not want the responsibilities that went with
+having technology.  They found that they were just as happy without it,
+and their attitudes were civilised enough to accept and give their
+blessings to those still utilising the ancient ways.  By 2500 C.E.,
+many of the O.S.G.I's were back to a comfortable size of around four
+hundred people.  Some O.S.G.I's lost people so readily and quickly,
+that a few had become abandoned and forgotten.
+
+All those who left the cities tried to track down some of their old
+comrades, heading in the direction of newly established settlements and
+subsequently joining with some of them.
+
+The surface cities began to grow and the O.S.G.I's were beginning to be
+emptied, with only a few hundred older people remaining in some of them.
+
+In those Omega cities, that were still densely populated, power
+struggles often took place. Some of these people who became the
+leaders, by force or otherwise, set up a form if thought that denied
+the life and events of the Twentieth Century.  Some even went as far as
+stating that the Twentieth Century never happened, and so proclaimed
+themselves as Kings, Queens and other types of monarchials because they
+were descended from the intellectuals who "made the world" what it was.
+ During this period, everyone that was a descendant of these people was
+given the title "BLUE" -- from the old Proposition Blue code since they
+were from the Great Line of Knowledge.
+
+There were men, in the BLUE, who disagreed with the idea that the
+Twentieth Century never happened, and long debates were engaged to
+discuss it.
+
+These debates and periodic skirmishes were the original cause for the
+initial emigration from the cities. Similar events sparked moves in
+each of the Omega S.G.I's.
+
+Reginald Jones was a BLUE who opposed the "never happened" dogma, and
+his life was, at several times, threatened.
+
+Reginald was suppressed from speaking in the city parliament and seeing
+that he lacked any other option, he removed himself from politics and
+searched for a wife.
+
+He wasn't successful, though, since his public image had made women
+avoid him, for fear of being ridiculed.  As it had happened, many
+centuries and aeons ago, a man had been denied comfort for-want-of a
+fundamental principle way of thought. Reginald became lonely.
+
+Then in 2542 C.E., Reginald found a baby boy abandoned in a genetics
+lab when he was going to work.  Announcements were made for the parents
+to take the boy back but soon it was found that the two teenagers
+responsible for the child had run away from the OMEGA 4 EAST City.
+
+They were never found and Reginald's need for companionship made him
+adopt the child and so he became responsible for him. He gave him the
+name of Hosea, who grew up to be a brilliant man and a great political
+leader in the OMEGA 4 EAST City.
+
+Hosea became the most powerful man in the city's parliament, keeping
+tensions at bay, but allowing the people to think freely.  He had
+allowed debates to continue, concerning the existence of the Twentieth
+Century and he had, himself, held to the belief that there was a
+civilisation that they had descended from.  He had computer disks and
+video tapes, books and photographs all showing the life as it was in
+the ancient past.  This was proof.  It was proof that could never be
+used but Hosea was the kind of man that was eager to see what
+conclusions would be brought by his colleagues by just using logical
+reasoning.
+
+A conclusion, of sorts, had been found.  It was a forced conclusion and
+had occurred at a time the people of the city were looking for some
+real direction.
+
+Hosea had been electrocuted at age of ninety-six, while he was trying
+to make improvements on solar-electric power sources.  He was well
+known for this pursuit within his city.
+
+Hosea's first son was named Cano and when he was young he exhibited a
+strange spiritual aura and it was an unanimous decision, by the city
+fathers, to have him trained at the Monastery of St. Tobias, outside
+the city.
+
+In 2580 C.E., at eighteen years of age, Cano completed his studies of
+religious history, and other related topics, at the monastery.  He
+became a spiritual healer and a leader, and he later changed his name
+to Canon Di'Vaticanus.
+
+He was a well-liked man, at first, who seemed stable and secure
+considering that his mother, Hosea's first wife Anna, deserted both of
+them when Cano was only twelve.
+
+She had travelled to BanGor where she had become the High Priestess of
+the Cults, since she was able to endure the rains, without allowing
+herself to fornicate.  All her daughter-descendants replaced her as the
+High Priestess.  Anna was an ecologist while at the OMEGA 4 East City
+and she had developed a counter-agent that let her and whomever else
+took the drug, capable of tolerating being caught in the rain without
+having instantly become sexually deranged.
+
+In 2600 C.E., Hosea married his fourth wife (having lost both his
+second and third to early death).  Her name was Ruth and she was
+regarded as the best in her field of Aging research.  In fact, in the
+same year of their marriage, Ruth had made a break-through by
+perfecting a drug that retarded the ageing process.
+
+The first human to test the drug was Hosea when he became mortally ill
+and with the taking of the drug he miraculously recovered.
+
+The drug was primarily kept for those in the Line of Knowledge but Ruth
+had sold some to other people in the city for certain favours and
+services.
+
+In 2601 C.E. Ruth bore Hosea's second son named Gavin.
+ During the same period when Ruth was giving birth, Canon spoke out
+against the age retardant drug calling it "evil", and in late of the
+same year, Canon disappeared with a stock supply of the developed drug.
+
+A few years later, Ruth was imprisoned by Hosea for infidelity and he
+took her formula away from her.  When Gavin turned sixteen, he left the
+OMEGA 4 EAST City and travelled to the southernmost part of the
+continent where three huge highlands surrounded a lush valley that was
+the city of Pomperaque, in Lower Phoride.  He made his home on the
+highest mountain and changed his name to the name of the mountain and
+became, for the city of Pomperaque, a great oracle.  A seer and a
+prophet whose visions always came to pass.  He never seemed to die or
+grow old; he never had a wife or children, abstaining from all sexual
+contact.  He kept himself pure in mind and body, while he prayed to the
+one great Living God, to which the majority of Twentieth Century man
+prayed.
+
+The years passed, then in 2630 C.E., Hosea married his fifth and final
+wife, Margaret, who in 2635 C.E., gave birth to twins, Richal� and
+Dioneza.
+
+The following year, Margaret died trying to give birth to a premature
+baby that also died, and two years after that, Hosea was killed in an
+electrical mishap.  During the subsequent years, the twins grew and
+each had entered their own peculiar studies.  Dioneza studied telepathy
+and when she turned fifteen she was asked to join the OMEGA operations
+Council as a reward for her progress, unsurpassed by anyone of her age.
+She, like Hosea, kept the title "BLUE" from her name.
+
+When Dioneza received her appointment to the council, the Canon
+Di'Vaticanus returned from his forty-nine year trek in the wilderness
+of the Northern Continent.
+
+He was eighty-eight years old but he only looked like he was
+approaching forty.  He met his pretty half-sister and immediately began
+having sexual designs on her, wanting to procreate with her and to have
+her carry out many of his strange requests.
+
+With her telepathic ability, she saw into his mind and knew exactly
+what kind of a man he was.  She saw in his mind the memories of the
+forty-nine years that he spent away from Omega 4 EAST city.  She had
+seen that he studied ancient prophesies and obtained his fulfilment
+from history but she also saw the destruction of his spirit with his
+fall into accepting all forms of depravity, especially those of a
+sexual nature.  She had seen his encounters with men, women, children,
+animals and all manner of mutated freaks -- all in his attempts to
+reach total spiritual awareness.  After Dioneza had asked a friend to
+be her protector, the Canon turned to hating her and cursed her with a
+violent death.  He had no problems finding other diversions. Young
+companions he desired came to do his bidding, and soon he had the young
+Janis Topler beside him, wherever he went.
+
+Janis soon became pregnant with his child and eventually gave birth to
+him in mid-2651 C.E.
+
+Soon, thereafter, Janis was banished from the city and Canon took the
+boy into his care, baptising him as Canis Topler.  In late of that year
+the Abbess Mariot, from the Abbey of Our Holy Virgins, brought to Omega
+4 EAST an eleven year old girl, with a story about finding her as a
+baby during a sojourn at a distant Hermitage.   It was a beautiful baby
+girl, wrapped in elegant and costly cloth, and resting within a cradle
+overlaid in gold.
+
+She had named the child, Sunshine, since there was the glow and light
+of life which shone from the child's face.  She now had brought the
+girl to the city to have the child tested.
+
+It was a brilliant child.  She could not speak, however, and this
+bothered the Abbess Mariot.   She also wanted an explanation for the
+child's speedy growth.  At eleven years of age, the child already had
+the appearance of a full grown woman.
+
+Canon lusted after her.
+
+Soon, Sunshine gave birth to the Canon's son.  He was called Daey and
+he proclaimed the boy as the long-awaited Saviour.  He pronounced that
+the new promised millennium had finally begun.  This was the new age of
+humanity; the year he called "ONE".
+
+Canon compiled a book of Laws that he had told everyone was given to
+him by the great God, Himself.  He called the book "The Canon's Laws",
+and announced that with his receipt of this book, that all which had
+occurred in the "pre-history", had never happened:
+
+         "The Past is nonexistent.  This is never to be questioned,
+          and no investigation is permitted to be conducted, in pursuit
+          of the question of history.  History begins with "ONE".
+          Only that which, henceforth, occurs from the year ONE will be
+          recognised as history.  Death, by torture, is the punishment
+          for this Law's transgression."     
+
+                                                        (CANON 3:18)
+
+
+This passage was of the first of Canon's Laws: These Laws, to be
+followed to the letter, were to be punishable upon the fear of the
+most imaginable painful torture.  No Law was more, important than that
+of the CANON.  All were the Prime Law, and all punishment was
+eventual, excruciating, death.  As the child, Daey, was reaching his
+first year of age, Canon sacrificed the most beautiful and the most
+precious of his possessions, in honour of the child's birth.  This
+most precious possession was the child's own mother, Sunshine.  In the
+weeks that followed, the child weakened and also died, and the death
+was kept from the people.  There was a great fear that the population
+may panic if they were to hear that their "Saviour" had died, while
+still in infancy.
+
+While Dioneza studied telepathy and tried to avoid Canon, her twin
+brother, Richal�, studied many subjects but he mainly concentrated on
+the forbidden topic: History.
+
+Richal� wanted to compile facts to prove, without doubt, Canon's claims
+to creating the Universe, the Earth, and all of existence.
+
+In 2660 C.E. Dioneza had found repulsion towards all men, and although
+she had yearned for children, she wanted no man to bed with her.
+
+Due to her status, in the city, she was given the permission to be
+artificially inseminated from her choice of genes, preserved from the
+time of Omega 4 - EAST's construction.   She had chosen a sample which
+was labelled as "David Sannstein: April 1995".   The city's parliament
+had overwhelmingly accepted her choice and granted her the permission
+that was necessary, for her to use the sample.   All the records that
+were kept in the gene bank were obviously ancient.   From what was
+understood contained within the ancient records, David Sannstein was an
+Engineer, some 650 years ago.  This was several hundred years before
+"ONE".
+
+Dioneza presented her brother with this fact but nothing ever came of
+this knowledge.
+
+Richal� married a girl that he had studied with, at the beginning of
+the same year that Dioneza was artificially inseminated.
+
+Months before Dioneza's birth to Dorin, Richal� and his lovely wife,
+Dianna, had quadruplets.
+
+Just after Dioneza bore Dorin, Richal� left the Omega 4 - EAST City,
+with Dianna and his children: Roman, Daphne, Tatum and Wind. They
+journeyed for the city of Besten, on the Eastern seaboard of the
+continent.  During this century few of the O.S.G.I's were still
+inhabited.  All but the Omega 4 - EAST city and the Omega 7 - PACIFIC
+city were abandoned and were utterly forgotten.
+
+In the East, Canon's personal religion had subdued the people's belief
+and knowledge, and everyone in the Omega 4 - EAST city began to think
+that their city was nothing more than a temple built to Canon.
+
+There were a few citizens that opposed Canon's Laws and some of these
+were publicly tortured to death, but some had escaped the wrath of, the
+now-hated, Canon.
+
+Many people, dissatisfied with Canon's rules fled the cities to settle
+in the small villages and towns that dotted the land.  Canon, however,
+sent emissaries to all of these surface towns and cities, and soon they
+began to rule over them.  Most of these places submitted to the ways
+that Canon had forced upon them.  Only Besten kept up with the
+rebellious stand against the Canon, but soon, only underground cells of
+rebels fought the new rule.
+
+Richal�'s daughter Daphne became involved with the rebel leader
+Montgomery Bartlett and married him.  Later, the Bartlett line was to
+become the strongest in Besten.
+
+Dioneza had avoided execution by the Canon, her half-brother since she
+had the favour of the city parliament and since she had told Canon that
+if she dies, her protector would surely kill him.
+
+Canon did not have her killed, yet he had prevented her from ever
+speaking in public by having his men begin riots whenever she called a
+public audience.
+
+In 2676 C.E., her son Dorin, who was now fifteen years of age, had
+illicitly procreated with a thirteen year old called Bernice.  Soon
+after the birth of Martin, however, Dioneza had the two youngsters
+married and they had no more children.
+
+At seventeen years of age, Bernice was put into cryogenic suspension
+when it was discovered that she had developed a terminal blood disease.
+
+That same year, Martin, who was four years old, wad discovered to be a
+genius and Dioneza took to training him in the ways of biology and true
+history.  To Canon's disapproval, Martin began to delve into the study
+of the real past, utilizing Dioneza's computer library.
+
+In 2683 C.E., Dorin made a break-through in light energy emission and
+began to improve the old police stun weapons, enabling them to utilize
+a laser capability, as well.  This study also infuriated the Canon but
+he did nothing.
+
+Just after Dorin's break-through, Dioneza, who was now forty-eight, was
+raped and brutally murdered by Canon's bastard son, Canis Topler.
+
+When Martin was nineteen, in 2695 C.E., he became a top-ranking
+scientist in the areas of anthropology and archaeology, after
+graduating from Advanced Technical Training in the Sciences. Martin
+headed an archaeological expedition to Alugean and there uncovered a
+huge computer library complex.  He ordered his team to keep the find
+secret from anyone at the Omega 4 - EAST city, in the event Canon was
+to find out and have the library destroyed.
+
+Martin received the title of "Blue" after his name, because of his
+great intellect and he did not abstain from using it.
+
+Four years after his discovery, Canon disappeared and his Monks
+announced to everyone that they saw him turn into a being of light and
+that he ascended to heaven in a golden chariot.
+
+Canon Di'Vaticanus was declared a God and the monk that was his second,
+named himself the ArchBishop.  His name was Morgan.
+
+Morgan had the same powers as the Canon Di'Vaticanus and only answered
+to the Canon, for his decisions.
+
+
+Martin was married three times in his life, though he only had children
+with his second and third wives.
+
+With his second wife, Lilian, he had a son called Carter and with his
+third wife, Joan, had triplets: Liona, Aria and Thirst.
+
+In 2760 C.E., Carter went to Alugean, following his father's,
+directions and found the computer library.  He stayed there for several
+years and studied, alone.  Liona, Aria and Thirst left the Omega 4 -
+EAST city for BanGor when they were twenty-three, so that they could
+learn the ways of the world, but they never survived.  Only one of the
+three reached BanGor, having met up with a wandering tribe of Teniqu�s.
+ Only Liona, made pregnant by a Teniqu�s, arrived in BanGor and was
+granted an act of abortion by the High Priestess (the great, great
+granddaughter of Hosea Jones's first wife, Anna).
+
+In 2780 C.E., Carter left Alugean and wandered about the continent,
+going through Laurentine and then through BanGor in 2785 C.E., where he
+sojourned for a short time.  He represented himself to the High
+Priestess Lucaea (the third generation granddaughter of Anna), with
+whom he became close and eventually sexually coupled, unaware of their
+near relation by blood.
+
+In 2801 C.E., they produced Smith and before she exiled Carter from
+BanGor, she charmed from him a quantity of the youth drug  -- the
+formula which was passed down to him through his father.
+
+In his exile, Carter went to Virune where he later met and married his
+first wife, Dee'inth, who was seventeen.   Carter was seventy-four at
+his first marriage, but he only resembled a man of twenty-four, having
+taken the youth drug for so long and he manufactured more after Lucaea
+took his supply away.  There, he became a most important man,
+organising and turning the city into a powerful city state.
+
+Jessuum Benitar came down off the mountain and told Carter that they
+were related, that both came from the loins of Hosea Jones.  Jessuum
+told Carter that his real name was Gavin Jones, the son of Hosea; the
+fourth generation great-uncle to Carter.
+
+Jessuum told Carter that Lucaea was his relative, as well, and that
+Smith was a product of an incestuous coupling.
+
+When Carter heard this, he was determined to get Smith back.  In 2817
+C.E., Pomperaque split in two, and was engaged in a civil war.
+Dee'inth and Carter's son, Calvin, left for Virune.
+
+A few years later, Carter unified and strengthened Pomperaque, and then
+proceeded to invade BanGor.
+
+Carter executed the already dying Lucaea and Smith came along
+willingly, back to Pomperaque.
+
+Dee'inth and Calvin were sent for in 2822 C.E., but they refused to
+come.  Dee'inth had married again, to a man called Balfour (who had a
+grown son called Empal).
+
+Two years later, carter married his second wife Freida Dilaano, who had
+a daughter Miri.  Carter and Freida had no children, and after a year
+of marriage, Smith took her daughter Miri as his wife, and they went to
+the Virgin Mountains for their honeymoon.
+
+Several years of peace in Pomperaque went by and in 2900 C.E., Carter
+died.  Soon after Carter's death, Smith headed a campaign to unite
+Lower Phoride and in short of a decade, succeeded.
+
+In 3001 C.E., Smith and Miri went on a vacation to the Virgin
+Mountains, while she was pregnant with their first child.
+
+They were both fairly aged in years, although their physical and mental
+make-up was still fairly young due to the age retardant drug which was
+passed down to them.  Smith was one hundred ninety-eight and Miri was
+one hundred ninety-four, but both looked to be only in their
+mid-thirties.
+
+On their return, Miri had experienced the pains and when they rested,
+one afternoon, she gave birth to Smith's first son, Manguino.
+
+During the birth, Smith was walking about in the woods, following the
+distant crying sounds of a baby.  He soon found it.  It was a baby boy,
+swaddled in a sackcloth and left in the skull of a lion, by small
+stream.*
+
+
+  So it happened that Smith gave the child the name, Brook Scullion-Blue
+  (because of the circumstances surrounded the foundling).  *The baby
+  was left there by the great, great-grandson of Wind Jones (one of
+  Richal's daughters). Guiness, and his wife Joanne, while trying to
+  escape from a band of Plains slave traders, left their baby to Fate's
+  caring heart and Smith was led to it.
+
+                                     Testament of Ginn 10:17
+
+
+Miri accepted Smith's request to adopt it as their own, since it was
+similar in age to their own first born, Manguino.
+
+When Smith returned to Pomperaque, Jessuum Benitar once again came down
+from the mountain and revealed to Smith who the child really was.
+
+Since the foundling was from the same line as Smith, Smith regarded it
+as a son, as equal to that which had come from his own flesh.
+
+
+At his deathbed, Smith gave his blessings and the land to both of his
+sons to rule.
+
+A promise was made by both sons, to rule the land with a strong hand
+and a kind heart, and they received Smith's blessings of material and
+spiritual power.
+
+The birthright and the sceptre continued with the BLUE.
+
+
+                "... and it came to pass, that in a time,
+                one was chosen as the one favourite to live
+                with love, whilst the other died; and in the
+                eyes of God"   
+                                        PILLARS 93: A 11
+
+
+PART  I:        THE  SCORCHED  EARTH
+
+
+CHAPTER  ONE
+
+Another day ended.  Sol, once again, retired its eternal radiance from
+man, as it has in its never-ending cycles of dawns and dusks, witnessed
+by all the generations.  In its greatness, it survived all of Terra's
+hardships and afflictions and it was a living monument to forever.
+
+No one seemed to look to it for comfort any more.  The faces of women
+and children didn't reflect its brilliance, since no one had reverence
+for its good any more. It was a mindless disregard that was sustained
+and nurtured by the generations of man that survived.  For almost a
+millennia they forced themselves into ignorance and then blamed it on
+the chaotic destructions that scorched the earth and that burned the
+human spirit.  Nowhere, it seemed, was there anyone of power willing to
+point-out a way to betterment.
+
+Trust knew not any man who was strong enough to deny the utter
+discontent that trembled in the hearts of men without freedom.  To
+almost every man, innately loomed a feeling of utter hopelessness.
+
+
+In a dark room of the Blue Mountain, atop Bimini Hill, sat a
+middle-aged man of high station.  He was a man richly endowed with
+great wealth, majesty and power, and he held the people's respect.
+This man had taken pride in his accomplishments but he had become
+saddened by his inability to present himself to the citizens in the way
+that they revered him; as living strength.
+
+Brook had long since known the problems of the noble land in which he
+lived and reigned.  He pondered its past and its future while he
+aimlessly stared out of the window at the warming sunset.  In his mind
+flashed a memory of an old writing that expressed in an awesome detail
+the fear and the agony of oppression that the whole world must have
+felt in the final days, when the prophesied great abolition had come to
+pass.
+
+Entranced, his thoughts were prolonged as he sat and watched the sun
+disappear into the earth; its light casting a reddish hue over his
+light beard and reflected cooly from his vacant blue eyes.
+
+His mind embraced time.  It drifted along its tenses, all at once, as
+if they were all merged into one music; a music that played
+continually, along with the troubled voices that cried, only to him,
+for help.
+
+Caught up within his own thoughts, he payed little attention to the
+servant boy that set a drink on the table by his chair.
+
+Without a word the boy flamed the gas torches and the room no longer
+remained dark.  Quickly, he left the room.
+
+"The sun was resting," thought Brook, as he reached for the chalice of
+ale beside him.
+
+He took a drink and the ale soothed his soddy thirst, and his parched
+manner, much like the milk of a mother's milken breast soothes a
+distressed babe, thus letting it sleep.   But Brook could not sleep.
+
+Brook waited for the moon and he finally welcomed its cool radiance at
+midnight when he saw it rise over the junipers.  Its silvery light
+reflected its beauty off the scanty layers of the farming terraces.
+
+Brook's eyes were fixed on the view outside his window.  He tried to
+envision himself living a thousand years ago gazing out of the same
+window, marvelling at the sights that may have been there.  In his
+heart, he recited a badly remembered poem that was written just prior
+to the War of Wars:
+
+                A torn heart dying within the mind
+                A failure to the reckonings  --
+                Yesterdays, todays and tomorrows."
+
+He lifted the palms of his hands to his sweaty face desperately trying
+to keep from screaming out his tortured agonies.  He believed that he
+couldn't tell a soul about the truth concerning the past.  He knew that
+the Law was explicit:
+
+                "The Past is non-existent.  This is never to be
+                 questioned, and no investigation is permitted to
+                 be conducted, in pursuit of the question of history.
+                 History begins with "ONE".  Only that which,
+                 henceforth, occurs from the year ONE will be
+                 recognised as history.  Death, by torture, is
+                 the punishment for this Law's transgression."
+                                                        (CANON 3:18)
+
+
+He turned his eyes away from the window and rose out of his chair.  He
+slowly paced to a large cabinet beside the huge entrance doors.  From
+around his neck, he brought forth a key and placed it into the slot of
+the cabinet door then slowly opened it.  Inside this cabinet Brook
+kept, what he liked to call,  "his gadgets."  There were rows of
+buttons glowing like coloured embers. Brook applied pressure to several
+of the buttons.
+
+Quickly, long drapes on the far wall rolled away and revealed a blank,
+white, wall that soon began to produce pictures that moved like life
+itself.
+
+The images were of fire and of raging destruction.  There were scenes
+of huge cities that stood majestically on the horizon one moment, then
+falling into mountainous piles of rubble, the next.  More pictures
+showed fat people, conspiracies, death and misunderstandings.  Every
+kind of unimaginable horror played upon the wall.
+
+Brook sighed to himself, as he remembered the rest of the poem:
+
+                        "His music ends ...
+                         His silence devours his soul,
+                         Caging his ever-diminishing days
+                         In a way that any man could lose
+                         His assurance in himself,
+                         And 'why?' he is!"
+
+Then he slowly repeated to himself the words that were the Law:
+"The Past is non-existent", but he couldn't allow himself to believe
+this, especially with the truth revealing itself in front of him, at
+this moment.
+
+
+He felt a cold tightness within his chest when he let himself think
+about his ancestors and the way that they destroyed themselves.  Their
+greed for wealth and their crazed megalomania was the cause for the
+deaths of millions.  He saw these men die, in the pictures that
+played-out right before his eyes.  Once more he slowly breathed out the
+words:  "The past is non-existent."
+
+He cautiously looked around so that no one would hear him, if only by
+chance, as they passed in the hallway.
+
+He remained in private thought.
+
+He sat back down in his chair and closely watched the horrific and
+colourful images that danced on the wall.  "How can a truth be hidden
+for a thousand years?"  he wondered.  "For a thousand years no one has
+even imagined that the very fabric of life itself, had nearly become
+death for every living thing beneath the sun."  He looked at the fiery
+scourge projected onto the wall, then lowered his head and pondered
+heavily. How could he tell his people in Phoride, the truth about the
+past.  That the knowledge about it was subdued by fanatic religious
+rulers, in their attempt to subjugate total control over them.  Fear
+for the Divine Punishment made them surrender their faith and submit to
+the worship of a handful of man, as their gods.
+
+Brook had long been a powerful man.  He was one from the Great Line of
+Knowledge, yet he wasn't like most of those other men.  In his heart he
+heard the multitudes of voices that screamed and cried out their pleas
+to him, to reveal the truth and thus lift the burdens from their backs
+and let them live in peace.
+
+His soul embraced everything that he knew was right and to himself, he
+nodded an agreement.  The time had come to be strong again and to no
+longer sit idly by and watch evil, as it has its own way in his land.
+
+
+He moved back in his chair when he heard the sounds of the Monastic
+Guard, marching in the city square and the painful screams of men and
+women, that echoed between the buildings and out towards the hills.
+Brook knew that these people were being blasted by with the
+lightning-like bolts from the Guard's electrophoric weapons.
+
+His strong and gentle hands slowly rose to his face as he sank down
+into his chair.  He set his elbows on his knees and he cleaved to the
+thoughts within his mind, trying to force himself to remain in the
+deepest meditation.  He felt the hours pass, until dreams soon began to
+visit him, making him lose himself and his worries to the mask of the
+night.  With the coming of his last conscious breath before sleep, he
+recalled some of the words that his father said to him, upon his
+deathbed.
+
+"Brook, my son ... do not let the land become troubled. Don't be afraid
+to fight because the horrifying torments of war can become a tool that
+may prevent future afflictions."
+
+Brook was asleep and everything in the room was left unveiled for any
+eye to see.  Although the pictures on the wall had ceased, everything
+was left in open view.  Each thing presented a danger to Brook's rule
+and power.
+
+The cool breezed night soared into dawn's amber glory.  The sun slowly
+began to illuminate the room and a robed figure carefully crept in,
+much in the manner of a thief, yet it didn't take a thing.  It had
+moved softly and with purpose towards the white wall, where it drew the
+drapes shut.  Then it moved towards the cabinet where it closed its
+doors with a faint click, and again left the room in much the same
+manner as it had entered.
+
+The sky was cloudless and the sun warmed the land with its radiation.
+The sparrows outside the window chirped their hellos, while they basked
+in that life giving light, before they took to flight for the day.
+
+
+Boy, the servant, carefully walked into the room and looked about in
+wonder; this was his usual facial expression, before he drew on enough
+courage to wake his lord Brook.  He carefully delivered a pewter basin
+full of water, for his master's morning washing.
+
+He called to Brook several times in a meek tone but with no response.
+Moving closer, and touched his master's forearm, again calling Brook's
+name.  This time, however, the boy called in a much louder and
+demanding tone of voice.
+
+Brook quickly stirred from his deep sleep and for several moments just
+stared at the boy with an indifference that somehow seemed to be forced
+from himself.
+
+Brook cleared his throat and sat up in his chair.  He prepared himself
+to play the Lord once again, but on this day he had decided, that the
+long and horrible game would come to an end and that he would truly be
+master, as it was his right.
+
+He sat up in his chair and in his usual manner coughed a few times
+before he spoke.  Boy stepped back a bit when Brook coughed but he
+quickly returned to him, and slightly bowed his head to him.
+
+Brook coughed once again then took a deep breath as he looked about the
+room then back at the boy.
+
+"What is this call, Boy?" boomed Brook.
+
+"Pardon, Sir, but the lady had asked me to wake you." answered Boy.  "I
+have brought water to wash the sleep from your eyes."  He lifted the
+basin up to Brook where, after a moment he splashed the scented water
+up into his face then dried himself with the towel that hung over Boy's
+arm.  "Your wish -- my Lord!" uttered the boy, obediently leaving
+Brook's presence as the Lady entered the room.  She carried a large cup
+and as Boy passed her she smiled at him and told him that he could go
+into the garden until he was needed again.  He smiled in reply and
+thanked her, then hurried away.
+
+Lady Dearborne was in a happy mood.  She smiled warmly at her husband
+as she approached him with the cup full of broth.  She extended to him
+her fair hand and when in reach, he took it gently into his own and
+guided her to his side.  Her smile beamed as she bowed to him then sat
+down on the floor by his feet.   She gently placed her head against his
+knee after giving him his broth.  He drank it and sighed, and stroked
+her hand as she hummed a lovely tune for him.
+
+He looked at her, taking in all her beauty, regarding her many years of
+love and loyalty with much pride.  He believed that no man on Earth, in
+the past, present, or likely to in the future, felt as he does.
+
+Dearborne was a vibrant woman, twenty-nine years of age, with beauty
+unsurpassed by any other in Phoride and the surrounding kingdoms.  Her
+long brown hair ended in curly locks that fell in front of her and that
+decorated her creamy neck and shoulders, enhancing the fair, light
+smoothness of her bosom, which emerged from her low cut gown like the
+pinkish eggs of the great Kenttitian Eagle.  Her totality glistened
+like the polished marble god-statues from Laurentine.
+
+When she spoke, her voice was reminiscent of a loon gliding over still
+water, during an early morning mist.  Her words displayed generations
+of knowledge which she had taken to her heart and mind, over her
+seemingly few but happy years of life, with her Lord Brook.
+
+She ceased her humming as she ran her hand across her husband's calf.
+With affection, he returned the caresses to his love; his hand gently
+rubbing across her silky hair.
+
+She spoke without looking up at him or breaking the rhythm of her
+strokes.
+
+"You were not to bed, again, last night.  I was worried and came down
+here to call you.  You were asleep.  I didn't want to disturb you  --
+but it doesn't matter." she said, then she looked up at him and smiled.
+"I know that you were not keeping yourself apart from me."  Brook moved
+his hand to her glowing face, stroked it and smiled at her. He gave her
+a longing kiss.
+
+"I'm sorry, my sweet." he finally said as he helped her up off the
+floor and onto his lap.  He wrapped his arms around her waist and she
+put hers about his neck.  They kissed one another, and held it for the
+longest time.  "Did you close the drapes over the wall, and shut my
+cabinet door?" he asked her.
+
+"Yes!" she answered loyally and put her head on his shoulder.
+
+"You've done that so many times, and yet you have never asked me
+anything about their nature.  Somehow you seem to know they should not
+stay exposed, for the random eye to see!"
+
+"It's not my privilege to question what you do, or why you do it. My
+place is here, at your feet, my love!" she told him in a voice that
+assured him of her potent and loyal love.
+
+Brook kissed her hand.
+
+"No, my love! Your place is not at my feet, but at my side.  Even so,
+my place is your place.  It has always been and always will be.  I love
+you, Dearborne!"
+
+"And I love you, my dearest Brook!" she responded and his trembling
+heart was calmed by the tranquillizing inflections in her song-like
+voice.
+
+An hour passed by as they sat together.  Dearborne was on Brook's lap.
+Neither one said very much of anything to the other.  Only in touches,
+kisses and embraces, and the volumes of thought that passed between
+them, did they say anything.
+
+They kissed each other again and she turned her body to converse with
+him more directly.  She told him that the ArchBishop sent a messenger
+earlier in the morning before he was awake, with a request that she
+would try to get him to the Cathedral, to speak with him.
+
+"The ArchBishop," she told him,  "wonders why you haven't answered his
+calls to a conference, earlier.  It's been weeks since he asked you to
+the cathedral.  This morning he sent word, to me, to persuade you to
+see him."
+
+Brook instantly became disturbed and let her off his lap.  He stood up
+and slowly walked over to the window.  After a few moments of silence
+he turned to her and in a loud, angry, voice spoke his mind.
+
+"I do not entertain business with such a man.  I hold no men like him,
+in regard, as friends _ or anything else.   I shall not go to him, from
+my own will, and if he cannot move his bulbous body to come here, I
+will not exert myself for him."  Brook's voice echoed about the stone
+room, its bass quality full of contempt and hate.  Then he noticed that
+he had frightened her, because her face became drawn and startled.
+After a moment, she spoke in an uneasy manner.
+
+"My love, that ... that's not proper.  The ArchBishop cannot be treated
+like that ... He's the --"
+
+Brook quickly stepped towards her and put his hands on her upper arms,
+interrupting her train of thought.
+
+"-- He's the biggest hypocrite that has ever lived.  He's a
+megalomaniac who has always taken advantage of these people in Phoride.
+ Yet, I have stood by and watched it, and allowed it.  What's to become
+of it all?"
+
+He dropped his hands from her arms and embraced her.  Then, in a
+breathless whisper, while his eyes were closed, committed himself to
+subdue the powers that the ArchBishop thought he had under his
+command.Dearborne, worried and confused by her husband's quickly
+changing moods, held him closely to herself.
+
+"What is wrong, Brook?  I feel like something severe bothers you.  Tell
+me what trouble's
+you, my love."  she pleaded in a concerned voice but, for a while, he
+did not answer.  He stepped away from her and moved towards the window
+again, and said nothing.  Dearborne thought that Brook was going insane
+and she prayed to her fullest ability that she was wrong, and that she
+was just entertaining foolish and childish ideas.
+
+On the streets were the sounds of people; talking, laughing, buying and
+selling, and going about their daily routine; which, in more cases than
+not, was just trying to survive.  In the distance, from the direction
+of the Cathedral, came the horrific buzzing sounds of the Monastic
+Guard's electrophoric weapons.  The sound was like the drone of a
+million panicked mosquitos, swarming in a mass confusion.
+
+Brook's eyes filled with tears and Dearborne looked towards the window.
+ Silence took command of the room.  Dearborne slowly moved towards the
+window, touched Brook's forearm and looked at him with her big brown
+and compassionate eyes.  He placed his hands upon her, then they
+embraced until the nightmarish sounds of the ArchBishop's weapons died
+and the sounds of the children, playing in the streets, filled the air
+in its place, again.
+
+Dearborne knew that there was a change in Brook.  Never before has he
+cringed under the sounds of the ArchBishop's weapons, and the results
+of them thereof.  Soon, Dearborne cried, too.
+
+Brook eased his embrace on her.  He stroked her hair and kissed the
+tears from her eyes until she stopped crying.
+
+"It is time, my love."  Brook finally said in a low tone.  "It's time
+for me to tell you about all these things here, with me."  He motioned
+to her the whole room and what it contained: the shelves of books, the
+cabinet, the small statues, the white screen and the musical
+instruments beside it, in the corner.  "After all our years of
+marriage, I will tell you about these things that my father, Smith
+Blue, left for me to use, to keep my rule strong in Phoride."
+
+She dried her eyes with a handkerchief that she took from her sleeve.
+
+Brook guided her to every part of the room and explained to her the
+uses which every item had during the time of the Twentieth Century,
+over a millennia ago.  He explained to her that the statues were the
+likeness of the rulers during that time.  He told her about how these
+men's search for wealth and power plunged the whole world into a bloody
+conflict that escalated into a cataclysmic holocaust, that almost
+wiped-out every living creature from the face of the Earth.  He had let
+her know of how only a few handfuls of people survived and how they
+were able to rebuild the world and civilisation, to what it was now.
+
+He disclosed how these people took the best of both simple living and
+great technology, to make a better and more ordered life on Earth. And
+he recounted to her how he was descended from a line of knowledgeable
+men called "scientists", and how the idea of such men was lost over the
+passage of a thousand years, that eventually became thought of as a
+royalty.  The faction name, "THE BLUE" had become thought of as
+nobility and so was its adoption for a surname lineage, to which was
+now his.
+
+Dearborne asked questions about many things.  Things that even Brook
+had long ago asked himself, because he was never able to obtain the
+answers after his father died, and there was no one else to ask.
+
+All he could do was speculate and read some of the old texts, that
+explained some questions but never in enough detail to warrant full
+understanding and satisfaction to his churning curiosity.
+
+Dearborne now understood why Brook kept this room so private, allowing
+only the two people closest to him, in his life (she and Boy), to
+enter it.  She now knew why she thought it necessary, those many
+times, to close the cabinets, and drape-over the wall, when Brook fell
+asleep and left them in the open.  Brook was aware that all this
+knowledge would be misused if it were in the hands of someone like the
+ArchBishop and his puppet legions.
+
+Brook had mixed emotions about his life and his own power.  Although he
+and Dearborne had been married for thirteen years, this was the first
+time that he divulged so much dangerous knowledge to her.  In Phoride,
+as elsewhere in the world, the way of life has been one of mistrust and
+suspicion.  Yet, Brook knew that she would tell no one because there
+were many things that they shared and neither one has revealed them to
+anyone else.
+
+When Brook finished telling Dearborne most of the important details
+about the gadgetry, they stood at the window for a long time and just
+stared at the town, and its people.
+
+The Monastic Guards patrolled the streets while the people went about
+their day-to-day activity, buying and selling items that they took to
+the market.
+
+As far as the eye could see down the street people were busy making
+their livelihood.  They talked and laughed with one another and rarely,
+if ever, paid any mind to the black-clad, helmeted guards that policed
+the area.
+
+Children played in the streets.  Some of the daring one tried to
+actually annoy the guards who, like zombies, went on their way without
+showing the slightest hint of aggravation.  Afraid of being punished
+for their children's misdeeds, parents beat their children for everyone
+to witness.  They did not want the "Almighty's Angels" (as they guards
+were often called), to pour their wrath upon them.  They felt that
+their children's bloody noses and cut lips were enough to show their
+respect, and submission, to the rule of the Almighty.
+
+
+Brook put his arm over Dearborne's shoulder and stroked her hair.  He
+set her small and delicate hand into his other, and held it tightly.
+
+Turned towards her, he saw a few shiny tears slide down her rosy
+cheeks.  "They are the ones that I must now tell." he said, pointing
+out the window at the children.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWO
+
+The streets were alive with people vending their goods.
+
+The mid-morning was always the busiest time of the day in Pomperaque,
+and should it have been anything else?  Afterall, this city had been
+the capital of Phoride for some five hundred years. The routine had
+always been the same. At sunrise the people brought their goods out
+into the major streets, where they bought and sold amongst one
+another.  When noon-time came around they all gathered their things
+together and returned to their homes and rarely, if ever, emerged
+again until the evening when they made their way to the taverns and
+theatres.
+
+But even in the evening the city wasn't as alive as it was during
+mid-morning.  This was a time when people spoke to one another and
+laughed at little humours that they created and therefore strengthened
+the social bonds between themselves.  Men drank and talked at the
+cafes while their women stayed by the stands and kiosks, exchanging
+goods and talking also.
+
+
+Sometimes someone came along and bought something with gold bits, which
+was surprising and not very common, since the usual manner that the
+people carried on their business was in barter and in copper.  However,
+the attainment of gold was short-lived.
+
+Every day at noon, one of the ArchBishop's tax clerics went amongst
+those who received gold and exchanged it for copper bits. Usually, the
+exchange wasn't just or fair.  The town's people were most often given
+two bits of copper for every one bit of gold.  Rarely they received
+five bits to one of gold: that was a great achievement in everyone's
+eyes if someone were capable of bringing it about.  This was dangerous,
+however. If someone haggled for anything over five bits of copper to
+one of gold, they were threatened with Divine Punishment -- for their
+sin of greed -- unless they payed a fine, which always equalled the
+exact number of gold bits that the merchant possessed.  Thus was the
+usual mode of business and economics for Pomperaque, and the rest of
+Phoride. All this was the common practice of the surrounding provinces,
+and kingdoms; which the ArchBishop directly influenced.
+
+It was one such morning that Dearborne went out into the streets with
+Boy, to do her marketing.  It was the third day of the week and not the
+second day, which she usually took to do her marketing, and everyone
+was happy and pleased to see her because they all thought that
+something bad had happened to her.  The merchants weren't prepared for
+her absence on the second day and all of them questioned her for a
+reason why she missed her usual day.  She just smiled and told them
+that she wanted to be with her husband, and they sent their
+heat-warming greeting to him.
+
+For the thirteen years that she had been married to Lord Brook, she
+always marketed on the second and fifth days of the week.  The sudden
+change in her market day created a great stir in the hearts of the
+people. Now that they could see that she was well, they rejoiced and
+treated her with sweets and fruits, and gave her things to take to
+their Lord and sovereign, Brook Scullion Blue.
+
+Like every day, the streets were filled with people.  Their goods were
+spread about the ground on blankets, or on top of carts, or set on and
+around the kiosks in the city square.
+
+Dearborne and Boy made their way down the street towards the square,
+which was the liveliest part of town during any time of the day.  It
+was here where the best produce and meats were to be found during the
+morning market hours.  It was here that the highest quality foodstuffs
+were brought in from every part of Phoride and elsewhere.
+
+Also, in the city square, jewellery and fine garments were sold and
+there were amusements for the people.  There were games and
+story-tellers, and machines were there to thrill the children. All
+these amusements carried-on throughout the entire day and night.
+
+Boy carried a large basket and was slightly ahead of Dearborne.  They
+both walked slowly and looked around the different stands, at the
+various things of interest.
+
+Dearborne smiled her greetings at some council men that sat at tables
+outside the caf�.  Business carried on in its usual manner, the sounds
+of livelihood resounded throughout the streets and into the other
+regions of the city, out towards the Hill People, who were the free
+farmers of Phoride.  There was some kind of commotion down the street
+but it didn't appear to be any different than usual to Dearborne, and
+she paid little attention to anything but her own thoughts, anyway.
+
+She had never known about the holocaust that had occurred over a
+millennia ago.  She had known that something cataclysmic happened but
+no one could ever find out the whole story because it was a taboo
+topic, according to the written Laws of Canon; which denied any kind of
+knowledge about the past.
+
+She was confused by the Canon's Law, which said the past was a
+disillusionment.  Afterall, there were history books and subjects at
+the Blaisaman, right here in Pomperaque.  The Blaisaman had, at one
+time, been one of the largest learning institutions of its kind,
+anywhere on the Northern Continent.  This was the very place that
+Dearborne and many other "Prominents" completed their studies.  She
+remembered the extensive teachings of history and how it had
+influenced and changed life in Phoride.  Only now, four years after
+she had received her Darmaclust, she realised that even in the highest
+levels of study, no one knew, or at least there was no one who would
+disclose their knowledge, about the history prior to a thousand years
+ago.
+
+She never questioned why this was so at the time and apparently, no one
+else questioned it either.  She hadn't realised that there was no
+written or taught history, concerning that period before the officially
+declared beginning of the world.  The only stories that were told to
+the scholars, about the before-time, was that there was a fiery chaos
+in the cosmos, before the Almighty created the world and its first
+earthly family.  But anything that was taught to the student-scholars,
+even concerning this, was very limited.  Still, there were no
+questions.
+
+Dearborne couldn't believe that anyone, not even she, thought to pursue
+the topic any further than that which was told to them.
+
+She came out of her thoughts for a moment when she noticed that Boy had
+wandered-off somewhere and without her permission.
+
+She reconnoitred the square; the different stalls and the kiosks then
+saw him standing with some pretty town's-girl, of the same age.  Both
+watched some dark-skinned woman, with golden hair and sapphire-like
+eyes, levitate herself and many other weird things, including some of
+the audience, on the fringes of the stage.
+
+About to call on him, she heard some quick steps behind her and a
+familiar voice that calling her name.
+
+"Lady Dearborne!  Good morning, my sweet friend." said the voice.
+
+She turned quickly to the caller and smiled as he reached her, and
+kissed her hand.
+
+"Miel, my dear friend, how are you?" she asked him in a surprised and
+happy manner.
+
+"I am fine.  My wife is well, too!  She just birthed our twelfth child
+a son!" he beamed with pride.
+
+"My, my!  You do keep yourself active!"
+
+"Yes!  That is why I could not answer the invitation to your
+anniversary celebration."
+
+"You are coming, are you not?"
+
+"Oh, yes!  Of course, I'm coming.  I wouldn't miss it for anything."
+he assured her.
+
+"And Aria?
+
+"I don't know yet.  She doesn't recover from child baring as quickly as
+she had at one time.  Nevertheless, I will be there."
+
+"Well, thankyou ... Brook and I shall watch for you!"
+
+"Goodbyes till then!" he exalted, then after he kissed her hand again,
+he walked off in the direction of the caf�, and shouted greetings to
+some men sitting at the nearest table.
+
+Dearborne turned and called to Boy.  He glanced over his shoulder to
+see her waving him in with her hand.  He motioned to the girl to stay
+where she was and ran over to Dearborne.
+
+They strolled over to Empal; the biggest seller of fruits and
+vegetables, herbs and spices, known on the face of the continent, and
+perhaps in the whole world.
+
+He greeted her and Boy with the usual good-hearted smile, and warm
+hello.  Then as always, in his brawny Virunese accent he asked about
+Brook, his favourite Lord, while he slowly filled Dearborne's basket
+with the best of his produce.  In turn, Dearborne asked about his
+family -- his daughter in particular, and unobserved slipped several
+gold bits into his hand when they shook.
+
+Dearborne wasn't the only one of the nobility to do this.  Many others
+had done it, as well.  Not because of pity or any such sympathies but
+rather s a show of respect for his strength and his odd position in
+their society.
+
+Everyone in Phoride, except for the ArchBishop and his train of
+followers, admired his position against the ArchBishop when he was
+requested for Gaena, his daughter, to bare the child of "The
+Almighty".  He refused to allow his daughter's virginity to be taken
+by anyone other than a mountain tribesman and so immediately arranged
+a wedding to take place between her and her betrothed love, Tucker.
+Tucker was a Krolalin Mountain goat-herder.
+
+Although everyone overpaid Empal for his services, he was forced into
+near poverty when he dared to live in Pomperaque or anywhere else in
+Phoride, for any lengthy period of time.  This was caused by his
+obstinacy towards the ArchBishop.  In the beginning, after a few months
+of hardship he returned to Exendria, the capital of Virune.  He rebuilt
+his fortune, and later returned to Pomperaque.  Since then, he had kept
+to a cycle of return to Exendria.  Like a migratory bird, he headed
+North every summer then returned to Lower Phoride in the winter.
+
+Even though extensive and constant travel was difficult on most people,
+it didn't seem to affect Empal in a very harsh way.  In fact, he soon
+came to enjoy his cycled migration because he made a greater fortune
+selling his produce during his travel than he did selling in either
+Pomperaque or Exendria, combined.  Now, in his seventh cycle, he had
+accumulated more wealth than what the ArchBishop could dream of taking
+away from him; in fines, taxes, licenses or tariffs.  Brook had dared
+to veto the ArchBishop's plan for all merchants, farmers and artisans
+to pay a monthly tribute to the church, to encourage the building of
+roads, buildings and the like.
+
+Brook knew that no buildings would ever come out of the plan and that
+it was just another one of the ArchBishop's ploys to keep the people of
+Phoride poor and ignorant.  His veto helped all the working class
+people in the land and also greatly boosted the economic strength of
+Phoride.  He made it the wealthiest and most powerful land on the
+Northern Continent.  And all of this was begun by the will of a simple
+old man, who chanced his standing up to the ArchBishop's tyrannical
+order of life.
+
+Dearborne and Empal said their farewells and he asked her if she will
+be back on the fifth day, as usual, but she shrugged unknowingly and
+smiled a good-bye at him.
+
+Boy carried the basket for a while until Dearborne saw that he
+occasionally looked back to where the town's-girl stood, waiting for
+him to return to her.  Being a kindly woman, she took the basket from
+him and let him go to the girl, telling Boy that she would not need him
+for a while.
+
+She was pleased to see Boy and the innocense of childhood that he, and
+all those like him, possessed.  Their's was the future.  This, she
+understood through her husband's guidance.  She knew that it was the
+responsibility of the Elders to prepare a secure and stable life for
+their children.  It was this idea that caused Brook to become so
+sensitive to the uselessness of killing the transgressors of the Canon
+Laws:  those laws, more than half of which, were written only to
+benefit the Great Church of The Almighty.
+
+She was saddened when she realised that Boy, and all those of his age,
+might not have any kind of future at all.
+
+She continued to look at the boy.  Her mind remained deep in thought
+about him and his vague tomorrow.  She almost cried.
+
+
+"He's a hardy boy, Lady Scullion-Blue!"  A sudden, slow and taring
+voice, that sent a cold flush down her back and that raised the small
+hairs on the nape of her neck, came from behind.  She quickly turned,
+and when she saw that it was the Cardinal Allen, she curtsied to him
+and kissed his hand.
+
+"Is your household faring well, my child?  asked the Cardinal.
+
+"Yes, Cardinal Allen.  We are happy for our blessings." she moved away
+from him.
+
+"I am happy for you ... I am surprised to see you in the market today.
+It's not your usual day?" his voice sounded scheming and distrustful as
+he eyed her.  Dearborne felt uneasy, as if she were being prodded or
+groped by someone.  She felt as if swarms of army ants were crawling
+over her entire body, and were devouring her alive.  She didn't answer
+right away.  She quietly looked to see if Boy was still by the stage
+but he had moved with the girl to another one, where some magician made
+small animals and shapes transmute in their appearance.
+
+Dearborn turned back to the Cardinal and answered.
+
+"No, it's not my usual day for marketing.  I stayed home with Brook,
+yesterday!" she said.
+
+"No doubt talking about raising a family -- I wager?"
+
+"Yes!  That is so!  We feel that we are now prepared for children."
+
+"True, true! -- Just a few days ago I was speaking with some of the
+Brothers, at Halls, about you and Lord Brook.  We prayed that you may
+soon be blessed with many sons.  All of us look forward to your sons'
+future attendance at out vicarage."  Dearborne became somewhat
+disturbed and briefly lost her pleasant smile.  She answered him in a
+subdued, but still obviously denying tone of  voice.
+
+"Yes!  Definitely that!" she said then became silent, once again.
+
+
+Cardinal Allen slowly looked over Dearborne's whole body and sighed.
+He imagined the pleasures that he could experience if he were to bed
+with her; to meet her full mouth with his and to touch the full
+softness of her bosom.
+
+Dearborne moved her long hair allowing it to fall upon her breasts,
+covering herself from the Cardinal's intensive gaze.
+
+After a few moments of silence, Cardinal Allen glared into her eyes,
+and in a dishonestly gentle voice, asked her if she cared for
+refreshment.  She couldn't but answer him, and soon she tried to smile
+as she conceded.
+
+"Shall we sit, then?" asked the Cardinal and escorted her to a vacant
+table at the caf�, where several of the men sat about, eyeing them and
+mumbling with questioning discontent and accusation.  Soon, however,
+they returned to their talking and did not pay attention to the Lady,
+and the Cardinal, sitting nearby.  They resumed their previously gaiety
+and laughter, and heavy-handed talk.
+
+A large, blond tavern maid soon came to the table.  She toted a tray of
+dirty tankards.  With a big smile, she winked at Cardinal Allen then
+looked at Dearborne.  She chuckled a little when he smiled back at her.
+
+"How you, Cardin' -- What do?"  she asked.  Her eyes jutted back and
+forth between him and Dearborne.
+
+"A small rose wine, please." she finally said.
+
+The tavern maid grinned, then once again winked at Cardinal Allen. With
+a quick and brisk "it's good!", she left them.
+
+The strange commotion that boomed on the street most of the morning,
+had grown and spread right down to the caf� where they sat.  Cardinal
+Allen wasn't too disturbed by the loud shouting of some young man and
+the discontented, riotous mob that shouted back at him.  He was
+preoccupied with his interest in Dearborne.  They said very little at
+the table or at least, nothing that was of any great significance.
+Dearborne watched the crowd as they started to throw stones and ripe
+fruit at the you man, and Allen watched Dearborne's breasts rise and
+fall with her every breath.
+
+Once more, he continued his deceit and his lecherous manner.
+
+"Ah, yes!  Lord Brook is a very lucky man, to have wed such a woman as
+you!"
+
+Dearborne became even more upset and she began to fidget.  She looked
+around to see if anyone was listening; most were interested in the
+young man that was creating the disturbance, and Miel had long since
+left.
+
+"If I had not become a man of the Almighty, I could have wed such a
+precious fawn.  I, too, could have cleaved to a woman whose blood boils
+for only the one man that she loves."
+
+Dearborne was surprised by what the Cardinal had said to her.
+Uncomfortable, she tried to speak while she looked around to make
+certain that no one else heard him.
+
+"Cardinal Allen -- I pray, explain the meaning of that remark, or I
+will have to tell Brook!"
+
+"I beg your forgiveness, if I have offended, my Lady.  It is known
+throughout these lands, that women who drink of the rose, are warm and
+passionate to those men that they love."
+
+He looked at her and smiled, his one gold tooth reflecting the sunlight.
+
+No one else, in the caf�, heard their exchange.  Their attentions were
+rivetted on the disturbance that rumbled a little ways down the street.
+
+The tavern maid brought the drinks, served them, and winked at Cardinal
+Allen before she left.  "Enjoy, Cardin'!" she said, then went to serve
+someone else.
+
+"I'm sorry, Cardinal!  I misunderstood the intent behind your words."
+
+
+Cardinal Allen bowed his head and smiled at her a forgiving little
+smile.  In his norm, he turned his own decadence around and once more
+had come clean.
+
+"The mistake was unintentional, my child.  Let us pray that this does
+not happen again." he clasped his hands and lowered his head.
+
+Dearborne bowed her head, as well, and sighed.
+
+The Cardinal, however, did not pray.  He looked up at her and only
+thought about how wonderful she was, and the joys and the pleasures
+that Lord Scullion must feel when he takes her.  He thought about the
+intense heat that he felt, just sitting near her; watching her smooth
+glow and the inviting look in her eyes, as if saying  "I will take you,
+my Lord Cardinal."   But soon his thoughts brought him back to his
+place, as it was, at Halls.  There was the devotion that he had to
+show, and the tributes that he had to give, to the other brothers
+there, and also the obligation that he had to The Almighty, Himself.
+He sighed and said "amen" and Dearborne echoed him.
+
+"I must leave you, now, Cardinal." she continued with a silent
+hesitation.  "Thank-you for the refreshment, and of course the
+compliment."  She saw him, still over by the magician and the girl.
+She called to him and before he came he kissed the girl and waved to
+her even though she stood right beside her.  She giggled and Boy ran to
+Dearborne when she called to him again.
+
+"Here I come, Lady!" he shouted as he ran to her.  Along the way he
+stumbled and dirtied himself, but he sprang up quickly and continued.
+
+Cardinal Allen took her hand.  She spun around in surprise and faced
+him.  She glared at him as his voice, heavy and wet, filtered into her
+mind.
+
+"Before you go, my Lady, please do not forget to request a visit with
+Lord Scullion.  The ArchBishop does very much wish to see him."  She
+pulled her hand out of his, in a slow and obviously repulsed manner.
+She than walked away.  Boy ran after her and she handed him the basket
+of fruit and vegetables.
+
+As they headed in the direction that they had come from, the commotion
+that was down the street was now before them.  They tried to make their
+way to the main boulevard but when they made it, Dearborne stopped to
+see what the problem was.
+
+People pushed and shoved one another and screamed obscenities at a man,
+about Dearborne's age, who jumped up on the magician's stage, knocking
+the magician to the ground.  Throughout the clamour and confusion, the
+man yelled at the people, but no one listened.  He finally had to hit a
+few individuals, sending them careening to the ground, in order that he
+could stay on the stage.
+
+"Listen!" he yelled.  "Listen -- Hear Me!"  Now, on stage, the noise of
+the crowd heightened.  Every single person screamed at him.  Most
+screamed insults and profanity while others screamed at him calling him
+a blasphemer and a heretic.  Some men tried to pull him off the stage
+but he kicked and swung his fists, and made a mark on their faces.
+
+The man lifted a tattered book into the air to show the people, and
+yelled in desperation at the people to listen to what he had to say.
+
+"Listen, people of Phoride!  Hear the truths that have been!  Listen so
+that you too may know!"  he screamed.
+
+The anger of the people was coming to a boil and some men shouted as
+loud as they could at him.
+
+"What truths?  Words that we don't understand?" hollered one, in anger,
+back at him.
+
+"Blasphemies and heresies to destroy our faith in The Almighty!"
+shouted another.
+
+"We don't listen to lies! -- Remove him!"
+
+"These are not lies. These are truths, of the great things that had
+once been and can be, again!" pleaded the man from the stage. The
+murmur of the riotous mob grew; people yelled to others to take him
+away and kill him, and to close their eyes to his devilish words.
+
+"Hear me, friends!  Hear the words of the "old ones" from that age that
+had vanished! -- Hear of those who have been in shelter, and who waited
+to be born again.  All of you are the witnesses to them, to reason and
+to understand them, again!" said the man on the stage as he waved his
+book in the air, over his head.
+
+Dearborne and Boy moved into the shadows of the adjacent street.  She
+was curious to hear what the man had to say.
+
+Cardinal Allen still stood by the caf� table and watched some woman
+grab at the leg-bindings of the man's sandal.  Allen waited.  The woman
+screamed.
+
+"This demon tempts us!  Call the Almighty's Angels to destroy him!" and
+Allen pulled from his habit a small flat, triangular device and passed
+his forefinger over its surface.  Instantly, bells echoed throughout
+the street and the roar of the mob died down as they moved back, away
+from the stage.
+
+Two tall male figures, dressed totally in black, with dark helmets and
+shiny metals adorning them, entered the square in haste, beside the
+caf�.  Cardinal Allen pointed a bony finger at the man on stage and the
+two monastic guards stepped up to the stage and drew their weapons on
+him.
+
+The man on stage was certain that they would fire upon him.  He knew
+that he couldn't allow his book to be taken from him, for then no one
+would ever see it.  He quickly took a glass ball from his hip sack and
+threw it down at the guards.  A twangy sound echoed though the air and
+the man fell from the stage, to the ground.  The glass ball that he
+had thrown down poured-out a grey green smoke, giving him the chance
+to drag himself into one of the nearby alleys.
+
+The monastic guards stopped in their tracks.  Their guns were still
+pointed up towards the stage but they did not fire any more.
+
+The mob, aimless and panicked, ran into one another and screamed in
+horror that they were blind.  Others fell to the ground and crawled
+off, crying and praying to the Almighty to deliver them from the evil
+that had befallen them.
+
+Cardinal Allen ran off in the direction of Halls, still rubbing his
+forefinger over the surface of the device.  The roar of the mob
+subsided, giving way to the eerie sounds of the bells that echoed
+through every part of Pomperaque.  As Allen approached Halls, he fell
+over his habit, dragging behind him, and in final desperation, made it
+through the gateway and collapsed by the fountain in the courtyard.
+
+Amidst the confusion in the city square was the man's body.  It dragged
+itself into a doorway, his hand cupped over the open fist-sized wound
+in his side.  The intolerable pain made him sway out of the doorway and
+onto the cobble-stone street.  He dropped his book as he tried to stand
+up, and vomited into the gutter before he passed out.
+
+Some figures quickly rushed towards him.  One of them grabbed the book
+and concealed it with their clothes, as they took him under the arms
+and quickly spirited him away.
+
+
+Overlooking pomperaque stood Mount Benitar the rock of wisdom.  There
+sat a man of wisdom, who watched everything that occurred in that great
+city.
+
+The man of the mountain was not pleased with what he witnessed taking
+place over the centuries.  Alone, he contemplated his descent into the
+valley.
+
+
+CHAPTER  THREE
+
+Some birds chirped outside, perched on the branches of the giant
+junipers, hidden by the shadows of the leaves, hiding from the heat of
+the afternoon sun.
+
+A breeze gently sighed through the window, the lace coverings flapped
+about their hangings, animating them into a lively dance and scattering
+the shy sunlight that intermittently peaked into the room.
+
+The room was large and fragrant with exotic incenses.  The blue and
+white of the polished Lazurite walls pleased the eye, as did the
+intricately carved sandalwood furniture and bed frame. All of this
+added a most natural aura to the naked smoothness of the marble and the
+stone, utilized throughout the building.
+
+In the white, fur-lined bed lay a man.  His upper torso was propped up
+by blue satin pillows, stuffed with fluffy swans down.  The pillows
+showed the unmistakable signs of dampness, from his sweat.  He lay
+still, tiny beads of sweat streaming from his brow.  His nostrils
+flared with each painful breath that he took.  A blanket was drawn up
+to his waist.  His arms rested on the blanket's end and to his side.
+His chest was circumscribed by clean bandages that held a herbal
+poultice against the wound in his side -- an attempt to relieve his
+pain.
+
+The sounds of people outside returned to normal.  Business carried on
+in its usual way and the people carried on in their usual disarray.
+
+Outside the room, in the hallway, was heard the whispering voices of a
+man and a woman.  The woman was describing an incident that had
+occurred within the city square, that had injured their guest.
+
+Within the room, the man on the bed stirred and woke up.  He tried to
+sit up quickly but let out a deep, painful groan as he again lay back.
+His pain subdued him in silence.  The voices outside the door hushed
+for a moment and the man's voice was heard again.  It speculated that
+the injured man, in bed, may have regained consciousness.
+
+The man in bed touched the bandages and grimaced in pain.  He was
+motionless in the bed and looked about the room.  The exquisite,
+luxurious beauty of the walls and patterned ceiling, with the many
+crystals hanging from it suggested  "home".  He looked towards the
+window, just in time to see a tiny swallow turn and fly from the ledge,
+and a red-breasted Bourbon, was balancing on a branch and singing its
+aria to him.
+
+The latch on the door clicked as it was opened.  The man in bed, lifted
+his head for a moment and watched three people approach him; the
+smaller one carrying a tray of food and drink.
+
+For a long time, silent looks were exchanged between them all.
+
+The cautious servant placed the tray over the man's lap and helped him
+to sit up.  He placed another cushion at his back.
+
+The man looked at the food and at the others, until finally, the host
+smiled and took a bite from the food and sipped the drink.
+
+"Eat, my friend!  You will not heal quickly if you do not eat."  he
+said, then stepped away from him.
+
+The man in bed devoured the food as if he has never before eaten.  The
+host and his wife glanced at each other as they watched him.
+
+After a minute, the injured man suddenly stopped and looked at the
+others who stared at him while he at.  There was thick quiet until the
+injured man spoke, with a serious mistrust, in the tone of his voice.
+        "Where is my book?" he asked.
+
+The host smiled at him and looked over to his wife.  "Your encyclopedia
+is safe, my friend."  answered the host, as he slowly neared the bed.
+
+The servant helped him sit up more comfortably in the bed when he
+showed too much pain, trying to so do by himself.
+
+Suspicion burned in the injured man's flaring eyes.  He questioned his
+host further.
+
+"Who are you to know of such books?"
+
+"I am the sovereign of Phoride -- I am called Brook Scullion.  This is
+my wife, Dearborne and our ... servant, Boy!"  said the host, the Lord
+Brook.  He continued.  "We know of that book, and about much more!"
+
+There was quiet again for a few moments as their injured guest drank,
+his thoughts and fears sculpted across his wide hirsute face.          "No!"
+said Brook.  "It happens that we have common interests and like goals.
+You, however, have a strange courage, trying to speak out your
+knowledge.  This is dangerous! -- No, my friend, if I were to kill you,
+it would be like preventing a cure for a rampant plague!"
+
+
+Dearborne neared the bed and looked at him while she explained to him,
+how he came to be there, in the room.
+
+"I was in the market today.  When I was leaving I saw you, shouting and
+waving a book over your head, but no one listened.  I did not leave,
+for the sake of curiosity, then after you were hurt, Boy and I brought
+you back here."  when Dearborne finished, a small, thankful smile
+drifted across his face, then finally grew into a sincere completion
+when Boy added his thoughts.  "You're heavy!" she said, rubbing his
+arms.
+
+Brook stood right up against the bed and checked the bandages.  He
+sighed and shook his head in disbelief.
+
+"You are a very fortunate man.   Never before have I seen anyone
+survive a blast from those --- "
+
+" -- Electrophoric guns!"   interrupted the man.
+
+"Yes!  You know much of the last millennia!" he smiled.
+
+"I do, sir!  So do others from where I come.  I am Lloyd Bartlet, and I
+am from Besten."
+
+Brook turned to Dearborne.  They looked at one another, their
+expressions bordering on apprehension, puzzlement and a somewhat odd
+pleasure.
+
+"Besten?!"  Brook ejaculated with surprise.
+
+Lloyd nodded his head and with a smile, he detailed.
+
+"Besten, the  'Hopeless City',  as the ArchBishop calls it.  We have no
+tyrant rulers there and no monastic institutions, and because of this
+we are called  'evil',  by him.   Well ..."  he shrugged at his
+thought.
+
+"Why are you here, if Besten is so free?" asked Dearborne, confused and
+now becoming interested about his motives.
+
+Lloyd took another drink from the goblet on his lap tray while Lord and
+Lady Scullion waited, in anticipation, for him to explain why he had
+come to Phoride.
+
+Boy stood by.  He watched and listened.  His face showed its usual
+bewilderment.  He handed Lloyd a large napkin and Lloyd wiped his
+mouth.  After the wiping he sighed and finally explained his presence
+here in their land.
+
+"My people (my father, Harvard Bartlet, especially), had sent me to try
+to alter the ArchBishop's trade embargo on Besten.  I suppose that I
+went about it the wrong way by trying to talk to the people first!"
+
+Brook put his hand on Lloyd's shoulder and assured him that he made no
+mistake.  Dearborne agreed with her husband's opinion and she released
+her suspicions.
+
+"It wouldn't have made much of a difference.  Actually, avoiding the
+talk, directly with the ArchBishop probably saved your life and I
+believe that you may be fortunate enough to have created a question in
+some of the citizen's minds.  Your injury, I suppose, may be considered
+a payment for giving men new ideas!"
+
+"I think it to be a little too expensive!" added Lloyd, with humour,
+laughing at his own pains and inequities while he touched his bandaged
+chest.
+
+They continued their palaver throughout the afternoon and into the
+early evening.  They learned many intricacies about one another; about
+their individual lifestyles and their social ideologies.
+
+They discussed the progress that had occurred through the many
+generations that grew and nurtured along with it the disease of
+corruption and immorality;  the same diseases that were present in all
+civilised peoples.  These powerful progression had meant the inevitable
+downfall of all the great Empires which once reigned on the Earth.
+From the first humans that walked upright, to the last of the brave
+that went into space, in the late Twentieth Century, it had been the
+same until the fall of man, in his greatest conflagration.  Brook and
+Lloyd exchanged little bits of knowledge about the Twentieth Century
+and the three great wars that were fought.  There were endless columns
+of living flesh, where people were herded like animals by other people,
+and transported to large camps. While there, many who were not
+fortunate enough to die, were made use of in the endless experiments of
+new drugs, surgical techniques and endless studies of the individual's
+body tolerances to torture.
+
+The atrocities, that every war carried with it, seemed to grow and
+spread.  They were pandemic.  Yet, these atrocities were allowed to
+continue, where social morals degenerated further with every proceeding
+conflict and the outrageous brutality that was let to worsen, by the
+lack of authoritative controls on those madmen.  They spoke of the
+GREAT NATION's  'Proposition Blue'; devised in the last half of the
+Twentieth Century, to preserve human life, in the event that global
+annihilation would become reality.  Learned men and women were chosen
+and assembled, and were taken to subterranean cities.  There, they were
+to carry-on with their work and with their lives, in the perfect safety
+of their restraint.
+
+In the years that proceeded, and no major wars were fought, the young
+chosen became old and were replaced by newly chosen young
+intellectuals.  They too, continued in the sealed cities.
+
+Lloyd reached for his book and opened at a particular spot.  He had
+read aloud to Brook; Dearborne and Boy listening:
+
+        "Two generations of the Proposition Blue personnel lived-out 
+         their lives, underground.  In the Omega 1-SGI, restless
+         dissention had spread when the time of the last global war
+         had finally come to pass.  When the news of war spread
+         through the ranks of The Blue, many scientists forcibly left
+         their protective cities and went out into the world to let
+         the common people know of some meagre ways to protect
+         themselves during the inevitable nuclear strikes and the
+         subsequent fallout.
+
+         Some scientists published papers, that they called "The Blue
+         Prospectus".  It told the world about their government's
+         secret cities and it made demands for regular people to be
+         admitted into them, also.  The people then rebelled, all of
+         them wanting in.  In the Far and MiddleEast, the Red Forces
+         fought.  They had left death and destruction in the wake of 
+         their advancement towards (what was then) the world's
+         greatest, and most Holy of cities.
+
+         The masses were terrified.
+
+         At home, people fought amongst one another, crying at the
+         terrible lies that the men in power told to them.  They
+         desperately tried to understand why some of them were not
+         allowed into the "Proposition Blue" standards. The final
+         chance to allow one young worker from each of the State's
+         counties, an admission into one of the seven Omega SubGround
+         Installations.
+
+                                          FLIGHT FOR SALVATION
+                                          GINN -- 2030
+
+
+At dusk, as the twilight colours gave way to darkness and the pulsing
+stars, Brook and his guest had sup and continued with their exchange.
+Dearborne and Boy attentively sat by one another for many of those
+passing hours.  They said very little but listened a great deal.
+
+Lloyd told Brook of a great vault that was uncovered in the centre of
+Besten by historian scholars, many years ago.  The vault contained a
+great number of books, journals and visual ribbons which showed the
+dire panic of the masses when the first bombs began to fall upon their
+cities.
+
+Pictures showed masses in exodus to the mountains just before the
+escalation.  Those people who left early, during the desperately
+unsuccessful peace negotiations, had made it to the safety of the
+mountains, where they hopefully found some degree of protection from
+the deadly fallout.  Those who waited and moved too late, perished in
+the desolation that came to pass. And the world cried, for the final
+prophesy was not fulfilled.  The Son of Man had failed to return and
+put a stop to the killing, the persecution and the corruption.  Some
+people died from their lack of Faith, while other stayed with the hope
+that His return was still to come upon them, a little while later.
+
+Their talk lead them into their own historic backgrounds, to the sum of
+knowledge which was allowed by the original Canon Di'Vaticanus, in the
+middle of the Twenty Seventh Century.  He declared that this two score
+and eleventh year (2651 C.E.), was the beginning of the long-promised
+millennium, as heralded by the ancient prophets.  His declaration was
+made after an eleven-year-old girl gave birth to a son.  The
+eleven-year-old was a foundling in an abbess hermitage, left there by
+someone who could not care for her.
+
+"She was found, wrapped in richly garb and placed in a golden cradle.
+As the girl grew she became beautiful, like the sun.  She shone with
+inner light.  Her hair was white -- shiny like snow and iridescent like
+the moon.  Her olive-skin flesh colouring contrasted her naturally
+reddened mouth and she possessed dark, almost black, almond-shaped
+eyes. Her beauty was near Holy and many men felt a jealousy within
+themselves when they just looked upon her.  Then, at eleven, she was in
+size and stature, and appearance, to that of a full-grown woman; she
+birthed a son.  This son, the Canon had proclaimed as a "Saviour" and
+sought to conduct a sacrifice in honour of the child, but he told the
+world that nothing was precious enough for this.  It was soon
+determined, however, that there was one thing of great value, in all
+the land; the boy's own young and beautiful mother.  In the shortness
+of time, and as if for the redemption for her death, the boy became
+weak and also died.  The child's milk of life was taken from him and
+nothing else would sustain him.
+
+The child's death was hidden from the ignorant masses and all the
+people believed in a falsity for nearly a half millennia."  Lloyd
+recounted the story about the foundling that came to be called Sunshine
+by the old Abbess Mariot, in the common year of 2640.  This was the
+same little girl that resulted the subsequent formation of the
+spiritualism that has been followed for the last four hundred years.
+
+As the twilight evening gave way to the dark of night, Brook told
+Lloyd about his own lineage, following it as far back as he was able
+to, and confessed to him the peculiar ancestry that he had with the
+Canon Blue.  He explained that his father's line originated with the
+woman Dioneza, the half-sister of the Canon. In 2660 C.E., she had
+agreed to be artificially inseminated with Twentieth Century seamen
+from a physicist, who was called David Sannstein.  He confessed to
+Lloyd that this wasn't really his own line and that he didn't know
+from where his line actually stemmed.  Brook admitted, truthfully,
+that he was a foundling.
+
+He spoke about that one day, long ago, when Smith Blue and his wife
+Miri were returning to Phoride, from the Virgin Mountains.  Miri was
+heavy with child and in that mid-summer's afternoon in 3001 C.E., she
+gave birth to a son and called his name, Manguino.  In a thankful rest,
+while his wife nursed the newborn, Smith Blue walked in the woods,
+following a babbling stream and a strange distant sound which was like
+the crying of a babe.  And in his curious search, he came upon a
+hollow, where there was a child, wrapped in a sackcloth and left within
+a lion's skull.  Smith gave the baby to his wife; seeing the baby
+abandoned and crying from hunger.  And upon seeing the unfortunate
+child, Miri brought it near to her milk-laden breast and let it suckle
+beside her own son.  Having hearts of gold, they accepted the babe to
+their bosom as their own, and Smith called his name, Brook Scullion;
+after the fashion that he had been found -- by a stream, lying in a
+lion's skull.
+
+As midnight approached, they talked of their governments.  Lloyd
+proudly explained to Brook, Dearborn and the quiet Boy, about the
+Democratic system of government that his people accepted from the
+ancient Twentieth Century.  In Besten, the people found it the most
+suitable form of rule for a civilized people.  And even though, in the
+beginning there was corruption and immorality, their land had
+eventually overcome it all and soon gleaned a people of extreme honesty
+and cooperation.  It had made Besten a very powerful, and important,
+centre on the northeast coast of the continent.
+
+Lloyd became depressed when he thought about the Phoridenes closing
+their minds to the knowledge that he tried to give to them, and he
+experienced repeated visions of the monastic guard's electrophoric guns
+wallop him over and over again with their charges.
+
+"My people hoped, that if the Phoridenes were to know the truth about
+the past, they would rally to oppose the ArchBishop.  Maybe then, he
+would resume trade with Besten and the other territories so affected."
+
+Brook thought that Lloyd's people had a logical plan but he also saw
+they were too innocent of the facts about the man in the great Halls
+Cathedral.
+
+"The hopes of your people are too great!"  Brook prepared an
+explanation that shattered any hopes that Lloyd may have had for the
+success of his mission to Phoride.    "These people of Phoride ... they
+are ardent followers of that weasel at Halls.  They follow him as if he
+is a god.  It has been that same way, since the time of Canon.  This
+following has been an deviation, in this land; this worship of him as
+some Almighty, who is nothing more than a man -- a madman!"
+
+Dearborne now broke her long silence and also commented about the
+people.
+
+"They are all children, in mind, and follow the ArchBishop as if he is
+their father.  To keep this maniacal worship, he has banned citizens
+from acquiring knowledge; limiting their scholastic learning to the
+monasteries and to the Blaisaman, and limiting only this to his own
+supporters' children.  These places and their people are controlled by
+him.  He prefers to keep the people as ignorant as he can, for his own
+ease to rule them."  her voice quivered from her constricted soul.
+
+Then, to Lloyd's amazement, Boy joined the conversation.  His
+bewildered expression left him, as his hopeless and saddened voice
+carried right into the hearts and minds of the adults, in the room with
+him.
+
+Brook turned to Dearborne, surprised.  His eyes questioned her for a
+reason for Boy's interjection.  "Everyone does what they are told or
+they are made to suffer!" said Boy.  He rose to his feet, looked at
+Brook and Dearborne and walked about the room.  He continued to speak
+his mind while the others quietly listened.  "Not long ago, the
+servant-girl of one of the Cardinals -- she was just older than me --
+refused to bare the Cardinal's holy child.  With that refusal came her
+death, because the Cardinal declared that she will, therefore, never
+have children ... and in the view of all the people at Halls, and the
+Phoridene Council, the Cardinal had his vicars cut open the girl and
+all she had inside was pulled out and thrown to the floor.  She did
+not die right away.  The Cardinal wanted her last sight to be the
+death of her entire family."  Dearborne turned away from what Boy had
+described.  The horrible sight of the execution had returned to her.
+She and Brook were required to attend the execution -- as was their
+slave, Boy.
+
+Brook went to her and embraced her.  As he consoled her, Boy continued,
+his eyes on the brink of bursting into tears.
+
+"Then, they said that she was a demon and impure, and displayed her
+naked at Halls, for all of Phoride to gawk at."
+
+Boy stopped and lowered his head but his expression showing a
+determined refusal to cry.
+
+Lloyd was horrified by Boy's story and under his breath he could just
+sigh,  "Barbaric!"
+
+Brook and Dearborne held each other, tears slowly dribbling down their
+cheeks as Boy went to them for comfort, as well.  To Lloyd's surprise,
+he watched them embrace the child.
+
+"But why? -- "  Lloyd pleaded.  "Why, my Lord, would such an atrocity
+be done to so young a girl?  What was there to be gained by such
+barbarity?"  he wiped his eyes as he thought of his little sister,
+still in Besten, and imagined that this could also become of her, if
+they lived in Phoride.
+
+"Lloyd, my friend ... the ArchBishop has made some strange laws, that
+I could not veto.  One such law was that the refusal to bare a child
+by a monastic was a sin, punishable by death.  Nothing could be done
+and fear prevented me from asserting what powers I do have over him,
+at Halls.  More of Phoride follows his words and requests than they
+follow mine.  My power is possessed just out of respect for my Blue
+heritage.  He, with whom I had ruled, died early in our lives.  Our
+co-sovereignty, that we promised to Smith Blue, died as well.  It was
+I who united Upper and Lower Phoride but that Almighty ass of
+hypocrisy and immorality, took hold of my people's hearts."
+
+Brook became very angry and felt so vulnerable and alone.  He stood up
+and moved away from Dearborne and Boy.
+
+"He banned all forms of learning, unless all the teaching was conducted
+by his monks, in the monastery.  I tried to oppose him with all my
+power on that resolution.  All I accomplished was the formation of our
+small Blaisaman.  The masses listened to him when he told them _ "The
+Devil is in Knowledge, unless that Knowledge was conveyed by a
+righteous man of the Almighty" ... but as you see Lloyd, we know the
+real devil."
+
+Lloyd came to realize Brook's thoughts and confirmed them with a nod.
+He could see that Brook had some real influence in the local government
+but no real power.
+
+For the first time since the afternoon, there was a still quiet in the
+room.  A morose presence hung in the air and it felt cold and ugly.
+
+Outside, the people began to yell and scream in ecstasy as the warm
+drizzles finally began to pour on them.  Their moderate prolificacy
+grew stronger with the coming of the rain; where the men chased their
+wives and daughters, their mistresses and their whores, out into the
+streets.  In their uncontrolled lust, they rolled around in the mud,
+like swine, and fornicated with anyone or anything nearby.  It mattered
+very little to them whether it was man, woman, child or animal.  That
+rain was the ill-begotten legacy of the Twentieth Century war.  The
+rain fell only once or twice a year in Lower Phoride.  It was the same
+rain that caused the beautiful vegetation to grow into its remarkable
+splendour.  Throughout the year, the green would survive by the
+watering from the artesian seas beneath the ground, until the next rain
+came.  Some citizens eagerly waited for the rain to come, on that one
+day or night, where they believed that the evil within them would be
+fully satisfied and would leave them if they allowed themselves to be
+fully indulged in whatever manner of perversion happened upon them,
+during that season.
+
+There were those who were afraid.  Mothers, who didn't want to see
+their innocent ravaged, hid in their homes until the rains passed, and
+after the rain, those who hid came out into the streets.  They wouldn't
+be afraid of the pools and puddles because the rain lost its strange
+properties shortly after touching the ground.
+
+When the rains eventually ended the hiding people would emerge to see
+their naked friends and relatives in their frenetic prurience.  They
+would walk amongst them, covering their mouths and noses from the stink
+of the forced orgasms produced by their uncontrolled reaction to being
+caught in the rains.    They would gather-up the injured and cart-away,
+to the incinerators, those that had died from their over-exertions.
+The legacy of the rain was a strange one caused by the chemical
+intermixing of, the now weakened, radiation and the bacterial layers
+that encircled the world high in the atmosphere, released by that
+unspeakable war so many years in antiquity.
+
+
+Several hours passed in conversation within Lloyd's room.
+
+Dearborne cradled Boy, now asleep.
+
+Brook and Lloyd devoured the contents of the book Lloyd had brought,
+and Brook reciprocated by showing Lloyd some of the materials and
+relics that he had in his possession.
+
+The rain, stopping not long before, had resumed.  This time it was
+coming down harder, stealing the attention of the two new friends, as
+they read.
+
+Dearborne, quietly sitting and relaxed, was jolted by a flash of
+lightning and a loud bang of thunder that quickly reported itself.
+
+Boy awoke, startled.  He looked at his surrounding then jumped from
+Dearborne's lap and ran towards the window.   He pulled a large panel
+of wood over the open window to prevent the rain from entering the
+room.  But the rain fell of him.
+
+At once, Brook commanded him to lock himself in his chamber and slide
+the key out beneath the door.  The boy quickly ran from the room, in
+haste to follow what Brook had instructed.
+
+Lloyd, Brook and Dearborne were silent in their concern.
+
+They exchanged several glances of worry about Boy.
+
+"These rains are an evil necromancy over this entire continent.  We
+also experience the rains, in Besten; although, my people do not go
+into it willingly.  We have set aside gardens, throughout the entire
+city, for those to go, if caught in the rain.   We are compassionate
+towards the cruelty of the madness."
+
+Dearborne looked worried.  She touched Brook's hand and questioned him
+about her fears for Boy.  "Will he be alight?" she asked, as he face
+lost its flushed highlights.
+
+
+A pounding sound was heard down in the distant hallway.  It was coming
+from Boy's room.
+
+"He made it to his chamber in time.  Now he tries to come out.  He will
+have to struggle with the rain's curse until it wears off. It is good
+that Boy is young and he was not fully soaked.  Fortunately, the
+recovery should not take long."
+
+Dearborne worried for Boy, since he had never-before been touched by
+the rain and, as far as she knew, he was far too young to have
+experienced any of extreme, or absurd, sexual drives.
+
+The rain caused his body's glands to react by generating vast hormone
+secretions, and he convulsed in an insatiable erotic lust, while he
+poured out on the floor, by the door, by his own hand.
+
+To calm Dearborne and suppress her worry for the boy, Lloyd and Brook
+continued to talk.  Brook told his guest that he recently taught his
+wife all that he knew about the Twentieth Century, revealing to her the
+secrets from that now forgotten time.
+
+"Have you taught anyone, other than Lady Dearborne, about the past?"
+inquired Lloyd.
+
+"Not as of yet, Lloyd!  But I am prepared to teach the boy, for I
+believe that he is ready to understand."  Brook answered.  "We have no
+children of our own and though it would be wonderful, without is truly
+best.  Our lives are too short and petty in the existence of this world
+of miseries.  Dearborne is also spared a terrible fate by the monastics
+who are not permitted their lustful intercourse without the potential
+of a birth."
+
+Lloyd did not believe in Brook's notion of life being so miserable.  He
+tried to give him a small dose of Bestenese faith.
+
+"That is the very same way that the Old Ones had spoken in Besten, but
+they found that our lives could be as long as we wished.  And our lives
+could be worth while, too!  This may even be our religion.  If not, is
+at least the attitude that we possess!
+
+
+Lloyd closed his eyes and yawned.  The talk that they have had, since
+that afternoon, was tiring even though it was fulfilling.  Now he was
+weary.  A need for rest could be seen in Brook's face, as-well-as in
+Dearborne.  They glanced at one another with tear-soft eyes that craved
+sleep.
+
+Dearborne checked Lloyd's bandages before they prepared to leave him.
+
+"You will be fine.  You are fortunate to survive those evil
+electrophorics.  Maybe the true God is watching over you!" she said as
+she took Brook under the arm.
+
+"Rest ... tomorrow we will talk some more."  Brook commanded.
+"Tomorrow, if you can move around, I will show you more things that you
+may not have seen before."
+
+"Thanks to you, both _ my friends."  exclaimed Lloyd.
+
+Lloyd fell to sleep once he lay back, and his saviours left the room.
+
+
+CHAPTER  FOUR
+
+The rain fell throughout the night and into the early morning hours.
+Just before dawn, the rain had stopped and the sky filled with rainbows
+as the sun rose over Carter Pass (named after Brook's grandfather, who
+made Pomperaque a powerful city-state, nearly two centuries earlier).
+
+On the streets were the people who hid from the rains, in the dry
+sanctuaries of their homes.  They came out and gathered up their
+friends and relatives, that laid about in the streets half or entirely
+naked.
+
+Some were still in the dreadful perverted poses brought upon them, by
+the rain.
+
+The gatherers wore masks while they tried to separate those individuals
+still connected in their copulation.  They wore the masks to keep the
+abominable stench of the human and animal excretions, from reaching
+them.
+
+The heat of the morning sun made the horrid reek worsened to an
+overwhelming degree.
+
+Medical men and women walked about and offered aid to those injured in
+the deranged mass orgy.  Most were young girls and boys, killed by the
+frenetic desires of those who found it more to their pleasure to
+fornicate with the bodies of the dead; after having experienced the
+added excitement of killing them; with their fists or anything that
+they could find, to use as weapons.
+
+There were men and boys, dead or dying from excruciating pain, after
+having their genitalia bitten off by some nymphomaniac harlots and
+other erotopathic bitches -- some of who also died, choking while
+trying to swallow their prizes.
+
+In the final reports given to Brook at noon, eighty-eight citizens were
+dead.  Forty-three were women (ranging in age from fifteen to forty),
+twelve were men (mostly around fifty years of age), and the rest were
+children (boys and girls, six to fourteen).
+
+Brook was saddened and alarmed, for this rate of mortality was the
+highest seen in Phoride for almost three hundred years.  He still
+waited for word to come to him, from Upper Phoride and he didn't want
+to think of the numbers there.
+
+The reports of those injured critically and seriously were also high.
+Their numbers reached close to two hundred; again, mostly comprised of
+children.  Many boys developed venereal chancres and scores of young
+girls would now, never be able to bare children.
+
+Even those who were slightly injured had reddened mouths, anus and
+genitals covered with runny infections.  The more painful pustules
+erupted with yellowish-brown, jelly-like fluids that seeped from them,
+resembling the softened putrefaction of carrion.  The most frightening,
+and eerie, result of the rain was the affects that it had on the human
+spirit.  After the rain, there was always a deathly hush over the
+entire city.  Only the gag-like breathing of those hundreds recovering
+from their scourged vainery, could be heard.  This lasted for several
+days and sometimes continued for weeks.
+
+
+There were no regular markets and no trade occurred.  At night, the
+quiet was gravely frightening and it gave the entire land the
+atmosphere of a necropolis.  The buildings were the tombs and the
+people inside were the living dead.
+
+No one ate for days.  Most could not eat from the stink of the
+ejaculations and blood that still covered the streets.  The sight of it
+all caused nausea on its own accord.  Those who were injured didn't eat
+either for they knew that the good food would quicken the runs of pus,
+as the poisons were forced out of them, and their pain would become
+even more unbearable.
+
+The clean-up of the dead and injured was hurried on this day because
+soon after the sun rose, the heat of the day was intense and by noon,
+the carcasses of the animals that had died from the rain, began to rot.
+By now, the sane, unscathed citizens began to remove the corpses from
+the streets and cart them off to the incinerators for burning.
+
+Many vicars, cardinals, novices and other coenobites helped those on
+the streets.  They administered first-aid and prayed for their souls'
+salvation.  But they were the last to appear on the streets that
+morning, after they cleaned-up their own mess at Halls.  Within the
+Quadrangle of the Cathedral, all the members were locked-in during the
+rain, with dozens of whores and other town's wenches, that were
+promised good food and a place to stay for one month, in return for
+their services when the eagerly awaited rain finally arrived.
+
+These merry women adored the great Halls Cathedral.  It was the most
+enormous structure in all of Phoride and the other lands on the
+continent.  The structure reached for the sky.  Its lean, slender
+appearance was capped by a crystal and gold ornate dome, with a spire.
+Buttresses flew out, all about from the slender central pillar; where
+at its base, tall and wide copper doors majestically opened and closed
+as people walked in and out of the main chapel.
+
+
+Extended behind the pillar and into an oval shaped building was the
+area of the monastery, serving as the dormitories, rectories, scholarly
+libraries and private rooms for the monks.  This residential building
+also housed the ArchBishop's office, wherein he conducted all his
+business of decision.  Although this was one day of heavy mourning and
+discontent, there were plans at hand, and there were thoughts to be
+exchanged.  All this was owed to the ArchBishop's ill-at-ease feeling,
+that was brought on by Lord Brook's refusal to meet with him for such a
+long time.  The ArchBishop was always in his office, seated in his
+leather chair, rumpled in holy softness, and able to turn in full
+circles on its rounded legs.  The ArchBishop was the same age as Brook
+but his hair was darker and the lines on his face were less defined.
+They framed his jutting, hairy brows and silvery-grey eyes, with a
+sculptured precision.
+
+His physique reminded one of a defeated athlete.  His paunchy flab
+lolled about his waist like Saturn's rings, and the texture of his skin
+lacked softness, appearing course and strangely tight.
+
+His clothing shimmered in rich extravagance as he sat in his chair
+dressed in his ethereal garb made of the finest white satin.  His black
+surplice, thrown over it, opened on the front and revealed his bulging
+gut as he sat.  On his head rested the constant sign of authority, his
+tall white and gold mitre, studded about with rare jewels, gifted to
+him by the Heads of other lands.  Across the desk from him sat the
+Cardinal Allen.  Unlike the great ArchBishop, he was more modestly
+clothed in the handmade magenta habit, that all the other Cardinals and
+monks wore within the monastery walls.
+
+The ArchBishop in his chair, listened to the choral chants coming from
+the chapel.  The melodic resonance was made by the dozens of novices
+and vicars as they sang their praise to the great forces of the
+Almighty.  They gave their thanks for their lives, their homes, their
+food and the virgins sent to them, for the pleasures of administrating
+their blessings to them.
+
+
+During the 'Praise to the Almighty' hymn, the ArchBishop, with his
+greatly inflated ego, listened in quiet and not tolerating
+interruptions.  Afterall, their praise was being made to him alone, and
+he felt obliged to listen to them.
+
+The chants echoed throughout Halls and its Quadrangle.  Soon, all the
+senior monks joined in the melodic praise from wherever they were;
+whether in their gardens, in their stalls or strolling along the
+colonnade beneath the dormitory buildings.  After a few minutes the
+whole area around Canon's Butte, where the Halls Cathedral stood, was
+filled with this song.  This was the only sound heard, making its way
+through to the rest of Pomperaque, as it struggled out of its misery.
+
+The office seemed to have an identity all of its own.  On the walls
+hung the likeness of the Archbishop and the ancient Canon
+Di'Vaticanus.  On the number of shelves about the room were placed
+rare and antiquated texts that dealt with their faith, and there were
+equally-rare statues of long-dead saints; those whose names were all,
+but few, forgotten.
+
+As the 'Praise to the Almighty' ended and another hymn began the
+ArchBishop sat up in his chair and resumed the talk that he was earlier
+engaged in, with Cardinal Allen.
+
+"I am pleased that you had found an opportune time to speak with her."
+he said in his roguish, powerful voice.
+
+"Her thoughts seemed preoccupied, when I first spoke to her.  I
+finally asked her to arrange the visit with Brook and Your Holiness,
+but that disturbance had occurred in the square and I do not know if
+she remembered to tell her Lord Brook.  We should have had a reply by
+now!"  Cardinal Allen relayed to the ArchBishop his brief encounter
+with the lovely Dearborne.  He also admitted to him, the desires that
+he felt for her, during it all.
+
+The ArchBishop smiled, his evil, butterflied lips turned up on each end
+while the rest of his mouth stayed unchanged.  His eyes sparkled with
+intrigue and cynicism, and with the knowledge of predictability.
+
+"Our Lord Scullion never replies.  I really don't expect him to -- now,
+more than usual, and we would waste our time to go to him.  We would be
+told by his wretched servants that 'He is not in, call again!'.  Then
+I, like a fool, would wait for another time.  Now, more than ever, we
+must strive for an alliance between us.  His power is a great danger to
+mine and he knows it deep inside his heart.  His is a presence to be
+feared in Phoride!"
+
+Cardinal Allen seemed confused by the change of the ArchBishop's usual
+attitude towards Brook Scullion.  He couldn't see the true feelings in
+his Master's eyes and he didn't know whether he was frightened or just
+being careful about the great sovereign of Phoride.
+
+Allen stood up and went to the window that was behind him, across the
+room.  He looked out to see a number of the monks' service-wenches.
+They all lounged naked by the courtyard fountain, recuperating from
+their follies in the rain the previous evening.  Beside them were a
+number of young novices and some messeigneurs.  He looked over to a
+picture of the ArchBishop and sighed in a breathless manner, until he
+finally looked straight ahead again and nodded to himself in approval
+of his proposed thought.  He turned to the ArchBishop.  When their eyes
+met, he knew that maybe Allen had designed a cunning solution.
+
+However! ...
+
+"Why don't we just dispose of our Lord Scullion?  Then we will have no
+threat and you will be the supreme One, in Phoride!"  he shouted to his
+Holiness.
+
+"But, my loyal Allen, I already am the most supreme.  Why do you think
+that he hasn't told the Phoridenes about the ancient people?  He has
+the proof, just as we do; and because the citizens regard him as highly
+as they worship me, care must be taken to keep him alive.  Our
+advantage lies in my hope that he does not know the extent of his
+power."
+
+"That is odd, your Holiness!  If he indeed has the power, the ability,
+to destroy your authority, then we do not fare well.  You remember the
+other rebellions against you, you Holiness?  He, too, can destroy our
+position of power.  He can be just like Martin of Ohigh, Hudson of
+Netheda, or maybe even like Harvard Bartlet of Besten.  And don't
+forget the single disobedience by those people, like that Virunese pig,
+Empal.  Our unity has become weak and their's has grown!"  Cardinal
+Allen worked himself into a frenzy.
+
+The ArchBishop, with a cool attitude towards the talk of his imminent
+downfall, calmed his loyal servant and set him straight as to the
+workings of Brook's mind, and the probability that nothing at all would
+happen.
+
+He lifted his hands and gestured for Allen to stop.  He smiled and
+swayed his chair to and fro while he spoke.  Cardinal Allen slinked
+back towards the desk.  Apparently, his nervousness was greater than
+the Almighty's himself.
+
+"You worry too much.  I still have Phoride under control, my
+favoured-one.  I have the advantage over our Lord Scullion.  As I said,
+I don't suppose that he knows the full extent of his power and the
+people are also unsure.  Confusion! ... Confusion, Brother Allen, is
+our ally. If he tries anything against us, we shall call him a
+blasphemer, and he does not want this."  he smiled at his own
+deductions, but Allen did not appear to be very pleased.
+
+"Scullion has ruled Phoride for as long as you.  Do you really believe
+that this man, who has ruled for nearly thirty years would cower at a
+charge of blasphemy?"
+
+The ArchBishop laughed as he arranged his surplice, folded beneath his
+gut.
+
+
+"Yes, I do believe it, most favoured.  He thinks that the people follow
+only me.  I proved this to him when I passed the Canon Education Law.
+He will be controlled ... in time."  He leaned back in the chair, a dry
+squeak cut the choral hymn in the background and nurtured the evil
+mechanism within the room.
+
+The singing in the background moved further into the distance as the
+monks shifted to a different section of the building. They chanted the
+appropriate hymns in each of the spiritual rooms.
+
+Allen spoke of Dearborne once again.  He seemed to be angry and oddly
+annoyed about her apparent inability to produce Brook's offspring over
+the past twenty years.  They were the only couple in the land to be
+together for such a long time without begetting children.  Everyone
+questioned that but the answers were always the same.  They weren't
+ready, and are young enough to wait some while longer.  Allen made his
+fun of the man, Brook.
+
+"What of his wife, Holiness?  What of her chastity for these past
+years?  What a coward he is, to be wed to one so fair, as she.  Twelve
+years of marriage and no children, and you do not allow Our right, to
+have her bare one of Our Holy children."
+
+"Hush!  You will have the chance, my most loyal friend.  But we must be
+vigilant for the appropriate opportunity."
+
+Allen smiled at the ArchBishop's approval and with eager ears waited to
+know when.
+
+"You are right about the length of their marriage, with no children.
+Soon they have celebrations of their joining.  We shall attend. You may
+have her obey your whims, at that time, but not before and not after.
+The time will make itself available to you, then!"  finished the
+ArchBishop.
+
+"May humbled thanks, Most High and Wise." said Allen as he quickly
+trotted to his master, the ArchBishop and kissed his hand.
+
+
+"Enough, Allen!  You tire me!  Go and make the necessary preparations
+and give it your fullest attention."
+
+"Yes, Your Holiness!" and after his bow, he left the Almighty to his
+own thoughts, as he listened to the chanting choir, again drawing near
+as they made their way to the upper spirals of the tower.
+
+He relaxed in his chair and patted his belly.  He stretched and sighed,
+as he leafed through some papers and tabloids.
+
+Soon, he delved into deep contemplation about Brook and himself, and
+their respective positions in the land.  Through his mind ran a
+whirlwind of thought that concerned the so-believed misfortune in
+Brook's power.  He felt uneasy over the total disunity that could
+occur, if the mobs of Phoride rose up against him.  It could happen if
+the past were revealed, as truth, in place of the Canon's
+'disillusionment'  commandment.  What if they accepted it?  He wondered.
+
+He remembered that he attained his rule of churchly affairs after the
+death of his father.  He remembered that he had to discharge the
+promise made to his father, after he died, and so changed Phoride and
+all the adjacent lands, to meet his own needs.  His need was to receive
+the fullest devotion and love from every individual in Halls, and the
+realm, and to bask in their worship of him, as their god.
+
+He slowly got up and walked about the room.  He took off his surplice
+and hung it in a chiffonnier then, before he closed it, he drew from a
+small compartment a large napkin, scented with the essence of Nethedan
+lilacs.  He touched it to his nose.
+
+The choir echoed in the background.  The heavenly hymn that they were
+singing was 'God's Tribute to Canon',  the first over-praised god of
+the continent.
+
+
+Listening to the choir, the ArchBishop's spirits were lifted, as if he
+were the Canon and the praise was to him.  Although he had been
+considered as a god in Phoride, for nearly two score years, he was
+still envious of his great-grand-ancestor; for what he had accomplished
+had set the method for those gods after him, to follow.
+
+He smiled heartily as he thought to himself, about the total
+unadulterated domination of whatever he chose to control, and whenever
+he chose to control it.   And once, he spoke aloud to himself.
+"Phoride and its all, are mine!"  He clasped his hands as he walked
+about the room and to the window.  He looked out at the naked women
+lying by the fountain.  Around them were young monks rubbing
+palm-butter on the ladies' bodies, to prevent the sun from burning
+their overused flesh.
+
+
+
+The hours flew by in their relentless journey to forever.  Already they
+had passed into the afternoon.  The ArchBishop still looked down at the
+fountain, where some more regenerated, sweat-greased ladies and some
+horny vicars were at it again.  He was slightly angered when he saw
+their folly.  He knew that he would have to take disciplinary actions
+on them.  He had told them, many times before, not to play with their
+guests in open view.  But this thought, however, didn't deter him from
+looking at the shapely objects below.
+
+Soon, there was a rap at the door and it slowly opened.  The ArchBishop
+turned to see who it was.  It was the Cardinal Levy; a large brawny
+Nasin man, similar in age to the ArchBishop, but balding.  His face
+always seemed blue from the perpetual shadow of hair, that grew with
+phenomenal quickness.
+
+
+In front of him stood a pretty young girl about fifteen years old.  Her
+large, frightened eyes flitted from side to side.  Her heart pounded
+within her chest.  Her delicate but firm breasts rose and fell with
+each breath that she took, and the fair skin on her arms and legs were
+dotted with goose-bumps.  She had a sense of alarm and apprehension
+within herself, as she stood in that office.  She had never before seen
+the ArchBishop, and only one hour ago, she was summoned to appear
+before him.
+
+What had she done?  What sin had she committed?
+
+She felt like crying but she couldn't.  She was terrified at the
+questions that ran through her imaginative mind.  She feared punishment
+for whatever she had done, and she dearly wished that she knew what
+that may be.
+
+"Will there be anything else, Holiness?"  asked the Nasino.
+
+"Yes.  Bring food and drink within the hour!"
+
+"Yes, Holiness."  said Cardinal Levy, then left them both in his office.
+
+The ArchBishop stayed silent as he looked-over the beautiful young
+woman.  He stepped closer to her, but she inched backward and up
+against the door.  She held the veil that she wore over her head and
+shoulders, tightly in her hands.
+
+He stopped his advance towards her, to let himself take-in the full
+extent of her pure, young beauty;  the tresses of gold that hid beneath
+the veil, the soft roundness of her form and the delicate prettiness of
+her bare feet and shapely legs.
+
+Her large, sky-blue eyes, reflected the objects in the room and shone
+like sapphires when they caught the sunlight that beamed in, from the
+outside.
+
+The choir still chanted in the Cathedral.  The voices of all those men
+rose into the groins of the chapel within, and then echoed out towards
+the town.
+
+The ArchBishop grinned at the girl and asked her name but she did not
+answer.  Her fright robbed her of her speech and after he asked her
+twice, in a soft and kindly manner, he at last boomed harshly.
+
+"What is your name, my child?"  he ordered and moved closer to her.  
+
+She showed nervousness when pinned up against the door with nowhere
+else to move.  She began to speak, her melodic voice trembled and
+stuttered.
+
+"My name is Mercedes, Holiness! -- Please, please do not hurt me!  I
+don't know what sins I have committed but please, I repent them!"
+
+He smiled again and put his hands on her shoulders.  He assured her
+that he would not hurt her.  However, he soon began to fondle her,
+rubbing her shoulders and neck with his fore-fingers.  She said
+nothing.  She stood still as if frozen, her heart jumping inside her
+while the choir crescendoed into the finale of their 'Hymn To The
+Virgins!'  He reckoned her, his sparkling evil eyes sized-to-mind and
+personal passions, her plump and full mouth that glistened with the
+juices of youth.
+
+"Sh-h-h-h!"  he commanded her in mock gentleness.  "You are not here to
+be punished, my darling child.  You are here to be blessed."
+
+By the gentle, fatherly sound of his voice, he quelled the fright from
+her, and from her confused, unsure expression, emerged a trifle, but
+still apparently trusting smile.
+
+"Bless me, Holiness?  I do not understand.  Why bless me?  I am no
+one!"  she told him in a half-happy, half-honoured tone.
+
+He smiled at her as he affectionately took her dainty chin into his
+hand and told her the reason for her being brought to him.
+
+"But you are someone, darling Mercedes.  You have been chosen on this
+day, from all the fair maidens of this land, to mother my Holy Child."
+
+She felt cold again and went aback.  His hand dropped away from her
+chin as he slid the veil off her head.  She slowly shook her head and
+touched her uncovered, golden-fleeced hair, unable to believe that her
+god would ravish her.  And she tried in every way, to prevent what she
+feared would happen and she pleaded with him.
+
+"My god, I cannot!  I am promised to another, and to him I am to give
+my chastity.  Forgive me, Most High Lord.  The honour is great but I
+cannot accept."  she looked down to her feet and waited to be
+dismissed.  She had thought that her appeal to him about her betrothal,
+would touch him, but instead he was angered by her disobedience to his
+charge.
+
+"You can't refuse, my child!  To refuse suggests that you are possessed
+by a demon of vast impurity!"  his voice echoed throughout her mind.
+She was frightened again and did, so desperately want to leave but she
+had to listen.
+
+"To refuse is to pronounce death upon yourself, and you do not want to
+die ... DO YOU, my darling Mercedes?"
+
+Her mind spun with twisted visions.  Jugglers played with her eyes to
+amuse those watching.  Acrobats flew over her netted bowels and
+wrestlers squeezed the living soul from her heart.
+
+In a desperate craze, she fell to her knees and grabbed his sweaty
+hands and kissed them with terrorized respect.  She grovelled at his
+feet and further pleaded with him, to choose another, more worthy than
+her.
+
+"Oh, please, Holiness -- don't do this to me!  Let me give my chastity
+to my promised, Hartford.  Then you may come in, onto me!"
+
+The ArchBishop's indifference to her pleading grew, as did his anger.
+He had wanted her for days, ever since his searchers showed him a
+likeness of her, swimming alone in the crater lake.  She would be his
+best, he thought.  Of all the others, she is the most beautiful and
+would bring to him the highest fulfilment and the heartiest offspring.
+
+"You cannot bargain away from a privilege!"  he told her.  "This is a
+favour done for you.  All the world will look to you in praise and will
+worship you.  You will be proud when you hear the people shout their
+homage to you ... 'Paise Mercedes, Mother of Grace!'.  Don't you want
+this?"
+
+She continued to beg her position but he paid no attention.  She
+repeated, over and over, "please don't do this to me!",  while
+embracing him, still down on her knees.  She cried and tried to regain
+her breath but her spirit weakened and totally fell to the surrender of
+his ultimate dominance over her.
+
+"I Am the Almighty.  You must obey me!"  he barked at her, as he leered
+down fixed upon her eyes.
+
+Mercedes cried hysterically.  She allowed her body drop all the way to
+the floor.  She turned limp and helpless like a weak little kitten with
+no hopes of survival.
+
+The ArchBishop bent down to her and took her face into his hand.  He
+wiped her tears with his scented napkin.  He gently seized her by the
+shoulders and slowly lifted her, and the choir in the background grew
+stronger in volume.  He embraced her and his hands groped for the
+lacings that kept her clothing closed around her.  Then for a final
+time he rumbled at her, eagerly trying to make her realize that what he
+was about to do to her, was a blessing and not a violation of her body,
+as some were sure to regard it.
+
+
+"You will thank me one day, my lovely child.  You will bare my son or
+daughter -- the child of god -- and the world will pay fealty to you,
+and you will be happy."  and, as he finished his self-forgiving
+reasoning to her, he ran his hands over her breasts and down to the
+smooth roundness of her hips.  He kissed her mouth and brought his
+hands to her shoulders where he moved his fingers beneath the material
+of her garb and disrobed her.  Her dress fell, in around her feet,
+revealing her silky smooth whiteness.
+
+She still cried but her hysteria left her, just as did her spirit and
+her self-value, turning her into a submissive bag of flesh that rattled
+with blood and bones.
+
+Like a child's rag doll, she gave pleasure to her master while he toyed
+with her until, at long last, he lifted his white satin frock.
+
+The choirs' hymn-sing rose to a grandiose peak that resonated
+throughout the length of Halls, then stopped.
+
+On the other side of the monastery were the libraries and the
+private-roms for learning.  Daily, in those rooms, novices and the
+youngest vicars learned their history of the Canon and all that was
+necessary to be known, as men of the Almighty.
+
+Cardinals were usually the most learned of the monks, given to train
+the younger and inexperienced in the ways of life, love, worship and
+rule over the peasantry.
+
+While the ArchBishop made his studies in his office, so did the novices
+and grade vicars.  They learned the proper methods for the torture of
+rebels and the demonically possessed.  They learned that which assured
+the longest, most painful and lasting punishments that insured against
+quick death.
+
+Then there were those who taught proper methods of seducing and
+satisfying women.  The Cardinal Allen was one such instructor, in this
+what he called 'an art'.
+
+In a dark room filled with books and artifacts, the Cardinal Allen was
+having  and instruction session with one of the young vicars named
+Tohm, and a slanted-eyed wench, from L�nondan, called Ssidel.
+
+On a large rumpled couch lay Ssidel, with Tohm, clumsily balancing
+himself overtop of her as he took is instructions in making Allen's
+pronounced 'art'.  Ssidel lay there.  She didn't make a sound or move a
+muscle.  She seemed dulled to what was happening and poor Tohm was once
+again becoming frustrated at his failure to please her.  He felt
+ashamed at his adolescent inabilities, since this was his third time at
+his class and the third at his failure.
+
+Tohm begged Cardinal Allen, with all his heart, to tell him what he was
+doing wrong and requested him to demonstrate that was in which he does
+it, and how he manages it so well.
+
+Allen showed him, over and over again, until the Rogjan chanted from
+the chapel spire, calling the monks to their evening prayers to the
+Almighty;  to ask him for his blessings on their food, and on their
+other necessities.
+
+
+CHAPTER  FIVE
+
+The days passed.
+
+The streets of Pomperaque were silent for most part and only now the
+people were slowly recovering from the ordeal that was brought on them
+by the rain.
+
+Lloyd, too, was recovering for several days, ever since Dearborne and
+Boy dragged him home.  Now he strolled from room to room and through
+the hallways, stretching his stiffened legs and getting to know his new
+surroundings.
+
+He wore an ivory-coloured frock and a black puma-fur vest, over which a
+long, dark-blue cape hung down, to keep him warm.  The day was oddly
+cool and cloudy and some feared that the rains would fall again.
+Others, however, knew that this wouldn't happen. The rains hardly ever
+fell again after a few days of warmth and clear skies that followed the
+first and usually last rain.
+
+Lloyd stopped at the end of the hallway, and looked out the window at
+the panoramic view of the city of Pomperaque.  Everything was dry,
+including the distant farm terraces.
+
+
+One would never believe that rain fell in the city because the rich
+land soaked up the water and dispersed the rain's potency into the
+vegetation, which already seemed to be a meter taller than what it was
+a few days before.
+
+People were in the streets.  They worked in groups of five or ten,
+called Keys.  They were pulling up unwanted weeds and grasses from the
+hard ground and from around the buildings.  Although the rain had
+blessed the crops and forests, with quick growth, it also cursed the
+city-people with the task of removing the unwanted, thick undergrowth
+from the streets. That job sometimes took them several days to
+complete.  They threw the extracted vegetation into carts and hauled
+them over to the organic recycling factories, outside the city.
+
+He looked straight ahead and saw the great Halls Cathedral, standing
+tall and solitary atop the butte, on the other side of the valley.
+That lovely valley had many stone and mud buildings, in rows on the
+different levels of ground that at one time served as agricultural
+land.  Right in between him and Halls was the town square where just a
+few days ago, he nearly joined his ancestors. Now, for the first time,
+he saw the enormous distance to which Dearborne and Boy had to drag
+him; secreting him, to the Blue Mansion. The feat induced a respect in
+him, for his frail-looking hostess.  That lady that had as much
+courage, as she had beauty.
+
+Down the hallway, from where he came, he heard a noise and turned
+around to see what it was.  One of the chambermaids went into the room,
+that was his to recuperate in, to clean it and change the bedding.
+
+Coming from behind her, towards Lloyd, was Boy.  His walk had just a
+suggestion of purpose as he neared the man that he and Dearborne had
+rescued from death.
+
+"Good morning, sir!"  said Boy, while still quite far from him.
+
+
+Lloyd smiled and returned the salutation, allowing Boy to give him the
+message that he obviously carried with him.
+
+"My Lord requested me to take you to his private room, sir!"
+
+"Right away?"  asked Lloyd.
+
+"Yes, sir.  If it pleases you?"  continued Boy.  "Very well, my lad,
+lead the way!"  Lloyd accepted and Boy guided him around the hallways
+and down some stairs, to Brook's private room.  His viewing den.
+
+Lloyd was astonished to see the polished walls covered with rare
+paintings and tapestries, and rows of statues dotted each side of the
+hall, separated by varying spaces.
+
+Some of the paintings were very old indeed and Lloyd didn't even try to
+imagine the dates of their making, but some he did recognize
+immediately, as late Twentieth Century, organic-colour pictographs.
+
+He had only seen one other such painting, and that was in the ancient
+great vault library, unearthed in Besten. He was impressed by the
+wealth of the prehistoric items that Brook chose to display, without
+fear of exchanging words with the great feign master of the butte.
+
+Lloyd was greatly confused about Brook's fear of the ArchBishop.  If he
+really was afraid.
+
+He thought to ask his host about the thoughts that he possessed about
+it all.
+
+Soon, Boy stopped walking and motioned with his hand towards two
+gigantic doors of oak and iron.  He pounded three times on it before he
+opened it and allowed Lloyd to enter.
+
+When Lloyd walked into the room, Boy closed the door and left for
+Dearborne's parlour.  Lloyd hadn't the chance to thank him but he could
+see that, to Boy, it didn't make much of a difference.
+
+
+Brook was sitting in his high-backed chair, in the middle of the room.
+His back was to the door and this seemed to be quite odd, to Lloyd,
+when he thought that a man who was afraid of someone, would not sit in
+such a way, as to lend an advantage to his opponent.
+
+He stood at the door and looked about the room, at the far curtained
+wall, the huge cabinet, the statues and several musical instruments in
+the far corner.
+
+"Come in and make yourself comfortable."  said Brook.
+
+"Thank-you, my Lord!"  he answered, and from beside the doors, with his
+stronger hand, pulled a tall wooden stool to the Lord's chair.
+
+Brook looked at him with a smile and welcoming face and Lloyd pointed
+to the musical instruments and smiled.
+
+"You play music?"
+
+"No!"  answered Brook and continued.  "No!  They were my brother's.  He
+played, and beautifully.  It was like the great God had entered his
+hands and his voice filled the walls of this place as if it were made
+up of the voices of a hundred seraphims.  When he departed, these
+stayed as a reminder to us all of Manguino's goodness."  Lloyd couldn't
+decide the meaning behind those feelings expressed by Brook.  His words
+impressed with thoughts of sorrow, respect and praise, and yet his tone
+was utterly opposite to them, and seemed as if it were being subdued by
+him.
+
+There was no mention yet, why Brook called him to his side and he
+didn't think that it was to talk about the memory of his brother.  Then
+he remembered that Brook offered to show him some materials of
+knowledge from the Twentieth Century and about the past millennia, when
+he recovered.
+
+He looked at the shelves of books adjacent to the cabinet and along the
+wall to the left of the entrance.  However, all the books on the
+shelves were of this age; by poets and literary artists like Maxxwel,
+Bothelli, Croii, Lapinz and Argynossti.  There were no encyclopedias or
+such books from antiquity and Lloyd grew alarmed and wary.
+
+"You were going to show me some things that you have about the ancient
+land?"  asked Lloyd.
+
+Brook smiled and winked at him.
+
+"My, you are eager, aren't you?"
+
+Lloyd remained quiet and Brook started to show him the promised
+antiquities.
+
+"Look around you, Lloyd.  The knowledge within these pages will never
+again be conceived by man's mind, and they will be forgotten, if
+suppression is continued by that almighty megalomaniac."
+
+"But, my Lord, all these writers are from our own time."  stated
+Brook's guest.
+
+Brooked grinned, touched his shoulder and pointed to one of the books
+on the shelf behind him.
+
+"Look inside that book!"
+
+Lloyd looked at the shelf and grabbed for the book.  He glanced at
+Brook to make certain that he took the correct one and Brook nodded,
+still smiling.  With his eyes, he motioned for Lloyd to look inside.
+
+Lloyd eyed the title and his face showed frustration, as his voice rose
+in annoyance.
+
+"You joke, my Lord!  This is poetry.  'Djenaud Smarte" ... it's not
+even very good poetry!"
+
+"Look inside."  Brook ordered once more.  "I never imagined you to get
+annoyed so easily ... maybe you are afraid -- or untrusting?"
+
+
+Brook's words seemed to cut deeply into Lloyd's conscience.  For a
+brief moment he had forgotten that he was saved from sure death by
+those of this household.
+
+He quietly opened the book and thumbed through a few pages.  His eyes
+finally flamed as he read the actual title page:  "ELEMENTS OF
+DEMOCRACY".
+
+Lloyd looked up at Brook in silent apology.
+
+"All these books are like this one!"  Lloyd stated with certainty, but
+lost his countenance when Brook confessed to him.
+
+"No.  Unfortunately, there are just a handful scattered throughout the
+others here.  But I do have one book that surpasses them all.  That
+one, the one I have hidden, is my prize.  However, there are other
+things that I want to show you first!"  and he rose from his chair and
+moved to the cabinets.  When he reached them, he turned and showed his
+key to Lloyd before he unlocked and opened the doors.
+
+"Yes, my friend ... I have much to show you.  And I suppose that this
+one would be the best to show to you first."  The doors of the cabinet
+flew open.  Lloyd's eyes fixed themselves into a stare on the rows of
+buttons and meters, marked with numbers and letters -- some with
+familiar and other with unfamiliar symbols.
+
+In the centre of the unit's structure hung a flat, dark-glassed panel,
+and when Brook pushed some buttons, writing began to appear across it.
+
+                'ARCHIVAL TAPE #371.4931-T
+                ... entry - October 13, 1982.
+                -- Planets line up in even axis, on one side of the sun.
+                -- Earth experiences catastrophic gravity changes,
+                   resulting in quakes and unusual tidal activity.
+                -- Parts of many continents are submerged following
+                   sudden ocean rise.
+
+        _ * for further information, select video record m-oo10-1982."
+
+
+Brook offered Lloyd to  push the buttons in the select numbers on the
+rectangular board and then waited for results, but nothing happened.
+Brook then turned him around to the wall opposite them, that was draped
+with a large dark curtain.
+
+"The curtain will move to reveal pictures that move."  explained Brook.
+
+Lloyd watched the wall and the drapes covering it, pull back, into the
+corners.  On the wall, he saw the large white screen and moving
+pictures that he recognized as ancient video tape.
+
+From the cabinet came a man's voice and pictures on the wall, matched
+what the voice was describing.
+
+                'Shuttles were sent into deep space to record the
+                 phenomenon of the planets, in our solar system,
+                 aligning on the same side of our sun.
+                 The world watched as the planets drew closer in
+                 their conjunction and in their gravitational
+                 resistances, every one of the planets experienced
+                 their own fatalities.'
+
+In the utmost quiet did Brook and Lloyd stand there listening to the
+tinny voice.
+
+                'Mercury began to rotate in quick revolutions and
+                 Venus experienced a contrary orbit, and fire
+                 storms engulfed its surface.   On Earth, ocean 
+                 levels rose and fell drastically with every passing
+                 hour, and the land was disrupted by quakes and great
+                 upheavals as the planet changed in its polarity.
+                 Soon thereafter, the surface was pounded by
+                 thousands of small but devastating asteroids.'
+
+
+The men couldn't believe the sights that were being presented to them,
+and they couldn't decide what was more terrifying -- the descriptions
+or the actual pictures of the cataclysm.
+
+                'Volcanic eruptions broke the surface of Mars.
+                 Jupiter's red spot increased in size until it
+                 covered the planet's entire centre.  Saturn
+                 increased in its tilt towards the sun.  Uranus
+                 wobbled like a balloon in a breeze and Neptune
+                 captured Pluto and its moon Charon, claiming them
+                 as its own.'
+
+"This is truly remarkable!"  said Lloyd, his expression was bewildered
+like Boy's usually was.  He smiled at Brook, and Brook tipped his head
+towards the screen, telling Lloyd with his actions to keep watching.
+He did.
+
+The strange voice undulated from the cabinet, as more moving images
+were vomited onto the screen.  The voice made a commentary on the
+Earth's people joining together, to dig themselves out of the solar
+cataclysm of 1982.  Then the screen went blank and immediately a drone
+came from the cabinet, and more writing was printing out onto the
+black-glassed panel.
+
+                'ARCHIVAL TAPE #371.5039-D
+
+                ... June 5, 1986
+                -- As it has been feared for three decades, the final
+                   conflict has happened.
+                -- Following their defeat from the Chinese, in May,
+                   the Soviets flowed south into the Middle-East, and
+                   laid seige to Jerusalem, after a great battle on
+                   the plains of Megiddo.  As it was Biblically
+                   prophesied, Armageddon had come to pass.
+
+        -- * for more information, select video record OA-06-1986.'
+
+
+Brook punched up more video playback and taped images continued.  The
+pictures showed people in massive exodus, heading for the highest
+mountains that the could reach.  They tried to find some kind of
+shelter from the radiation fallout because, the two great nations:
+China and the United States of America, foolishly agreed to the use of
+limited nuclear warfare.
+
+Then, on the screen, there were cities falling into piles of rubble,
+after they were hit by missiles.
+
+
+People were in confusion over the horrible death. The excited
+commentator explained the state of tension in the world and made the
+situation sound hopeless.  His message was, that the end had come.
+
+The screen went blank and silence hung over the room, giving a cold and
+eerie feeling to both men.
+
+"Every time, it is the same for me!"  Brook admitted.  "My heart is
+torn apart at the pains that I see."
+
+Lloyd's in awe expression had left him.  He too felt as Brook did, full
+of sorrow and anger.
+
+"If only there was some way to change what had happened."  he remarked,
+and slowly shifted back to Brook.
+
+"They were supposed to be civilized.  They could have prevented that
+war but instead they chose to rid their problems by trying total
+genocide.  They accumulated great knowledge and possessed god-like
+powers through their machines.  But they used the earth as their toy,
+until, like
+infants, they broke it."
+
+Lloyd sat down, removed and folded his cape over the back of Brook's
+chair.  Silence held both men as they collected their thoughts, forcing
+into their own hearts a coldness of indifference to what they observed.
+
+Lloyd shattered the annoying silence between them as he stood up and
+went to Brook, by his cabinets.
+
+"What do you call this machine, my Lord?"
+
+"I do not know the actual name, but I call it my gadget.  My father
+gave this one to me and told me of a hollow mountain, where there is
+one that is much greater.    Unfortunately,   the ArchBishop has one,
+too."
+
+Lloyd, calmer now, watched the projected images of the destruction and
+misery with Brook.  He revealed that they also have gadgets like this
+one, in Besten.  It was yet another artifact unearthed from the vault
+library, there.
+
+"The ancient peoples called them computers, I believe.  Knowledge could
+be given to it and later, one could retrieve it again, if needed.  The
+Prominants of Besten had only just begun to understand their workings
+and uses, when the ArchBishop banned trade with us.  So we had to
+divert our attentions to becoming self-sufficient."
+
+Lloyd pushed some buttons on the flat key pad and the black-glass panel
+displayed some more words.  The white screen again showed the rapid
+images.  The growth of human life and their transportation, throughout
+the suppressed history of their people (up to the Twentieth Century).
+All this flashed by in a matter of minutes.
+
+Lloyd and Brook resumed their conference while they watched the screen.
+
+"Maybe he heard about the excavation and what was found.  Maybe this
+frightened him."  Brook considered.
+
+"If so, then why did he impose the embargo on us?  Surely he'd know
+that would only infuriate us; and if we did have something to hurt his
+power with, do you suppose that we'd hesitate to use it?"
+
+Brook shrugged unknowingly and smiled as he delivered a quick-witted
+answer.
+
+"I didn't say that he was a smart man!"  he said, then they both
+laughed.
+
+Soon, the note of conversation once again became serious.
+
+"Why hasn't he tried to destroy your computer?"  asked Lloyd.
+
+
+"He knows that I won't use it!"
+
+Lloyd was confused by Brook's reply, and Brook explained to Lloyd his
+reason for not using the computer against the ArchBishop.
+
+"My people would not be able to understand this machine.  So, if I were
+to use it against the ArchBishop, he would surely turn around and call
+me an evil sorcerer, out to befuddle and possess the citizens' minds
+and souls."
+
+"But the people,"  Lloyd interrupted,  "They know you well and they
+look up to you.  Certainly they would like to see the Almighty thrown
+down from his authority?"
+
+Brook shook his head and paced around.
+
+"I have no guarantees about this and I don't want to engage in a civil
+war, even if indeed there are enough to back me.  I do know in fact,
+that at least, half of Phoride will back me!"  he explained, then Lloyd
+added.
+
+"I am surprised that he hasn't tried to destroy it.  If you were to get
+half of Phoride to join with you, I am certain that Besten, Virune, and
+even some of the Krolalin and Ohigh, would unite against that tyrant!"
+
+What Lloyd said was true. Many of the territories would, without
+question, join with Brook.  However, Brook explained to Lloyd that, if
+he did allow the other regions to join him, they too could eventually
+become a threat to his rule.  Lloyd tried to quell Brook's fears.  He
+promised him that the Bestenese do respect his powers and his
+abilities, and that they all would, with all their hearts and souls,
+fight to help him keep his rule.  "I play weak to buy me time.  To
+think."  Brook confided.  "I don't doubt that I could destroy him but
+it would be at the expense of too many lives.  I united Upper and Lower
+Phoride some twenty years ago.  Then, there were many that died.  Now,
+I can't see them divided, and I will not be the instrument to cause it."
+
+"I understand!"  is all that Lloyd said, breathing out a wet sigh.
+
+Brook weighed all his reasons for not rising up.  He expressed that, if
+he did indeed decide to go against that pig at Halls, that  evil man
+would have received prior knowledge of it.
+
+"I found ears in the walls and I removed them all.  Since then, I have
+stayed inside and made certain that there were no more intrusions or
+listenings.  Some of his robed geese came here once, and they did try
+to ruin my gadgets, but they couldn't open or break into the cabinet.
+It is made of three strong metals and is overlaid with oak, inside and
+out."
+
+Lloyd began to understand Brook's position.  He is a very powerful man,
+successfully intimidated by petty fears.  Fears as trifle as being
+called a blasphemer or sorcerer but most of all, the fear that the
+unity of Phoride would fall because of him.
+
+Their attention was focused on the screen, at the images of flying
+machines.  Great metal monstrosities that shrieked when they flew, and
+that were able to carry countless numbers of people to amy place in the
+whole world.
+
+"They were remarkable, weren't they?"  Lloyd admired them, proud to be
+descended from those who built them.
+
+"I would think that we are the most remarkable."  Brook's noting
+puzzled Lloyd for a moment.  "Afterall, we have survived our
+forefathers' murder of each other!"
+
+Lloyd smiled, realising that his Lord and master made a good point.
+
+"Yes,  I suppose that I've never thought of us in quite that way!"
+
+The morning passed quickly while they spoke.
+
+Brook showed Lloyd more taped recordings left for those people who may
+have possibly succeeded the holocaust and deluge.  One of those
+successors was Carter Blue.  He found the machine in Angaent, on his
+way to Pomperaque, and used it to make the city a powerful state, in
+itself, and so becoming its ruler and leaving it all to his own
+offspring.
+
+Brook showed to Lloyd the dozens or so books from the Twentieth
+Century, that dealt in a wide range of topics.  Some of the books that
+Brook possessed included those on Architecture, History, Mathematics,
+Art and also Theology.
+
+Lloyd was impressed by the preserved quality and the information
+contained within them.  In just a few books, Brook had a good example
+of what the ancient people were like, but what Lloyd waited for, with
+such eager but patient anticipation, was the book that his Lord had
+been so mysterious about.
+
+"I'm still amazed,"  Lloyd began,  "to see someone with the power to
+save the world from a madman, lack the will-power to accomplish it."
+
+Brook felt ashamed of his inability to show the definite power that he
+possessed.  But to keep peace and unity in Phoride, he had no choice
+but to sacrifice his presence to that of the Almighty ArchBishop.
+
+He tried to explain that to his guest, but he did not want to make
+himself look like a coward.  He only wanted to show his caution.
+
+"I stayed within the walls of this house.  I watched for intruders who
+would hardly hesitate to hide little listening devices for that great
+weasel.  After he realized the motive behind my seclusion, he stopped
+his spying.  Later, he used my own vigilance to make me seem like a
+recluse.  But now, my friend, I can once again walk the streets of
+Pomperaque because you are here to hold my place."
+
+Lloyd, loyally bowed his head in trust-worthy acceptance, and
+apologised for his unjust implication that Brook was a coward.  Brook
+forgave him for speaking so because he knew that, in his heart, Lloyd
+didn't really mean it.
+
+"Providence had thrust us together.  You and I, Lloyd, will work
+side-by-side, to return to this land its forgotten freedom and
+greatness.  We shall teach others all that we know.  This is the only
+way to change the ArchBishop's hold on my people."
+
+Lloyd agreed.
+
+His anticipation also grew to see the great book that Brook promised to
+show him.
+
+Brook made his way to a shelf near the white screen.  From one of these
+shelves he removed some books, slid a panel away and pulled out a
+large, dark book.
+
+"If ever I am defeated or destroyed, you must care for this place and
+this book."  Brook instructed.
+
+With a silent breath, Brook made a confession to Lloyd, along with a
+request for a service that would take him a life-time.
+
+"I must ask a favour of you, my friend.  If I am not granted the
+opportunity and time to instruct Boy in what I know about the previous
+millennia, you must take over for me, and you both must leave this
+place." Brook sounded very peculiar.  Lloyd wondered about that; his
+mind engaged in waves of thought, while he tried to explain to himself,
+the reason for Brook's request.
+
+"I do not fully understand, my Lord.  You want us to instruct your
+servant.  Why?"  Lloyd asked, confused by Brook's behaviour.
+
+"Yes.  We must teach all those like him and especially him because,
+Lloyd,  Boy is my son!  He will succeed me when I am gone.  Which, I
+pray, will not be too soon."
+
+There it was.  The one great secret about his life, that he had finally
+confessed, and to this man, who was still nothing more than a wounded
+guest in him home.
+
+Lloyd was muted.  He had wondered for several days about the boy.  He
+noticed how the boy was allowed to speak his piece, during his first
+night with them, but he never guessed that this was the reason for it.
+He waited to hear more.
+
+"My Dearborne tried to keep this truth from me, for all these years.
+The boy knows, too.  His grandfather taught him well, how to behave
+before me.  But I still found out!"
+
+Lloyd eagerly listened, for a while, forgetting about the great book
+that he was holding in his hands.
+
+"He arrived here by caravan when he was nine, as a servant for
+Dearborne -- a gift from her father, Loebh of Hennai.  However, I did
+wonder when she was more than just pleased to see him, and then without
+question accepted him.  I wed her in Hennai during a trade conference
+and the I came back here to Pomperaque to prepare for her to join me.
+But it was almost a year before she came here, and I didn't find out
+until just last year, that she gave birth to my son but didn't bring
+him."  Brook observed Lloyd fondling the large book that he gave to
+him, earlier.  Lloyd was deeply enthraled by the story and he wanted to
+hear more.  For a moment he forgot about the book.
+
+"Why didn't she bring him, or at least tell you about his existence?"
+
+"My problem with the ArchBishop had existed long before I married her.
+This was the reason that I went to Hennai.  I wanted to unite the
+smaller and independent states with Phoride but, in most part, I failed
+because of that almighty swine.  Wile there, I met Loebh and his lovely
+daughter.  When we met, our love was obvious to us, like an exploding
+star, and we married immediately.   She was only sixteen and I was
+thirty-five but her father openly welcomed my offer of marriage.  She
+did not object and we were wed.  I revealed to her that we couldn't
+have children right away.  I suppose that she was afraid to tell me,
+later."
+
+"How did you find out?"  Lloyd inquired with a sly tone.
+
+"Loebh sent word to me last year.  I don't know why he did it, but I am
+grateful."
+
+Lloyd smiled and shook his head in a manner which suggested disbelief.
+He got up from his chair and went over to the window.  He peered out
+and sucked in a few deep breaths of air then turned to Brook and
+laughed.
+
+"You know, I came to Pomperaque for one reason; to alter the
+ArchBishop's mind to the trade embargo on Besten.  Now, all this.  It's
+amazing!"
+
+Brook also laughed at Lloyd's humorous view of the way that his
+original mission had changed.  His presence had brought Brook his
+freedom from staying in the Blue Mansion.  All this happened after his
+struggle, while he tried to tell the people of Phoride about the
+ancients from which they were all descended.
+
+Lloyd had become the catalyst for Brook's resurgence of strength.  His
+presence had that special chemistry that worked Brook's will into its
+new power, and both men new for sure, that Brook would no longer remain
+in his dormant retreat.
+
+Lloyd finally began to examine the book, feeling the quality of its
+cover and the raised gold lettered title.  In breathless stupefaction,
+he commenced to read it aloud.
+
+"THE HISTORY OF NORTH AMERICA -- TO 1986 C.E.!"
+
+"Yes. This book is the proof of the ancients, of our land, and of that
+great civilization before our own millennium."  Brook admitted to
+Lloyd.  He pointed at the book that Lloyd was now leafing through, and
+then moved to his high-backed chair and sat down.   "That book can make
+those who are learned, at the Blaisaman, join my ways again.
+Eventually they will all teach for me, from that
+
+book.  That, can destroy the ArchBishop, but first I must find some who
+will follow it!"  Lloyd smiled in awe, marvelling at what he read, and
+almost, as if in love with the book, he sighed a spiritual praise.
+
+"My God!"  he breathed.  "This looks like it's complete, right up to
+the end of it all."  He stopped for a moment to collect his wonderment,
+staying with the aghast manner that he began with.  "This is greater
+than anything that I have ever seen.  It's greater than anything that I
+know of in besten.  With this book, my Lord, we possess the means by
+which to unite the whole world!"  Lloyd intermittently lingered on a
+page, reading it aloud, then followed with the usual spellbound glance
+at Brook.  Each time he reaffirmed that they were within reach of
+destroying the almighty, the ArchBishop.
+
+Soon Brook became annoyed and in a comparable tone of voice, ordered
+Lloyd never again to call that maniac at Halls, the Almighty.  Lloyd
+didn't anger.  He just apologized to Brook and promised never again to
+do it.
+
+"We can bring this whole continent together, under a friendly
+democracy.  The Virgin Mountains people of Dantoga, the Virunese, the
+Elkinii plains people -- all would join you.  Somehow, I feel that even
+the Teniqu�s homosimians from the west, the Palatkan lepers, and maybe
+even the dual-sexed S_dash would join with you!"  Lloyd's excitement
+filled the room, and as Brook listened to his dream, his heart also
+pumped the blood of freedom and unity, through his veins.  He felt
+alive, once more.
+
+"Everything can be, as it was for our ancient fathers.  But we must not
+rush into this quick change.  We must court the people and slowly
+introduce the concept to them.  I don't want to destroy whatever unity
+we may already have.  We must do it with logic, and I believe that
+changing the ArchBishop's embargo with your land may be the safest
+place to begin!"
+
+"I agree!"  said Lloyd.  "Phoride doesn't receive any of our goods
+either, due to his insane monopoly."
+
+Lloyd moved over to his master and friend, from the window and sat on
+the stool beside his chair, while he still leafed through the great
+book.
+
+"I should not have allowed his embargo against Besten.  It was wrong
+and I am sorry.  I wasn't in the position to alter what was to be!"
+declared Brook, breathing deeply as he looked to the window at the
+Blue, cloudless, afternoon sky.  The skies were clear and the fear of
+another rain had passed.
+
+Lloyd understood Brook, now.  With this understanding he told Brook not
+to fret and that he was thankful that Besten was an ocean port, and
+that they had an abundance of fish and other goods coming into the
+city, by that means.
+
+"My Lord, we must fight for what we believe in.  I realize that there
+have been many wars that the earth has seen.  You, yourself, had once
+forcibly united Phoride and made their lives happier than what they
+knew."  His understanding was saturated with talk of war.  Brook looked
+right into his guest's eyes and shook his head.  He did not want war.
+
+"War shall always be, my Lord!"   Lloyd was insistent.
+
+"Maybe, but there can be revolutionary changes without battle.  My
+father had once told me, that diplomacy was always better-sought and
+best fought.  Only if diplomacy fails, is war necessary!"  Brook
+explained his view to Lloyd, who was in agreement but again illustrated
+the futility of talk.  "Always, my Lord, there is diplomacy that may
+prevent war, but always there are many who don't care to listen,
+because it may be hurtful to their own interests!  To them, wealth and
+gain is put high above love and life!"
+
+Slowly, the difference in their views pulled them apart, and a trivial
+argument began between them.  Brook became emotional, and rose from his
+chair.  He turned to Lloyd and loudly, took the dominance of his room,
+which lasted only a moment until Lloyd interrupted him.
+
+"War doesn't solve a thing, no matter how it is fought.  The taring up
+of the ground, the ripping apart of the young mens' bodies, the death
+... death ... DEATH!"  Brook built up to a frenzy giving his views.
+Lloyd refused them.
+
+"The realization of wastage is understood, but as our fathers tell us;
+here, in this book, 'no cost is too extreme when trying to attain
+freedom!',  and I do believe that to be so!"
+
+Silence.
+
+Both stared at one another with heated, flaring eyes.  Their faces were
+contorted in strain and sweat leaked in huge droplets from their brows.
+ Then Brook sighed and put his hand on Lloyd's shoulder.  He spoke
+calmly.
+
+"Young men should not be made to fight and die for the discontent and
+hate of the old men in power; who create a war, in the name of God,
+Love or Freedom.  It's all an excuse to them.  Can't you see that?
+
+Lloyd didn't answer.
+
+"Most of the ancient wars were fought because of the dislikes between
+the men in power.  Many of the wars, in our times, were the same.
+Countless numbers of young men died without knowing what they were
+fighting for.  What is worse, Lloyd, is that the common folk had
+suffered the most, and they weren't even supposed to be involved!  Do
+you understand?"
+
+Lloyd was still silent, his mouth agape and mute or reply to the truths
+that Brook was preaching.  He nodded and bowed his head, as he
+surrendered his view, with a final thought.
+
+"War is necessary, sometimes!"  was all that Lloyd said.
+
+"True, my friend!  The souls of mankind burn on this hellish ball, this
+scorched Earth of ours.  Some day we will be able to extinguish those
+who cause the fatal spark.  Until then, I will not let my hatred of the
+ArchBishop, to become one of those sparks."
+
+Throughout the afternoon, Lloyd and Brook continued to talk.  Their
+emotions toned down somewhat, to a level of trust and friendship, and
+mutual exchange of knowledge.
+
+Brook freely gave his knowledge to Lloyd without the demand of payment
+and Lloyd accepted it, promising that he would in turn, give it to
+Brook's son, and continued to instruct him until the sum of both their
+knowledge or until one of them was expended.
+
+Brook taught Lloyd to use the computer and showed him the locations of
+the seven Omega Sub Ground Installations, strewn about the continent.
+These were the same installations that were abandoned several centuries
+ago, after civilization was reestablished on the land.  Brook showed
+Lloyd the location of the great library vault that was still hidden
+near one of those installations.  It was the same gigantic vault that
+was closed down just prior to the great holocaust.  It was a vault
+carved deep into a mountain of solid granite, southeast of the Omega 4
+- East SGI, at the head of the Krolalin range, to the north.  The
+mountain was known to them as, Alugean.
+
+"There's enough food there for one man to live on for half a century.
+If ever something happens to me, Lloyd, take the boy there.  Go there
+and learn as much as you can, and then teach the Bestenese people, and
+try to teach mine.  If nothing happens to me, I will send both of you
+there, anyway, and you will learn."  Brook ended his instructions and
+Lloyd promised him, that when fit to travel, he would leave with Boy
+and not return until Boy willed it.
+
+
+The day seemed short to those in the Blue Mansion.  After the Lord, his
+Lady and their honoured guest had supped, they all retired to a
+parlour-like room.  That room was Dearborne's equivalent to Brook's
+viewing-den.
+
+She reclined in a large comfortable chair, soft and padded in cushioned
+splendour while she rolled some yarn into a large ball, and hummed to
+herself a mellow little tune.
+
+Brook stood in the corner of the room by a small cabinet.  He poured
+wine into some glasses and motioned to hand the glasses to Dearborne
+and Lloyd, who sat on a sofa near her at the window.  Lloyd looked out
+the window at the setting sun.  He watched and listened to the people
+coming out of their homes and heading for their evening fun-spots.
+They had weathered the fretting indulgences brought to them by the rain
+and they now behaved no differently than they had for months before the
+rain.
+
+Brook, with a silent tip of his head to the beloved wife, handed her a
+glass of her once-favoured wine.  She graciously accepted it from him
+and stared at the glass.  Her face exposed an expression of anxiety and
+fear, afraid to drink, as if the glass of that delicate beverage had
+been laced with some kind of poison.  He gave to Lloyd a glass also,
+breaking his concentrations of watching the columns of people below, as
+they headed for the centre of Pomperaque, to their taverns and
+theatres.  The Lord lifted his glass and saluted those close to him,
+within the room, with a toast to freedom and unity.  They echoed him.
+
+Lloyd kept his stare on the street, and Brook was curious as to what
+interested his guest so much.  He looked at Lloyd several times, and
+every time he just stared out into the street.  He seemed somewhat
+intoxicated, although he only sipped once, at his wine.
+
+Brook understood that Lloyd was only longing for his home in Besten.
+He knew that the thoughts of his homeland and his near death, in
+Pomperaque, had chilled his mind and made him dopey.
+
+Lord Brook emptied his glass of wine and sighed, the sound of it
+resonated throughout the room.  He spoke, imitating a burly Bestenese
+accent that grabbed the attention of both his lovely wife and Lloyd.
+
+"Ah! -- 'What sweet sustenance we have in our thirst, for the smooth
+wisp of truth found in a rose'!"  said Brook, as he quoted one of
+Besten's most renown poets.  Lloyd glanced away from the window and
+smile at Brook.  Their rapport showed in their eyes and they didn't
+need to speak.  Brook looked at Dearborne and saw that she didn't react
+to his poetry recital.  Instead, she began to develop mannerisms of
+someone who is disgusted.  He thought that she just didn't approve of
+his jest.  Lloyd noticed a strangeness in her, too, but he thought that
+it wasn't his place to say anything.
+
+"At least you don't quote that Djenaud Smarte, my Lord.  You have
+taste!"  Lloyd made ready to make some fun, if the Lord cared to jest,
+himself  -- and he did.
+
+"Yes.  Moreye was a great poet.  I remember that he once jested about
+Smarte.  He said, 'Smarte could only write if intoxicated by the aroma
+of a peasant's chicken-house, and that's why he lived in one'!"  Brook
+was amused as was Lloyd.  He sat up better as not to spill his drink
+while he laughed.  He soon added to Brook's jest by conveying to him a
+game that he learned in Besten, while he was still young.
+
+"We once played games in Besten.  Some Elders told us that these games
+were very old but our own familiarities could be used to make them
+humorous, to us.  My father, Harvard, taught me this one and I found it
+funny.  The game goes like this. Someone appears at your door and
+knocks.   The one inside asks, 'who is there?', the outsider answers
+with something and the insider asks again, the outsider's name and
+'who?'   Then one outside answers in a humorous manner."
+
+To Brook, the explanation of the game, was funny enough for him,
+because Lloyd began to take on a nature of a lad, Boy's age.  Finally,
+after Lloyd explained to Brook the game, he demonstrated it to him.  He
+told Brook what to say as the insider and the joke commenced.  Lloyd
+rapped on the wood of the chair's arm-rest, that represented the door.
+He then pointed to Brook.
+
+"Who is there?"  asked Brook.
+
+"Djenaud Smarte!"  Lloyd replied.
+
+"Djenaud Smarte, who?"  asked Brook again, after being cued, once more.
+
+"Djenaud as smart as I am!"  said Lloyd and he laughed.
+
+They found this cute little game somewhat interesting and continued to
+play it for a while until they ran out of names that could be made fun.
+
+Brook soon became restless, when he saw that Dearborne wasn't reacting
+to their humour, without even the slightest grin.
+
+Lloyd resumed his stare out the window.  His spirited smile vanished
+from his face as quickly as the wine vanished from his glass, that he
+still held in his hand.
+
+Out on the streets were groups of children walking together.  Some
+chewed on the intoxicating seeds of the Orumen flower.  Lloyd shook his
+head in disenchantment just as Brook also looked out the window and saw
+the same.
+
+"Sweet children playing in the streets, grow up to become hated by
+their own kind.  And soon they grow to hate themselves!"  said Brook,
+as he turned to Lloyd and Dearborne, then further, "Is that not so?"
+the room was silent.
+
+
+After a quarter-hour, while she slowly and perfectly wound her yarn
+into a tight ball, Dearborne finally broke the silence.
+
+"You cannot blame the children, my husband! They are all good.  Only
+circumstances change them.  The times devour their innocent little
+souls and burn into their hearts the hatred that grows as they do!"
+
+Brook walked about the room and motioned to Lloyd, with his glass if he
+would like some more wine, and he accepted.  He took Lloyd's glass and
+poured himself and his guest some more wine.  He glanced at Dearborne's
+glass, but she hadn't yet taken a single swallow from it.
+
+"I don't blame them, my love.  The devil -- the evil -- is in all of
+them.  They discover it during their transitions.  Some of these
+mischievous children discover their good and their evil, and some find
+it to their advantage, that evil is of more benefit to them.  So turns
+the world."  Brook exclaimed to his wife and gulped his wine.  He
+studied her for a few moments, in puzzlement, and wondered why she
+hadn't touched her wine.  Then, as if his thoughts touched hers, she
+stopped rolling her yarn and put the glass to her precious lips and
+like a little bird, took a sip.  However, Brook saw that she was not
+enjoying it and he worried that something was wrong, but he didn't pry
+her with questions.  He felt that she would eventually come to him
+herself, when she found the time to be right for her.
+
+Lloyd, on the couch, still peered out the window at the street.  He
+kept an open ear to the exchange between his host and hostess, and he
+slowly drank his wine.  In the distance he noticed some of the farmers
+irrigating their farm terraces with water, mechanically drawn from the
+Artesian reservoirs beneath the city.
+
+Throughout the evening, from the time the sun had begun to drowse until
+it finally bedded-down for the night, Brook paced about the room.   He
+was deeply into his thoughts, and he occasionally surveyed his beloved
+wife, Dearborne, and also his guest Lloyd.  Lloyd maintained his stare
+out the window during this lulling tide of time.  Mesmerized by the
+beauty of this land, he still longed to see Besten again.  Brook
+empathized with Lloyd's sentiment and left him to it until he felt that
+Lloyd's thoughts, were causing him to brood and Brook did not want to
+see people, brooding in the house.  He recognized that Dearborne was on
+the verge of breaking under the strain of trying to prevent her own,
+and he did not want to see Lloyd in a moody state.
+
+He finally sat at the end of the couch that Lloyd was on, choosing the
+end closer to his wife.  He stared at Dearborne, then at his other
+side, at Lloyd.  His voice attained the quality of a seer.  "The days
+pass too quickly, for one to hold-onto the precious moments in life,
+however trifle and few!"  he stated with the strength of compassion,
+understanding and love, and in his ultimate wisdom, he imparted to
+those close to him a morbid idea.  "We must all one day die -- and may
+it be in peace, and with God!"  When he finished, he saw a shiny tear
+trickle down Dearborne's flushed cheek.
+
+She sipped at her wine once more, put it on the table in front of her
+and pushed it away.
+
+Brooks and Lloyd watched as she set the drink down, and for a while,
+the only sounds that were heard in the parlour were that of breathing
+and the rustling of their clothes.  He observed her and he loathed to
+see the torment that churned within her beautiful eyes.  He finally
+found it within himself, to question her behaviour.
+
+"Something troubles you, my Love? Don't you like the drink?"  he asked,
+with worry.
+
+Lloyd reckoned the Lady and her glass, drawing a feeble connection
+between them, that he thought was the reason behind her moody behaviour.
+
+"Why don't you drink your wine, my Lady?  I know of no woman in the
+land that dislikes rose-wine.  Some may drink it more than others, but
+all like it!"  Lloyd requested, seeing in her eyes that his observation
+his its mark.
+
+She stared at her glass, her eyes burned with contempt therein, and she
+shrugged in utter abomination,  as she, in a nauseated tone, answered
+her guest.
+
+"I am quickly acquiring a distaste for it."    she said, then carried
+on, as she met Lloyd's eyes,  "I am acquiring a distaste for the rest
+of Phoride!"
+
+Brook raised an eyebrow in surprise when he heard his lovely Dearborne
+speak so.  He leaned forward and put his gentle hand, lovingly on her
+forearm until she set her own hand overtop of it and leered into his
+eyes.
+
+"What is wrong, my love?  charged Brook, growing hot with worry.  Their
+eyes became one entity, emanating from both their minds and so joining.
+
+Lloyd got to his feet.  Still at the window, he aimlessly gaped out
+through its portal and added to the earlier tracings of thought
+regarding his intuitive lore.  And, as if in riddle, he recited to
+Dearborne, who understood his conjecture.
+
+"There may be certain disillusions that are regarded as factual, by
+some people?"  he said, and she agreed.
+
+Dearborne put her ball of yarn to one side and issued from her chair.
+She peered at her Brook, for a long time, apprehensive at whether or
+not to tell him the heavy burden that she carried within herself.  She
+still clutched his hand.  He felt her tremble like a cold little
+kitten, and his eyes pleased to her, to reveal her thoughts to him and
+gain strength from his willingness to be receptive.  She told him
+everything.
+
+"It is something that happened the day that I brought Lloyd to this
+house!"  and she told him everything about Cardinal Allen's advances on
+her.  Brook's forehead wrinkled as he listened, his brow rose, and
+sweat flowed from it.  His lips pursed in anger, and she saw anger
+emanating from his eyes, along with the storms of worry there, also.
+Lloyd was poised, still listening to her.  "He later assured me that
+this was not so and I apologized.  I don't know why!"  her voice
+quivered as she began to cry.  "I don't know why?"
+
+She carried on, repeating that she didn't know why she had apologized.
+Her words became snarled under her gasps of breath.  Lloyd stepped
+towards her, to give assistance and Brook embraced her tightly trying
+to impart to her his stalwart volition.
+
+"That Devil's dog has soiled your spirit!  He shall pay.  He shall
+never corrupt again!"  promised Brook.
+
+"He did nothing to me," Dearborne admits.  "It's only what he had said
+to me when I was drinking my rose wine ... how a woman is hot-blooded
+towards her lover if she drinks from the rose." she continued to cry
+while she held on to Brook as if he was a cliff and beneath her was a
+bottomless void.  "Now I cannot enjoy wine, and my mind is frightened
+of him!"
+
+Lloyd was quiet.  He watched Brook's attempts to sedate his Lady.
+Through Lady Dearborne's words and actions, Lloyd now grasped the full
+meaning of the struggle and pains in the hearts of those who saved his
+life.
+
+"I understand, now, my Lord!"  Lloyd ejaculated in prehension.  "The
+perversities from mind, to body, to earth.  The almi ... the evil
+ArchBishop's salvation of the world is DAMNATION!"
+
+"Now you know why I need you to help me, in my cause.  Even after I am
+gone!  You know why you must ... teach ... all that we know -- "  Brook
+appealed knowing the assured outcome to his requests.
+
+
+"Yes!"  was all that Lloyd answered with.  It was enough and clear,
+and proved his loyal promise to one man's vision of freedom and unity.
+
+"You will be alright, my love!"  Brook promised Dearborne.  "Telling me
+frees you from your trials.  Rest easy now!  Lloyd will stay with you.
+I must go and sort this incident in my mind.  I must prepare myself to
+confront that miscreant at Halls."  he touched Lloyd's arm and without
+words asked him to keep Dearborne company while he retired to his
+thoughts. Lloyd complied.
+
+Brook kissed Dearborne and with his hand, gently wiped some of the
+tears from her face, then without further delay, left the room for his
+den.
+
+Shortly after Brook left their presence, Lloyd and Dearborne quietly
+sat on the couch and when she finally stopped crying, she thanked Lloyd
+for being so good in staying with her.  Lloyd promised that he was
+pleased to serve her and that he could never fully repay her entire
+household for their help in rescuing him from his near fatality in the
+square.
+
+She was quiet for the longest time.  Lloyd remained beside her, also
+quiet.  His manners dictated to him to be polite and not question her
+thoughts, but after some time of quiet meditation, she requested of
+Lloyd to be a judge on her actions in telling Brook about what had
+happened between her and the Cardinal Allen.
+
+He thought for a few moments and told her not to fret because she did,
+indeed, do what was necessary.  He told her that her husband had the
+right to know about some perverse chancre of a man, who had practised
+his lechery on her.
+
+"I am glad that I told him this!" she admitted.  She felt much better
+and less guilty from fear that she was an inspiring factor; that she
+was the cause for the lecher to come forth to her as if she were a
+harlot.  She continued.  "I don't know that I should've told him now.
+Maybe earlier would've been better.  I was frightened.  I did not want
+to see him confront the ArchBishop out of rage, for my sake.  I did not
+want to leave this house for that reason!"
+
+Lloyd touched her reassuringly and in a soft but powerful voice, lifted
+this new burden from her mind.  He soothed her fear of Brook's
+confrontation with the ArchBishop.
+
+"Don't worry, Lady!  He will be careful with that vermin.  He has
+motivation, now, to release Besten from the economic blockade, and he
+has his personal grievances to settle.  The ArchBishop will not know
+how to cope!"
+
+"My husband is brave, Master Bartlet.  Because of you ... because of
+myself and because of all those like our Boy, I see him in the throws
+of changing this entire land."
+
+More silence crept into the room.  Dearborne was turned towards Lloyd,
+her face filled with an enigma that wanted to break free from her.  He
+knew that in her heart, she had something else that was very, very
+important for him to know.  In recent days that passed, he had seen it
+in her face.  Now, however, it was most prevalent and in their
+intimate, profound faith, in one another's trust, she finally gave him
+her private testimony.
+
+"I must tell you something, Lloyd."
+
+"Your servant, my Lady."
+
+"I see our lives closing-in on us, in this place.  You, my loyal
+confident, must carry on for Brook, for us, if something evil occurs!"
+she made a familiar request to him.
+
+"I understand, my Lady!"  he replied.
+
+"I wish that you really do."  she stopped for a second to collect her
+thoughts and courage.  "I pray that you keep what I now have to tall
+you, private and between us!"  she said.  Lloyd waited in anticipation,
+guessing at what she was going to tell him.  "Our servant, Boy, is
+Brook's and mine, natural son."  she finished and observed a trifle
+grin spread over Lloyd's face.  Somehow, he had anticipated correctly,
+and he felt himself to be the most privileged of men, to have such high
+trust and confidence bestowed on him.  A fortunate man, who not more
+than a week ago was dragged into their house, a near-dead stranger.  He
+nodded his head to her, and took her hands into his own.
+
+"Yes!  I was curious about the similarity in his appearance to him and
+Brook!  I wondered at the worry that you both expressed in him, the
+evening of the rain, and also the privileges that you both indulge him
+with."
+
+Lloyd, however, did not tell her that he already knew that which she
+had told him.   As before, he found that it was not his place to inform
+on that which should be done by someone closer.
+
+"You will stay here, won't you?"
+
+"I will, for as long as I am permitted, my Lady.  I do owe my life!"
+
+She thanked the eternal God that they were blessed with this man's
+presence in their home, and then commenced to tell him more about Boy
+and the fact that Brook didn't know that Boy was his son.
+
+"He was born Boyce Loebh Scullion-Blue, in my father's land of
+Hennai."  she revealed to Lloyd, and he listened with interest to, the
+already familiar parable.
+
+
+CHAPTER  SIX
+
+The mask of darkened night had passed-over and covered the face of the
+land until, the rising sun, brought into play the motions of the
+morning life.  People's voice covered the singing poetry of the sparrow
+and the cooing of the falcon-cranes, that glided on high, with the gods.
+
+As the night progressed, Brook sat in his viewing room and pondered the
+problems that he knew were destroying the unity of his beloved land.
+This pretty land that had once surged with the majesty and splendour,
+created by his father, descended from The Blue.
+
+When the day broke, Brook emerged from his diversion of thought.  His
+mind and soul were determined to make strong his rightful rule in the
+land.
+
+With Lloyd at his house, knowing Dearborne was safe, he made his way to
+Canon's Butte to the Halls Cathedral, and the ArchBishop.
+
+The streets were crowded with people that morning, for the Week of
+Jubilee began on that day.
+
+Slowly, he trod on the walkways by the emporiums and through the
+square, where he gave his  'good days!', to Empal and other loyal
+friends who stepped aside, and let him pass without a struggle.
+
+He spoke to his subjects during his walk, and offered some bits of
+confidence to them and received some in return.  Strength returned to
+him and his apprehensions about his meeting with the ArchBishop
+decreased in severity.  With his faith in good and his will prepared to
+conquer evil, through a show of strength, he replaced his insecurity.
+
+But evil played the game well and the roles of strength were weighed in
+a balance by patience and peace.  Both were prodded and teased by
+temptation and mistrust, and attempted to tip the scales in favour of
+the incubation.
+
+Brook stood in the confines of the cleric's office and looked out the
+window at the water fountain below, where the vicars and novices pruned
+the grass and floral scape, and had some fun.  They bathed their white
+skins on this day, allowed for this Week of Jubilee to be without their
+habits when within the walled grounds of the Cathedral.  Their abundant
+loin-clothes flapped about in the slight breeze that blew off the ocean
+nearby.  So close, in fact, that one would be able to see it from the
+windows of Halls' southern most parts.
+
+Brook waited a long time.  He was apprehensive about seeing the
+ArchBishop.  After all the times that Brook denied his own conference
+to him, he was now himself being refused the immediate audience that he
+demanded.
+
+Brook became nerved and enraged but he knew that he'd dare not leave
+now, for it would show defeat on his foe's ground and on his foe's
+terms.  He knew, that to choose the humility of his waiting for a
+subordinate, would moreso be forgotten than if he were to retreat from
+the stand-off with the ArchBishop, and his weapon of time and patience.
+
+He brewed hateful thoughts within him mind.  He cursed and prayed for
+God's vengeance to be his, upon the entrance of his adversary.  He was
+aware of the ignoble egotism in the ArchBishop, with his delusions of
+holiness and the calling of himself:  "The Almighty".  But Brook knew
+what excrement this holy man really was and the utter evil that he
+possessed, inherited directly from the ancient Canon Di'Vaticanus.
+
+He waited and then waited some more, nearly reaching a point which
+lacked a noble virtue.  Brook waited until the ArchBishop bounded in
+through his iron-twined door, as if he were a majesty himself.
+
+They stood far apart and silent.  The entire length of the room loomed
+in silent space between them while they just glared at one another.
+
+Finally, the ArchBishop's ill-meaning smile skirted his face as he sat
+down behind his desk.  He never took his eyes off his Lord and master
+Scullion, until he was first to speak.  Brook waited for the most
+heartless sign of homage, if he was to receive one at all.  He never.
+
+"How are you, my ... brother?"  mumbled the ArchBishop.  His voice
+carried overtones of mockery, intended to disturb.
+
+Brook moved to the man's desk, his eyes fixed on his brow and the evil
+smile, which looked as if painted onto his face, until he, too, finally
+reverberated.
+
+"You tread on soft ground, brother!  Your delusions of grandeur have
+carried your mind off into another space."
+
+"I don't understand?"  the ArchBishop's smile left his face momentarily.
+
+Brook laid his palms on the surface of the grand cleric's desk top and
+mocked him in turn.        "What?" Brook laughed.  "The Almighty not
+understand something?  Come now brother ... I was made to wait here too
+long, and for you!"  He lifted his hands from the desk and made his way
+back towards the window.  "Maybe I should have you tried.  Made an
+example of; should I not, my dearest brother?"  He reached the window
+and looked out of it to the fountain below.  The same time, he slightly
+grinned, knowing the effects that he caused to come over the
+ArchBishop's mind.  No sooner did Brook finish speaking, did the cleric
+challenge him.
+
+"Make yourself clear, Brook.  State your business and take your
+leave!"  blurted the man in the holy garb.
+
+Brook's grin left him as he swung around and poked his hand into the
+air, in the direction of the religious leader, and stared right into
+his now pale eyes.
+
+"You are but a mere man -- and not even so -- and you can bleed!"  He
+ceased for a moment and saw a spark of fear flame over the ArchBishop's
+face as he twitched in his chair.
+
+"Yes, my brother ... You can bleed.  Wouldn't a real god be immune to
+bodily injury?  A real god would not sit on his ... broad alter and
+live off his people, growing fat from their love and their worship and
+yet give them nothing in return.  Not only that ... you had sent for me
+-- so, unless you inform me as to what you want ... you may take your
+leave!"
+
+"Good speech.  State your -- "
+
+" -- Your tongue will be silenced either by my command or by my hand,
+Manguino!  I shall give you leave, if I care to, and for good."
+Brook's words, the strength of their usage, greatly startled the great
+ArchBishop who sat back in his chair and blinked aimlessly as the
+sovereign continued, after some silence.  "Word has reached me, that
+you are starving several of the united districts, in the north, with an
+embargo on their trade!  As of this moment that will cease and with
+that, extra trade will commence between Phoride and Besten.  It has
+been long enough, that you have had your petty vengeance on them."
+
+"You agreed on that embargo!"  Manguino advanced.
+
+"Yes.  Now I change my mind.  Your 'will' be ... none!"
+
+Brook turned his head and focused his eyes upon Manguino.
+
+Silence clutched the room again.  Brook stood majestic and powerful in
+the presence of his brother.  The evil high priest, Manguino, was now
+totally disturbed by Brook's show of strength and power.
+
+"It would not have made a difference!"  Manguino said as he pushed
+himself from his chair and moved over to where his brother stood.
+
+"I will make the difference now!  As of this moment." Brook shouted at
+him.  "You ... you may only follow.  You will not be permitted to
+exercise your power unwisely."
+
+The sovereign's judgement had been made and the idea frightened
+Manguino and choked the room with a silence that removed hope of the
+existence of any breath.
+
+Manguino turned back to his desk.  The silence created a term of
+indecision in him that he had not experienced since before Smith Blue
+died.
+
+As if against his will, Manguino found himself leafing through some
+papers on the corner of his desk, desperately trying to formulate a
+plan in his mind to rebuke Brook.  Instead, however, he found himself
+writing and signing a retraction to the trade embargo.  He stretched
+out his hand, holding the document in offering, to Brook.
+
+"How do you mean this return of trade to take place?  By the week,
+month or year?"  asked Manguino, his tone sounding significantly
+defeated.
+
+
+"By month.  I suppose that this would be reasonable!"  An expression of
+shock came over the ArchBishop.  He whined like a child, then took
+control of himself and finally showed his anger.
+
+"Reasonable?  Treating them like our masters and that, you say, is
+reasonable?"  he stopped for a moment and wondered if Brook was indeed
+sane, then laughed a little in a half-hearted manner.
+
+Brook proceeded.
+
+"Yes, I believe that a monthly caravan should suffice.  They would
+prove more profitable to us as our friends than as our enemies."
+
+"Why don't we send them goods every day?  mocked Manguino.
+
+"Careful, Manguino!  You tempt the wrong feelings in my heart.  Anyway,
+if Phoride could survive the strain, I would consider daily caravans.
+And now onto another annoyance."  He looked at Manguino with
+contemptible eyes, intended as prejudgment on his brother.  "I shall
+not tolerate any further words between the Cardinal Allen and my wife.
+If I learn that he speaks with her, or another other woman of my
+household, just once more, I will have him arrested and whipped until
+death."   he turned to Manguino and sneered a grin suggesting a
+pleasurable thought.  "I might even do it myself!"
+
+"I don't know what you are talking about!"  defended Manguino,
+seemingly innocent of the fact that the Cardinal Allen tried to force
+his will on the Lord's spouse.
+
+"Oh?"  is the only response Brook made, then added,  "Well, make
+certain you do not continue with this ignorance, within your own ranks.
+You would not appreciate the subsequent consequences!"  Manguino
+lowered his head and looked to the floor, but in realization of his
+defeated mannerisms he quickly straightened and eyed Brook as he moved
+towards the door of the office.  He opened it and before making his
+exit, he quickly turned to give him one last icy glare.
+
+
+"You will never again keep me waiting."  commanded the sovereign and
+Manguino tipped his head with unwanted compliance, realizing this
+meeting was a bounty in favour of his rival brother, Brook.
+
+Manguino, the grand.  The great ArchBishop of all Phoride and the
+continent, slowly dragged himself back to his desk and sat in his
+chair.  Back in it all the way, he breathed heavily a few times and
+contemplated the last few minutes that had elapsed and Brook's conquest
+of wills.  'What to do?',  was the only question that paraded about
+Manguino's mind.  Finally, the answer came to him.  He would have his
+revenge in a short fortnight, during the celebrations to commemorate
+the wedding between Brook and his beloved Dearborne. Cardinal Allen
+will have his pleasure on that night and so would the ArchBishop
+entertain his satisfaction.  He will have the triumph over his noble
+brother, in the midst of the highest citizens of Pomperaque.  He would
+ruin his brother forever.  He smiled to himself and mumbled under his
+breath, and the gleam of a maybe victory flashed across his eyes.
+
+"Yes, that would be perfect."  he said and repeated it, then with this
+he proceeded to scribble on some clean paper, a request for
+accompaniment to some select cardinals, for that evening of
+merry-making.
+
+As the great keeper of Halls set his plans of abasement to honour his
+brother, another man was alive as a loyal servant, keeping true his
+word to his master.
+
+Sitting in Brook's chair, in the viewing den, Lloyd leafed through the
+large book.  The night before, he sat up to all hours and listened to
+the Lady Dearborne as she conveyed to him the circumstances surrounding
+her husband's apparent meekness, and their son, Boyce.  While he read
+the great book he remembered what Brook had told him about his noble
+heritage, and the emergence of the elite group of people, that followed
+the global devastation long ago.
+
+
+Lloyd observed the details of the colourful pictures that showed the
+way of life in the age before the time of chaos.  He read the ancient
+lines which spoke of the great rulers of that time.  Those men that
+tried to prevent war at any cost, and others who wanted it, at any cost.
+
+His eyes loomed across the words spoken by the great presidential
+leader of this ancient land.  His thoughts that were spoken the very
+day that his life was taken from him by an assassin, hired by some
+warmonger.
+
+                "We're called a civilized people.
+                 Let us behave as civilized people.
+                 Do not let war shatter our tiny planet
+                 for the benefit of just a few, who would
+                 profit from it -- become rich and powerful
+                 from the death of those weaker than themselves.
+                 Let us seek a world unity -- a brotherhood of love
+                 -- before it is too late ... before we give our
+                 all, for nothing!"
+
+
+Lloyd sighed.  The power and spirit behind those words still rang true,
+even to this day.  Where every land was under its own governing
+directions, ruled by no central idea or council and indeed, being
+nothing more than a communal feudalism.
+
+He continued to turn the pages of the great book, THE HISTORY OF NORTH
+AMERICA, and stared in amazement at its details, almost right up to the
+very day of the holocaust.  That detail was mainly in the last few
+pages which appeared to have been put into the book, at a much later
+time.  He saw that someone did not want a noble life, a great
+civilization, to die and be forgotten forever.  How, to him, the book
+began to take-on an almost holy aura that drew him deeper and deeper
+into the words' strength, until a tear issued from his eye and slowly
+meandered down his fleshy cheek.
+
+He wiped the tear from his cheek, in one motion of the back of his
+hand.  Boyce rumbled into the den carrying a tray of food and drink,
+and quietly set it on the table by Lloyd.
+
+"I have brought you food, my Lord!"  informed the boy.
+
+Lloyd looked up from the book and smiled as he thanked the boy and
+requested him to join in the eating.  Hesitant, the boy suspiciously
+looked at Lloyd with questions in his eyes. He nodded and smiled, then
+boy finally moved to the corner and brought back a stool, and so sat by
+him.
+
+Lloyd motioned to Boyce to take some food and not knowing what else to
+do in this circumstance, he took a piece of the roasted fowl and smiled
+before he bit into it.
+
+"Thank-you, my Lord!"  the boy exclaimed.
+
+"You are welcome."  returned Lloyd, and continued.  "Say, Boy.  You
+will call me Lloyd ... I have had enough people call me sir and Lord!"
+
+"Thank-you ... Lloyd!"  Boyce responded, startled by the show if
+friendship offered to him by the injured man that he helped to carry
+back to the Blue Mansion.
+
+They ate the dinner.
+
+They didn't say much to one another while they ate.  Lloyd resumed his
+reading of the great book and the boy looked-on at Lloyd's changing
+expression, his eyes almost bursting into a fall of tears, throughout
+it all.
+
+Lloyd looked up from the book, at times, and caught the boy's eyes
+locked onto him as he read.  "My Lord Brook promised to teach me to
+read that,"  Boyce stated, "but he has not found the time!"  He looked
+hollow for a moment and a feeling of loneliness seemed to hover over
+him until Lloyd, with a compassionate voice, grabbed the boy's craving
+for some adult rapport.
+
+"Brook had asked me to teach you.  Would you like that?"
+
+"Yes."  Boyce's answer was short and direct, and full of obvious
+excitement.  He continued to eat.
+
+"I spoke to Lady Dearborne yesterday."
+
+"She's a very nice lady!"  added Boyce.  He looked up at Lloyd and
+smiled, and Lloyd just laughed.
+
+"That she is, Boyce, and you are very fortunate that she and Brook are
+your parents."
+
+Boyce was astonished. He stopped eating, looked at the meat that he was
+holding then slowly dropped it back onto the tray.  He stood up and
+aimlessly started to walk a few steps away from Lloyd.
+
+Through the hush of the room could be heard the sounds of life
+echoing-in from off the streets.  There were short playful screams of
+the little girls being teased by the boys.  Boyce faced Lloyd.  After
+eyeing him for a time, he finally spoke.
+
+"She told you? -- Why?"  he said, as if in order.
+
+Lloyd nodded.
+
+"Will you tell my father?"
+
+Lloyd's face showed apprehension, and he answered the boy.
+
+"No, I won't.  But I have a strong feeling that he may already know."
+he ceased for a moment and grinned a little.  "Afterall, you do look
+more like him with each passing day."
+
+
+Once again there was a short silence between them but it was broken up
+by some sighs and a welcomed laugh from Boyce.
+
+"Yes, that is true.  Perhaps that is why he asked you to teach me?"
+
+"I cannot begin to know what goes on in someone's mind, but that just
+may be, my young friend."
+
+With their confirming smile and nod, they acknowledged their new
+friendship.
+
+There was a powerful understanding which formed between them.  The
+presence of it could be felt within the room and it was then that Lloyd
+made a suggestion.
+
+"Shall we start the lessons?"
+
+Excited, Boyce nodded that he would like that.
+
+"Can you read?"
+
+Boyce shrugged with an embarrassed grin.
+
+"I know the old alphabet ... my grandfather taught me, but I can't
+understand very much.
+
+Lloyd showed his understanding with a nod, and begged Boyce to sit
+again on the stool, and when he did, Lloyd handed him the book.
+
+"I will do what I can to teach you, young Lord."  Lloyd promised then
+allowed Boyce to leaf through the pages to familiarize himself with the
+contents.  He turned to a large and colourful map and began to read
+slowly:
+
+                "The North American continent stretches between two
+                 oceans and from the northern icecaps to the southern 
+                 tropics.  Its land varies from mountains and prairies,
+                 to dense marches and arid deserts.  The people of
+                 North America are united under a political ideology
+                 known as DEMOCRACY, which prime advantage
+                 lies in the FREEDOMS given to each individual citizen."
+
+
+Boyce finished his time consuming and irregular method of reading and
+smiled as he looked up at Lloyd.  He waited for a response.
+
+"You did well, Boyce!"
+
+"Tell me, Lloyd ... are we Americans?"
+
+Lloyd quietly pondered the question for a moment then eased back in his
+chair and tried to answer his anxious pupil.
+
+"In some ways, yes! Every one of us cherish freedom and would like to
+be proud of our land, rather than collect into small individual
+districts and territories which are hostile to one another!  Lloyd
+finished, feeling that he had adequately answered the boy's question.
+He waited for another question, which came quickly.
+
+"I can't understand, how such a strong land could be destroyed?"
+
+"Every living man wanted power.  There was tension and there were wars
+and the people lost faith in those who governed them.  Then came the
+final war.  Those who were greedy and survived and those who were of
+great intellect, took command of the land.  Both called themselves
+Kings, Queens and Lords.  Both, to some extent, ruled with fear.  We
+still have this, but there are some men that are sore from this dark
+heritage.  Men like my father and your father."
+
+"And I, also!"  stated Boyce, his face lighting up with the spark of
+freedom that touched his spirit.
+
+"We all learn, my friend,"  said Lloyd.  "you now learn about a once
+hectic life and subdued value.  We now have only these memories and
+there are some men that would even deny us this."
+
+Boyce shook his head, understanding what Lloyd meant and then followed
+the motion of his hand that instructed him to continue reading. This
+time he read the leaflets, added by some obscure person:
+
+                '... in the final decades of the Twentieth Century, there
+                  came to power, in their world, men of questionable sanity.
+                  These men called themselves THE SAVIOURS OF EARTH,
+                  believing  that they were sent by God to make Earth
+                  into a second  Eden.  Yet, not a
+                  single soul was saved.  Millions died,  and many
+                  others had perished in the subsequent plagues that
+                  spread throughout
+                  the entire planet, after the scourging  battles.  The
+                  only way for great nations to survive, was to wage  war.
+                  The final years saw the greatest of all wars, fought
+                  in the ancient Holy Land called, the Middle-East.
+                  It was God's will, at the beginning, that the war of
+                  the end would be fought at that sacred place.
+                  Armageddon heralded the end of mankind.
+
+                                            GIN  --  AUGUST 27, 1986'
+
+The Seer watched the life there, with a teased curiosity, and he
+foresaw a postponement to his visit;  so stayed upon the mountain.
+
+What he was seeing, was of deep interest to him.
+
+
+CHAPTER  SEVEN
+
+During this dark night, the city of Pomperaque was by no means quiet.
+Everyone in the city was in a jovial mood, celebrating this day, their
+great sovereign's anniversary of marriage.
+
+All the people rejoiced.  They gave their tribute and praise to their
+Lord Brook Scullion-Blue and his wife, Dearborne, for their fifteen
+years of being together.
+
+Music blared from the hills to the buttes, and far off over the sea to
+the islands and down, deep into the distant valleys.
+
+The people sang and danced around, and they ate and drank everything in
+sight.  Everyone made friendly times, and they made gentle love
+throughout this commemorative evening.
+
+In the city tonight, everyone was enjoying their life.  Almost
+everyone, anyway.
+
+Manguino was ill-at-ease over the love shown to Brook by his people,
+and there was another that could not climb out of the abyssal pit of
+her despair.
+
+Mercedes could not find merriment within herself.
+
+The beauty of this child was withered away from her, since that
+fortnight ago, when Manguino blessed her with his favour.
+
+She suffered greatly from her tortured soul and impregnated body.  She
+had spent the most part of this evening alone in the gardens, in the
+back of the Blue Mansion.  Although she was escorted to the Lord's
+house by her betrothed Hartford, she had left him for the comfort of
+the sedating gardens.
+
+Alone, she strolled the cobble pathways between the rows of hedge.  She
+paced over the tiny wooden bridges that spanned the midget streams
+meandering about the entire estate.
+
+The party was picking up inside the mansion and there were a few
+betting with each other on whether, or not, the ArchBishop would
+attend.  However, they soon forgot their bets as they became more
+intoxicated.
+
+Hartford was searching the mansion for his darling Mercedes, unaware
+that she was troubled.  He thought that she was just playing with him,
+teasing him to find her.
+
+This wasn't the case, though.  She was outside, under the stars,
+thinking and praying to God for strength.
+
+Mercedes was no longer walking.  She had sat down on a wide marble
+bench outside the glass flower house.
+
+Here, with the moonlight beaming through the leaves of the trees over
+head, her face was modelled by the shadows thereof, and there
+occasionally glistened shiny tears that slid across her face like
+meteorites that flashed by in a starless midnight sky.  She mourned for
+her loss.
+
+From a hanging terrace above her head, loomed a figure of a man,
+keeping himself in the
+phantom shadows, so that he could not be seen and still be able to
+watch whatever activity would be below.
+
+He observed the fair young woman below, and wondered who she was.
+
+Lloyd watched her ever since she first entered the garden and since the
+first moment, he heard her sobbing and crying, and rubbing her eyes.
+
+He wondered how such a pretty thing could be so miserable, and he felt
+ultimately inadequate by not being able to lend her assistance, or at
+least, his shoulder for her to cry on.  He didn't know who this young
+woman was but he felt as close to her as he's ever felt to anyone.
+Somehow he empathized with her even though he didn't know what her
+troubles were.
+
+He felt miserable now.
+
+Several times he wanted to call out to her but he knew that if his
+presence was discovered there, by some coenobite, it would mean the end
+of his life, and it would mean great trouble to his host for harbouring
+a sinner.
+
+He thought to climb down the tree, by the terrace, and then approach
+her with his help, but his physical condition still prevented him from
+such over-exertions.
+
+So he just stood there on the terrace, blending into the shadows, as if
+he was one himself, and continued to watch the lovely woman below as
+she sat all alone with the melancholy hugging her moonlit face.
+
+Lloyd took a drink from his glass that he was holding.  When it caught
+the light of the moon, it twinkled like a diamond set by an open fire.
+Mercedes didn't notice the moon reflecting off Lloyd's glass while she
+sat on the marble slab.
+
+The night was beginning to take on a chill.  Mercedes' short bursts of
+breath were illuminated by the moonlight.  The breaths quickly passed
+in and out of her, in strangled gasps.
+
+She whimpered, cutting the delicate music emanating from the house and
+cutting a notch into Lloyd's already pained heart.
+
+Lloyd was over-head and yet he wasn't there, and he watched the
+beautiful young woman destroy her own spirit.
+
+He wished that he knew her thoughts and yet he couldn't imagine what
+they could be.  Little did he know the pain that her heart and soul
+were struggling to overcome.  Little was he aware of the agonies that
+gnawed away at her, from inside -- put there by the great god of the
+land, the ArchBishop.
+
+Mercedes could hardly tolerate it any longer.  She could feel the
+absolute Evil, drawing strength right from her spirit.  The Evil grew
+stronger as it fed off the will residing in her emotions, and so killed
+them.
+
+The Evil killed all the love within her, including the love towards her
+beloved and promised husband, Hartford.
+
+She believed that she could not go to him soiled, even if so turned
+that way by the Almighty ArchBishop.
+
+Her virginity, raped from her by a god, destroyed her fragile spirit
+and maimed her belief in the True God.  Yet, with this belief of her's
+weakened, she still tried to pray.
+
+A tiny voice issued from her.
+
+Lloyd's ears perked and his heart beat stronger.  He could hardly hear
+her but her voice was like a nightingale, and he forgot the pains from
+his own wounds as he concentrated to hear her over the music coming
+from the inside the mansion.
+
+It was a prayer from her heart.
+
+
+Lloyd felt uneasy as he listened and he could smell the stench of Evil
+lingering in the night air.
+
+While Mercedes prayed, she heard the ArchBishop's course voice
+repeating through her mind, saying to her that he will bless her.  She
+knew that she was stained with the kiss of Evil and she prayed to the
+True Living God, to forgive her.
+
+Captured in the slashes of lunar light that filtered through the leaves
+of the trees above Mercedes, Lloyd thought that he saw a momentary
+glint of metal.
+
+Her voice became louder, struggling in hiccoughed gasps.
+
+"Oh help me, God!  Do not turn your eyes away from me, for I must
+destroy the demon that was milked into me; and yes, myself, for letting
+it be within me!"
+
+She lifted her clenched hands into the air and Lloyd finally saw what
+she was holding.  A shaft of light broke the tranquil conformity of
+darkness and he knew that it could be nothing else but a dagger.
+
+He stepped into the moonlight and looked don as he heard her hurl out
+some more desperate words.
+
+"Oh God, do not anger at the taking of my own life.  Forgive me, Lord,
+and accept my spirit!"  she announced.
+
+She plunged the dagger deep into her own chest and pulled it down
+through to her belly.  Her twinging body dropped to the ground.  While
+in weak convulsions she thrust the dagger to its limit, then lay
+motionless.  Lloyd dropped his glass, its breaking sounding like a the
+chorus of mourning angels, and he looked upon the scene, in horror and
+breathed out a word as his eyes were enveloped in tears.
+
+"NO!"  was all that he said, and he sank down to his knees and clasped
+his hands.
+
+Her light and silky gown was dyed in the warm scarlet of her own blood
+flowing, steadily, from her heart.
+
+Lloyd prayed.  He could do nothing to save her.  By the time that he
+realized her intentions, it was too late.  On the terrace tiles, he
+prostrated himself to the great, true and living God.  He prayed for
+forgiveness, for not helping her, and then prayed to God to accept the
+girl's spirit and forgive her for her act.
+
+Inside the mansion, many guests waited for their sovereign to make the
+first toast of the evening, while Lloyd made his own salute to the
+girl, whose name he did not know, that he watched die this night.
+
+Lloyd was the first one to mourn for her, and in some strange way, he
+believed that God mourned for her after him.
+
+The ballroom was full of people that were having a good time. They were
+all laughing and dancing, and making conversation with one another
+while standing near the many tables full of food and wine.
+
+Boy was running around, letting guests into the house and serving
+others with refreshments.
+
+Hartford still searched aimlessly for Mercedes, and he constantly asked
+Boy if he knew where she was.
+
+Boy finally became annoyed and told him to stop asking because he never
+saw her, but he did promise to tell Hartford when he did.
+
+After that, Boy went and served two of Brook's most loyal friends with
+some stronger spirits.
+
+
+Miel and Cassta were already quite drunk but they didn't like to admit
+to such a thing.  Only if they ever reached the point of utter
+unconsciousness did they admit to being 'somewhat intoxicated.'  Now,
+however, they were fine.  They were in a happy state and so they made
+jokes to each other.
+
+"I do so wish that Brook had more of these gatherings."  said Miel.
+"This is quite a party, Cassta!"
+
+Cassta laughed while trying to swallow his drink, so letting some spill
+onto his shirt front.
+
+"Yes.  It's almost as interesting as those parties that I host!"  he
+said in return.
+
+Miel had a comical expression aimed at him, resembling 'shame on
+Cassta', but he couldn't hold it very long because Cassta crossed his
+eyes at him.
+
+"You credit yourself too highly, Cassta!  One would begin to think that
+you are the Almighty, himself!"  A few people, standing nearby, were
+amused by what they heard. A couple of others, however, were offended
+to hear the Almighty's name used in vain.  These high-nosed people
+hated their comrades' drunkenness, but when they tried to sit, in
+chairs that weren't there, they realized that, on such a gay evening as
+this, no one could restrain themselves from drinking, at least a little
+bit.
+
+"He hasn't shown up yet, Miel.  So, you suppose that he'll come
+tonight?"  Cassta asked about the ArchBishop.
+
+"Maybe he will after Brook's toast."  replied Miel.  "But if he
+doesn't, you will owe me three gold bits!"
+
+Cassta laughed a little and touched the side of his nose with the back
+of his hand.
+
+"He will be here, Miel.  I heard rumours that he will make a speech
+suggesting Brook and wife's propagation!"
+
+
+"Ah -- Brook will never stand for that!"  said Miel.  "They are better
+off without children, anyway!  Children are nothing more than a
+novelty!"  he laughed and Cassta joined in.
+
+"Novelty?!"  Cassta exclaimed.  "Is that why you have twelve
+'novelties' of your own?"
+
+Their laughs were the loudest in the area.  They rocked back and forth
+almost falling over themselves.
+
+Miel spoke in reply to Cassta's marking question.
+
+"My WIFE has no self control over herself!"  he said.
+
+While they laughed there was a sudden spontaneity of cheering and
+clapping as Brook ascended a flight of stairs with his beautiful
+Dearborne, and followed by Boy, carrying a tray with two golden goblets.
+
+Brook stopped and turned towards his citizens and they all bowed and
+curtsied to him in respect.  He tipped his head to them in acceptance
+of their fealty to him.
+
+He lifted his palms to them and the room murmured into a hush.
+
+"On this night of my love, I want to propose a toast!"  Brook said to
+them.
+
+They all bowed to him and spoke together.
+
+"With pleasure, Lord!"  they all said, then quietly waited for him to
+begin.
+
+"Tonight we are all equal.  We are human beings; and with this all, I
+toast to each of you, the wish of a long life, liberty and happiness!"
+He toasted his guests in a manner that wholly reflected his nobility
+and the audience hailed him.
+
+"To you, Lord Scullion-Blue!"  they extolled and lifted their glasses
+to him before they drank.  As they all drank their toast, a loud voice
+called to them from the entrance.
+
+"ALL KNEEL!"
+
+Everyone turned and saw that it was a cardinal, heralding the
+ArchBishop's entrance.
+
+The room was gripped in a breathless silence.  The ArchBishop had
+indeed come to this formality, clothed in a splendour never before seen.
+
+The majority of the guests did kneel to him.  Only Brook, Empal, Cassta
+and Miel (with their families), abstained from the kneeling to the
+Almighty.
+
+Manguino was not pleased when he saw this, and he became extremely
+angered when Brook spoke to the people, so putting him in a lowly
+position.
+
+"Friends! _ Tonight rejoice for us!"  said Brook pointing to Dearborne
+and himself.  "There is no need to kneel before anyone on this happy
+evening! -- Is this not so ArchBishop?"
+
+Brook itched Manguino's patience and with a slight grin waited for
+Manguino to respond.  He looked around the room at the people and heard
+Miel and Cassta laughing.  This made him red-in-the-face but eventually
+he looked up to Brook then raised his hand, signalling to the people to
+rise.
+
+Miel and Cassta were amused and shared some of their views of the
+ArchBishop with Empal and Tucker, when they joined the two men.
+
+The Archbishop continued to look at Brook for several moments, while
+Brook and Dearborn joined their citizens in their mingling on the floor.
+
+Music started up again and so did Hartford's search for Mercedes.  He
+was now becoming exceedingly worried.
+
+They had made plans to address Brook and Dearborne, after the toast,
+and ask them to attend their wedding as honoured guests.  Now, however,
+Hartford couldn't ask Brook with Mercedes' delicate presence there to
+ensure a favourable acceptance.
+
+
+He searched some more.
+
+Boy had disappeared for a few moments.  He went out into the garden for
+some fresh air.  Hartford would soon find out where Mercedes was all
+evening.
+
+Nobody paid much attention to Boy when he came back from the outside,
+carrying an odd expression of horror and bewilderment.
+
+Miel and Cassta spoke in loud voices, not caring who heard them speak.
+Miel was paying Cassta his betted three gold bits; wagered on the
+ArchBishop's attendance.
+
+"Our Almighty looks disturbed, Cassta!"
+
+"Yes -- He looks as though his holy sceptre has been plucked!"
+ribbed Cassta and so received a laugh from Miel, Empal and Tucker.
+
+"Or else, his is in a place, other than his hand!"  added Empal.
+
+While they laughed to almost exhaustion, a couple women approached them
+and they paired.  Now that the wives were back the two men quickly
+lapsed into civility.  Gaena put her arms around Tucker's arm and Aria
+faced Miel with a light-hearted disapproval showing in her eligant face.
+
+"Aren't we merry, tonight?"  remarked Aria pushing some hair from
+Mile's eyes.
+
+"Ah, my darling wife.  Cassta and I made a god-like humour!"  he said
+then glanced over at Cassta.  Both began to laugh again and especially
+loudly when they looked around and caught Manguino's glare as he
+listened.
+
+"Are you two children drunk again?" Aria asked with a smile.
+
+Cassta and Miel looked at one another and both pointed at one another
+as they answered.
+
+"He's drunk ... I'm not!"
+
+They carried on some more then Cassta put his arms around Miel and
+Aria, mostly to keep himself from falling down, and looking at the
+others there, he slurred a question.
+
+"Tell me, friends! -- Have you ever heard the story about the wandering
+Vicar?"
+
+While he told his friends the humorous story, Manguino separated with
+his small envoy made up of Cardinals Allen and Levy, and the Vicar,
+Tohm.
+
+There was an aura of treachery and deceit about them as they distanced
+themselves from the rest of the guests.  Manguino turned to the
+Cardinal Allen, who seemed very excited.  Like a child, he pranced
+around the ArchBishop since their arrival, waiting for the ArchBishop
+to give his acceptance to him concerning his honour-paying to the
+lovely Dearborne.
+
+"I don't care what you do, Allen!"  the ArchBishop began.  "I do not
+care!  However, if you are discovered, I will not do a thing to help
+you.  I will not know what you are doing, and I will denounce you as a
+demon, if I am thought to be involved!"
+
+There was a momentary silence between them while Allen made account of
+all that Manguino said.
+
+"I understand, Your Grace, but do not worry.  I shall move like a snake
+and strike just as silently."  promised Allen.
+
+"You behave more like an unsatisfied rabbit, my friend.  Be careful,
+and find your own way back to Halls."  Manguino gave Allen his final
+instructions just as he saw Dearborne make her way to the Mansion's
+upper levels, to where the bed chambers were.
+
+"Thank-you, Most High!"  hailed Allen, then slowly made his way to the
+stairs and the upper floor.
+
+Brook stood by the banquet table having a drink and chewing on some
+fruit that his dear friend Empal had brought, for the festivities.
+
+
+Many of the guests went to him to pay their personal respects and
+congratulations, on his fifteen years of marriage to Dearborne.
+
+Soon, he stood alone for a while and looked about the entire hall and
+saw that the people were enjoying themselves, and he smiled in his
+heart seeing Boy running about serving the people with drink.
+
+He'll be a great leader one day, thought Brook.  All great leaders must
+serve their people and therefore keep them content and happy.  He
+continued to watch the boy for a while them made a silent wish aimed at
+Boy.  Take those troubles, my son, and learn how not to inflict them on
+your subjects.
+
+From across the room, Miel and Cassta were looking at Brook.  They saw
+the man's face expressing deep thought and they assumed that he had his
+mind on Dearborne.
+
+"He has a dainty flag to decorate his royal mast, doesn't he?" Cassta
+commented.
+
+"Yes, but this flag he runs up at night instead of the morning."  Miel
+responded.
+
+They both sighed as they went over to the banquet table to get some
+more to drink.
+
+Music was playing loudly and the people danced, waltzing in circles and
+walking about in promenade.
+
+Hartford went up to almost everybody on the floor searching for his
+beloved Mercedes, but everybody shook their heads in their regret for
+not seeing her.
+
+Boy was walking towards Brook as did Hartford.  He asked the Lord Brook
+the same question as he had been asking everyone, this evening.
+
+"Excuse me, my Lord.  I wonder if you have seen my Mercedes?"
+
+"Yes."  said Brook.  "She's a lovely girl, and you both look very good
+together."
+
+"I am sorry, Lord -- I meant, that I have lost her at the party
+tonight.  Do you know where she is?"  Hartford asked again.
+
+"No, I don't, Hartford.  Have you looked in the parlour and checked the
+water-closet?"  Brook suggested.
+
+"She's not there!"
+
+Boy came up to both men.  He didn't say a thing but Brook knew that
+something was wrong.
+
+They exchanged glances at one another and briefly Hartford became pale,
+then forced a smile.
+
+"You've found her?"  he asked.
+
+Boy looked over at Brook then back at Hartford, and nodded.
+
+"She ... she is in the garden."  the boy said, swallowing each word.
+"She is dead, Hartford!"
+
+Hartford lost all colour in his face and his pupils dilated to
+pin-prick size, then he ran outside to the garden.
+
+"Oh God, NO!"  Hartford had finally found his lovely betrothed, dead.
+He embraced her limp body gently into his arms and took the dagger out
+of her body, hearing it scrape against her exposed ribs.  He set the
+dagger to the side and kissed her cheek and he wept.  Then, as if her
+own body cried for Hartford's pains, a tear crept forth from her eye,
+mixing with his own tears and flowing towards the arm-length gash in
+her chest.
+
+Hartford moaned and rocked back and forth; for with her death came the
+death of his world.
+
+Brook was disturbed and directed Boy to prepare a chamber upstairs for
+Hartford and Mercedes.
+
+Boy went forth and paid no attention to Lloyd standing up on the
+balcony, looking at the crowd.  In his eyes were tears and he too was
+pale from his witness.  In his mind swirled whirlwind thoughts of the
+demonic masturbation that came out of Halls and touched every living
+thing with its Evil impurity.
+
+He could not keep all that he saw, from his mind.
+
+All laughed and were enjoying themselves, while outside was an
+innocense was forced into the obscurity of loss.  What had happened to
+his own love, in Besten, those few short years ago, had been replayed
+before him, this night.  It was a terrible loss brought on by someone's
+whims of power and glory.
+
+He heard Boy's voice telling Dearborne about the problem that happened
+and that Brook ordered a chamber be prepared.  Dearborne was heard
+making her excuses to a couple women that she was talking to in her own
+bed chamber and went into another room with Boy.
+
+When out in the hall, Lloyd bowed his head solemnly to the lady and she
+returned with a nod.  From his expression, the Lady Dearborne was sure
+that he knew something about the problem that Boy mentioned.
+
+She finally found out what the problem was when she was preparing the
+one room with Boy.  She was saddened by what Boy told her he had found
+in the garden and she imagined how Hartford felt.  Yet, Dearborne
+herself could not cry for Mercedes. In her lifetime she had seen too
+many deaths, most of which were associated with Halls, in one way or
+another.  This must be another death caused by someone at Halls, she
+believed.
+
+Downstairs, Hartford carried Mercedes into the ballroom and Brook
+immediately threw his cape around her.  He didn't want anyone to know
+about her death this evening and so tried to hide the wounds.
+
+
+Hartford's eyes were glazed-over and Brook knew that Hartford wasn't
+aware of his surroundings any more, so Brook guided him up the stairs
+and to the room.
+
+Brook gave his leave to his guests and bade them to continue with their
+merriment, and most of them did.
+
+Miel and Cassta felt uneasy.  Although they were in a twilight
+drunkenness, they knew that something was wrong.
+
+Manguino made his way over to the stairs, smiled to himself and shook
+his head in a slight displeasure.  He knelt down and with his finger
+dabbed a little red circle of blood that he was certain was the girl's.
+
+"Oh, you naive girl."  he said to himself.
+
+Cassta noticed Manguino's actions and pointed them out to Miel.  It
+didn't take much effort to figure out that the great ArchBishop was
+associated with the trouble that they saw.
+
+They decided that they would check on their Lord a little later, to see
+if they could help with anything.
+
+The discontented guests soon began to feel uneasy and many of them left
+the mansion, until there were just a few Prominants left there,
+finishing off the rest of the food and drink from the tables as if they
+were beggars at a God-sent feast.
+
+The music began to die down and soon the great ArchBishop also left
+with Cardinal Levy and the Vicar Tohm, knowing that he didn't have to
+add his own planned attack on Brook.
+
+Upstairs, Hartford had gently set Mercedes down on the bed and stared
+at her.  Brook, Dearborne and Boy looked on as Hartford continued to
+weep, in convulsive sobs.
+
+"She is dead!  She has taken her own life, but why?"  Hartford was
+asking while Lloyd stood outside the chamber door listening.
+
+Unseen, Lloyd crept into the room and sat in the window behind the
+curtains.
+
+Hartford continued his lament for Mercedes.
+
+"Why?"  he asked.  "Did I displease her?  Did she not love me any more?
+-- Oh, God!  I cannot understand!?"
+
+Brook put his hand on Hartford's shoulder hoping to console him to some
+degree.
+
+"Listen to me, Hartford!  Her death is not your fault."  said Brook.
+"I am told that her love for you was greater than anything in the whole
+world.  Something else made her ... Hartford believed Brook, and so did
+Lloyd as he watched the moon rise from behind Canon's Butte,
+silhouetting the Halls Cathedral as if it an ancient mausoleum.
+
+Cassta and Miel entered the chamber silently.  The misfortune of the
+past few minutes had a sobering effect on them and they were silent, no
+longer laughing and no longer making fun of trifles for their
+amusements.
+
+Hartford's mumbling scared everyone in the room and the two men didn't
+know how to react.  They just stood there quietly, their mouths agape
+and their expressions showing a dumbfoundedness.
+
+"My only love.  She's gone and I cannot breathe!"  Hartford gurgled
+with irrationality. Mercedes' death finally began to work on his head.
+"My wife to be, will not be, she isn't -- is she?  There is nothing.  I
+am nothing.  Is all nothing?"
+
+Dearborne looked at Brook with frightful worry and she took his arm.
+
+"He's delirious!"  she said.  Brook saw Miel and Cassta enter the room
+earlier and now motioned to them to approach.  Without hesitation, they
+drew near.
+
+"My friends, take Hartford down to the parlour and let him rest!"
+Brook requested and his two most loyal subjects obeyed him.
+
+They took Hartford, one under each arm, and carried him down to the
+parlour, Boy leading the way.
+
+It was obvious that Hartford wasn't aware of what was happening to
+him.  His face was pallid and his eyes were glazed-over.  He was no
+longer existing on a mutual level with anyone in this world.  Within
+his grief-afflicted mind and mutilated soul, he searched for that
+which he had lost.
+
+Brook and Dearborne were alone for a moment, so to speak, since they
+were not aware of Lloyd's presence, while he quietly sat in the window.
+
+"It is so quiet, Brook. The guests have gone!"
+
+"Yes." confirmed Brook.  "The flavour of this celebration had become
+very bitter!"
+
+How true, thought Lloyd as he looked at Halls in the distance, knowing
+from experience that the cause of this night's misfortune, originated
+there.
+
+"I'm sorry for tonight, my love!"  said Brook.
+
+Dearborne's moistt eyes calmed his heaving spirit.  She did not blame
+him for this evening's tragedy and she knew that his apology was really
+intended as pity for the loss of such a precious and innocent soul as
+Mercedes was.
+
+With this, Brook turned and went out of the room.
+
+Lloyd's heart ached with the burden of his witness.  He saw Mercedes,
+inside his mind, thrusting the dagger into her heart, over and over
+again, and the visions of this mingled with his memory of witnessing
+his own betrothed Charnan, at her death.  This evening devastated him.
+Mercedes reminded him so much of his beloved Charnan.  She had the same
+golden hair and smooth, fair skin.  Her beauty was only surpassed by
+her innocense.
+
+
+Lloyd's mind travelled while comparing the two women and his two most
+painful experiences.
+
+Through a small tare in the curtain, Lloyd saw Dearborne lift her head
+from a prayer that she had made for the body and spirit of the departed
+Mercedes.
+
+She was starting to turn and leave when she sat heavily into a chair by
+the bed and started to cry.
+
+Lloyd was ready to reveal himself to her, to talk and console her, but
+he couldn't show to her his own weakness.  He cried, too.
+
+Brook was down in the parlour with Miel, Cassta and Hartford.  The
+three men stood apart from Hartford.  He was put on the couch, reclined
+and withdrawn, and he appeared to be as inanimate as the furniture.
+
+Hartford, the young man with so many years ahead of him, was no longer
+alive, in the normal sense of the word.  He did breath and occasionally
+twitched, and tears periodically migrated in a clean path down his
+face.  Yet, this unfortunate young man lacked the spirit of life found
+residing in every human.
+
+The men held back their tears, looking-on at Hartford with pity and
+remorse.
+
+"At this time we cannot lose our wits,"  Brook told Miel and Cassta.
+"for there are only two people in all of Phoride that could be
+responsible for this."  he glared at the men with cold, angry eyes.
+"They shall pay for it!"
+
+The other two men tried to swallow the lumps that blocked their throats
+and when Cassta spoke, his voice burbled.
+
+"I must prevent my beloved ..."  he cleared his throat and continued.
+
+"I must keep her from taking her own life.  She is dainty and
+beautiful.  We are pledged to marry."
+
+"We must protect our women from our own clergy  -- that's shameful!"
+Miel added.
+
+"I will not let my Ledo die like Mercedes, and God knows how many
+others.  I will honourably join her tomorrow!"
+
+"You are correct, Cassta.  Something must be done to suppress
+Manguino's evil ways."  said Brook.
+
+Miel added his own thoughts and sentiments about the ArchBishop's
+immoral methodology.
+
+"He has gone too far, this time.  Unlike the other suicides, this one
+wasn't isolated.  This time, a girl's death affected several scores of
+people."
+
+Cassta clutched Brook's upper arm.
+
+"Lord, would you oversee my wedding tomorrow?"  Cassta asked him and he
+nodded, accepting.
+
+Brook turned on to his concern for Hartford.  He moved to Hartford and
+covered him with a long cloak that was over one of the chairs.
+
+"I think that we should leave him to rest now!"  Brook suggested and
+Miel questioned in worry.
+
+"Should someone stay with him, Brook?"
+
+Cassta volunteered to watch Hartford, wanting to help in whatever means
+he could but Brook was aware that there was nothing that any one of
+them could do for him.  He appreciated his two friends' concern for the
+remnant that Hartford had become, but he didn't want them to stay
+needlessly, and having the situation under control, he excused them.
+
+
+"Miel, your wife probably waits for you.  You should go."
+
+"Yes, my Lord!" nodded Miel.  "You will call me if I am needed?"  Miel
+asked and Brook affirmed.
+
+"You too should leave, my friend."  Brook said to Cassta.  "I realize
+that it is late, but I suggest that you go speak to Ledo.  Give to her
+father my responsibility."
+
+"I will leave you, then.  Thank-you, Brook!"
+
+Both men left as Boy walked into the parlour.
+
+"Lord?"  he hailed Brook.  "The guests and musicians are gone now!"
+
+"Alright, Boy.  I will be in my den, for a time.  Keep watch on
+Hartford and call me if anything changes!."  Boy sat in a chair
+opposite Hartford and he didn't take his eyes from him.
+
+Dearborne was still in the same bed chamber with Mercedes' body.
+
+Lloyd still hadn't calmed enough to talk to her.  He continued to sit
+in the window and listened to her lovely voice singing a sad little
+tune.
+
+Lloyd wasn't the only one listening to her sing.  Outside the door
+lurked the Cardinal Allen.
+
+He had seen Brook repair to his den and Allen knew that he would not
+re-emerge for some time.  He thought that he had enough time available
+to himself to receive his total fulfilment from Dearborne.
+
+He listened to her sing as he moved closer to the door and finally he
+entered the room in silence.
+
+        "The days pass by... Our lives are brief... To death we all 
+         do cry,
+         We live in grief... Through all the days -- "
+
+Dearborne sang but her words were shattered by the splintered voice of
+the Cardinal Allen, finishing-off the verse.
+
+        "For we all know... We'll one day die!"
+
+Startled, Dearborne swung around and stood facing him.
+
+Lloyd was startled also and he peered through the tare in the curtain
+again.  There stood the man who almost had him executed a fortnight
+passed; the same man that had made the fair Dearborne to feel dirty.
+
+"Why haven't you left yet?"  she demanded of him, and he just smiled.
+
+"It's a pity, is not -- I mean, the girl's death."  he began.  "You
+know, fair Dearborne, the ArchBishop has very good eyes for beauty but
+he does not understand the mind of women.  He pushed too much.  He
+should influence, not frighten."  he kept smiling as he moved a step
+closer to her.  "He has only one child to my thirteen, and that child
+is a cripple, in its mind."
+
+Dearborne had finally taken hold of herself and spoke out at Allen.
+"Get out, you wretched weasel!"  she shouted but this inspired Allen to
+move closer yet.
+
+"You will be wholly happy to mother my fourteenth."
+
+"I should say not."
+
+"Oh, my dear, you will submit!"  Allen's voice sounded of excited
+promise.  "Since you have neglected to bare children to your line with
+Brook, I (or any other of the Almighty), has the right to have you bare
+a child from him.  This right I claim and demand from you, and by the
+law, even you cannot refuse."  he took another stride to Dearborne and
+behind her she took hold of an empty vase.
+
+"I am above the law, now leave or I shall call my husband!"  she was
+terrified.
+
+"Really?  When Brook goes into his room, he can hear no one.  So he
+finds out about this 3/4denial will be made, and without proof, you
+will not be believed."  He made a final advance on her and took her
+into his arms.
+
+She struggled them slammed him in the face with the vase.  Yet, nothing
+happened.  What's more, it seemed to have inspired him all the more.
+
+He reached out for the part in her blouse, tore it then began to knead
+her exposed breasts.
+
+Lloyd flew from the window when he saw that the vase did Allen no harm,
+and now forcibly threw him off from Dearborne.  He stood in front of
+her and watched Allen pick himself up off the floor, several yards away.
+
+The expression on Allen's face was dismay and fear.  For a moment he
+thought that Brook had returned, but now he saw who it was.
+
+"It's you.  How can this be?"  demanded Allen.
+
+Lloyd gave him a heated glare.  "My maker didn't want me, at that
+moment.  And if you do not leave, he may want you, now!"
+
+"Move away."  commanded Allen.  "This is not your affair!"
+
+"And it shall not be yours!"
+
+At this, the Cardinal Allen rushed Lloyd.  Lloyd with all his force
+summoned, fisted Allen in the forehead.  The crazed Allen still
+attacked as if he didn't feel any ill effects from being solidly
+squared in the head.  On his second rush, he caught Lloyd in the ribs
+with his head.  
+
+Lloyd lurched forward, in pain, as he got Allen in the throat when he
+wrapped his arms about his neck.  He spun around and heaved towards
+the floor, unto his knees.  Allen didn't move any more, his neck
+snapping into a splintered mush.
+
+Lloyd slowly rose, holding his injured side, and he walked away from
+the body without hardly a care for what he had done.  "Are you injured,
+my Lady?"  he asked, while he took off his vest and gave it to her to
+cover herself.
+
+"Yes!  You helped me just in time, thank-you!"
+
+"I should have been there sooner.  I was sitting in the window since
+the girl's body was brought in here.  I'm sorry but I just couldn't
+move sooner to help you!
+
+Dearborne looked away from him.  She focused upon Allen's lifeless body
+with a feeling of absolute relief.
+
+Lloyd spoke some more, trying to give explanation for his lateness.
+
+"I had seen her take her own life, my Lady!"  he pointed to Mercedes'
+body and tried to keep his tears from her.  She listened and slowly
+returned to looking at Lloyd.
+
+"She was sitting on the bench, beneath my terrace.  The moon was out
+and when I finally realised what she had in her hands, she had killed
+herself.  I couldn't save her."
+
+Dearborne put her head against his arm revealing to him that she
+understood how he felt, but she didn't really until he told her that
+story about his own love, Charnan, who died the same way.
+
+In the morning, Brook was told about what had happened and he some
+Totemen from the Phoridene Council, take the Cardinal Allen's body back
+to Halls.  With the body, Brook included a letter to Manguino demanding
+that he keeps the death issue in its place and not to make any trouble
+by it.  He reminded Manguino of the promise that he made to him
+concerning Allen.
+
+Brook had admitted himself to be Allen's executioner.
+
+In the Blue Mansion, Lloyd and Boy were told to prepare for their
+journey to the north.
+
+Brook felt that there was no time to lose.  He had a feeling of
+impending doom, and not only that, he wanted to be safe.
+
+
+On Mount Benitar, the wise man also knew that something would happen.
+He saw all the signs.   Soon, he thought -- soon it would be time for
+him to go down to Pomperaque, again.
+
+
+CHAPTER  EIGHT
+
+The events that had occurred over the passed few days affected almost
+everyone in Pomperaque and other parts of Phoride.
+
+In Gothal, the Holy City, the nuns at the Abbey of Our Holy Saint
+Mariot, performed a funeral service for Mercedes and most everyone from
+Pomperaque, and Gothal itself, turned out to pay their respects.
+
+The day before the funeral, Cassta and Ledo were married in Gothal by
+the Abbey Mother and Brook presided over it.  The ceremony was
+performed in secret, in the name of the True Living God, and just a
+small number of friends attended.  Miel was there with Aria. Empal was
+there with his family, and the greatest of Pomperaque's Prominants,
+Brook and Dearborne, were there.
+
+Everyone was happy at the wedding and somber at the funeral, as it was
+normal to be.
+
+There was anger in the eyes of some of the coenobites when they found
+out that Ledo had married Cassta.  They could now do nothing to her.
+She was indeed above their rights of having her bare a Holy Child.
+Cassta saved his darling Ledo, just in time.
+
+To most, however, the saving of a life or a soul meant little when
+compared to the loss of one such innocence as Mercedes.  All that there
+was to benefit from salvation was the relief that it brought to the
+saved, and those close to them.  Relief, by itself, had no real value.
+
+Good and Evil each made their own laments.
+
+While mourners and wailers cried for the death of an innocent young
+woman, so did the monks at Halls, cry and mourn for the brutal death of
+their best and most respected Cardinal Allen.
+
+As it was; a customary show of respect to a dearly-departed coenobite,
+a pure woman was chosen to be entombed with the body.  This chosen
+woman willingly accepted requests made to her to share her eternity
+with the dead cleric, and carried with her the love and honour of each
+individual member at Halls.  The love and respect was given to her,
+through physical sex, by each monk, before she was taken to the tomb
+with the deceased brother.  While the corpse lay in state, there was a
+room set aside, adjacent the big hall in the chapel. The chosen women
+lay unclad in soft beds and each was fornicated with by each individual
+at Halls; from the lowest novice to the ArchBishop himself.
+
+Prior to the monks looking upon the body of their dead brother, they
+entered the room and gave their all to the woman.  During the
+copulation, the men repeatedly chanted:  "Take this to our friend; a
+sign that we love him!"
+
+At the end of the day, when all the men had gone through with their
+ritual respect, they took the limp, unconscious woman and set her on
+top of Allen's dead body.  Both were then carried to the grotto, in the
+cliffs at the ocean's edge, and were sealed inside, forever.  From the
+moment of the bodies' entombment,  all those that were in Halls
+Cathedral abstained from any and all normal human functioning for three
+days.  During this three day period -- a further show of respect for
+their dead -- no one ate or had sexual intercourse and during this time
+they kept themselves from sleep, and prayed for the Cardinal's soul.
+
+From the Cathedral spires the Rogjans called out to the countryside
+some cantorial chants, announcing and honouring, and strangely, even
+canonizing the Cardinal Allen.
+
+On the evening of the third day, all those residing at Halls made
+preparations for a day of feasting, and at sunrise the feeding began.
+To enjoy this day to the fullest, the coenobites brought to Halls a
+caravan of women from I�nondan and they caught up from their three day
+celibacy.
+
+Everyone was fulfilled, promising their living spirits to Allen's
+resurrection as they reflected on his well-rounded life.
+
+After their observations of praise, Manguino and Tohm repaired to the
+office to speak of their friend.  Of all the brothers at Halls, they
+two knew him best and regarded him most highly.
+
+"How he will be missed by all!"  Tohm told Manguino.  "Most everything
+that I know, he showed me.
+
+"Even the few, and greatest, amongst us falter.  He made a mistake and
+so paid for it."  Manguino explained to Tohm that Allen's obsession to
+inseminate Dearborne overtook him.  The manner of his death, however,
+greatly puzzled him.
+
+"I would like to know how such a dainty woman as she could break the
+neck of a man as physically powerful as Allen?"  questioned Manguino.
+"I don't believe that Brook had killed him."
+
+
+"That is something we all ask, Your Grace.  We must bring them both to
+justice, regardless of guilt!"  Tohm was speaking like his teacher.  He
+didn't care, now.  He just wanted Allen's death avenged.
+
+"I agree, but it's said that Allen was caught forcing her and Brook
+himself admitted to the killing our friend.  Yet, I know that he's
+lying."
+
+"Would you like to know my thoughts?"  Tohm asked Manguino.  "I believe
+it was that northern man, that had disappeared, who was the man that
+killed Allen.  What perfect place to hide from us -- at the Blue
+Mansion!"
+
+The Archbishop's eyes glared for a moment but refused this idea.  He
+speculated that the dissident was long gone from Pomperaque by that
+time.
+
+Tohm, however, carried on until he began to convince Manguino of his
+idea.
+
+"We must bring the Lady Dearborne to trial then, if only trying her on
+the basis of her refusal, as your subject, to bare his Holy Child.  We
+can try Brook on harbouring a dissident and charge him with heresy."
+
+It didn't matter to Tohm about the deaths of more people.  As far as he
+was concerned the whole of Phoride could be sacrificed to avenge
+Allen's murder.
+
+Manguino wanted no more bloodshed.  He couldn't trust Brook either, and
+he had to decide.  Brook's show of power, as of late, had made him seem
+greater and more beloved, by the people.  Then there was the letter
+that he sent with Allen's body.
+
+                        Manguino
+
+                        My promise fulfilled, Brother.
+                        Recompense shall not be tolerated.
+                        Let it pass for the good of your
+                        own condition!
+
+                                       Sovereign Lord B. S-B.
+
+He, as ArchBishop, wanted to fold, and pass on this retaliation, yet,
+just couldn't convince Tohm of that desire.
+
+His views to go ahead, seemed more sound and he was urged by Tohm, like
+he was urged by Allen so many times before.
+
+"She is Lady Dearborne Scullion, Tohm; Brook's wife -- you do
+understand?  You did hear me tell Allen that night, I am not
+responsible for him -- even though I did wish him success."
+
+Tohm's impatience poured out of his soul.  He sighed heavily cutting
+into Manguino's line of thought, and in leathery breaths, filled the
+office with his hostility.
+
+"We cannot hold back, Your Grace.  We must act, now!  We must take this
+scourge of the earth, this Brook Scullion, by total surprise.  We have
+to make the Phoridenes to believe that Brook and his wife are Evil, and
+that they should be punished under the Canon Laws, for their crimes."
+
+Manguino nervously paced around as he listened to Tohm's inspiring
+confidence and need for justice.  This was building excitement within
+his heart.
+
+"He is not a clean man, my great one.  Let us storm his house and find
+the proofs of his blasphemies and sacrilegious practices.  Let them
+receive their judgement from you!"
+
+The ArchBishop shook with excitement.  His whole body trembled, the
+layers of fat migrating all over.
+
+
+He sat at his desk and glared with passion right into Tohm's eyes.
+
+"Yes, yes! We could do it, no matter how great our Lord Brook is.  We
+must plan, Tohm.  We have much work to do!"
+
+The ArchBishop was finally sparked.  He absorbed Tohm's passion and
+ferocity, and what's more, he no longer feared his brother.
+
+Tohm continued.
+
+"Our Almighty can be swayed to see his practicality.  It is grand to
+have a god in your confidence."  Tohm sank to his knees and prostrated
+himself before Manguino.  "Let us go, my Almighty!  Let them feel your
+wrath!"
+
+Manguino stood up from his chair and with fire burning in his eyes, he
+slammed his fists on his desk.
+
+"Yes -- they shall feel my wrath!"
+
+He turned.  Facing Tohm, Manguino then lifted the front of his robes.
+
+Tohm looked up at Manguino and smiled then his head disappeared under
+Manguino's robes.
+
+
+CHAPTER  NINE
+
+Over a week had passed since the feast-day at Halls, and once more the
+city of Pomperaque seemed to have returned to normal.  There was,
+however, a feeling of apprehension that loomed over the city, though,
+but no one really gave it much thought.
+
+Pomperaque was relatively quiet.  The markets and bazaars weren't as
+lively and there seemed to be some kind of event, at Halls.
+
+As far as most people were concerned, there wasn't anything obviously
+wrong.
+
+No one noticed the reek of conspiracy rising from the depths of hell to
+fill the masses with a weakness that soon took them over.
+
+The nature of the day sapped the power of spirit from everyone, and
+they all were vulnerable and passive like sheep.
+
+Brook and those in his household had behaved oddly this day.
+They were loose with their thoughts and spoke out without cares or
+fears for anything or anyone.  Their hearts felt light and Brook had
+felt at ease and he believed that since Manguino had not avenged
+Allen's death by now, he had indeed followed Brook's order to 'let it
+pass'.
+
+All day Brook was in his viewing den with his wife, Lloyd and Boy,
+going over a map of the Northern Continent, showing his guest and Boy
+the route that they would take to the great library at Alugean, near
+the port of Angaent.
+
+They were close to each other -- now more than ever -- because Brook
+had revealed to Boy and Dearborne that he had known for a long time,
+that Boy was really his son.  He had made Dearborne and Boy very happy,
+and they felt relieved that Brook had accepted it, in secret, for so
+many years.
+
+In the den, Dearborne stood apart from the man.  She stood at the
+cabinets and pushed buttons on Brook's panel, when he gave her the
+word; and then the men stood at the screen tracing out the route on
+different maps.  Each map was a more detailed version of the sections
+showing that way to the mountain.
+
+Brook had made plans with Empal to fly Lloyd and Boy to Virune, on his
+Kenttitian Eagle, during some night when they wouldn't be seen.  That
+night was soon approaching them and they still had some things to learn.
+
+Nearing the late afternoon, Brook showed to his son and to Lloyd a
+passage-way that ran underground in two directions, built by Carter
+Blue as a precaution against a personal attack.  These passage-ways
+were still in good condition, leading north to the Joenine Forest and
+just south to the inlet which leads to the ocean.
+
+Both routes were safe and quick, but Lloyd and Boyce  would take the
+northern route to a clearing where Empal would be waiting with his
+eagle.
+
+
+The passage-way ran under the Blue Mansion from Brook's den and the
+viewing wall was the hidden door that gave access to them.
+
+Brook demonstrated to them the working of the door and showed to them
+the bracing that they would use to buttress the door; in the case of a
+sudden attack and an insured escape would be necessary.  Lloyd shrugged
+off these things feeling them to unnecessary to his knowledge, but Boy
+absorbed every word that Brook said, as if those very words were his
+life-giving air.
+
+Brook finalized what he thought to be the most important things for him
+to convey.
+
+"Boyce ... my son.  Learn whatever you can at the Alugean Library.
+Know the truths about the past then return to Phoride.  You will
+inherit this land from me, and you will become a great man."  Boyce
+listened with intensity to his father because he knew that he was
+communing with a great mind.  Boyce nodded to him with silent promise.
+
+"Rule with kindness and love, but don't allow men of evil, men like
+your uncle, the ArchBishop, to tread over you and grind you into the
+earth."  Brook breathed for a moment then briefly looked away from
+Boyce.  "I have been too kind and have allowed too much to pass into
+being.  Now, it's difficult to fight the evil."
+
+"I promise you, that I will follow your words, father!"  promised
+Boyce, and Lloyd gave his word to Brook, as well.
+
+"I shall watch over him, Lord.  I will guide him to do what is right in
+accordance to the oldest book's ten laws, and my people shall help us!"
+
+Brook forced a grin and slowly nodded.
+
+"Good!"
+
+He motioned to Dearborne and told her to activate, on the panel, the
+playback for pictures of Alugean.
+
+"I must make certain that you know the entrance to the inside of the
+mountain.  Watch and remember, since this will be the final time I will
+show you."
+
+The pictures flashed on the screen, showing recognizable landmarks that
+are in the vicinity of the entrance and finally there came the picture
+of the entrance itself.  It wasn't very large and was almost hidden,
+and there was one small panel such as that which Brook's gadgets have,
+and from that panel, entry would be gained into the library.
+
+"Remember,"  Brook told Lloyd and Boyce.  "the numbers that must be
+pressed are these:  Seven, Two, One, Nine -- count to five and then
+press One, again -- the vault door will open.  Inside there is enough
+food and water, that you will not have to worry about running out for
+your duration of stay.  There are enough supplies there for both of you
+to live on for twenty years, and more."
+
+"We will stay there fifty, if need be!"  Boyce promised.
+
+"You will try to unite the lands in the north, with Besten?"
+
+Lloyd nodded affirmatively, answering Brook's question.
+
+"They will all help me, I trust, when the time comes.  They understand
+my intentions."
+
+Far in the distance there was a riotous sound.  It came from the street
+and Dearborne rushed to the window and peered out to see what was the
+cause of it.
+
+"Brook!"  she suddenly screamed out Brook's name, but could hardly say
+anything else.  Brook went quickly to the window, and Boyce and Lloyd
+went with him.
+
+When they saw what was making its way down the street, all that was
+heard was a deathly silence in the room, being filled in its place by
+the sounds of impending violence.
+
+"My God!"  Brook said, his voice shattering with devastating uneasiness
+and fear.
+
+
+Boyce looked, too.  His heart jumped within his body as he looked at
+the frightful expression on the adults' faces.
+
+They all watched the ArchBishop and a dozen monastic guards and clergy
+march up towards the mansion and disappear as they reached the main
+door beneath them.
+
+"I can't believe that Manguino is here."   Brook started.  "Yet... I am
+not surprised.  I understand my dear brother."
+
+Dearborne took Brook's arm.
+
+"What will we do, Brook?"  she pleaded with him.
+
+He looked at her and the other two men.
+
+"Lloyd and Boyce must leave right now, and you must leave with them."
+Brook said to Dearborne and made his way to the viewing wall.  He
+tugged at one of the drape-cords and the wall swung open to a space
+that was just large enough for the book case where he removed the big
+book from its hiding place.  He beckoned Lloyd and the others.  Lloyd
+and Boyce quickly went to him but Dearborne moved from the window to
+the room doors and locked them.
+
+Pounding sounds could be heard echoing throughout the mansion, followed
+by the blaring twangs of the electrophoric guns.
+
+Three successive bangs were heard as the wood and stone main doors
+cracked and buckled under the strain.
+
+"They're inside."  Brook said, with acceptance.  "Dearborne, come!"
+
+He handed the book to Lloyd and looked between him and Boyce.
+
+"Care for this book, and use it to teach those in your land.  They will
+not doubt its truth."
+
+"I will."  vowed Lloyd.
+
+
+"May God watch over you!"  Brook blessed his son and Lloyd then
+stretched his hand to Dearborne to approach him and take it.  She did.
+
+"I will miss you, my love."  he said to her and kissed her.
+
+"I will not leave you, Brook.  Boyce must survive for us and there is
+Lloyd to watch over him.  We ... we are no longer important."  She
+embraced Brook and met Lloyd's eyes when doing so.  She slowly lowered
+her eyelids as to say to him that she is staying.  He pursed his lips
+and nodded to her.
+
+Brook, still embracing Dearborne turned to Lloyd and gave him a
+desperate and hopeless little grin.
+
+"You two will leave now.  My Dearborne will stay by my side.  Go now,
+the devil will arrive soon."
+
+Just as Brook finished his thoughts to Lloyd, there was a tinny and
+hoarse voice come from behind the door.
+
+"Break it in!" it commanded.  It was Manguino.
+
+"Quickly, leave!"  Brook said to Lloyd, leaving Dearborne and pushing
+Lloyd and Boyce through the ajar passage door.
+
+"Father ... !"  Boyce began but Brook stopped him.
+
+"You must go, my son.  There's nothing that you can do!"
+
+They stared at one another, and without further words, with an
+understood good-bye, they finally left.
+
+Brook patted Lloyd on the back and instructed him to blockade the
+passage door with the buttress. He did so.
+
+There was a blasting twang and the door splintered apart.
+
+Brook quickly turned towards his gadgets and frantically started to
+press buttons, turn knobs and adjust levers.
+
+The ArchBishop entered with his men and Brook took Dearborne behind him.
+
+Three of Manguino's Angels grabbed Brook's arms and they put one of the
+shiny metal armaments under his chin, and another clasped Dearborne
+around her entire body pinning her arms to her sides so she wouldn't
+move them.
+
+Manguino grinned at Brook and gave Dearborne a quick look-over.
+
+"Hello, Brother!"  he said.
+
+"You bastard!" Brook spitted-out at him, in return.
+
+"In error as always, Brook.  I am the true son!"
+
+Manguino motioned his hand to the vicar Tohm and Tohm thrust his fist
+into Brook's stomach.
+
+Brook struggled for a moment until Tohm proceeded to bravely punch him,
+all-the-while the Angels holding him.  Brook then slumped over in
+unconsciousness.  Dearborne had turned her head away, through it all
+and then saw that he was limp on the floor.
+
+" _ And you my darling sister!"  Manguino said as he neared her.  "The
+small, barren field will finally be ploughed and seeded."
+
+The ArchBishop ripped her blouse from her body, her breasts were
+exposed to the air, and each man standing there saw their rosy purity.
+
+She began to scream out and she tried to wrench herself free from the
+guards who hugged her arms to her sides.
+
+Manguino grabbed each breast with his hands, clutching them until she
+hollered and cried in the utmost pain.  She kicked out but she couldn't
+hit anyone and Manguino let go of her.  From her pale nipples issued
+whitish droplets, mingled with blood, which slowly ran down her ribs.
+
+Manguino ordered two of his Angels to force her to the floor, and they
+each held her legs down while the first Angel continued to hug her arms
+to her sides.
+
+The great ArchBishop smiled at her.
+
+You may even like it, Lady Scullion!"
+
+He got on his knees then bent over.  He licked the white and bloodied
+droplets from each of her breasts and smiled at her when he finished.
+
+He pulled the dress from around her hips, taring her undergarments, all
+in one quick motion.
+
+"Very pretty!"  he said to her, and she heaved with her body to get
+loose but to no avail.
+
+"Ah, spirited!"  was the last thing that he said to her as he lifted
+his habit and moved closer.
+
+Brook opened his yes and tried to get up to help his beloved wife, but
+Tohm kicked his head back to the floor and Brook saw Manguino invade
+Dearborne in the moments before his lost consciousness.
+
+During the ArchBishop's blessing, Brook's gadgets whirred and clicked,
+but little regard was payed to the commotion.
+
+Dearborne trembled under her humiliation and was spared the finish when
+she, also, lost consciousness.
+
+Self-satisfied and drenched with sweat,and stained with his own orgasm,
+ Manguino looked up and smiled.  Only then did he realise that the
+great mechanical thing in front of him was aflame and smoking.  He
+shook his head when he finally noticed.
+
+"You have been an annoyance, my dearest brother!"
+
+
+On the mount, the Seer cried.
+
+There was nothing that he could do to prevent what was to be, but now
+it was his time to descend to Pomperaque. He stood on the highest
+overhanging cliff, spread his arms to the mild evening sky and threw
+himself off.
+
+"With the i-cam-raff I come -- by the will of God!"
+
+As he fell towards the city, he transformed into a beautiful and large
+swallow, and gently glided down to Pomperaque's towns-square.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TEN
+
+On the following day, word had gone to all the citizens of Phoride,
+calling them to the town's square to observe the execution of a high
+official, set for sundown.  The high official's name was not given.
+
+Most of the men and their male children had obeyed, what was a command
+to attend.  Knowing well, who the unnamed official was to be executed,
+all but a few of the Prominants had left their wives at home.
+
+That was a direct symbol of their disobedience towards the ArchBishop.
+
+Manguino had not regarded the petition sent to him asking for a pardon,
+for Brook, based on the Canon's Law and its declared punishment.
+
+No one believed the allegations towards Brook and his wife, but they
+could do nothing to help him. There were many monastic guards watching
+the whole city and they had made it very difficult for any large groups
+of men to meet and talk.
+
+
+At sundown, large numbers gathered in the square and waited.
+
+They all looked at the two spreader-arches set on a platform, about a
+meter high, to one side of a large podium and the entire square took on
+the appearance of a theatre stage.
+
+There was an uneasy silence there.  With all the men and boys crowded
+together, the silence had an almost unnatural aura to it.  Nothing was
+said.
+
+Soon, several messeigneurs and cardinals came out of nowhere with the
+ArchBishop.  Three walked on each side of him, as if guarding him from
+approach, and each man carried a club with spikes protruding from them,
+and Manguino carried a scroll of parchment enveloped by a black lash.
+
+Everyone in the crowd watched as the ArchBishop approached the podium
+and the others swung their clubs from side to side.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce watched the event also.  They hid themselves in the
+shadows of an alley and were able to see the entire square without
+revealing their presence.
+
+Manguino was apparelled in a festive garb as were his men, and when
+they reached the podium, they helped him up the steps to it.
+
+He grinned and spoke.
+
+"People of Phoride! -- We are all gathered together this day to rid the
+earth of two blasphemers who think themselves above the law."  he
+shrieked to them.
+
+Boyce was becoming anxious.  He wanted to leave but he knew that he
+couldn't.  What's more, Lloyd forced him to stay.  He knew that it was
+cruel to make a child witness his parents' execution but Lloyd hoped
+that Boyce would understand why Brook allowed it all to happen.
+
+"He's the one that should be killed."  Boyce said to Lloyd, trying to
+keep his tears from showing.  They listened to Manguino carry on.
+
+
+"The Almighty cannot allow any insubordination towards himself and the
+institution that he created for you all.  These two will be made an
+example of.  You all will see to what an end disobedience results!"
+
+He slid the black lash off from the scroll and unfurled it.
+
+"Bring the demons!"  ordered Manguino.
+
+Several of his men walked over to the platform and slid a door open and
+dragged Brook and Dearborne from it, and pulled them to the foot of the
+podium.  When before Manguino they forced Brook and Dearborne to their
+knees but they stood up immediately.  They would not kneel and after
+several times of their being forced to kneel, and their rejection to
+comply, they were permitted to stand.
+
+Manguino glared at them and gave them an Evil little grin.  He
+proceeded to read the scroll to the public.
+
+"The former-ruling Lord of Phoride, Brook Scullion-Blue, and his wife,
+the Lady Dearborne Scullion-Blue, have been found guilty of possession
+of ancient, sacrilegious manuscripts, and of pictures of Hell."  he
+paused for a moment then proceeded.  "In refusing blessing from men of
+the Almighty, and the performing of sorcery, leading to the subsequent
+death of the High-Cardinal Allen -- they are now charged with
+practising their subversions against the Canon Laws and the citizenry
+of Phoride."
+
+The people were quiet and most had tears in their eyes, and they all
+knew that everything that was said about their Lord Sovereign was not
+true.  Yet, they could do nothing for the square was too well-guarded.
+
+Brook gave a longing look to Dearborne.  Both knew what was upon them
+and they both
+
+knew that they could not change what was happening to them.
+
+They felt dead, already.  They were both beaten very badly.  They were
+scarred and bruised and Dearborne's body was violated by each and every
+coenobite, hurting her to the point where she could hardly walk, or
+even stand.
+
+Their faces were pale and drawn with blackish-blue rings circling their
+protruding eyes.  Both were dressed in torn and dirty course-woven
+sackcloth.
+
+Both were made to smell bad, having excrement, from Halls, thrown over
+them and large insects,  and vermin of every kind, crawled all over
+them.
+
+But now, after nearly twenty-four hours of severe torture, they could
+no longer scream out in horror of their state of being.
+
+"They pleaded innocent to all their charges.  In lack of their
+confession to these charges, they are found to be guilty and I now
+pronounce my sentence upon them!"  Manguino tried to keep from smiling
+to himself, his ego inflated with pride at the idea of judging his
+respected brother.
+
+Miel and Cassta were in the crowd.  They looked-on and tried to see
+some way to help them but there was absolutely no way to do so.  Too
+many guards were positioned in all the key places and no one could
+enter or leave the square now.
+
+"May God help them!"  Cassta exclaimed and Miel pulled on his shirt to
+quiet him.
+
+"Before I pronounce sentence, you may speak!"  Manguino told Brook.
+
+Brook looked up at him with huge blood-shot eyes, then turned to the
+people.  He lifted his bound hands into the air as a gesture of plea.
+
+"I do not accept the kneeling of one man to another, since no man is so
+deserving."  he cried out to the people, and circling above the square
+was a large swallow that was loudly singing.  He
+
+kneeled before Dearborne as he still spoke to the people in his loudest
+possible voice.  "But I do kneel before this dear woman because her
+love had made her brave and she accepted my woes onto herself."  he
+cried out and there was a gasp from those in the audience.
+
+He stood again and took a few steps forward.
+
+"Stay true, my friends of Phoride.  I now die but my lineage is not
+following me in death."
+
+There was a murmur in the audience and Manguino became nervous and
+started to look worried.
+
+The swallow that circled overhead was now on the ground behind the
+people; and Boyce watched with Lloyd, as it turned into a man, dressed
+in robes of chamois material.  They watched him move into the crowd.
+
+"Yes, my brother, Manguino.  If you truly were a god, you would know
+that there is, indeed, a progeny between my wife and I.  We have kept
+him from all the eyes of Pomperaque and he will soon avenge our death!
+You, Manguino -- you have committed the crime!"
+
+"Enough!"  Manguino screamed out an order, aimed at Brook.
+
+"Burn in Hell, Devil incarnate!"  Manguino began to enter into a fit
+when he heard this from Brook.  The people were also disturbed by it.
+
+Most of the people that were in the crowd didn't know what this Devil
+was, but those that did know explained that it was the name of a
+legendary Being who was the ultimate Evil, and was actually Evil itself.
+
+Manguino was shocked to realise that so many knew of Devil.  That was
+forbidden knowledge and it wasn't taught at the Blaisaman.  'How?', he
+wondered?
+
+He motioned with his hand at Brook and several of the guards grabbed
+him and Dearborne
+
+and spread both out, on the spreader-arches, making the wrists-bonds
+tight to the point of drawing blood from them.
+
+Boyce began to tear, as Lloyd held to his arms.
+
+"Even now your father is instilling doubt in the Phoridene's minds
+about the ArchBishop!  Your uncle will be obsessed with fright for a
+long time!"
+
+Suddenly from behind Lloyd came a hand and a hiss of air.  He turned
+around quickly, ready to defend his and Boyce's life, if need be, and
+saw that it was Empal.
+
+"It's dangerous to stay here any longer, my friends!"  Empal said to
+them.
+
+"A moment!" demanded Boyce and Lloyd nodded in agreement.
+
+"Alright, but if I could find you here, anyone can!"
+
+They understood but they, nevertheless, stayed longer.
+
+Although the Angels were brutal with Brook he continued to yell to the
+crowd.
+
+"Look at your Almighty now, my people.  See him squirm in his
+discomfort.  See that he is only a man, and nothing more.  Do not
+submit to his will.  Unite against him or he will destroy you!"  Brook
+struggled as he yelled, shaking the entire arch to which he was tied.
+
+"Enough!" screamed Manguino, hoarsely.  "You have said enough ... and
+that is enough from you!"  his incoherency weakened his control.
+
+He raised his hands to them and the Angels ripped the stinking
+sackcloth from their victims' bodies and began to bludgeon them.
+
+The mob's voices died down and all were dumbfounded, as they beheld the
+torture.
+
+"Prepare execution!"  cried Manguino.  "For their transgressions of
+Canon Laws, I now pronounce the only sentence possible on these two --
+DEATH TO THESE SINNERS!"  he yelled.
+
+
+The crowd was mute.  They watched Brook's and Dearborne's naked bodies
+writhe and convulse in pain as they bled from huge wounds made on their
+bodies by the Angels' studded gauntlets and the messeigneur's spiked
+clubs.
+
+There were a few women within the audience who fainted from what they
+saw and many had slowly begun to walk away.  They refused to watch
+their best and most beloved leader slain by someone whom they didn't
+understand, or like very much.
+
+"Remember this day, people of Phoride."  Brook forced himself to say as
+he began to lose his breath, then with his last ounce of strength he
+blessed them all.  "May the True Living God have mercy on you all!"
+
+He stopped struggling from his stretched out bondage and watched
+Manguino raise his hand, then drop it.
+
+The Angels had raised their electrophoric weapons and when Manguino
+dropped his hand, an eternal twang echoed throughout the land.  Brook's
+and Dearborne's bodies trembled and shook violently then, in a short
+order, just hung there swinging back and forth.
+
+"Quickly, now.  We must leave!"  urged Empal and they finally made
+their way across town, heading north to the Joenine Forest where Empal
+had left his Kenttitian Eagle.
+
+Manguino stayed at the podium for a while and gloated over the dead
+bodies of his rival brother and his lovely wife.  With him were several
+of the guards and messeigneurs, waiting to escort him back to the
+cathedral.
+
+Soon, a large figure approached him and began to speak to him.
+
+"I had foreseen this event!"  said the man.
+
+Manguino looked over at the man and he became pale, as if he just died.
+
+
+"Jessuum Benitar!" exclaimed Manguino.  "Why are you here, I haven't
+seen you since ... since Smith's death."
+
+"My mourning for your father is over.  I now mourn for Brook."
+Manguino climbed down from the podium and cautiously and shyly
+approached him.  Jessuum continued.  "What had occurred here today, my
+little man, will never be forgotten.  You have done something that will
+never leave you, and I see the eventuality and inevitability of
+vengeance."
+
+The ArchBishop began to fall over his words but then slowly said what
+was on his mind.
+
+"Then tell me, Seer, you are prophetic -- who and where is Brook's
+offspring?"  Manguino waited eagerly for Jessuum's reply.
+
+"I cannot tell you directly and you know this.  All I can do is dream
+and you must decide what it means to you."  he said.
+
+"Tell me, then!"  he demanded from Jessuum and he tipped his head
+showing that would consent to an answer.  He began to chant.
+
+                "There is a man on a trek to a place
+                 Where the sky is touched by
+                 A legendary grace.
+                 There the little one learns to face
+                 His long road back, uniting the world
+                 In its promised Peace!"
+
+
+Jessuum broke from his stare and slowly turned, and looked back at the
+Almighty ArchBishop.
+
+"That's all for now, I must depart!"  he told Manguino then began to
+walk away.
+
+"Wait!"  squealed the ArchBishop.  "Why do you leave?"
+
+"Patience is a quality that you are not endowed with.  How unfortunate!
+ I will be near, when I am needed!"
+
+Jessuum walked away from the ArchBishop headed for no place in
+particular.
+
+
+MIDDLE:  THE  PROMISE,  FULFILLED
+
+CHAPTER ELEVEN
+
+The deaths of Brook and Dearborne had not meant the death of the
+world, or even that of Pomperaque.  Life endured as it was seemingly
+meant to, and the evil that lived in their time had carried on, as
+well.
+
+There came a frightening peace in Pomperaque, as there was a
+frightening quite, since no forms of dissention or negative thought was
+permitted under Manguino's own amendments to the Canon's Laws.
+
+Public gatherings of men (as were private meetings), were not wholly
+forbidden, but the numbers of men that gathered was limited to no more
+than four at a time -- unless there was a city conference called for
+meeting, in the town's square, by the ArchBishop's own request.
+
+Even the Phoridene Council was forbidden to convene without the
+presence of the ArchBishop Manguino, or a tribunal of Cardinals
+representing him.
+
+The brisk activities of livelihood that had once occupied most of the
+morning hours began to fade away and break down in pattern and even
+the children that once played in the streets around their parents'
+stalls and kiosks, no longer did so in their usual fervour.
+
+Very few people carried smiles as they once did, in the days prior to
+their best and most beloved sovereign's execution.
+
+The smiles that the people kept from their faces had equalled that hate
+and distrust that they carried in their hearts for their great
+Almighty, ArchBishop Manguino.
+
+There was a very odd change in the lifestyles and habits of the people,
+not only in the city of Pomperaque but throughout the entire great
+states of Phoride, as well.  The entire population had become somewhat
+indolent, apparently not caring for what happened to them from day to
+day.  The whole city of Pomperaque walked about the streets in a glazed
+daze, with blank faces and empty hearts as if they were in a purgatory
+of sorts.
+
+Whatever there was to Pomperaque's night life, was now gone and
+forgotten and even the rains that were once eagerly awaited throughout
+the year, were left to come when they came, and the people kept
+themselves from partaking of it when it happened.  Even harlots and
+satyrs, of which were once many in the city, had let their passions
+leave them.
+
+With all those immoralities that had carried on during Brook's rule,
+those acts of perversion and indecencies that he tried so hard to curb
+his people from delving into, were now halted by themselves as if in
+honour for the deaths of their two great and courageous martyrs.
+
+Manguino did not understand what was happening to the people of Phoride.
+
+"They're allowed to do what they please, to whom and with whom they
+please, and even how they please, and yet why don't they do anything
+but walk around as if they are all without spirit?"
+
+Manguino asked that question of each coenobite at Halls, from the
+Cardinals that ranked just
+
+beneath him, to the novices and children training in the monastery.  No
+answer was given to him and no speculations were entered into.
+
+In the first several years following Brook and Dearborne's execution,
+many of the city's Prominants and even some of the peasantry, secretly
+sent their female children to some of the larger cities to the north,
+away from the watchful, lusty eyes of their god.
+
+As if in desperation to produce his own line of gods, his own
+offspring, Manguino had brought to him young girls and women to play
+favourites to him, and to bare his holy children.
+
+He had proclaimed though a decree that when upon entering the age of
+ten, all virgin girls, to the age of twenty-one, would be brought to
+Halls to be trained by his followers in the ways of life.
+
+While as the first years passed, the females between these ages that
+were brought to Halls, had been personally attended to by Manguino.
+
+His lust for the flesh of young women soon became weak and his acts
+were only made on the women purely to satisfy his desire of producing
+from them his offspring.  Yet, with the dozens of women that he had
+made pregnant not one of the children were free from some kind of
+degenerate deformities -- much like that of his first offspring, now in
+his twenties.
+
+Through the first days and weeks of birth many of the children died on
+their own, and some of the women, seeing the monstrosities that they
+bore from the ArchBishop, had been shocked into eerie cataleptic states
+of being.
+
+Manguino could not accept the horrible children coming from him and he
+cried to his physicians to cure him from what he believed was certainly
+a curse put on him by Brook; but when they could find nothing at fault
+with either him or the women that he had copulated with, he had the
+remainder of his children, with the women that bore them, burned alive
+at the city's incinerators.
+
+
+However, Manguino's mind strained even at this subtle act, for not a
+scream nor even a gag was heard to exude from any one of those that
+were slaughtered.
+
+Manguino turned to being ill and he spent the major part of the next
+several years in a state of listlessness.
+
+He had sent some of his Cardinals to various parts of the continent to
+find and bring back for him beautiful and strong females, no matter
+from what race they were taken.  Manguino had believed that there had
+to be at least one female, amongst the human-like species inhabiting
+the northern continent, capable of producing normal and strong children.
+
+He had placed in charge of this mission his regular hunter in these
+sorts of endeavours; the Nasino, Cardinal Levy.  In his silent Nasino
+manner he compiled a force of coenobites to do their god's bidding and
+they spread over the continent collecting females and teaching
+Manguino's ways, as well.
+
+By the end of the following year, hundreds of human-like females and
+true human women were herded like cattle to Halls Cathedral, by only
+half the force sent out to collect them.
+
+Some of the women were bought by these coenobites but most were
+snatched from wherever they could be found.  Those not suiting the
+ArchBishop's specification were made to indulge those who had found
+them, then they were discarded or disposed of, depending on what degree
+of pleasure the hunters had experienced with them.
+
+Within the first weeks, nearly seven score females were brought back to
+Halls and the ArchbIshop immediately began administering his blessings
+to those who were most to his liking.  To his amazement, some became
+pregnant, came to full term and gave birth within several weeks while
+other appeared to have a infinite gestation, until they also gave
+birth.  Finally, all those that the
+
+ArchBishop bedded had given birth, with the same horrid results -- and
+the same end became of them.
+
+When Manguino desired to turn again to young girls from the city, there
+were very few to be taken.  The choice were married-off by their
+kinsmen early in their lives and only the homely and very ugly
+remained.  Those were the ones that were not wanted by any man; some
+not even during the season of the rain.
+
+Manguino, feeling that he knew the nature of the imaginary curse that
+he thought was put on him by Brook, took those ugly girls and women and
+set himself ready to have them give themselves to him.
+
+One day, there came to the ArchBishop the most unsightly of these
+wretched-looking women.  She was squat and balding.  Her body was
+covered with thick black hair, similar to the hair of the Teniqu�s.
+She had yellow irises and a runny pustulated mouth, and thick stringy
+mucus constantly flowed from her huge nostrils.
+
+Her laugh ran course through men's ears and the town thought of this
+woman as a witch because of her formidable looks.
+
+There wasn't a single piece of skin on her body that was clear from
+open sores, and yet she was of the prize of looks from the ugliest of
+women in Phoride.
+
+However, this woman (if one chose to call such a hideous rind, by that
+word), had one quality that most all of the others that the ArchBishop
+bedded had lacked.  She was clever.  She made herself seem worldly to
+Manguino, the man whom she had secretly loved for so many years.
+
+When Eckma was summoned to Manguino he could hardly look at her without
+wincing and she didn't hesitate preparing herself to have her hour of
+delight with him.
+
+
+She took off her rags and stood before him squeezing parts of her body
+attempting to excite him and growing in excitement herself.
+
+Manguino was surprised that she was so eager and willing to let him in
+and he thought, that maybe a woman's willingness was the key to
+ensuring him healthy offspring.  He readied himself to invade her body,
+for the little that he thought it worthy.  Then, Eckma refused to let
+him come in onto her and he could not understand this.
+
+Now, as it was that Eckma was very clever, she tried not to anger her
+beloved Manguino and she sat him down on the bed near her and caressed
+some of his parts while she explained why she refused him so suddenly.
+
+"I have been a virgin all my twenty-eight years, my dearest
+ArchBishop."  she said to Manguino.  "I had always wanted children but
+what I wanted more was ... you!"
+
+Manguino looked at her and felt a disgust that he could not shrug, but
+her gentle caresses, which made him grow with excited impatience
+soothed him, as well.
+
+"What do you mean by that?"  he demanded and as she smiled a creamy
+rheum flowed from her nostrils to the corners of her mouth.
+
+"I had loved you since I was a little girl, and I wished and prayed
+that some day I would have the pleasure, and the honour, of being
+blessed by you.  But I believed that was all just a foolish dream."
+she said and she smiled again, with a clear tear issuing from her eyes.
+ "I had also dreamed of being wed to you, my true love."  she added.
+
+He grew to completion and she continued to caress him and he felt a
+powerful but uncomfortable urge to invade her.  He was becoming sure
+that the woman's willingness was the key
+to his product of normal progeny, but when he pushed her down on the
+bed, and was just on the
+
+verge of having her, she pushed him off from herself.
+
+"Steady woman, you can't refuse me!"  blurted Manguino as he dripped
+onto the covers by her hand.
+
+"I do not refuse you, me hoped-for love, but welcome your all into me
+-- with an open heart -- but I would hope to suggest to you one thought
+I had dreamed an age ago!"  she said.
+
+"What thought, woman?"  he demanded of her, becoming frustrated and
+quickly becoming limp.
+
+"The dream had shown me that you could not have the offspring of your
+heart's desire;  and then there was me, with you as the objective of
+love, to my own heart's desire, calling me to your bed.  But, in my
+dream I saw that you had wed me.  With the union between us and my own
+desires towards you, we produced many children of godly quality!"  she
+looked up at him as he turned away from her to wipe himself, and she
+cried.
+
+"What now, Eckma?" asked Manguino in a voice oddly resembling a distant
+compassion, as never before heard coming from his lips.
+
+"I know that a marriage with you could never be.  Forgive me for even
+thinking such a thing."  she said and looked at him, right into his
+eyes.  "You may do with me to your pleasure."
+
+Manguino stood there for a moment and looked at her lying on the bed,
+her eyes closed and her large legs lying slightly apart.
+
+He thought, what an odd feeling it was to have a living human woman
+love him so.  He imagined what a love from a beauty would be like and
+he envied his now dead brother, because of his wife, and he envied all
+the wedded couples in the whole world.
+
+He had never given consideration to such a union, but he thought, maybe
+it is time?  Maybe
+
+that is what was necessary, for him, to have proper children?
+
+Manguino went over to his chamber doors and pulled a small rod out of
+the wall, summoning a servant to attend to him, and then he went over
+to Eckma and took her naked cankerous body into his arms and kissed her
+mouth, smearing some of her pus onto his own lips.
+
+"You will be my wife, Eckma and I will love you, and make love to you,
+with more intense passion than I have ever, with anyone."
+
+Soon, an attendant knocked on the door and Manguino ordered him to
+enter.  When the servant saw his god lying by that unearthly ugliness
+and passionately caressing her, he very nearly fell faint but he looked
+to the floor and waited to be ordered.
+
+"Seek Cardinals Levy, Tohm and Jordas and bid them prepare the chapel
+for my wedding, and have the Rogjans announce this from the city
+spires!"
+
+The servant couldn't say a thing.  He just nodded then backed out
+through the doors, closing them after him.
+
+Immediately, he ran to the dispensary and vomited violently into a duct
+there, and Polis, the physician, gave to him a drink of medicine that
+stopped the lad's affliction.  He explained to Polis about Manguino's
+strange taste, and his even stranger request, then he went off and
+rounded up the three Cardinals; conveying the message and telling them
+who the bride was to be.
+
+"The Almighty had made his choice.  Let us abide with his requests!"
+suggested Cardinal Tohm, and they went to prepare for the ceremony.
+
+Throughout the afternoon and evening the Rogjans sang out the news to
+Pomperaque, and for the first time in years, since the executions of
+Brook and Dearborne, did the people laugh and rejoice for their
+Almighty ArchBishop -- and his misfortune.
+
+
+Manguino was pleased and happy to see his beloved people having a good
+time and enjoying themselves, even though he had no idea that the
+celebrants were really mocking him.
+
+At the wedding, a few of the Cardinals and others that were there could
+look upon the bride as she and Manguino emerged from their wed-eve
+initiation chamber.
+
+Cardinal Tohm was the ArchBishop's second during the ceremony, and
+Cardinal Jordas had performed the ceremony of unity.  The ceremony was
+the Bonds, performed to consecrate the union of two in marriage.  The
+couple was fused together as one entity for all of eternity, by promise
+of eternal love and full allowance to life together, regardless of
+hardships that may possibly happen between them.
+
+Now Eckma knew she was safe from death, no matter if she had children,
+and regardless of their appearance.
+
+The bond between them; the cutting of wrists and the joining of them
+through the drinking of each other's blood, assured the cunning female
+that her life was her's and that she was Manguino's, forever.
+
+At the completion of the wedding ceremony, this one where the bride and
+groom were married in their naked flesh, the men of  Halls were to pay
+their tribute and honour to the bride by the kissing of her genitalia.
+
+Although Polis gave all those attending a potion of medicine to keep
+their stomachs calm, most of the Cardinals still felt gravely ill
+whilst in Eckma's presence.
+
+All the novices, vicars and Cardinals that passed by the wedded couple
+bowed down, on bent knee, before their new god's consort.  All kissed
+the sagging brownish flesh that dangled from between Eckma's legs, in
+a single and complete sweeping motion.  And even in this brevity, a
+vast portion of them quickly ran out of the wedding hall to take full
+account of their week's food intake.  Only Cardinal Tohm summoned
+enough nerve and will to take Eckma about her hips in a sustained
+embraced. He kissed the lips of her genitalia until a small split
+formed in one of her many scabs, letting a thin brownish fluid dampen
+his mouth, chin and eventually to soak his beard.  Some of the
+stinking pus found its way into his mouth and Tohm, obviously and
+ceremoniously, swallowed it in full.
+
+"You truly were trained well by Cardinal Allen, my dear Tohm!"
+Manguino whispered to him, then kissed him on the mouth.
+
+The wedded couple were carried to their marriage bed, prepared with
+sweet smelling linen and the entire room was decorated with many
+pleasant flowers.
+
+When they were left alone, Eckma produced a good sized vile from her
+vagina and she held it up for Manguino to see.
+
+"What is that, my darling?"  asked Manguino.
+
+"It is a small bottle of rain water."  she answered.  "If captured in
+glass, the water of the rain retains its potency."
+
+"Why do we need that?  Put it away!"  he ordered but she refused.
+
+"Your promise of intense love to me must be aided by this, my love.  I
+know I am ugly and this will help the both of us, immeasurably."  she
+said.
+
+Manguino finally nodded, and after entering her body, she opened the
+vial and poured the contents over both their genitals.
+
+Very little was seen of the newly wedded couple over the next couple of
+weeks.  They stayed in their wedding chamber and consummated their
+promise.
+
+
+The people of Pomperaque returned to their blank and lifeless style of
+living, knowing well that their ArchBishop Manguino had indeed found
+his true love.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWELVE
+
+The years passed after the fateful executions in Pomperaque.
+
+The years also passed for Boyce and Lloyd, studying the ancient ways in
+the Alugean library.
+
+Since Besten was close by, Lloyd had at intervals gone there to see his
+family and obtain some news of events in the city of Pomperaque.
+
+The first years were depressing for the young Boyce, trying to grow up
+without his real father and terribly missing the kindness, and love,
+from his beautiful mother, and at times, turning frustrated in not
+having others of his age to play with, and little girls to pretend
+being in love with.
+
+Then it happened, that after several years of stay at Alugean, Boyce
+grew to manhood, possessing a quick mind and agile body, trained to
+full perfection by the guidance of his mentor and friend, Lloyd
+Bartlett.
+
+When Boyce was nearing his eighteenth year and he knew his studies of
+the past, as-well-as
+
+remembering his promise to Brook, and his manly body could hold up
+against the sharpest blows delivered by Lloyd, Lloyd took him to his
+father in Besten to meet his father and mother, Harvard and Rae
+Bartlett.
+
+Harvard was pleased, beyond words, to meet Brook Scullion-Blue's only
+son and he treated him in the manner much befitting a King.
+
+Several months after their acquaintance, Boyce trusted Harvard enough
+to tell him that the ArchBishop was really his uncle; Brook's brother.
+This news, however, didn't disturb Harvard Bartlett because he divulged
+to Boyce, his own knowledge about his own ancestral relationship to the
+ArchBishop and indeed to Boyce himself.
+
+"We are much like cousins far removed, yet not removed so far as to
+keep me content."  Harvard told Boyce.  "I am the fifth generation
+descendant of Daphne Jones, daughter of Richal�, son of Hosea Jones.  I
+am from a line of the male twin.  Your family of Carter, is on the
+other hand, from the line of the daughter twin, Dioneza.  We are
+related, so as to say, in common knowledge and theory about our
+ancestral line."  Harvard took a large rolled piece of animal skin and
+spread it out before Boyce to let him see a genealogy of their common
+family roots.
+
+"I see the broken line of my father.  He is not a true Blue
+descendant."  said Boyce but not without pride.
+
+"Yes, we know that he was a foundling and we also know who his real
+parents are."  Harvard told Boyce.
+
+Boyce was amazed and he smiled, eagerly waiting to hear more.
+
+"My son conveyed to me a story told to him about your father, and in
+fact it was told to him by your father.  He said, that your father was
+found by a stream swaddled and left in a skull of a lion."
+
+"Yes, that is so, my Lord Bartlett!"  Boyce fervently confirmed.
+
+"From the line of Wind Jones, daughter of Richal�, son of Hosea Jones;
+we have her forth generation great grandson, Guiness with his wife
+Joanna, pursued by Elkinii plains slave-traders.  Having given birth to
+a son, they continued to run through the Virgin Mountains trying to
+escape the slaver.  Knowing that they would be caught, they wrapped the
+child in the sackcloth of Joanna's apron and hid him by a river in a
+lion's skull, where Smith soon found it while his own wife was in heavy
+labour baring a child.  Beside their own son Manguino, the adopted
+Brook (giving him such a name as he was found), was raised by them as
+their own."  Harvard finished the account, according to his knowledge
+of it and eyed Boyce for a moment, admiring how the young man was
+absorbing everything that was being said to him.
+
+"Is that why my father was not evil?"  asked Boyce.
+
+"Many of us believe so."  confirmed Harvard then continued. "The evil
+seed befell your uncle, the ArchBishop Manguino through his
+grandfather Father's incest with Lucaea.  As you had studied alone in
+Alugean so did Carter study, and then he left the great library to
+learn from the world.  He reached the land of BanGor, to the east,
+that was and in ruled by a cult of high-priestesses that are directly
+descended from Anna, the first wife of Hosea Jones (yet not from
+Hosea's own loins).  Carter had fallen into relations with the great
+granddaughter of Anna and their product was Smith, your father's
+father.  Anna's evil seed was passed through Smith to Manguino.  As
+Anna and Hosea's first son Cano turned evil, into being the Canon
+Di'Vaticanus, so did Manguino become the ArchBishop!"
+
+The fascinating story made Boyce wonder if the old times with Hosea
+Jones were any different than the times now, since he knew more about
+the Twentieth Century history than he knew about his own.  But now
+from what Harvard had told him, he better knew who he was and declared
+that he was ready to prepare for his return to Pomperaque.
+
+Within the next several years, from 3055 C.E. to the end of 3058 C.E.,
+the entire northern continent joined under an idea of unity and love.
+Under the leadership and guidance of Harvard Bartlett, Lloyd and Boyce
+became figure-heads of the community.  They increased the prosperity in
+the land two-fold over a period of three short years and they built up
+a fighting army as powerful as any that had ever fought on the earth.
+
+Soon, the northern nations and dominions were uniting into one power
+that came to be called the Northern United Alignment.  It was a union
+of free states consisting of Besten, Virune, Krolalin and several
+smaller city states (Netheda, Ohigh and Elkinii), and from these united
+areas came an army of one million strong, on land, one hundred thousand
+strong, on sea and seven thousand strong, in the air.  Each of the
+major united nations controlled their own special force of power.
+Virune, under the leadership of Empal, trained and took command of the
+air using the giant eagles that they had learned to domesticate.
+Krolalin trained their land army to use whatever weapons were available
+to their utmost potential, as well as developing a land cavalry that
+was twenty thousand strong.   And there was Besten, a sea-faring people
+who adapted easily to naval warfare with a force numbering one hundred
+thousand men.
+
+Bestenese scientists were let into Alugean to search the library
+contents for plans on which to build weapons, like those used by the
+ArchBishop's monastic guards.  With much difficulty and lack of proper
+equipment and resources, the developments were made but they never
+seemed to progress very quickly.
+
+
+For the generals and leaders, suits of rubber, leather and gold
+plating served as armour protection against electrophoric and laser
+shock.  Although not superior in strength to hold up against constant
+jolting, they at least served the person to live while in their
+retreat, if hit.
+
+Monastic spy activity in the north warned the ArchBishop Manguino that
+an army was being formed that could potentially be used gainst him.  It
+was an accurate speculation seeing that the spies didn't really know
+what was being planned or even who was doing the planning.
+
+On the first word of such a mounting of forces and arms, Manguino
+demanded that an army be compiled for him and every eligible male from
+fifteen to fifty was ordered into training, for war, while the women
+between twenty and thirty were formed into separate fighting forces.
+Even the ladies from the Prominants took over working then men's jobs,
+since they were the only ones to be permitted to stay at home.
+
+After two years of nothing happening in the manner of war, threats or
+anything else of great aggressive significance, those of the Prominent
+class were allowed back to their social life-styles while the rest were
+coerced into staying in the forces.
+
+Those Prominants who were sympathetic to Manguino's rule, for whatever
+self-centred reason, stayed on as his generals.  They were even so
+powerful as to order all those at Halls, to do their bidding;  all
+those at Halls except for Manguino.
+
+With the final preparations taking place with the Northern United
+Alignment, ambassadors were sent to the hostile states and lands
+between Besten and Phoride, and there asked them to follow them to
+freely pass through without harassment or troubles.
+
+Agreements were signed with all these states including the ones that
+were thought to be the most difficult; Palatka, Sedar, Nolunge and
+Flinnd.
+
+
+The time was at hand when the two men would leave on their long journey
+back to Pomperaque.  Although the signed agreement of passage was to
+make the route shorter for the two men, the distance was still great
+and would require many days of travel.
+
+
+CHAPTER  THIRTEEN
+
+In Pomperaque, several years had passed since Manguino's marriage to
+Eckma and although they had indeed produced children of normal looks
+and awareness, they never lived passed a couple of months.
+
+Since the marriage, Manguino hardly ever involved his mind with the
+affairs of Halls, or of Phoride.
+
+During the rains, very large glass tubs of water were collected then
+taken to Manguino's bed chamber and poured into a huge glass pool, and
+there the ArchBishop indulged in violent sex relations with Eckma, to
+the point of drawing blood from one another.
+
+In the few years after their marriage, the physician Polis had
+discovered that Manguino suffered from a venereal cancer and there was
+a fear of death, but Manguino told Polis to search for the answer in
+Brook's machines.
+
+"My cure lies somewhere within those gadgets, Polis!  If you value your
+own life, find it!"
+
+Manguino threatened him.
+
+Polis spent entire days going through the mechanism in his search for
+the answer and then he found something.  It was a formula to retard
+aging.  He wondered if it would cure his master and thus took it to him.
+
+Lacking trust, Manguino ordered the injection to be given to Polis
+first and then to Eckma.
+
+The aged Polis's hair took on its once younger hue of auburn and Eckma
+lost her open sores and rheumatic nose, as well as gaining hair on her
+head while losing it on her body.
+
+Seeing that Eckma now looked like a normal, yet still fat woman, and
+even somewhat appealing, he had several shots given to him every day
+until Polis devised a capsulate form of taking the drug.
+
+With the new found youth and beauty, in himself and Eckma, Manguino
+indulged in the pleasures of the flesh with his wife, which now was
+indeed much more pleasurable for him.
+
+Eckma became pregnant again, and Manguino was certain that his child
+would be the ultimate, due to the drug that both of them were taking.
+
+Minding the rule of the state and church, was the Cardinal Allen's
+eldest son.  He, too, was now a Cardinal.  His name was Orren and he
+was  the child born to Allen, and some forgotten mother, around 3034
+C.E.
+
+Now he was twenty-five and he managed the kingdom for Manguino, while
+Manguino indulged in his debauchery with Eckma, and also with others of
+both sexes.
+
+Orren took over for the deceased Cardinal Tohm who had gone to visit
+the barbaric Palatkans, the lepers, to entice them to join Phoride as
+an advance army in case there was an attack from the north.  With
+their agreement to do so, they ate him, so bonding the contract with
+Pomperaque.
+
+As in many times before, in periods of crisis and great tension,
+Jessuum Benitar appeared in Pomperaque to give its ruler a word of
+foreseen troubles.
+
+Jessuum had not approved of the ArchBishop, of what he was, or what he
+had become, but it was his duty to give warning to those rulers of
+Phoride, whether they were good or evil, and all prophecies were given
+in dream parables and these frustrated Manguino.
+
+In the eighth month of Eckma's pregnancy, she and Manguino still
+carried on in the glass pool of rain water and since the great
+ArchBishop wanted to converse and play at the same time, he summoned
+Jessuum to his chamber.
+
+Jessuum stood majestically over the pool of water, keeping his chamois
+robes from being fouled by the water, while watching the crazed
+ArchBishop fornicating with his now better than homely wife.
+
+The sight was the most disgusting abomination to this ancient and noble
+man, who could see into the future.
+
+"I must leave soon, Manguino.  I must go from this place -- so would
+you please consent to take it out and speak with me?"  asked Jessuum.
+
+"I will finish soon my trusted Seer.  Have food and drink, and I will
+be with you soon."  answered Manguino paying little attention to where
+Jessuum was.
+
+"I have not eaten for a fortnight and I will not eat, nor drink, till I
+leave here.  I cannot foul my body or my spirit by the uncleanness
+of this place.  I shall wait for you in the chapel for one hour -- but
+no more!  It will be your own choice whether or not you hear what will
+be."  said Jessuum then turned and was gone.
+
+
+Uneasy, the water no longer had an affect on Manguino and so he climbed
+out of the pool and put on a surplice and headed down to the chapel,
+leaving a trail of water behind him while Eckma circled the pool and
+drank some of the scum from the surface of the water.
+
+When Manguino reached the chapel, there was a line of monks parading
+through the halls and chanting a hymn exhorting the spirits of the
+passed dead monastic men.
+
+He came upon Jessuum Benitar looking straight into a small group of
+young boys who were sternly placed on their knees for prayers,
+undoubtedly as a disciplinary action by some higher cleric teacher.
+
+"What have you to say to me, Seer?"  demanded Manguino.
+
+"Don't speak to me in such a tone, Manguino.  In a spit you could be no
+more and there is no one who would grieve."  Jessuum responded.  "You
+have been given, and you have taken, many wonderful things that you
+have never given thanks for, to the one true, Living God."
+
+"If you were not the Seer for me, for my father and his father, I would
+not permit you to speak so in my cathedral."  stated Manguino in an
+angered voice and Jessuum grinned.
+
+"Do you feel better, now that you have made a threat -- so petty, as
+it was?"  Jessuum put Manguino in his place and gave him the feeling
+of being a child.  "I do not like you, Manguino and I do not approve
+of that for which you stand.  I despise your crude manners and even
+cruder methods."  Jessuum backed away from the stench of the
+ArchBishop's body; the stench that was caused by the over-use of the
+same filthy rain water.  Jessuum resumed.  "Should the people of this
+great land lose their fear of you, my son, no one would be here when
+you needed them, to fight for your precious stick of flesh.  Not a
+single citizen would kneel to kiss your fruit for the redemption of
+their sins."
+
+
+"What have you to say for our tomorrow, Seer?  You tire me with this
+worthless palaver about my indulgence."  ordered Manguino, scratching
+at his manhood.
+
+"Very well, impatient god of these ignorant people.  This is the final
+time that you shall hear words from my dreams, given to you.  Hear this
+and hear it only once, and remember!  Commit it to paper if you will
+but remember it.  Tell the court of the Prominants, if you will, but
+never ask it to be repeated to you, for on that day when that request
+is done, so should it be the end of your rule in Pomperaque."
+Jessuum's eyes glowed with the fire of wisdom and the light of
+knowledge.  His brow poured forth an anxious sweat while Manguino stood
+by smiling with less than no faith in what he was told -- even if he
+cared to think of the meaning behind it.
+
+                "Four great elements, ride on high
+                 Come from the greatest fears inside.
+                 All suspicions end with feast
+                 Of gilded skins and threaded beads.
+                 Foul water there is all to drink
+                 And wine does burn with chocking stink,
+                 Of dying corpses bleeding free
+                 And refuge cut off, from the sea.
+                 And where to run with hearts that tare
+                 Leave not your sight, from the air.
+                 Black feathers from his shoulders peer
+                 As promised by that Holy Seer,
+                 Shall come and take his place that day
+                 And rule the city where he once did play.
+                 The great one falls in the bloodied sand
+                 And is soon forgotten in the land.
+                 The bones of his body are never found
+                 But his breathing body yet is sound."
+
+
+Manguino stared at Jessuum for a moment then sneered.
+
+"What do I make of that?  It was quick and as senseless as all your
+other dreamy riddles.  How could my fore-fathers trust you?"
+
+"Do you remember those words, Manguino?"  Jessuum asked him.
+
+"Yes, but what should I care?"  Manguino asked.
+
+"Then ... repeat it to me -- once ... if you can!"  demanded the great
+Seer and Manguino did indeed repeat every word to no great avail of
+knowing their meaning.
+
+"You play alone, now, Manguino!"  said Jessuum and he bound out of the
+chapel.
+
+Manguino ran after him to question him on the meaning but Jessuum
+Benitar was gone.
+
+Manguino, in a maniacal craze ran about the teaching rooms and ordered
+the scribe-vicars to make copies of the words, and he recited the
+puzzling riddle until he found every word copied onto paper, then he
+returned to his bed chamber and saw Polis give to Eckma a capsule of
+the age retardant drug, and she drank it down with the water from the
+pool in which she was still wading.
+
+
+BIPARTITE: JOURNEY BACK TO POMPERAQUE
+
+CHAPTER  FOURTEEN
+
+3058 C.E. commenced with the onset of those in Besten who were in the
+final throws of preparation for the invasion of Pomperaque.
+
+Throughout the year, while the plans for invasion were being finalized,
+Harvard Bartlett ordered the armies into a building programme, to make
+Besten and the other major cities in the alignment larger and more
+beautiful than imaginable.
+
+The men in the armies welcomed the building programme that Harvard had
+engaged them to do.  They didn't want to feel the anxiety and the
+excitement of war until the war itself was fought.  So the men, as they
+created great architectural masterpieces, left their worries of death
+while they welded their concentrations on this new work.
+
+In the days, weeks and months that passed, Besten and many other cities
+grew to a majesty, remembered only from the clouded, nightmarish dreams
+of the late Twentieth Century.
+
+The northern cities became the jewels of the continent, and from all
+around the continent, every type of human went to them to purpose trade
+and alliance, and many treaties were entered into and signed by the
+respective parties involved.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce discussed, with Harvard, the proposed routes that they
+had some choice on which to use, on their way back to Phoride and
+Pomperaque.
+
+Boyce was eager to return and take what was his, and Lloyd also felt
+that now would be the best time since the ArchBishop had also begun a
+great building programme in Pomperaque, soon after Besten commenced
+with their's.
+
+In Pomperaque, Manguino's spies described to him that Harvard
+Bartlett's army was being used to build up the cities, and that they
+grew at a surprising rate.
+
+On the advice from his wife Eckma and several of the noble Cardinals,
+Manguino thought that the idea of an army building force was brilliant,
+and he thought that Besten had engaged itself in such a programme only
+to rise above Pomperaque, as an economic power.
+
+He set Phoride's entire army to work in building the city into one
+great mass of moving machinery and light.
+
+Using the knowledge available in the gadgets that had once belonged to
+Brook, towering buildings were built and were powered by currents of
+energy -- electricity.
+
+Light illuminated the evenings in the city of Pomperaque from tall
+glass posts that were filled with conductive gases that glowed when
+energy was passed through them, and the citizens travelled around in
+little propelled carts with wheels that were set upon endless tubes of
+steel that also utilized the same electrical forces.
+
+The city's incinerators were converted to produce the power since the
+furnaces constantly
+
+burned some kind of waste material throughout the entire day and night,
+and huge storage batteries, such as those in the Blue Mansion, were
+built to preserve energy for emergency use.
+
+Pomperaque grew into a grandeur never before seen by those living
+there, and it hardly took a year to complete.
+
+The sudden boost in the lifestyles of those in Phoride made many of
+Phoride's citizens, from the peasantry to the elite Prominants feel
+alive again, and many returned to praising Manguino.
+
+Manguino was proud of his own brilliance and praised himself.
+
+He had taken notice of the words spoken to him by the Seer, Jessuum
+Benitar, and his spies' news about the north compiling an army was all
+he needed to order the male citizens into a compulsory army of his own.
+
+Throughout the first years of the arms build-up all the women, even
+those wives of the Prominent elite, had to do the work of their
+husbands, as-well-as their own domestic chores while their husbands
+trained to fight a war which gave no indications would ever be fought.
+
+Now, however, the new city of Pomperaque stood as a monument of
+strength, and with this, Manguino released the Prominent men from their
+service duties and most of them returned home to their wives and
+families.  Only a few of the Prominents, who had personal gains from
+staying in the service, remained as the generals.
+
+There was an odd contentment in Pomperaque and the people had a
+tolerant and even kindly regard for their Almighty ArchBishop, and they
+thanked him for improving their lives, unaware that the improvements
+were all made for his own benefit, and not really intended for them.
+
+The entire Northern United Alignment heard of the progress that
+Manguino forced in Phoride and they also heard about the common
+people's change of heart towards him.  Now they all favoured him.
+
+Harvard, thought, felt confident that the Alignments' forces could
+annihilate the Phoridene armies, and before his son and Boyce left
+Besten for Phoride, he wished them God's speed and safety.
+
+"We will send Empal with word of mobilization." Lloyd said to Harvard.
+"It is a long way back to Pomperaque but we should save several days in
+travel, taking this shorter route."  He pointed-out the route on a
+small map while they made their final plans.  His finger etched the
+line through Krolalin's Dark Forest and other possibly hostile lands.
+
+"Take care in those places."  Harvard cautioned.  "Though these nations
+are small and have agreed to let you pass, we cannot trust them with
+their promises.  Remember, some are friends of the ArchBishop.  In
+consideration of this, you will first go to Alugean and get proper
+weapons to carry on your trip."
+
+Boyce and Lloyd both agreed to Harvard's request and they left on their
+long journey, on foot.
+
+It was unanimously decided that the men's journey would be taken this
+way in order to confuse the attention of any spies that were watching.
+Machine travel, and even travel by horse, would have directed attention
+upon them.
+
+A small performing caravan was sent south, as were tinkers of every
+kind, and all knew their purpose for going to Pomperaque.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce made their way slightly to the south-west towards
+Alugean where they were to check the production of weapons and receive
+some for their personal use during the trip.
+
+When the height of people leaving Besten was reached the two men left
+the city for their day's jaunt to the vault library in the Alugean
+Mountain.  To break the stress of their exertions, they spoke of many
+things during their first day of travel.  The talks were mostly
+centred on what they thought Pomperaque would look like after all the
+changes.  Another topic that lasted them was their views on Manguino's
+illogical assumption that Brook had cursed him and that it was the
+cause for his women baring him monstrosities.  They spoke of Eckma and
+her, one day, turning into an almost appealing woman and Boyce
+speculated that the ArchBishop had found in Brook's gadgets the
+formula to the age stunning drug -- originally designed by the fourth
+wife of Hosea Jones, called Ruth.
+
+While the day waned and Alugean grew larger, and closer, Boyce and
+Lloyd shared a worry that they both had about the invasion that they
+had planned.
+
+It came to Boyce's mind early in the day that, when the war was under
+way, many innocent women and children would probably be caught up in it
+and would die.
+
+Lloyd understood Boyce's feelings but knew that nothing could be done
+about it; but Boyce really knew that Lloyd wanted to taste vengeance
+through the death of one particular woman.
+
+Lloyd considered Eckma an evil woman.  A woman of tasteless love that
+sank into deeper evil through her marriage and violent consummation.
+He knew that the loss of those many ugly and pretty children, at their
+birth, drew no tears from her.
+
+Lloyd wanted to see her die, with her child and with Manguino, and yet,
+he did not want to kill them himself, although the temptations was
+great for him to do so.
+
+His reasoning for this judgement of her was simple and Boyce accepted
+it.
+
+"This past time that she gave birth, Boyce, she gave birth to twins.
+One was the beautiful son child that both she and the ArchBishop
+desired.  The other twin, whatever sex it was, was drowned in a pool
+of water by its mother, because it was hideous looking."  Lloyd
+explained to Boyce.  "She held that child's head under water, watching
+it writhe and convulse, and she enjoyed watching it die, since she had
+never before killed something that was alive."  Boyce was quiet and he
+just listened.  "What's more, my friend, the water was rain water.
+Can you imagine?"
+
+They turned onto a short path that lead to the hidden entrance doors
+and Lloyd punched-in the numbers as taught to them by Brook, a decade
+earlier.
+
+"I remember the rain that touched me.  It wasn't much but it made my
+sanity depart from me.  I can imagine how it must've been for the
+child, drowned in such fluid."
+
+Lloyd also remembered that night when his injured form was given
+comfort.  It was the night when Boyce first proved his courage by
+isolating himself in his room after the rain fell on him.
+
+The doors of the entrance slid open and they walked down a lengthy
+hallway that was dark, but also oddly shiny, until they came into an
+enormous cavern that hosted a number of gigantic machines of knowledge,
+and around them were a number of Bestenese scientists learning how to
+operate them.
+
+They made their way to the other side of the busy cavern to a flight of
+stairs and descended them until they came out to a large area that at
+one time had stored food and other supplies.  Now it was converted to
+the production of weapons, and all the other contents that were once
+within were taken down to another storage level.
+
+They sat down their gear then headed to where the labs were and walked
+into one.  The endless number of workers, that worked on weaponry in
+front of them, paid little mind to the two men.
+
+Inside the lab doors the two men stopped, looked at a red light and
+became encircled by a smoky mist that smelled like flatulence.
+
+They held their breaths until the smoky mist subsided and a green light
+came on, and with it the door before them slowly swung ajar.  The full
+smelling smoke had actually made their bodies and clothing free of
+bacteria, since what they were now entering was a very clean area.
+
+Just as they pushed the door all the way then closed it after they were
+in, one of the supervising technicians, in charge of small side-arms
+production, approached and welcomed them.
+
+"My Lords Bartlett and Scullion-Blue, welcome!"  said the tall dark man
+in the white plastic oversuit.  "You are here just in time.  We have
+two little gems to give you!"
+
+He offered them the direction of the test lab and they went to it.
+
+"It seems that my father has sent to you some more men, Burman?"  Lloyd
+questioned Burman, in passing.
+
+"Yes, Lloyd.  They have been invaluable.  Already we have attained a
+forty percent increase in our production levels and only three percent
+of that is rejected as battle perfect."  Burman sounded proud and Boyce
+was pleased.
+
+Boyce remembered the day that he and Lloyd first set foot inside
+Alugean.  It was a huge lifeless place full of silence, machinery and
+cratesful of supplies.
+
+They went into the test lab and watched a half dozen men and women
+trying out the strength of the small, hand-sized weapons.
+
+Twenty meters from them were sheets of different materials, that came
+down automatically after the weapons were tested out on each piece of
+the materials.
+
+Materials of plastic, glass, wood, splintered and burned up after a
+single blast of the small guns that had both laser and electrophoric
+capabilities built into them.
+
+
+The power of the small weapons evenly cut into the strongest metal
+slabs that they had on which to test these devices.
+
+Burman was pleased to flaunt the devices that he helped to construct
+and both Lloyd and Boyce were impressed.
+
+Lloyd looked at the weapons and tested the weight in his own hand.  He
+fired a shot of the electrophora at one of the foot thick pieces of the
+wood and it splintered into a countless number of pieces.
+
+"I'm glad that the ones I was hit with, when you found me, were not
+like this one."  Lloyd commented to Boyce with a slight grin.
+
+Boyce studied the weapon for a moment switching it from the
+electrophoric to laser, and back again until he was satisfied with its
+performance.
+
+"These guns, Burman -- they use the same source of power for both
+elements?"  Boyce questioned Burman.
+
+Burman looked confused for a moment and questioned Lloyd with his eyes
+and Lloyd knew what it was that had confused Burman.
+
+"Gun, is an ancient term for such a weapon of aggression."
+
+Burman then remembered that word 'gun' and he answered Boyce letting
+him know that its power source was indeed common for both settings.
+
+Boyce was satisfied with the answer, and so was Lloyd, since he had
+thought of asking a similar question.  Now both of them knew that, once
+the source of power was used up, that was the end of that energy cell.
+
+They each took a belt case and a spare cell, as their armament for the
+trip.
+
+
+They did ask Burman to show them some of the larger-gauged weapons that
+were to be used in the invasion and these had a strength five times
+that of the small hand guns.
+
+Everything seemed to be going well with the production and already the
+weapons were being sent all through the Northern United Alignment, to
+the armies that would get two more weeks, so it was hoped,  of training
+with them until the invasion.
+
+Impressed and fully satisfied with what they saw, they made their way
+back to the upper levels of the mountain.
+
+"We have prepared your quarters for tonight."  said Burman.  "You will
+find food and baths, and if you wish, women can be sent to you at the
+completion of their shift?"
+
+"No, the food and baths will suffice!"  Boyce told Burman.  "We depart
+early and we should rest -- unless you would prefer some company
+tonight, Lloyd?"
+
+Lloyd smiled at them both.
+
+"Maybe, but they'd probably tire me too much and that would make the
+trip harder on both of us!"
+
+"We'll find out if that means 'yes', later!"  Boyce joked with Burman,
+and all three of them laughed.
+
+"Good sleeping then, my friends!"  hailed their host then left them go
+to their chambers.
+
+They thanked him and entered.
+
+They both bathed before eating and Boyce put on some sweet sounding
+music from a time long before the Twentieth Century, and they lay down
+on their respective couches and listened.
+
+"Of all that we found in this place,"  Boyce began,  "the music archive
+must've been our greatest discovery."
+
+"True!"  was all that Lloyd said and they fell asleep.
+
+
+CHAPTER  FIFTEEN
+
+The next day came early.  The two men woke up in the hour before dawn
+and after having their fill of good food for breakfast, they readied
+themselves for their long trip to Pomperaque.
+
+They made up a list for the rations supervisor to fill for them before
+they were to leave Alugean.  The list was common to them both and they
+were comprised of field hiking packs full of dried meats, fruits and
+vegetables, two four-litre water sacks and two electric lights.
+
+When Lloyd and Boyce finished giving Burman and the library steward the
+final details of how and when they would be notified about their own
+advance on Pomperaque, they left the city, hailed with luck from each
+worker within.
+
+It was an unusually hot day and it wasn't yet nine o'clock in the
+morning.
+
+Not far from Alugean, they took their first break by a stream and
+sucked back a few healthy gulps of water from their sacks.
+
+There wasn't a cloud in the sky and the air felt thick to breathe as
+they slowly advanced south.
+
+They took to walking in the shade of the trees that were all around
+them on their path, and only after Boyce noticed a dragonfly fanning
+itself on a boulder, were both of the men aware that there was a
+strange lack of insect life.
+
+The men didn't speak.  Boyce just pointed to the big beautifully
+coloured insect and Lloyd knew what was on his mind.
+
+It seemed, to the men, that they were stopping every few minutes to
+drink their water but they did indeed walk a long distance, losing
+sight of Alugean several hours into the afternoon.
+
+All the vegetation around them was dry and brittle, especially that
+which was under foot.  The trees and shrubs, however, were still green
+and were waxy looking, and sap ran sown the bark of some of those trees.
+
+Their feet burned and it wasn't until the late afternoon that they
+finally came across a stream that was to give them some relief.
+
+They stayed at the little river for an hour, partaking of its fresh and
+crystal qualities, and Lloyd caught, with his bare hands, a couple of
+good-sized fish for their supper.
+
+They built a fire and a shading lean-to by the water's edge and there
+roasted the fish, then ate them.
+
+When they finished they speculated on the distance that they had
+travelled and they looked at their maps, putting them fifty-five
+kilometres from the library at Alugean.  This surprised both of them
+and Boyce joked, remarking that the entire walk must've been down hill.
+
+They knew that they had several hours of sunlight available to them,
+but both agreed that the time would be better spent in search of a
+proper shelter, where they could sleep that evening.
+
+
+They doused the fire and scattered the materials of the lean-to,
+limiting the evidence that someone was there, in the chance that
+someone was following them.
+
+Although no one followed, their caution spurred them into a steady pace
+that allowed them to gain a good distance with each passing hour.
+
+It wasn't until dusk that Lloyd caught sight of a large hole in a
+hillside, which was overgrown with trees and other vegetation.
+
+Since the sun was sinking quickly, Boyce agreed to Lloyd's decision to
+check it out as a possible shelter for the evening.
+
+It indeed was a cave and it was incredibly large, and the floor of the
+cave was relatively smooth, as far down as they could see.
+
+Their curiosity was sparked by the looks of the cave opening, and they
+couldn't see any ledges or nooks until they went further into the cave.
+ Then before them they saw a huge hole, that stretched into darkness.
+Normality, Boyce threw a rock into the hole but it was never heard
+hitting the bottom.
+
+There was light in the cave since the entrance faced towards the west
+and the setting sun.  They each took out their electric lights anyway,
+but the beams of light could not illuminate the other side, if there
+was another side.
+
+To their right was a large road, seemingly joined to the smooth surface
+that ran through the entrance, so they began to walk on it.
+
+"I wonder where this leads?"  Boyce thought to ask, not expecting to be
+answered and especially with Lloyd's remark.
+
+"Hell, maybe?"  he replied.
+
+This annoyed Boyce, but more from not really having a concept of what
+hell was supposed to be.  He could not imagine that which had been
+described in legend since the dawn of man _ both times.
+
+He sometimes shone the light onto the wall to their right and Lloyd
+shone his straight ahead so that they wouldn't fall into nothingness if
+the road was to suddenly end.
+
+"Maybe we should head to the entrance, Lloyd.  We have been here for
+some time."
+
+"I thought I saw my light reflecting off something just ahead.  We'll
+head back after we check that."
+
+Boyce nodded to resuming and as they neared that which was returning
+Lloyd's light, Boyce shone his on the wall again and lit a large black,
+cube that didn't look like it was made of stone.
+
+"What is that?"
+
+Lloyd stopped and looked at it, then went over to it.  He touched it
+and set his fingers into a groove that he found on the side.
+
+"I don't know, but -- "  he pulled on the groove and half the cube,
+which was hinged, flew open.  "It seems to be opening!"
+
+There was a row of six small levers and beneath those was one large
+dusty one.  Lloyd tried to move it but it didn't budge.
+
+He sighed then dropped his pack to his feet and drew from it a small
+axe, gave the lever a good slam them tried it and he pushed it right
+around until it stopped.
+
+There was a sudden rush of air followed by a screaming whirling sound,
+and the entire place became lit with dim yellowish light.
+
+They turned to face the direction of the light and were totally
+flabbergasted by what they saw.
+
+In the utmost of awe, both stood with their mouths agape and were
+silent as their eyes combed the entirety of the huge pit that extended
+far below them, with the road on which they stood, spiralling in a
+terraced fashion down to the very bottom.
+
+Throughout the immense hole, there were huge machines; dormant and
+silent.  Only God knew for how many years this place had been abandoned.
+
+Lloyd saw that which had reflected his light earlier.  It was a huge
+yellow hauling machine, several dozen meters away from them and covered
+with faded writing.  It had many large, black wheels and a gigantic
+load bin, still filled to the limit with whole rocks, many of them
+larger than either of the two men.
+
+"This is a mine!"  Lloyd began to explain to this companion.  "It's
+odd, though, that this place would be mined like this?"
+
+"Why do you say that?"  Boyce was puzzled.
+
+"This style is called an open-pit mine, yet it's in this small
+mountain.  That is why I think it's odd.  Shafts are usually dug for
+mining in mountains or for something that is found very deep!"  Lloyd
+pointed to the floor of the pit, maybe a kilometre below them.
+
+"I would like to go down there, but we don't have the time.  Let's get
+back."  Boyce suggested.
+
+The shrieking whirl suddenly stopped and there was no more drafty air
+flowing about them and the lights went out.
+
+"I suppose that we'll have to go back now?"  Lloyd chaffed, picking up
+his pack.
+
+They lay back on the flat, even floor of the cave, using their water
+sacks as pillows.
+
+Bluish starlight filtered into the cave and it was barely enough to let
+them see one another.
+
+They stared up into the dark of the ceiling and thought about what they
+had just found.
+
+"What a strange and fantastic place!"  said Boyce.
+
+"Have you noticed that this entire road, that runs to the floor of this
+mine, has been carved right out of the rock?"  Lloyd was formulating a
+theory about the odd method of building such a place.
+
+Boyce remained quiet, knowing Lloyd well-enough by now, to let him
+continue with his thoughts.
+
+"They must've used lasers, like ours!"  he continued.  "How else could
+they make it's surface so flat and even all the way down?"
+
+"I was thinking, Lloyd ... wouldn't this great hole make an interesting
+city -- like the Alugean library?"
+
+They both were quiet for a moment, reflecting on Boyce's idea, until
+Lloyd resumed.
+
+"I'd wager that both places were made by the same people!"
+
+The silence that came next lasted until morning when Boyce and Lloyd
+were snatched from their dream states by the shrill cawing of some crow
+on a boulder outside the mouth of the cave.
+
+Bleary-eyed, the men got to their feet and stretched until they were
+fully awake, but still relaxed.
+
+"What a noise to wake up to!"  Lloyd complained.
+
+"Oh, leave it be.  It's not hurting anything!"  Boyce gurgled.
+"Besides, at least we can get an early start today."
+
+They left the cave and sat on the big rock that the crow had vacated.
+They took some food out of their packs and filled their bowels with the
+fuel for a rest.
+
+Their curiosity and sense of awe had made them go back into the mine.
+They were in there
+
+only briefly while they took some notes and made some calculations
+approximating the overall dimensions of the mine.
+
+They marked the location of this sight on their maps and then proceeded
+on their journey back to Pomperaque.
+
+Not very far from the mine there was a wide, rapid-moving river that
+they had to cross before they continued their trek overland to the Dark
+Forest which spanned most of the northern part of the Virgin Mountains.
+ It was a part of the land where no one lived since it was too hostile
+for any groups of people to settle.  Only hunters and criminals roamed
+those desolate areas.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce tried not to think of what lay ahead.  They were given
+the choice of what routes to take and they chose the shortest and most
+perilous way.
+
+They were beginning to see more wild life now, some larger than they
+had ever seen before.
+
+They knew that they were nearing the Dark Forest because of these
+signs. The forest was home of every kind of titan-like animal, many of
+which were devilishly ferocious.
+
+They came over a rise and there they rested because, across the small
+aspen rose an escarpment a few hundred meters in height.  To keep on
+schedule, they had to scale the escarpment walls by evening.
+
+Overhead, a black bird was circling, quickly nearing the ground with
+each successive round, until it finally came to rest in the top of a
+tree between them and the cliffs of the escarpment.
+
+It cried out in dry sounding quavers and flapped its wings in a
+silly-looking manner before it dropped itself off the tree and flew
+over to the cliffs.
+
+"Funny!"  voiced Boyce.
+
+"What?!"  Lloyd asked him, thinking that maybe he did something worthy
+of being made fun.
+
+
+"That's the second raven they we've seen today, and I wasn't aware that
+they were indigenous to this area."
+
+Lloyd didn't even notice the bird until Boyce pointed-out its presence
+to him.
+
+"Maybe it's lost?"
+
+Boyce shrugged at Lloyd's suggestion.  He watched the bird fly over the
+scarp ahead and he sighed with envy.
+
+"Too bad we don't have wings to fly over that thing!"  Boyce said about
+the escarpment.  "I don't feel up to the climb."
+
+"I can do without it, also, but we can't go around it; that would take
+too long."
+
+Boyce looked at Lloyd with a perplexed expression.
+
+"Why did I agree on taking this route, anyway?"
+
+Lloyd grinned and closed his pack while he spoke.
+
+"It's shorter, for one thing."  Boyce began.  "I wonder, at times, if
+we will make it there, by taking this way?!"
+
+He drank some water then slung the sack around his neck and shoulders,
+and Lloyd did the same with his pack.
+
+They both got on their feet and looked at the escarpment then started
+in its direction, pacing themselves steadily and surely until they were
+quickly on the other side of the aspen, and were standing at the base
+of the escarpment's towering cliffs.
+
+"Looks high!"  Boyce's brief comment drew a look from Lloyd until he
+finished his thought.  "But -- we can't turn back now!"
+
+He laughed for a moment then looked up.
+
+"You know, if someone told me, back when I was a boy, that I would be
+climbing an impossible rock when I was twenty-one, I would have laughed
+in their face."  Boyce continued to laugh, watching for Lloyd's
+reaction.
+
+"At least you're young, my friend.  I'm nearly twice your age, so this
+trip is that much harder for me!"
+
+"Strange,"  Boyce began.  "this thing, Fate!  It made us friends
+through your hardship, kept us as friend through my own, and now we're
+going to a place where we will engage in battle... and maybe die,
+together."
+
+Lloyd gave him a strange look of disgust and shook his head.
+
+"If I didn't know you better, I'd swear that you were still reading
+Djenaud Smarte."  he said to Boyce.
+
+"Knock, knock ..."  Boyce smiled and then gave Lloyd a pat on the back.
+ "Who'll go first?"
+
+"I will have to go first.  I've done more climbing."  answered Lloyd.
+"Watch where I put my hands and feet and climb up the same way."
+
+Boyce nodded in silence and Lloyd gave him a concerned looks as if to
+calm him.
+
+They began to climb the escarpment which was almost a straight vertical
+rise of brittle rock.  Several times Lloyd lost his footing on the
+rocks that flaked off with every inch that they climbed.
+
+They had set for themselves two goals, the first being a wide lege
+about half-way up, and the second was the flat summit itself, where
+they were to sleep when the evening came.
+
+By late afternoon, after a slow and painful climb that almost claimed
+them both, they reached the ledge and took off their packs.
+
+Boyce looked down over the edge and he felt a chill go through him.
+
+"If I wasn't so tired, "  he said.  "I think that I'd get sick."
+
+Out of breath, Lloyd laughed and looked down himself.
+
+"You never ... you never get used to it, Boyce."  He lay flat on his
+back and saw how far they still had to go.  "We can't rest here for too
+much longer or we'll lose the strength to finish the rest of the way!"
+
+He lifted his arm towards the summit and let it drop down again.
+
+"I would rather have gone by caravan."  Boyce sighed.
+
+Exhausted, Lloyd grinned and slowly rose to his feet.  He helped Boyce
+up onto his and they put their packs back on and started up the
+cliff-face, gain.
+
+As it was Lloyd's experience in climbing a few times before, the
+second-half of the climb was a little easier for him.
+
+Boyce had also found the next part easier to scale, losing his hold
+only briefly, near the top.
+
+The skies were beginning to take on a purple-orange colour as the sun
+fell behind the clouds far on the western horizon.
+
+Summoning the rest of their strength they finally reached the flat
+summit.
+
+It wasn't until an hour passed, and the sunlight was gone, but for the
+dimness left over, that the two men stood on their feet and cleared an
+area on which to sleep.
+
+The skies were turning to black velvet, with the diamond stars covering
+every space and some galaxies were seen lingering far behind some
+brighter stars.  Directly overhead, a galaxy of fingernail size seemed
+to slowly pass over as they both lay back and watched it.
+
+Meteorites streaked across the sky ever-so-often and Boyce told Lloyd
+that they were angels racing one another through the heavens.
+
+It was a clear and beautifully warm night, and a splendidly colourful
+borealis shined in the north-western sky.
+
+Neither one knew when they fell asleep, and neither one woke up until
+noon the next day, barely noticing that they were being baked by the
+sun.
+
+Every bone in their bodies cracked and there wasn't one muscle excluded
+from feeling the brunt of their climb.
+
+Nothing much was said between them while they ate.  When they were
+through, however, Boyce praised God, and turned to Lloyd.
+
+"I just thought of something."  he said and Lloyd waited, interest
+shining from his eyes.  "We could have cut holes into the rock face
+with our lasers!  The climb wouldn't have taken us half the time!"
+
+"I considered that before we started to climb."  Lloyd admitted to
+Boyce.
+
+"Why didn't we, then?"
+
+"It would have been too simple and you would not have valued the skill
+of the climb if we made it without the hardship and sweat.  Climbing
+this escarpment is much the same as striving for a goal in life -- you
+do understand what I am trying to say?"  Lloyd finished.
+
+"Yes, Lloyd, I do!  You are teaching me things that you haven't
+promised my father you would teach to me.  Nevertheless, I am grateful."
+
+The two men spent the day on the escarpment looking at the land that
+stretched for miles on each side of the precipice, but their main
+interest was in the land that was set directly ahead.
+
+The Krolalin Mountain Range was before them, with the chain of desolate
+old mountains at the head of the Virgin Mountains.
+
+They sat on the southern part of the escarpment and stared at the
+awesome sight.  It was a mammoth forest canopied by clouds.
+
+There was the river before them, flowing through a channel that it dug
+out of solid rock over its many years of erosion.  Its banks sloped up
+from there, on each side, with short underbrush on this side of the
+river and the forbidding Dark Forest, on the other side.
+
+Lloyd had Boyce hand him a pack and from it he took a dark cylindrical
+case that he opened.  He pulled out from it an instrument of glass and
+light metal.
+
+He pulled the instrument apart and put it up to his eye, pointing it in
+the direction of the river.
+
+Boyce quietly watched him for a while.
+
+"Is that one of those distance aids for the eyes?"  he queried.
+
+Lloyd smiled taking the thing away from his eye and showing it to him.
+
+"It's called a telescope.  To see further an clearer you pull it out,
+like this."  he showed him and Boyce knew right away what it could be
+used for.  "It is compressed for easier packing and travel.  A very
+handy toy, I might say!"
+
+He handed the telescope to Boyce and told him to look at the river near
+the huge rock and tree, an he did.  He saw a cable there, stretched
+across the river from one rock to another on the other side.
+
+"That's what we're crossing on."  said Lloyd.
+
+Boyce gave him an odd look as if asking him, 'why?'.
+
+"We can't swim through that tempest.  The current would rip us to
+shreds and we couldn't control a float on her either."  he said.  "That
+wire cable is all we have."
+
+"Who put it there?"
+
+"I don't know, really.  All I know is that when I was maybe nine or
+ten, some hunters came to my father with new of its existence.  We came
+with a couple of Virunese to see it and it didn't look in very good
+shape."  Lloyd took a breath that shuddered slightly.  "I had to carry
+a thick rope to the other side and back in order to strengthen it until
+some others were sent to replace it with a new cable."
+
+"Why did you have to carry the rope?"  asked Boyce.
+
+"I was the smallest and therefore the lightest, but I could feel the
+thing under my weight the further I went."  Lloyd smiled reassuringly
+and took a gulp of water.  "I've been over it a dozen times since then."
+
+Boyce continued to look through the telescope at the other side.
+
+The Dark Forest didn't look any more welcoming closer up and Boyce
+wasn't looking forward to going through it.
+
+The Dark Forest was densely overgrown with titanic sized trees, the
+diameters of which ranged from one to ten meters in thickness.  They
+were extremely tall, too.  So tall in fact that most of the forest
+ceiling was constantly hidden in the clouds, which never seemed to
+dissipate.
+
+No one knew the actual height of the trees in the Dark Forest because
+of the clouds.  Over the years, folk lore and tales had formed about
+their origin and formation.  Mythical civilisations of evil gremlins
+were said to have built a city up in the trees and kept it shrouded
+from human eyes by the soupy canopy of clouds.  The same lore explained
+why the entire forest teamed with hostile life; that which was the
+gremlin king's way of venting his anger on the world and on mankind.
+
+"We'll stay here today and sleep.  Tomorrow, when fresh and strong,
+we'll go down there and carry ourselves across to the other side."
+
+Boyce bore a pensive smile to what Lloyd had said.
+
+"Lloyd?"  he began.  "Exactly how will we get down from here?  Will we
+have to climb?"
+
+Lloyd grinned at Boyce.
+
+"It's easier climbing down!"  he answered and watched Boyce's facial
+colour draw away.  "Really! -- We will climb down part of the way."
+
+He got on his belly and leaned over to the edge of the cliff and
+motioned to Boyce to do the same, and he did.  He pointed to a large
+ledge that was about the width of a forearm, which continued on to a
+piece of this big rock where there was a gentler slope and a path down
+to the base.
+
+Boyce shrugged and smacked his lips as he looked beyond the path and
+straight down to the base of the escarpment, strewn with rock and
+dotted with dry bush.
+
+"That's still a climb!"  he said.
+
+"I would guess twenty meters!  I like to think of it as a morning
+exercise."
+
+They rested on the summit through the rest of the day and talked about
+their past decade together, as friends, and they discussed the great
+city of Pomperaque and what it would be like when they finally reached
+it.
+
+Their second night came to them on the scarp, hardly different in its
+beauty than the night before.  The only noticeable change was that of
+the full moon, which was big and bright.
+
+Each man was silent and rolled about in his own thoughts.
+
+Boyce laboured with the vision of Brook and Dearborne's executions,
+being played repeatedly in his mind while his uncle, Manguino, watched
+with murder-hungry eyes.
+
+He wiped the tears from his eyes and took the telescope that was
+beside Lloyd and put it up to his eye.  He aimed the instrument at the
+moon and was amazed at the details that he saw on its surface.
+
+Lloyd had his eyes rivetted on the moon, as well.  His mind played with
+him, showing him the memories of Mercedes' suicide mingled with that of
+his own beloved Charnan's death.  His tears never formed, though.  With
+his, at one time's ease to mourn, all he had now was the respectful
+love and praise for her.
+
+He never married since his betrothal to her, and rarely did he ever
+have relations with women.  The only woman since Charnan, who
+interested Lloyd in the slightest, was his father's maid-servant,
+Torella.
+
+She drew and teased his desires from him, until with her scalding
+passion gave her body to him, before she left the Bartlett household
+with a wandering artisan.
+
+He never found out whether it was Torella's desire to leave or his
+father's desire to expel her; so to keep him from fraternising with the
+lower-classed help.
+
+Lloyd's second love was removed from him and since that time he had
+never again engaged himself with thoughts of love and passion.
+
+He was deeply depressed and Boyce's voice was the welcomed hammer that
+shattered his flagonful of thoughts.
+
+"Have you ever wondered about the moon's perfection, Lloyd?"  asked
+Boyce and Lloyd responded with a questioning mumble.  "There are large
+holes on the moon and mountains, larger than any in Krolalin."
+
+Lloyd turned on his side, faced Boyce and reached for the eye-glass.
+He looked at the moon and agreed with what Boyce had said.
+
+Boyce continued.  "It's strange how it looks so warm and beautiful by
+our own eyes, then so
+
+cold and empty with the telescope.  The stars, also!  They just hang
+there, each a sun like our own!"  he finished and they both sighed.
+
+"It's truly beautiful!"  Lloyd added.
+
+"Remember our studies, Lloyd?  Wouldn't it be some life to sail between
+those worlds?"
+
+Lloyd expelled some air and he sounded in agreement.
+
+Soon, the men fell asleep and travelled the uncertain routes between
+the stars in search of those precious things that they had lost in
+their youth.
+
+Those harmonious dreams were fleeting, yet blessed moments of comfort
+given them by the love of God.
+
+
+CHAPTER  SIXTEEN
+
+Morning saw the men eat little and collect their possessions, in their
+preparation to make their descent to the floor of the other side.
+
+Carefully, they hung off the edge and made their way, a hair and
+a-breath-at-a-time, until they reached the narrow ledge.
+
+Reaching the ledge didn't take the two men very long and they sat on
+it, with their legs dangling over its edge while they ate their
+breakfast.
+
+The rest of the way would be quicker and easier because, to their left
+the ledge soon became a wider path that gradually made its way down,
+coming out at the river, very near to where the cable was anchored.
+
+While they ate they watched a Kenttitian Eagle fly over them with a
+rider.  It was heading south over the Dark Forest and they thought that
+it was Empal on his way back to Pomperaque.
+
+"Do you think it's him?"  Boyce posted.
+
+"If it is, he'll be in Pomperaque by sun down."  Lloyd replied.
+
+They didn't eat too much food for breakfast, conserving it for when
+they needed it most, after walking for several hours without a rest.
+
+They packed up their stuff and made their way slowly until the ledge
+became the path and there they quickened their pace, finding that they
+soon came down to the river, whose noisy roar grew stronger the nearer
+that they came to it.
+
+They sat down their packs and tested out the cable.
+
+Although it looked rusty and brittle, it still had seemed to support
+the weight of both of them.  That was near the anchoring and Lloyd
+wondered how the middle and other side would hold out.
+
+The river was indeed fast, pulling air over its surface as it flowed
+along, making the banks seem somewhat windy to the two men.  The air
+passing over made the huge cable buzz as it vibrated, sounding like
+some of the sustained orations chanted by the monks at Halls.
+
+They sat on a couple of rocks by the water and observed the river and
+cable for a few minutes, trying to draw the courage to start across.
+
+Suddenly, both men were thrown off the rocks that they sat on but they
+didn't know by what.
+
+They gave one another a couple of curious and worried glances and Boyce
+hollered.
+
+"Was it an earthquake?"  he yelled.
+
+Lloyd shrugged and they watched the rocks slowly rolling away and then
+digging themselves into the mud at the water's edge.
+
+Lloyd moved over to Boyce and told him in aloud voice, trying to
+overcome the roar of the river, that the rocks on which they sat on
+must have been living rock.
+
+Neither man had ever seen one of those strange mutations until now.
+
+They had always thought that the stories about the strange rocks were
+nothing but stories, but they really were able to buck a man from off
+their backs.
+
+They became calm now, and they knew that once they crossed to the other
+side, they would have to become more careful.
+
+These rocks that they had encountered were passive, but on the other
+side of the river the beast were all but shyly submissive.  In fact,
+they would attack their own shadows without the slightest forewarning
+that they would do so.
+
+The day before, Lloyd and Boyce discussed the possible perils that they
+would encounter, not knowing for certain since very few men had ever
+successfully passed through the Dark Forest.
+
+Now, however, no more discussions could keep them from trying to cross
+the river, and they knew it.
+
+"We can't sit around here forever."  yelled Boyce.  "We have to cross,
+so I'll go first!"
+
+He put his pack on and tied it to himself and Lloyd grabbed his arm as
+he moved towards the cable.
+
+"Why do you want to go first?"  he asked him.
+
+Boyce just smiles at him.
+
+"I'm lighter than you are.  Besides, you went first on the climb."
+
+Boyce turned to the escarpment and pointed at it.
+
+Lloyd put his other hand on Boyce's shoulder and nodded his head to
+him, approving the decision that the young man had made.
+
+Lloyd tied his own pack to himself and they went over to the cable
+where it was anchored to a huge boulder.
+
+Boyce reached up and pulled on the cable a few times.
+
+"Be careful!"  Lloyd hollered to him and slapped him on the back.
+
+He eased himself along.  First sliding one hand out then his other
+until his hands were together.  He kept to this method but half-way
+across he began to tire and he hung there motionless for a moment.
+
+The cable didn't vibrate with that odd tone any more, and Lloyd became
+worried for Boyce.  Within his heart he egged him on and he prayed that
+God would grant him strength to make it the rest of the way.
+
+He was relieved to see Boyce continue to pull himself along and after a
+short while made it across.
+
+Lloyd watched Boyce drop to the ground and not move for what seemed
+like several minutes, until he sat up and took the pack off.
+
+He waved to Lloyd from across the river and Lloyd waved back.
+
+He watched the cable vibrating, more now than before with the buzzing
+evening-out into a low tone.  He stepped up on the anchoring rock and
+looked at the wedge that held the cable in the rock, and it was moving
+about a little.
+
+He waved over to Boyce and pointed to the anchoring and Boyce went to
+the anchoring on his side, looked at it and pulled at it.  He then
+waved to Lloyd to make his way across.
+
+Lloyd was unsure of the crossing.  The anchoring on this side seemed
+very weak but he had no choice but to go over.
+
+Once he grabbed the cable it lost its bass-tone hum.  He didn't ease
+himself along, however,
+
+seeing the wedge showing itself more and more.
+
+He began to wish that they had a rope that Boyce would've strung across
+to strengthen it for his crossing.
+
+He threw one hand and grabbed the cable, then followed by throwing out
+his other hand far in front of the first while he tried to keep his
+body straight.
+
+He kept his legs firm and straight, though, and the cable moved very
+little, yet on the last dozen meters he felt the cable give way.
+
+A booming twang was heard accompanied by a whistle.  He held on to the
+cable and for an instant saw the other end recoiling towards him while
+he was pulled closer towards Boyce's side of the river.
+
+Unable to hang on Lloyd fell and Boyce hid behind a big rock trying to
+keep the snapped end of the cable from cutting him in half with its
+whip-like action.
+
+The end finally fell into the water and Lloyd had made it to the bank
+of the river having fallen only a couple of meters from the shore.
+
+Boyce came out from behind the rock and helped Lloyd onto the rocks
+nearby.
+
+"Are you hurt?"  shouted Boyce.
+
+Lloyd breathed heavily and shook his head.  The only thing that was at
+fault with him was his torn clothing and scraped hands.
+
+They spent the evening at the river's edge, trading off on staying
+awake throughout the night, guarding from attacks from animals, but the
+night was calm.
+
+The only hostilities that the two men experienced through the night
+were the horrific sounds of wild animals fighting somewhere deep in
+the forest.  The noises were so great that they, at times, drowned out
+the roar of the river.  To their relief, however, not an animal was
+seen.
+
+
+CHAPTER SEVENTEEN
+
+Morning took a long time, so it seems, coming to the two men.
+
+They were both awake by the time the sun rose and by the rime that it
+was fully light, they had finished eating and made their way into the
+forest.
+
+It was a perfectly clear day out by the river, but the odd clouds that
+towered over the forest were still there and they were maybe even
+thicker than the day before.
+
+At any rate, the inside of the forest had a night look to it.
+
+The trek through the forest was the part of the journey that the two
+men wanted most to do without.  They were afraid of the forest because
+they knew very little about it.
+
+The veil of mystery and the stories of horror and evil, surrounding the
+place, didn't make their nerves any calmer.
+
+Not much time went by since they had entered the forest.  All was quiet
+inside and they
+
+began to feel easier until they came across a gigantic, ox-sized
+carcass of a rabbit that was being devoured by huge larvae as large as
+big rats.
+
+They didn't know the nature of the larvae, whether or not they attacked
+their prey or just fed-off of dead animal bodies, so they both took
+their weapons and carried them as they continued.
+
+Soon after, the men heard a strange grating sound overhead that got
+louder and louder.  As the sound became louder, so it changed, sounding
+like the beating hooves of stampeding horses and finally like a droning
+whistle.
+
+"Maybe it's the gremlins!"  Boyce joked.
+
+Suddenly, before them was a small swarm of hornets, larger than
+anything that they had ever seen, flying straight for them.
+
+Lloyd shouted to Boyce to dive to the ground and he immediately did it,
+always trusting that Lloyd had a good reason for telling him to do such
+a thing.
+
+When Boyce threw himself to the ground Lloyd pointed his weapon at the
+swarm and shot into it.  The laser setting managed to hit and kill only
+one hornet which was the size of a human head.
+
+He quickly put his weapon on the electrophoric setting.  By then Boyce
+had already set his weapon and shot into the swarm that moved towards
+Lloyd.
+
+A bunch fell to the ground dead, and after Lloyd killed some more, the
+few that were left took off for the clouded tree tops.
+
+They both got up and looked at a couple of the hornets twinging on the
+ground as they died.
+
+They bent down and prodded one with a stick and saw that it had a
+stinger that was about five inches in length.  Its mandible was large
+and sharp, too.  It looked as if it was able to snap a hand off at the
+wrist. They looked around to see if there would be another attack.
+
+They continued to walk, hoping that the direction was still south,
+since the only way that they could assume that they were heading south
+was by taking a straight line right through the forest, ever so often
+looking back from whence they came, in order to make sure of their
+direction.
+
+They made steady and rhythmic their jaunt through the thick underbrush,
+keeping their eyes open for anything and everything that could possibly
+be harmful to them.
+
+They kept walking, not stopping for a rest or a drink.  They didn't
+speak or look at one another, either, although each knew exactly where
+the other one was at all times.
+
+The forest seemed to be slightly brighter the further they went into it
+but this boon to them soon passed, also.
+
+It soon became very dark again and they knew that it was time to find a
+place of shelter where to sleep.
+
+They were fortunate to find a resting place not too much further into
+the woods.  It was an outcropping of rock that was fairly high and
+there was a recess in the rock, some ways up.  Over the recess there
+was an over-hanging piece of rock, which would be a nice guard against
+the condensing moisture that was beginning to fall now.
+
+Boyce set his weapon on laser and blasted holes into the rock, to make
+the climb up to the recess easier for them.
+
+The recess was large enough for only one person so when they climbed up
+to it they carved out a much larger hole.  It was smooth and warm in
+the shelter that they made.  The cutting edge of the lasers warmed the
+surrounding rock while they melted a strong smooth surface on the
+ceiling and walls.
+
+It was another night spent in trading watch by each man, keeping guard
+from the ferocious animals that stalked their prey at night.
+
+They were high enough up the rock, though, to be safe from most
+animals, so they hoped.  They remembered the size of the rabbit and the
+hornets, and they couldn't really presume safety even that far up.
+
+What made the watch worse for the two men was the utter lack of light
+that prevented them from seeing anything, including their own hands in
+front of their faces.
+
+They used their electric lights only when they heard noises that were
+nearby, but they never saw anything.
+
+Throughout the entire first day in the forest, Lloyd and Boyce barely
+said anything to each other, or even stopped anywhere to eat or to
+drink.  The evening was quiet, too; the only things said between them
+happened when they relieved one another from their watch periods.
+
+
+CHAPTER  EIGHTEEN
+
+The forest began to take on a lightness and Boyce knew that it had to
+be morning.  He had stayed on his watch longer, letting Lloyd sleep
+because he knew that Lloyd needed more rest, being thirty-nine years
+old.  Boyce didn't mind sacrificing his sleep to let him rest longer.
+God knew how much Lloyd had sacrificed in his own life to fulfil his
+promise to Brook and Dearborne.
+
+When Lloyd woke up he asked Boyce why he didn't wake him for his second
+watch period.  Boyce answered that he had just lost track of time.
+
+Lloyd knew that Boyce didn't tell him the truth, but the topic wasn't
+pursued any further because he was grateful for the few extra hours of
+rest.
+
+They finally spoke for a while as they ate their first meal in the
+forest.
+
+"I don't like this place!"  admitted Boyce.
+
+"We'll have to tolerate it.  We still have a day's walk ahead of us."
+Lloyd said to him and took a bite of meat, then continued.  " -- If
+we're lucky!"
+
+The woods were noisy, continuing from the night, but the men now felt
+safer because they could, at least, see much of what was around them.
+
+Growls were heard all about them, and birds screamed and fluttered
+around.  One huge bird flew past their line of sight, soaring silently,
+then with a loud screech, quickly rose into the clouded tree tops.
+
+"What a damned place this is!"  Boyce stressed.  "It is so ungodly."
+
+"It may be but it's the legacy given to the world by the ancient men!"
+
+Their attention was diverted when they heard a gagging roar and grunt.
+With it there was a loud shriek, like a scream, and they looked at each
+other with puzzled and surprised eyes.
+
+"That did not sound like a scream that a bird would make!"  Boyce
+suggested as he got on his knees, drawing his weapon and trying to
+follow the unusual sound.
+
+It came again and was getting nearer and more frequent.
+
+The, there it was.  To their utter dismay, there was a woman running
+out of the thicket of brush some twenty meters away.
+
+She constantly turned to look behind her.  The bushes waved and buckled
+as if a herd of elephants were breaking through in the same direction
+that the woman was running.
+
+Lloyd hollered out to her, calling her to run towards the cliff where
+they sat, and then they saw what was running after her.  It was a wild
+pig the size of a horse.
+
+It advanced more quickly on the woman, now that she was in the open.
+
+"Drop to the ground!"  Boyce yelled at her several times until she
+finally did it.
+
+Before the pig came upon her in its rampant and hostile charge, Boyce
+fired a laser at it split the pig's skull in two.
+
+Lloyd quickly climbed down from the ledge and ran to her, picked her up
+and ran towards the cliff just as the pig fell from its momentum.
+
+He guided her into the notches in the cliff face and push her up along
+the way.  At the ledge Boyce took hold of  her arms and pulled her up.
+She looked at his face for a moment then lost consciousness.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce were ready to leave before this strange woman happened
+along.  Now they felt a duty to stay with her until she came to.
+
+They wrapped her in Lloyd's blanket after touching her skin and finding
+that it was ice-cold.
+
+Lloyd looked at the woman and made a comment to Boyce about her beauty
+and strangely frail-looking quality.
+
+She wasn't very tall yet her build was slim and firm.  Her hair was
+very long and dark, shaded with copper highlights and her shut eyes
+were oblong and appeared to be larger and slightly slanting.
+
+Her whole face had a serious beauty about it, the patches of dirt, here
+and there, made little difference to its overall appeal.
+
+Lloyd was taken with her.  He didn't know whether it was because of her
+beauty or because she was in the middle of this most naturally hostile
+place on the northern continent.  Nevertheless, he found it very hard
+not to look at her.
+
+Boyce had found her extremely attractive, also, but the idea of this
+woman's presence in the forest made him wonder about her.
+
+"She is beautiful!"  Lloyd began.  "I wonder who she is; how she came
+to be here?"
+
+"I question her being here, at all.  She's a day's journey from both
+the river and the end of this forest.  How has she survived here?"
+
+Boyce was becoming nervous about her and he disliked her due to his
+mistrust.
+
+"How she had come into the forest, is another point."  Lloyd added to
+Boyce's train of thought.  "We shall find out, but until then let's
+enjoy her beautiful company."
+
+He leaned against the ledge wall and kept his eyes on her until he
+poured some of the water from his sack, into his warm hand and ran it
+across her face.
+
+She stirred and opened her big green eyes.  She looked at Lloyd leaning
+over her and Boyce staring at her with frozen eyes.
+
+She looked about at the recess in which they all were in, and she took
+an excited deep breath and then shivered.
+
+She seemed frightened.  Lloyd took her tiny trembling hand into his own
+and spoke to her.
+
+"We're friends."  he said then helped her sit up and look at the wild
+pig, that didn't move any more.  "See -- it's dead!"
+
+Lloyd pointed to the animal then handed to her his water sack, and she
+nearly drowned from her incredibly quick drinking.
+
+She gagged and coughed and Lloyd pushed her forward and rubbed the
+centre of her back.
+
+The woman soon caught her breath and quietly looked at her two gallant
+saviours.
+
+"My name is Lloyd Bartlett and this is Boyce Loebh ..." something kept
+him from finishing the whole name and Boyce was relieved.  "... we are
+making our way to the south."
+
+"We are in a hurry to get to our destination, so we took this route.
+It is shorter by several days."
+
+By the manner of Boyce's speech,  Lloyd knew that Boyce didn't want any
+details of their journey to be revealed.
+
+"You almost had yourself stomped into the ground by that animal.  What
+are you doing in these woods?"
+
+The woman looked to the dead animal and at Boyce.  When she spoke, she
+turned to Lloyd.
+
+"I was running."  she said, and the two men eagerly listened.  "My
+father is an over-lord.  He wanted to force me into a marriage with a
+Teniqu�s.  I refused and he had me whipped and branded."  she pulled
+the single support strap from her shoulder and exposed the breast of
+the same side, that looked scarred, with the symbol of a trident burned
+on it.
+
+Lloyd lifted the shoulder support back onto her shoulder covering her
+up.
+
+They stared into each other's eyes and Lloyd felt warm from the glow
+emanating from her.
+
+She took the blanket from around her, dropping it to around her hips
+where it no longer covered her.
+
+She only wore the single piece of clothing, made of a dark, thin and
+short fragment of material.
+
+She was barely covered but for her torso, and she didn't wear anything
+as undergarments.
+
+She put her hand on the upper, inside part of her thigh and when she
+brought it away there was blood on her fingers.
+
+Boyce just sat back and watched the strange unfolding of her story and
+actions, all of which were aimed right at Lloyd.
+
+"Are you hurt?"  Lloyd asked with much concern.
+
+"I have a small gash in my leg!  It must've happened when I was being
+chased by that!"  she pointed at the dead pig.
+
+"Here, let me take a look!"  Lloyd offered to assist, genuinely feeling
+concerned for her.
+
+He took some water on a strip of cloth that he had in his pack and
+wiped the wound clean, then wrapped the wound with the same cloth.
+
+Although Lloyd was an honourable man, gallantly aiding a distressed
+female, he could not keep himself from glancing at her naked
+extremities.
+
+"Does it hurt very much ..."  he stopped and with his eyes conveyed a
+question of need to know her name.
+
+"My name is Grenadine."  she said and Lloyd echoed with a smile.
+
+Boyce was annoyed by what he saw.  Everything was kindness and
+appreciation between them, but he felt that something was at fault.
+
+"I'm alright."  she said and she made a little smile that poked a hole
+into Lloyd's heart.
+
+"Can you walk, Grenadine?  We wish to resume our journey soon and we
+don't want to leave you behind."  Lloyd asked her.
+
+Grenadine nodded to him and they packed up the two packs and climbed
+down.
+
+Lloyd gave Grenadine his blanket and she wrapped it around her body
+into a kind of dress that looked like it was made for her.
+
+No seam showed and no string or thread was used to keep it together.
+
+Boyce walked behind Lloyd and Grenadine, keeping all his attention
+focused on the woods and making certain that they continued to walk in
+a generally southern direction.
+
+Above them the tree tops were still hidden and sounds like mute
+whistling came from there.
+
+Boyce began to believe in the gremlin lore and the evil that was
+supposed to be associated with it.
+
+If it wasn't for the woman travelling with them, Boyce believed that
+they would have been out of the forest by this time.
+
+Grenadine limped very little but she held on to Lloyd's right arm at
+all times.
+
+Boyce didn't like that.  He saw that Lloyd would have a very slow
+response in drawing his weapon if it became necessary.
+
+They kept walking and never stopped for a rest.
+
+Grenadine didn't ask for any rest and Boyce had thought that, for a
+woman, that was peculiar.
+
+With every hour that passed, and they made it further through the
+forest, Boyce trusted that woman less and less.  He couldn't tell this
+to Lloyd, however.  His preoccupation with Grenadine would have made
+him unreasonable towards Boyce's views about her, so Boyce kept his
+thoughts to himself and kept his wits about himself.
+
+Lloyd and Grenadine talked to one another throughout the entire
+distance travelled since they left the rocky ledge where they slept
+last night.
+
+Lloyd had forgotten an agreement that they made way back in Besten when
+they chose this route.  It was Lloyd's suggestion, too.
+
+"We should keep as quiet as possible when going through the Dark
+Forest.  We won't draw as many wild animals to the sounds we make."
+
+Boyce remembered those words each and every time that Grenadine's
+bird-like laugh reverberated through the trees.
+
+There was huge crashing sound that came from their left side, and it
+wasn't far from them.
+
+They stopped in their tracks and silently waited.
+
+Lloyd had briefly lost his interest in Grenadine and he looked at
+Boyce's angered contours, yet he didn't understand them.
+
+They stood still for several minutes, looking about.
+
+Lloyd made Grenadine squat down and he readied his gun for defence.
+
+He and Boyce looked around their immediate proximity but saw nothing.
+They became edgy.
+
+Lloyd looked at Grenadine's calmness and helped her up from the ground.
+ He was proud that she could keep her courage when their's was waning.
+
+Boyce watched both of them with amazement as they sluggishly milled
+their way in their intended direction.
+
+He followed once again being the eyes for the entire party.
+
+Time passed and the forest grew dark for the second time.  Night was
+again, at hand.  Boyce was not at all pleased.
+
+"Lloyd!" Boyce cried out.  "We should seek a shelter!"
+
+Lloyd nodded to him and they reconnoitred the entire area around them,
+in search of some place.
+
+The only shelter available, with any degree of safety offered to them
+was a gigantic bird's nest.
+
+"Should we try it?"  Boyce asked with his answer already suggested in
+his tone.
+
+"We couldn't find better in this light!"
+
+With Lloyd's answer, they took out their lasers and sliced several
+dozen rungs into the tree leading up to the branch with the nest.
+
+"Well?"  Boyce thrust his hand up at the tree.  "Tonight we'll be
+sleeping with the gremlins."
+
+Grenadine gave Boyce a strange glare of disapproval and Lloyd smiled
+because he thought it looked amusing.
+
+"We go up in a moment!"  said Lloyd then went a few meters from the
+tree to urinate.
+
+Boyce came up beside him and did the same, taking his first opportunity
+to speak to Lloyd about the girl, since they took her along.
+
+"Your mind hasn't been on the journey."  he told Lloyd.  "This place is
+dangerous and you've fully dropped your guard."
+
+Lloyd didn't say a word while Boyce spoke.
+
+They both finished urinating and Lloyd began to turn but Boyce stopped
+him.
+
+"Haven't you given any thought on how or why she came to be in this
+forest?"
+
+Lloyd was still quiet in such a way as to seem like he was ignoring
+Boyce.
+
+"You don't believe that story that she gave us, do you?"  Boyce
+demanded and answer.
+
+Look, Boyce!  She's a very nice and beautiful woman.  We can't leave
+her here to die!"
+
+"Yes, Lloyd, but don't you see? -- She shows no apprehension about
+being in this place!"  He stopped his monotonous whisper and pointed to
+her.  "Look at her Lloyd, does she look frightened to you?"
+
+Lloyd glanced over at the woman but he couldn't see what Boyce was
+talking about.
+
+All he could see was Grenadine leaning against a tree with her arms
+crossed and her eyes staring straight ahead.
+
+Lloyd walked away from Boyce and soon was helping her climb up the
+rungs towards the branch where the nest was resting.
+
+Boyce watched them climb.  He was disturbed when Lloyd never came back
+down to get his pack.
+
+Boyce put both packs on, one around each shoulder and he slowly made
+his way up the tree and then swung his legs astride the branch when he
+reached it.
+
+Lloyd and Grenadine were already reclined in the nest when Boyce took
+the packs and set them inside the nest with them.
+
+From his pack Boyce took out his cape and electric light.  With a
+little food and his water sack, he made his way to the butt of the
+branch and sat against the trunk of the tree.
+
+With the final particles of light scattering through the forest, Boyce
+scanned the area to make certain that no animals were in the vicinity.
+He looked up into the clouded tree tops and wondered about the lore of
+the gremlin kingdom and whether or not it was true.
+
+It was dark now; pitch and silent but for occasional sounds of
+night-birds whistling through the trees and, at times the sounds of
+rocks being overturned by large and hungry animals looking for grubs.
+
+Many hours had passed since Boyce took the first watch.
+
+He was finished slowly eating his food and keeping awake because he
+didn't dare risk leaving them defenceless.
+
+Hours later, Boyce crawled along the branch to the nest, having his
+light on it so that he wouldn't fall from it.
+
+At the nest, he was ready to call Lloyd to his turn at watch, and he
+came upon them when they were at the height of love making.  Grenadine
+was  obviously the aggressive one.
+
+He turned off the light and crawled back to the tree trunk, and leaned
+up against it, throwing his legs around the branch to keep himself
+stable.
+
+Something, he thought, was happening to his friend.  Lloyd was
+behaving oddly and not like himself, and what's worse, Boyce didn't
+know how he could help Lloyd.
+
+
+CHAPTER  NINETEEN
+
+Lloyd stood up in the nest, stretched and tucked his tunic back into
+his pants.  He looked over at Boyce wrapped tightly in his dark cape,
+staring right back at him with withdrawn eyes.  His face was pale and
+his lips were dry and slightly cracked from the trifle breeze that
+filtered through the forest during the night.
+
+Lloyd tipped his head to Boyce and Grenadine peaked over the rim of the
+nest and look at him, as well.
+
+Lloyd and Grenadine shared some of his rations and Boyce began to
+straighten up from his uncomfortable night of sleeplessness.  His legs
+dangled off the branch while he sprinkled water on his hand then patted
+it over his face.
+
+Breathing coarsely and heavily, Boyce looked over at Lloyd and
+Grenadine setting their clothing in order, and he looked way when he
+saw Lloyd kiss Grenadine's hand.
+
+Boyce lifted his pack around his shoulders and then threw his cape
+about himself and climbed down the tree.
+
+It was an eerie peacefulness on the ground and he felt very ill-at-ease
+all by himself.  He took his laser from his belt case and seared some
+marks on a few dozen trees, heading in a straight line, south from the
+tree in which they spent the entire night.
+
+Lloyd watched Boyce walk in the direction of the blazed trees and he
+knew that Boyce was going ahead, alone.  He climbed down from the tree
+with his pack and Grenadine, on his back.  Her beautiful legs and
+delicate arms tightly clutched him about his body, and she sensually
+rubbed her lips on the back of his neck.
+
+They followed the trail that was hastily marked by Boyce, who was far
+ahead by the time that they started.
+
+For their own protection and welfare, Boyce knew that they had to hurry
+out of the forest.  This place was taking its toll on the both of them;
+Boyce with his potent strength and Lloyd with his immobility of
+character.  He was certain that their safety was only assured by the
+speed of which they could make it to the other side of the forest.  A
+third night would surely taken them, thought Boyce.
+
+Many hours were spent in Boyce's struggle to make the other side.  His
+weapon was drawn at all times and in his speed he shot several large
+animals, regardless if they motioned to attack him, or not.  He
+couldn't chance any friendly influences in this forest.  He could not
+trust this place of legend and mystery while he worried for his friend,
+helper and teacher, Lloyd Bartlett, to make it to the other side.
+
+On the other side was an immense canyon, stretching to each side of
+him, as far as the eye could see.
+
+There, far to one side, was a swinging cable bridge connecting the two
+sides of the canyon; they were certainly a kilometre apart.
+
+He waited at the place that he came out of the forest, for about an
+hour.  Then, as if beckoned back into the forest, he followed his
+markings back towards Lloyd and Grenadine.
+
+One half hour into the forest, Boyce saw Lloyd and Grenadine leaning
+against a large boulder, embraced and oblivious.
+
+Grenadine was in front of Lloyd and she was kissing him while,
+unnoticed, a large pack of dogs came out of the shadows of the trees
+and made their way towards them.
+
+Lloyd didn't see the dogs and he didn't even hear some of them snarling
+as they neared.
+
+Boyce saw the dogs quickly move upon them, and he saw that Lloyd didn't
+have his laser out of its case.  There was no time to warn them.
+
+He rushed down on one knee and set his gun on the electrophoric
+setting.  He fired into the middle of the pack of dogs.  Several fell,
+kicking as they died.  A few others howled into a whimper and scurried
+away. A few of them turned and advanced upon Boyce.
+
+Lloyd looked up and saw the dogs run towards Boyce.  In a sleepy daze
+he drew his laser and pointed it at the dogs.  Just as he was firing
+Grenadine grabbed his arm and pointed it towards the ground, allowing
+the laser to gouge a large hole into the earth.
+
+Unsure of what had actually happened Lloyd slowly focused his eyes upon
+Grenadine.  As he stared at her he was transfixed upon her green eyes
+which began to change to a shiny rust colour as she slowly began to
+back away from him.
+
+Once more he fired several rounds at the dogs, vaporising one that
+committed to a jump upon Boyce, giving the young man the chance to duck
+and roll away.
+
+As Boyce rolled he came to rest upon one knee.  He raised his laser,
+bracing his wrist with the other hand.  The power cell within the laser
+was dead and one dog was too near to him for either he or Lloyd to kill
+it from the positions they were both were situated.
+
+Boyce, fearful of this circumstance, still remained calm.  His eyes
+scanned the ground about him.  Quickly he had noticed a large tree
+branch resting inches from his left hand.  Without much plan or thought
+Boyce scooped the tree branch with his left hand sending it in flight
+towards his right hand.  As surely as rises the sun the branch found
+its mark. He wielded the stick high over his head as he sprang to his
+feet.  He stood with his feet placed far enough apart for a sure-footed
+balance and allowed the stick to come crashing down upon one of the
+dog's as it hurled itself towards him.  A thundering crack echoed about
+the forest as Boyce found the mark of the dog's back, crushing it into
+a bloody pulp.
+
+Lloyd, now achieving a sense of sobriety, shot at a few more of the
+dogs and failed to notice Grenadine moving away from him.  She picked
+up a jagged rock and flung it towards Lloyd's head.
+
+Without surprise at what he saw, Boyce quickly sprang off of his feet
+and lunged towards Lloyd.  But the rock found its mark hitting him
+behind the left cheek before Boyce knocked him to the ground.
+
+Boyce reached him as he had sunk to his knees and toppled to one side.
+But Lloyd did not lose consciousness.  Boyce lifted him onto his lap
+and Lloyd's head shifted over, his eyes seeking the beautiful waif,
+Grenadine.
+
+Their eyes caught each other; Lloyd's displayed his broken heart and
+Grenadine's showing a satisfied mania.
+
+Before them both, Grenadine broke into a shrieking laugh and fell down
+upon her hands and knees.  In their amazement and horror, she began to
+transform into a large black wild bitch.
+
+She growled at them, foam frothing and flying out of her mouth.  Sharp
+and moonlight white fangs glistened, only out-shined by the ruby red
+glint of her eyes.  She sprang directly at Boyce catching him in the
+chest.
+
+Boyce tried to fend her off by flailing his arms, but he was weakened
+by the shock to his body, knocking the air from him.
+
+With glaring, burning eyes and the flash of the lightning white teeth,
+she howled then violently thrust at Boyce's throat.  Boyce grabbed her
+head inside his bent elbow and attempted to turn her over.  When he
+finally got her beneath him, he tried to clamp her snout shut with his
+left hand.  In a frenzy but yet in control Boyce made a search of the
+ground for Lloyd's laser, which had dropped when he was hit by the
+rock, but he wasn't able to find it.
+
+Boyce suddenly let go of Grenadine's snout, rolling quickly away from
+her then in a blink of an eye moving into a standing position and
+defenceless.
+
+Grenadine got onto her feet as well and growled as they both stood
+there staring and circling one another.
+
+Once more she leaped in Boyce's direction but this time the loud twang
+of an electrophore resonated about the woods.  Lloyd had fired at
+Grenadine.
+
+Lloyd crawled over to Boyce.  He was lying on the ground with
+Grenadine's lifeless but, again, human body draped over him.  He rolled
+her off from him and put his hand on her chest. In an instant he
+reached over for Boyce and did the same, then sighed with relief when
+he found him still breathing.
+
+"Boyce ... you're alright!"  was all he said.
+
+Boyce silently nodded and spent the next few moments trying to catch
+his breath, and Lloyd kept a watchful eye for any more dogs.
+
+Boyce sat up and they just looked at one another.  Nothing was said.
+Nothing had to be said.  Both knew exactly what had happened and what
+was, was.  Lloyd understood what was on Boyce's mind.  He knew that
+Boyce could see the potential danger over the last few days, but had
+nevertheless, allowed it to manifest.  He, himself, should have
+realised the danger especially with her unafraid attitude, at the tree,
+the last evening.
+
+Lloyd pointed his laser at her body.  He severed her head then shot a
+large hole into her chest where he dug out her heart with his bare
+hands.
+
+Boyce made it to his feet and staggered about the area until he found
+the laser that he dropped early into the struggle.  He finally found it
+near the body of the dog that he killed with the tree branch.
+
+He tucked the gun into his belt case and surveyed the woods.
+
+Several dogs were still pacing to and fro watching Lloyd mutilate
+Grenadine's body.  They watched as he dug out her heart and stuff it
+into her dead mouth.  They quickly ran off into the woods when he threw
+her head at them.
+
+"Let's get out of here."
+
+No sooner did Boyce suggest their departure that they began to run
+through the forest, following the markings he had made earlier.
+
+At the end of the forest they were still running.  Boyce lead the way
+to bridge and entered a few steps into it.
+
+"Is it safe, I wonder?"
+
+
+"It has to be safer than what we had just left!"  Lloyd admitted,
+pointing in the direction from which they came.
+
+It was at this point that the yelping and growling sounds of many dogs
+began to echo from the forest not very far away.
+
+They looked at one another and shrugged in unison as they began to run
+across the bridge.  They laughed as they ran especially when the bridge
+began to swing wildly with every step they took and they prayed to the
+one true living God to strengthen the bridge until they made it across
+the canyon.  The other side of the canyon seemed to move farther and
+farther away and the chasm below them became bottomless to their minds.
+
+They pushed on.
+
+Lloyd looked back to see the distance that they had made to this point
+and there, also making their way across the bridge, was a pack of
+blood-hungry dogs.
+
+"This is very disconcerting!"  Boyce commented.
+
+"Hold on, Boyce!"  Lloyd ordered then stomped his foot on the part of
+the bridge directly behind them and the shock wave travelled back
+towards the dogs upsetting the lead dogs balance and footing, forcing
+them off the bridge and into the chasm.  A couple others dropped when
+Lloyd shot at them, but this seemed to egg-on the other dogs even more.
+
+In seconds the shock wave returned to their side of the bridge making
+both of them nearly lose their footing.
+
+In short order the two men regained their footing and their balance but
+only to see the relentless dogs steadily, and quickly coming nearer.
+
+"We'll have to do this the hard way!"  said Lloyd then motioned to
+Boyce to follow what he does.
+
+They wrapped their arms about the tension cables that held the bridge
+up and they wrapped their legs about the support ropes which held the
+partly rotten wood that was the bridge.  Lloyd then drew his gun and
+shot into the middle of the bridge just ahead of where the dogs were
+now encroaching.
+
+The bridge split.  Wood splinters flew everywhere.  The dogs tumbled
+hundreds of meters to there deaths on the chasm floor.
+
+Grabbing for the tension cable with his gun hand, Lloyd had released
+his gun as the bridge head they were hanging on to recoiled towards the
+opposite cliff wall of the canyon.
+
+Both hit the wall hard, their eyes closed as if that would cushion the
+pain of impact in some way.
+
+When the bridge moved no more, they opened their eyes and checked to
+see if the other was still there.  Their eyes met and with a reassuring
+nod they looked up and slowly started to climb.
+
+Although the distance they were climbing was not far the tangled mess
+of the bridge was difficult to negotiate and both were near to
+exhaustion from their battle, and their run.
+
+Lloyd's cheek was bleeding but his hands each stretched and searched
+for the next rung and his feet each found its mark, though it was all
+through a virtual unconsciousness.  What kept him going was his memory
+of the promise he made to Brook and Dearborne; it was the promise he
+had, once again, rememebred.  It pushed him onward to his success and
+he continued to climb as he felt a self-embarrassment for their
+predicament.  He had allowed the memory of his promise to escape his
+mind when he was with Grenadine and now he was sorry.
+
+Lloyd had made it to the top and Boyce pulled him up to the edge and
+dragged him over some flat rocks.  There they both lay for rest,
+staring at the immense evil forest from which they came, looming on
+the other side of the canyon.
+
+"Let's not do this again!" Boyce pleaded, with a grin.
+
+Both passed out.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWENTY
+
+The sun slowly ascended in the east, appearing to rise from the distant
+end of the canyon, giving light to the rocky gap, through to its other
+far end.
+
+Boyce opened his eyes to see some birds flying overhead.   He quickly
+sat up but after he saw they had made it across the bridge he felt more
+relaxed.  He stared back, at the immensity of the Dark Forest and its
+perpetually clouded tree tops.
+
+Now he wondered, more than when they were inside the forest, if the
+mythical lore about the gremlin city, in the cloudy tree tops, was true.
+
+Lloyd now sat up, as well, and with hazy eyes looked towards the
+forest, too.
+
+He glanced to Boyce who wasn't looking at him at the time, very much
+intent in his study of the canyon.
+
+"That place will get a man -- one way or another!"  Lloyd said waiting
+for a response from Boyce.   "Boyce ... I can't begin to say how sorry
+-- "
+
+" -- Let it be, Lloyd!"  Boyce cut into his apology, but not in a
+manner suggesting disrespect.  "You weren't yourself and nor was I.  I
+suppose the forest reached the both of us."
+
+Lloyd nodded and sighed as he stared towards yesterday's events.
+
+"It was an awesome teacher, my friend."  Boyce began.  "It taught us
+what we feared the most.  It taught you the pain of loneliness and duty
+and it taught me that fighting, and killing, is unavoidable."
+
+Lloyd placed his hand firmly on Boyce's shoulder, offering a silent
+thanks for his understanding and forgiveness.
+
+"I know the need that you had for the company of someone like
+Grenadine.  I suppose the forest knew that and used it against you.
+Yet, it didn't have the power to turn us against one another!"
+
+Lloyd felt ashamed of his behaviour of the last few days but he did
+believe that Boyce was genuinely sympathetic about it all.  He also
+knew that Boyce was right about the Forest using fear against its
+trespassers.
+
+Boyce finally looked away from the Forest and riveted his eyes on Lloyd.
+
+"Your father told me about Charnan."  he admitted to Lloyd.  "I can't
+tell you how very sorry I felt about that.  That's the only reason that
+I am able to understand."
+
+Lloyd's eyes glided down to his hands.  "I began to fall in love with
+her."  he confessed, remembering how soft and smooth Grenadine's skin
+was to his caresses.
+
+" She was very beautiful ... too bad she was a gremlin."
+
+"She was a lycanthrope."  Lloyd corrected.  "In ancient times they
+called her kind, werewolves!"
+
+"Whatever she was, Lloyd, I will never dismiss myths or legends after
+this trip."
+
+Far across the canyon the winds carried the howling cries of the dogs
+that never made it to the bridge, in pursuit of the two men.
+
+Through the telescope Boyce peered at the other side of the canyon at a
+scant few dogs that paraded back and forth, and then throwing
+themselves off of the cliff to join their dead comrades below.  He
+passed the glass to Lloyd.
+
+"The parts couldn't survive without the rest of the body."
+
+Boyce listened and nodded at Lloyd's insight.  It was personal to his
+friend, but Boyce understood the consequences of the dogs'suicide.
+
+"Instead of living with the loss, knowing they would bare great
+loneliness, they decided to die rather than carry on by themselves."
+
+Several hours after the sun rose high in the sky, the two continued
+south on their journey back to Pomperaque.
+
+The next five days were relaxing and uneventful, in comparison to their
+trek through the forest.  Many animals were seen along this path but
+none seemed hostile -- to the men's relief.
+
+They only had the one weapon left between them.  Physically, they were
+becoming weaker with each meter that they travelled, but regardless of
+their discomfort, they relentlessly carried-on.
+
+On their eleventh day of travel they came across a God-sent farming
+community where they replenished their food and water supplies.
+
+There they spent the evening listening to tales of a once great nation
+before the great scourge of man.  They already knew all the truth, but
+they didn't anticipate the stories events, and they both kept their
+knowledge to themselves.
+
+They knew that Manguino's spies and his influence were already reaching
+into the hearts of little towns, such as this one.
+
+A small skirmish broke-out in the town that night.  It was all about
+the tales of the old ways, but Lloyd and Boyce laughed at the fisticuff
+like it was part of the story being told, and later graciously accepted
+an offer by an older man to spent the evening on his farm.
+
+"The loft in my stable is dry and very warm."  promised the old man.
+
+Refreshed, with a new supply of food and water, they continued south
+until two days later they saw the Sedarin capital on the horizon of the
+Sedarin Plateau.
+
+They spent the evening on a small mesa several kilometres from Sedara
+and the next morning they made their way into the heart of the city.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWENTY-ONE
+
+Entering the city, Lloyd refreshed for Boyce the details and customs
+that were peculiar to the Sedash.
+
+"They're hermaphrodites, but some exhibit qualities that are more
+inclined to one, or other, sex to which we are accustomed."
+
+"How can you tell which is which?"
+
+"You will be able to tell."  Lloyd grinned.  "They wear obvious
+clothing, and the two distinct types do carry themselves in a
+noticeable manner.  Plus their title will be the give-away.  Those
+hailed as 'Mas', in their name are the more masculine type.  Those that
+are the more feminine are addressed as 'Dam'."
+
+Lloyd recounted the basic formalities of custom for Boyce and explained
+that these people were not known to be very hostile. Yet, just as they
+neared the city centre they were surrounded by a dozen of the city's
+Eminent - the palatial security force.
+
+"You are not of our people!"  accused one of the guards, pressing the
+tip of their lance up against Lloyd's throat.  The others did the same
+to Boyce.
+
+Surprised by this, the two men stared at the main guard, and expressed
+their displeasure at the aggressive halt of their path to the palace.
+
+Lloyd took the point of the lance into one of his hands and
+nonchalantly moved it away from his throat, then cleared it before he
+spoke.
+
+"We are from Besten.  We have permission to pass through your beautiful
+city!"  he said.
+
+"We know nothing of such a thing!" yelled the main guard, then
+ordered.  "Follow!"
+
+"They are 'Mas'?"  Boyce guessed.
+
+"Yes!"  confirmed Lloyd, as the guards took their supplies from them.
+
+"No speaking till you are given permission!"  ordered the guard.
+
+The two men began to follow the lead guard but were stopped momentarily
+by another one who ripped the belt case from around Boyce's waist.
+
+They were escorted to the palace of the Sedash ruler, Mas-Trephor.
+
+Under a strict watch, they were forced to sit for several hours. That
+was to be their wait for an audience with the great ruler of Sedara.
+
+During the lengthy wait to see Trephor, there was a Dam that brought to
+them some food and drink.  The guards refused to let her through at
+first, but then as if they had no choice, allowed her entry to see the
+two men.  She served each one individually but said nothing to them.
+
+The men glanced at one another when she handed them some goblets of
+drink.
+
+"Don't drink it, yet!" Lloyd whispered.
+
+He took Boyce's goblet and took a sip from it, then soon after took a
+gulp from his own.
+
+"Can't be too cautious!" Boyce whispered back at him and the Dam
+hermaphrodite smiled.
+
+"I assure you both that the drinks and the food are quite safe.  If you
+do not believe me let me drink."
+
+Lloyd examined his server.  From the slight form he guessed sixteen
+years of age, and from the look of those bright green eyes, he soon
+nodded to Boyce that he could drink.
+
+"I am Dam Lehnar. I am the Dam offspring of Mas-Trephor."
+
+She bowed her head to the men and Lloyd introduced himself and his
+friend.  He told her that they hailed from Besten, but didn't burden
+her with much more.
+
+The response excited her because she had heard many interesting stories
+about that fantastic city and it was always her wish to one day attend
+the Blaisaman there.
+
+"My apologies for your detention.  I will go now to Trephor and ask
+that your petition be expedited."
+
+"It would be our greatest appreciation if you did so, Dam-Lehnar."
+Boyce kindly smiled at her.
+
+She smiled back at him then turned and hurried down the long hallway
+adjacent to the room in which they were being kept. In a very short
+order a page entered the room and summoned the two men to appear before
+Mas Trephor.
+
+Lloyd was beginning to realise why these people were behaving unlike
+the reports of their non-hostile ways.  They had arrived in Sedara at
+the time of the month when the major part of the population was in
+their phase of inconceivability; as relative to their menstrual cycles.
+
+It was during this week-long period of time that was usually set aside
+for public exhibitions.  Prisoners and slaves were violently beaten
+and raped, and even killed during those festival days.  These
+violations became
+
+a part of the Sedash culture, where they tried to display their
+superiority over the one-sexed humans.
+
+Trephor, as the ruler, usually molested the first prisoner of his
+choice, so opening the week-long celebrations.
+
+Throughout the regular times of the month, violations took place
+regardless, since the Sedash had found great pleasure and entertainment
+in the inflicting of discomfort on their subordinates.  The reports of
+their non-hostile ways were less than accurate.
+
+Gallant gentlemen as they were, self-taught in the presentation to
+those who are royal, they both went down upon one knee as they bowed to
+Mas Trephor.
+
+"Stand!"  Trephor's voice cut like a blunt knife through old leather,
+and although it had an underlying female quality, its hoarseness made
+both Lloyd and Boyce assume that the voice was practised into being
+more masculine over the years.
+
+They rose and faced Trephor, still remaining quiet.
+
+"You are handsome men.  We welcome you to our court of Sedara.  We ask
+you stay and rest with us before you continue on your journey."
+Trephor stopped for a moment then leaned forward on one elbow, letting
+a portion of his wrinkled breast show through the lynx wrap that he
+wore.  "Where are you two lovely men going?"
+
+"Gothal, your majesty!  We are scholars from the Blaisaman at Besten,
+called to Gothal to teach the children there -- in the ways of alchemy
+and medicine."  said Lloyd.
+
+Boyce stood there quietly not reacting to anything that Lloyd said.
+
+Lloyd continued.  "And may I, also, modestly add that we are quite
+proficient in the arts and in literature."
+
+Dam Lehnar was seated to the left of Trephor, at all times, and she
+stared at Lloyd with a
+
+warm and affectionate eye.  She was displaying attraction to him since
+the first time that she saw him.  Now, with her believing that he was a
+scholar for the Bestenese Blaisaman, she was sure that she loved him.
+
+"We were to be allowed safe passage through your lovely city, Mas
+Trephor.  There is an agreement between our two nations."  Lloyd
+continued.
+
+"Yes, friends.  There was an agreement but we were not told who was to
+pass through here, or where they were going.  You may rest here for a
+day or two, if you care to, and you will be escorted to our southern
+perimeter."  Trephor was being quite congenial.  "Until then, anything
+that you desire you may receive at your request!"
+
+Boyce bowed his head slightly to Trephor never removing his eyes from
+the leader's face as he thanked him.
+
+Lloyd bowed also and Trephor gave them a dismissing nod.
+
+"Escort our friends to the state-room!"  he commanded to the guard.
+
+When they exited the royal hall, Trephor called to another guard and
+whispered to him.
+
+"Do not let them out of the state-room.  I want them here for the
+festival the day after tomorrow!"
+
+Dam Lehnar's comely face lost its radiant gleam when she realised that
+her father was truncating the agreement signed with Besten.
+
+"They are beautiful and smart men.  The prime specimens of their kind,
+perfect for opening this month's celebration."
+
+Lehnar was panicky and afraid for Lloyd and his companion.  She knew
+that at the celebration they would be tortured and most probably killed.
+
+"Trephor?"  Lehnar pleaded with her father.  "Do not hurt these two
+men."
+
+"I cannot permit them to live, Lehnar.  They are dangerous and they are
+men.  They lie like demons and would sooner cut out your heart than to
+give you a nice greeting."
+
+"But one pleases me, father."  said Lehnar.
+
+"Which, my dearest -- the young king or his faithful teacher?"
+
+"Young king?" Lehnar was astonished by what she heard.
+
+"Yes, Lehnar. That young man is a king.  He is called Boyce Loebh.  He
+carries himself like a powerful leader, and that older one -- he is a
+brilliant man, but not a scholar.  The Bartletts are leaders in Besten
+-- not students of knowledge."  he told her.
+
+"Bartlett pleases me, my dear parent.  Will you spare him for me?"
+
+"I will give him to you my sweet daughter.  My designs are for the
+young king -- that one possessed this remarkable weapon!"
+
+Trephor took from his lynx wrap a small device.  It was Boyce's laser
+gun.  He turned to Lehnar and showed it to her.
+
+"Scholars do not carry such things on lengthy journeys.  They just use
+their minds to defend themselves."
+
+He lifted the gun towards the door, at the other end of the royal hall
+and fired a burst of the electrophore.  The stone doors blew off their
+hinges and crumbled into dust.
+
+"Yes, indeed.  I do so want that young Loebh!"
+
+"And, Bartlett?"  pleaded Lehnar.
+
+"He is yours. Do with him, as you will!"
+
+The men had bedded early, after taken into the state-room by the guards.
+
+Aside the fact that the men had fallen asleep early, they didn't wake
+up until noon.
+
+Now, during their first day of stay in Sedara, Boyce and Lloyd weren't
+aware that they were being held captive.   They slept much of the
+morning away and relaxed most of the afternoon and evening.  they
+didn't care to leave their chamber and when they requested something to
+be given to them, their request were carried out without a word.
+
+The following day found the men waking early and by noon they were
+beginning to feel restless.
+
+They tried to leave their state-room but the guards just asked them if
+they could bring something to them.  But what the men wanted was to
+just go outside and walk the city.  It didn't take long for them to
+realise what was happening to them.
+
+"It seems like Mas Trephor intends to keep us here.!"  Lloyd had said
+to one of the guards, but received no reply.
+
+It was to their fortunate circumstance that Dam Lehnar had come along
+and caught what Lloyd had said.
+
+"My dear Mr. bartlett, you are not being confined."  she said to him,
+in a soft tone of voice suggesting sincerity.  "Here, walk with me and
+I will show you our gracious city."
+
+"Thank-you, Dam Lehnar!"  Lloyd accepted her invitation but before he
+left he moved close to Boyce and whispered to him that the Sedash knew
+who they were.
+
+Boyce responded with a nod and motioned for him to go with Lehnar.
+
+Throughout the day and evening, Dam Lehnar escorted Lloyd to various
+parts of interest in the city.  Many of the sights that she showed him
+dated back to the time of the first colony of hermaphrodites that
+established a settlement on the Sedarin Plateau.
+
+In the late evening Lehnar took Lloyd to the theatre and they watched a
+very graphic account of the Sedash becoming a great and powerful people
+in their region.  There was much violence and bloodshed.
+
+Lehnar sat very close to Lloyd during the evening.  He noticed it
+immediately and prayed that another situation would not develop with
+her as it did with Grenadine.  He also did not feel sexually inclined
+towards Lehnar, even though she was predominantly feminine and was
+generally speaking, pleasant to the eye.
+
+Shortly after midnight Lehnar took Lloyd back to the palace. They
+continued to stroll through the gardens where she was showing Lloyd the
+various statues that dotted the path.  All were of hermaphrodites in
+erotic poses.  She was hoping that he would become interested in her by
+what he saw.  The opposite was true.
+
+"I must thank you for your kindness, Lehnar.  Boyce and I appreciate
+the gracious hospitality that you and your father have extended to us
+during our stay."  Lloyd was starting to become diplomatic.  He wanted
+the stroll to end soon because he was afraid that Lehnar would begin to
+expect something from him that he was incapable of giving to her.   "If
+you ever come to Besten, it is my hope that you will enjoy yourself as
+much as I have!"
+
+He thanked her and she began to melt for him.  The tone of his voice,
+expressing his gratitude and trust, made her want him all the more.
+She had also become very sad, knowing what Trephor had planned for the
+both of them.
+
+"I feel that I love you, Lloyd!" she announced to him.
+
+He tried to keep any emotion from showing.  He tried not to give her
+any impression of his feelings in regards to her declaration.
+
+"I am very flattered, Dam." he finally replied.
+
+She looked at him as they walked back towards the garden entrance to
+the palace, and before entering she took his hand.  She kissed him on
+the cheek then asked him a question that made him feel very uneasy.
+
+"Would you mind it very much if you were to live in my city?"
+
+Lloyd wasn't at all perplexed by her question.  It was a clear
+invitation and it clearly displayed her intentions towards him.
+
+He slowly turned away from her resuming his way to the state-room.
+
+"Besten is my home."  he answered her.  "My family and friends are
+there.  You do understand?"
+
+"Yes.  I understand.  It seems that you pure humans will never accept
+our kind!"  she said.
+
+"Please, Lehnar ... don't speak that way.  Man is strange in his ways.
+I suppose that is why the world is, as it is.  We all have our own
+peculiarities and these are what set all people apart.  With some this
+creates love.  With other people, only hate."
+
+She took all her view of him as he spoke and she wished that he was a
+Sedash, like herself.
+
+"I don't hate the Sedash, and I do like you."  he resumed.  "But
+because of our physical differences I would have difficulties in giving
+you the love that you seek."
+
+She let her head tip forward, her chin resting on her chest.  She
+understood exactly what Lloyd meant.
+
+"You are attractive, Lehnar.  You will find someone else.  That person
+will be much better suited for you than I could ever be."
+
+She glanced at the state-room door as they finally reached it.
+
+"Tell me, Mr. Bartlett ... is that young man a good king?
+
+Lloyd didn't respond.  His eyes were enough to question her about how
+she knew who they were.
+
+"My father knew the both of you from the very start.  The young one
+carried himself with great nobility, and you always look to him for
+approval."  she continued to reveal to him her knowledge of them.
+
+Lloyd quietly laughed as he answered her.  "Do you really believe that
+if my friend were a King that we would surely travel the trade route by
+caravan, rather than travel by foot?"
+
+"My father taught me, methods can often be misleading."  she said.
+"Then there is that strange and powerful weapon that your friend
+carried.  It is not the compliment of an intellectual."
+
+Lloyd took Lehnar's chin in his hand and gazed deeply into her eyes.
+
+"You certainly are an inquisitive one!"  he said to her, trying to
+sound praising.  "We will talk more of this tomorrow.  I will then
+explain to you who we are.  Now it is late and we both better get some
+rest."
+
+She smiled with acceptance and Lloyd kissed the back of her hand.
+
+She left him as he entered the state-room and realised for the first
+time since he was standing with Lehnar that there were no guards.  He
+momentarily became concerned for Boyce's safety.  He looked about the
+dark room until he saw him reclined upon one of the divans.
+
+Boyce was still in the state-room.  It was obvious that he had been
+there all this time without being bothered, but it mildly confused
+Lloyd that Boyce didn't notice that he was left unguarded.
+
+He quietly shut the door to the room and began to remove his tunic.  It
+was then that he noticed, under the crack of the door, light and the
+movement of feet.
+
+One shadow crossed the light, but only one.
+
+He bent down and looked along the floor under the crack of the door and
+saw the callused feet of one guard on each side of the door.
+
+Lloyd now knew for certain that they were no longer as safe as he hoped
+they were.
+
+He quietly went over to Boyce and touched him on the shoulder.
+
+Boyce got up quickly and before he had a chance to say anything, Lloyd
+hushed him.
+
+"We're in danger, Boyce."  he whispered.
+
+"I know!" Boyce replied then closed his eyes in sleep again.
+
+Lloyd was surprised by the answer but he remained quiet.
+
+Boyce was capable in observing dangerous situations.  Afterall, he
+noticed the problem with Grenadine so Lloyd now trusted him all the
+more.
+
+"We have been watched every moment since we arrived here.  There are a
+few guards below our window and tonight, at the theatre I overheard
+some of the Sedash speak of their festival."  Boyce's keen senses
+picked up much as Lloyd discovered in his whisper.
+
+"We have at least two guards at the door!"  Lloyd informed him and then
+told him about Lehnar's mention of their suspicions about Boyce being
+king.
+
+"They have rescinded the contract!"  Boyce stated and Lloyd nodded
+affirmatively.
+
+"What now, Boyce?"
+
+Boyce eased back and looked at the shadows dancing on the ceiling.
+
+"Festival begins tomorrow night."  Boyce started.  "That gives us
+several hours to sleep.  This is my suggestion, for now."
+
+"Sleep?" echoed Lloyd, questioning.
+
+"If we're to run tomorrow, we don't want to run tired."  said Boyce.
+"You taught me that!"
+
+He smiled at Lloyd and wished him an easy and fulfilled sleep, and both
+quickly nodded off.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWENTY-TWO
+
+It wasn't until mid-morning when Lloyd and Boyce finally awoke.
+
+Boyce stretched and went to the window, catching sight of several
+guards marching back and forth, occasionally looking up at their window.
+
+Boyce smiled at Lloyd and pointed down to the ground.
+
+He went back to the table and sat down.
+
+"Well, Lloyd!  What should we eat?"
+
+Lloyd smiled at the ease by which Boyce took the situation and he
+leaned over the table to him.
+
+"You're calm enough to eat?" he asked.
+
+"We need strength for later.  So, while we still have this mock service
+from these people, we should accept it in our own mock way.
+
+Lloyd grinned from ear to tear then went to the door and opened it.  He
+thrust his head into the hallway and told the astonished guards to
+bring some food and drink to the room.
+
+It would be very difficult to leave the room this day.  They had to
+wait until dark before they could try anything but dark was many hours
+away.
+
+Dam Lehnar came around in the afternoon dressed in a snug, short white
+dress with open shoulders, and she sat about with the two men for
+several hours listening to Lloyd making up more details about who they
+were and where they were going.
+
+Finally, Lloyd took her hand and told her that all that they had told
+her was nothing but lies.  He told her that they were sorry for lying
+to her but it was a matter of their safety and need to stay alive.
+
+Then came a want for a favour.
+
+"You told me the other night that you loved me?  If you do, let us go.
+Help my friend and me to escape the festival opening tonight."  he
+asked her.
+
+"How do I help?  My father has me watched, too!"
+
+"Try to get our supplies to us and before the guards come, to take us
+to the stages, divert their attention and we will try to make out way
+out of the city."
+
+"I may be able to get most of your things." she promised them. "I can't
+recover your weapon, however.  My father carries it with him."
+
+"We don't care for the weapon as much as we care to take our leave from
+the city."  said Boyce.
+
+There was silence in the room for a moment and Lehnar soon stood up.
+
+"I promise you both that I'll see what I can do!"
+
+With this Lehnar left the state-room and the two men sat back and
+waited.
+
+Sunset was just a couple of hours away and Lehnar had been gone since
+the thick of the afternoon.
+
+They were worried that she either couldn't get their supply packs or
+she went against them by telling her father about their plans.
+
+Regardless of their anxieties, however, they waited for her to come
+back to them.
+
+As the sky began to darken and the hours quickly gained speed, and
+Boyce and Lloyd became more restless and nervous.   However, their long
+agitated wait was rewarded, for Lehnar had finally come back to their
+room with just one of their packs.  The pack was Lloyd's and much of
+what was inside was still there.  Only the telescope and its case was
+gone but the change of clothing and the maps were still inside.
+
+Lloyd kissed Lehnar and thanked her.
+
+Boyce had also kissed her hand.
+
+"Thank you so very much, Dam Lehnar!"  gleamed Lloyd.
+
+"There are no guards at your door.  I told them that I will watch you
+both and that you would still think that they were outside the door."
+she said to them.  "Leave the palace through the garbage chutes and
+make your way in the shadows of the fire alley."
+
+"Thank-you for your help, Lehnar."  Boyce said graciously and she
+smiled.
+
+"That alley will take you to the southern plateau and don't stop until
+you have reached the Divider's Ridge.  My people still stop their
+pursuit there, if they will follow you at all."
+
+"You are as helpful as you are beautiful, Dam Lehnar!"  Lloyd
+complimented her.
+
+"Take care, my friends!"  she said, and the men made their way out of
+the room and down the
+
+hallway to a closet door, and they found that they inside of the closet
+had no floor.
+
+Lehnar came out of the room and after Boyce, and Lloyd, jumped into the
+hole, she closed the door behind them then went to her own room.
+
+They hit bottom in a pile of rotting fish.
+
+"This stinks!" Boyce acknowledged.
+
+They looked around themselves trying no to breathe as they saw the
+mouldy pieces of bread and meat and other food-stuffs that have been
+down there for a good lengthy time, which only God could know for
+certain.
+
+They exited the garbage stores and found themselves in a narrow passage
+with an open ceiling.
+
+This must be the fire alley that Lehnar spoke of, they thought, and
+bent down low, they slowly but steadily made their way down.
+
+A quarter-hour later they were at the end of the alley, and to each
+side of them they saw the walls of the city extending in a forbidding
+manner.
+
+It was very dark now and only the stars were giving the men enough
+light to run by.
+
+The plateau spanned kilometres before them, and in the distance they
+saw the small rise that Lehnar called the Diviner's Ridge.
+
+They ran and kept running.  Silently they covered countless meters of
+ground with each breath that they took.
+
+They had to make it quickly to the ridge but they also had to watch the
+ground for holes and crevices.  If one, or both, were to fall into one
+of them, they would surely be caught and returned to Sedara.
+
+Behind them they now heard a great commotion and the city of Sedara
+became lit up like a sun.
+
+Trephor was looking for them and they knew it.  They were both tired,
+almost to the point of expiration but they wouldn't stop, lest they be
+caught.
+
+It was very dark, and although the stars shone enough light to guide
+them to their destination, they couldn't tell very well if they were
+being chased by Trephor's army.
+
+Sedara, behind them, emitted substantial light to produce silhouettes
+of anyone following them, but because of the size of the outer walls of
+the city, the two men couldn't see their pursuers until they were
+almost upon them.
+
+Their hearts beat heavily within their bodies.
+
+The pounding was hard and they soon wondered if their hearts were
+moving around in their bodies.  First their chests throbbed, then the
+sensations moved to their stomachs and legs, then into their necks and
+head.
+
+Over and over they were becoming weary and they felt like only the
+beating of their hearts had been pumping their legs the few extra
+kilometres to the rise.
+
+Boyce looked back and then saw that they truly were being pursued.
+
+With heavy breaths that wheezed and gagged he told Lloyd that they were
+being chased, but Lloyd kept his head about his and was steadfast.
+
+"Just a little further, my friend!" he urged.
+
+"I'm with you!" Boyce assured him, in three short gasps.
+
+With strength summoned from the deepest recesses of their souls, they
+began to run faster and steadier, and the ridge that was once distant
+began to move closer and closer with each
+
+successive stride that they took.
+
+Behind them, the light of Sedara shrank and the stars revealed a small
+cloud moving in the same direction as the men.
+
+The cloud was Trephor's army.  Some were on horse-back but the major
+part of it was made up of infantry, running as the men ran.
+
+The faster that Boyce and Lloyd had run, the lesser ahead they thought
+that they were going.
+
+Lloyd turned his head for an instant and saw the small hermaphrodite
+army, in hot pursuit, gaining ground with every second that expired.
+
+In his heart Boyce prayed that they could make the crest of the ridge
+before they passed-out, and there it was.  The ridge.
+
+"Oh God, lend us strength!"  he gulped to himself.
+
+The sounds of horses and feet grew louder and louder.  The
+hermaphrodites were nearly upon them.  Abruptly the men lost the sounds
+of the army as they lost their footing and they plunged into a drop in
+the ground, then lost consciousness.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWENTY-THREE
+
+When they came to the sun was already high in the sky.
+
+On his back, Lloyd looked up at the sheer face of a cliff some dozen
+meters in height and the way that he now felt, he knew that the climb
+up would be difficult.
+
+Boyce was lying on his stomach and he was regaining consciousness,
+too.  He soon tried to push himself up off the ground and this he
+tried a few times.
+
+Lloyd heard him finally stagger to his knees and he called to him.
+
+"Boyce!"  he said.  "Are you hurt?"
+
+"No -- just a little sore!"  he replied.
+
+"Look at that!"  Lloyd pointed to the cliff and upwards.
+
+Boyce looked at it then he said the same thing pointing in the opposite
+direction.
+
+Lloyd looked and there he saw rolling mountains and shrubs and deep
+gullies of rock.  What he saw was the tail end of the great Krolalin
+Mountain Range that swung down from the north to the south-west.
+
+They made it over the Divider's Ridge, and the Sedash troops did not
+pursue them.
+
+Still feeling somewhat exhausted, Lloyd and Boyce didn't eat anything
+when they awoke.  They saw that it was late in the morning and they
+still had a long way to go before reaching Pomperaque.
+
+They kept their pace steady as they headed south, keeping to the ridges
+along the route which they were taking so as not be vulnerable to
+possible ambushes if trapped in one of the dry river beds.
+
+The sun was beating down on them and they found the heat very intense
+and uncomfortable; yet, between the Dark Forest and Sedara, it was a
+welcomed blessing of peace to them.
+
+They gained a good distance as they walked and observed the nature
+around them; amazed at God's handiwork.
+
+Boyce saw a black bird flapping from tree to tree. He wondered if it
+was a crow, having seen a couple other crows throughout the journey,
+and when he heard its mocking caw, he knew it to be so.
+
+"Lloyd?"  Boyce began. "Do crows travel in groups, pairs or singularly?"
+
+It was an odd question, thought Lloyd, but he did see the crow and he
+knew that so did his friend.
+
+"I really don't know!"  he admitted.
+
+"Do you think it could be the same crow from the mine?"
+
+Lloyd shrugged, not caring one way or the other.
+
+The day slowly passed by while they hiked through the countryside, and
+night was only a few hours away.
+
+Boyce had told Lloyd that it was to their benefit to stop this day's
+travel early and rest longer for tomorrow's walk.
+
+On his advise, they stopped beside a trickling brook and built a small
+shelter and a fire, and had their first meal of the day.
+
+They were both tired but they knew that they could not rest until
+they've reached Pomperaque, and indeed until Boyce regained his
+rightful position in Phoride.
+
+They slept under the breezy, starry sky and were blessed with peaceful
+dreams that put them both apart from hate and struggle.
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY-FOUR
+
+For the next two days the men took to walking quickly and for long
+periods of time, without any rest.
+
+They would wake, have some food then head south to Phoride, and they
+wouldn't stop walking until it was almost pitch dark night.
+
+They only had one pack between them and they took turns carrying it.
+Every several hours that elapsed, one would hand the pack to the other
+while they walked.
+
+They were making good time and were covering long distances with each
+day that they walked.
+
+They never stopped to eat food, they ate while they walked until they
+reached the Serpent Strip; the land of the leper race.
+
+In the three days that Boyce and Lloyd travelled from Sedara, they
+covered over one hundred eighty kilometres (a remarkabl sixty
+kilometres per day, of walking).
+
+The men cast their eyes on the city of Palatka, sitting in the distance
+on the floor of the Serpent Strip.
+
+It wasn't an impressive city, made up of squat clay buildings that were
+cube-shaped. Yet, there was something about the whole place that made
+Lloyd and Boyce feel very ill-at-ease.
+
+Boyce thought that they felt that way because of the hermaphrodites'
+renegging on their agreement passage, signed with Besten.  He was
+afraid that the Palatkans would be the same way.
+
+Lloyd was more optimistic about this leg of their journey.  He told
+Boyce that he shouldn't jump to any conclusions about trusting the
+Palatkans.  Nevertheless, Boyce was hoping to convince Lloyd to circle
+around the Palatkan territory.  He argued that going around the Serpent
+Strip would only take an extra day's journey, but he believed it would
+be peaceful, as-well-as uneventful.   His other argument was the notion
+that they could replenish their supplies with wild fruit and they could
+kill game for food, along the way.
+
+Lloyd finally agreed to Boyce's prodding suggestions and seeing that
+his judgement for such things, throughout the course of this trek, was
+indeed good.
+
+Off to one side of the rock mound on which they stood they found an old
+lion's den.  There they secreted their pack and they went to sleep.
+
+The trip would be more or less uphill for a while since the Krolalin
+Range split into two parts; a smaller chain running all the way south
+to Pomperaque and its three rises of land surrounding it: Bimini Hill,
+Canon's Butte and Mount Benitar.
+
+They knew that they were close to their destination, now just a week's
+journey away.
+
+They weren't going to take the chance that the Palatkans would turn on
+them, as well.
+
+Tomorrow they would circle the strip, endeavouring to avoid further
+injuries and wear to their bodies.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWENTY-FIVE
+
+It was in the morning during the men's second wave of sleep that was
+coming over them in the before-dawn hours, that a cawing shriek was
+heard coming from overhead.
+
+The sun wasn't out yet, although it wasn't totally dark.
+
+The men had, at least one hour of sleep left to them before they were
+to wake and make their way around the strip.  At first they tried to
+ignore that squawking but it soon became so frantic and intense that
+they could no longer bare it.
+
+Boyce's slight affection for the single crow he had seen flying around,
+during their journey, was quickly waning and he quickly sat up to see
+where it was and shoo it away.
+
+He opened his eyes and saw six male figures standing around the opening
+of the den.
+
+"Lloyd, we're surrounded!"  Boyce screamed out to him and Lloyd quickly
+sprang to his feet when he saw them.
+
+"Lloyd!"  Boyce called out and Lloyd answered him quickly.  Boyce
+continued.  "This is getting ridiculous!"
+
+"I would say so!"  replied Lloyd.  "We should've thought twice before
+charging our friends, here!"
+
+The men took their capture in stride with the rest of their delays, and
+Boyce laughed.
+
+"Under the circumstances I couldn't see being cordially invited."
+
+One of the hunters poked Boyce in the ribs with the end of his club and
+Lloyd watched.
+
+"I guess that means silence?"  Boyce jested.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce were quiet while the leper hunters took them into the
+heart of Palatka.
+
+Hung in discomfort, they heard the sounds of life get louder until they
+saw buildings and people pass them on each side while they were carried
+deeper into the heart of the city.
+
+The haul into the city finally ended and they were dropped to the hard
+ground, and plumes of dust lolled about their heads.
+
+When the dust settled from in front of their faces they saw a pair of
+scabby and puffy, sandled feet before them.
+
+Each man slowly leaned backwards as far as they could and looked up at
+the tall body of a heavy set man, dressed in plain-looking robes and he
+was fanning himself from the heat.
+
+"Release them!"  said the leper and several of the hunters cut the
+ropes and the two captives got up from the ground beating themselves
+clean from the dust in their clothing.
+
+"Thank-you!"  said Boyce.
+
+"Yes!"  echoed Lloyd.
+
+They looked at one another for a long time, then the Palatkans that had
+them released spoke.
+
+"I am Urre, ruler of this race!"  he said then proceeded.  "I will ask
+you why you attacked my men?"
+
+Lloyd and Boyce glanced over at each other and Boyce spoke.
+
+"We seek forgiveness for that aggression!"  he said and the Palatkan
+ruler waited.  "We slept on the hill and when we woke we saw your men.
+Unaccustomed to seeing Palatkans, we undertook to defend ourselves.  We
+are sorry!"
+
+Boyce finished and Lloyd felt ill because of Boyce's statement about
+the Palatkan's appearance.
+
+Urre had an insulted expression and from behind him came a sedate and
+shy voice.  It was a man's voice yet it was very gentle.
+
+"Are you the travellers from Besten?"  asked the man.
+
+"Yes!" answered Lloyd.  "I am Lloyd Bartlett and this is my friend and
+apprentice, Boyce Loebh."
+
+"They are the ones we have agreement, to let pass through Palatka!"
+said the man.
+
+"Hold your tongue, Munsen!"  ordered Urre.  "They had broken their
+agreement with their attack upon our people."
+
+Boyce and Lloyd looked at one another, realising that they were in a
+predicament.
+
+"Take them to their cells." ordered Urre.
+
+Several Palatkans grabbed Boyce and Lloyd, and dragged them off to one
+side of the city, to the cliffs of the canyon where huge dungeon-like
+cells were made for Palatkan prisoners.
+
+They were cold and dingy rock cubes, barren of anything on which to
+rest on and to keep warm with.
+
+The cells smelled musty and there were unrecognizable things written
+on the walls and ceiling, and some were even seen on the floor when
+the layers of dust were kicked up by the men's pacing.
+
+"You should never have said that we weren't used to Palatkan
+appearance!"  Lloyd scolded Boyce then sighed.
+
+"I was being honest with them!"
+
+Lloyd put his hand on Boyce's shoulder and tried to console him, from
+his error.
+
+"It's alright, Boyce.  Maybe we can talk to Urre and see if we can
+apologise properly."  He moved away and looked out of the hole in the
+rock door.  "Until then, we should make the best of this place."
+
+"It is so cool in here but outside the heat is blistering!"
+
+"Wait until his evening.  It'll be worse in here."
+
+Lloyd came away from the door and leaned up against one of the walls
+and huddled himself into a ball.
+
+"Better get some sleep now because it will be too damned cold to sleep
+later tonight!"  Lloyd instructed Boyce and he went down on the floor
+and tried to sleep.
+
+It was difficult but they finally managed to fall asleep and after
+sunset, Munsen came to them with offers of warm blankets and a hot
+broth of cooked fowl.
+
+He called to them several times and Boyce finally got up and went to
+the rock door.
+
+Lloyd also had gotten up and went to the door.
+
+"I am Munsen, the high-priest of Life."  he said to them.  "I was told
+that you will be in our rituals of Life and Energy, after-tomorrow."
+Munsen told them.
+
+"I will make a tough meal, my friend!"  Lloyd promised to him.
+
+"You know of our ways, then?"  Munsen urged for clarification.
+
+"Yes, we do!"  Boyce said. "Would there be any way for us to appeal to
+Urre, to honour the passage agreement?"
+
+Munsen looked down and shook his head.
+
+"I am afraid that our Lord Urre had never intended to allow you
+passage."
+
+Lloyd and Boyce glanced at one another and Lloyd sighed.
+
+"You were right, Boyce!"
+
+"I had brought for you blankets and hot broth to drink.  Your cells
+will be unbearably cold by dark, and these should help!"
+
+He pushed the blankets through the hole, followed by the large amphora
+of broth.
+
+"I am truly sorry that it's not very much, but it is all that I could
+get for you!"
+
+"At least we'll be more comfortable before we die!"  Lloyd commented in
+a sarcastic tone of voice.
+
+"Please don't!"  pleaded Munsen.
+
+"I am sorry!"  Lloyd was apologetic, realising that this man was really
+and sincerely trying to be kind.
+
+"Listen!"  he told them.  "Long before we had your Bestenese Emissary
+come to have us sign the agreement of safe passage, I had a
+dream-vision about it and about you."
+
+Boyce and Lloyd eagerly listened to the man.
+
+"I saw that Urre would not honour the agreement.  Now, I set in motion
+a plan to throw him down from power if you did come and if you were
+captured.  You came and you were captured."
+
+"What is your plan, Munsen?"  requested Boyce.
+
+"I have many friends that are, at this very time, arming themselves
+for our attack tomorrow.  If we succeed in destroying Urre's rule, you
+will be given supplies and be allowed to go freely, and in peace."
+
+"What if the overthrow fails?"  Lloyd had wondered listening to Munsen
+speak.
+
+"I have other friends that will risk their lives to free you, if the
+rebellion fails."
+
+"Why?"  Boyce was confused momentarily and he needed to be given a
+reason why someone, who they didn't know, would die for their release.
+
+"I had seen the doom and destruction of Palatka with your deaths, and
+so if you had but a hair harmed on your heads.  Palatka must have peace
+with you, Boyce Loebh; yet, I don't exactly understand why?"
+
+Munsen's reply fit into the men's understanding.
+
+Somehow Munsen knew these prisoner's importance and he knew that their
+harm would mean the extinction of his civilization.
+
+"We engage our uprising tomorrow.  When you hear commotion and
+thunderous booming, keep low to the floor.  We have found a way to make
+a burning substance that is explosive.  It can shatter rock and kill."
+
+"Please take care and may the true living God bless your victory."
+
+"If we believed in Him, I would hope that it would be so!"  Munsen said
+and before he left he told them that he would try to see them once more
+before the battle, and then he left them.
+
+"He has a leader's compassion!"  Boyce stated.
+
+They wrapped themselves up in the blankets given to them and they drank
+the broth.
+
+They fell sleep and the blankets helped to keep some of the chill from
+them and they managed to get some sleep, though uncomfortable as it
+was.
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY-SIX
+
+A beam of dusty light shone into the oubliette of the murky rock vault
+in which the men were being kept as prisoners for tomorrow's ritual of
+Life and Energy.  Some of the sun's rays moved across Lloyd's face and
+he turned his head away before he opened his eyes.
+
+He gave a deep and hollow sigh that gurgled from the catarrh that
+settled in his chest, from the night spent on a cold and damp floor.
+
+He opened his eyes and watched the sunshine glisten off the frosty rime
+that painted the walls and ceiling of the cell.
+
+He gave Boyce a few pats on the back and he soon woke up in a similar
+condition.
+
+"Do I look as bad as I feel?" he asked Lloyd.
+
+"I could ask you the same!" he replied.
+
+Lloyd slowly got to his feet, not a single part of his body escaping
+the rheumatic cracks that such adverse sleeping conditions bring upon
+one.
+
+Soon, Boyce attempted to stand up, too and his condition was not much
+different that Lloyd's.
+
+He let out an exasperated gasp as he stood up, half hunched-over.
+
+"Oh!" he moaned.  "You would think that Palatkans would want to eat
+healthy people!"
+
+"I could use another ewer of that hot fowl-broth, that Munsen brought
+for us last night."  Lloyd mentioned as if hoping that someone would
+hand him some through the hole in the cell door.
+
+"My sentiments ..."  echoed Boyce.
+
+Both of them simultaneously began to bend and move their arms
+frantically, and then their legs.  They didn't miss a part of their
+body that ached.  They had to exercise themselves or else the arthritic
+pains would never leave them.
+
+Later, each of them took turns basking their chests in the rays of
+sunlight that penetrated into the cell and soon they were both able to
+breath freer, and more easily.
+
+"I'd rather be eaten than spend another night in here!"  Boyce offered
+the statement as something easy to think about, but it turned to annoy
+Lloyd's own thoughts and fears about it all; he had taught Boyce about
+the fact that the Palatkans cut up and ate their victims alive.
+
+He still kept that fact to himself, needing Boyce's strength of
+ignorance to keep himself from going mad.
+
+The sun was higher in the sky and they waited for someone to come and
+bring them food, assuming that prisoners were also allowed to eat.
+
+Then their relief finally came.
+
+A hooded Palatkan priest walked up to the vault door and gave each of
+the men a small pail of broth and a long stick of bread.
+
+"Munsen conveys his best wishes and a hardy appetite."  said the hooded
+man then he came
+
+closer to the hole and whispered to them.  "We shall let you go free
+very soon, friends.  Do not worry!"
+
+The message was brief and strong, and with the wholesome food given
+them, they believed that they soon would go free.
+
+The silence was disquieting in the city and Boyce and Lloyd both knew
+that it was now or never, that the uprising would be put into action.
+
+They waited eagerly and they could see that the day was slowly losing
+time, the sun already disappearing overhead from their view.
+
+Then it happened.  Near the centre of the city, a plume of hot red fire
+and smoke of purple, black and blue, rose in force up into the sky,
+with the roar of a hundred thousand thunders.
+
+Screams soon followed the sounds of buildings crumbling and the men
+watched the citizens of Palatka running about aimlessly, caught up in
+the uprising between Urre's army an the high-priest's advocates and
+friends.
+
+On the flat top of one of the cubed clay buildings stood Munsen and he
+hollered into the midst of the city towards Urre's palace.
+
+"Give us honesty, purity and freedom! Give us your life and we shall
+spare your families!"
+
+He lifted a cylindrical package into the air and put an ember to it,
+then threw it.
+
+Momentarily, a great whoosh was heard and dust and rock spewed all
+about the area and towards the cells, to where Lloyd and Boyce watched.
+
+They dove to the floor and covered their heads, but in short order
+looked up at one another.
+
+"That's why he told us to keep down!"  yelled Boyce.
+
+"I presume so!"  Lloyd returned.
+
+They looked to the cell door and saw a hair-line crack running down the
+centre of it.  Boyce touched the crack then pointed to it after he
+nudged Lloyd with his elbow.  Lloyd followed to where Boyce pointed and
+nodded his head.
+
+"We'll be free ... "  Lloyd began. "providing we have a couple more
+blasts like that one, but let's get our backsides to that wall and keep
+close to the floor!"
+
+"As Munsen said!"  Boyce grinned as he pointed out the obvious.  "If we
+had our electrophore-lasers, we'd be out of here a long time ago!"
+
+Lloyd lost the last few words that Boyce said.  Outside their cell was
+another blast.  This one was louder, and this time they heard the door
+start to give-way.
+
+Lloyd crawled towards the wall and stood up, edging close to the window
+to look out.  From his vantage he could see scores of Urre's archers
+shooting at their enemy, just below the palace battlements.
+
+Screams, explosions and sounds of stampeding people and animals
+continued through the afternoon and evening, and finally, very late
+into the night, the panic seemed to subside then totally fade away.
+
+The only sounds left were that of burning buildings and cracking rock,
+and the sounds of the Palatkan multitudes crying and moaning.
+
+The battle was over and the men wished to hear news of Munsen and
+whether his uprising was a success.  They were up on their feet and
+both peered out of their cell window. They watched the city burning and
+the people's attempts to bring their small holocaust under control.
+
+It didn't happen right away, but following a quarter hour watching the
+scene, both had realised that there was no sound except for the
+physical movement of the citizens.  No one cheered.
+
+There was no one making speeches or announcement.  There was no one
+about shouting direction for the people to mount their rescue of the
+city, from fire.
+
+The fires were the priority, and the bandaging of the seriously hurt in
+the fighting.
+
+The sky was illuminated by the blaze of the fires. When the night gave
+way to the sun's morning rays, there was hardly notice that a new and
+majestic day had begun.
+
+For many hours, Lloyd and Boyce kicked at the hair-line crack in the
+cell door but couldn't smash it in two.  They couldn't get free and in
+the quickly approaching daylight they knew that there was no hope.
+
+Soon after the sun rose in the distant end of the Serpent Strip, and
+the two men were morosely seated on the dusty cell floor, the door fell
+open and there before them stood three Palatkans.
+
+The two young women each had a horse by its' reigns, in one hand, and a
+large travel pack slung around their arms.
+
+The same young man, who had brought for them the previous morning,
+stood before them now with a golden goblet of wine in each hand.
+
+He handed a goblet to each man and they held them for a moment,
+silently waiting for something to be said.
+
+At the edge of a burned out clay building, a crow was picking at a
+piece of garment showing under a pile of large rocks.
+
+It didn't caw of flap its wings nervously, but Boyce had seen it just
+the same, and he pointed to it, never saying a word.
+
+In the eye of the young leper man, a tear was forming until it was
+finally born onto his cheek
+
+and trickled into the dry crusts of his face.  He kneeled before the
+two men.
+
+"That was our friend and leader, Munsen.  His own sacrifice assured,
+for us, the death of Urre."  he told them and they listened, very
+saddened.
+
+"What is your name, my friend?"  Boyce asked him.
+
+"I am called, Virgil!"  he answered.
+
+"Rise up, Virgil, and rule this place with peace and compassion.  See
+life and all its energies for what they really are.  Make your own
+power and forces of life, through love, compassion and trust ... and
+never again will you need to eat human flesh in hopes of attaining it
+all."
+
+Virgil rose to his feet and looked at the two men, in such a way as one
+master would look with respect to another.
+
+"We drink to Munsen and his vision of peace."  hailed Boyce and he
+lifted the goblet to his lips to drink.
+
+Lloyd touched his forearm but Boyce shook his head slightly, then
+nodded at Lloyd, to drink as well.  Lloyd complied with his request.
+
+"With the trust I show to you, in drinking this, which may otherwise
+have been poison, so it shall be a reminder of the trust that you will
+seek and find."
+
+"With all the power given me through my promise to Munsen, I now let
+you and your friend go freely and in peace, through Palatka."
+
+They bowed to one another and Virgil helped the men put the travel
+packs about their shoulders and then up onto the horses.
+
+They pointed in a southern direction to a pass that lead up through the
+cliffs of the canyon but before they urged the horses on their way,
+Boyce turned to Virgil.
+
+"The Palatkans truly are a beautiful people.  May you multiply and
+become a truly great nation."
+
+Boyce blessed his new and goodly friend then motioned to Lloyd to ride,
+and they kicked their heels into the horses and galloped towards the
+pass in the cliffs.
+
+Behind them, Virgil and the two young women watched them ride away, and
+the crow that had picked at the rocks, lofted into the bluish skyway
+and soon disappeared.
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY-SEVEN
+
+They rode the horses hard and steady, each day and in their five days
+of travel they managed to cover over seven hundred kilometres.
+
+The last five days, since they left Palatka were the safest and easiest
+five days of travel since the day they had left Besten.
+
+The horses were strong and they made good time. The few rests that they
+had along the way were enough rest for the horses, too.
+
+Boyce was pleased that Pomperaque was soon within his grasp and Lloyd
+was pleased that Manguino would soon feel his death, like the common
+man that he is.
+
+Ahead of them stretched the lush and friendly Joenine Forest.
+
+Each man could still remember the glen from which Empal helped them
+escape to Virune, then on to Besten.
+
+The beauty of Upper Phoride was just as Boyce had remembered it.
+
+"I know my way from here!"  he said to Lloyd as they slowly rode
+through the forest.  "Shall we go to the entrance of the Blue Mansion's
+underground passage?"
+
+"No!" Lloyd answered quickly.  "It would not be safe and it may draw
+unnecessary attention to us."
+
+"You are right."  Boyce agreed.  "We'll stop at Gothal for a while.  I
+must see if the Abbey Mother from the Abbey of Our Holy Saint Mariot,
+is still alive."
+
+"Is it wise to do so?"  Lloyd questioned.  "I mean, she may now be a
+spy for Manguino."
+
+"Lloyd, she believes in the same God as we do.  She always has and she
+dislikes Manguino.
+
+Lloyd sighed and soberly warned Boyce.  "You'd better be right, Boyce.
+We've come too far to be stopped now."
+
+They rode some more and near the late afternoon of their fifth day out
+from Palatka, the two men spotted Gothal and its main, and most
+majestic monastery, the Abbey of Our Holy Saint Mariot.
+
+It rose out of the ground like a living being.  A refuge across the
+crystal River Clains, that crossed their path before them.
+
+"There must have been rains here, recently."  noted Lloyd.  "The river
+has swelled some and is moving faster!"
+
+"It's so lovely this way."  was all that Boyce care to respond.
+
+"That it is!"
+
+They rode towards the river and slowly proceeded to cross it.
+
+They were on the other side of the river and there they briefly stopped
+to take-in the beauty of their surroundings.
+
+Suddenly, the horses beneath them were frightened and they bucked,
+without warning, and several men came out of nowhere, and proceeded to
+beat on Lloyd and Boyce.
+
+In a nearby tree, was a crow, as dark as midnight, and it squawked and
+cawed when the men got to the other side of the river, and it watched
+the other men attack.
+
+In frenzied excitement it eyed the struggle that took place at the
+river's edge, and its shrieks were echoing throughout the entire forest.
+
+Caught unawares, and while weakened by their journey, the ambushers
+knocked both men unconscious and took all of their possessions,
+including their two horses, and their clothes.  The left them both
+naked, lying unconscious and bleeding, half in the water and half on
+the river's bank.
+
+The crow left the tree and went to where the two men were sprawled.
+It crowed and flapped its wings around Boyce's head, and began to tug
+at his hair with its shiny beak.  Some bloodied hair hung from the
+crow's beak, but there was no movement from Boyce.
+
+They lay in the water for some time until several women came walking
+along the river from Pomperaque, leading a cow.
+
+The women were members of the Abbey.  Three were abbey sisters, the
+full nuns, and with them walked two novices.
+
+They were discussing the good fortune of their being gifted a cow by
+the Prominent, Miel, in the market that very morning.  Then they heard
+the frantic crowing and one of the novices looked for the origin of the
+noise and saw Lloyd and Boyce, motionless at the river's edge.
+
+She ran to the bodies and turned one over onto its back. Her eyes
+opened wide and she could not believe the beauty of this young, but
+badly injured man.  She checked his body for broken bones and severe
+cuts.  She did the same with the other body, taking the same care
+inspecting it until the other novice and the three nuns came to help
+her.
+
+She returned to the gentle handsome man, the younger of the two.  She
+put her ear against his
+muscular chest and sighed with relief when she heard his heart beating.
+
+"This one is still alive!"  she said as if relieved.
+
+"This one, as well!"  the others confirmed about Lloyd.
+
+The pretty novice ripped her plain white dress and wet it in the river
+then wiped the young man's cuts and bruises.
+
+He stirred but never came to.
+
+The other novice ripped her dress, too, and rendered care to the other
+man.  The third nun looked around, keeping a vigil in the event that
+those that did this to these two men might return and inflict further
+harm upon all of them.  She held onto the rope that was tied around the
+cow's neck.
+
+"We have to take these men back to the Abbey, my children!"  the first
+nun told them.
+
+The other non-avowed, with her big beautiful eyes, questioned the
+safety of doing such a thing but the nuns accepted taking the men back
+to Gothal.
+
+The crow was still hopping around Boyce's body but the young novice
+didn't chase it away.  She helped the other four women lift the men
+onto the cow and they took them back to the Abbey, inside of Gothal.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWENTY-EIGHT
+
+One day passed by and the men were still in an unconscious state, just
+as they were in part of the following day.
+
+Since the late afternoon, when the five women found the men, the novice
+first to be at their care, stayed and watched over them -- especially
+Boyce.
+
+She counted away the hours while they just lay there, pale and unaware
+of existence.
+
+It wasn't until the middle of the afternoon of this second day that
+Boyce stirred and the young novice was there. She wet a clean cloth and
+wiped the sweat from his head and face, and watched him slowly open his
+eyes.  As she went to wipe his face once more, he took her hand into
+his own and felt its delicate softness.
+
+"Can you hear me?"  she asked him in a whisper.
+
+"Yes!" said Boyce and he tried to get up but the couldn't.
+
+"You will be alright soon, but now just relax."
+
+He looked around the room, which he was in, and on a window ledge he
+saw the crow that he had been seeing since they left Besten.
+
+He couldn't take his eyes off the novice and he touched her face once
+more.
+
+"I am real!"  she told him.  "My name is Lilith."
+
+"You are very beautiful, Lilith!"
+
+She smiled at him.
+
+She was happy that he liked her appearance because, since that day when
+she found him and his friend, by the river, she was in love with him.
+
+"My friend?"  he asked her.
+
+"He is fine.  Some sisters are looking after him!"  she told him and he
+smiled, taking her hand.
+
+"This is the abbey, then?"
+
+"Yes!"  she answered.
+
+He held her hand and lapsed back into a deep sleep after sighing with a
+relieving breath.
+
+"What are you called?" she asked him but he didn't reply.
+
+She kissed his hand that clutched her's.  She kissed him on the
+forehead, too, and stayed with him for another night.
+
+Lilith was slumped on the floor beside the bed.  She was asleep but she
+was still holding on to Boyce's hand.
+
+Boyce stirred and opened his eyes.
+
+He was sore all over and his head throbbed.  He touched the small gash
+on the side of his head, with his free hand, then he became aware of
+the hand that he was holding.  He looked down to where the pretty
+novice was, her face resting on the bed, like a sleeping angel waiting
+for a waking kiss.
+
+He stroked her hair and her cheek until she, also, finally woke up and
+accepted his gentle caresses.
+
+"How do you feel today?" she asked him, getting up off the floor and
+sitting at his side, on the bed.
+
+"I can imagine how Grenadine feels!"  he muttered.
+
+"What?" she asked him but he never answered.
+
+"You are Lilith?"  he checked and she nodded.  "I am Boyce!"
+
+She smiled at him.
+
+"Boyce!"  she repeated.  "That's a beautiful name!"
+
+"In comparison to yours, Lilith, mine is but a name like barren dirt."
+
+"I am flattered!"  she thanked him with shyness.
+
+"I, also!  To wake to a beauty such as yourself is indeed a blessing
+from God."
+
+"You have been unconscious for a couple of days now.  Do you remember
+what happened?"
+
+He looked around the room and saw a crow perched on the window sill
+outside.
+
+"It was strange, but we crossed over the River Clains and I heard that
+crow making a racket."  he told her and pointed at the crow. "Suddenly,
+several men came out of nowhere and the next thing I know I'm gazing
+into your lovely eyes!"
+
+She took his hands and pressed them into her own.
+
+"You'll be fine, in a day or so.  Then you'll be well enough to get out
+of this bed and walk about."
+
+A knock came at the door then it opened.
+
+One of the sisters that helped to find the men brought into the room a
+fairly large tray full of food, and she helped Boyce to sit up for
+eating before she exited the room.
+
+Lilith sat closer to Boyce and gently began to feed him.
+
+"Are you hungry, Boyce?" Lilith inquired.
+
+"Yes, I am!"
+
+Boyce enjoyed the attention being paid only to him by this wonderfully
+beautiful girl, and as the day carried on and his feeding was done, she
+sat by his side and spoke with him about all manners of things.
+
+In the late afternoon, when Boyce was telling Lilith about his life in
+Besten, the door of the chamber slowly opened and Lloyd walked in.
+
+Boyce saw him and forced himself to sit up.  He smiled.  He was happy
+to see Lloyd and, at that moment, was also happy to realize that his
+trust in the women at the abbey was warranted.
+
+Lloyd had his left arm in a sling and his open tunic revealed a
+bandaged chest.
+
+"Did you hurt yourself, my friend?"  Boyce asked him, sarcastically.
+
+Lloyd smiled and he soon saw that Boyce had no bandages around him.
+
+"How are you faring?"  Lloyd asked him, looking at Lilith.
+
+Boyce took Lilith's hand into his and smiled at her as he answered
+Lloyd.
+
+"I am fine, but I was told I should rest for a day or so!"
+
+"I was told the same!"  admitted Lloyd.  "But I am older and must keep
+moving lest I become immobile."
+
+"Next time, we'll fly!"  Boyce joked with his friend and they both
+laughed.
+
+A nun marched into the room and put her hands on Lloyd's shoulders and
+turned him around to face the door.
+
+"Out of bed, again!  I did ask you nicely to stay in bed and rest.
+Didn't I?  Now come with me!"
+
+She nagged at Lloyd for leaving his room, obviously not being the first
+time he did so and both Boyce and Lilith laughed as they watched her
+parade him out the door.
+
+"You have a strong friend in ... Lloyd, is it?"  she said, making
+certain that she remembered Lloyd's name correctly.
+
+"During times like these, one must be strong."  he told her, putting
+his hand around her waist.  "He is my right arm, and I am his!"
+
+The crow was still outside the window but it was now no longer quiet.
+It squawked and pecked at the glass of the window pane and they stopped
+speaking and looked at the bird.
+
+They were annoyed at being disturbed in such a manner but Lilith didn't
+show her aggravation.
+
+"Your pet seems disturbed about something!"  Lilith said to him.
+
+"It's not my pet!"
+
+Lilith became puzzled and told him that she and the other four women
+found it hopping around on the ground and on his back when they found
+them.  They presumed that the crow was a pet and let it come to the
+abbey with them.
+
+"Let it in!"  Boyce told her and she slowly went over to the window and
+opened it, pushing the swinging pane enough to let the crow hop in.
+
+It stretched its wings and cawed then flew right to Boyce and hopped
+around on his lap.
+
+"It's a very strange bird, I think.  I haven't seen many crows, only a
+few during my childhood, then I see this one throughout my entire trip
+from Besten."  He told Lilith, about his odd feelings towards the bird
+and the sudden affinity that seems to have formed between them.
+
+"Lilith, will you push that small table over here?" he requested to her
+and she didn't hesitate to do his bidding.
+
+When she brought the small table to the side of the bed, he took the
+crow on his wrist and set it down on the table.
+
+They talked and watched the bird make a joking spectacle of itself and
+this continued through to the evening when Lilith collected some of the
+dirty compresses that she used on Boyce when he was unconscious.
+
+"I must leave now, Boyce.  The Mother Abbes had given me chores to do
+when you are well enough to be let alone."
+
+Boyce lost the smile that he had on his face.  He rolled his eyes and
+gasped while he stretched out his hand to her.
+
+"But, I'm not well, Lilith!"  he cried to her, hoarsely, and she
+laughed at his sweet attempt to keep her near to him.
+
+"You are a very silly man."  she told him then went over to him and
+kissed him on the forehead.  "You're sweet, too!"
+
+"Will I see you later?"  Boyce asked her in a solemn voice and he took
+her hand.
+
+Smiled and nodded.
+
+"You will be on your feet tomorrow and we can walk in the garden."  she
+promised and he kissed her hand while he gazed right into her
+beautifully large brown eyes."
+
+"Sleep easy and may your dreams be sweet!"  she said.
+
+"They will be sweet ... I will dream of you!"
+
+Her heart was beating heavily and her quick breaths passed through her
+like burning spears when she made her way out of the room.
+
+She felt uplifted, as if she was no longer of mortal body but of
+spirit.  She knew that Boyce was beginning to feel for her; it was the
+same as she felt for him, at the river, and saw his face.
+
+Inside the room, Boyce continued to stare at the doors through which
+Lilith exited and the crow beside him bounced up and down, flapping its
+wings and crowing in its unusual 'zoar-caw, zoar-caw'  manner.
+
+"She's a gem, crow!"  Boyce spoke aloud and the crow continued its
+usual, strange squawk.  "I am pleased to see that you agree with me."
+
+He let the crow sit on his arm and he looked at it for a silent moment
+before it continued to caw.
+
+"You are a strange bird, crow, and you sound strange, too.  Shall I
+keep you as my friend?"  he spoke to the bird as if he believed it
+could understand him, and the crow cawed back to him as it balanced
+itself on his arm.  "Alright."  Boyce continued.  "You are now my new
+companion and my friend.  Now, what shall you be called?"
+
+He looked at the bird, in an odd way as if wanting the bird to tell him
+its name, but the bird just crowed at him: 'zoar-caw, zoar-caw'!
+
+"Very well, crow.  I will call you Zoro!  Do you like that?"
+
+The crow stopped cawing and bounced up and down on his arm.
+
+"Now sleep, bird.  We have a great day before us!"
+
+He set Zoro on the table and he slowly sank down into the bed and fell
+asleep.
+
+
+CHAPTER  TWENTY-NINE
+
+When daybreak came, Boyce didn't hesitate waking and getting out of his
+bed.  He made his painful way to the window and looked out onto the
+majesty of Gothal.  Below him many nuns were already awake and working
+on the vegetable gardens, and fruit groves. Over to one side was the
+flower and tree garden and there was a group of nuns maintaining its
+beauty through their trimmings and cultivating.
+
+Lilith walked into the room and Boyce slowly turned around to greet her.
+
+Zoro only looked at her when she came in.  He was very quiet and
+squawked only once when he sensed someone at the door, but otherwise,
+he didn't make a ruckus.
+
+She wheeled a small cart into the room, laden with a variety of foods
+for Boyce to dine on.
+
+"Will you eat with me?" he invited her in.
+
+"Yes, thank-you!"
+
+They spent a long time eating breakfast then, when they were finished,
+Lilith had Boyce get
+
+back on the bed and she looked him over once more to make certain that
+nothing was at fault with him.
+
+"I'm just a little sore now, that's all.  I can walk!"  he informed her.
+
+She helped him put some clothing on himself and she showed him around
+the abbey; through the school and chapel and through the library.
+There they heard Lloyd having an aggravated discussion with a nun,
+about the poet, Djenaud Smarte.  This made Boyce laugh because he knew
+that Lloyd didn't think very highly of that particular poet.
+
+Lilith knew that the opposite was true of Sister Rhonta and she could
+hardly keep from laughing, herself.
+
+"Listen to them!"  exclaimed Boyce.
+
+"Does Lloyd dislike Smarte as much as Sister Rhonta admires him?"
+Lilith asked him.
+
+"It certainly sounds like it!"  he said then listened some more to the
+highly vocal discussion between his friend and the sister.
+
+Soon, however, Lilith lead by the hand, to the garden and there they
+walked about for several hours and told one another some other about
+themselves then they sat on a marble bench in a cosy gazebo.
+
+Boyce had fallen into a mutual love with Lilith and each of them were
+aware of it.  Now, however, was the first time that they had voiced
+their feelings and no one else was anywhere in the garden to disturb
+them, accept for Zoro, quietly watching them from a tree top.
+
+"I love you, Boyce!"  Lilith revealed to him and he gently embraced her.
+
+"I love you!"  he also admitted, and they embraced each other's wanton
+bodies and kissed each other's lonely lips for the first time.
+
+Their time together was brief and yet their love for one another bonded
+them together so strongly that their spirits became fused as one.
+
+Boyce felt dishonest in keeping most of the truths about himself, from
+her, and he now decided to tell her every detail and account of his
+life, and why he came to Phoride.
+
+Lilith also told Boyce more about herself revealing to her love that
+she was the daughter of the Laurentine Consul, Debran.  To keep her
+innocent and safe of monastic validations, he left her at the abbey
+before going on to Pomperaque.
+
+Boyce learned that this young man was more than just a beautiful, dark
+hair and dark-eyed novice, waiting to turn seventeen so that she may
+take her vows and become a full fledged nun of the abbey.
+
+That was a wish of her father, Debran.  The only way to save her from
+the lustful designs of some carnal coenobite at Halls, was to have her
+become a simple and uninteresting sister.
+
+
+CHAPTER  THIRTY
+
+A week passed by and although Boyce and Lloyd had recuperated they
+didn't make plans to leave Gothal and its peaceful atmosphere.
+However, near the end of the second week, both Boyce and Lloyd were
+visited in their dreams, by the spirits of Brook Scullion-Blue and
+Dearborne.
+
+To Lloyd, Brook's vision reminded Lloyd of his promise and his destiny
+to help Boyce attain his rightful place as the Lord Sovereign of
+Phoride.
+
+Boyce's vision urged Boyce to leave Gothal and take Pomperaque and the
+rest of Phoride, away from Manguino.  To that vision urged by Brook,
+Dearborne urged Boyce to hold Lilith close to his heart and to take her
+as his wife; his Lady of the Blue.
+
+Boyce conveyed his dreams to his beloved Lilith and he asked her to be
+his wife.
+
+With all he heart and spirit, she promised herself to Boyce, as his
+wife.
+
+In the days following the proposal, Boyce and Lloyd made plans to enter
+Pomperaque and how they would begin their recruitment of the common
+people to Boyce's side.
+
+The plans were finalised and two days before they left Gothal, the
+Mother Abbess married Boyce and Lilith, in a private ceremony performed
+at the tomb of Brook and Dearborne.
+
+With all their love shared between each other in their consummation of
+marriage, Boyce promised to return for her when his duty was
+accomplished and his invasion of Phoride was successful.
+
+He did not want to leave her and her heart couldn't let him go but
+Lloyd promised Lilith that he would watch out for Boyce and she somehow
+knew that Boyce would be safe.
+
+Lloyd found it difficult to leave Sister Rhonta.  Their utter
+differences of opinion towards Djenaud Smarte brought them close
+together to a point that resembled love for one another.
+
+Although such things weren't permitted of the full ranking nuns, Rhonta
+gave Lloyd a kiss before the two left for the gates of Pomperaque, not
+very far away.
+
+They were given their old clothes and some dirty travel packs full of
+clean clothing, food and two sacks full of copper and gold coins.
+
+They looked like they travelled for years from some unknown place on
+the world, to Pomperaque.
+
+On the morning of their fortnight's stay at the Abbey of Our Holy Saint
+Mariot, the men left the abbey for their short walk to Pomperaque.
+
+The five women who brought them into Gothal also watched them leave and
+the Abbess Mother, Mariot, blessed them in their promised mission and
+its hoped-for success.
+
+
+PART  II:  THE BIRTHRIGHT AND THE SCEPTRE
+
+
+CHAPTER  THIRTY-ONE
+
+Patches of wispy-like clouds passed over the moon, in the humid night
+sky.
+
+Pomperaque was unusually quiet this night and the star-gazing Cardinal
+Orren had noticed it.  He also felt ill-at-ease, this night.
+
+With pale blue eyes he looked at the moon for most of the evening and
+after midnight he saw an odd sight in the northern skies.  It was a
+vision that he did not want to accept.  At first he thought that his
+tired eyes were causing the vision but the corresponding feelings that
+he had when he saw the strange sight, made him take notice, and he
+reported it to the ArchBishop.
+
+Orren was one of the most trusted Cardinals in Manguino's legion of
+coenobites.  He had all the qualities of his late father, Cardinal
+Allen, and this was fitting, as he was the great sainted cardinal's
+eldest of thirteen sons.
+
+Cardinal Orren had gained the favour of the ArchBishop, not only
+because of his decent from Allen, but he had saved Manguino's life
+when some oppressed peasant attempted to kill him several years ago.
+
+For his reward, Orren was given the command of Phoride's armies and he
+became somewhat of an administrator, in place of Manguino.
+
+He resembled his father, Cardinal Allen, so closely that many were led
+to believe that when Allen died, his soul entered into the body of his
+first-born son, Orren.  With this belief came Orren's high honours and
+unquestioned obedience from those around him.  He was conscientious and
+he improved on Manguino's spy network, spanning the continent.  He
+wanted to know anything and everything about the other states and
+kingdoms, realising that Manguino's concentration on producing progeny
+with Eckma left his rule and life vulnerable to hostility.
+
+Now, Orren had never before played on his intuitive impressions
+concerning threats against the cleric rule, but this night had actually
+frightened him.
+
+It was late when he went to call on the ArchBishop Manguino, finding
+him in his usual circumstance with Eckma -- even that late at night --
+and being accustomed to it all, Orren didn't hesitate to reveal his
+vision to him.
+
+He pounded on Manguino's chamber doors until he was told to enter and
+while he watched his master, and Eckma, in the glass pool, he paced
+around them recounting the details of his vision.
+
+"I had been startled this evening by a sight in the sky, my Almighty!"
+Orren told him.
+
+"What kind of sight?" asked Manguino while he sucked on Eckma's neck.
+
+"I was watching the moon and from behind a cloud, I saw the Mons!"
+Orren revealed.
+
+"Now how is it, Orren, that you hadn't seen the Mons when there was a
+personal threat upon me?"  queried the ArchBishop.
+
+"Mons is an omen of threat to all -- not just to one.  It's an omen of
+war.  What's more, a great
+
+war.  I was not the only man to see the Mons.  Several others have seen
+them, too.  Peasants and Prominants, and some of our own Monks saw
+them."  Orren told Manguino.
+
+Manguino took Eckma's breast from his mouth and he looked at Orren with
+annoyed eyes.
+
+"Do the Mons tell of what kind of danger may befall us?"  Manguino
+demanded.  "If so tell me.  If not, find out!"
+
+Orren took all his strength to keep from showing anger against
+Manguino, then he spoke calmly.
+
+"The Mons are a portent of doom and destruction, my ArchBishop.  The
+visions came to us to warn us and to have us prepare for surprised
+aggression."
+
+Manguino listened to Orren but didn't feel threatened by what Orren
+thought he had seen.
+
+Manguino was certain that nothing would happen to his rule.  Jessuum
+Benitar promised him before giving him the puzzling prophesy:
+
+                "Tell those of your court, the Prominants, if you will,
+                 but never is it to be repeated to you, for on
+                 that day when that request is done, so should it 
+                 be the end of your rule in Pomperaque."
+
+
+Manguino remembered and he told Orren about it, but Orren didn't
+believe in Jessuum Benitar's words.
+
+"As long as I do not hear the prophets' words again, all will be well,
+and since I will not ask it to be read to me, I shall be safe."
+promised Manguino.
+
+"Do you believe in a prophesy that may have no merit and dispel that
+which your most
+
+trusted servant, and others, have seen?"  Orren was angered and spoke
+in a booming voice.
+
+Manguino bobbed in the water and Orren just stood there.  Both were
+quiet until Manguino came out of the water and wrapped a robe about
+himself.
+
+"How did you see the Mons?  Single, coupled, regimented?"  Manguino
+requested to him to tell more of his vision.
+
+"There were four separate apparitions, great one.  Each was a knight of
+his own colour -- black, red, white and ashen.  Each rode on a horse of
+their same colour.  They came from behind thin clouds, and made their
+way towards the city and its heart.  Yet, as they reached the roof tops
+of the city, they vanished."
+
+The account assured Manguino that nothing was amiss.  He knew, as well
+as anyone, that doom only came if the Mons were seen to ride through
+the main streets of the doomed city.
+
+He told Orren not to worry about the Mons, ensuring him that everything
+would be fine.
+
+"We are safe, as long as we don't become stupid, Orren."  Manguino
+calmed down.
+
+"Could I be granted the privilege to study that prophesy that Jessuum
+gave to you?  he made a small plea to Manguino and was to do so under
+the condition that he doesn't read the prophesy aloud!
+
+Orren also asked Manguino for his permission to mobilize the Phoridene
+Army, as a precaution, but this he wasn't given to do because of
+Manguino's belief that they were under no threat of overthrow.
+
+Orren left Manguino to continue his obligation with Eckma, and he was
+more disillusioned now, with Manguino's attitude, than what he was when
+he saw the Mons.
+
+He never went to sleep that night.  He had all his Generals meet with
+him in his own chamber, and with them, he decided to have the armies in
+battle-ready status, as a precaution.
+
+Orren had never proceeded against Manguino's orders and better
+judgement, but this time it was unanimously agreed between his men
+that, to be safe, they should pay heed to the Angels of Mons.
+
+
+The next morning was beautifully sunny and warm.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce had walked for about two hours, from Gothal, before
+reaching the northern gates of Pomperaque.  Pomperaque was truly
+different than they remembered it to be when they left it, some eleven
+years ago.  There were hardly any horses and carts in the city.  Most
+of the transportation was made up of large cumbersome cars, with
+wheels, that ran along metal tracks.
+
+The city was highly mechanized and all the machines were powered on
+electrical energy, and there were few things in the city that were
+old.  Everything was newly built and only a few years old.
+
+Some of the few older buildings in the city were the Halls Cathedral
+and the rundown, and abandoned Blue Mansion.  Also, the town square was
+just a renovated version of the old square and the men walked through
+it remembering the way it used to be.
+
+At the very spot where Brook and Dearborne were executed there was a
+marker made of precious metals and it was put there by the citizens of
+Pomperaque who never wanted to forget the two greatest people that had
+ever lived as Phoride's elite.
+
+It wasn't a large marker.  Manguino had forbidden that.  He also forbad
+the writing of specific sentiment, or the placing of names.  All the
+marker said:  "May they be forgiven in the next life."
+
+Zoro bobbed up and down while sitting on Boyce's shoulder and it cawed
+in a frantic manner.  Due to its behaviour, then men moved away from
+the monument and off to one side of the town
+
+square where there were many vendors busily selling items such as food
+and clothing, jewellery and home-stuffs.
+
+The men slowly walked from kiosk to kiosk and they checked some of the
+goods being sold until they finally came upon the kiosk where Empal had
+his goods displayed.
+
+The market brought back memories for Boyce; remembering the fun that he
+used to have when he was out with Dearborne.
+
+Empal's kiosk was in the same place as it had always been.  This
+brought for Boyce some degree of security and stability, and it also
+helped his confidence to go ahead with the plans that have been made
+for his retake of Phoride.
+
+Empal had seen the two men and was now finally relieved from the worry
+that he had for them throughout the passed month, since they left
+Besten.
+
+He knew that they were supposed to have arrived in Pomperaque long ago,
+having taken the shorter route, but he knew that there had to be some
+good reason and he was certain that they would be told to him.
+
+He saw the strange crow perched upon Boyce's shoulder and he saw how
+dirty and ripped their clothing was.  Other than their wandering
+appearance and their stale smell, Empal thought to himself the
+traveller's prayer of thanks, to God.
+
+They came up to Empal's stall and they stayed around there for a while
+choosing fruits that were the ripest and biggest for their price.
+
+"You have good fruit here, old man!"  said Lloyd, as he picked up an
+apple and bit into it.
+
+"Would you trade or pay money, for that?" asked Empal as he pointed at
+the apple.
+
+Zoro jumped down onto the stall, from Boyce's shoulder, and started to
+pick at some grapes
+
+and corn.  Empal waved it away and he looked somewhat annoyed.
+
+"We'll have that, which my bird began to eat, and a kilo of apples, and
+two pomegranates!"  said Boyce.
+
+"I don't wish to sound less than trusting, sirs, but I would care to
+see my payment first."  Empal stated while he looked at them with
+wariness.
+
+A huge monastic guard came to Empal's kiosk and glared at the two men,
+and Empal.  He saw the strange crow, now back on Boyce's shoulder and
+squawking at him.
+
+In a booming, but tinny sounding voice, the guard spoke to the
+strangers and Empal.
+
+"Do these men give you trouble, Virunese?"  he asked Empal.
+
+"No!"  he answered.  "I just wanted payment for my goods before I give
+it to them!"
+
+The guard looked to Lloyd, who took another bite from the apple that he
+had in his hand.
+
+"Pay the man, vagabonds!"  ordered the guard as he put his right hand
+on the case of his electrophore.
+
+He watched the younger of the two men throw a gold bit to Empal and
+Empal put on a half-happy, half-surprised expression, while he filled a
+small basket for them.
+
+The guard turned to Empal after he saw the gold coin thrown to him.
+
+"It would be wise not to judge strangers on their appearance, vendor.
+You never know what wealth you may accumulate from them!"
+
+The guard started to walk away and Boyce laughed a little to Lloyd and
+Empal, then the guard turned around once more and showed Empal a small
+triangular device, slowly rubbing his finger over it.
+
+"Don't forget to pay the tax cleric when he comes around."
+
+
+The guard continued to walk away from the stall and Empal filled the
+basket with the rest of the fruit that the two men ordered.
+
+Boyce cautiously winked at Empal and spoke to him in a taunting voice.
+
+"Old man ..."  he said.  "Where can my friend and I get lodging and a
+bath?"
+
+Empal stopped for a moment and looked around, then he pointed across
+the square to a small side-street.
+
+"Down that way is a tavern called The Lion's Skull Inn.  The owner
+should be able to put you up there for a few days.  Just tell them that
+Empal sent you."
+
+"We are greatly obliged ... Empal!"  exclaimed Boyce and he took the
+basket of fruit and they made their way around the square to the small
+street where the tavern was located.
+
+Boyce had thought it to be an odd sight, seeing some of the old
+familiar people, who were now older, still working their same kiosks,
+and some of the stage shows that he remembered were still exhibited for
+the people, but now just a little different and less spectacular.  Of
+course, he thought that they lacked spectacle value since he was now
+older.
+
+He turned around for a moment and looked towards Empal, standing with a
+tall Cardinal beside him.  The Cardinal was collecting the church's
+share of the tax.
+
+They made their way slowly to the tavern and when they got to it, they
+walked in and headed for the flat-table and he ordered a mug of cider.
+
+When the tender brought to him the cider, Lloyd stopped him and asked
+him for lodging.
+
+"Tender!  We are strangers in this city and we would care to stay here
+in the inn.  Empal, the vendor, said that you may be able to have us?"
+
+The tender was going to tell them that there weren't any rooms
+available, but Lloyd's mention
+
+of Empal's name, and the leer that Lloyd gave to him, made him
+reconsider.
+
+"I do have one room that you can both use.  I'll take you to it when
+you are finished here!"  he told them.
+
+Lloyd downed the cider immediately and the tender shrugged then showed
+them to their room.
+
+"My name is Cavander!"  said the tender as they walked up the stairs to
+a room at the end of the top hallway.  "If you want privacy, this is
+one of my best rooms."
+
+He lead them down the hallway then motioned for them to stop while he
+went into a large room, which was obviously his own, and brought out a
+large bundle of bedding.
+
+Once inside their own room, Cavander closed the door and looked at them.
+
+"I know who you are, and why you are here!"
+
+He kneeled to them and kissed Boyce's hand.
+
+"I'm your servant!"  said Cavander.
+
+"To your feet Cavander."  ordered Boyce and helped him to his feet.  "I
+will not be like Manguino to have men, who are in most cases better
+than he, to kneel before him."
+
+"I hope that we can trust you, and count on you for support!"  said
+Lloyd.
+
+"Whatever you ask of me I shall do, even if it means to lose my life
+for you!"  promised Cavander.
+
+"The main thing I ask of you, Cavander, is that you do not treat us as
+our status.  This I ask of you even so to the point of treating us as
+lesser than peasants."
+
+"It is important that you do this!"  added Lloyd.
+
+"I will do your bidding!" nodded Cavander, then he took the bundle of
+bedding and from
+
+inside it brought out a small cask and a smaller square box.
+
+He opened both containers and the two men saw their contents.  The cask
+was full of gold bits and the smaller square box had two
+electrophoric-laser guns, like those which they had lost.
+
+"You will need this while in Pomperaque, masters!"  Cavander echoed to
+them what Empal had told him they were to be used for.
+
+He was ready to leave their room after he made the beds for them, and
+he was about to open the door, he looked straight into Boyce's eyes.
+
+"We all loved your father and mother, my Lord!"  he said.
+
+Boyce nodded to him.
+
+"Yes, I know, Cavander!"
+
+Cavander sighed then left the room and the two men decided to sleep
+through part of the afternoon.
+
+
+By the time that dusk came around, Boyce and Lloyd were awake and they
+had a nice bath down the hall.  They dressed in clean clothes then went
+down to the tavern and had something to eat and drink.
+
+When they were dressing they discussed with each other their needs to
+start recruiting people and their only conclusions were to either risk
+being given away by some satisfied follower of the ArchBishop, or to be
+killed by some desperate sorts who would take them for spies or just as
+troublemakers.
+
+Their final decision was to start with the lower classed folk of
+Pomperaque; those who
+
+usually had to steal in order to survive.  These were the oppressed.
+
+Moreso than going down to the tavern to eat and drink, the two men went
+down to the tavern to flaunt their moneys and so to entice some
+criminal types to come and rob them.
+
+They weren't going to walk the streets of Pomperaque this night.
+Instead, as soon as they ate, and listened to some of the common folks'
+songs about the history of Phoride and its heros, they returned to
+their room and waited for their, hoped-for, late-night visitor.
+
+The moon had already traversed most of the night sky and morning wasn't
+too long from coming.
+
+It wasn't until about two hours before dawn that the men heard the
+sounds of uninvited guests entering their room.
+
+Boyce quietly took to the door while Lloyd slowly crept to the window
+and they both waited for the predicted rush that the visitors would
+make into the room.
+
+Then it happened.  Both door and window flew open and the expected men
+rushed into the room and dove onto the beds jabbing into them with
+knives.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce allowed the men to stab the beds for a while until they
+realized that there wasn't anyone in the beds.
+
+Now, Lloyd switched on their portable electric light and illuminated
+the bed and two scruffy-looking young men.
+
+"Trying to rob someone is one thing, killing is quite another!"  Boyce
+said to them and suddenly the two men rushed Boyce, thinking that only
+one of them was in the room and when they came very near, Lloyd
+punched the men and took their knives from them when they were on the
+floor.
+
+They rushed both men this time but Boyce and Lloyd's training to fight
+hand-to-hand, helped them to quickly subdue the two robbers.
+
+The four men just looked at one another while Boyce had them seated in
+a corner,  Lloyd covering both of them with what the men knew was an
+electrophore, of sorts.
+
+"Are you two the ArchBishop's spies?"  one of the criminals asked Boyce.
+
+"No, we're not!"  answered Boyce, then he took a small sack of gold and
+poured it out on the nearest bed.  "We are grateful that you accepted
+our invitation to join us here!"  he added to them.
+
+The two criminals looked at one another and they both knew that they
+were tricked into coming.
+
+"It seems to us both that you dislike the ArchBishop Manguino!"  Lloyd
+said to the two men.
+
+"We are not the only ones that feel his tyranny!  There are many, but
+only a few of us try to do anything about it, in whatever way that we
+can!"  the larger of the two criminals said in a voice that started to
+get louder.
+
+"Now there's no need to scream, my friend.  We are not unlike
+yourself."  Lloyd said to him and then he put away his gun.
+
+"We would like to hire your services and buy your loyalty!"  proposed
+Boyce.
+
+"Loyalty cannot be bought, but what do you offer?"  asked the larger of
+the two criminals.
+
+"We offer to you this gold,"  Boyce pointed to the gold on the bed.
+"and we offer to you honourable positions in the new government.  If
+you accept you must follow both of us blindly or else you will be
+killed.  If you do no accept we shall hand you over to the monastic
+guards and have you charged for whatever crimes you have committed, or
+even those you haven't committed."
+
+"You give us a hard choice."  said the smaller man.
+
+There was a brief quiet in the room while they all exchanged looks.
+
+"Hard choices ..."  Lloyd began.  "are often-times the choices most
+worth making!"
+
+The bigger criminal stood up and folded his arms upon his chest.
+
+"It seems we are inclined to accept your offer ... Masters!"  he said.
+
+"Very wise!"  Lloyd responded.
+
+" -- And in this new wisdom, you will be our compatriots and will not
+address us as master."  Boyce expressed his intent of partnership.  "I
+am called Boyce Loebh, and this is Lloyd Bartlett."
+
+"I am Mingo, and this is my brother, Bix."  said the larger man,
+pointing to the smaller man.
+
+"Mingo ... Bix;  a new era has dawned in Phoride with your
+acceptance to serve this man."  Lloyd said to them, regarding Boyce.
+"In the shortness of time you will be told all about this young man and
+our plans to depose the ArchBishop."
+
+Bix got up off the floor being helped by his bother.  They both turned
+slightly, and faced Boyce.
+
+"On this new day you have become honourable warriors -- the lieutenants
+of the only son of Brook and Dearborne Scullion-Blue -- heir to Phoride
+and the protector of the Northern United Alignment.  This is Boyce
+Loebh Scullion-Blue."  Lloyd finished.
+
+Mingo and Bix gawked at Boyce then kneeled as they whispered his name
+in surprise.  They new his great and respected name.
+
+"Do not kneel, my new friends!  We are all equal in the eyes of God.
+In battle, don't fight for me, but fight for the freedom of Phoride and
+for your families -- as I will fight for the same.  And from this time
+forward call me only by the name,  Boyce."
+
+"We pledge our lives to you, Boyce!"  Mingo and Bix hailed Boyce as
+they slowly stood up.
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY-TWO
+
+Pomperaque woke up and Mingo had left Boyce and Lloyd's room, with
+Bix.  They had denied themselves the gold offered by Boyce and they
+set out to meet many others like themselves, to encourage them to join
+Boyce's cause.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce caught themselves a few hours of sleep between the time
+that Mingo and Bix left, and Empal came to their room.
+
+Empal had come to the room in order to receive his instructions from
+Boyce concerning the finalization of the invasion plans. He had also
+come to tall Boyce about the blue Mansion, since he wanted to know if
+it was possible for him to purchase it.
+
+Empal came to their room that day carrying a large basket of fresh
+fruit, as if he was delivering the fruit to a buyer, and he woke them
+from their sleep.
+
+When Lloyd let Empal into the room, he embraced both Lloyd and Boyce
+and welcomed them properly back into Boyce's city.
+
+When the formalities of welcome were observed, the two men sat with
+Empal and ate the fruit that he had brought along with him, while Boyce
+listened to Empal's detailed first report that was assigned to him
+before they left Besten.
+
+"The Blue Mansion has been sacked by Manguino's vermin before your
+parents' bodies were even laid to rest."  Empal told Boyce.  "The great
+building has been left unattended and abandoned since the time of their
+death, and although it had been put on the market, there has been no
+one interested in buying it."
+
+The needed information that Empal was reviewing for Boyce, was
+depressing but Boyce was satisfied to hear that the Blue Mansion could
+still be his home.
+
+He was strangely happy in realising that his old home was still his and
+available to him, but even though he legally held it as his own, to
+keep Halls from knowing who he was, he would have to buy it.
+
+Empal was glad that he had finished giving his report.  Now he could
+have his two friends recount their journey to him and possibly explain
+to him the reason for the tardiness of their journey from besten.
+
+Boyce and Lloyd didn't leave out a single detail about their trip.
+Unusual as it was, Lloyd told of their meeting of Grenadine and his
+reactions to her.  He told the story with such honesty that there was
+almost a feeling of melancholy in the room when he finally came to
+telling Empal about her death.
+
+Empal could see, in Lloyd's face, that the woman called Grenadine had
+really left her mark on Lloyd's heart and he sympathised with him.
+
+On the other extreme of Empal's sympathy for Lloyd, so was Empal's
+ultimate delight in
+
+hearing the news of Boyce's marriage and to such a girl like Lilith;
+daughter of a Laurentine Consul.
+
+Empal had envied them, listening to their adventures and their
+victories over danger and evil.
+
+He had mentioned to them that he wished that he was young, like them,
+so that he could've made the journey with them.
+
+"We would have cherished your company!"  was the statement that Boyce
+made to Empal's wish, and it was enough to make Empal feel the
+importance that he held with both Besten and Virune.
+
+"What of the Nolunge and Flinnd?"  asked  Empal.  "Did those two
+peoples let you pass through their lands or did they go back on their
+word, also?"
+
+Empal questioned with curiosity, since they told him that Sedara and
+Palatka both rescinded their signed agreement of passage with the
+Northern United Alignment.
+
+"Everything was smooth with those two nations.  They are learned and
+cultured peoples and they honoured the treaty."  said Lloyd.
+
+"Yes!"  Boyce added.  "And I would like to send to them a token of
+appreciation after Pomperaque becomes rightfully mine!
+
+It neared noon when Lloyd and Boyce decided to mill around the town and
+finally go to Halls for a look around the lands-office.
+
+Empal left them and returned to his stall where he opened it to public,
+later than usual.  Oddly enough, no one had really noticed his late
+opening since it was an off-day for market and there weren't as many
+people buying goods in the towns square.
+
+When Boyce decided to go to Halls, he and Lloyd split up.  They did
+this for two reasons, namely; to keep anyone from possibly recognizing
+Lloyd, and have one supporter free to come to the aid of the other if
+there arose a situation where one might be imprisoned.
+
+Lloyd had a task to do, which was to save time for him and Boyce, from
+having them to do it together.  This task was the locating of Miel and
+Cassta -- two of Brook Scullion-Blue's most trustworthy and loyal
+friends.
+
+Boyce had hoped to seek out these men and persuade them, and their
+families, to follow him into forming a new rule that would prevent a
+monastic institution from governing the land.
+
+Lloyd's job was just to find these men's residences and make a brief
+observation of whether, or not, the men and their families could still
+be loyal to a Blue rule.
+
+Boyce, with Zoro on his shoulder, slowly made his way up Canon's Butte
+with his travel pack containing a small cask of gold bits.  When he
+reached the top he looked at the enormity of the Halls Cathedral, which
+touched the blue sky above him.
+
+The front gates were open and there were hordes of people walking
+about, doing business.
+
+At the gate sat a notary vicar and he had all those who entered the
+cathedral state their name and reason for going in.
+
+Boyce went in and the vicar stopped him and asked him to return.  Boyce
+did as he was asked; the vicar wanted Boyce to sign in the visit logs.
+
+"What is your name?"  asked the vicar while he stared at the crow on
+Boyce's shoulder.
+
+"I am Boyce Loebh!"  he answered promptly.
+
+"What is your business here?"
+
+Boyce smiled and looked around when Zoro cawed a few times.
+
+"I am here to see the estates Cardinal.  I would like to buy some
+property on which to live."
+
+The vicar looked at Boyce suspiciously then proceeded with the
+questioning.
+
+"You don't have a request for an audience with our estates Cardinal.
+If you care to wait, he may be free to see you!"
+
+"I will wait!"  Boyce exclaimed, then he went over to a tree where a
+long rock post had fallen-over, and he sat on it.
+
+The notary vicar rang a small hand bell and a young novice ran to the
+desk where the notary sat.  He was given a slip of paper and some
+instructions.  He ran off into the Cathedral's quadrangle and not too
+long after that, ran back with a slip of paper that he handed to the
+notary.
+
+The notary vicar looked over at Boyce and Boyce noticed it.  He got up
+the fallen post and walked over to the notary.
+
+"It will be a while but the estates Cardinal will see you."  the notary
+vicar told Boyce.
+
+Boyce leaned over to him then pointed over to the post where he was
+sitting before.
+
+"Tell me when he'll see me.  I'll be over there!"  he said then slowly
+made his way to the rock post and then reclined on it.  Zoro stood
+watch on his chest.
+
+The wait wasn't very lengthy and soon one of the novices came over to
+him and woke him up.
+
+"It's your turn!"  the novice informed him, and taking his pack with
+him, Boyce entered the Cathedral grounds, following the novice and
+ending up at the door of the lands-office.
+
+The boy left him there and knocked on the door before entering, not
+caring to wait for permission to do so.
+
+The office was strange-looking for a lands-office.  It had two floors
+and was full of books on both floors.
+
+In the middle of the office was a rather large table where the estates
+cardinal was sitting with
+
+his nose in a large book in which he was writing something.
+
+He finally looked up from his book after Boyce sat down in a chair
+opposite him and Zoro jumped down on the table in front of him.
+
+Overhead, standing against a railing, on the second floor, Cardinal
+Orren looked down at the strange young man and his even stranger pet.
+He wanted to hear what this wandering fool wanted in his office.
+
+"You are Boyce Loebh?" the estates Cardinal asked him.
+
+"Yes!"
+
+"How can we be made of service, Mister Loebh?"  the Cardinal asked him.
+
+"I am looking to buy some property with a habitable building on it.
+What I am seeking, is something that is quite large."
+
+The Cardinal looked at him for a moment then stood up and went to a
+flat shelf and brought back a large portfolio of sketches.
+
+"I have here some twenty sketches of sturdy buildings on good property.
+ Of course, most are probably out of your wealth capability."
+
+"I would like to see whatever you have available regardless of the
+cost!"
+
+"Very well!"  submitted the cardinal and he handed Boyce the archaic
+looking portfolio.
+
+Orren, from above had grown a little more suspicious and mistrusting of
+Boyce.  What's more, Orren detested Zoro's presence.
+
+Boyce was dressed in clean clothing and he didn't smell as bad as when
+he first stepped into Pomperaque with Lloyd.  He really loved his
+loyal women in Gothal for giving their dirty clothing back to them.
+It was that necessary little detail which helped to cause confusion in
+many people's eyes.
+
+For sure Orren didn't understand how a rogue like Boyce could be so
+unaffected when he was told that he would most likely not be able to
+afford that which he sought.
+
+Boyce went over every drawn likeness of the houses that were available,
+seeming quite uninterested in any one of them, including the Blue
+Mansion, which has had passed over.
+
+"They are all well and nice, Cardinal, but I am searching for a large
+place with atmosphere.  I, and my friend, are artisans and scholars,
+and we were hoping to use such a building, in-part, to expand your own
+Blaisaman;  where we could teach the arts and other human studies."
+
+The Cardinal sat down, at his side of the table, and questioned him
+further about his proposed academy.
+
+"Do you have a license to teach in Pomperaque?"
+
+"Not as of yet.  I was planning to come tomorrow to inquire about a
+license."  answered Boyce with an odd confidence that, in a way,
+inspired the Cardinal.
+
+This same confidence inspired Orren in another ways -- it made him
+angry.
+
+Orren had read the prophesy given to Manguino by Jessuum Benitar and
+somehow he felt that maybe this man, below him, had something in common
+with it.
+
+"I am planning on bringing to Pomperaque many diverse people from all
+over the continent."  Boyce let the Cardinal know.  "I am personally
+fond of philosopy and I would like, at the very least, half of the
+building to be devoted to that topic."
+
+"Very well, Mister Loebh!  I can only suggest one place that could be
+large enough to house such an academy.  But I must inform you, that if
+you want it, you must also buy the all the land on which it stands!"
+
+If there is plenty of land, reasonably priced, I would be happy to take
+it.  We need the land to display works done by our students of
+sculpture."  said Boyce.  "Can I see a sketch of this land and house?"
+
+The Cardinal laughed a little and Zoro cawed, and bobbed up and down.
+
+"You have seen the drawing already!"  the Cardinal informed him, and he
+took it out from the portfolio and handed it to him.
+
+"I passed this by because it doesn't seem large -- in the drawing, I
+mean!"
+
+"Come with me and I will show you the real size, Mister Loebh!"
+
+The estates Cardinal stood up and so did Boyce.  He led Boyce up a
+spiral staircase to the second floor and Zoro flew to the top railing
+beside Orren.
+
+Zoro was spooked by Orren and he quickly flew to a window on one end of
+the floor.
+
+Soon Boyce and the estates Cardinal arrived at the same window and the
+cardinal asked Boyce to look to the far side of the valley.
+
+"The rise, over there, Mister Loebh, is called Bimini Hill.  The entire
+mount and the Mansion which stands on it was once the estate of several
+sovereigns of Pomperaque and Phoride."  the cardinal said to him.
+
+Boyce looked out the window, mainly to play along with the Cardinal but
+also it was the first time that he saw the majesty of the Blue Mansion
+in this vantage point.
+
+"Oh, yes.  I saw that place coming into the city, but I didn't realise
+that it was the same land as on the sketch.  You are right.  I probably
+couldn't afford to but that."  Boyce stopped for a moment to look out
+the window the continued with a simple curiosity.  "How much is the
+lands-office asking for it?"
+
+"Seven hundred gold bits."  replied the Cardinal.
+
+"That is a great deal!"  exclaimed Boyce.
+
+"Seven hundred gold bits is for the Mansion and the land on which it
+stands!"
+
+There was quiet again, except for Zoro's occasional 'zoar-caw'
+squawking, and then he flew out of the window, towards town.
+
+Cardinal Orren peaked through a shelf of books that touched the
+ceiling, and he saw Boyce quickly turn to the estates Cardinal and nod
+his head to him.
+
+"I think that I will buy it then!"  he ejaculated.
+
+"Good!"  said the Cardinal.  "Let us go down to my table and write up
+the papers!"
+
+He took Boyce back down to his table, and while making their way down
+the stairs the Cardinal asked Boyce in what manner he would be able to
+pay.
+
+They stopped on the spiral staircase and Boyce took the cask of gold
+from his pack and opened it for the Cardinal.  The cardinal was amazed
+and pleased.
+
+Above them both, Orren looked at the gold with surprise and contempt.
+He felt certain that the crow man was not to be trusted.
+
+When the papers were drawn up and Boyce counted out seven hundred gold
+bits to the Cardinal, he left Halls Cathedral and headed for the Blue
+Mansion, with his key.
+
+Before he made his way up the path to the Mansion, he first stopped at
+the inn and had a drink while he waited for Lloyd.
+
+Lloyd soon came into the tavern and sat down with Boyce, at a table.
+
+"Did you buy it?"  he asked him.
+
+"It was easier than I thought it would be!"  he said, showing him the
+key.
+
+Lloyd smiled at Boyce.
+
+"I found our friends' homes and I overheard the younger man, Cassta I
+believe it was -- saying to someone that he was getting tired of this
+life in Pomperaque and he was planning on moving to the Elkinnii Plains
+and live there!"
+
+"Good!"  sighed Boyce.  "We still may be able to get the numbers that
+we need within the city."
+
+"I had seen Mingo, earlier, and he told me that he had convinced a
+dozen of his peasant friends and relatives to join us.  They are out,
+this very moment, looking for more of the oppressed to come in with us."
+
+Boyce smiled with delight.  He was happy because he had the Blue
+Mansion back and now the throng of peasant farmers that are willing to
+risk their lives for Boyce, son of Brook Scullion-Blue.
+
+"If we can get Cassta and Miel to our side, they may just be able to
+get for us the Prominants that we need to join us."
+
+Boyce had much hope and belief in his father's friends.
+
+He would truly feel the power of a ruler, if those men served him as
+they served his father, he thought.
+
+Cavander approached the two men and asked them if they wanted anything
+more to drink, or if maybe they were hungry.
+
+"No!"  said Lloyd.
+
+"You can help us, however, if you have some time and friends who would
+like some work for a few hours!" inquired Boyce.
+
+"What do you want done?" he sarcastically asked.
+
+Cavander was playing in the way that he was asked to act before Boyce,
+treating them as lesser humans.
+
+"Now, Inn Keep.  There's no need to bite off our heads!"  Boyce
+commented.  "All I want is some help to move into my new house."
+
+"And what new house may that be, may I ask?"
+
+Lloyd was having a good time listening to the performing that Boyce and
+Cavander were doing and a few times he could hardly keep from laughing
+a little.
+
+"It is the house on Bimini Hill!" he exclaimed with a proud smile.
+
+Cavander was delighted beyond words when he heard that the heir to
+Phoride had successfully reacquired his own estate.
+
+"How do you come by purchasing that?"  asked Cavander in an extremely
+agitating voice that was really beginning to bother Boyce.
+
+"I had gold -- so either say that you will give me help, in my moving
+into the house, or take your leave from me!"
+
+Cavander smiled but only a trifle.  He knew that he had actually
+annoyed the son of Brook Scullion and he also knew that he could not
+give him an apology while in public.  He had, therefore, kept the
+taxing down, from that point onwards, and agreed to have a few men help
+him whenever he needed them.
+
+Boyce and Lloyd made their way up to the Blue Mansion, after Cavander
+had agreed to give them help.
+
+It wasn't a long way to walk to get to the Mansion's door, but the once
+gradual path leading
+
+up to the top of the hill was now rugged and grown over with
+vegetation.  The entire property was like this, from lack of use.
+
+For a decade, since the executions, no one had been known to go up to
+the Mansion.  Even coenobites had, for some reason stayed away from it.
+ But it didn't matter now, because it was all Boyce's again.
+
+They had finally made their way to where it all first happened.
+
+Boyce's heart beat faster and faster, the nearer that he came to the
+door.
+
+"Here it is, Lloyd!"
+
+Lloyd saw Boyce's excitement as he put the key into the lock and turned
+it.  He also felt a certain presence looming over the entire hill, as
+soon as they set foot upon it.
+
+For Lloyd, this place had a different meaning then it had for Boyce.
+For him it meant the extension of his life which may have been cut
+short before he even had a chance to realize what life was.  It meant
+the love and the admiration that he had for Brook and Dearborne, and
+this place was a reminder of evil's earthly triumph over good, through
+death.
+
+"Would you have ever believed that I'd be back here?"  a tear issued
+from Boyce's eye as he spoke and Lloyd cleared his throat, trying to
+keep from Boyce his own feelings about it all.
+
+"It was predestined, Boyce!"  he said then touched Boyce's shoulder to
+urge him to open the door and enter the house.
+
+Boyce hesitated for a moment longer then smiled a little, and with a
+sigh he opened the door.
+
+There was a sudden but slight whoosh at the door, as air rushed into
+the vacuum of the house.
+
+It was dark and quite cool inside the house, in comparison to the
+intense heat outside, on this
+particular day.  There was also a foul smell within which would have
+been more suitable for a
+
+slaughterhouse.  It was sour-like odour mixed with the linger type of
+stink of boiled chicken feathers.
+
+They walked into the huge entrance hall and looked around the bare grey
+walls, and at the cracked ceiling covered with cobwebs.
+
+"No wonder no one had come here since it was closed up!"  said Boyce,
+his voice echoing far into the distant rooms, along with the clip-clop
+that their boots made on the solid wood floor.
+
+"With enough helpers it won't take us long to make it liveable, Boyce."
+
+Boyce nodded as he heard Lloyd's sentence carry throughout the
+mansion's vast number of rooms.
+
+They walked further through the mansion going from the kitchen, to the
+ballroom, Dearborne's old parlour and to Brook's private den.
+
+Every room, every corner of the great house was the same.  The house
+was empty and stripped of anything of value, and of anything without
+value.
+
+Blue-green lazurite no longer adorned the walls.  There were no more
+crystals hanging from the ceilings, no more carpets were on the floor
+and there were no sculptures left in the hallways.
+
+Only years of dust could be seen inside with the shells of hundreds of
+dead insects and arachnids strewn all over the place.
+
+The windows of the mansion were still intact but they were so yellow
+and dirty that barely enough light penetrated into the interior, let
+alone having anything seen through them.
+
+Lloyd took a knife from his belt and began to scrape some of the years
+from off the panes of glass in Brook's viewing den.
+
+Shrieks echoed throughout the massive structure, as the dirt gave
+resistance to the knife grinding into the glass, but soon the windows
+of the den were cleared of dirt and the light of the afternoon sun
+shone through the cloud of dust suspended before the window.
+
+Boyce jabbed Lloyd's knife into the seams and catches of the window and
+then pried it open with a creak that seemed to force itself into their
+very hearts.
+
+They just stood there and looked at the once beautiful room that was
+nothing more than a void now.  Absolutely nothing was left in the house
+after the monastic sacked it.
+
+"Manguino is truly a mad dog warranted of dying!"  said Lloyd.
+
+"This was such a beautiful place, once!"  was Boyce's only response.
+
+Suddenly their came a loud shriek at the window and it made both men
+jump back in fright.
+
+"Zoar-caw!"
+
+Both men sighed when they saw that it was only Zoro perched at the
+window.
+
+"It's only Zoro!"  said Boyce.  "I wondered where he's been all
+afternoon!"
+
+While Lloyd and his friend looked over the house and decided what they
+needed to clean up and move in, Cardinal Orren was making his own
+assessments.  His assessment, however, was not of buildings, but of the
+two strangers that came to Pomperaque, from the north.
+
+"I had finally received a report from some of our spies in Besten, and
+I found out that these two men had left Besten a little under a month
+ago."  Orren said to the ArchBishop.
+
+The ArchBishop sat in his chair, at his desk, in his office as he was
+asked to by Orren for the meeting with him today.  Orren wanted the
+meeting this way because he was tired and somewhat repulsed, by seeing
+Manguino and Eckma fornicating, almost every time that he spoke to
+him.  Now Orren knew that he had Manguino's attention, and he listened
+to Orren.
+
+"Since they've left Besten they walked south west then disappeared
+until they were seen passing through Flinnd on horseback.  Now they
+had entered Pomperaque, apparently to stay!"  continued Orren while he
+tried to find fault with the two strangers from Besten.
+
+"Fine, Orren.  I agree that we should not trust these men but I can't
+understand why we have to be this fearful of them.  How can two men
+pose us a threat?"
+
+In his typical way Manguino had once again failed to see a potential
+danger.
+
+As in any nation, the greatest threat, almost always, seems to be from
+strangers.  Since they were not known ... so Orren also believed.
+
+These two strangers were not known.  Except for their names; Boyce
+Loebh and Lloyd, and also the fact that each man carries with him a
+substantial wealth, without the slightest fear of being robbed, no one
+really knows who they were.
+
+Then there was the crow that was the younger man's pet.  It was a
+strange pet that, to Orren, seemed to be as great a threat to Phoride,
+as the two men were.
+
+Yet, for all their feelings, neither man could quite understand why
+they felt uneasy with these two men's presence.  They gave no
+indication of being treasonous and they had even taken up a peaceful
+residency within the city.
+
+They heard the story of their wanting to set up an academy of arts and
+philosophy, to be run as a part of the Phoridene Blaisaman;  but the
+fact that the Blue Mansion was bought, had both monastic men worried.
+
+Orren had been studying Jessuum Benitar's prophesy, made for Manguino,
+but it was odd and open to innumerable interpretations.
+
+Manguino himself had been wrong many times about the prophesy, seeing
+the doom of Halls, and the rest of Pomperaque, through natural
+elemental causes:  fire, water, earth and air.  Yet, with the several
+natural disasters that befell Pomperaque since the executions of Brook
+and
+
+Dearborne; the earthquakes tidal waves, the three-day hail storm and
+the great fire of four years ago  -- that almost burned half of Phoride
+-- before the rebuilding, the great city had always seemed to survive.
+
+Cardinal Orren refused to believe in whatever the Benitar prophesy had
+to say.  Like his father, years ago, he only believed and trusted in
+what he could see, feel, hear and smell, and touch.  Anything that was
+beyond those senses were just illusions.
+
+Orren had seen the Angels of Mons several nights ago, and he knew that
+they meant an impending doom, but he believed that the doom would not
+be that great since the Mons did not ride through the main streets of
+Pomperaque.
+
+Since time immemorial; from the first time that vision had foretold
+doom, in the years before the nonexistent holocaust which ravaged the
+world, the mons had been an accurate omen that warned those who saw
+them, of incalculable disaster.
+
+"I am apt to disregard Jessuum Benitar's prophecy, Almighty.  It is
+difficult to understand and can be made to mean anything, but the Mons
+that I had seen,  came in the night prior to the men entering the
+city."  he said.
+
+Manguino laughed a little when Orren said that to him.
+
+"You are just like Allen was.  You only believe in what you see and
+nothing more.  Now, tell me ... how many strangers came into Pomperaque
+-- or to Phoride, for that matter -- on the same day as these two
+Bestenese came?"  Manguino asked him.
+
+"There were many, your grace, but these men have something about them,
+something that I just can't explain!"
+
+Manguino laughed and told Orren not to worry because nothing would
+happen unless he
+
+asked for the prophesy to be read to him.
+
+To make Orren feel better and calmer, Manguino offered to him a
+suggestion that he find himself some virgin and have his tensions
+relaxed through her.
+
+"You'll feel much better!"  he told Orren.
+
+Orren left him, angry and unsure of his own suspicions.
+
+He went back to his chamber and tried to study the prophesy some more,
+trying to use his logic this time.
+
+Manguino also went back to his own chamber and jumped into the pool of
+rain water which Eckma was already wading in, and drinking the scum off
+the surface before he entertained his pleasure.
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY-THREE
+
+With Cavander's help, along with some of his friends that were enlisted
+to the cause, the Blue Mansion began to take shape as the smooth clean
+structure that it once had been.  Having the clean-up and all the
+detailed restoration take place over several shifts, the great estate
+began to resemble its old grandeur, with every hour that passed by.
+
+Hundreds of litres of blue-green metallic paint was mixed and the walls
+inside the house were painted, and the local craftsmen -- those masters
+working with rock, metal, glass and wood, designed and reconstructed
+duplicates of everything that was once inside the house.  All the
+duplicates were made from the memories, of that house, that Boyce and
+Lloyd carried with them over the last decade.
+
+Boyce ran about the entire estate with Zoro perched on his shoulder and
+he supervised the workers with every detail that they were doing.  He
+wanted everything just as perfect as he could have it.
+
+Lloyd ran around and did the same, but this all was really Boyce's
+dream and destiny needing fulfilment.  All he was there for was to
+ensure Boyce's succession.
+
+Dearborne's old parlour began to look more and more like it did on the
+day before the execution, and Brook's den had been reconstructed nearly
+to the last detail, the only item excluded from it all, being the
+computer that Brook had called his  'gadget'!
+
+The land and its gardens were weeded and replanted with plants, and
+flowers, from all over Phoride.
+
+The change that took place on Bimini Hill was so great and quick that
+the citizens of Pomperaque began to notice a strange presence emanate
+from it.  Such a presence was unknown since the time that the Blue line
+had ruled from there, and now it was back.
+
+During the night time, working only by the light from the stars and
+moon, and by the pole lights of the city, the outer walls of the Blue
+Mansion were painted with the purest white paint that could be mixed,
+and the following night they were polished until the whole building
+gleamed.
+
+Many days had gone by but the building was finally ready to move the
+rest of the necessities into it.  Most of the furniture, and other such
+things, were especially build within the house or garden, for the man
+for whom it was being made.
+
+Boyce and Lloyd were pleased beyond their knowledge of words, to
+express how they felt.  They knew that what had once been the home of a
+good, kind and strong man, was once again going to be the home of a man
+that would be as well-loved.
+
+All those that put in their time and love for Boyce, knowing who he
+was, were pleased in their accomplishments and they gave praise to him
+in a grand ball that was given for him, and for Lloyd, when everything
+was finally completed.
+
+Many people from all walks of Phoridene society were invited to the
+mansion for the ball.
+
+Curious to see who these men were, many of those citizens that were
+invited had eagerly accepted to attend the ball at the new Blue Mansion.
+
+Most of the guests were surprised upon entrance to the great building.
+Memories were rekindled and many citizens had tears in their eyes and
+lumps in their throats. It was remarkable that no one commented on the
+Mansion's old sameness during any part of the ball.  Not a single guest
+questioned Boyce, or Lloyd, about how they made everything in the house
+to be as it was years ago.  They just took it in stride and tried to
+have a good time; and for the first time, in a very long while, the
+Phoridenes did enjoy themselves.
+
+Amongst the guests invited to the ball were Miel and Cassta, with their
+families, and several higher coenobites from Halls.  They were Manguino
+and his wife, Orren, Polis and Cardinal Levy.
+
+Miel and Cassta came to the ball for much the same reason that everyone
+else did, curiosity.  When they came in, it was as if they walked
+through some door that threw them back into time, to the night when the
+Mansion saw its last festive night, the evening of Brook and
+Dearborne's fifteenth anniversary of marriage.
+
+When they saw Boyce he looked familiar to them but while at the ball
+they didn't discuss it.  Only once that night when they came to meet
+the two men, Boyce had mentioned that he would like to speak privately
+to them the next day and they had agreed.
+
+The arrangements had been made so quickly that their entire intercourse
+seemed to take place in the span of time it took the men to shake hands.
+
+That was Boyce's only contact with the two men, all evening, and later
+Empal mentioned to both men that it would be to their benefit to listen
+to and to respect the young man called Boyce
+
+Loebh, and that made both men wonder since they knew that Empal
+wouldn't say such a thing to them unless it was serious.
+
+Manguino and Orren had walked through the Mansion and finally Manguino
+ended up at the room which was once Brook's private viewing den.  That
+was the room Brook and Dearborne had been taken from before they were
+executed.
+
+Manguino felt discomfited standing there and Orren couldn't help but
+notice it.  Everything in the house was just as it was before it was
+ravaged by him and his men, thought Manguino.  He was petrified to open
+the door and looked inside but Orren had never seen the original room
+and what it contained, so he bound into the room and looked around at
+the rock walls, drapes, shelves of books and the large wooden cabinet.
+
+The room was beautiful; decorated with small statues and paintings, and
+although it wasn't an identical duplicate of Brook's den, it closely
+enough resembled it to warp Manguino's mind back to when he had the
+cabinet opened to his view and saw Brook's computer.
+
+The ArchBishop had finally summoned ample courage in order to enter the
+room and he let out an exasperated breath which sounded like he was in
+pain, when he saw the room.  He quickly stepped over to the book
+shelves and read the names and titles on the books:  Lapinz,
+Argynossti, Smarte.  All were identical to those books that Brook kept
+there.
+
+"This is some room!"  said Orren and oddly glanced over at Manguino.
+"What's wrong?"  he asked the ArchBishop.
+
+"This room is hardly different than Brook Scullion-Blue's was, so long
+ago.  How did these men know what was within?  How did they know what
+was in every room, within this house?"
+
+Manguino trembled as he spoke then he looked at the far curtained wall
+and went over to it.
+
+He violently pulled the curtains away from the wall exposing a dingy
+grey.
+
+"Why did you do that, your Grace?" asked Orren.
+
+"This wall was supposed to be white in the centre.  If it was, I don't
+know what I would've thought!"  he answered.
+
+He looked at the large wooden cabinet near the entrance and went to
+it.  He tried to open it but it was locked.  He shook his head towards
+Orren then punched at the cabinet doors.
+
+"Just like Brook's, always locked until the day that I finally knew for
+sure what was inside!"
+
+Manguino was feeling ill and angry, and most of all frightened.
+
+"You were right to suspect these men, Orren!"  he told the cardinal.
+
+There was a sudden angry and loud voice blaring from the entrance to
+the room.
+
+"What are you doing in here?"  It was Boyce and he majestically trooped
+into the room and glared at the ArchBishop.  "I don't mind if the
+guests roam around the house, but I do mind if the guests try to
+destroy the things that are within the rooms!"
+
+"We are not destroying anything, my young friend!"  Manguino assured
+him while he was leaning against the cabinet.
+
+Boyce looked around the room and saw the undraped wall.
+
+"Why is that curtain pulled away?"  he demanded.
+
+"Why isn't that wall white?"  asked Manguino.
+
+"White?"  questioned Boyce.  "Was it white, originally?"
+
+Manguino nodded his head.
+
+"I wish that I would have known this, earlier.  I want this place to be
+as authentic as possible to its original interior!"
+
+Orren and Manguino looked at one another with puzzled eyes and Boyce
+continued.
+
+"I had found out the history of this place from a few of the towns'
+people and I had decided to talk to a few of the people who have been
+within this house when it was lived in by the ruling Lord.  I had every
+detail of their memories reconstructed.  My academy will have the
+atmosphere it needs, to inspire our artisans and great thinkers."
+
+"What's in here?"  Manguino demanded of him, touching the cabinet with
+a few pats of his hand.
+
+"Nothing is in there!"  replied Boyce.
+
+"Open it for me!"  Manguino threw another order at Boyce.
+
+"I don't believe that I am obliged to do so without being given a
+reason for my opening it!"  Boyce denied obedience to them, knowing
+exactly who both of these men were.
+
+"If you are to live in Pomperaque,"  said Orren.  "you must learn to
+obey the ArchBishop.  He wants you to open that cabinet and you will
+open it!"
+
+Boyce put on a bewildered expression then sighed, nodding his head as
+he went to the cabinet.
+
+He took a key from around his neck and put it in the slot of the
+cabinet door.  His actions with the key, and the manner in which he
+used it to open the doors, disturbed Manguino but he made himself think
+that Boyce was told about the way that Brook handled the cabinet key.
+
+Boyce slowly opened the cabinet to reveal the empty interior.
+
+"There!"  Boyce exclaimed.  "I had told you that there was nothing
+inside!"
+
+The ArchBishop Manguino breathed more easily when he saw that the
+cabinet was truly empty as this stranger called Boyce, had truthfully
+told him.
+
+"I would think that you would like to mingle more with the common
+folk."  said Boyce.  "I had heard some rumours that you, ArchBishop,
+don't present yourself to the people as much as you should!"
+
+Orren didn't like what Boyce had said and he was ready to say something
+to him until Manguino stopped him by raising his hand.
+
+Manguino made for the door and Orren followed him.  It was obvious that
+the Almighty wanted peace, for now, and Orren held to his respect of it.
+
+However, before the two men totally exited the room, Manguino turned
+around and saw Boyce closing the cabinet doors.  He smiled at Boyce and
+asked him a question while Zoro flew into the room and to his shoulder.
+
+"Tell me, Boyce Loebh ... do you know what was inside the cabinet?"  he
+asked him.
+
+Boyce shrugged and a squawk came from Zoro.
+
+"No, I don't!"  he answered.  "Apparently no one knows.  It ruins the
+authenticity -- I feel.  Besides that ..."   Boyce smiled back at him.
+"... it must have been something that really annoyed you."
+
+He stared right into Manguino's eyes than asked him if he would tell
+him the contents of the cabinet, but Manguino just continued to smile
+and left the room without telling him.
+
+Boyce let Zoro onto his left forearm and stroked him while the bird
+balanced itself.
+
+"That, Zoro, is a man that ancients called  'an ass-hole'!"  he said to
+the crow.
+
+Zoro cawed, as if answering, and Boyce left the room with him, too.
+
+Downstairs, the party was coming to an end and Lloyd was saying
+good-bye to everyone, and he reminded Mingo and Bix to bring their
+friends over to the Mansion tomorrow for their first class.
+
+Late into the night everyone was finally gone and the two men felt
+extremely good in having their confusion tactics work on those who were
+unfriendly present here on this night.
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY-FOUR
+
+The following morning the men went to market and sew Empal.  They
+bought from him some of his special fruit from the lands to the west,
+called ��nondan, and they asked his opinion of last evening's gala.
+
+Empal was pleased for its success and he told them that many others
+thought so, as well.  He also told them that Miel and Cassta were
+expecting them in Gothal for a luncheon.
+
+Boyce was ultimately pleased because he had a chance to see his wife
+and Lloyd was also glad for being able to see Sister Rhonta, to argue
+some more Smarte with her.
+
+The two men went to the town stable and borrowed a couple of horses and
+rode into Gothal, as soon as they finished their talk with Empal.
+
+Gothal was close, just a few kilometres from Pomperaque's northern
+gates but Boyce pushed the horses hard to reach Gothal as quickly as
+possible, Zoro riding all the way on his shoulder.
+
+He went to the Abbey of Our Holy Saint Mariot, where Lilith was staying
+and found her in her job today, tilling and trimming the flower and
+tree garden.
+
+She was grimy from the dirt and heat but the sister in charge of
+today's work let her off her job, under the circumstances, and Lilith
+had a very quick bath before going to her husband, waiting for her in
+her bed.
+
+Rhonta was happy to see Lloyd but all they did was talk while she was
+in a room repairing some clothing.
+
+She was a full nun, as she was when she cared for Lloyd until he
+recuperated.  For the innocent kiss that she gave to Lloyd when he and
+Boyce left Gothal, for Pomperaque, she was highly reprimanded and she
+was made to work in the abbey kitchens until just recently.
+
+Lloyd was disappointed, and she was probably more disappointed than he
+was, but they were both mature enough to understand the circumstances
+in which they both lived, so both made the most of their time by
+talking.
+
+At noon, Boyce left Lilith's bedroom and went to the Abbess's private
+dining room where Miel and Cassta were both waiting for him.
+
+Lloyd wasn't there and Lilith stayed in bed, waiting for Boyce to
+return while she pictured in her mind the account that Boyce gave to
+her about his reintroduction to Pomperaque.
+
+He walked into the dining room with Zoro and the Abbess Mariot (as all
+abbesses were called Mariot, since the first one that found the child
+called Sunshine, so long ago), was serving the table where the men sat.
+
+She curtsied to Boyce and left the room as both Miel and Cassta took to
+their feet and watched him approach them.
+
+They both came from behind the table and they embraced Boyce with tears
+streaming from their eyes.
+
+"Empal had told us who you are, Boyce Loebh Scullion-Blue!"  said Miel
+between sniffles.
+
+"We didn't know that our great friends had any children, Master
+Scullion!  Where did you stay as a child?  How is it that your father
+didn't tell us?" Cassta asked desperately.
+
+"I remember both of you so well, Cassta and Miel.  My father only had
+two friends that he trusted with his life!"  said Boyce.
+
+"How do you remember us, Boyce?  We had never seen you before this
+day!"  Miel's tears subsided allowing wonder to dry them.
+
+"I was hidden before everyone's very eyes and there wasn't a soul in
+all of Phoride that knew.  Only Empal was told and that was just before
+my parent's death."  said Boyce and he then proceeded.  "I was Boy, my
+parent's servant!"
+
+Astounded, the men kissed Boyce's right hand and they didn't even pay
+attention to Zoro cawing at them.
+
+"How it is to me, now, to realise that a great ruler truly served his
+people!"  Cassta praised Boyce.
+
+"I had once served, both of you, with things of substance and now it is
+time for both of you to serve me."  Boyce's voice sounded demanding.
+
+"Yes!"  the men echoed one another.
+
+"We kneel, humbly, before you Lord Scullion-Blue."  promised him as he
+and Cassta went on their knees.
+
+Boyce put his hands on each man's shoulders and told them to rise.  He
+let them know that
+
+they had no obligation to kneel before any man, even if that man was
+their leader.
+
+"From this time on, neither you, nor any of those who you persuade to
+join me -- to help me reclaim Phoride in the name of my father -- shall
+kneel before me.  Only God, who speaks to men's hearts deserves to be
+knelt before.  I am not God.  I am just a man and because I am just a
+man, I need loyal friends to help me regain my birthright an share my
+sceptre with me, in this land."
+
+"Only a truly God-sent leader would speak that way.  We will die for
+you, Boyce!"  Miel vowed and Cassta nodded to Miel's offer.
+
+"You did not die to protect my parents,  old friends!"  Boyce sounded
+stern, his voice mirroring the guilt felt by both for their passiveness
+when action was the necessity.  And Boyce continued,  "But I will die
+for you, if it be so ordained."
+
+Both of the men's heads sank down upon their chests in a visible shame,
+and both had weepy eyes.
+
+Boyce motioned for them to return to the table.  They sat down and ate
+the banquet that was prepared for them by the abbey sisters and they
+discussed the plans that Boyce and Lloyd had agreed to with the
+Northern United Alignment, concerning the invasion of Phoride.
+
+Boyce told the men that it will be their job to find loyal and
+trustworthy Prominants that would join his side in order to abolish the
+canon rule forever and return him as their heir apparent to the Blue
+descent.
+
+Everything was agreed upon.  Plans were set and fealty was paid through
+vows and oaths, and when the meal was finished, the men returned to
+Pomperaque.
+
+Boyce returned to his Lilith's bedroom and made love with her once more
+before the invasion was to come over this troubled land, and so
+separate them for a while longer.
+
+Zoro squawked, having been left out in the garden by Boyce before he
+went to Lilith.
+
+Zoro flew back to Pomperaque and circled it until Boyce and Lloyd left
+the abbey for their second time.
+
+Risking another reprimand, Sister Rhonta kissed Lloyd good-bye when
+Lilith did the same to Boyce.
+
+When the men returned to Pomperaque they rode right for Empal's stall.
+
+Zoro had already soared down onto Boyce's shoulder when they road
+through the town's gates, and to Empal's kiosk, Boyce let Empal know
+that the invasion could commence.
+
+Empal knew the rest.  He had made his plans with the alignment, too.
+
+This was the day that Empal would fly back to Virune and Besten, on his
+Kenttitian Eagle, and tell his people and Harvard Bartlett that it was
+time to mobilize the armies for their advance on Phoride.
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY-FIVE
+
+The days and nights passed by with an odd swiftness that has never
+before been seen or felt.
+
+Boyce and Lloyd didn't appear to do much else than run the learning
+sessions in the Blue Mansion, catering to whomever, and from whatever,
+class they were from.
+
+One cardinal attended the first two days of the academy's opening and
+he reported to the ArchBishop Manguino that everything was being
+handled straight as in the Blaisaman and that political ideologies were
+discussed as philosophical arguments rather than as private opinions.
+
+Everything in the academy was normal and there were no conspiracies or
+treasonous talk being made within the mansion and so the cardinal
+stopped attending the classes there.
+
+The second day after the cardinal stopped coming to the classes Boyce
+and Lloyd finally began to teach all those enlisted to their cause,
+about the Twentieth Century civilisation.
+
+The great book that Brook had given to his son and Lloyd, was passed
+around to each person that knew how to read the written English, which
+had survived to some extent, since that fallen age.
+
+Those capable of reading the book, read it aloud to those who could
+not, and all those who had been made familiar with the ancient book,
+gawked at the wondrous pictured in the book.  The pictures were of
+strange machines that could fly and ships that travelled space, and
+there were pictures of giant buildings that touched the skies.  They
+were great hollow mountains made by man, out of glass and steel and
+rock.
+
+The most loyal and m of the more intelligent students were taught how
+to battle, hand-to-hand, with someone.  They watched the hours of
+demonstrations presented by Lloyd and Boyce.
+
+However, due to the lack of time available to them to train, all that
+they could do was watch Lloyd and Boyce's movements, then later teach
+other; again, by demonstration and example.
+
+Several months of military training were condensed into a week of
+intense study and what's more, Halls never knew what was happening.
+
+Throughout the two men's instruction, Zoro was present, relentlessly
+perched; either on a piece of furniture on upon Boyce's shoulder.
+
+To many of those loyal citizens there to learn Boyce's knowledge, Zoro
+became a symbol of freedom from the evil monastic rule.
+
+Boyce, with his interesting pet, had become quite popular in
+Pomperaque, the word passing throughout the entire land of Phoride in a
+manner that resembled that of legend.
+
+Orren was certain that the two men from Besten presented a clear and
+present threat to the ArchBishop and his established rule on this
+continent.  He couldn't allow his feelings to go without notice and he
+discussed the prophesy, given to Manguino by the Seer, Jessuum Benitar,
+with other cardinals who specialised in the interpretation of scripture
+and prediction.
+
+All of them agreed that the Seer's words were indeed strange and non of
+them could agree on
+
+their exact meaning, so the Cardinal Orren took to examining the
+recorded text by himself.
+
+With every subsequent reading of the words, Orren became more
+frustrated and less did he succeed in his understanding of any of it.
+
+He hoped that he would soon free whatever hidden meaning was held
+within the vision that Jessuum conveyed to Manguino when he began to
+degenerate his power and standing, for the sake of copulating with
+Eckma.
+
+Pure thought and logic slowed Orren's perspective for the explanation
+of the prophetic forecast.
+
+It happened one night that something that resembled an answer came to
+Orren, and it was a strange coincidence that Manguino had glimmers of
+thought that were similar.
+
+In their like dreams, certain lines in the prophesy seemed to repeat
+themselves and both Manguino and Orren began to realise their meanings.
+
+The lines that held the most clarity for them were:  'Four great
+elements, ride on high'  and  'Black feathers from his shoulders jut'.
+These lines reflected the omen and possibly even the new strangers.
+However, there was no proof that they were upon the correct
+considerations.
+
+The next day that ArchBishop and Cardinal Orren confided to one another
+about their dreams and about the interpretations that came to them
+thereof.
+
+Manguino told Orren that he heard the prophet's chant repeating itself
+through his mind and peaking in clarity and volume at certain lines.
+
+Orren had said the same thing to the ArchBishop and they discussed
+their dreams, and what they thought their dreams meant, over the span
+of several hours since they woke.
+
+Both men were eager to strip clean the text of the prophesy in order
+to reveal, to themselves, the long awaited answer.
+
+"I understand the Mons, Your Grace!"  Orren blurted out to the
+ArchBishop.  "It was the night before the two strange Bestenese entered
+Pomperaque.  I saw the Mons."
+
+Orren paced about the ArchBishop's office, and Manguino sat at his desk
+in his respective garb, listening to the great Cardinal Orren.
+
+He walked back to the desk, from the window, lifted his palms before
+him as if weighing the air that he passed through.
+
+"The Mons were four, each on a horse, and each rider was clad in armour
+and was the same colour as the horses.  They were in the sky.  So I
+believe now that our Seer's predictions may be true.  The Mons are
+these four elements that ride on high."
+
+Manguino sighed and rocked back and forth in his chair.  He was pleased
+to have made some head-way in answering the puzzling prophesy.  Yet,
+somehow he felt that there wasn't enough proof to be able to point to
+Boyce and Lloyd and say that they were involved.
+
+" 'Black feathers from his shoulders jut' ..."  said the ArchBishop.  "
+... is strangely similar to that Boyce Loebh and his dirty crow.  There
+is one point, however, that has me question if that is so."
+
+He stood up and moved around to the front of the desk and sat on it.
+He motioned with his hands as he spoke to Orren, giving him his
+explanation and other questions concerning it.
+
+"That odd crow rides on Boyce Loebh's shoulder, it doesn't just from
+it.  Shoulders are mentioned instead on of shoulder -- this may be
+misleading!  It may be making us seek the reality of the forecast by
+invoking within us our own dislikes for these men."  he said to Orren.
+
+Orren nodded and then shrugged while the chair on which he sat gently
+swivelled to and fro.  He looked right into the ArchBishop's eyes as he
+thought that the ArchBishop may actually be right.
+
+"I understand your thoughts.  We don't want to make it a habit of
+unjustly accusing those people that we do not trust only in order to
+quell our own fright.  Both of these Bestenese are popular with the
+people as being great teachers.  My men have reported to me no
+treasonous news about them."
+
+Orren raised himself from the chair and went over to the chiffonnier
+behind Manguino and poured himself some wine.
+
+"The Mons just rode across the Phoridene sky.  They never rode in the
+streets.  Whatever happens will be minor."  he said to Manguino before
+he gulped the glass of wine into his gut.
+
+"We should keep our wits about us and look for some strangers with
+black feathers either growing out of their shoulders or adorning their
+apparel."
+
+"I will get some of my men to watch out for that happenstance."  Orren
+promised his master.  "I will also put the Phoridene army on
+battle-alert.  I feel that to be the prudent action."
+
+"We should wait, at least for a few more days and I don't believe that
+the army will really be needed."
+
+Orren became tense and he Questioned the ArchBishop's reasoning for not
+letting him ready for defence.  Afterall, Orren was in charge of the
+army.
+
+"We don't need tension between ourselves, Your Holiness!"  Orren
+finally said.  "We have to be ready for anything.  The people of this
+city, and outlying towns and villages, have been behaving very
+strangely in recent times.  They don't seem to be expressing their
+dislike for their living conditions and over-taxing.  They wane in
+their fear of you.  Something is very wrong."
+
+"You are surely like your father, Allen, was.  You worry too much,
+Cardinal.  We should not worry about anything.  We are strong and no
+sane person would try anything against us.  I am god of Phoride, and
+of this hemisphere.  Gods cannot be harmed."
+
+The ArchBishop has always been thought of as a god, and has been made
+to be worshipped as much but he had never before shown that he believed
+it, too.
+
+Orren left his presence and called a necessary meeting with the higher
+cardinals and convinced them to back his giving his army a full alert
+status.
+
+Later, Manguino called on Orren to bring the two strangers to his
+office for questioning.  He was seemingly having second thoughts about
+his own suspicions but, being a god, he didn't admit to it.
+
+That afternoon Boyce and Lloyd came to Halls to see the ArchBishop.
+Boyce had Zoro on his shoulder and it was making a great deal of noise,
+listening to it echo throughout the cathedral and looking as if it was
+enjoying itself.
+
+Lloyd felt uneasy because this would be the first time that the members
+of Halls could see his face clearly and he prayed that no one would
+recognize him, from that day in the square, a decade ago.
+
+They entered the ArchBishop's office with a majesty and saw Manguino
+sitting at his desk with Orren in a chair off to his right side.
+
+"We are pleased to have this visit, my friends!"  said Manguino and he
+smiled.  "We would like to congratulate both of you on your successful
+start with your school.  I may be interested to attend some of your
+lectures one day soon, but before I do, I would like to know something
+about your backgrounds."
+
+Boyce and Lloyd looked at one another and Zoro jumped off of Boyce's
+shoulder and glided to the window.  Boyce and Lloyd waited for a moment
+and Lloyd knew that he had to speak since he was the older of the two.
+
+"We are honoured to appear before you!"  said Lloyd and he moved closer
+to the front of the desk.  "Thank-you for your notice and maybe with
+your satisfaction we may be able to join our academy with the
+Blaisaman?"
+
+"Anything is possible!"  exclaimed Orren in a snide voice.
+
+The men didn't understand the tone coming from Orren but they took it
+in stride.  They didn't want anything to anger them this afternoon
+since they were supposed to be intellectuals, not barbarians.
+
+Both knew that it would be difficult to keep their anger subdued but it
+was necessary for the success of their years of planning for the
+take-over of Phoride.
+
+"I would like to know of your educational background!"  Manguino said
+and motioned to both of them to sit down and they did.
+
+"We had many years of study at the Blaisaman in besten and we have
+travelled and studied, in many other places before deciding to come
+here."
+
+Boyce spoke slowly and steadily to the ArchBishop and Orren, trying to
+ensure that each word sank into their minds.
+
+"How long did you travel and how did you come to be in our city?  You
+have not been seen travelling along the known caravan routes and this
+makes us curious."
+
+Orren was the type of man that dove right for the heart of whatever he
+wanted to know.  He could not engage in side-stepping discussions
+because they became dull and took too long to reach the information
+that was desired.
+
+"We have been travelling, fairly extensively for almost ten years now.
+We have been to nearly every part of this continent, always taking
+routes that were not extensively used."  said Lloyd.
+
+"Just as our trip from Besten to your city."  said Boyce.  "We
+travelled as directly south as we could, going through the Dark Forest,
+Sedara and Palatka.  In fact, we were just leaving Palatka when Urre's
+government was toppled!"
+
+Lloyd wasn't pleased with Boyce telling these two evil clerics about
+their taking the passage through the Dark Forest.  He saw the two men's
+expressions when Boyce told them that.
+
+"How very interesting that you survived passing that inhospitable
+forest."  jeered Orren.
+
+"Yes, it was interesting,"  began Boyce.  "but it wasn't as dangerous
+as our avoiding of the Elkinni slavers."
+
+Lloyd felt better now, and more at ease.  Boyce was adding some fantasy
+to the truths that he had told them earlier.  He was satisfied that
+Boyce was handling the situation and so he relaxed more.
+
+There was a shaky silence that rippled through the mood in the room.
+
+All four men had experienced it, and when it came about, Zoro became
+spooked and flew out the window and back to the Blue Mansion.
+
+As it flew back to the Mansion, Empal was coming down, on the
+Kenttitian Eagle, to the clearing in the Joenine Forest.
+
+Zoro swooped up into the air and after displaying some silly-looking
+acrobatics, he soared down to the roof tops of the mansion.
+
+Only Orren saw Zoro fly out.  Boyce an Lloyd were both too busy keeping
+their thoughts in
+
+line while in their hosts' presences, but this effort of their's
+appeared to be to no useful avail.
+
+Orren had come right out to them and told them both about his idea
+behind a prophesy that they had been given.
+
+Manguino sat back and studied the men's expressions but didn't see too
+much that was odd or revealing.
+
+"I must tell you both that we do not like your presence in Phoride.  We
+do not trust you, but in so long as you keep to what you have been
+doing you will be tolerated."
+
+Boyce felt like laughing and he had to ask the cardinal exactly what he
+meant.
+
+"I meant to say, "  Orren replied.  "that you will continue to teach in
+accordance to those rules and methods, as are followed by other
+learning institutions, within our domain.  No personal thoughts or
+opinions concerning the certain 'questionable' topics, will be allowed."
+
+"You two are doing fine as academicians but we do not want to find that
+treason is being discussed at the mansion."  added Manguino.
+
+Boyce and Lloyd said nothing, they just bowed their heads in
+submission, necessary as a sign of protocol.
+
+They stood up and bowed to the ArchBishop and waited for their
+dismissal from his office. Following a few moments of intense glaring
+between themselves, Manguino gave them leave and they left.
+
+Orren walked around to the front of the desk and made his way to the
+window and looked down to the interior of the quadrangles where many
+novices reclined, near the fountain.
+
+"Can you believe their supposed travels?"  Orren asked but more as a
+statement.
+
+"You never know with the human animal, my loyal friend.  Men have lied
+since their
+
+dawning.  There is no such thing as truth, only variations of an
+accepted lie!"  commented Manguino.
+
+"We should have asked how they survived their passage through the Dark
+Forest."  said Orren, then he gave a little laugh.  "Maybe the gremlins
+helped them through."
+
+Whatever the case may be, Orren, I am not certain that they should be
+totally mistrusted.  They do not appear to have a threatening quality
+about them."
+
+"I still believe that we should keep them both under surveillance for a
+while."
+
+"Alright.  Do that, for your own benefit and arrange for me a social
+evening.  I want to celebrate my safety."
+
+Orren wanted to disapprove his request but he knew that Manguino would
+only get someone else to do it for him.
+
+He agreed and left the ArchBishop's presence, to carry though with the
+order.
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY-SIX
+
+When Boyce and Lloyd returned home, Zoro flew down to his master's
+shoulder from the mansion's roof top.
+
+"Zoro!  There you are!"  said Boyce.  He had wondered what had become
+of him, at the cathedral.
+
+They went into the house and soon found Empal waiting for both of them
+in the room that was Brook's viewing den.
+
+He had come in through the underground passage from the Joenine Forest.
+
+"Empal, our dear friend!"  said Boyce, and he and Lloyd shook hands
+with him.
+
+"I'm surprised that the passages, beneath this place are still in very
+good shape."  he said.
+
+"Have you told the alignment to mobilize for its advance on Phoride?"
+asked Lloyd.
+
+"That was why you sent me back there, and I have done your bidding."
+
+"Very good, General!"  praised Boyce.
+
+"I had also brought some things for you.  A gift from Lloyd's father,
+Harvard."  he told them and Lloyd wondered what his father could
+possibly send to him and Boyce from Besten.
+
+Empal opened the passage door and went in, soon coming back into the
+room with two large and heavy looking sacks.
+
+"This is yours, Boyce!"  Empal said handing him one of the large sacks.
+
+Lloyd took the other one when handed to him, and when they opened up
+the sacks, what they found was the beautiful sight of armour.
+
+The armour was of gilded gold, bolted onto sweaters made of woven lead
+and steel, fitting perfectly over the wearer's form, as it was the
+nature for such armour to behave.
+
+Electrophore-laser rifles were in each sack with two energy cells for
+each weapon, and to supplement fighting, arm-length tempered sabres
+were given to them, as well.
+
+Both men received helmets characteristic of their own personalities.
+
+Lloyd had received a helmet made of silver, symbolising steadfast
+loyalty and promise to serve.  it had a low fall to the back and the
+front, covering the forehead was square and moulded into the figure of
+a computer.
+
+Three great spikes jutted along the centre crest of the helmet from the
+frontal section to the hinges of the fall.
+
+Boyce's helmet was also very impressive.  It was perfectly rounded and
+was made of thick gold.  The round front section, that covered half of
+his forehead, had a horizontal, oblong inset of the bluest sapphires
+that could be found and on the top back of his helmet was a cluster of
+three long plumes, of straight blue horse-tail hair.
+
+Each single knot of hair was of a slightly different shade and hue of
+blue, and when the light hit the clusters, they all shimmered like a
+clear waterfall.
+
+"Your father has exquisite taste!"  Boyce said to Lloyd.
+
+Lloyd nodded and Empal continued to help the men to remove a large box
+from each bag, and the men opened them.  Within each box was a shiny
+cross bow.
+
+"These are beautiful!"  sighed Lloyd.
+
+"I wonder if we'll use them?"  asked Boyce.
+
+"Where will you keep these things?"  inquired Empal and Boyce smiled at
+him, raising his finger to the air.
+
+He took from around his neck a key and put it into the slot of the
+cabinet doors and opened them.
+
+The cabinet was empty but Boyce pushed a part of the back panel and the
+inside compartment swung around to reveal the men's maps and hand guns.
+
+Everything was hung on certain hooks and the entire case was beautiful.
+
+Before Boyce was to close the cabinet, Empal took out of Boyce's sack
+one more piece of armour.  It was a body harness with shoulder
+protectors made of gold and long strips of black onyx, resembling
+feathers.
+
+Boyce and Lloyd laughed a little when they saw the beautiful Virunese
+air command epaulette.
+
+Empal wondered why they were laughing at the gift that he had included
+for Boyce.  He was somewhat irritated and insulted by it until he was
+told the reason.
+
+"Black feathers jutting, Lloyd."  Boyce grinned while he spoke.
+
+"I thought of Zoro when I first heard them say it!"  admitted Lloyd.
+
+"I believe that they did, too, but it didn't fit their interpretation.
+That's why they called us to talk to them."  said Boyce.
+
+He put the epaulette-body brace into the cabinet and swung the interior
+around to the empty false front, and he closed the cabinets.
+
+"Later this evening Tucker and his cousin Tellis are flying in two
+eagles for you."  said Empal.  "He will bring them to the back of the
+mansion, on the base of the hill.  No one will see them there or think
+of checking there."
+
+Empal conveyed to them the expectant time of arriving invasion force,
+letting them know that most of the main fighting force would be in
+Phoride within a week, with the second wave being a day behind.
+
+Zoro cawed.  He enjoyed looking at the shiny metals of the armour but
+the discussion that took place afterwards was making him restless.
+
+When Boyce asked Empal to stay for supper, Zoro flew out the den's
+window and flew around Pomperaque for a while until he disappeared.
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY-SEVEN
+
+There was a great dinner party at Halls the next evening.
+
+Orren was against the idea of having it but the ArchBishop apparently
+was very warm for his idea.
+
+It has reached the point for Manguino that his whole days spent with
+Eckma in the act of fornication was beginning to tire him.  He wanted
+an interesting diversion in order to get his life to seem fulfilling
+and exciting once again.
+
+Orren didn't participate.  He went up to the cathedral's spire early
+and watched the sky for hours.
+
+At the height of the gala this evening the urge returned to Manguino
+and he left his higher cardinals to entertain the guests while he took
+Eckma back to their chamber.
+
+When they entered the chamber, disrobed and were just to get into their
+pool, Manguino looked to the window and saw Jessuum Benitar standing
+there.
+
+"Jessuum!"  exclaimed Manguino, walking towards him, still naked.
+
+This was quite disturbing for the prophet but he said nothing about it.
+
+"I thought that I'd never see you again!"  Manguino said to him.
+
+Jessuum looked about the chamber and saw Eckma staring right into his
+face while she stroked the nipple of her left breast.
+
+He looked away from her and turned slightly away from her direction
+while he spoke to the ArchBishop.
+
+"I come to ask if you remember the prophesy that I gave to you, once
+upon a time?"  he asked Manguino.
+
+"Yes, and don't repeat it to me!"  Manguino replied in a hostile voice,
+then continued.  "But, you can tell me something, Seer.  Are the two
+men from Besten, Boyce Loebh and that Lloyd friend of his, part of that
+prophesy?"
+
+"I am not here to inform one someone, or to falsely accuse another."
+answered Jessuum.  "I am here to tell you that you will soon answer for
+your life and for all those things which you have done throughout it.
+Be warned and prepare yourself!"
+
+Manguino began to stomp in anger and he boiled with a fit of temper,
+brought on by Jessuum's strange way of frightening -- by not saying
+very much.
+
+He turned back to Jessuum but Jessuum was gone.  This made the
+ArchBishop even more angry.
+
+"Where'd he go?"  he hollered.
+
+"Out the window!"  Eckma said in an apathetic tone.
+
+Manguino looked about the window and saw nothing but a little bird
+circling around the windows below him.
+
+"That strange man will be the end of me!"  Manguino said, then he
+sprinted back to the pool, jumped in and had his usual violent sex with
+Eckma.
+
+Up in the spire of the cathedral, Orren was staring at the moon and at
+the rest of the sky; and not long after midnight he once again saw the
+Angels of Mons coming towards Pomperaque, from the northern sky.
+
+They were the same four Mons that he saw before but this time they all
+separated and descended upon the streets of the city.
+
+However, the Mons did not ride the streets.  They did, in fact, ride a
+meter above them.
+
+Cardinal Orren was nervous and frightened beyond his reasoning and he
+couldn't sleep.   He spent the remainder of the night in his bed
+chamber reading the scripted words of Jessuum Benitar, to see what more
+he could recover from its cryptic verses.
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY-EIGHT
+
+The week was nearing its end and the invasion force, including the
+intended second wave support, would soon be pouring into the northern
+perimeters of Upper Phoride.
+
+Boyce and his right arm, Lloyd, ran around the mansion and parts of
+Pomperaque wishing all those who were voluntarily enlisted to their
+cause, the greatest of luck and they let them know that the forces
+would be along.
+
+Everyone knew that they would be the advance lines that were to try and
+take Pomperaque, and the rest of Phoride, from within.
+
+They had all noticed a sudden concentration of monastic police, walking
+the streets and securing certain important streets and buildings.
+
+Mingo and bix were worried that those at Halls knew something but Lloyd
+had explained to them the prophesy that the Seer from Mount Benitar had
+given to the ArchBishop and they were becoming lunatics because of it.
+
+"Just relax, men.  They will wait until they see more signs in the sky,
+like there were last night.  They will interpret those as bad omens.
+They expect a takeover that is more supernatural than a take-over made
+by the discontented people of this city."
+
+Lloyd somehow made sense to them and they became calm again and they
+were sent to round up all those who offered their support to Boyce and
+they took them to the underground passage running beneath the Blue
+Mansion.
+
+Lloyd and Boyce had gone to the other side of Bimini Hill, at its base,
+where Tellis was keeping the two eagles calm and happy.
+
+"Beautiful, are they not?"  asked Tellis and the two men nodded with
+admiration and helped to feed the majestic birds.
+
+"I am amazed that men could domestic them!"  Lloyd said in a soft
+exclamation.
+
+"They are fit for kings to fly!"  Tellis looked at Boyce when he said
+that and Boyce was pleased by it.
+
+They made their war up the hill when they were finished with Tellis and
+they didn't go into the mansion right away.
+
+They were silent for the most part, while climbing, but when they came
+to the back of the mansion, where the beautiful garden was, they sat
+down on a warm marble bench and reflected on the past for a while.
+
+"We have gone through much in our lives."  Boyce said as he sighed.
+"Now, the hour approaches.  I hope that I will take Phoride as mine --
+as we had promised my father."
+
+"Those were great years."  agreed Lloyd.  "We learned much, and have
+seen more than the most men see in ten lifetimes."
+
+"That is so, my friend.  What's more, we could never have done it
+without you and your family.  I needed your guidance and you obliged by
+giving me the fullest possible education that you could."
+
+"I had learned just as much through your help, Boyce."  said Lloyd,
+with a degree of modesty that made what Boyce had said before, less
+than fantastic.
+
+As the two men talked so did Orren, at Halls.  He had a private council
+with the high cardinals and he arranged with all of them to bring into
+Pomperaque, the entire monastic army.
+
+It wasn't unusual that all the high cardinals would give their consent
+to Orren's requests.  They, too, had seen the strange signs in the
+skies and each one of them had their own ideas concerning the meaning
+to the Seer's prophesy.
+
+When Manguino found out about the armies being put on a battle alert
+status he was enraged.  He didn't want to have a battle because he
+believed that the city had nothing to fear.  Only he, he thought, had a
+threat on his life and rule.
+
+Jessuum Benitar had told him that he would answer for his actions and
+that he should prepare himself, but in that, there was no indication of
+war.  He had imagined that the ancient Christ would judge him.  That
+was odd since he had kept that ancient religion from the people, as did
+the Canon Di'Vaticanus, from so long ago.
+
+The ArchBishop didn't know what to do and no one could give him advice
+that sounded sane.  His prophet didn't come to him any more and he knew
+that it was his own fault for being lewd towards the only one who could
+possibly help him.
+
+He should've controlled Phoride and his life differently, he now began
+to think.  He thought that he could have had the same power, as he now
+has, if he had half as many people executed and had partaken less in
+his debauchery with whatever women he could invade, under the excuse
+of wanting progeny.  Maybe he cursed himself, and it wasn't Brook's
+curse that produced horrid creatures and idiots as his children.
+
+He wondered if he could save himself if he got to his knees and prayed
+for his forgiveness from the True Living God, which he still didn't
+love or believe in.
+
+He promised to kill no more or crave to look upon or participate in
+sexual obscenities with women and, like a few untold times, with men
+and animals.
+
+He didn't know how to react to Orren himself.  Orren had been rash and
+quick i having all his men take their respective positions in the city,
+but Manguino couldn't tell him why he should not have done it.
+
+Boyce and Lloyd saw the interesting manoeuvres of the Cardinal Orren's
+army, all stationed facing outward from the city, waiting for an attack
+from outside.
+
+There was news from Orren's spies in the north.  The messages stated
+that the Bestenese army had disappeared.
+
+Orren waited for an invasion.
+
+All the activity amused Boyce and Lloyd.  They predicted that the
+monastic army would be called to defense ready alert when the
+ArchBishop's spies informed Halls about the move south by the Northern
+United Alignment forces.  The surprise attack from within the city
+would take Orren's army, totally by surprise.
+
+
+In the evening the ArchBishop called Orren to the office and Orren
+became impatient during their talk.
+
+Orren wanted to go to the spire and watch the skies again, but Manguino
+wanted to talk about himself and his thoughts about the prophesy.
+He came to the office with the prophesy rolled up in a sheet of
+off-white paper.  He had read the words some more this afternoon and
+became angered at the great ArchBishop's naivete of it.
+
+He stormed into the office and just stared at Manguino.
+
+"With the drug that Polis had developed from the old formula,"  said
+Manguino while staring out of the window,  "I thought that I would live
+forever."
+
+He looked at Orren for a moment and thought about the remarkable
+resemblance he had to his father, the late Cardinal Allen.
+
+"I do so love power.  Anything that I wanted I would get, no matter
+what it was!"  he said to Orren, then looked out of the window again.
+
+Orren came closer to him.
+
+"So are the benefits of having no one above you to be afraid of, Your
+Grace."  he told Manguino.
+
+He laughed and with wet eyes he continued to speak in a soft voice
+while he rubbed his groin.
+
+"Power is beautiful.  If I demanded to someone to kiss my scrotum, it
+would be done.  If I commanded someone to rub my refuse over
+themselves, or even to eat my refuse, it would be done."
+
+Manguino's tone of speaking was soft and had a pleasurable quality
+about it, as if the imagery that he was conveying to Orren was
+pleasing to himself.
+
+Orren felt disgusted but tried not to let it show, and he began to
+speak of something other than the fantasies that go with power.
+
+"You do not have to worry about being overrun, Holiness!"  he told
+Manguino.  "My army is out there ready to die for you, if necessary."
+
+"That would be a beautiful sight to see, I think.  I will bless each
+one in paradise when they die."  he muttered.
+
+"My men also fight for the survival of our ways, in Phoride."  Orren
+reminded the ArchBishop that there was more than just he, as a reason
+to fight in Pomperaque.
+
+"There has been a great error on your part, so I believe!"  Orren said.
+
+"I cannot make errors!"  the ArchBishop rebuked him.  "Watch your
+words, Orren.  No matter if you are my most favoured cardinal I will
+have you killed if you continue."
+
+"Have me killed, then!  If you can find someone who will do it!"  Orren
+threatened back to his master.
+
+Manguino was angry, and like a child, he turned his face back to the
+window and pouted as he stared out.
+
+"I have found that the prophesy is clear, and yet we all have sought
+interpretations."  he explained.  "Yours is an error of trust.  You
+have disregarded the two Bestenese and their crow, and you have
+disregarded my vision of the mons, as being omens of our destruction.
+I am prepared for anything, even if you are not!"  he blurted at
+Manguino.
+
+"Prepared!"  Manguino screamed.  "Prepare yourself! -- that's what
+Jessuum Benitar said before my ejaculation!"
+
+"You are behaving as if you are mad, Manguino!"  Orren pointed at him
+as he drew nearer.  "It's not becoming of someone of your greatness."
+
+"Yes, I see that -- and I also see that you are not kind towards me
+while I am troubled about what is being done to me!"
+
+Orren shook the written prophesy in his hand and he returned to a
+steadier and more controlled way of speaking to his master.
+
+"We can only see that which is written but after it happens."    Orren
+sounded as if he understood the prophesy and he wanted to reveal his
+knowledge to Manguino.  "I have read about my vision of the Mons, that
+bird on the stranger's shoulder, your trust of the two men and your
+feast afterwards -- "
+
+" -- What are you talking about?"  Manguino interrupted him.
+
+"I am talking about the prophesy, Your Grace.  It is clearly states and
+no interpretation is needed."
+
+There was a convulsive silence in the room.  It lasted only for a blink
+of an eye, but seemed like an eternity.
+
+"Let me see that, Orren!"  he demanded.
+
+Orren unravelled the document and read aloud from it:
+
+                 "Four elements, ride on high
+                  Come from the greatest fears inside.
+                  All suspicions end with feast
+                  Of gilded skins and threaded beads -- "
+
+
+Manguino began to stomp his feet as he screamed at the top of his
+voice, that carried through every part of Halls, for Orren to stop.
+
+"Stop.  Don't read it!  Don't read it!"
+
+He rushed to him but tripped on the robe that he was wearing over his
+naked body, and Orren skipped to another familiar part of the
+transcript.
+
+                "Black feathers from his shoulders jut
+                 As promised in the Holy verbal blab
+                 Shall come and take his place that day
+                 And rule the city where he once did play."
+
+Manguino raved, screaming to Orren to stop reading the words out loud
+to him.
+
+"Stop it, you fool!  You don't know what you're doing!"
+
+Suddenly there was a silent spell, after Manguino went down on his
+knees and pounded the floor with his fists.
+
+Far in the distance the cawing of Boyce's crow, Zoro, was heard as it
+circled around the city in a frenzy.
+
+Orren helped Manguino to his feet and they went over to the window.
+
+The moon was out and it was full, its light filling in the shadows of
+the buildings made by the city pole lights.
+
+As they watched, red streaks began to etch themselves across the
+surface of the moon.  It looked as if it was bleeding and very soon the
+entire surface was red.
+
+Manguino and Orren both felt ice-cold as they watched the four Angels
+of Mons appear before the moon and ride towards the city.
+
+The sky around the Mons flashed with lightning that was absent of
+thunder, and overhead they saw a great comet slowly pass into the
+horizon.
+
+They fell aback as if hit by a huge boulder.
+
+"What happened?"  cried Manguino as he held on to Orren's arm.
+
+Orren pushed him away and as he got to his feet he felt the floor
+tremble beneath him.
+
+"It was an earthquake, or maybe it wasn't -- I don't know!"  said
+Orren, a little bit irritated by Manguino's effeminate actions.
+
+They thrust their heads out the window and watched the Mons slowly walk
+their horses through the streets.  The horses' clip-clop echoed
+throughout the city, replacing the thunder when the lightning flashed.
+
+Halls shook, but the rest of the city appeared to be calm and oblivious
+to the signs.
+
+"You are truly stupid for reading the manuscript to me.  I have told
+you many times, never read it to me.  I made that a law.  You have
+brought doom to Phoride."
+
+Cardinal Orren listened to the ArchBishop and when he was finished,
+turned to him.
+
+"How you have ruled Phoride for such a time is beyond me, Manguino, but
+if you will, I will take responsibility for whatever befalls this great
+land."  he promised Manguino, then added.  "You go back and practice
+your bestial arts with Eckma, and with whomever else strikes your
+fancy.  I have served you for a long time, and I will continue to serve
+you until one of us dies!"
+
+He huffed towards the office doors before he exited the room and he
+stopped.
+
+"Jessuum should've warned me about you!"  Manguino hollered at Orren.
+
+"You can go fornicate with Jessuum, as well.  He may just give you the
+pleasure that you have been searching for."
+
+Orren slammed the door of the office and Manguino turned his head and
+looked out of the window.
+
+Zoro was flying around squawking his head off while the stars, in the
+dawn sky, began to fade away.
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY-NINE
+
+Something strange had taken place over the last couple of weeks in
+Pomperaque and the rest of Phoride, as well.  Under normal
+circumstances, something like this happening would have been welcomed
+by those at Halls, especially if they were the monastic guards -- the
+police force.
+
+Cardinal Hint, who headed the guards, had made a report to Cardinal
+Orren, that there has been a steady decrease in crime within Phoride
+over the last few weeks.  He added a footnote to that by telling Orren
+that many of the known criminals had disappeared, not to be found
+anywhere in Phoride.
+
+Orren had revealed this observation to Manguino when he went to his
+office to tell him that he should start arming himself.
+
+Manguino listened to Orren, even though Orren was beginning to get on
+his nerves, and he agreed to prepare himself.
+
+"I wouldn't have to do this if you didn't bring on this craziness!"
+the Archbishop said to
+
+Orren, making certain that Orren knew that he would never be forgiven
+for his act of disobedience towards him.
+
+"I had considered these criminals some time ago, when the renovations
+of the Blue Mansion were taking place, and those men used them.  It
+strikes me as odd that these criminals have begun to vanish.  There
+must be a reason for it!"
+
+Orren paced around the office then sat down in the large chair in front
+of the ArchBishop's desk, as he spoke.  He watched the ArchBishop's
+face.  It was a as stern and rugged as he once knew it to be and Orren
+believed that Manguino had accepted what was happening to Phoride and
+himself.
+
+"It's my opinion that we need a show of merciless strength, here in
+Phoride, in order to avert internal rebellion."  Manguino finally said
+to Orren while he stood before him.
+
+Orren looked up at him from the chair and had an expression of deep
+thought.
+
+"How do you suggest we do this, Holiness?"  Orren inquired.  He was
+calm and she still respected Manguino, even though the problem between
+them was severe a few nights ago.
+
+"Those criminals that have not disappeared;  Cardinal Hint's men will
+round them up and take them to the square for execution."  he answered
+Orren.
+
+Orren's expression still showed deep thought and he took a deep breath
+and sighed.
+
+"Do you think that executing those criminals is a good idea?"
+
+"I have had enough people executed to be sure that I am doing rightly
+with this decision."  answered Manguino.  "It's too late, anyway, to
+turn compassionate!"
+
+Orren thought so, too, and he made a little jerky nod and rose to his
+feet.
+
+"I want you to do it, immediately, Cardinal Orren!"
+
+"I had presumed as much, Almighty One!"
+
+Orren exited the office, heading for his own command office near the
+defence room.
+
+He dressed in his command uniform and headed for the defence room where
+some high cardinals and officers waited for him.
+
+His uniform was impressive and frightening.  His helmet was high and
+sickle shaped, that went from the front to the back.  On the crest of
+the helmet, below the sickle, was a small ridge that looked like the
+knots of a rope.  Sticking out from these knots were many barb-like
+pins, about finger length.  It looked menacing when it was on his head
+and especially when he wore his chromium armour with it.
+
+He stepped into the defence room and stood at the front of the room
+beside a large table.
+
+"We have been instructed to take and execute what criminals we can find
+and use this act as a show of our strength.  The Almighty feels that by
+doing this, it will deter any possible rebellion from within the city."
+
+Cardinal Orren stood there, resembling a majestic statue of a demigod,
+waiting for the men that he spoke to, to ask him questions.  To his
+surprise, the men in the room accepted the ArchBishop's suggestion and
+so were not opposed to the performance of the order.
+
+"Seeing that there are no questions or statements to be made, we should
+go ahead with the order, immediately."
+
+Orren left the room and went up to the cathedral's spire and gazed over
+the entire city of Pomperaque, as-well-as some of the surrounding
+countryside.  The beauty of the panorama before him faded within his
+heart.  What he observed was no longer that to which he had become
+accustomed.  Everything looked dark and ominous even with the sun
+shining brightly overhead.
+
+Scores of criminals were rounded-up and chained.  They were herded,
+like cattle to a slaughterhouse, to the town's square.  Many of them
+guessed what was going to happen but they couldn't believe it, and
+yet, there was a remarkable absence of fear within them.
+
+The citizens of Pomperaque were already beginning to gather in the
+square.  They, too, displayed no great fear.  This disturbed Orren to
+his very core.  He was certain the people would be touched by the
+event.  There have been countless executions in Phoride, ordered by the
+ArchBishop, but always there was some semblance of trial.  This time
+all the deaths were to be summary but there was no outcry.
+
+The criminals knew that something unpleasant was about to happen.  They
+realised, immediately, there was no trial.  Nevertheless they remained
+calm and oddly curious to what was about to happen to them.  Not one of
+the criminals -- man or woman -- struggled against the monastic guards
+who were fastening their arms and legs to the shock wall.
+
+Word had finally reached the Blue Mansion and the hundreds of men
+within its underground passages.  Everyone had a friend or relative
+that was about to be killed.  Many felt they could no longer wait with
+their new leaders, to prevent the carnage.
+
+Soon, five of them made their way out through the shorter passage, to
+the south east, to where the sea coves on Canon's Butte hides the exit.
+
+Mingo, Bix and three other men circled around the butte and through the
+back streets on their way to the square.  They merged with the crowd
+forming there then remained in their one place, watching everything
+that was transpiring and waiting for Orren to arrive.
+
+Orren was riding slowly from Halls and could be seen approaching, like
+a demon on a cloud,
+
+his armour glinting ominously with every fall of his horse's hooves.
+
+Boyce was told by Cavander that Mingo, Bix and several others had gone
+to the square.
+
+"They were afraid for their people, my Lord.  They couldn't wait for
+you!"
+
+For a moment, Boyce was angered.  Lloyd, as well, especially when they
+found out that those men had taken with them the new electrophore-laser
+weapons, issued to them.
+
+"I suppose this changes our plans somewhat!"  Lloyd stated.
+
+"It does but we'll have to go with it, now."  Boyce replied as they
+made their way to the viewing den.  "I sent Cavander to keep them from
+using their weapons too soon, in case something goes wrong and helps
+Orren's army to prepare itself for our attack.  I just pray that he
+gets to them quickly."
+
+"That was a wise precaution!"  Lloyd praised Boyce's tactical handling
+of this little inconvenience.
+
+They entered the viewing den and Boyce opened the cabinet and its
+secret space, revealing their treasure of armour and weapons.
+
+They donned their armour and set their weapons in their respective
+holsters.  Their laser rifles were strapped onto their right legs, the
+hand guns on their right hip belts and their sabres were hanging on
+their left side.   They were ready for battle and they quickly made
+their way down tot he rear base of Bimini Hill where Tellis was keeping
+watch on the eagles.
+
+Tellis was not surprised with their requests for him to prepare the
+birds for immediate flight.  He didn't ask any questions or said a
+word.  He did what he was told and he waited for further orders.
+
+The saddle harnesses were quickly but effectively put on the eagles
+and Boyce ordered Tellis to go to the passages and order all those
+inside to attack the army and the guards near the centre of the city.
+
+Tellis ran up the hill and into the mansion.
+
+Orren had arrived at the square and he quietly looked at the people
+while Cardinal Hint and his police, the monastic Guards, were grouping
+the prisoners into fours and lining up two on each side of the shock
+wall.
+
+Motorized freight cars moved near to the square and slaves were brought
+also, to heave the carcasses of the prisoners into the cars for
+shipment to the city incinerators.
+
+Orren straightened up and motioned to the executioners and several
+dozen criminals were killed, each group of four being brutally forced
+in front of the wall, and attached to it, after seeing their friends
+killed.  Yet, even with this, the people in the square did not respond
+with fear.
+
+Orren motioned again and the executioners stopped.  He turned tot he
+people and hollered to them.
+
+"It was a divine order ... every criminal should be executed.  It's an
+example of what will happen to anyone that is disloyal or rebellious to
+the ArchBishop's ways."  he said to them.
+
+Mingo and Bix had tears in their eyes and the three other men moved to
+the back of Orren without being seen.
+
+"Conspiracy and treason will be dealt with harshly, in the same manner
+as you all witness here, today.  There will be no trials and even those
+who are only suspected of wrong doings towards Halls, will be executed."
+
+Rising up behind the Blue Mansion were the two men on their eagles,
+riding on the base of the eagles' necks.  They circled overhead,
+surprisingly unnoticed by those below them, and they were soon joined
+by Zoro, circling with them.  Boyce was pleased to have Zoro near him,
+as luck.
+
+Orren ordered more criminals to be killed and a dozen more men fell
+and were thrown into the freight cars as if they were piles of
+excrement being shovelled into a pit.
+
+There was aloud cry that came from the midst of the crowd and everyone
+turned to it.
+
+"DEATH TO ALL AT HALLS - DAMN THE ARCHBISHOP!!"
+
+The cry was coming from Mingo and he began to fire his
+electrophore-laser towards Orren.
+
+Orren was hit a few times but wasn't hurt, the chromium armour
+protecting him from the blasts.  He was astonished to see that this
+man, who he recognized as the thief, Mingo, possessed that kind of
+weapon.
+
+Soon, several more blasts were heard and Mingo fell dead, along with
+his brother.  The others charged Orren, creaming death-cries, but Orren
+swung his horse around and brandished his sword at them, cutting them
+down, too.
+
+"Get their weapons!"  Orren ordered the nearest guard and the guard
+fetched them, but when he reached the dead men, there were no weapons
+at any one of the five bodies.
+
+"Everyone here will die if those weapons are not recovered!"  he
+threatened.
+
+Above him was heard a ridiculous cawing and Orren looked up to see
+Boyce and Lloyd, in battle dress, gliding down towards him, with that
+wretched crow beside them.
+
+Lloyd screamed down to him.  "Will you die as easily by my hand, as did
+your father?"
+
+Orren's eyes studied the two men's battle garb and he saw Boyce's
+feather-like, black onyx epaulettes.  His attention, however, quickly
+focused upon Lloyd.  An instant hatred overtook him at Lloyd's
+admission of killing the Cardinal Allen, his father.
+
+"You will die, whoever you are and whatever devil had sent you here!"
+
+"It is obvious that you are a progeny of a whore and a mad dog,
+Orren!"  Lloyd screamed down at him.  "Get on your knees before the
+son of Brook Scullion-Blue."  Lloyd yelled to him and pointed at
+Boyce.
+
+A buzz rang through the crowd but it sounded both panicked and somewhat
+pleased.  This caught Orren's attention, immediately.
+
+"I kneel to no man!"  maintained the Cardinal.
+
+"You do when you kiss the ArchBishop's anus!"  Lloyd taunted Orren and
+Zoro cawed in a frenzy.
+
+"You will die, scum!"  declared the Cardinal.
+
+"We will see, little man -- and my name is Lloyd Bartlett!"
+
+When he heard the name, Orren knew that this was the son of Harvard
+Bartlett, and he was indeed the one that killed his father.
+
+Lloyd brought forth the rifle from his leg holster and shot at the
+Cardinal, toppling his horse out from under him and sending him into a
+pile of corpses heaped beside the shock wall.
+
+Orren got to his feet and ordered the guards to shoot them down but,
+Boyce took his eagle and flew to the east, over the butte.
+
+It was a godsend to Boyce that the armies of the alignment had reached
+the Joenine Forest.
+
+The commotion had drawn curious eyes from those religious citizens of
+Gothal.  Lilith had a perfect view of the assembling army and she
+finally caught sight of who she knew to be her beloved husband, with
+Zoro still by his side.
+
+Boyce landed and arranged for a short aerial battle to divert the
+monastic force's attention from the army that would charge into the
+city by surprise.
+
+There was only some dozen eagles for this stage of the attack.  The
+scores of eagles that were to fight were scheduled as the second wave
+that were to arrive tomorrow, but at least the cavalry was only an
+hour away.
+
+Boyce hoped that Halls wouldn't know what hit them even considering the
+strange forewarning that they had for the invasion.
+
+While Boyce was quickly taking charge of the operations from the
+Joenine Forest, Lloyd had flown across the open ocean to find the
+Bestenese navy.  Before long he found them.  The fleet was amassing
+several kilometres to the south east of the Phoridene cost.
+
+He landed on the flag ship and let the fleet commander know that they
+could make their way to Phoride, for a landing and their attack.
+
+He soon made his way back to Pomperaque.
+
+By this time, one of the high cardinals suggested to the ArchBishop
+that Lloyd had not flown out to sea for no reason and that there was
+probably an armada out there, somewhere.
+
+With this suggestion, Orren was ordered t secure the coastline and he
+had one man placed every twenty meters on the southern shore.
+
+If any kind of attack was to come from the sea, these soldiers would
+sink the modes of transportation, while still in the deep, annihilating
+the enemy.
+
+Boyce was flying back towards the city as the sun began to make its way
+towards the far horizon.
+
+Lloyd flew back to Halls and fought, from the air, with a few of the
+monastic guards that were there, keeping the ArchBishop safe.
+
+Manguino was watching the entire show but he felt no real emotion for
+either side.
+
+Cardinal Orren had come back to Halls after the two men flew off.  He
+watched the battle
+
+with Manguino and he was frustrated and furious.
+
+"Look at those stupid fools!"  he said to Manguino about his own
+guards.  "They don't know what to do but die like rats in a burning
+pit."
+
+"I do not worry.  We will be victorious here, as always!"  said
+Manguino, actually believing it.  "I will give each of my men some of
+my godly power and I will fight through them!"
+
+"You do that -- but meanwhile I have to find some way to destroy their
+birds.  Now their cavalry has come in.  We have to regroup without
+their aerial observation of it."  huffed the cardinal.
+
+"Why don't we just shoot the birds?  That shouldn't be too difficult!"
+Manguino suggested.
+
+"Our weapons don't have the range to shoot the birds that high up!"
+
+He sat down for a moment and removed his great helmet and ran his
+fingers though his sweaty hair.
+
+Manguino went to his desk and opened a side of it revealing a hidden
+recess.  He took off a couple support bolts, a huge cross bow, similar
+to those that Boyce and Lloyd possessed.
+
+He took it to the window and aimed at Lloyd's eagle as he soared by,
+and he shot the longest and thickest arrow, right at the bird.
+
+The arrow pierced its way right though the bird and it convulsed in
+mid-air, and began to fall.
+
+Lloyd was caught by surprise for a moment but he glided the bird to the
+road leading up to Halls.
+
+He jumped off the great bird before the bird buried itself into the
+soft earth at the road side and he ran for cover as the guards, station
+above upon the quadrangle wall, shot down at him.
+
+Boyce swooped down from above and wiped out the men from the wall and
+Zoro cawed in victory, directed at Lloyd.
+
+He and Boyce waved back to one another and Lloyd ran to the centre of
+town, followed by Boyce, above him.  By this time the great mass of the
+people that congregated down in the square were embroiled in the
+battle.  Few were fighting on the side of Halls and the square was
+quickly secured.
+
+Orren sent several of Hint's men, mounted on horses, to pursue Boyce.
+Each of them carried a cross bow and they road headlong towards the
+town, after Boyce.
+
+The entire city was nightmarish in appearance.  Like an abstract
+picture, a foggy dream, it was dark out but parts of the horizon was
+purple and orange colour, and it looked like it was aflame with yellow
+and blood red.
+
+The entire sky was filled with birds, most of them white in colour and
+they shimmered when their flapping wings caught the remaining twilight
+and hurled it back towards Phoride, and Pomperaque.
+
+Boyce flew by a tall building and set down on the flat roof of another
+nearby.  He looked over the ghastly empty city and announced his mind
+to it.
+
+"PHORIDENES!  Come out and fight for peace!  Come out and fight for the
+memory of your beloved Brook Scullion-Blue!  Come out and fight, for me
+-- his son!"
+
+He took off from the roof top and quickly rose and swung around the
+tall building again.
+
+Lloyd watched him from an alley near the square and he also saw the
+horsemen with the cross bows.
+
+They dismounted and took a circular position, facing outward and
+upward.  They raised their cross bows into the air and waited for Boyce
+to get closer.
+
+Lloyd took aim with his electrophore and shot them but before they
+fell dead, two of the men let go with their arrows and their arrows
+found their mark.
+
+Boyce's eagle writhed in pain and heaved in the air and Boyce could not
+control it.  The bird collided with the tall building nearby and threw
+Boyce over the rock railing of the building's main balcony.
+
+Lloyd watched it all and soon became extremely worried when Boyce
+didn't show himself, and there was the Cardinal Orren riding to the
+square with five other men, their own electrophores blazing their trail.
+
+
+CHAPTER FORTY
+
+Lloyd was extremely concerned for his friend so he sprinted over to the
+building, to help him.
+
+It was almost totally dark when he reached the building.
+
+Lloyd saw that Orren and the five other horsemen weren't far off, and
+as a matter of fact, were so near that s he climbed up the stairs
+inside the building, he could hear Orren's order to his men, to bring
+him the head of the enemy leader.
+
+Lloyd couldn't let this happen.
+
+He finally made it to the balcony and he peered through the gaps in the
+rock railing as the horsemen dismounted and headed towards the
+entrance, below.
+
+Lloyd couldn't bring Boyce to consciousness.  Boyce had been hurt and
+Lloyd knew that  he was passed out because of the pain.
+
+Boyce's entire left shoulder was bleeding through his armour.
+
+Lloyd had to get Boyce back to the mansion and have him bandaged up
+there.  First, however, he had to make the squad below him less of a
+threat.  He drew his gun, leaned over the railing and started to fire
+down on them.  He managed to kill two of the men but the rest
+retreated with Orren, out of range from Lloyd's weapon.
+
+When they became calmed and after they regrouped, they charged the
+building but then quickly turned and retreated back to Halls.
+
+Lloyd was astounded then he looked up into the dark northern skies
+towards the strange thunderous clapping and searing whistling.  He saw
+a great squadron of Kenttitian Eagles being led by Empal.
+
+The eagles circled the city over the square.
+
+The men controlling them weren't aware of Boyce and Lloyd below them,
+but they did see Orren's squad (or what was left of it), quickly
+withdrawing to the relative safety of Halls.
+
+Some of them attacked Halls and others continued to circle.
+
+This gave Lloyd the perfect opportunity to take his best friend back to
+the Blue Mansion.
+
+Boyce had luckily regained consciousness and got to his feet with
+Lloyd's help.
+
+"I saw you crash into this building."  Lloyd told him, then gently
+touched his shoulder.  "Does it hurt very much?"
+
+Boyce painfully looked into Lloyd's eyes and smiled.
+
+"Just when I laugh ..."  he said, then continued.  " ... what do you
+think?"
+
+They smiled at one another and Lloyd helped Boyce to slowly descend
+the stairs, while he watched out for the enemy.
+
+For further protection he had Boyce keep his helmet on and his gun out.
+
+The thrill of the fight and the accident was still with both men and
+Boyce didn't really feel the pain in his shoulder because of it.
+
+He was sluggish in his movement but he didn't have to be totally held
+up by Lloyd.  All he needed was to be steadied by his friend while they
+rumbled up the road, back towards the Blue Mansion.
+
+They were just about to reach the door of the mansion when there was a
+sudden escalation of fighting centred around Canon's Butte, but slowly
+spreading to the mansion's side of the city.
+
+The Virunese were firing electrophora and lasers down at the monastic
+army that had a regiment of archers that were quickly grouped by Orren
+for the fight against the eagle power.
+
+There was a huge, hot orange colour rising from behind Halls and the
+butte.
+
+Lloyd felt devastated because he knew that the colours could only mean
+the unsuccessful landing of the Bestenese navy.
+
+The great glow of the sky suggested to him that most of the navy was
+burning.
+
+Bursts of laser shot over Halls from the other side.  At least some of
+the force had landed and was engaged in a battle and Lloyd did so wish,
+with all his heart, that his friends from besten would be triumphant.
+
+He helped Boyce into a large room that faced Halls.  The room was being
+used as a hospital, to help those who were severely wounded.
+
+Boyce was cared for by Cavander and it was good news for both him and
+Lloyd.
+
+Boyce wasn't very badly hurt, only having cut up his shoulder like a
+deep scrape.
+
+Cavander told him that he would have to take it easy for a few hours.
+
+Lloyd agreed with Cavander that Boyce should get some sleep, promising
+Boyce that he could handle the situation out there.  Boyce was sure of
+that and subsequently submitted to their request for his rest.
+
+The fighting that was at the butte and the square had now spread to the
+mansion itself.  Several companies of men were inside the mansion, kept
+there on the off chance that the mansion would be subjected to a siege
+and they all readied themselves when they saw that the monastic army
+was steadily moving closer to the building.
+
+The Virunese, on their eagles, were dropping out of the skies, being
+shot down by both electrophoric charges and arrows.
+
+The fighting continued unbroken and soon those within the mansion were
+trying to keep the ArchBishop's armies from getting within reach of the
+doors and windows.
+
+The outside of the building was pitted with holes and cracks, as well
+as burns, caused by the bolts of electrophora and laser heat, from the
+enemy.
+
+From all those men shot down from the sky, Orren had commanded that
+their weapons be taken and used on them.  Soon the two armies were
+closer to equal in their advantage over each other, but Orren's men
+fought harder as if the devil was in each of them.
+
+Boyce slept as he was asked to and he didn't seem aware of the trouble
+that was breaking all around him.
+
+Lloyd had gone through the wall in the viewing den, taking the short
+underground passage to the cove exit, on the shore behind the butte.
+
+He took off his helmet as he looked across the glassy ocean and saw
+that a few ships retreating from battle, while most of them burned on
+the rocks which rose out of the water.
+
+The bodies of dead Bestenese were everywhere, with only a few of the
+bodies being those of the monastic armies.
+
+He noticed that the powerful weapons, made for Boyce's cause, were
+nowhere to be seen, and he had no doubt that the enemy was now using
+them.
+
+He looked up at the evil shape of Halls, reaching to the pitch black
+sky above him.
+
+Monastics were no longer keeping an eye on the shore line.  They
+believed that the Bestenese would never come back to shore for more of
+the same defeat that they had already suffered.
+
+Lloyd was having doubts about seeing those who retreated, coming back
+for another go at out-flanking the ArchBishop.  He didn't blame them,
+though.
+
+He put his helmet back on his head and slowly walked to the base of the
+butte and started to climb the rocks.
+
+The take over of Pomperaque, which both Boyce and Lloyd wanted to
+accomplish with the minimum of blood shed had become a blood bath.
+
+Unknown to Orren's army, half of the Krolalin cavalry was held back
+from the initial battle.  Now, however, under Tucker's capable
+leadership, the cavalry charged through Pomperaque from the north and
+began to annihilate the army that had the Blue Mansion under attack.
+
+Orren retreated, with a few other high cardinals, back to the Halls
+Cathedral.  They were soon followed by monastic lieutenants leading
+their own battalions back to the relative safety of Halls' quadrangle.
+
+The men, fighting from the inside of the Blue Mansion, were relieved to
+see the cavalry because the energy charges that they did have in
+reserve, for their weapons, were all drained of their power during the
+battle around the mansion.
+
+The cavalry spared a few dozen charges for the men within and a small
+celebration was started to express their pleasure at still being
+alive.  Everyone took the opportunity to eat something while the
+retreat armies stayed away planning their next attack phase.
+
+Lloyd had found his way into the Halls Cathedral and trying to keep
+himself from being see, he searched as many rooms as he could, looking
+for manguino or someone that was closest to him.
+
+Tucker had made a decision to attack the Halls Cathedral with the help
+of Empal and what was left of the Virunese air support.
+
+Word was sent to the Bestenese commander of the retreating naval fleet,
+which was comprised of only five ships (from an original compliment of
+fifty), and he agreed to give his landing another try, but farther up
+the shore.
+
+The attack was swift and they caught Halls by surprise.
+
+Tucker's cavalry hit them straight on while Empal's air force struck
+them from above, and the navy hit them from behind after the cliffs on
+the butte's north eastern side.
+
+The battle escalated into a full conflict, and soon, both sides no
+longer had any power left in their energy cells.  This didn't stop the
+battle however.  In fact it spurred the fighting into more of a
+hand-to-hand mode, with swords and supportive cross bows.
+
+As the fighting continued and turned more bloody, the moon began to
+rise over the Joenine Forest, adding a silvery-blue light to the arena
+of fighting, and giving the entire city the look of a necropolis, with
+bands of demons fighting over its control.
+
+Boyce was looking out the window of the hospital room and was wondering
+how Lloyd was doing in battle.
+
+Lloyd was wondering if Boyce was awake and fighting, but soon, this
+wondering left him when he found the largest and most luxurious looking
+bed chamber of those that he'd looked into.
+
+He silently crept into the room, making certain that he wasn't seen,
+and he slowly walked while he cautiously drew his sabre.  He looked
+ominous in his armour and parts of it did scrape and screech with
+every step that he made.
+
+"Come in!"  said a ratty feminine voice.
+
+Eckma was in the chamber with her and Manguino's only living child.
+
+The child was less than a year old and there was nothing physically
+wrong with it, and it acted normally but to Lloyd the child seemed to
+have a presence of evil emanating from it.
+
+It wasn't a weak presence of evil, either.  It was much like the light
+of a candle in a dark void, even seen for miles.
+
+He followed the voice until he passed through some heavy blood-red
+drapes and saw Eckma lying naked on a huge round shaped bed, with the
+child beside her.
+
+Cardinal Polis, the physician, hadn't given her a capsule of the age
+retardant drug, because of his prior commitment to the war.  Now, sores
+were returning to many parts of her body and she picked at them.
+
+Lloyd felt nauseous looking at her doing it and he didn't particularly
+get very excited when she took to stroking the fleshy layers of her
+vagina with her forefinger.
+
+"The stories about you are true ... you are foul looking!"  he said to
+her.
+
+She sat up quickly with anger on her face, only to recline again, with
+a smile.
+
+"Come to my bed, dear warrior.  Let me touch you!"  she called him to
+her and almost unnoticeably spread her legs a little wider.
+
+"Cover yourself, bitch.  Man was not meant to fornicate with animals!"
+
+She still smiled.  She was apparently moved by him.
+
+Besides Manguino, Lloyd is the only other man that she has felt like
+taking into herself.
+
+His toughness and gruff manner towards her made her quiver all over
+with anticipation.
+
+"You can hit me, if you so wish.  You can rape me.  I will not make a
+sound even if you decide to bludgeon me!"  she told him.
+
+"You wretched evil hag.  You sexless bacterial malignancy!   One such
+as you cannot be allowed to live!"
+
+Lloyd grabbed the baby by its leg and cut the baby in half, in front of
+Eckma's eyes.  After he did that, he cut the halves in half and did so
+again.
+
+Eckma was terrified of him now and as he went for her, with his sabre,
+she let out a curdling scream that carried above the battle noise and
+throughout all of Halls.
+
+Eckma became hysterical until Lloyd silenced her similarly to ridding
+the earth of her evil child.
+
+Manguino was watching the battle from his office window and Orren
+called the battle tactics from a balcony, halfway up the side of the
+cathedral.
+
+Both men heard the horrific scream and both of them left their
+positions and quickly went towards Manguino's bed chamber.
+
+Lloyd had entirely hacked up the bodies of Eckma and the child until
+all that was left of them was bloody flesh, severed bones, and pieces
+of internal organs strewn all over the bed.
+
+Manguino and Orren met one another in the long hallway that led to the
+main chamber and they didn't say anything to one another.  They just
+continued on their way until they reached the ArchBishop's room.
+
+They bowled through the door and pushed their way through the curtains
+to where the bed was.
+
+Lloyd, in his beautiful armour turned around when he heard the noise
+and he saw the cardinal dressed in his battle garb and Manguino in his
+robes.
+
+Manguino didn't seem to be overly disturbed seeing that his wife and
+child were mutilated.
+
+"Thank-you!"  Manguino said to Lloyd.  "I was getting tired of her,
+anyway!"
+
+"May the true living God forgive me for murder but evil must be
+destroyed.  In my life I served my God and I served my earthly king and
+friend, Boyce Loebh Scullion-Blue.  In death I shall only serve my
+God!"  stated Lloyd.
+
+"If you will!"  replied Manguino to Lloyd's statement, the looked at
+Orren and pointed his finger at Lloyd.
+
+Orren raised his cross bow at Lloyd.
+
+"The murder of my father, the Cardinal Allen, is avenged."  he said
+then he shot Lloyd.
+
+Lloyd didn't fall though.  He stood straight and firm; his blood
+gushing from where the arrow penetrated his armour, right through to
+his back, and he even spoke.
+
+"Your father's death was its own revenge!"  Lloyd said to Orren, with
+blood spattering from out of his mouth.  "You will not live Orren."
+Lloyd fell to one knee and Orren shot him a second time, nearer the
+heart, but lloyd continued before he fell forward.  "You won't lice in
+the next life!"
+
+While Lloyd lay dead on the floor, in a pool of scarlet that spread
+about him, Orren put another arrow into his cross bow and shot the body
+once more time.
+
+When he did that a surprising shriek was heard and Zoro flew around the
+room three times.
+
+Orren ran after it brandishing his sword, trying to hit it in mid air,
+but Zoro flew out of the window and towards the Mansion.
+
+There was a very long pole that kept a canopy of lace up over the round
+bed, and Orren
+
+pulled it down.  He cut off Lloyd's head, after taking the gallant
+helmet off of the corpse and he shoved the head onto one end of the
+pole.
+
+Orren and a party of men then made their way slowly from Halls to the
+Blue Mansion, carrying the pole with Lloyd's head mounted on it.
+
+The fighting had subsided, and the electric twang of the electrophore
+weapons was no longer heard.  Only far in the background there could be
+heard the tinny sound of hand-to-hand sword fighting.
+
+At the base of the cobbled walkway, leading up to the mansion, some
+twenty meters from the main door, Orren and his men planted the headed
+pole and left it there.
+
+
+CHAPTER FORTY-ONE
+
+The first rays of sunlight illuminated the wisps and billows of smoke
+that rose from the damaged city.  With every passing minute the sun
+rose higher into the morning sky, lighting the pole that was standing
+at the head of the cobble walkway.  Soon, there was enough light to
+reveal the head that was on top of the pole, bringing out of the
+mansion several dozen men including Boyce, carrying his cross bow in
+his left hand.  His left shoulder was in great pain but he was forcing
+himself to make use of it.
+
+He walked out tall and straight, and from somewhere above, Zoro flapped
+his way down onto Boyce's other shoulder.  It made no sound as the men
+slowly walked towards the pole, with Lloyd's head mounted atop it.
+
+There was an odd, colourful aura around the head, probably caused by
+the play of the sun's light, but Boyce believed, with his whole heart,
+that it was God's presence blessing his dead friend.
+
+The sounds of battle started up again in the distance.  Electrophora
+blared and thunderous sounds followed.
+
+Looking in the direction of the battle's origin, which was north, Boyce
+and his men saw laser light being shot into the air, and they knew that
+it could only mean one thing -- the second invasion wave had arrived in
+Pomperaque, as planned.
+
+Boyce fell to his knees and wailed, mourning his fallen friend and
+teacher, while he still held onto his cross bow.
+
+His cries rose above the thunderous clamour of combat that was drawing
+nearer to the city.
+
+The young sovereign finally rose to his feet again and looked at Halls
+with an ultimate contempt that he summoned from his soul.
+
+His eyes had tears in them, and they were red and painful looking.  He
+spat on the ground and took his sabre from its casement and lifted it
+to the air.
+
+Boyce took a few steps passed the head of his dead friend, and in a
+voice that carried through the entire city, he yelled at those in Halls.
+
+"Dirt of the world! -- Fornicators of men and animals! -- Oppressive
+son-of-whores and satyrs! -- Welcomers of saturnine thought! -- You
+foul children of Satan!"  Boyce cussed at them.  "Maybe you all die in
+the most prolonged and torturous pain!"
+
+The fighting stopped as the battalions came upon the centre of the city
+and heard Boyce's booming anger shake all that was around.
+
+Zoro quietly left Boyce's shoulder and then disappeared, unnoticed.
+
+"Prepare yourself for damnation, Manguino.  You will die, Orren!"
+
+Boyce's hollering sounded like a promise, more than it did threatening,
+and he slid his sabre back into its scabbard.
+
+He began to walk towards Halls with the men that came out of the
+mansion with him.
+
+Those coenobites at Halls were all lined up on the wall of the
+quadrangle looking towards Boyce, when he yelled.
+
+Cardinal Orren stood in plain sight and watched Boyce slowly approach
+with his men.
+
+Manguino had listened to Boyce, also, from his office window and he was
+discomfited by it.  He waited for Orren to return to his office.  He
+needed advice on what to do with himself because he could not easily
+think on his own.
+
+Orren waited for Boyce to reach the wall where he stood and he had
+ordered his guards not to fire at him.  He stood on the wall dressed in
+his chromium armour and impressive helmet and he stared at Boyce as he
+stood at the base of the wall in his own majestic armour and helmet.
+
+This was the first time that Orren actually had a good look at this
+man's battle garb.  This time he was certain that he saw on his
+shoulders the black wing-like epaulettes bringing to mind the  'black
+feathers'  line, in Jessuum's prophesy.
+
+"We had known from the beginning,"  said Orren.  "that you were not to
+be trusted!"
+
+He looked at Boyce while he spoke and Boyce had a strange smirk on his
+face when he responded.
+
+"It only means your own downfall, and don't stay under the
+misconception that you will live to see the end of this day!"
+
+Orren laughed at Boyce, pointing at him, at the same instant.
+
+"Your threats will lead you to the same end as your Bestenese friend!"
+said the cardinal.  "It is to our utmost disappointment that the
+ArchBishop didn't let us destroy you when we first suspected you!"
+
+Boyce shook his head in defiance.
+
+"My uncle Manguino has never been very intelligent, and you can cease
+that elitist way of talking because it doesn't become you!"
+
+There was silence for a moment while they exchanged hate-filled glares.
+
+Boyce took a deep breath and called Manguino out to fight.
+
+"Manguino!"  he called then waited.  "Uncle! -- Come and we will settle
+this war's outcome between ourselves!"
+
+There was no answer and Boyce looked at Orren, laughing menacingly at
+him.
+
+"He will not answer you!"  Orren told Boyce.  "He will not fight
+either, and why should he?  He has hundreds of us to fight you for him!"
+
+"Then let me fight each of you until only he remains!"  Boyce said
+provokingly.
+
+Orren shook his head at Boyce and tisked at him.
+
+"Don't you know about the laws of nature, son of Brook?"  he tauntingly
+asked him.  "The strong survive while the weak die!"
+
+" -- And my God's universal law says that  'good shall destroy evil'
+-- so shall I destroy you, and all those who follow you!"
+
+There was silence again, for a brief moment until Boyce yelled to
+Manguino again.
+
+"My uncle, ArchBishop!  Coward of the world and Evil incarnate.
+Come and do battle with me, alone!"
+
+Once more there was no answer from within the cathedral.  This time
+Orren was bothered by it.  The people could not be allowed to see the
+ArchBishop as a coward.  He looked down at Boyce then mentioned to some
+of his high cardinals to come nearer.
+
+Boyce raised his cross bow at Orren, and Orren's men did the same
+directed back at him.
+
+"I will see him, Boyce.  We will speak again within the hour!"
+
+Orren and two of his high cardinals left the wall and Boyce waited for
+Orren to return.
+
+Before Orren went into the cathedral he told his high cardinals to
+watch Boyce from another vantage point in insure that he doesn't attack.
+
+"If he attacks, destroy him!"
+
+The order was plain and simple, but Boyce didn't attack.  Even when his
+men suggested to him that they charge all of them with surprise.
+
+Boyce didn't want to.  He knew that something grave would occur if he
+did something.  Anyway, he had come too far to let stupidity ruin all
+the sacrifices that he and his dead friend had made, in order to regain
+the Blue sovereignty.
+
+Orren entered the ArchBishop's office and saw him standing at the
+window dressed in a purple robe with a scarlet surplice thrown over it.
+
+He didn't say anything for the first while but he eventually glanced
+over at Orren then looked out the window again.
+
+"I wonder what it would be like, to be killed by a relative?"  Manguino
+asked but not looking for any answer.
+
+Nevertheless, Orren moved closer to him and asked a question in the
+same manner.  "How did it feel to kill a relative?"
+
+Manguino grinned and slightly turned to the cardinal.
+
+"I've wondered that for ten years!"  he said to him and he snickered
+under his breath.
+
+Cardinal Orren went over to the window and faced Manguino peering
+through the window.
+
+"You don't want to fight him?"  Orren stated to him.
+
+Manguino just looked at him and whimpered.
+
+"Where can I go, or what's more, when and how?"
+
+Orren thought for a moment then sighed.
+
+"The old place ... the citadel at Tannisea, but you will have to go
+alone and around the southern coast."
+
+"The route to Tannisea is long and dangerous, Orren.  Especially is the
+southern coastal loop is taken."
+
+Orren touched Manguino's shoulder.
+
+"It's either that or you have to fight Boyce!"
+
+"That's quite a choice!"  said Manguino.
+
+"I will take your place while you get along to Tannisea."  said Orren.
+"I'll send you word when to return.  That son of Brook Scullion-Blue
+cannot win."
+
+Manguino took a deep breath and looked out the window again when he
+heard Boyce's voice calling him out to fight.
+
+"Your time is running out, Manguino.  Come fight me or Halls will
+crumble, never to rise again!"
+
+Orren looked out of the window, too.
+
+"I told him, an hour."  said Orren.  "I think that he is trying to
+frighten you!"
+
+"He's his father, all over again."  Manguino stated to Orren then
+leaned his head against the wall by the window.
+
+"Prepare yourself to leave.  When I fight him, all will watch and you
+will be able to get away."
+
+It was strange that Orren was seemingly guiding the ArchBishop's life.
+After all the years that Manguino, as ArchBishop, was the undisputed
+ruler of Phoride, he had fallen to a level of mind that very closely
+resembled that of an idiot.
+
+Orren has really been the one man, who had been controlling Phoride
+since Manguino's marriage and unending fornication with Eckma.
+
+Orren didn't care on way or the other about his idea that the
+ArchBishop's unending years of debauchery and perversion had effected
+his mind.  Whether or not that was true was beside the point, right now.
+
+This god's survival was at stake.  He couldn't let someone like Boyce
+show that he was nothing more than a physical and mental weakling.
+
+Orren helped Manguino pack a survival travel bag and saw him off at his
+personal tunnel that exited, at an isolated cove, on the southern most
+part of Pomperaque.
+
+With good-byes that were neither sad nor elated, the Cardinal Orren
+closed off the passage and went back to the courtyard, in front of the
+chapel.  He was dressed in his same battle armour and before leaving
+the safety of Halls' enclosed quadrangle he instructed his high
+cardinals to destroy Boyce and his men, if he is beaten.  He also told
+them to destroy the entire city of Pomperaque is he doesn't survive the
+combat with Boyce.
+
+Boyce had given Tucker and Empal similar instructions, as well, but
+Boyce's instructions didn't call for the total destruction of his city,
+if he lost against Orren.  His instructions only called for the
+destruction of the Halls Cathedral.
+
+"Let not one stone remain standing on this butte!"  he told them and
+waited until his rival came to him.
+
+He finally heard the heavy gates of the wall clang and screech open.
+
+He watched the huge doors swing inward and soon after they stopped
+moving, he saw his personal rival come out ti fight him.
+
+There was a great disappointment and feeling of being cheated in
+Boyce's heart when he saw that the man he was about to fight was the
+Cardinal Orren instead of the ArchBishop Manguino.
+
+"What's this, Orren?  I had called on Manguino to fight with me." Boyce
+said in anger.
+
+Orren drew nearer, his chromium armour reflecting the morning sun.
+
+He was carrying a cross bow in his left hand and he looked as if he was
+equally matched, weapon-wise, with Boyce.
+
+Many of those watching Orren slowly walking up to Boyce were frightened
+that Boyce would not survive.
+
+Orren looked ominous and indestructible and even though Boyce looked
+like a formidable opponent, his friends were not certain that he would
+be victorious.
+
+"I want Manguino here before me, immediately!"  Boyce demanded and then
+took a few steps towards him.
+
+"As far as you should be concerned, I am the ArchBishop!"  Cardinal
+Orren told him calmly.
+
+Boyce slowly came closer to Orren and he prodded him with his cross
+bow, and with a strangely provoking little smile on his face.
+
+"Am I to take Manguino's cowardice as the surrender of Halls and
+Pomperaque, to me?"
+
+Orren was somewhat disturbed by what Boyce said to him and he pushed
+Boyce's bow away from himself.
+
+"You are out of your mind."  said Orren.  "Halls will never surrender
+to you, or to anyone else.  So long as I live, so long as anyone within
+those walls lives, Halls will not surrender!"
+
+Boyce glared right into Orren's eyes and spoke to him as if he was a
+little boy.
+
+Orren was annoyed by it all but it helped to build his hostility
+towards his young opponent.
+
+"I like watching grown men like you and Manguino throwing little
+tantrums of temper.  What is interesting is that these tantrums affect
+the entire state; where, to relieve your own tension, you have innocent
+men, women and children murdered."
+
+Boyce stopped for a moment, watching Orren's reaction to what he had
+said and saw that he was irritating him.
+
+"You and my uncle put my mansion under siege and yet we left Halls
+alone.  We could've destroyed Halls before this war even began!"
+
+Orren interrupted Boyce's momentum by showing his hostile nature.
+
+"You did have Halls under siege!"  hollered Orren.  "That friend of
+your, that Bestenese, Bartlett ... he had come into Halls and had
+brutally murdered the ArchBishop's wife and son.  That is why I must
+kill you.  I have to avenge their deaths for him as I have avenged the
+death of my father, Cardinal Allen, by killing his murderer!"
+
+He pointed down the road towards the Blue Mansion and the pole with
+Lloyd's head on it.
+
+"You prepare yourself to die, then!"  announced Boyce.  "I have to
+avenge deaths, as well.  I must avenge the deaths of Brook and
+Dearborne and my friend, Lloyd!"
+
+He threw his cross bow to the ground and drew his sabre from its
+scabbard.
+
+"Senseless bloodshed is not the way to fight a war, Cardinal Orren.
+Battle, like this, can be the only way!"
+
+They circled around one another, their eyes locked together in an icy
+stare.
+
+"I take a different view, young Scullion-Blue!"  blurted Orren.
+
+"I know -- so much is the shame!"  replied Boyce just as Orren swung
+his sword down at him.
+
+Boyce caught the attack with his sabre and he spun around deflecting
+Orren's sword out and away from him.
+
+Orren momentarily lost his balance but regained it in time to defend
+himself against Boyce's attack.  They moved around a large area while
+they brandished their blades at one another.
+
+Boyce's men watched-on in worry and with heated excitement, many of
+them twitching and grinding their teeth with each whiz and clang of the
+blades.
+
+The coenobite army watched-on also but they didn't display concern for
+Orren.  Each man's face was expressionless, and they made no movements
+throughout the fight.
+
+"You fight well!"  Orren complimented Boyce.
+
+"Thank-you ..."  Boyce grunted.  " ... and you fight, like a pregnant
+old woman!"
+
+He hurled his sabre horizontally at Orren, but Orren came down on it
+sending the end to the ground and slashed-out at Boyce.
+
+Boyce lurched back in pain.  The armour plating on his chest had a
+large gash in it and blood was spurting out from the cut.
+
+"You will soon die, Boyce.  Be still and I will end it painlessly!'
+Orren offered to him.
+
+They stood there gasping for air, hunched over a little as they just
+stared at one another.
+
+"So long as I have breath, I shall fight you!"  Boyce promised to his
+opponent.
+
+"Suitable!"  Orren agreed.
+
+Orren stepped closer and lunged at Boyce.
+
+Boyce shrank backwards, out of the way and managed to land a blow over
+Orren's back, with his damaged sabre, but all that happened was that
+the blow dented and cracked the armour.  The force of the blow,
+however, was enough to send Orren toppling over.  He landed face down
+and Boyce went over to him.
+
+He stood over Orren for a moment then helped him t his feet only to be
+pushed away by him.
+
+"You are a stupid young man."  Orren commented.  "I would never have
+helped you!"
+
+Boyce, holding his side with one hand, smiled and staggered backwards a
+few steps.  "Yes, I know!"  he added.
+
+Boyce now attacked, brandishing his sabre over and over, rotating it
+fervently and not giving Orren the chance to make a good swing back at
+him.
+
+Orren fell back to the ground several times, and Boyce chopped at him,
+then stepped back.  The rhythm of his movements were monotonous and
+anticipatory, making Orren to constantly step backwards.  It was all
+Orren could do to defend himself.
+
+Then, Boyce stopped and squatted, and glared at him.
+
+Orren slowly made it to his feet, the armour from his own left arm
+totally ripped off of him and the bloody flesh just hanging off of the
+bone.
+
+With great pain Orren forced a smile at Boyce clutching his profusely
+bleeding abdomen.
+
+"You are getting better!"  Orren said to Boyce.  "But why didn't you
+finish me off?"
+
+Boyce smiled.  "I am having too much fun ... besides -- I am giving you
+the chance to live and to surrender!"
+
+Orren shook his head and Boyce knew that he could not reach a
+compromise with Orren.  Now, he had to try his hardest against this man.
+
+Orren felt the same way.  He now realised that Boyce was trained very
+well for this kind of fighting.  It was then that Orren's mind was
+illuminated to all that has occurred up to this moment.  He understood
+the prophesy and he could see the truth behind his killing Lloyd.  Yet,
+he also understood that there was now no turner back or reconciling.
+
+"Be on your guard!"  Orren warned with a hint of affection and
+admiration in his voice.
+
+"And you!"  echoed Boyce.
+
+Orren lunged at Boyce but quickly withdrew as Boyce pitched forward at
+him.
+
+The move momentarily confused Boyce and catching him unaware for an
+instant, but he quickly fell to the ground and rolled forward a few
+times to escape the deadly reel that Orren had followed him with.
+
+Dust flew up from the ground as Orren gouged the earth with his sword,
+again missing Boyce.
+
+Boyce came to his feet slowly and was smiling, and Orren nodded
+complimentarily to him for anticipating his tactic.
+
+They continued to fight and the time passed.  Soon it was an hour
+passed since they had started to fight.
+
+They hadn't said very much after the first hairy tactic that Orren had
+tried on Boyce.  The rest of the time was spent in offensives and
+countering, each man trying to out-think and out-skill the other.
+
+Boyce would wave his sabre at Orren only to change his direction at the
+last second, while aiming at a totally different part of Orren's body.
+
+Orren soon caught on to it and he played the game according to Boyce's
+rules, but both men
+
+were exhausted and weak from a loss of blood.
+
+Boyce's men were extremely worried about him and throughout the hour of
+combat they winced and cringed with each grind on the bashing blades.
+
+Each of the men had scored blows against the other, but none of them
+were of sufficient force to do much else than dent their armour.
+
+Just as those warriors, that were watching, thought that their leader's
+fight neared an end, and an end for Boyce especially, Boyce pushed on
+and disarmed Orren.
+
+He stood there feeling stark naked and he waited for Boyce to run him
+through.  Instead, Boyce slackened his sabre off to one side.
+
+Breathing heavily, Boyce lifted his sabre to Orren and asked him if he
+wanted to continue with bare hands.
+
+"You are mad!" Orren answered him then got to his feet.
+
+Orren was first to charge head-long into Boyce's stomach, the top part
+of his helmet gouging into Boyce's wound.
+
+Boyce grabbed Orren's helmet and twisted it until Orren sank to his
+knees and pulled himself away.  The helmet came off and Boyce threw it
+off to one side.  Boyce then took his own helmet and threw it beside
+Orren's.
+
+Orren looked up at Boyce who was now bowed-over, and while breathing
+heavily he held on to his injury.
+
+"Maybe we should stop now and pick up where we left off, tomorrow!"
+Orren joked.
+
+Boyce shook his head.  "So long as we breath, we fight.  We agreed,
+Orren!"
+
+Boyce ducked as Orren came upon him, and he was sent flying over
+Boyce's back.
+
+Boyce caught Orren's injured arm and pulled on the flesh that hung from
+it.  Orren screamed in his utter agony, rolling on the ground with his
+gauntlet clutching his totally damaged arm.
+
+Boyce was in great pain, too, but he stood on his feet and approached
+Orren, still on the ground.
+
+He was entirely covered in a coat of dust and his face and hair was
+caked with dirt and partially drying, clotted blood.
+
+He was coughing mouthfuls of dust that he had sucked up in his painful
+gasps while rolling around on the ground, and Boyce threw the handful
+of flesh to the ground beside their helmets.
+
+Boyce looked down at Orren, now breathing steadier with cleaner
+mouthfuls of air.
+
+Their eyes welded their gazes together and boyce felt sorry for his
+adversary.  He saw that Orren could not speak from the pain, but he saw
+in his eyes the unmistakeable plea for mercy -- the mercy of being
+totally released from the pain and agony wrought by an injured body,
+and mutilated confidence.
+
+Boyce knelt down and took Orren about the head, embracing him.
+
+"Somehow you seemed to be more different than any of the others at
+Halls!"  he said to Orren.
+
+Boyce then quickly stood up while still holding Orren's head tightly in
+his arms.  He made a very quick jerking motion and spun around
+simultaneously.  By the time Boyce was fully on his feet Orren's neck
+was snapped.
+
+The act was painless and quick, and merciful,  and Orren did not
+struggle while it happened.
+
+Boyce gently lowered Orren's limp body to the ground by his feet.  He
+bowed his head to look at his dead opponent and he preyed to the true
+Living God to forgive both him and Orren for their transgressions in
+life.  He then looked up at their two helmets and at the three birds
+that picked at the flesh that he threw to the ground beside them.
+
+Suddenly, Boyce heard a muffled whistling sound and a cold stabbing
+pain penetrated him from the back.
+
+The high cardinals were carrying through with Orren's final wish, to
+destroy the city and all those who lived therein.
+
+One of the archers shot Boyce through the back with an arrow, from a
+cross bow.
+
+Tucker led a charge of the cathedral forcing the guards to withdraw
+into the chapel itself.
+
+Empal ran to Boyce's limp body and pulled the arrow out, breaking off
+the point.
+
+Cavander soon came along after seeing, from the blue Mansion, that the
+fight between his master and the Cardinal Orren was over.
+
+He helped Empal take Boyce back to the blue Mansion, leaving behind the
+two warriors' battle helmets and swords, and the three birds that
+picked at the flesh that was once part of the living Orren's arm.
+
+
+EPILOGUE:   THE  REVELATION
+
+Lilith had been summoned immediately on that day when Boyce was
+severely injured.  Without hesitation she came to the Blue Mansion with
+Sister Rhonta and together they patched Boyce's critically wounded body.
+
+For a fortnight Lilith stayed by her beloved husband's bedside caring
+for him and praying to the great and true Living God to spare his life.
+
+Rhonta had spent her time also praying, but her prayers weren't all
+taken up with requests for Boyce's recovery.  Her prayers begged for
+forgiveness, for feeling close to a man such as Lloyd, and for feeling
+a deep personal loss with his death.
+
+She prayed for guidance and strength to forget him and soon she only
+prayed for Boyce to heal and be as he was when he was at Gothal.
+
+All of Pomperaque prayed, as did Gothal and the Northern United
+Alignment.
+
+Even Jessuum Benitar, atop his great mountain, kept himself from food
+and sleep for the fortnight, while he prayed to God that Boyce would
+recover from the wicked hardship that he had
+
+experienced since his birth.
+
+Then, one morning, Jessuum saw a great white dove glowing brightly as
+it emerged from the sun, and the beautiful bird was being ridden by a
+small boy.
+
+The little boy on the dove circled Pomperaque three times and an array
+of trumpets were heard echoing throughout the land.
+
+Jessuum sighed with relief and threw himself off of the mountain and
+turned himself into a dove.  He circled the great dove, with the boy on
+its back, and he heard the boy call to him.
+
+"Henceforth, all will be well!"
+
+The dove then soared back to the direction of the sun and disappeared.
+
+That same morning Boyce rose out of bed and woke his loving wife, who
+was asleep at his feet.  They embraced and kissed one another, and
+Boyce wiped the tears of love from Lilith's eyes with his kisses.
+
+When they settled into each other's arms, and all was truly well, word
+was sent out of the Blue Mansion to the rest of the northern continent
+announcing that the sovereign of the entire northern continent was
+alive.
+
+Gifts of homage and loyal praise were sent from all parts of the
+continent to the Blue Mansion.
+
+Pomperaque was not the same as it was during the time of Brook, or of
+the ArchBishop Manguino.  As was instructed, Halls was totally
+destroyed.  Not a rock was left standing on Canon's Butte.
+
+The rise that had been known for centuries as the Canon's Butte, looked
+more like a small, round mountain.
+
+An edict was made to all the citizens of the northern alignment, that
+from the day of Halls' destruction, no more building would ever be
+allowed to take place on the rise of land that now was called, 'Lloyd's
+Hill'.
+
+With the help of his wife Lilith and his trusted friends Empal, Tucker,
+Harvard Bartlett and Cavander, Boyce began a program of building and
+social reforms for the entire continent.
+
+Knowledge was made free to everyone who was interested in learning the
+truths about their past and many citizens did partake of this freedom.
+
+The poor peasant class was taken care of an they all became a new class
+respected farmers that now loved and enjoyed producing food to feed the
+multitude.
+
+Many of the unreasonable taxes were abolished and the citizens were
+permitted to give Boyce's new government whatever they felt they could
+spare for the governing welfare of the entire land.  The people, having
+the freedom of paying taxes, had allowed the land to grow quickly
+through their generous contributions to the government.
+
+The entire continent was transformed into a grandeur that was never
+before heard of, in the history of mankind.
+
+News of this remarkable civilization spread throughout the world, and
+many before unknown nations, sent ambassadors to Pomperaque to
+negotiate a union with them.
+
+Knowledge had made quantum leaps and bounds, and ideas and technologies
+that were once lost were rediscovered and improved upon by a new
+generation of scientists.
+
+That knowledge that was once use for evil and sinful purposes, was put
+to use with only good intents.
+
+The most part of planet Earth had become one of universal love and
+trust.  There was no prejudice between the diverse types of people
+that were the descendants of the survivors of the great world
+holocaust, and all places became lands of having, rather than
+have-nots.  The world economics was engaged to follow an ancient
+scriptural term that suggested that it was better to give, than to
+receive, and the people's prolific giving spread material possessions,
+as well as necessities, to every single individual.  Every living
+person had that which was needed to survive by being given gifts of
+it.
+
+Gifting became proper and there soon came to be a life that became
+happy and alive, rather than miserable and morbid.
+
+One could not tell the difference between the wealthy and the poor
+since everyone lived modestly, but well.
+
+Even Boyce Loebh Scullion-Blue, living in the Blue Mansion lived
+modestly, not selfishly keeping the mansion only to himself, but having
+citizens stay with him for some specified lengths of time, if they so
+wished.
+
+All was peace.  All was love and evil only had control of those few who
+did not accept the new ways.
+
+Truly, a new age of understanding and cooperation had come to man by
+man, and their love for the one victor over damnation.
+
+Jessuum Benitar watched the growth of the world and was pleased and
+excited with the abundance of life and treasure of love an trust.
+
+He went down to Pomperaque because it was his time to speak with Boyce.
+
+He went into the Blue Mansion and found Boyce and his beloved wife
+Lilith, in the viewing den; watching images on the wall, of the ways
+life once was like in the world.
+
+They sat and talked for hours and Jessuum gave to Boyce an account of
+the thousand years that had passed by since man's greatest madness.  He
+told Boyce about his roots and confided to him his own true name and
+relationship to him.
+
+"I was born Gavin Jones, the son of Hosea Jones and his fourth wife,
+Ruth."  he told Boyce.  "You come from the line of Hosea Jones and his
+fifth wife, Margaret, and their daughter Dioneza (twin sister of her
+brother Richal�)."
+
+He described to Boyce his intricate line of descent that reached right
+back into the Twentieth Century through Dioneza's artificial
+insemination with sperm saved from that age.
+
+Boyce was impressed with his seventh generation great uncle Gavin,
+called Jessuum.
+
+Jessuum explained to Boyce that he had been alive since Hosea's time
+and had never aged _ a gift given to him by God, at his birth.
+
+Hours after the story of their relationship, Jessuum finally told him
+that he was here to tell him of something that would make the earth the
+envy of all worlds.
+
+"You have done well, my son!"  Jessuum told him.  "You are good and
+have fought, not for your own gains, but for the gains of the entire
+world."
+
+Boyce listened with anticipation and Lilith was amazed, as if she was
+living through a dream.
+
+"The scriptures have promised that the Son of the true Living God would
+one day return to establish His kingdom of love and happiness.  I am
+here to tell you that the day of His coming is at hand."
+
+Jessuum stopped for a moment and saw Boyce smile a little and give
+Lilith a loving glance.
+
+"What will you do on that day, Boyce?"  Jessuum asked him.
+
+"I am not a god and could never be one.  I would gladly step down from
+my rule to submit to
+
+a way of life as promised through Him.  I will patiently await Him, and
+try to rule my people as best as I an able until that day when He comes
+-- then I will rest."  promised Boyce.
+
+Jessuum shook hands with Boyce and bowed to him.
+
+"You are surely a king among living men and may God bless you with the
+strength to deny evil, a single breath!"
+
+Jessuum walked over to the window and transformed himself into a large
+crow.  Glancing back at Boyce he squawked a few times.
+
+"Zoar-caw,  Zoar-caw!"  his crowing echoed about the room, then he jump
+from the window, to fly back to his mountain.
+
+Boyce had thought that Zoro had been lost, too.  Yet, he was neither
+with him nor gone far from him.  Jessuum's concern had guided him
+through the most demanding times of his life and now he left him to
+rule with Lilith, until the Son of Man returned.
+
+
+Jessuum looked down on Pomperaque, and the world, with tear-filled eyes
+of happiness and contented fulfilment.
+
+"His truly will be a wiser rule!"  Jessuum said to himself then he
+turned into a great bird of light, ascended into the sky and
+disappeared.
+
+
+THE END
+
+
+SCORCHED  EARTH
+
+A Novel
+Written By:  Walter  D.  Petrovic
+(c) Copyright  January 1980 + April 2004
+Committed to MSWord 6,  April 1998
+Approximately  111,591  Words
+WALTER D. PETROVIC
+walter.petovic@3web.net
+
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SCORCHED EARTH***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 13528.txt or 13528.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/1/3/5/2/13528
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+This particular work is one of the few copyrighted individual works
+included with the permission of the copyright holder.  Information on
+the copyright owner for this particular work and the terms of use
+imposed by the copyright holder on this work are set forth at the
+beginning of this work.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's
+eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII,
+compressed (zipped), HTML and others.
+
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over
+the old filename and etext number.  The replaced older file is renamed.
+VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving
+new filenames and etext numbers.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000,
+are filed in directories based on their release date.  If you want to
+download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular
+search system you may utilize the following addresses and just
+download by the etext year.
+
+http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext06
+
+    (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99,
+     98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90)
+
+EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are
+filed in a different way.  The year of a release date is no longer part
+of the directory path.  The path is based on the etext number (which is
+identical to the filename).  The path to the file is made up of single
+digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename.  For
+example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at:
+
+https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234
+
+or filename 24689 would be found at:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689
+
+An alternative method of locating eBooks:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL
+
+*** END: FULL LICENSE ***
diff --git a/old/13528.zip b/old/13528.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..96676a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13528.zip